Strata CTX Programming Manual Ctx100 S 670 Prog

User Manual: Strata ctx100-s ctx100 ctx-670 Programming Manual www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 580

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

726+,%$

Telecommunication Systems Division

Digital Business Telephone Systems

CTX100-S, CTX100 and CTX670
Programming Manual

November 2003

Strata CTX100 and CTX670
General End User Information
The Strata CTX100 or CTX670 Digital Business Telephone System is registered in
accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission’s Rules and Regulations.

FCC Requirements
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established rules which permit the Strata CTX100 or CTX670 system to be connected
directly to the telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone
company—connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be
provided on coin lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the
telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be
determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your
right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications
distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area,
log onto www.toshiba.com/taistsd/locator.htm or call (800) 222-5805 and ask for a
Toshiba Telecom Dealer.
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its
facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the
compatibility or use of the Strata CTX100 or CTX670 system, the telephone company
will notify you in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted
service.
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata CTX100 or CTX670
system to the telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
1. Your telephone number.
2. FCC registration number:
• Strata CTX100 or CTX670 may be configured as a Key, Hybrid or PBX
telephone system. The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent
upon your operation of the system.
• If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may
be registered as a Key telephone system.
• If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial
access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be
registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain
features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
telephone system registration in some areas.
• If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC
registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor
for assistance.
CTX100 Registration Numbers
PBX: CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs
Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems
Key: CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems
CTX670 Registration Numbers
PBX: CJ6MUL-35934-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs
Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35933-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems
Key: CJ6MUL-35932-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems
• Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is
useful to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your
telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is
called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to
one line should not exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices
you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact
your local telephone company to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling
area.

3. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ11/14C,
RJ21/2E/2F/2G/2HX/RJ49C (see Network Requirements in this document). Items
2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
4. Authorized Network Parts: 02LS2/GS2, 02RV2-T/O, OL13C/B, T11/12/31/32M,
04DU9-BN/DN/1SN, 02IS5, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN1ZN

Radio Frequency Interference
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference.
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory.
UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is
subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection
is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and Tie
lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)

Important Notice — Music-On-Hold
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from
the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold
feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee
the Equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

CAUTION!

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.

CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.

Publication Information

Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division,
reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any
reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of
technical arts or to simply change the design of this document.

Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division

Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems
Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in
equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may
warrant.

All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be
reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems—without
express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Strata and SmartMedia are registered trademarks of Toshiba Corporation.
Stratagy is a registered trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their
respective owners.

CTX-MA-PRGRM-VF
4025120
Version F, November 2003

TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC. (“TAIS”)
Telecommunication Systems Division License Agreement

IMPORTANT: THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (“YOU”) AND TAIS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. USE OF ANY
SOFTWARE OR ANY RELATED INFORMATION (COLLECTIVELY, “SOFTWARE”) INSTALLED ON OR SHIPPED WITH A TAIS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE MADE
AVAILABLE TO YOU BY TAIS IN WHATEVER FORM OR MEDIA, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS, UNLESS SEPARATE TERMS ARE PROVIDED BY THE SOFTWARE
SUPPLIER. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO THE LOCATION
FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE RETURN POLICIES. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY TAIS, THIS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED FOR
DISTRIBUTION ONLY TO END-USERS PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1. License Grant. The Software is not sold; it is licensed upon payment of applicable charges. TAIS grants to you a personal, non-transferable and non-exclusive right to use the copy of the Software
provided under this License Agreement. You agree you will not copy the Software except as necessary to use it on one TAIS system at a time at one location. Modifying, translating, renting, copying,
distributing, transferring or assigning all or part of the Software, or any rights granted hereunder, to any other persons and removing any proprietary notices, labels or marks from the Software is strictly
prohibited; You agree violation of such restrictions will cause irreparable harm to TAIS and provide grounds for injunctive relief, without notice, against You or any other person in possession of the Software.
You and any other person whose possession of the software violates this License Agreement shall promptly surrender possession of the Software to TAIS, upon demand. Furthermore, you hereby agree not
to create derivative works based on the Software. TAIS reserves the right to terminate this license and to immediately repossess the software in the event that You or any other person violates this License
Agreement.
2. Intellectual Property. You acknowledge that no title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you. You further acknowledge that title and full ownership rights to the Software will remain
the exclusive property of TAIS and/or its suppliers, and you will not acquire any rights to the Software, except the license expressly set forth above. You will not remove or change any proprietary notices
contained in or on the Software. The Software is protected under US patent, copyright, trade secret, and/or other proprietary laws, as well as international treaties. Any transfer, use, or copying of the
software in violation of the License Agreement constitutes copyright infringement. You are hereby on notice that any transfer, use, or copying of the Software in violation of this License Agreement constitutes
a willful infringement of copyright.
3. No Reverse Engineering. You agree that you will not attempt, and if you employ employees or engage contractors, you will use your best efforts to prevent your employees and contractors from
attempting to reverse compile, reverse engineer, modify, translate or disassemble the Software in whole or in part. Any failure to comply with the above or any other terms and conditions contained herein will
result in the automatic termination of this license and the reversion of the rights granted hereunder back to TAIS.
4. Limited Warranty. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TAIS AND ITS SUPPLIERS
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS, THE WARRANTY OF YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE, AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. NEITHER TAIS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. HOWEVER, TAIS WARRANTS THAT ANY MEDIA ON WHICH THE
SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED IS FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY TO YOU.
5. Limitation Of Liability. TAIS’ ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE AT TAIS’ OPTION REPLACEMENT OF THE MEDIA OR
REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FOR PERSONAL INJURY, LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION/DATA, OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY A THIRD PARTY.
6. State/Jurisdiction Laws. SOME STATES/JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST, OR
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO STATE/JURISDICTION.
7. Export Laws. This License Agreement involves products and/or technical data that may be controlled under the United States Export Administration Regulations and may be subject to the approval of the
United States Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly, in contravention of the United States Export Administration Regulations, or any other applicable law, regulation or
order, is prohibited.
8. Governing Law. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California, United States of America, excluding its conflict of law provisions.
9. United States Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government, its agencies and/or instrumentalities is
subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (October 1988) or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
10. Severability. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way be
affected or impaired.
11. No Waiver. No waiver of any breach of any provision of this License Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any prior, concurrent or subsequent breach of the same or any other provisions hereof, and no
waiver shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of the waiving party.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU
FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TAIS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR
AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618-1697
United States of America
TSD 081601

5932

Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division

Limited Warranty
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., (“TAIS”) warrants that this telephone equipment (except for fuses,
lamps, and other consumables) will, upon delivery by TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer to a retail customer in new
condition, be free from defects in material and workmanship for twenty-four (24) months after delivery. This
warranty is void (a) if the equipment is used under other than normal use and maintenance conditions, (b) if the
equipment is modified or altered, unless the modification or alteration is expressly authorized by TAIS, (c) if the
equipment is subject to abuse, neglect, lightning, electrical fault, or accident, (d) if the equipment is repaired by
someone other than TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer, (e) if the equipment’s serial number is defaced or missing, or
(f) if the equipment is installed or used in combination or in assembly with products not supplied by TAIS and which
are not compatible or are of inferior quality, design, or performance.
The sole obligation of TAIS or Toshiba Corporation under this warranty, or under any other legal obligation with
respect to the equipment, is the repair or replacement by TAIS or its authorized dealer of such defective or missing
parts as are causing the malfunction with new or refurbished parts (at their option). If TAIS or one of its authorized
dealers does not replace or repair such parts, the retail customer’s sole remedy will be a refund of the price charged by
TAIS to its dealers for such parts as are proven to be defective, and which are returned to TAIS through one of its
authorized dealers within the warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever
first occurs.
Under no circumstances will the retail customer or any user or dealer or other person be entitled to any direct, special,
indirect, consequential, or exemplary damages, for breach of contract, tort, or otherwise. Under no circumstances will
any such person be entitled to any sum greater than the purchase price paid for the item of equipment that is
malfunctioning.
To obtain service under this warranty, the retail customer must bring the malfunction of the machine to the attention
of one of TAIS’ authorized dealers within the twenty-four (24) month period and no later than thirty (30) days after
such malfunction, whichever first occurs. Failure to bring the malfunction to the attention of an authorized TAIS
dealer within the prescribed time results in the customer being not entitled to warranty service.
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES FROM EITHER TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS,
INC., OR TOSHIBA CORPORATION WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND FITNESS FOR USE, ARE
EXCLUDED.
No TAIS dealer and no person other than an officer of TAIS may extend or modify this warranty. No such
modification or extension is effective unless it is in writing and signed by the vice president and general manager,
Telecommunication Systems Division.

Contents

Introduction
Organization........................................................................................................................................... xi
Part 1: Getting Started ..................................................................................................................... xi
Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming............................................................................................ xi
Part 3: Telephone Button Programming.........................................................................................xii
Part 4: Appendices..........................................................................................................................xii
Conventions..........................................................................................................................................xiii
Related Documents/Media ................................................................................................................... xiv
General Description....................................................................................................................... xiv
Installation and Maintenance Manual............................................................................................ xiv
User Guides ................................................................................................................................... xiv
Quick Reference Guide ................................................................................................................. xiv
CD-ROMs...................................................................................................................................... xiv

Part 1: Getting Started
Chapter 1 – Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up ..........................................................................2-1
Limitations.....................................................................................................................................2-2
Station and BIOU Auto-programming ..........................................................................................2-2
Station PDN Auto-programming...................................................................................................2-3
CO Line Auto-programming .........................................................................................................2-3
BIPU Settings ................................................................................................................................2-5
CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming ..........................................................2-8
Default Feature Access Codes.......................................................................................................2-9
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements ...........................................................................................2-9
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time .................................................................................................2-9
Review Program Flow .................................................................................................................2-11
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences ................................................................................................2-12
Station Setup................................................................................................................................2-12
Trunk Setup – Analog..................................................................................................................2-12
Trunk Setup – T1.........................................................................................................................2-13
Trunk Setup – ISDN PRI.............................................................................................................2-13
Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................................2-14

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Contents
Chapter 2 – CTX WinAdmin Overview

Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming
Chapter 2 – CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Main Screen .............................................................................................................2-2
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens ..............................................................................................................2-3
Special Buttons ..............................................................................................................................2-5
Table Views...................................................................................................................................2-6

Chapter 3 – Installation
PC Hardware Requirements.................................................................................................................3-1
PC Software Requirements ..................................................................................................................3-1
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software ..........................................................................................3-2
Requirements Not Found...............................................................................................................3-3
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX ................................................................................3-5
Step 2A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX Processor NIC .........................................3-5
Step 2B: Set Up IP Address of CTX NIC .....................................................................................3-7
Step 2C: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC (Windows XP) ...................................3-8
Step 2D: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC (Windows 2000) ................................3-9
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional) .................................................................................3-10
Step 3A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX Modem ..................................................3-10
Step 3B: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem (Windows XP).............................3-11
Step 3C: Verify Modem Hardware Settings................................................................................3-12
Step 3D: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem (Windows 2000)..........................3-13
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX .........................................................................3-14
Manual Dialing to Connect to the CTX Modem .........................................................................3-17
Step 5: Use Profile to Add Users and CTX Systems .......................................................................3-19
User Management........................................................................................................................3-19
Step 6: Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access ..........................................................................3-21
Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access ..................................................................................3-21
Step 7: Exit CTX WinAdmin ...........................................................................................................3-21

Chapter 4 – System
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments.....................................................................................................4-1
Dial Number Plan.................................................................................................................................4-2
102 Flexible Access Codes ..................................................................................................................4-3
Creating New Feature Codes.........................................................................................................4-4
Flexible Numbering Default Settings ............................................................................................4-4
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis ....................................................................................................4-7
103 Class of Service.............................................................................................................................4-8
104 System Timer ..............................................................................................................................4-10
105 System Data ................................................................................................................................4-12
System Call Forward..........................................................................................................................4-15
500 System Call Forward Assignment ........................................................................................4-15
504 System Call Forward Operation Status ................................................................................4-16
System Call Forward Copy.........................................................................................................4-16
System Call Forward Table View ......................................................................................................4-17
501 System Speed Dial ......................................................................................................................4-18
System Speed Dial Table View..........................................................................................................4-19

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Contents
Chapter 5 – Station

Day Night Service ..............................................................................................................................4-19
112 Day/Night Mode Calendar....................................................................................................4-20
106 Day/Night Mode “Type of Day” Mapping Table Assignment.............................................4-20
113 Day/Night Mode Schedule per Tenant Assignment .............................................................4-21
PAD Table..........................................................................................................................................4-22
107 PAD Table Assignment ........................................................................................................4-22
108 PAD Group Assignment.......................................................................................................4-23
114 PAD Conference Assignment...............................................................................................4-24
110 Password .....................................................................................................................................4-25
109 Music on Hold.............................................................................................................................4-26
I/O Device ..........................................................................................................................................4-28
803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments ...................................................................................4-28
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment ..............................................................................4-30
804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup ............................................................................................4-32
115 Advisory Messages .....................................................................................................................4-33
116 Data Initialize ..............................................................................................................................4-34
120 Tenant Data Assignment .............................................................................................................4-35

Chapter 5 – Station
Assignment...........................................................................................................................................5-1
Basic/200 Station Data ..................................................................................................................5-1
Station PDN Selective Copy..........................................................................................................5-6
Station Extended List.....................................................................................................................5-6
204 DKT Parameters .....................................................................................................................5-7
214 DSS Console Assignment.....................................................................................................5-14
Key...............................................................................................................................................5-15
Timer ...........................................................................................................................................5-21
Emergency Ringdown Assignment .............................................................................................5-22
206 Phantom DN................................................................................................................................5-23
209 Hunt Group..................................................................................................................................5-25
218 Station Hunt Assignments ....................................................................................................5-26
Hunt Group Table View.....................................................................................................................5-27
Paging Group .....................................................................................................................................5-28
Paging Group Table View..................................................................................................................5-29
210 Pickup Group ..............................................................................................................................5-30
Pickup Group Table View..................................................................................................................5-30
Multiple Call Group ...........................................................................................................................5-31
Incoming Call to MC Group........................................................................................................5-31
MCPN Owner Privileges .............................................................................................................5-31
Member Requirements ................................................................................................................5-31
Call Forward Activation ..............................................................................................................5-32
517 Multiple Call Group Assignment .........................................................................................5-32
518 Multiple Calling Members Assignment ...............................................................................5-33
516 Station Speed Dial.......................................................................................................................5-34
Station Speed Dial Table View ..........................................................................................................5-35
PDN Table View ................................................................................................................................5-36
ISDN ..................................................................................................................................................5-36
202 ISDN BRI Station.................................................................................................................5-36
217 ISDN Station Data ................................................................................................................5-40

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

iii

Contents
Chapter 6 – Trunks

Setup Wizards ....................................................................................................................................5-41
PDN Range Setup Wizard ...........................................................................................................5-41
Multiple DN Assignment Wizard................................................................................................5-42
VMID Range ...............................................................................................................................5-44

Chapter 6 – Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group....................................................................................................................6-1
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment .........................................................................................6-2
306 Outgoing Line Groups...................................................................................................................6-4
300 Trunk Assignment.........................................................................................................................6-6
313 Caller ID .................................................................................................................................6-8
308 Trunk Timer............................................................................................................................6-9
310 DIT Assignment ...................................................................................................................6-11
309 Direct Inward Dialing .................................................................................................................6-13
318 DID Intercept Assignments.........................................................................................................6-16
Service................................................................................................................................................6-19
311 DISA Security Code .............................................................................................................6-19
319 Intercept Treatment...............................................................................................................6-19
315 T1 Trunk Card.............................................................................................................................6-20
DID/DNIS Table View ......................................................................................................................6-21
ISDN ..................................................................................................................................................6-21
317 ISDN BRI Trunk ..................................................................................................................6-21
302 PRI and IP QSIG ..................................................................................................................6-25
Call-by-Call .................................................................................................................................6-29
320 B Channel .............................................................................................................................6-31
316 Shared D Channel.................................................................................................................6-32
Calling Number ...........................................................................................................................6-33
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard.........................................................................................................6-35

Chapter 7 – Attendant
404 Attendant Group Assignment........................................................................................................7-1
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment .....................................................................................7-3

Chapter 8 – IP Telephone Programming
150 System IP Data Assignment..........................................................................................................8-1
151 BIPU Configuration ......................................................................................................................8-4
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment............................................................................8-5
250 IPT Data Assignment ....................................................................................................................8-7
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update.......................................................................................................8-9
FTP Server Information.................................................................................................................8-9
BIPU Program Update.................................................................................................................8-10
IPT Program Update....................................................................................................................8-11

Chapter 9 – Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment ....................................................................................................................9-1
Maximum Pilot DNs......................................................................................................................9-1
579 System Voice Mail Data.........................................................................................................9-2
580 Voice Mail Port Data..............................................................................................................9-4

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Contents
Chapter 9 – Services

Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing.........................................................................................9-6
DR Overview.................................................................................................................................9-6
Destination Restriction Guide Page ...................................................................................................9-10
DR Dialing Setup.........................................................................................................................9-10
DR Digit Table Setup ..................................................................................................................9-12
DR Class of Service Setup...........................................................................................................9-12
LCR Overview ...................................................................................................................................9-15
LCR Analysis Process .................................................................................................................9-15
DR................................................................................................................................................9-15
Route Analysis.............................................................................................................................9-16
Time of Day.................................................................................................................................9-16
Connection...................................................................................................................................9-16
LCR Guide Page ................................................................................................................................9-16
LCR Dialing Setup ......................................................................................................................9-17
LCR Route Plan Setup.................................................................................................................9-18
LCR Day of Week and Time Zone Setup....................................................................................9-21
LCR COS and Station Setup .......................................................................................................9-22
LCR/DR .............................................................................................................................................9-23
LCR Assignment .........................................................................................................................9-23
Route Define................................................................................................................................9-25
Route Schedule ............................................................................................................................9-27
Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones........................................................................................9-29
LCR/DR Screening......................................................................................................................9-30
Destination Restriction ................................................................................................................9-32
DRL Table View .........................................................................................................................9-34
Centrex/PBX Screening Table View...........................................................................................9-34
Account Codes.............................................................................................................................9-35
509 DR Override by System Speed Dial .....................................................................................9-37
510 COS Override Assignment ...................................................................................................9-38
Networking.........................................................................................................................................9-39
Strata Net Private Networking.....................................................................................................9-39
QSIG............................................................................................................................................9-39
Node ID .......................................................................................................................................9-39
Network Directory Number.........................................................................................................9-40
Network Feature Access Code ....................................................................................................9-40
Digit Manipulation ......................................................................................................................9-41
Traveling Class Mark ..................................................................................................................9-41
Path Replacement ........................................................................................................................9-41
Coordinated Numbering Plan ......................................................................................................9-42
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ...............................................................................9-42
Centralized Voice Mail................................................................................................................9-43
Centralized Attendant ..................................................................................................................9-43
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher).........................................................................9-44
Network Attendant Console BLF ................................................................................................9-45
Network DSS/BLF for Digital Telephones .................................................................................9-48
Network DSS (R1.3 and higher)..................................................................................................9-50
Network Feature Content ...................................................................................................................9-52

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Contents
Chapter 10 – Operation

Configuration .....................................................................................................................................9-53
RPTU2 PCB ................................................................................................................................9-53
Circuits.........................................................................................................................................9-53
Strata Net Programming Overview....................................................................................................9-53
656 Node ID Assignment...................................................................................................................9-54
670 Remote Node Data Assignment ..................................................................................................9-55
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis ....................................................................................................9-56
Private Route Choice Definition ........................................................................................................9-56
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment.........................................................................9-57
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment.......................................................9-57
Mapping .............................................................................................................................................9-58
657 Network COS Mapping Table..............................................................................................9-58
658/659/660 Network DRL/FRL/QPL Mapping Tables.............................................................9-59
661 Network DN Table Assignment..................................................................................................9-59
219 Network DSS Notify Data Delete ...............................................................................................9-60
Strata Net QSIG Over IP....................................................................................................................9-61
671 IP Address Convert Table.....................................................................................................9-61
672 Node ID Detail Information .................................................................................................9-62
Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................................9-64
External Devices ................................................................................................................................9-68
Door Phones ................................................................................................................................9-68
515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments..............................................................................9-72
503 Paging Devices Group Assignments ....................................................................................9-73
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group........................................................................................9-74

Chapter 10 – Operation
System Setup......................................................................................................................................10-1
900 CTX Restart..........................................................................................................................10-2
901 Display Version ....................................................................................................................10-3
902 Set Time and Date ................................................................................................................10-3
915 Regional Selection................................................................................................................10-4
908 SmartMedia .................................................................................................................................10-4
SmartMedia Card.........................................................................................................................10-4
CTX SmartMedia Folders ...........................................................................................................10-6
SmartMedia Errors ......................................................................................................................10-7
911 Remote Program Update .............................................................................................................10-7
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................10-7
CTX Software Update Files ........................................................................................................10-7
CTX Software Identification .......................................................................................................10-7
910 Data Backup ..............................................................................................................................10-13
916 IP Configuration........................................................................................................................10-14
FTP User Accounts ..........................................................................................................................10-15
File Information ...............................................................................................................................10-16
Community Name ............................................................................................................................10-17
909 MAC Address............................................................................................................................10-18
Trap Destinations .............................................................................................................................10-19
License Control ................................................................................................................................10-20
License Issue..............................................................................................................................10-20
License Activate ........................................................................................................................10-21
License Information .........................................................................................................................10-21

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Contents
Chapter 11 – Maintenance

Chapter 11 – Maintenance
Quality Of Service..............................................................................................................................11-1
Trace Function ...................................................................................................................................11-1
Trace Data....................................................................................................................................11-1
Event Trace Control ...........................................................................................................................11-3
903 Start/Stop Trace ....................................................................................................................11-3
904 ISDN Trace Location............................................................................................................11-4
905 All ISDN Trunk Trace Selection ..........................................................................................11-4
906 Change Trace Side................................................................................................................11-4
Error Alarm Log.................................................................................................................................11-5
907 System Admin Log .....................................................................................................................11-6
Memory Access Operation.................................................................................................................11-6
Components........................................................................................................................................11-7

Chapter 12 – Tools and Profile
Tools...................................................................................................................................................12-1
Download.....................................................................................................................................12-1
Profile.................................................................................................................................................12-2
Customize ....................................................................................................................................12-2
User Management........................................................................................................................12-2

Part 3: Telephone Button Programming
Chapter 13 – Telephone Button Programming
Record Sheet Overview......................................................................................................................13-1
Telephone Button Overview ..............................................................................................................13-2
Telephone Button Commands .....................................................................................................13-3
Button Programming Examples .........................................................................................................13-5
Program 100 ................................................................................................................................13-5
Program 200 ................................................................................................................................13-5
Program 204 ................................................................................................................................13-6
Program 205 ................................................................................................................................13-6
Program 208 ................................................................................................................................13-6
Button Programming Procedure.........................................................................................................13-7
100 Series Programs ........................................................................................................................13-11
200 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-28
300 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-52
400 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-73
500 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-74
600 Series Programs ........................................................................................................................13-91
800 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-94
900 Series Programs.........................................................................................................................13-96
System Initialize ........................................................................................................................13-96
Display Version .........................................................................................................................13-97
Set Time and Date .....................................................................................................................13-99
ISDN Trace Location...............................................................................................................13-101
All ISDN Trunk Trace.............................................................................................................13-102
Event Trace Side Change ........................................................................................................13-102

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

vii

Contents
Chapter 14 – Maintenance

System Admin Log..................................................................................................................13-103
Format/Unmount SmartMedia.................................................................................................13-103
MAC Address (System Serial Number) ..................................................................................13-105
Data Backup ............................................................................................................................13-105
Program Update.......................................................................................................................13-106
Make Busy Control..................................................................................................................13-107
Regional Selection...................................................................................................................13-109
IP Configuration ......................................................................................................................13-110

Chapter 14 – Maintenance
Data Backup .......................................................................................................................................14-1
Backup Progress and Completion Indicators...............................................................................14-1
Restoring Programmed Data ..............................................................................................................14-2
Local Update ......................................................................................................................................14-2
Prerequisites for CTX100 and CTX670 Local Update ...............................................................14-2
CTX Software Update Files ........................................................................................................14-2
CTX Software Identification .......................................................................................................14-2
Strata CTX100 Local Update ......................................................................................................14-4
Strata CTX670 Local Update ......................................................................................................14-6
Trace Function ...................................................................................................................................14-8

Part 4: Appendices
Appendix A – Applications, Tips and Tricks
Voice Mail Set Up............................................................................................................................... A-1
Analog Ports ................................................................................................................................. A-1
Digital Ports.................................................................................................................................. A-2
Telephone Station Ports................................................................................................................ A-2
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems .........................................................................................A-3
Call Record and Soft Keys ........................................................................................................... A-3
Strata CTX BRI Video Conferencing Programming .......................................................................... A-5
CTX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines ..................................................................................... A-6
Basic CTX IP Setup Using WinAdmin ........................................................................................A-6
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection setup ........................................................... A-7
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings.......................................................................................... A-7
IPT-to-IP Network Connection Instructions................................................................................. A-8
Viewing IPT1020-SD Terminal Information .............................................................................A-10
Initializing the IPT1020-SD (Optional)......................................................................................A-10
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming ..................................................................... A-11
General QoS Adjustments .......................................................................................................... A-11
Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines..................................................................................... A-13
Example ...................................................................................................................................... A-13
Echo Cancellation and Volume Level Adjustments ......................................................................... A-15
Dealing with Echo Problems in General .................................................................................... A-15
Echo Caused by Older CTX Analog PCBs ................................................................................ A-15
Echo Reduction Adjustments .....................................................................................................A-15
Setting the IPT1020-SD Headset Transmit Volume .................................................................. A-16

viii

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Contents
Appendix B – System Error Codes

Appendix B – System Error Codes
Common Error Code Table .................................................................................................................B-1
System Programming Error Codes......................................................................................................B-2
Station Programming Error Codes ......................................................................................................B-5
Trunk Programming Error Codes......................................................................................................B-13
Attendant Position Programming Error Codes..................................................................................B-20
Service Programming Error Codes....................................................................................................B-21
Networking Programming Error Codes ............................................................................................B-26
Equipment Programming Error Codes ..............................................................................................B-27

Appendix C – Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX .....................................................................................................................C-1
Strata CTX to Strata DK ...................................................................................................................C-15

Appendix D – Record Sheets
System .................................................................................................................................................D-1
Card Assignment Record Sheets...................................................................................................D-1
Card Assignment Record Sheet – Strata CTX 100.......................................................................D-3
COS Record Sheet ........................................................................................................................D-4
System Data Record Sheet............................................................................................................D-5
System Call Forward Record Sheets ............................................................................................D-6
System Speed Dial Record Sheet..................................................................................................D-7
Day/Night Mode Record Sheet.....................................................................................................D-8
SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments ...........................................................................................D-9
BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup...................................................................................................D-10
Station................................................................................................................................................D-11
Basic Station Record Sheets .......................................................................................................D-11
DKT Parameters Record Sheet ...................................................................................................D-12
Feature Button Record Sheet .....................................................................................................D-13
Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button Telephones ............................................................D-14
Record Sheets for the DKT3014.................................................................................................D-15
Phantom DN Record Sheet .........................................................................................................D-16
Hunt Group Record Sheet...........................................................................................................D-17
Station Data Record Sheets.........................................................................................................D-18
ISDN BRI Station Record Sheets ...............................................................................................D-19
ISDN Station Data Record Sheet................................................................................................D-20
Trunks................................................................................................................................................D-21
ILG Record Sheet .......................................................................................................................D-21
OLG Record Sheet......................................................................................................................D-22
Trunk Assignment Record Sheet ................................................................................................D-23
Caller ID Assignment Record Sheet ...........................................................................................D-24
DID Assignment Record Sheet...................................................................................................D-25
DID Intercept Assignment Record Sheet....................................................................................D-26
Trunk Timer/DIT Record Sheet..................................................................................................D-27
ISDN BRI Record Sheet .............................................................................................................D-28
PRI Trunks Record Sheet ...........................................................................................................D-29
Call-by-Call Record Sheet ..........................................................................................................D-30
B Channel Select Record Sheet ..................................................................................................D-31
Shared D Channel Record Sheet.................................................................................................D-32
Calling Number Record Sheets...................................................................................................D-33

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Contents
Appendix E – Software and Firmware Updates

Attendant........................................................................................................................................... D-34
Attendant Group Record Sheet .................................................................................................. D-34
IP Telephone Programming.............................................................................................................. D-35
System IP Data Assignment....................................................................................................... D-35
Station IP Data Assignment ....................................................................................................... D-36
Services............................................................................................................................................. D-37
Pilot DN Assignment Record Sheet........................................................................................... D-37
System Voice Mail Record Sheet .............................................................................................. D-38
Voice Mail Port Data Record Sheet ........................................................................................... D-39
Routing Definition Record Sheets ............................................................................................. D-40
Route Schedule Record Sheets................................................................................................... D-41
LCR Assignment Record Sheets................................................................................................ D-42
LCR Time Zone Record Sheets ................................................................................................. D-43
DR LCR Screening Record Sheet .............................................................................................. D-44
DR Record Sheets ...................................................................................................................... D-45
COS Override Code Record Sheet............................................................................................. D-46
Node ID Assignment Record Sheet ........................................................................................... D-47
Private Routing Plan Analysis Table Record Sheet................................................................... D-48
Route Choice Definition Record Sheet ...................................................................................... D-49
Network Mapping Record Sheets .............................................................................................. D-50
Call History Record Sheet.......................................................................................................... D-51
Behind Centrex Assignment Record Sheet ................................................................................ D-52
Door Phone Assignment Record Sheet ...................................................................................... D-53
Paging Device Group Assignment Record Sheet....................................................................... D-54
Emergency Call Group Assignment Record Sheet .................................................................... D-55

Appendix E – Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures..............................................................................E-1
Method 1: Update from CTX SmartMedia Card ...............................................................................E-1
Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................................E-1
BIPU Update .................................................................................................................................E-2
IP Telephone Update....................................................................................................................E-3
Method 2: Update From a FTP Directory on the WinAdmin PC ......................................................E-4
Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................................E-4
BIPU Update .................................................................................................................................E-5
IP Telephone Update.....................................................................................................................E-6
Method 3: Update from an External FTP Server ...............................................................................E-7
Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................................E-7
BIPU Update .................................................................................................................................E-7
IP Telephone Update.....................................................................................................................E-8

Index ..................................................................................................................................................... IN-1

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Introduction

This manual provides information required to program the Strata CTX100-S, CTX100 and
CTX670 business telephone systems using Toshiba’s CTX WinAdmin™ software or Button
Programming.
Important!

Whenever the CTX100 is mentioned in this book, it applies to both the CTX100-S
and CTX100, unless specified otherwise.
This programming manual only applies to CTX WinAdmin version 2.20G. If you
have CTX WinAdmin versions 2.1D or lower, refer to previous versions of this
manual.

Note The features described in this document assume that the Strata CTX system has the current

software release installed. At the time of printing, Strata CTX R2.2 and CTX WinAdmin
R2.20 are the most current versions.

Organization
Part 1: Getting Started
Chapter 1 - Programming Guidelines describes auto-recognition features, order of
programming, and overview of general CTX WinAdmin and Button Programming operation.

Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming
Chapter 2 – CTX WinAdmin Overview provides general information about CTX WinAdmin’s
software capabilities.
Chapter 3 – Installation discusses system hardware and software requirements for
CTX WinAdmin and includes the installation steps needed to install CTX WinAdmin.
Chapter 4 – System provides system programming information.
Chapter 5 – Station discusses station and station feature programming.
Chapter 6 – Trunks explains trunk programming information including T1, ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
Chapter 7 – Attendant describes Attendant Console support and settings available in
CTX WinAdmin.
Chapter 8 – IP Telephone describes the programs required to program IP Telephone features.

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Introduction
Organization

Chapter 9 – Services discusses programming of services available to Strata CTX through
CTX WinAdmin.
Chapter 10 – Operation explains system setup options available to CTX WinAdmin users.
System initialization, SmartMedia formatting, system software upgrades and Internet Protocol (IP)
configuration are among the topics discussed.
Chapter 11 – Maintenance provides system and component trace program information.
CTX WinAdmin Configuration and Flash Memory Testing are also described.
Chapter 12 – Tools and Profile discusses Strata CTX Tools and Utilities to help manage your
Strata CTX System more efficiently.

Part 3: Telephone Button Programming
Chapter 13 – Telephone Button Programming discusses the button programming interface
provided with Strata CTX.
Chapter 14 – Maintenance Procedures provides Strata CTX maintenance procedures that can be
activated from the programming telephone.

Part 4: Appendices
Appendix A – Applications, Tips and Tricks gives information on using multiple programs to
set up a feature.
Appendix B – System Error Codes is a reference for error codes encountered while
programming the Strata CTX.
Appendix C – Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference provides cross-reference tables that
compare Strata CTX and Strata DK programs that are similar in function.
Appendix D – Record Sheets contains all the record sheets required to program the Strata CTX.
Appendix E – Software and Firmware Updates contains IP Telephone and BIPU Firmware
update procedures.

xii

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

Introduction
Conventions

Conventions
Conventions

Description

Note

Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some
tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply
to specific items.

Important!

Calls attention to important instructions or information.

CAUTION!

Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be
damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.

WARNING!

Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death.

[DN]

Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension
or intercom number.

[PDN]

Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension
number for the telephone).

[SDN]

Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears
on another telephone is considered an SDN.

[PhDN]

Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).

$ULDO%ROG

Courier

Represents telephone buttons.
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.

“Type”

Indicates entry of a string of text.

“Press”

Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press
Enter.

Plus (+)

Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without
spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example:
Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential
entry.
Example: # + 5.

Tilde (~)

Means “through.” Example: 350~640 Hz frequency range.

➤

Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.

➤

Denotes a procedure.

Start > Settings >
Printers

Denotes a progression of buttons and/or menu options on the screen you
should select.

See Figure 10

Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the
electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet
download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

xiii

Introduction
Related Documents/Media

Related Documents/Media
Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM or in print.

To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on
the back of the document’s title page.

General Description
• Strata CTX General Description

Installation and Maintenance Manual
• Strata CTX Installation and Maintenance

User Guides
• Strata CTX DKT/IPT Telephone
• Strata CTX DKT3001/2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
• Strata CTX Standard Telephone
• Strata CTX DKT2204-CT/DKT2304-CT Cordless Telephone

Quick Reference Guide
• Strata CTX DKT/IPT Telephone

CD-ROMs
• Strata CTX WinAdmin Application Software and CTX/DK/Partner Products Documentation
Library
• Strata CTX Call Center Solutions Application Software and Documentation Library (includes
Strata CTX ACD software and documentation, Net Server software and documentation, and
Voice Assistant software and documentation.
• OAISYS (includes software and documentation of OAISYS Chat, Call Router, and Net Phone)
For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all current Strata CTX
documentation and enables you to view, print and download current publications.

xiv

Strata CTX Programming 11/03

726+,%$

Telecommunication Systems Division

Digital Business Telephone Systems

Part 1: Getting Started

November 2003

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines

1
Strata CTX
Programming

This chapter discusses Strata CTX programming basics and guides you through initial setup procedures. It
also describes auto-recognition features, order of programming, and overview of general CTX WinAdmin
and Button Programming operations. Programming sequence tables are provided to streamline your
programming tasks.

Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to
Start Up
This feature reduces the programming time to install Strata CTX systems. The Strata CTX system will
automatically program specific default data in a number of programs based on the PCBs that are installed
in the system before processor initialization. The default data and procedure for auto-programming is
provided in this section.
1. Install all line, station and optional PCBs that should be recognized for auto programming.
2. Power-on the system and initialize auto-programming for the system (Program 900, Level 1).
3. Verify “Station and BIOU Auto-programming” on page 1-2.
4. Verify “Station PDN Auto-programming” on page 1-3.
5. Verify “CO Line Auto-programming” on page 1-3.
6. Verify “CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming” on page 1-8.
Notes

•

The type of PCB, its cabinet and slot position are automatically recognized upon system initialization;
or, when powering the CTX processor for the first time.

•

Each installed PCB circuit equipment number is set in numerical order based on the cabinet and slot
position of the PCB.

•

Station Primary Directory Numbers (PDN) and CO line numbers are set in numerical order according
to their equipment cabinet/slot positions.

•

Other default data, such as the Strata CTX LAN and modem interface IP address, station and line class
of service, outgoing and incoming line groups, etc., are automatically set for the optional hardware
originally installed.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

1-1

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Limitations
The following are the limitations of Strata CTX auto-programming.
• CTI programs are not programmed automatically.
• Strata CTX cannot configure unique LAN requirements automatically. Strata CTX’s LAN system data,
CTX IP address and Community Name are set to a default.
Note DND is only assigned on 20-button telephones.

• When the system is initialized, it takes a few minutes to recognize the mounted hardware.
• The Primary DN on the first button and DND on the last button are assigned telephone buttons; all other
buttons are not assigned automatically.
• Slot 101 must always have a BDKU, ADKU or PDKU. The BDKU is assigned if no PCB is installed.

Station and BIOU Auto-programming
Table 1-1 shows the Station and BIOU PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during autoprogramming.
Note No special assignments are set for BIOU during auto-programming.
Important!

Table 1-1
PCB Code

PCBs must be installed per the rules in the Strata CTX I&M manual, Configuration Chapter,
Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.

Auto-Programming for Station and BIOU PCB Recognition (Program 100)
PCB Name

000
002

Parameter
Setting

Comments

No PCB or RRCU

None or Remote Cabinets

8 Standard Telephone
circuits

Standard telephone no VM interface
settings

PCM
Highway: 8

DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
S-OCA (DKT3000 limitations:
DKT2000, 16 character LCD display
on DKT3000, DKT3000 LCD Feature
key does not function, DKT3014
large screen LCD does not display).

003

PDKU2

8 Digital Telephone

004

Not used

017

BDKU

8 digital telephones

8, 1B circuits

DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
S-OCA

018

BDKU1+BDKS

16 digital telephones

16, 1B circuits

DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
S-OCA

019

BIOU

Page/MOH/Relay
interface#1

No functions assigned

BIOU2

Page/MOH/Relay
interface#2

No functions assigned. Strata CTX
100 assigns a virtual BIOU2 into a
virtual location, Cabinet 02, Slot 05,
to provide control of the ACTU relay.

020

1-2

RSTU

PCB Circuit Type

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Station PDN Auto-programming
• Auto programming assigns PDNs to station PCB equipment numbers (cabinet, slot, circuit) in
equipment number order. All installed station PCB circuits will be assigned a PDN regardless of the
circuit type, digital (BDKU/BDKS, PDKU) or analog (RSTU).
• PDN 200 or PDN 2000 (depending on the system size) is assigned to the station circuit having the
lowest equipment number in the system, then the PDN is incremented by one digit and assigned to the
next highest station equipment number and so on. See Table 1-2.

Strata CTX
Programming

When auto programming recognizes installed station PCBs, it assigns PDNs in numerical order as follows:

• Program 205 Feature Button Setting – A Primary DN (PDN) is assigned to )% on each digital
telephone according to its equipment number (cabinet, slot, circuit) position. DND is assigned to FB20
on 20-button telephones and is not assigned on 10- and 14-button telephones.
Table 1-2

Auto-Programming for Station Primary Directory Number

First digit

CTX100 and CTX670 without BBMS
and BEXS Installed on Processor
Primary DNs (3-digits)

CTX670 with BBMS and BEXS
Installed on Processor (First Digit is 2)
Primary DNs (4-digit)

200~299 depending on quantity of station 2000~2571 depending on qty. of station PCBs
PCBs installed
installed
Primary DN (3-digits)

300~399 depending on qty. of station
PCBs installed

CO Line Auto-programming
Table 1-3 shows the CO line PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during autoprogramming. The default data for CO line Incoming Line Groups (ILG), Outgoing Line Groups (OLG),
and CO line service type is set as shown in Table 1-4.
Important!

Table 1-3

Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100)

PCB
Code
000

PCBs must be installed per the rules in the CTX I&M manual, Configuration Chapter,
Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.

PCB Name

PCB Circuit Type

Parameter setting

Comments

No PCB or RRCU

None or Remote cabinets

001

RCOU, RGLU

4 analog Loop or
ground start lines

Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
lines

005

RCOU+RCOS

8 analog loop start
lines

Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
lines

006

RDDU

4 analog DID lines

007

008

RDTU2

RDSU

16 or 24 digital T1
lines

4 Standard telephone
and for digital
telephone

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

Direct Inward Dial lines
PCM Highway:
16 or 241

T1 Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
lines
Standard telephone and DKT2000
and DKT3000 without S-OCA
(DKT3000 limitations: DKT2000, 16
character LCD display on DKT3000,
DKT3000 LCD Feature key does not
function, DKT3014 large screen LCD
does not display).

1-3

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100) (continued)

Table 1-3
PCB
Code

PCB Name

PCB Circuit Type

Parameter setting

Comments
Caller ID interface for RCOU/RCOS
and RGLU analog CLID lines. Note:
The same Prg100 code (009) is used
for RCIU2 with or without RCIS.

009

RCIU2+RCIS

4 or 8 Caller ID
interface

010

RMCU+RCMS

2 or 4 E911 analog
CAMA lines

CAMA lines Note: The same Prg100
code (009) used for RCIU2 with or
without RCIS.

011

REMU, BVPU

4 analog Tie lines, 4
VoIP circuits

Tie lines

012

RBSU

2 ISDN BRI (S/T)
circuits

TIE Type:

013

RBSU+RBSS

4 ISDN BRI (S/T)
circuits

TEI Type:

014

RPTU

16 or 24 ISDN PRI
channels

PCM Highway:

015

RBUU

2 ISDN BRI (U)
circuits

TEI Type:

016

RBUU+RBUS

4 ISDN BRI (U)
circuits

TEI Type:

ISDN BRI CO lines

Two TIEs

ISDN BRI CO lines

Two TIEs

ISDN BRI CO lines

16 or 241

ISDN BRI CO lines

Two TIEs

ISDN BRI CO lines

Two TIEs

1. If the slot next to an installed RDTU or RPTU is vacant, 24 line or channels will be installed; If the slot next to
an installed RDTU or RPTU is occupied by another PCB, 16 lines or channels will be installed.
Table 1-4

Auto-Programming of Line Groups and Service Types
CO line type

OLG
Prg 306

ILG
Prg. 304

RCOU/RCOS and RGLU analog loop
and ground start

RDDU analog DID

RDTU (T1)

RMCU/RMCS analog CAMA

RBUU/RBUS and RBSU ISDN BRI set as CO side

CO Service Type
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
(200 or 2000 – see Table 5)
DID, wink – no default DID numbers
DID – no default DID numbers
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
(200 or 2000 – see next table)
DID – no default DID numbers

ISDN PRI

DID – no default DID numbers

REMU analog E&M

Non-QSIG

1. The line number is assigned to all lines in the numerical order according to the line PCB cabinet placements.
Example: Line number 1 will be on the first circuit of the line PCB placed in the lowest cabinet/slot number.
2. OLG:1 is created even if there is are no analog line PCBs installed.

1-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Table 1-5

Auto-Programming of Miscellaneous Line Parameters

DIT line ringing assignment
Program 310

Settings
All of the ringing destinations of DIT lines are the first PDN:
PDN 200 for CTX100 and 2-cabinet CTX670
PDN2000 for 2~7 cabinet CTX670.

Program 309

The destination of DID is not assigned. DID numbers and ringing
destinations must be assigned manually from CTX WinAdmin or the
programming telephone.

Format Setting for DIT (T1)

Zero Code Suppress = B8ZS, Frame Format = ESF.

Setting for CAMA

The destination of internal notification is the first DN 200 or 2000 in the all
operation mode (DAY1, Day2, and Night).

Setting for ISDN BRI CO

Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
BRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
BRI interface in the order in which the BRI PCBs are installed. The
destination of DID is not assigned.

Setting for ISDN PRI CO

Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
PRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
PRI interface in the order in which the PRI PCBs are installed. The
destination of DID is not assigned.

Setting for E&M Tie lines

The node number and the other setting for networking are not assigned
automatically

DID numbers - not assigned.

Strata CTX
Programming

Item

The destination of Program 318, No Calling Party Number and Out Of Search for DID number, is assigned
to the first Primary DN of the system (200 or 2000) in the all system operating modes (Day1,Day 2, and
Night).
The DIT line (ground and loop) destinations of all trunks which generated automatically are set as the first
PDN 200 or 2000 depending on the system size – see Table 1-4.

BIPU Settings
Table 1-6

BIPU-M Automatic Settings
Item

Card Type

Description
Card Type

Settings
BIPU
In the order of smallest number of the slot
where BIPU is inserted

IP Address (BIPU)

IP address of BIPU

192.168.254.200
.201
.202/.......
Private address will be set.

Subnet mask (BIPU)

Subnet mask of BIPU
substrate

255.255.255.0

Default gateway

Default gateway of BIPU
substrate

0.0.0.0

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

1-5

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Table 1-7

IPT Automatic Settings
Item

Description

Settings
The number plan conforms to BDKU16.

DN Setting

DN setting of the terminal
accommodated in BIPU

Accommodated terminal setting
(Station ID)

Parameter setting of Station
ID in BIPU

Station ID = PDN

Accommodated terminal setting
(IP Address)

Parameter setting of IP
address in BIPU

IP address = 0.0.0.0

Accommodated terminal setting
(MAC addresses)

Parameter setting of MAC
addresses in BIPU

MAC addresses = (no data)

Table 1-8

Assigned in the order of the lowest slot
number.

System Related Basic Settings
Item

Description

Settings
Use of Diffserv: Not applicable

Setting of priority control by
Diffserv/IEEE802.1p

QOS Control

Set value of DSField = 0
Use of IEEE802.1p: Not applicable
Priority level: Voice

Station ID

Automatic setting of Station
ID

Terminal authentication setting

Application or non application
of connection restriction
Not apply
function using MAC address

Not allowed

BIPU-Q1A Initial Programming

After initializing the CTX System with BIPU for Strata Net over IP, Strata CTX detects the BIPU card for
Strata Net over IP and basic programming is set automatically.
Table 1-9

BIPU-Q1A Automatic Settings
Item

Card Type

Description
Card Type

Settings
BIPU-Q1A
In the order of smallest number of the slot
where BIPU is inserted
192.168.254.800 for 1st BIPU
.801 for 2nd BIPU
.802 for 3rd BIPU

IP Address (BIPU)

IP address of BIPU-Q1A

Subnet mask (BIPU)

Subnet mask of BIPU-Q1A

Default gateway

Default gateway of BIPU-Q1A 0.0.0.0

Private address will be set.

1-6

255.255.255.0

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Table 1-10

IP-Trunk Information

ILG

OLG

Description

Settings

ILG Number

Kind of Trunk (Analog/ISDN)

ISDN

Type of Trunk

TIE

OLG Number

Kind of Trunk (Analog/ISDN)

ISDN

Type of Trunk

TIE

Strata CTX
Programming

Program

1: 1st BIPU
CG Number

2: 2nd BIPU

Type of Protocol

ILG

OLG

3: 3rd BIPU

ISDN Trunk

Voice Coding Procedure

CODEC (G.711, G.729A)

G.711

Index of Voice attribute table

(1~256)

1
Packet Interval:

20ms

Type of Jitter buffer:

Fixed

Size of Jitter buffer:
Parameter of voice attribute table -

D-ch Establish/Release

Measure Time:

1000ms

Packet Loss Ratio:

Packet discard ratio:

D-ch Release by Call Released

Fast Connect Procedure

Apply

Negotiation

Negotiation of H.245

Un-Apply

IP address for Node ID

IP Address

IP address

Table 1-11

System Information
Item

Description

Settings
Diffserv:

QoS Control

Max Acceptable Delay:

Priority Control by Diffserv .
IEEE802.1p

DS Field:
IEEE802.1p
Priority:

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

Disable
0
Disable
Voice (6)

1-7

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming
The following are the initial values of the LAN data that is automatically created for the system.
• Network TCP/IP. See “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-14.
• IP address – 192.168.254.253
• Sub network master – 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway – 0.0.0.0
• IP routing table – Not used.
• SNMP Agent settings
•
•
•
•

Community name – communityName
IP address – 0.0.0.0 (not restricted by the IP address of the access source)
Privileges – WRITE
community-id – 1
• User level – Super user
• Trap destination
• Community name – Nothing
• IP address – Nothing
• Modem PPP Server settings
• IP Address – 192.168.255.254 (Strata CTX modem fixed IP address for Dial-up connections).
Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Numbers (Program 117)
Public Numbering Plan
Analyzed Number

Public Numbering Plan
Analyzed Digit Number

1NXX

N11

NXX

N = 2~9 and X = 0~9

E911 Emergency Call to Outgoing Line Group (Program 550)
Emergency Call Group
Number

OLG1

E911 Emergency Call Destination (Program 400)
System Mode

Emergency Call Called Number
Index

DAY1

200 or 2000 (the first PDN)

DAY2

200 or 2000 (the first PDN)

NIGHT

200 or 2000 (the first PDN)

Emergency Call Called Number

The emergency call destination is set for the first PDN as 200 or 2000 in the all operation mode (DAY1,
Day2, NIGHT).

1-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements

Default Feature Access Codes
Note For DKTs, assign only the PDN numbers. Do not program any other Flexible Buttons or features in

to the phones. Strata CTX automatically recognizes and sets up digital telephone stations.

Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements

Strata CTX
Programming

Refer to “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.

Plan for your Strata CTX system requirements in detail before beginning your installation. Use record
sheets wherever they are provided to document your installation requirements. The following are some
areas to consider:
• Flexible Numbering Plan (102) – Planning your Flexible Numbering requirements is essential to a
smooth installation. Trunk group access and station range requirements are especially important areas
of consideration.
• COS (103) – Determine the Class of Service (COS) requirements for your station and trunk groups.
There are up to 32 possible COS plans.
• DRL (111) – Define up to 16 Destination Restriction Level (DRL) assignments.
Important!

Destination Restriction is an expanded feature of what has traditionally been known as Toll
Restriction. Toll Restriction is only one facet of Strata CTX’s Destination Restriction feature.
Refer to Destination Restriction in this manual when programming Toll Restriction
requirements.

• FRL and QPL (506) – Define up to 16 Facilities Restriction Level (FRL) and Queuing Priority Level
(QPL) assignments.

Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
Follow the steps below to program the Strata CTX for the first time. Following this initial setup procedure
enables you to perform a standard Strata CTX setup with common System and Station default assignments.
Toshiba recommends adherence to these procedures for initial setup.
1. Card Assignments (100) – Choose System > Card Assignment. It is not necessary to physically install
PCBs prior to programming Strata CTX.
If you physically install your PCBs prior to initial setup, CTX WinAdmin automatically recognizes
PDKU, BDKU/BDKS, RSTU, RCOU/RCOS and RGLU PCBs and assigns default stations and trunks
automatically. All other PCBs are assigned manually. See “100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments” on
page 4-1 for more details.
2. ILG Assignment (304) – Choose Trunk > ILG to assign Incoming Line Groups (ILG). See “304
Incoming Line Group Assignment” on page 6-2 for more details. ILGs enable line groupings of shared
Class of Service features for incoming call handling.
3. OLG Assignment (306) – Choose Trunk > OLG to assign Outgoing Line Groups (OLG). See “306
Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-4 for more details.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

1-9

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time

4. Trunk Assignment (300) – Choose Trunk > Basic. Set up your Trunks in the following order (see “300
Trunk Assignment” on page 6-6 for more details):
• Loop Start Trunks
• Ground Start Trunks
• T1 Trunks
• Tie lines
• FX lines
• PRI lines
• BRI lines
5. Station Assignment (200) – Choose Station > Basic. Set up your stations in the following order (see
“Assignment” on page 5-1 for more details):
• DKT Stations
• Standard Stations
• Voice Mail (VM) Ports
• Attendant Positions
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Pilot DNs
• Door Phones
6. Create Station Links – Create the following groups wherever applicable and set stations to link as
necessary.
• Hunt Groups using Programs 209 and 218
• Paging Groups using Program 502
• Call Pickup Groups using Program 210
• Park Orbits using Program 102
• Paging Devices using Program 503
7. Backup Data – Choose Operation\Data Backup. Make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted
(see “908 SmartMedia” on page 10-4) prior to running backup. See “910 Data Backup” on page 10-13
for details.
8. Continue programming Strata CTX details.

1-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time

Review Program Flow

Card Assignment
(Program 100)
LS Trunks
GS Trunks

Strata CTX
Programming

The basic program flow needed to set up Strata CTX is shown below. The figure displays the most critical
programs in the left column and migrates right to optional programs. Also, programming flows from
specific (left) to general (right).

Admin

TI Trunks
Tie Lines
Create ILGs
(Program 304)

FX Lines
PRI Lines
BRI Lines

Create OLGs
(Program 306)

DKT Stations
STD Stations

Services

LCR/TR

VM Ports
Attd Positions
Pilot DN's (ACD)
Recommended*
Planning the following before
proceeding.
Flexible Numbering Plan
(Program 102):
Trunk Group Access Plan
Station Range Plan
Create COS Plan (up to 32)
(Program 103)
Create DRL (up to 16)
(Program 111, 532~533)
Define FRL and QPL
meanings (up to 16)

Door Phones
BRI Lines

System Program
5862

Create Station Links
Hunt Group
Paging Group
Call P.U. Group
Park Orbits
Paging Devices

*Planning out these details
in advance enables Strata CTX
setup to proceed smoothly.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

1-11

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences

Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Use the following tables to quickly identify the programs needed to fulfill your setup requirements. See the
Index to correlate program numbers and their functions.

Station Setup
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up Station requirements.
Station
Type

Assignment

DKT

Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.

PDN

100

200

PhDN

205

206

DADM

204

213

DDSS

214

215

ISDN

204

208

Attd

100

200

204

Ext

100

200

208

100

200

204

Ext

100

202

217

Pilot DN

540

Station Hunting

209

Call Pickup Groups

210

Emergency Ringdown

216

Paging Groups

502

Station Speed Dial

516

206

205

209

218

579

580

218

Trunk Setup – Analog
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up analog Trunk requirements.
Trunk
Type

LS/GS

Tie line

DID

1-12

Assignment

Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.

Basic

100

Ring

310

Timer

308

DISA

311

Basic

100

Timer

308

DISA

311

Basic

100

Ring

309

Timer

308

DISA

311

DNIS/ANI

313

Intercept

318

304

306

300

304

306

300

304

306

300

319

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences

Trunk Setup – T1
Trunk
Type

Assignment
Basic

LS/GS

Tie line

DID

Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
100

Data

315

Ring

310

Timer

308

DISA

311

Basic

100

Data

315

Timer

308

DISA

311

Basic

100

Data

315

Ring

309

Timer

308

DISA

311

DNIS/ANI

313

Intercept

318

304

306

300

304

306

300

304

306

300

Strata CTX
Programming

Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up T1 Trunk requirements.

319

Trunk Setup – ISDN PRI
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up ISDN PRI Trunk requirements.
Trunk
Type

Assignment

DID

Tie line

Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.

Basic

100

Ring

309

Timer

308

DISA

311

DNIS/ANI

313

304

Intercept

318

319

CNIS

321

322

Basic

100

304

Ring

309

Timer

308

306

302

320

306

302

320

D-share

100

304

306

302

320

316

CBC

100

3041

3061

3022

320

3233

Notes
1. Each CBC Group may require one ILG and one OLG.
2. Do not assign ILG/OLG using this program.
3. Assign ILG and OLG using Program 323.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

1-13

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences

Miscellaneous
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up other Strata CTX features.
Feature

1-14

Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.

Account-Codes

570

571

103

Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)

103

208

104

103

109
217

Automatic Call Back (ACB)

104

Automatic Camp-On

304

Auto-Release of CO

308

Background-Music (BGM)

102

Call Forwarding

103

200

Call History

204

205

Call Park Orbit

104

102

Call Xfer W/ Camp-On

103

COS-Station

200

202

COS-CO

304

306

Credit-Card Calling

105

111

306

Day/Night service

500

106

112

Identification Services

309

318

579

Digital PAD

107

114

Direct Inward Dialing

309

318

DISA

311

Direct Inward Termination

304

310

Do not Disturb (DND)

103

204

105

104

306

205

104

204

508

507

573

DTMF DP Compatible

104

DTMF BackTone

204

DTMF Signal Time

579

104

E911

105

200
202

Executive Override

103

105

External Ringing Repeat

300

204

Flash

308
102

103

102

502

113

205

Door Phones

Group Paging

306

304

Door Lock Control

Flexible Numbering

506

217

550

205

102

103

503

102

Least-Cost-Routing (LCR)

520

521

522

523

524

525

526

528

Line Group

304

305

306

307

317

302

323

300

Message-Waiting Light

204

102

579

Music-on-Hold

102

105

109

309

310

Off-Hook Camp-on

104

200

217

Network Call – Incoming

102

656
654

655

Network Call – Outgoing

102

651

653

Out-Going calls

200

217

104

202

579

Ringing-Transfer

105

SMDI

200

529

103

580

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences

Feature
Station CO Line Access

Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
204
512

513

514

Tandem Connection

103

104

300

DR Override by System’s
Speed Dial

105

Destination Restriction

200

202

306

Tone-First/Voice-First

204

206

Travelling COS

105

200

510

Voice-Mail Interface
See “Voice Mail Set Up” on
page A-1

100

200

209

Emergency Ring-Down

216

Relay Services

515

Strata CTX
Programming

SMDR

650

530

531

532

533

534

218

579

580

803

804

309

System Call-Forward

200

217

104

500

504

Call Pick Up

210

103

200

205

102

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

318

1-15

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences

1-16

Strata CTX Programming - Part 1: Getting Started 11/03

726+,%$

Telecommunication Systems Division

Digital Business Telephone Systems

Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming

November 2003

CTX WinAdmin Overview

• Virtual Local Area Network (LAN) – System Administrators can connect their PC to
Strata CTX via a network interface jack or modem. CTX WinAdmin views the Strata CTX system as a
LAN providing a stable environment in which to program and access data.

CTX WinAdmin
Overview

CTX WinAdmin is a powerful Microsoft® Windows® based telephone system management tool used to
program, maintain and upgrade the Strata CTX Digital Business Telephone System. CTX WinAdmin uses
a variety of networking and software technologies as follows:

• Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) – enables query-based information retrieval and
event notification. WMI is an access mechanism which enables CTX WinAdmin to access, monitor,
command and control Strata CTX.
• Virtual Web Server and Manager – creates a virtual World Wide Web environment in Strata CTX.
This technology enables CTX WinAdmin to view Strata CTX as if it were an Internet Service Provider
(ISP), providing secure passage for System Administrators.
• Microsoft Internet Explorer® browser access – Virtual Web Service enables System Administrators
to access Strata CTX using the Internet Explorer browser.
• CTX WinAdmin Graphical User Interface (GUI) – Sophisticated programming tasks are just a
click-of-the-mouse away with CTX WinAdmin’s GUI.
• Mobile Access – enables System Administrators to program, maintain, and/or upgrade a
Strata CTX from any mobile location with an Internet connection—without ever leaving the office.
• Internet Access – CTX WinAdmin uses Microsoft IP technology to enable access to your Strata CTX
as easy as browsing the World Wide Web.
• Personal Web Server and Manager – Microsoft’s Personal Web Server and Manager option package
enables you to build a web environment between your Strata CTX and your PC.
• Internet Explorer – provides a stable environment in which to program, maintain and upgrade your
Strata CTX.
CTX WinAdmin’s tight integration of the above technologies provide System Administrators with
convenient, stable, user friendly and comprehensive access to Strata CTX system information.
CTX WinAdmin can connect directly to your Strata CTX Digital Business Telephone System via Network
Interface (included with Strata CTX’s BECU board and required on your PC) and Modem Interface.
Mobile System Administrators can access a Strata CTX system from any location that provides Internet
access.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

2-1

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Main Screen

CTX WinAdmin Main Screen
After you start CTX WinAdmin, log in and connect to the CTX, the main screen (shown below) displays.
Verify the information on this screen. It contains the System type and Software version.
Auto Flyover On/Off Button

Program Viewer

Program Menu

• Auto Flyover On/Off Button – You can click this toggle button to turn on or turn off flyovers.
• Program Menu – The primary tool used to navigate through CTX WinAdmin. Click the Expand or
Collapse buttons at the upper left corner to expand or collapse the Program menu.
• Program Viewer – This area is where the various programs and parameters are displayed as you
navigate through CTX WinAdmin.
Notes

2-2

•

You can verify the Strata CTX system type (CTX100 or CTX670) and the software version on the Title
screen shown above.

•

The software version is organized as follows:
●

Example: AR1.01 M0010.00

●

A = Country code (USA, Canada, Mexico).

●

R1.01 = CTX Release 1.01

●

M000xx.00 = Strata CTX software version.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens

CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens
The CTX WinAdmin operates in a user friendly Windows environment featuring interactive Graphical
User Interface (GUI) screens.The Program Viewer’s GUI is arranged to streamline the Strata CTX
programming process (see sample screen below).
Toolbar
Program Details

CTX WinAdmin
Overview

Tabs

Program Name

Program Menu

Programming functions can be accessed by clicking on the appropriate link in the Program Menu. The Day
Night Service (Programs 112, 106 and 113) screen is shown in the sample below.
Command Table Button

Toolbar
Special Buttons
Command Group Name
Programming
Parameters

Field Name

5698

Program Blocks

Program and Parameter Descriptions

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

2-3

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens

The following features enable you to browse and program CTX WinAdmin efficiently.
• Program Blocks – CTX WinAdmin arranges many related programs in blocks to enable the
programmer to view essential and related programs on one screen.
• Program Tabs – You can access a variety of programs and features by clicking the Program Tabs found
on some of the CTX WinAdmin screens.
• Programming Parameters – Choose values from scroll down menus.
• Command Group Name – Each program number and title is prominently displayed for easy reference.
• Field Name – Each Field Name or parameter displays and is coded with a prefix ()%) number for easy
referencing.
• Program and Parameter Descriptions – Every program and parameter description displays in a
pop-up window by placing the mouse cursor over the program or parameter information.
• CTX WinAdmin Toolbar – The CTX WinAdmin Toolbar enables Strata CTX updates with a click of
your mouse button. The following options are provided.
• Edit – CTX WinAdmin defaults to the Edit mode used to program, maintain, or upgrade your Strata
CTX System.
• Cancel – Cancels the previous entry.
• Refresh – Displays the latest updates.
• Reset – Resets to set your Strata CTX to manufacturer’s default.
CAUTION!

By pressing the Reset button, you are authorizing all data to be reset to manufacturing
defaults. Any custom data entered will be lost.

• Submit – New data is held in CTX WinAdmin’s memory. Your Strata CTX is not updated with the
new settings until the Submit button is clicked.
• Close – Exits CTX WinAdmin and return to CTX Management Console Menu.
• Disconnect – Disconnects CTX WinAdmin from Strata CTX and terminates TCP/IP
Communications.
• Help – Enables the CTX WinAdmin Help files.

2-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens

• Command Table Button – This button
enables you to locate programs by
number or category (shown right).
From this table, you can click on a
program to open it.

CTX WinAdmin
Overview

Special Buttons
These buttons appear on some of the CTX WinAdmin screens.

These buttons enable you to access the
most common programming tasks
quickly. For example, click on the List
button to view the Current Index Web
Page dialog box (shown right).
Clicking on any button lets you do the
following:
• Create – Create a new record using
system default values.
• Start – Starts a wizard.
• Add/Delete/Modify – Enables you to add/delete/modify entry(s). In some programs, click the Add or
Delete button for a dialog box to display. Enter the required data, then click Add or Delete.
• List – Lists all data.
• Copy – Enables you to copy all the information from one screen to another.
• Back/Next – Enables you to navigate forward and backward through the screens.
• Table View – Displays the appropriate table view. For example, clicking the DR Table View button
displays all the configured DRLs within the system.
• Print – Enables you to print to a local printer.
• Refresh – Enables you to get the most updated information.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

2-5

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens

Table Views
Some programs contain supporting tables views. These tables can be accessed from the Program Menu or
from the program itself, by clicking the Table view button. For example, the System Speed Dial Table
View can be accessed by clicking System > System Speed Dial Table View or by clicking the System
Speed Dial Table View button under Program 501 System > System Speed Dial.
Notes

•

Depending on the speed of your PC and the size of your database, the table may take several minutes
to download.

•

Once table view displays, you can minimize the screen or send it to the background. It is an
independent window that can always be brought back to the front of the screen for reference.

The tables have the following functionality (See table view example below):

First 25 Entries

Last 25 Entries

Navigation
Control Bar
Column Headers
Sort Indicator

Book Mark

6869

• Navigational controls – enable viewing or moving on a table by 25-entry screens. These controls help
sort information found in the table or view the table in full. These controls are found as Previous and
Next buttons above the header.
If you want to print or analyze the table, you can also select All from the Drop down between the
Previous and Next buttons to view the entire table in blocks of 25 entries.
In the Navigation Control bar, every button is dynamically activated or deactivated. For example, in the
figure above the Previous button is not active because the view starts with the first record. The Submit
is also not available because nothing has been changed.
• Sort – You can sort tables by clicking on the column header. The direction of the up/down toggles in an
Ascending or Descending sort. The color indicator pointing Up or Down in the Header row indicates
the column by which the sort is performed.

2-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens

• Bookmark – You can bookmark a row on some tables by clicking on the row. This enables you to move
forward and backward and come back to the original position with no problem.
Note The bookmark function is not provided in tables that have a Delete button, example “Hunt Group

Table View” on page 5-27. Tables that have a Delete button also have Select All and Unselect All
buttons.

The Edit function works for the
Name, Number and Destination
columns.

CTX WinAdmin
Overview

• Edit/Refresh/Print buttons – You
can edit, refresh or print the table
by clicking the appropriate
buttons at the top of the screen.
In some tables the Edit button
toggles between View Collected
Data and Edit. Clicking the Edit
button displays the following
screen.

Use the Refresh button if you
add, delete or make changes to
table entries, in Programs that
feed tables or in Guide pages.
The Print button enables you to
print tables. However, when you click the Print button, only the part of the table that is displayed on the
screen prints. Use the scroll bar to Print beyond what is displayed. It will then automatically print from
where the last screen ended.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

2-7

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Sub-screens

2-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation

This chapter shows you how to install CTX WinAdmin software on your PC and discusses how to connect
that PC to the Strata CTX system.

PC Hardware Requirements
Hardware
Computer/Processor
Memory

Windows XP Professional
300 MHz or higher processor clock
speed. Intel Pentium or Celeron
processors; or AMD K6, Athlon or
Duron processors are recommended.
128MB RAM

Hard Disk

1.5GB of available space

Windows 2000

Installation

The following table shows the minimum PC requirements for CTX WinAdmin and WinCTX to operate
properly:

300 MHz or higher Pentium
128MB RAM
2GB hard drive with a minimum of
650MB of free space

SVGA Card and Monitor

Yes

CD-ROM Drive

Yes

Network Interface Card
(NIC) and/or PC Modem

Yes

PC Software Requirements
The “Install CTX WinAdmin...” selection on the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM runs a Pre-installation Check
to determine if your PC meets the minimum software requirements for CTX WinAdmin to operate
properly. The Pre-installation Check tests for the following:
• Windows Operating System – CTX WinAdmin requires a Microsoft Windows XP Professional or
Windows 2000 Operating System (OS).
• Windows Option Components – The Pre-installation Check tests to see if Windows Option
Components, such as Internet Information Services and Management and Monitoring Tools are
installed on your PC. If they are not installed, your Windows OS CD-ROM will be required; or if your
PC has an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) version of Windows, you may need the CD-ROM
that came with your PC.
Disclaimer: CTX WinAdmin has not been tested with Windows NT 4.0. This OS is not recommended. We

recommend that you upgrade your OS to Windows XP Pro or Windows 2000 Pro.
Note CTX WinAdmin does not work on these operating systems: Windows XP Home, Windows ME,

Windows 98, Windows 95, and MS-DOS.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-1

Installation
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software

• Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 (SP2) – If not found, follow the steps given on the CTX WinAdmin
CD-ROM to install SP2.
• Internet Explorer (IE) – If IE 5.5 or greater is not found, follow the steps given on the CTX
WinAdmin CD-ROM and install it from there.
Note Windows XP Professional automatically installs IE 6.0 so installing IE 5.5 is not needed.
CAUTION!

Toshiba recommends not to install MS Network Monitor on WinAdmin PCs because
MS Network Monitor software which is provided on the Microsoft System
Management Server (SMS) production CD-ROM causes problems with the Windows
WMI SNMP component needed to run WinAdmin.

Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software
1. Insert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. Click “Install CTX WinAdmin...”. The
CD-ROM runs a Pre-installation check, determines the OS you have, then checks for all other software
requirements.
If the correct OS and all requirements were found on your PC, the “Pre-installation Check Complete!”
screen displays. This enables you to perform any of the following:
• First-time installation: click “Install Now”. Follow the prompts. Choose “Custom” to browse to
the drive on which you want to install the software or “Complete” to install immediately on the C:
drive.
• If upgrading from a previous version: click “Upgrade Now”. Select “Complete” to install the new
version on the C drive, select Custom to select another drive. The CTX WinAdmin Custom Profile
folders will remain on the C drive or copied to the selected drive.
• If installing over the same version: click Install Now. You will be prompted to “Repair” or
“Remove.” Repair fixes corrupted files and registry entries. Remove removes the existing version to
enable you to reinstall the same version as a new clean install.
• If your PC did not pass the Pre-installation check and a requirement was not found: see the
details in “Requirements Not Found” on page 3-3.
CAUTION!

Do not open and/or run other applications during installation as this may corrupt the
installation and/or other software on your PC. Installation takes several minutes.

2. Once installation is complete, if the Windows Internet Wizard displays when you click on the CTX
WinAdmin icon, enter the settings below if using a NIC or modem connection. This establishes a
preliminary path to bring up the CTX WinAdmin log-in screen.
• Windows XP Pro: If the Windows “Welcome to the New Connection Wizard” comes up, you have
not yet configured your Internet connection. Follow the prompts and select: Next > Connect to
Internet > Next > Set up my connection manually > Next > Connect using broadband connect that is
always on > Finish. Exit the wizard screen.
• Windows 2000: If the Windows “Welcome to the Internet Connection Wizard” comes up, you have
not yet configured your Internet connection. Follow the prompts and select: I want to set up my
Internet connection manually > Next > I want to connect through a local area network > Next >
Automatic discovery of Proxy server > Next and No to Setup Your Internet Email Account > Next >
Finish.
3. Go on to “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-5.

3-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software

Requirements Not Found
Service Pack 2 Not Found - Windows 2000

If Service Pack 2 was not found on your Windows 2000 OS, follow these steps.
1. Click the “Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 Not Found” line. A help screen appears. Locate and click the
“Install SP2 Now” link. SP2 installation will begin.
2. Follow the prompts to install SP2.
3. At the end of installation you will be prompted to restart your PC. Do so, log back into Windows 2000,
then reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install CTX WinAdmin...” from the Main
Menu.
Internet Explorer (IE) 5.5 or Greater Not Found - Windows 2000

1. Click the “Internet Explorer 5.5 or Greater Not Found” line. A help screen will appear. Locate and click
the “Upgrade to IE 5.5 Now”. The upgrade will begin. Follow the prompts to upgrade to IE 5.5.
2. At the end of installation you will be prompted to restart your PC. Do so, log back into Windows 2000.
3. Reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install CTX WinAdmin...” from the Main Menu.
order.
Internet Information Services (IIS) Not Found - Windows XP Pro/Windows 2000

If IIS was not found, follow the steps below.
CAUTION!

Installation

Note We suggest using IE 6.0 or higher with CTX WinAdmin to enable lists to be displayed in numeric

Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) on PCs connected to a LAN and/or the
Internet may cause security issues - such as making your PC more susceptible to
intrusion and/or computer viruses. A direct connection between your PC and Strata
CTX reduces, but does not eliminate security issues.

• In all cases, always have a virus program with the latest virus tables running real-time on your PC.
• An NTFS file system is recommended if you are connected to a LAN and/or Internet. See your
Windows Help files for more details.
• Consult the Microsoft Knowledge Base on the Internet for updates on Windows security issues.
• Check if you have the I386 folder located on you PC, if not have your Windows OS CD-ROM ready as
you will be asked to insert it.
➤ Installing IIS using Windows XP Pro or Windows 2000 CD-ROM

1. Windows XP Pro and Windows 2000: Click Start > Settings (2000 only)> Control Panel > Add/
Remove Programs > Add/Remove Windows Components. Checkmark Internet Information Services
(IIS). Under IIS option, check mark FTP and do not uncheck any items that are already checked. If
Management and Monitoring Tools were also Not Found you may checkmark this too. Click “Next”.
2. Follow the prompts and have your Windows OS CD-ROM ready as you will be asked to insert it. If the
Windows autoplay menu runs after inserting the CD-ROM, close this screen.
3. Once installation is complete, reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install WinAdmin...”
from the Main Menu.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-3

Installation
Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software

Note If your PC displays this error message

(shown right), insert the Windows OS
CD-ROM that came with your computer
(Recovery or Companion type) and not
the Service Pack2 CD-ROM. Follow the
prompts to browse, open and install files.

Management and Monitoring Tools Not Found - Windows XP Pro/Windows 2000

If Management and Monitoring Tools were not found, follow the steps below.
1. Windows XP Pro and Windows 2000: Click Start > Settings (2000 only)> Control Panel > Add/
Remove Programs > Add/Remove Windows Components. Checkmark Management and Monitoring
Tools. If Internet Information Services (IIS) were also Not Found you may checkmark this too. Click
“Next”.
2. Follow the prompts and have your Windows OS CD-ROM ready as you will be asked to insert it. If the
Windows autoplay menu runs after inserting the CD-ROM, close this screen.
3. Once installation is complete, reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install CTX
WinAdmin...” from the Main Menu.
WMI SNMP Provider Not Found - Windows 2000

If the WMI SNMP Provider was not found on your Windows 2000 PC, follow the steps below. Have your
Windows 2000 CD-ROM ready, you’ll be asked to insert it.
1. Click the “WMI SNMP Provider Not Found” line. A help screen appears.
2. Locate and click the “Install WMI SNMP Provider”. Follow the prompts to install WMI SNMP
Provider. Once complete, reinsert the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM and select “Install CTX
WinAdmin...” from the Main Menu.
Important!

3-4

Continue to choose “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-5 and/or
“Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-10. You can choose either or both, but
you must choose one.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX

Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX
Step 2A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX
Processor NIC
1. Connect the RJ45 cable between your PC’s NIC jack and the Strata CTX Network Interface jack. If you
are connecting to Strata CTX directly without using a Network hub, use an RJ45 cross-pinned cable. If
you’re connecting to the Strata CTX via a hub, use a straight-pinned RJ45 cable. See Figures 3-1
and .
WinAdmin PC or Server, Direct Connection to Strata CTX

Cross-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord

Strata CTX

Pin
RD+

TD+

1
2 TDRD+
3
RD6

ACTU with AETS
or
BBCU Processor

RDTD+
TD-

PC or Server

3
6
1
2

CTX WinAdmin

6249

Network Interface with RJ45 Jack
Network Interface Card with RJ45 Jack

Figure 3-1

Direct Connection to Strata CTX

Installation

NIC

WinAdmin PC or Server, Network or HUB Connection to Strata CTX
Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord

Pin
Strata CTX
ACTU with AETS
or BBCU
Processor

1
2
3
6

TD+

RD+

TDRD+

RDTD+

RD-

TD-

1
2
3
6

Network Interface RJ45 Jack

PC or Server

CTX WinAdmin
Application
NIC

LAN
(with/without
DHCP/VPN)

HUB
Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord

Network Interface RJ45 Jack
6250

Figure 3-2

Network Interface Physical Jack Connection

Wide Area Networks and/or Internet Connections

• Connection of the Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin over the Internet and/or Wide Area Network
(WAN) Enterprise Networks requires registration of a domain IP address or blocks of domain IP
addresses for CTX processors when using multiple Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin connections.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-5

Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX

• To setup CTX WinAdmin WAN and Internet connections using Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP), Virtual Private Networks (VPN), etc., the proper IP addresses and setup procedures
must be obtained from your Information Technology (IT) Administrator.
• We recommend using VPN networking. By using VPN networking, the content of SNMP messages
between WinAdmin PCs and CTX systems will be encrypted for security.
• When connecting CTX WinAdmin through Fire Walls, Routers, etc., which apply packet filtering,
make sure that the packets being sent between Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin are not filtered.
• Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin communicate using SNMP over User Datagram Protocol/Internet
Protocol (UDP/IP) and FTP protocols. The standard ports are used for each protocol (161 and 162 for
SNMP, 20 and 21 for FTP). These ports should not be blocked by firewalls.
• The default gateway IP address must be set up on CTX WinAdmin and on CTX processors per the
example in Figure 3-3. The figure below shows you how to connect the multiple CTX sites via the
WAN.
• The CTX processor requires the following IP addresses set in Program 916:
• Processor static domain IP address
• Processor subnet mask
• Processor default Gateway IP address
• The diagram below is only one example of many network configurations allowing remote maintenance
of CTX systems over the Internet and the WAN.

Ethernet
Switch

Ethernet
Switch
Strata
CTX

Router

WAN

192.168.10.1

192.168.20.1

Router

WinAdmin
PC

192.168.30.1

LAN Backbone

Default Gateway
192.168.10.1

Default Gateway
192.168.20.1

LAN Backbone

Strata
CTX

WinAdmin
PC

LAN Backbone
SITE A

SITE B
Strata
CTX

WinAdmin
PC

6540

Default Gateway
192.168.30.1

SITE C
Figure 3-3

3-6

WAN Connection for Multiple Sites

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX

Step 2B: Set Up IP Address of CTX NIC
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.

For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Connect a 20-button LCD DKT to the Strata CTX System.
2. Enter the programming mode by pressing +ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
3. At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter .
4. Press+ROG.
5. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
6. Press Feature Button 1.
7. At the TCP IP1= prompt enter the Static IP address D6SNU, E6SNU, F6SNU, G +ROG.
Possible Values of CTX TCP/IP address octets a.b.c.d = 0~255.
Default = 192.168.254.253, where D = 192, E = 168, F = 254, G = 253
Example: At the TCP IP1= prompt the LCD displays 192. This is the first octet of the default CTX IP
address. Pressing Spkr key three more times will display the remaining octets in succession as follows:
192.168.254.253
9. At the SNM IP1= prompt enter the subnet mask H 6SNU, I 6SNU, J 6SNU, K +ROG.
Possible Values of CTX Subnet mask octets e.f.g.h = 0~255
Default = 255.255.255.0, where H = 255, I = 255, J = 255, K = 0

Installation

8. Press Feature Button 2.

10. Press Feature Button 3.
11. At the DGW IP1= prompt enter default gateway L 6SNU, M 6SNU, N 6SNU, O +ROG.
Possible Values for CTX Gateway octets i.j.k.l = 0~255
Default = 0.0.0.0, where L = 0, M = 0, N = 0, O = 0
12. Press +ROG(twice).
Important!

Windows XP: Choose Step 2C; Windows 2000: Choose Step 2D.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-7

Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX

Step 2C: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC
(Windows XP)
Follow the steps below to set up PC Network settings on your CTX WinAdmin PC.
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.

For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections > Broadband
Connection.
2. At the Broadband Connection screen, click the Properties tab, then click on the Networking tab.
3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
4. Click on the Properties tab.
5. Select “Use the following IP Address.”
6. In the IP address field enter a.b.c.x
where a.b.c = 0~255 and x = 0~252.
Example: 192.168.254.x.
Note The first three octets a.b.c. have to be exactly the same as the first three octets of the CTX IP address

set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. X cannot be 253 or above and it cannot be equal to octet d of the CTX
TCP/IP address set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. This is the static IP Address of your PC.
7. Click OK and exit.

3-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 2: Set Up LAN Connection to Strata CTX

Step 2D: Set Up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC NIC
(Windows 2000)
Follow the steps below to set up PC Network settings on your WinAdmin PC.
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.

For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Click Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up
Connections > Local Area Connections.
2. Right click on Local Area Connections to select
Properties.
3. Local Area Connection Properties Connection screen
displays. Ensure Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked. Highlight TCP/IP, then click the
Properties button.
4. On the General tab click the “Use the following IP
Address” radio button (shown right).

Note The first three octets a.b.c. have to be exactly the

same as the first three octets of the CTX IP address
set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. x cannot be 253 or
above and it cannot be equal to octet d of the CTX
TCP/IP address set in Sub-step 7 of Step 2B. This is the static IP Address of your PC.

Installation

5. In the IP address field enter a.b.c.x
where a.b.c = 0~255 and x = 0~252.
Example: 192.168.254.x.

6. Enter e.f.g.h. in the Subnet Mask field. The Subnet Mask should be exactly the same as the CTX Subnet
Mask set in Sub-step 9 of Step 2B.
Possible Values of Subnet mask octets e.f.g.h = 0~255
Example: 255.255.255.0
7. Leave the DNS Server addresses blank.
8. Click OK (to accept all screens).
9. Go to “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-14.
CTX WinAdmin is now ready to communicate and program your Strata CTX System.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-9

Installation
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)

Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)
Step 3A: Connect CTX WinAdmin PC to Strata CTX Modem
Connect an RJ11 cable from your PC modem to an active phone line or RSTU port. See Figure 3-4.

Point-to-point TCP/IP

RS-232 Cable

BCTU,
BECU or
ACTU/
AMDS

33.6 kbps v.34
Dial #19

Modem

Flash
or ROM
and
RAM

RSTU
Time
Switch

Local CTX
WinAdmin PC
Modem

CO Line

Telephone
Network

CO Line

CO Line
Circuit

Strata CTX
5592

Remote CTX
WinAdmin PC

Figure 3-4

RS-232 Cable

CTX WinAdmin Modem Interface Connection

CTX WinAdmin PC Modem to CTX Modem Call Setup – CTX Programming and Operation

• Direct ring connection over CO lines
• DID lines: in PRG 309, assign “Built-in Modem” as the Audio Day1, Day, and/or Night destination
type.
• DIT ground/loop start lines: in PRG 310 assign “Built-in Modem” as the Day1, Day2, and/or Night
destination type.
• Direct Ring when connected to RSTU or DISA line: put “#19” in CTX WinAdmin Phone Number
dial string.
• Transfer a CTX WinAdmin call to the Strata CTX modem from a CTX Auto Attendant or telephone
After receiving the call from the CTX WinAdmin user, press &QI7UQ or hook flash and dial #19 then
hang up after receiving CTX modem tone.
Note If calling an Auto Attendant put “xxxxxxx,,,,,,,, #19” in CTX WinAdmin Phone Number dial string.

Where “xxxxxxx” is the site phone number and each “,” adds a three-second delay before dialing
#19 to connect to the modem.
Important!

3-10

Windows XP: Choose Step 3B; Windows 2000: Choose Step 3C.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)

Step 3B: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem
(Windows XP)
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.

For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Set up PC modem settings for CTX WinAdmin. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet
Connection > Network Connections > Create a New Connection (under Network Tasks).
2. At the New Connection screen, click Next. Select radio button “Connect to the network at my
workplace” and click Next.
3. Select radio button “Dial-up Connection” and click Next.
4. Enter the company name as “Remote CTX1”,
then click Next.
5. Leave the Phone Number to Dial field blank.
Click Next.
6. Click Finish.
Installation

7. At the Connect Remote CTX1 screen, click
Properties.
8. At the RemoteCTX1 Properties screen, select
the PC modem that should be used to connect
to the CTX modem.
9. Click the Networking tab.
10. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
11. Click Properties.
12. Select Use the following IP Address.
13. Enter an IP Address 192.168.255.x (where x can be 1~252. It cannot be 253 or above. It cannot be the
same as the CTX IP address in Program 916 for CTX NIC Connections). This is the static IP Address of
your PC when using the modem connection. Click OK.
14. At the CTX1 Properties screen, click the Options
tab and set up options to the recommended settings
shown as shown right.
15. Click OK. You can go back and change these
settings later if needed.
16. At the CTX1 Properties screen, click OK and exit.
17. Go to “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software”
on page 3-14.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-11

Installation
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)

Step 3C: Verify Modem Hardware Settings
Using the steps below verify that the modem hardware settings are set correctly to communicate with the
CTX built-in modem.
1. Go to Start > Settings (Windows 2000 only) >
Control Panel.
2. Click “Phone and Modem Options.”
3. Click the Modem tab.
4. Select the modem used by CTX WinAdmin.
5. Click the Properties button.
6. Click the Advanced tab to verify hardware settings on
the screen (shown right).
7. Click OK and exit.

3-12

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 3: Set up Modem Connection (Optional)

Step 3D: Set up IP Address of CTX WinAdmin PC Modem
(Windows 2000)
Note This setup is only for direct connection to the Strata CTX or for simple Hub or LAN connections.

For more complex LAN, WAN or Internet connections, refer to “Wide Area Networks and/or
Internet Connections” on page 3-5.
1. Setup PC modem settings for CTX WinAdmin. Click Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up
Connection > Make New Connection.
2. Click Next. Select radio button Dial-up to private network and click Next.
3. From the “Select a Device Screen” highlight the modem to be used to make a CTX WinAdmin dial-up
connection and click Next.
4. Do not enter Phone number, then click Next.
Note The phone number for Dial up is entered when setting up the Profile in Strata CTX WinAdmin. See

“User Management” on page 3-19.

Note The User name field on this screen will

Installation

5. Select radio button “For all users,” then click Next.
6. Use the recommended setting (Enable on-demand dialing) and click Next.
7. Type RemoteCTX1 as the name in
Connection Wizard (shown right), then click
Finish.
8. The Connect RemoteCTX1 screen displays.
automatically be populated.
9. Click on the Properties button of the Connect
RemoteCTX1 screen.
10. The RemoteCTX1 screen displays. Click on
the Networking tab and select Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) in the Components
checked are used by this connection box.
Then click Properties button.
11. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
screen displays. Select “Use the following IP Address” and enter
the IP address (192.168.255.x, where x can be 1~252. It cannot
be 253 or above. It cannot be the same as the CTX IP address in
Program 916 for CTX NIC Connections). This IP address is the
static IP address for the PC when using this modem connection.
Click OK.
12. The initial setup screen displays. Click Properties.
13. Click the Options tab and set up options to the recommended
settings (shown right).
Note Set “Idle time before hanging up” to more than one minute if

you are transferring CTX WinAdmin calls to the CTX builtin modem versus direct calls to the modem.
14. The initial setup screen displays, click Ok and exit.
15. Go to Step 3C: Verify Modem Hardware Settings.
16. Go to “Establish Communication with Strata CTX” on page 3-14.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-13

Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX

Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX
Make sure you have completed the Strata CTX to CTX WinAdmin setup procedures described in the first
part of this chapter before proceeding.
➤ To ensure your WinAdmin pages will automatically update

1. Open Internet Explorer.
2. Click on Tools > Internet Options...
3. Under Temporary Internet Files, click on
the Settings button.

4. Check for newer versions of stored
pages, set the radio button
to“Automatically.” Click OK. You only
need to perform these steps once (unless
the Settings are changed)

3-14

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX

➤ To establish communication with Strata CTX

1. Open Internet Explorer and point the browser to http://localhost/Ctmc_Local/Default.htm as shown in
the figure below or click on the CTX WinAdmin desktop icon. If the Internet Connection Wizard
displays, refer to Step 2 under “Step 1: Install CTX WinAdmin Software” on page 3-2.

2. Click Go. The Login screen
displays (shown right).
3. To log into CTX WinAdmin for
the first time, enter administrator
in User Name field and password
in the Password field.

Installation

4. Click on the Login button. The CTX
WinAdmin Title screen displays.
5. Click CTX (shown right) to go to the
connection setup screen.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-15

Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX

6. From the Connection Options Menu
(shown at right) enter the following:
• Community Name –
communityName (entry is case
sensitive). This is the default
community name for CTX
systems.
• CTX IP/Name – 192.168.254.253
(NIC). This is the default IP
Address of the CTX that is set in
CTX Program 916.
• IP Address –
192.168.255.254 This is
the CTX built-in modem fixed IP
address for
Dial-up connections. It cannot be
changed.
6065

Notes
●

●

If you are connecting to Strata CTX using your modem, click in the Use Dial-Up box and enter the
phone number to connect to your Strata CTX. The CTX IP address in the CTX IP Name field
automatically defaults to the Strata CTX modem’s static IP address.
If you are calling in from a modem line which is already connected to the CTX through manual
dialing, check the Use Dial-Up box. You do not have to enter anything in the Phone Number box.
When you hear modem tone, click Connect Now, then hang up.
If you have set up the Profile User Management screen with CTX site information, click on the CTX
Host name and IP address of the CTX listed in the box at the bottom of the screen.
Adding and Saving a new CTX connection can be done by clicking Profile > User Management. For
details see “User Management” on page 3-19.

7. Click on Connect Now. For CTX WinAdmin V2.10G.1 and higher, you will see a small dialog box
appears. Ignore this box. It will close automatically after you see the Connection Complete window and
click OK.
Important!

3-16

If you are not able to connect after clicking on the Connect Now button, then
re-check the set up steps described in this chapter.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX

Manual Dialing to Connect to the CTX Modem
If the CTX WinAdmin application is running in Windows operating systems and you want to dial in to
CTX manually with a bridged telephone (operator-assisted dialing) instead of having CTX WinAdmin dial
the phone number, perform the following:
Step 1: Connect to the CTX modem with manual dialing

1. Make sure that your dialing phone is bridge connected to your modem’s “Line” jack.
2. Set up your modem dialing for Windows Operator-Assisted Dialing by opening Network Connections
in the Control Panel.
3. On the Advanced menu at the top of the screen, select Operator-Assisted Dialing, then Exit.
Step 2: Make an operator-assisted call

1. Bring up the CTX
WinAdmin Connection
page (shown right).

3. Enter a comma or a
phone number in this
box.

You must enter
a comma or a
phone number.

Installation

2. Enter the CTX
Community Name (or
select a CTX Host
Name) and check Use
Dial-Up.

4. Click Connect Now.
5. Go off-hook with the
bridge telephone and
dial the CTX site
number.

7016

6. When the call is
answered by a person or
Auto Attendant, ask to
be transfered to the CTX
modem number #19.
The called party should
then hang up.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-17

Installation
Step 4: Establish Communication with Strata CTX

7. When you hear the modem beep or
steady modem tone from the CTX
modem, click OK from the
Operator Assisted Manual Dial
message box and then hang up the
bridged telephone.

7028

The WinAdmin and CTX modems
will communicate to start the
session and the dialing message
boxes will disappear.
8. Click OK.

7027

3-18

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 5: Use Profile to Add Users and CTX Systems

Step 5: Use Profile to Add Users and CTX
Systems
User Management
Prerequisite Program: None

This program lets only the Administrator add or remove users to CTX WinAdmin.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Profile > Users Management.
2. Enter new User Name, Password,
Confirm Password, and FAC
Group Level fields.
Note The Administrator screen will

displays (shown right). The
Administrator can add new
users using this screen. This
screen is only accessible when
logged in as Administrator
only.
3. Click Save.
4. Enter the remaining fields.
5. Click Add/Modify/Remove.
The screen (shown right) is
accessible to all users.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-19

Installation
Step 5: Use Profile to Add Users and CTX Systems

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

User Name

Enter the new User name. The initial user name of the Administrator is administrator. This
name cannot be changed.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
Note

Password

The Administrator is the only user that can add new users. The administrator user
name cannot be changed.

Enter the new password. The initial password is password. This password can be changed
by the administrator or user. The password is case sensitive.
To protect User Passwords, open Internet Explorer and go to Tools > Internet Options >
Content > Autocomplete. Uncheck User Names and Password on forms, then click on Clear
Passwords.

CAUTION!

Record all your passwords for CTX WinAdmin and passwords for any
other applications that use Internet Explorer.

Possible values: Alpha characters.
Confirm Password

Repeat password entered in Password field.
Possible values: Alpha characters.

FAC Group Level

Select the FAC Group Level.
Possible values: Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4 (default = No value.)
In the current version of CTX WinAdmin, all levels are the same and provide access to all
CTX WinAdmin functions.

CTX Host Name

Enter CTX Host Name (name to identify the CTX or customer).
Possible values: Alpha characters.

CTX IP/Name

Enter the IP Address of the CTX system. For the CTX NIC connection, enter the IP Address
of the CTX as set in Program 916. For Modem connections, always enter 192.168.255.254.
Possible values: Refer to “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-14.

Community Name

Enter the Community Name of the host.
Possible values: Alpha characters (default = communityName).
communityName is the default community name for all CTX systems. CTX community names
are assigned in the Operation section of CTX WinAdmin.

DialUp Number

Enter the telephone number for Dial Up access.
Possible values: Any telephone number (digits 0~9 and * or # and “,” for three-second
pauses.)
Note

Confirm Community
Name

3-20

The CTX modem number is #19

Re-enter the Community Name.
Possible values: Alpha characters.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Installation
Step 6: Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access

Step 6: Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access
Prior to CTX WinAdmin V2.10G, only Microsoft® Windows® XP or Windows 2000 Administrators
could use CTX WinAdmin to make changes. After CTX WinAdmin V2.10G has been installed, you can
enable CTX WinAdmin access to Windows Users who are members of the Windows Administrator’s
group.
Users who are logged in to Windows on accounts that are not members of the Administrators group will
also be able to use all features of the WinAdmin application including connection to CTX via dial-up
networking. The only exception is that these non-Administrator users cannot modify the User Profile.

Set Up Users for CTX WinAdmin Access
After CTX WinAdmin has been installed, you can enable CTX WinAdmin access to Windows Users who
are members of the Windows Administrator’s group. Prior to CTX WinAdmin V2.10G, only
Administrators could use CTX WinAdmin to make changes.
1. Go to the Windows Start button > Control Panel >
Administrative Tools > Component Services.
2. Locate and open My Computer >
COM+ Applications.
Installation

3. From the COM+ Applications folder, right click
on IIS-{default web site/root/ctmc_Local}. Select
Properties > Identity tab, then select “This User”
(change from Interactive User).
4. Enter or browse and locate a Windows User name
(User must be a member of the Windows
Administrator group). Enter a password, and reenter the password in the Confirm box. Click OK.
5. Click on “x” in the upper right corner to close out
of Windows. The Windows User entered in the
previous step can now access CTX WinAdmin.

Step 7: Exit CTX WinAdmin
1. From the Program Menu, click Home.
2. Click on Exit at the CTX Management Console page.
3. Close your browser.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

3-21

Installation
Step 7: Exit CTX WinAdmin

3-22

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System

This chapter provides Strata CTX system programming information for programmers using the CTX
WinAdmin programming interface.

100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
Prerequisite Program: None

All Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), excluding the system processors, are assigned to cabinet slots. The
processor PCBs have dedicated slots in the Base Cabinet which do not require this assignment. The system
provides one Base Cabinet and up to six Expansion Cabinets. The Base Cabinet provides eight slots and
each of the six Expansion Cabinets provide 10 slots for a total of 68 slots.
1. Fill out the “Card Assignment Record Sheets” on page D-1.
2. From the Program Menu click System >
Card Assignment. The Card Slot
Assignment screen displays (shown
right).

Select 01 for Base and 02~07
respectively for each Expansion cabinet
(CTX670).

System

3. Cabinet (01~07) – Select the two digit
cabinet number to be assigned. The
cabinet and slot number appear in the
cab/slot field. Select 01 for Base and
Expansion cabinet (CTX100).

4. Slot (01~10) – Select 01~04 for Base
Slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base Slots and 01~10
for Expansion Slots (CTX670).
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation, BIOU2 is

installed as default in a virtual equipment position; Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20 in Program 100.
To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to
remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01/Slot 01~08 in the normal
manner.
5. Select the PCB Type. Use the drop down menu to select the PCB type. WinAdmin will start a refresh
cycle, watch the progress bar (lower right corner of PC screen) to verify when WinAdmin is complete.
The PCB type that was selected will appear in the PCB Type field.
6. Click Submit to save your data.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-1

System
Dial Number Plan

Dial Number Plan
Prerequisite Program: None

The Dial Number Plan lets you download all
current dialing numbers registered in the CTX
database.
The Numbering Plan screen (shown right) gives
you details on the different categories of
Numbers.
The table below contains the information shown
on the screen to the right.

Number Type

Description

Digit Groups

Lists all numbers that begin with each digit 0~9 separately.

DKT Prime DNs

Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a digital telephone in Program 200.

SLT Prime DNs

Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a standard telephone in Program 200.

ISDN DNs

Lists all Directory Numbers assigned to ISDN telephones in Program 202.

Phantom DNs

Lists all Phantom Directory Numbers assigned to digital telephones, Add-On-Modules
and DSS consoles in Programs 205, 213, 215 respectively.

IPT Prime DNs

Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-M card in Program 200 (requires
CTX and WinAdmin Release 2.1 and above).

ACD Pilot

Lists all ACD Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 540.

Hunt Group Pilot

Lists all Hunt Group Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 209.

Access Codes

Lists all feature, line and line group access codes assigned in Program 102.

➤ Click Continue to view the next screen.

To the right is an example of all the
numbers programmed in the CTX
system.
You are able to view all the DNs, IPT
DNs and other numbers used.

4-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
102 Flexible Access Codes

102 Flexible Access Codes
Prerequisite Program: None

Strata CTX comes with pre-assigned Flexible Access Codes that the telephone dials to access features.
This enables you to create customized Flexible Access Codes. The Strata CTX Flexible Numbering Plan
associates features stored in memory (i.e., “Store Code,” see Table 4-1) to a Flexible Numbering Code
assigned by the user.
Note Flexible Numbering Plan access codes cannot conflict with DN assignments.

1. Enter your customized Flexible Numbering Plan in the “Programmed Value” column of Table 4-1.
2. From the Program Menu click
System > Flexible Numbering
Plan. The Numbering Plan
Assignment screen displays
(shown at right).
3. 00 Flexible Numbering Plan –
Enter the digits to be dialed
(0~9,#,*) to access a feature or an
OLG. To delete, select “No Data”
in “01 Feature Name.” Conflict
with an assigned DN will produce
an error.
4. 01 Flexible Numbering Feature –
Select the Flexible Numbering
Feature (see Table 4-1) to see
which access code is being
assigned.
Note To assign an access code to an OLG, select “Line Group access code - one access code for each
System

OLG.” To assign the prefix digit(s) for the access code of individual lines, select “Line access code leading digit(s) to access individual lines”. Example: If #7 is selected as the line access prefix, the
users will dial #7xxx to access an individual line (where xxx is the line number).
5. 02 OLG Number – Enter the Outgoing Line Group number to which the OLG access code is being
assigned. This field is only required if you chose “Line Group Access Code – one access code for each
OLG” for the Flexible Numbering Feature in Step 4 above. Enter a 0 in this field if a Feature Code other
than 551 was selected.
Note 02 OLG Number (0~32 CTX100; 0~50 CTX670 Basic; 0~128 CTX670 Expanded) field appears

only when 01 Feature Name Line Group Access Code – one access code for each OLG is selected.
6. Click Submit.
➤ To delete an access code assignment
➤ Click the Create button and enter the access code in the index, select No Assignment, click Submit.

This clears the access code so that you can reassign it to another feature.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-3

System
102 Flexible Access Codes

Creating New Feature Codes
1. Click on the Create button.
2. Enter new feature/access code. Click Ok. WinAdmin will start a refresh cycle, when your complete
screen will change to a gray (edit mode) color and the feature/access code will be red.
3. From the Feature Name drop down menu select the feature to be assigned.
4. Submit your data.
Notes

•

To range program feature/access codes use a “*” between a range of values and a “,” for an additional
entry not in a range.

•

System Date and Time Access Codes – These functions require CTX R1.02, MA227 or higher
software. The system date adjust code and system time adjust code is different for every system. The
defaults are #651 and #652 respectively.

Important!

If you backup a CTX database (default.dat) with a CTX software that does not support Time/
Date access codes and then restore it to a CTX software that supports these access codes,
you must use this program to set the Time/Date access codes. This must be done to allow end
users to set the Time/Date from their LCD digital telephones.

Flexible Numbering Default Settings
Table 4-1 shows the default Flexible Numbering Feature and Flexible Numbering Plan code relationships.
Pressing the Flexible Numbering Plan code from any station enables users to directly access the Flexible
Numbering Feature. The Feature Index Codes will display on the LCD of the telephone once the Default
Access Codes are entered.
Note These three-digit Feature Index Numbers should not be confused with the Program 205 three-digit

Button Codes.
Table 4-1

Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings
Flexible Numbering Feature

Feature
Index

Default
Programmed
Access Code
Value

No Data

4-4

ABR - Activate

150

ABR - Cancel

151

Call Park Orbits - Activate

170

Call Park Orbits - Park Answer (Retrieve Parked Call)

173

System Orbit Number

174

DND -Local Activation

180

DND -Local Cancellation

181

DND -Remote Activation

182

DND -Remote Cancellation

183

Door Lock Control -Unlock

190

Door Phones -Call

191

Flash -short

200

Flash -long

210

Group Paging -Invoke All Group Paging

220

Group Paging -Invoke Individual Group Paging

230

Answer for External Group Paging

232

Emergency Page -Invoke All Emergency Paging

240

Emergency Page -Invoke Individual Emergency Paging

250

Originate Call by Terminal Speed Dial (Index: 00-99)

260

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
102 Flexible Access Codes

Table 4-1

Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Flexible Numbering Feature

Feature
Index

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 000-099)

261

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 100-199)

262

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 200-299)

263

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 300-399)

264

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 400-499)

265

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 500-599)

266

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 600-699)

267

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 700-799)

268

269

Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Activation

340

Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Activation

341

Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Activation

342

Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Activation

343

Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Activation

350

Call Forward CF-B; External Call) - Activation

351

Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Activation

352

Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Activation

353

Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Remote Activation

360

Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Remote Activation

361

Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation

362

Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation

363

Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Remote Activation

370

Call Forward (CF-B; External Call) - Remote Activation

371

Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Remote Activation

372

Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Remote Activation

373

Call Forward (Any Call) - Cancellation

380
390

Call Forward (Any Call) - Remote Cancellation

400

Call Forward (External Call) - Remote Cancellation

410

Change Password for Remote Activation/Cancellation

420

Input Account Code

530

Change DISA Security Code

540

Outgoing Call by Directing Individual Trunk

550

Outgoing Call by Directing Outgoing Line Group

551

Three Way Conferencing (Override to Tandem Connection)

560

Enter User Programming Mode

570

LCR -Outgoing Call

580

Set Voice Mail Message Waiting (activate MW without ringing for VM)

591

Release Received Message Waiting

592

Release Sent Message Waiting (Cancel MW without ringing for VM))

593

MW Answer access code (Retrieve Received Message Waiting)

594

Cancel ACB

600

Start BGM

610

Stop BGM

611

Start BGM for External Paging Device

612

Stop BGM for External Paging Device

613

Built-in modem

630

Night Ring Answer

640

Travelling Class Override Code Input Number

650

Change Travelling Class Override Code

651

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

1RQH

System

Call Forward (External Call) - Cancellation

Default
Programmed
Access Code
Value

4-5

System
102 Flexible Access Codes

Table 4-1

Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Feature
Index

Flexible Numbering Feature

Default
Programmed
Access Code
Value

Activate System Call Forward

670

Cancel System Call Forward

671

Call Pickup -Directed DN Pickup of Ringing or Held DN calls and Call
Park Answer

678

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Group Pickup

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Terminal

681

Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Local Retrieve

686

Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Remote Retrieve

687

Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed DN Retrieve

688

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Group

682

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed DN

683

Call Pickup1 - Directed DN pickup for either Ringing or Held Calls (Release
2.0, MF017 or higher)

679

Transfer to Voice Mail

690

Repeat Last Number Dialed

700

Volume Control for BEEP

710

Change LCD Display Language

720

Advisory Message - Activation

730

Advisory Message - Cancellation

731

Emergency Call

740

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Any External Call

684

Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed CO Retrieve

685

Attendant Console Group Access Code

750

Operator Call Special Dial (for Tenant Service)

751

Private Network Access Code

760

Node ID (Coordinated Directory Number Prefix)

770

Substitution of Dial *

780

Substitution of Dial #

781

Originate Call with Sub Address -Outgoing Call/Internal Call

782

Application starting access code

800

Split (Conference)

860

System Date Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)

910

System Time Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)

911

1RQH

1. Feature key is not provided for this Call Pickup. If you want a feature key, please use Single Touch Button that has
a feature access code for this call pickup.

4-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis

117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
Prerequisite Program: None

This program is used to prevent users from circumventing Destination Restriction (DR) by sending tones
directly to the PSTN before DR analysis is complete. It defines the number of digits expected in PSTN
numbers beginning with identified sequences.
For example, a number starting with the toll prefix “1” would be expected to be 11 digits long. Calls will
be cut through to the public network only after the expected number of digits have been received.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Public Numbering Plan.
The Public numbering Plan
Analyzed Digit Number
Assignment screen displays (shown
at right).
2. Enter the Prefix Number used for
external calls.
3. Select Digits to Follow.
4. Click Submit.

DESCRIPTION

00 Prefix Number

Enter the initial, identifying external digits. 1 to 7 digits may include wild cards
“X” and “N”.

System

FIELD

Possible values: 1~7 (N = 2~9 and X = 0~9) (default = no value)
01 Digits to Follow

Select the number of digits to follow the prefix number established above. It is
the total number of digits in a number beginning with the Prefix Number above.
Possible values: 0~64 (default = 0)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-7

System
103 Class of Service

103 Class of Service
Prerequisite Program: None

Class of Service (COS) assignments are a registration of feature capabilities to a specific user or group of
users. Up to 32 COS feature sets can be registered.
1. Enter your COS assignments in the “COS
Record Sheet” on page D-4.
2. From the Program Menu click System >
Class of Service The Class of Service
Assignment screen displays (shown
right).
3. COS Number – Select the COS Number
(1~32).
4. Place a check mark in each of the
services you wish to enable.
5. Click Submit.

4-8

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Auto Busy Redial

Enable Automatic Busy Redial after dialing a busy outside destination.

02 Call Forward Override

Enable Call Forward Override. If enabled, this station does not forward
calls from a calling station with System or Station Call Forward
activated. This includes when dialing from the dial pad or DSS button
located on the telephone or DSS console.

03 Call Transfer w/ Camp-on

Allows a call transferred by a station to Camp-on to a busy destination.

04 Change DISA Codes

Enable stations to change the DISA Security Code.

05 DND Override - Calling Party

Permits a caller to override the DND status of a station.

06 DND Override - Called Party

Permits calling parties with DND Override privileges to override DND
status.

07 Do Not Disturb

Enables user to place stations on DND mode.

08 Remote Set/Reset DND

Enables stations with the ability to set/reset DND on other phones.

09 Executive Override

Enable Executive Override on a call.

10 Executive Override Allowed

Permit Executive Override for incoming callers.

11 Offhook Camp-on

Enable Off-hook Camp-on when encountering a busy destination.

12 Group Pickup

Enable stations for Group Call Pickup within one’s own group.

13 Directed Station Pickup

Enable stations to pick another specific ringing station.

14 Directed Group Call Pickup

Enable stations to pick up a ringing station in a specified group.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
103 Class of Service

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

15 Directed DN Call Pickup

Enable stations to pick up a specified DN.

16 Ext Call Pickup

Enable stations to pick up any incoming trunk call.

17 Directed CO Call Pickup

Enable stations to pick up a specific incoming trunk call.

18 Remote Retrieve Call Pickup

Enable stations to retrieve any call placed on Hold at a designated
terminal (PDN).

19 DN Retrieve Call Pickup

Enable stations to retrieve a held call on another DN.

20 Handsfree Override

Permit stations to override Hands Free Answerback with Ringing mode.

21 Privacy Override

Enable stations to override a private call.

23 Invoke Emergency Page

Enable the Emergency Page feature.
Note

Not used in Release 1.

Enable the Join feature (Attendant Feature).

25 Through Dialing

Enable the Perform Through Dialing (Attendant Feature).

26 Tandem CO Connection

Set up a Trunk-to-Trunk connection.

27 Day/Night Control

Enable Day/Night Mode changing privilege.

28 Ext BGM Control

Permit BGM over external speakers to be turned on/off.

29 LCR Feature

Enable access to LCR.

30 Individual Trunk Access

Enable Dial individual trunk access codes to access specific lines.

31 Trunk Access Allowed

Enable Access trunk groups by trunk access codes.

32 Forced Account Codes

Use Forced Account Codes for placing external calls.

33 Verified Account Codes

Verify Account Codes before an external call is placed.

34 Allow Short Hook Flash

Use a Short Flash signal over outside lines.

35 Allow Long Hook Flash

Use a Long Flash signal over outside lines.

36 Allow Hook Flash

Receive hook flash over CO Lines, and enable telephones and voice
mail ports to perform hook flashes.

38 Can Receive OCA

Permission for others to call this station using Off-hook Call Announce.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System

24 Join Feature

4-9

System
104 System Timer

104 System Timer
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns the system timers. System timers set a variety of times to control calls and features
for the Strata CTX.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > System Timer. System
Timer Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. Select the desired timer value for
each of the 19 fields.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 ACB Callback Timer

The Automatic Callback timer sets the time (5 ~ 180 seconds) that the callback will
be attempted before being cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 sec. (default = 30)

02 ACB Cancel Recall
Timer

Select the ACB overall timer value. This value establishes a limit for registering a
callback. Once the timer expires, the callback will be cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 min. (default = 30)

03 Park Recall Timer

Select the Park timer value. This sets the length of time a call can remain in Park.
Possible values: 10~600 sec. (default = 120)

04 Camp-on Timer

Select Camp-on timer value. This sets the time needed to remain off-hook prior to
Camp-on being automatically activated.
Possible values: 5~15 sec. (default = 10)

05 SMDR Valid Call Timer

The length of time that a call should be active before being captured by SMDR. The
SMDR Answer timer sets a default time for when an outgoing call will be considered
to be answered for SMDR reporting when a true answer signal is not returned from
the public network. Setting the too time short will include calls that may not be
completed, setting the time too long may exclude short calls that are answered and
terminated in a short time.
Possible values: 0~180 sec. (default = 10)

06 Tandem Timer #1

Select timer for a Trunk-to-trunk connection for which neither CO Line has release
supervision, a timer is needed to release the call if no user monitoring has taken place.
Possible values: 0~3600 sec. (default = 300)

07 Tandem Timer #2

Provides the time to enable an external user to dial a digit to extend the disconnect
time when the connection is unsupervised. This feature is used primarily with DISA.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)

08 Call Forward No Ans
Time

The System Call Forward No Answer timer specifies the time period that a phone will
ring prior to invoking the Call Forward operation.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 30)

4-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
104 System Timer

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

09 Dial Input Timer

Permits dialed input for a telephone and trunk using DTMF.
Possible values: 0~60 sec. (default = 20)

10 Delay 1 Ringing Timer

Specifies the time to wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 12)

11 Delay 2 Ringing Timer

Selects the time to wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 24)

12 Door Unlock Timer

Select the length of time to send an electrical signal to a door for releasing the lock.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 6)

13 9+11 Judgement Timer

The 9+11 Inter-digital timer provides a timing value (1~30 seconds) for the system to
wait for additional digits to be dialed looking for the 911 or 9+911 dialed codes for
treatment using the E911 procedures rather than normal dialing treatment.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 5)

14 Emergency Call Timer

Sets a time for advancing the call to the next station in a list of destinations for the
call.
Possible values: 10~180 sec. (default = 30)

15 ABR Busy Detection
Time

The Destination Busy Detection timer sets the time to wait while looking for a busy
condition on an external call. If detected, it will trigger the initiation of the Automatic
Busy Redial cycle.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 5)

16 Lost Call Timer

The Lost Call timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
originating station prior to attempting to recall a secondary location.
Possible values: 1~600 sec. (default = 180)

System

17 Lost Call Final Timer

The Lost Call Final timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
secondary location before being automatically disconnected.
Possible values: 1~600 sec. (default = 30)

18 DTMF Tone Sending
Time

The DTMF tone sending duration for dialing on CO Lines.

19 Auto Disconnect

Time after which an unsupervised trunk may be automatically released.

Possible values: 80msec (default) or 160msec

Possible values: 0~60 min. (default = 0)
23 System Timer Network
DSS Refresh Timer

Select Network DSS Refresh Timer (20 -180 seconds). The time interval when all
Network DSS settings are refreshed system wide.
Note

DSS button LEDs change state immediately when the status of the DSS
button changes - regardless of this timer value.

Possible values: 20~180 seconds (default = 30)
24 Outgoing Number
Display Timer

This timer sets how long dialed numbers will display on telephone LCDs for outgoing
line calls. (This feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values:1~120 seconds (default = 10)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-11

System
105 System Data

105 System Data
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns system settings for your Strata CTX.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > System Data. The
System Data Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter System Parameter data
using the table below.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Executive Override

Enable break in warning tone for Executive Override.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

02 Station MOH

Select MOH for private lines and stations.
Possible values: Quiet Tone, External 1 (default), External 2, External 3, External
4, External 5, External 6, External 7, External 8, External 9,
External 10, External 11, External 12, External 13, External 14 or
External 15

03 Ring Transfer Tone

Select tones for the transferred party to hear after a ringing transfer takes place.
Possible values: RBT (default) or MOH

04 Transfer Privacy

Transfer Privacy enabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will only
flash and ring on the transferred-to telephone; the same CO line button on other
telephones will be red-busy.
Transfer Privacy Disabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will flash
and ring on all telephones that have the CO line button appearance.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

05 Privacy Override

Enable Privacy Override Attendant Monitor warning.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

06 Credit Card Code

Enter Service Indentifier for Credit Card Calling. If no value is entered in this field
any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

07 Credit Card Digits

Enter the Minimum Dial Digits for Credit Card Calling.
Possible values: 1~66 (default = 21)

08 E911 Service

Enable E911 Service availability.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

4-12

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
105 System Data

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

09 DR Override by SSD

Enable DR Override by System Speed Dial.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

10 Auto Station Release

Enable Automatic Station Release.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

11 ISDN SPID

Enable Auto Service Profile Identifier (SPID).
Possible values: Operable or Not Operable (default)

12 Night Mode Relay

Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Relay. This relay activates when the system is in
the Night Mode.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note

13 BGM External Paging

On CTX100 the ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
operation, in Program 100 the BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2, Slot 5,
PCB code 20.

Set the External Page Group Number that includes the external paging zones to
which BGM will be sent. See Program 503
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100)
0~8 (CTX670 Basic)
0~16 (CTX670 Expanded) (default = 0)

14 Lost Call Destination

Enter Lost Call Destination. If no value is entered in this field any previously
programmed data is lost.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

15 COS Override Code

Class of Service Override Code Digits (1-8 digits). The digit length of COS override
codes. COS override codes are set in Program 510.

System

Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
16 Multi-Conference

Enable Multi-Conference capabilities for Analog Internal Calls and Outgoing Calls.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

17 Caller Number Display

Enable Caller Number Display. If a soft key display competes with a Caller ID, the
Caller ID displays.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

18 Night Bell Relay

Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Bell Relay; this relay activates whenever Night
Ringing takes place.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note

19 Display Preference

On CTX100 the ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
operation, in Program 100 the BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2 Slot 5,
PCB code 20.

Select Display Preference.
Possible values: DNIS (default) or Caller ID

20 Transit Counter

Select the Networking Transit Counter. This device limits the number of nodes
through which a QSIG call can pass before being terminated as a lost call.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 1)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-13

System
105 System Data

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

21 Primary Clock

Enter data as xxyyzz.

22 Secondary Clock

zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz=channel 01, 02, 03 , or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Primary Clock Source should be a assigned to an RPTU in cabinet
5, slot 2, enter 050201.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

23 Call History Prefix 1

Add the dialing prefix 1 when using the callback feature in Call History.
Possible values: Add (default) or Do Not Add

24 Emergency Digits Sent

Enter an alternative emergency dialing string. If no value is entered in this field any
previously programmed value is overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = 911)

25 DP Make Ratio

Select the Dial Pulse Make/Break ratio.
Possible values: 33% (default) or 40%

26 Call Button Jumping

Select whether to execute Jumping LED.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

•

If enabled, line calls move from a telephone DN button to a line button after they
are answered. After answering the call, the DN button is cleared to receive
another call.
With Call Jumping, the DN acts as an Answer button. This only applies if the line
that is answered has a CO/GCO/Pooled button appearance on the telephone.

•
39 Std. Tel. Ringing
Cadence

If disabled, line calls remain on the DN after they are answered.

Select the Ringing Cadence for Standard Telephone circuits. This parameter is
available only with CTX WinAdmin R2.1 and above.
Note
This does not apply to Digital to IP telephones.
(Ringing Type1)
External Ring:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:20Hz, 0.4sec.ON - 0.2sec. OFF
- 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 1sec. OFF
(Ringing Type2)
’Ringing Type2’ is the same Ringing Cadence as DK.
External Ring:20Hz, 0.4sec. ON - 0.2sec. OFF
- 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:20Hz, 1sec.ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF

41 CSTA B-Ch. Operation

Enabled - CSTA shall provide full ’B’ Channel path information. Disabled - CSTA
shall provide channel group only.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

4-14

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
System Call Forward

System Call Forward
Program Number(s): 500 and 504

Set up System Call Forward (SCF) parameters using the following programs.
1. Complete the “System Call Forward
Record Sheets” on page D-6.
2. From the Program Menu, click System >
System Call Forward. The System Call
Forward Destination screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Program 500 data.
4. Enter Program 504 data.
5. Click Submit.

500 System Call Forward Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This assignment is used to configure up to 32 system call forward patterns. Station DNs are assigned to
these patterns in the station COS assignments.
Note The Administrator programs the condition of transfer by setting Call Type, Period and Telephone

Status. Destinations 1 and 2 should be programmed after transfer conditions are set.
DESCRIPTION

00 SCF Number

Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values: 1~4 (CTX100), 1~10 (CTX670 Basic),
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

01 Call Type

System

FIELD

Select the type of call that should forward in this pattern.
Possible values: CO Loop or Grd, DID, Tie, Ring Transfer and Internal
(default = no value)

02 Period

Select the system time period in which this SCF pattern should operate.
Possible values: Day1, Day2 or Night (default = no value)

03 Telephone Status

Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to operate.
Possible values: Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or DND (default = no value)

04 Destination 1

Select the first destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

05 Destination 2

Select an alternate destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-15

System
System Call Forward

504 System Call Forward Operation Status
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns System Call Forward (SCF) Type for the pattern.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 SCF Number

Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values: 1~4 (CTX100), 1~10 (CTX670 Basic),
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

01 Telephone Status

Select the status or state in which the telephone should be for this system call
forward pattern to activate.
Possible values: No Data (default), Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or DND

System Call Forward Copy
The copy function enables you to selectively copy SCF destinations to any or all SCF segments and any or
all SCF templates. It combines Program 500 and Program 504 on the same screen.
Note They were separate screens in previous versions of CTX WinAdmin.

1. Select System > System Call Forward > a SCF template (1-32) and then a Telephone Status (example
“Busy No Answer”). The System Call Forward screen displays (shown above) showing the status of the
first available call forwarding system.
2. Select the needed values from the drop-down menus for the System Call Forward and Telephone Status
fields. These fields are required. As soon as the second field is selected, the full page displays for
editing.
Note If it is not yet configured, the Telephone Status field indicates No Forwarding.

3. Select Call Type and Period by highlighting the desired line in the display.
4. Type the needed information into the Destination 1 and 2 fields. Destination 1 is always required,
Destination 2 is optional.
5. Click Submit to send the data to the CTX.
6. Click Submit to send the destination assignments to the CTX
...or click Copy to display the Copy dialog box. You can click on Copy at any time to copy Destinations
to any SCF template, Call type and period, including all SCF segments and templates.

4-16

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
System Call Forward Table View

Copy Dialog Box

➤ To copy SCF Destinations to any selected SCF assignment

click Copy on the System Call Forward screen. The System
Call Forward Range Copy screen displays (shown right).
➤ To select the Destination(s) that should be copied

1. You can remove a destination entry by removing the
checkmark from it.
2. Select the appropriate Period, Call type, Status and SCF
assignments to which the destination(s) should be copied.
3. Click Copy Now. Your entries are submitted to the CTX and
the destination(s) are copied to all assignments that you
selected.
Possible Errors
• If you attempt to remove Destination1 (only) when there is a
Destination2 assigned.
• If you attempt to assign Destination2 when Destination1 is not assigned.
Notes

•
•
•

If you check “Prompt on Error,” the copy function stops if one of the above errors occurs, then you are
given a choice to continue or abort. Continue skips the error and does not perform the copy.
If you do not check “Prompt on Error,” all errors, if any, are skipped and the copy is not executed.
You can assign or remove both destinations at the same time without causing an error.

System Call Forward Table View
➤ To access the SCF Table View

System

SCF Table View shows the entire set up of
all available system call forward levels.

➤ Select System > SCF Table View.

See “Table Views” on page 2-6 for table
functionality.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-17

System
501 System Speed Dial

501 System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: None

System Speed Dial consists of up to 800 pre-programmed numbers each containing up to 32 digits. If the
number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will automatically be appended to
create longer numbers. One other speed dial location can be nested within the number for dialing a
common routine with the number (see “516 Station Speed Dial” on page 5-34 for more information about
nesting).
1. Complete the “System Speed Dial
Record Sheet” on page D-7.
2. From the Program Menu, click System >
System Speed Dial. The System Speed
Dial screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 501 data.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Speed Dial Bin

Enter the speed dial bin location.
Possible values: 000~799 (default = no value)

01 Number

This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 1~9 (seconds), which is the length of
the pause.

02 Name

This is the Name that appears on Telephone LCD dial directories.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)

4-18

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
System Speed Dial Table View

System Speed Dial Table View
System Speed Dial Table View
shows the entire set up for all
speed dial numbers.
➤ To access the System Speed Dial

Table View
➤ Select System > System Speed

Dial Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6
for table functionality.

Day Night Service
Program Number(s): 112, 106 and 113

The programs that follow are used to set up Day and Night modes in Strata CTX.
1. Complete the “Day/Night Mode
Record Sheet” on page D-8.
System

2. From the Program Menu click
System > Day Night Services. The
Day Night Mode Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Calendar Day
(YYYYMMDD) to assign a
Working Day Type schedule
...or click on one of the following
buttons.
• List – View a summary list of
programmed Calendar days.
• Create – Assign a new Calendar
Day with custom settings.
• Copy – Copies the currently
viewed record to another record(s).
4. Enter remaining Program 112 data.
5. Enter Program 106 data.
6. Enter Program 113 data.
7. Click Submit.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-19

System
Day Night Service

112 Day/Night Mode Calendar
Prerequisite Program: 106 on page 4-20

This program enables you to assign Working Day Types for up to 128 unique Calendar Days. These
settings override the default system schedules in Strata CTX to enable Day/Night scheduling for unique
circumstances.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Tenant Number

Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.)
Possible values:1~8.

00 Calendar Day

Enter the Calendar Day for which to assign a Working Day Type schedule.
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Day (default = no value)

01 Working Day Type

Select the Working Day Type.
Possible values: Delete (default), Work Day, Non-Work Day or Holiday

106 Day/Night Mode “Type of Day” Mapping Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 113 on page 4-21

The Day of the Week schedule defines each day as the type of day the schedule shall follow. These types of
days are called Work Day, Non-work Day, and Holiday. Each day of the week can be classified.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Tenant Number

Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.)
Possible values:1~8.

01 Monday

Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the week.

02 Tuesday

Possible values: Work Day (default), Non-work Day or Holiday

03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday

4-20

06 Saturday

Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the weekend.

07 Sunday

Possible values: Work Day, Non-work Day (default) or Holiday

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
Day Night Service

113 Day/Night Mode Schedule per Tenant Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

The Day/Night Mode daily schedule defines the times for the start of the Work Day, Non-work Day, and
Holiday for each of the modes (Day, Day2. Night) per Tenant. Each “type of day” defined in “106 Day/
Night Mode “Type of Day” Mapping Table Assignment” on page 4-20 requires an assigned schedule.
Complete “Day/Night Mode Record Sheet” on page D-8.
Note The start time for Day 1 mode equals the end time for Night mode.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Tenant Number

Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.).
Possible values:1~8.

Work Day

Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start time for Work Day day type.

•

01 Day 1 Mode

Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)

•

02 Day2 Mode

•

03 Night Mode

Note

9999 deletes or skip modes.

Non-Work Day

Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Non-Work Day day type.

•

04 Day 1 Mode

Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)

•

05 Day2 Mode

•

06 Night Mode

Note

Enter 9999 deletes or skip modes.

Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Holiday Day day type.

•

07 Day 1 Mode

Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)

•

08 Day2 Mode

•

09 Night Mode

Note

9999 deletes or skip modes.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System

Holiday

4-21

System
PAD Table

PAD Table
Program Number(s): 107, 108 and 114

Assign PAD groups, PAD Tables and PAD Conference Tables using these programs.
1. From the Program Menu click System >
PAD Table. The PAD Table Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 107 data.
3. Enter Program 108 data.
4. Enter Program 114 data.
5. Click Submit.
Note Clicking *Note displays Table 4-2 for

Program 107 and Table 4-3 for Program
108.

5699

107 PAD Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

Assigns additional Sender and Receiver PAD values to PAD groups in the PAD table.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Sender PAD Device
Number

Enter Sender PAD Device Number from PAD Table.

02 Receiver PAD Device
Number

Enter Receiver PAD Device Number from PAD Table.

03 PAD Loss

Enter PAD Value (See Table 4-2 below, or click on the drop down menu). The
value shown shows the net effect.

Possible values: Up to 3 digits. 101~132 (CTX670 Expanded),
101~110 (CTX670)
101~106 (CTX100),(default = no value), see Table 4-2 below.

Possible values: Up to 3 digits. 101~132 (CTX670 Expanded),
101~110 (CTX670)
101~106 (CTX100)
(default = no value), see Table 4-2 below.

Note

To pad is to insert loss; therefore, “negative loss” equals net gain.

Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain, 2 = 3dB Net Gain, 3 = 0dB, 4 = 3dB Net
Loss, 5 = 6dB Net Loss, 6 = 9dB Net Loss, 7 = 12dB Net Loss
or 8 = 15dB Net Loss (default = no value).

4-22

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
PAD Table

Analog Telephone

DKT

0
0

Analog Trunk

T1 Trunk

ISDN Station

ISDN Trunk

Conference Bridge

8
9

(0)

Music Source

Ext. Paging

IPT

-6

101

PAD Group 12

-3

102

PAD Group 23

PAD Group 32

Sender (Speaker)

131 132

PAD Group 31

PAD Group 2

Receiver (Listener)

101 102

PAD Group 1

IPT

ISDN Station

Ext. Paging

T1 Trunk

Music Source

Analog Trunk

CONF Bridge

DKT

PAD Device Number

ISDN Trunk

1
Analog Telephone

PAD Table

PAD Device Number

Table 4-2

131

PAD Group 31

132

PAD Group 32

2. For IP QSIG only. The default values for PAD Group 1 is 0dB. dB is the value for attenuation level.
3. For PRI QSIG only.

System

Notes
1. “X” data set for PAD Conference table Assignment

108 PAD Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

You can enter up to 32 additional devices to the PAD table to deal with exceptions to the default table.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 PAD Group Device Type

Enter the Device Type from Table 4-3 below.
Possible values: Up to 6 digits.
x = Device Type; yyyyy = Device number
(default = no value)

01 PAD Group Number

Enter the PAD Group Number
Possible values: 0~6 (CTX100), 0~6 (CTX100 Basic), 0~32 (CTX670 Exp.),
(default = 0)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-23

System
PAD Table

Table 4-3

PAD Group Device Type Examples

Device Name

Device
Type

DKT, SLT, ISDN, Station

0~99999 (PDN)

if DKT device = 200, value = 1200.

ISDN Trunk

1~128 (Channel Group Number)

if Channel Group # = 10, value = 210.

Analog Trunk, T1 Trunk

1~264 (Trunk Number)

if Trunk # = 120, value = 3120.

none (Conference Bridge is only
one)

value = 4.

Music Source

1~15 (Music Port)

if Music port = 8, value = 58.

External Paging Device

1~8 (Zone Relay Number)

if External Paging Device = 3, value = 63.

Conference Bridge

Device Number

Example

114 PAD Conference Assignment
This program enables you to assign PAD values for combinations of analog trunks and telephones in
conference.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 PAD Conference Trunks

Enter the number of analog trunks using Table 4-4 “PAD Conference Table” on
page 4-24.
Possible values: 0~6 (default = 0)

02 PAD Conference
Telephone

Enter the number of analog telephones. See Table 4-4 below.

03 PAD Conference Value

Enter the desired PAD Value for the combination of analog trunks and
telephones specified in PAD Conference Trunks and Telephones above. The
value shown shows the net effect.

Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)

Note

To pad is to insert loss; therefore, “negative loss” equals net gain.

Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain, 2 = 3dB Net Gain, 3 = 0dB, 4 = 3dB Net
Loss, 5 = 6dB Net Loss, 6 = 9dB Net Loss, 7 = 12dB Net
Loss or 8 = 15dB Net Loss (default = no value).

Table 4-4

PAD Conference Table

Number of Analog
Trunks

Number of Analog Telephones

4-24

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
110 Password

110 Password
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns the password. The system has two passwords levels for. Logging into the system
with the Level 1 password enables the user to administer all system programs while the level 2 password
provides restricted program administration.
1. From the Program Menu click System >
Password.
2. Enter 00 Password Level.
3. Enter 01 Password.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Password Level

Enter the digit 1 or 2 for the password as follows:

01 Password

Enter the desired password.
Note

System

Possible values: Enter 1 to set the unrestricted administration password.
Enter 2 to set a restricted administration password.
Level 2 users can administer all programs but are restricted from
initializing the CTX and from updating the CTX software
(default = no value).

Only one password can be set for each level.

Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII character (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-25

System
109 Music on Hold

109 Music on Hold
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns external Music on Hold (MOH) and Background Music (BGM) sources.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Music on Hold. The
External Music on Hold Source
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. For fields 01~07, click in the
adjacent radio button to activate
MOH/BGM.
3. For fields 08~15, enter the
equipment location identifier and
check the Connected box to
activate.
4. Click Submit.

4-26

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
109 Music on Hold

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

MOH/BGM #1 (BECU)

For MOH/BGM #1~#7, click in the radio button to enable MOH/BGM for the
specified PCB.

MOH/BGM #2 (BIOU1-J1)

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

MOH/BGM #3 (BIOU1-J2)
MOH/BGM #4 (BIOU1-J3)
MOH/BGM #5 (BIOU2-J1)
MOH/BGM #6 (BIOU2-J2)
MOH/BGM #7 (BIOU2-J3)
MOH/BGM #8 (RSTU)
MOH/BGM #9 (RSTU)
MOH/BGM #10 (RSTU)

Enter the RSTU equipment number to which MOH/BGM source #8 or #9~#15
are connected. Enter data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the MOH/BGM source should be a assigned to an RSTU in cabinet
5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.

MOH/BGM #12 (RSTU)

A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if it is to be a MOH
circuit. If a PDN is assigned to the circuit that will connect to a MOH/BGM
source, you must first delete it using PRG201

MOH/BGM #13 (RSTU)

Cabinet numbers:

MOH/BGM #11 (RSTU)

MOH/BGM #14 (RSTU)
MOH/BGM #15 (RSTU)

CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.

Notes
• A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if it is to be a
MOH circuit.

•

System

CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

If a PDN is assigned to an MOH/BGM circuit, you must first delete the PDN
using PRG201

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-27

System
I/O Device

I/O Device
Program Number(s): 803, 801 and 804

These commands assign LAN devices, RS-232C devices and device relationships for I/O Logical Devices
SMDR, SMDI, CTI and physical ports.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > I/O Device. The
Equipment Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 803 data.

803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments
This program assigns one of the following:
• SMDR and Toshiba Proprietary Integration (TPI) to the logical device and BSIS, RS-232 port numbers.
• WinAdmin, ACD server, TPI and Attendant Console to BECU, Network Jack logical device and LAN
port numbers.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Logical Device Number

Select the 3 digit logical device number for SMDR, SMDI, and LAN devices or Network
application. See Table 4-5.
Possible values: 100 = SMDR
200~208 = CTI LAN devices or PCs (default = no value)
300 = SMDI of TPI
400 = BLF (for CTX Attendant Console)
500 = DSS (for Telephone, DSS Console, and ADM DSS buttons)
Note

01 Device Connection

BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and
with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.

1. Select RS-232 for SMDR or SMDI devices or PCs. These devices are connected to
BSIS, RS-232 ports.
2. Select LAN for WinAdmin, ACD Server, TPI, and Attendant Console PC. These
devices are connected to the BECU Network Jack directly or via a HUB or LAN.
Possible values: None (default), LAN or RS-232

4-28

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
I/O Device

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Device Port No.

Select the Device Port numbers (one port per device).
Possible values: For a RS-232 connection: 1~4 (default = 1)
For an LAN connection: 1~9 (default = 1)
For BLF Networking: 11
For DSS Networking: 12
Notes
• SMDR and SMDI devices can be assigned to any BSIS RS-232 Port.
• BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and with
CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
• LAN devices and PCs can be assigned to logical Ports 1~9 according to the
following logical device number assignments:
LAN Port1 = device 200
LAN Port2 = device 201
LAN Port3 = device 202
LAN Port4 = device 203
LAN Port5 = device 204
LAN Port6 = device205
LAN Port7 = device206
LAN Port8 = device207

Table 4-5

Device Table
Logical Device
Serial Number

Physical Device
LAN

PPP

RS-232C

Smart
Media

Define I/O
Logical
Device
Number

SMDR

100

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

300

301

CTI

SMDI

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System

Logical
Device

4-29

System
I/O Device

801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 803 on page 4-28 and 804 on page 4-32.

This screen assigns Strata CTX LAN
parameters, enabling PC applications
to connect to the BECU network jack.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > I/O Device. The
Equipment Assignment screen
displays.
2. Click the LAN Device tab. 801
Network Jack LAN Device
Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Program 801 data.

6538

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 LAN Port Number

Enter the port number of the LAN device to be assigned. Refer to “803 SMDR SMDI
CTI Port Assignments” on page 4-28.
Possible values: 1~12 (default = no value)
Notes
Program the local port number for LCD Control of Voice Mail

•

01 Protocol

•

Use the same Device Port No. (11) for Network BLF.

•

Use 10 for Network TPI

•

Use 12 for Network DSS

•

Network BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.

Select communication Protocol.
Possible values: TCP (default) or UDP
Note

02 PC Operation Type

Select UDP for Network DSS.

Select the Operation Type.

•

If Server is selected, enter 04 Server Port Number.

•

If Client is selected, enter the 05 Client IP Address.

Possible values: Server (default) or Client
Note
03 Data Flow

Select Client for TPI.

Select the data flow protocol for CTX and PC communications.
Note

If the logical device set up in “803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments” on
page 4-28 is set to CTI, this field must be set to Asynchronous data flow.

Possible values: Synchronization or Asynchronization (default = Asynchronization)

4-30

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
I/O Device

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

04 Server Port Number

Enter the Server Port Number and proceed to 07 Read Retry Number. This field is
required if Server was selected in 02 PC Operation Type above. If not, leave this field
blank and proceed to 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
Note

05~08 Client IP
Address

Use 6000 for Network BLF, 3000 for Network DSS and 5000 for Network
TPI.

Enter the Client LAN IP Address. This field is required if Client was selected in 02 PC
Operation Type above.
Possible values: 0~255 for each octet (default = 0)
Note
Enter IP address of Stratagy iES32 or SES.

09 Client Port Number

Enter the Client Port number. This field is required if Client was selected in 02 PC
Operation Type above.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)

10 Read Retry Number

Select the Read Retry counter.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 1)

11 Write Retry Number

Select the Write Retry counter.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 1)

System

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-31

System
I/O Device

804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup
Prerequisite Program: None

Use this screen to setup the RS-232
serial ports on the BSIS PCB.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > I/O Device. The
Equipment Assignment screen
displays.
2. Click the RS232 Serial Port tab. 804
BSIS RS232 Serial Port Set Up
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 804 data.
4. Click Submit.
6539

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 BSIS Port (1~4)

Enter the BSIS PCB port number.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)

01 Port Speed

Select the data speed for the BSIS port in bits per second (bps).
Possible values: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400 or 57600
Note
The total combined maximum speed of BSIS ports cannot exceed 57,600 bps.

02 Port Parity

Select the parity error checking method used by the BSIS port.
Possible values: None, Even or Odd (default)

03 Data Bits

Select Data Length.
Possible values: 7 Bits (default) or 8 Bits

04 Flow Control

This setting indicates the type of flow control used between the BSIS port and the SMDI
or SMDR device. To enable Strata CTX to buffer call records, set this field to Flow.
Possible values: None (default) or Flow

05 Wait Timer

4-32

Select the maximum time to wait for connection. The Timer value can be one through
255 seconds. Select 0 to set to permanent waiting.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 30)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
115 Advisory Messages

115 Advisory Messages
Prerequisite Program: None

This command specifies a set of messages that users may apply to their telephone to provide status
information when others call your station. These messages can be customized to include a directory
number, time or date as part of the message.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Advisory Messages. The
Advisory Message Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
2. Select the Message Number.
3. Enter the desired message in 01
Message.
4. Select 02 Additional Digits Type.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Message Number

Select from 5 pre-programmed messages or 5 custom messages. See Table 4-6
below for details.
Possible values: 0~4 = pre programmed messages, 5~9 = custom messages
(default = 0)
Enter the Advisory Message to be displayed on the receiving parties LCD.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 User Entered Variable

System

01 Message

Select the type of Additional Digits that can be appended to complete the
Advisory Message. The total message cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values: None (default), DN, Time or Date

Table 4-6

Advisory Message Default Code Table
#

Advisory Message

Type of Additional

OUT TO LUNCH

None

IN A MEETING

None

CALL

Directory Number

BACK AT

Time

RETURN ON

Date

(No Data)

None

(No Data)

None

(No Data)

None

(No Data)

None

(No Data)

None

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-33

System
116 Data Initialize

116 Data Initialize
Prerequisite Program: None

This program is used to initialize the tables of selected programs in the Strata CTX system.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > Data Initialize. The Data
Initialize screen displays (shown
right).
2. Select a Program to initialize from
the 01 Command No. dialog box.
3. Click Submit.

Table 4-7

Data Initialize Programs

Program
Numbers
500

Program Name

Page #

500 System Call Forward Assignment

4-15

LCR Guide Page

9-16

Destination Restriction Guide Page

9-10

651

651 Private Routing Plan Analysis

9-56

653

653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment

9-57

654

654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment

9-57

655

655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment

9-57

520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
529
530
531
533
534
651
531
533
534

4-34

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

System
120 Tenant Data Assignment

120 Tenant Data Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to select an
Attendant or Night Bell to ring when
dialing 0 in Day 1, Day 2 or Day 3 mode for
up to eight different Tenants. You can also
assign the general purpose relay to the
Night Bell in this program. (This feature is
available with Strata CTX R2.2 or higher
and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G0 or higher.)
1. From the Program Menu, click System
> Tenant Data.
2. Enter the Tenant Number or use the
pull-down to select a number.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
6957

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Tenant Number

Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured.
Possible values: 1~8. No Data (Default)

01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Type
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Type

Select to call an Attendant or select to ring the Night Bell when dialing the
Tenant Attendant Access Code in the Day1, Day 2, or Day 3 mode for this
Tenant.

03 Dial 0 Call Night Dst Type
Important!

The Tenant Attendant Access Code must be assigned in Prg
102. If it should be “0,” the Attendant Console Group Access
Code, which is “0,” must be deleted.

Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, Night Bell
01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Digits
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Digits
03 Dial 0 Call Night 3 Dst Digits
04 Night Mode Relay

Enter the PDN of the Attendant (BATI) to ring when dialing Tenant Attendant
Access Code in Day, Day2, or Day 3 mode.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits for each Day Mode selected (default =
noData)
Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell. BIOU
relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay continuously when the system is
in the night mode.
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5

05 Night Bell Relay

Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell. BIOU
relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay when a CO line or DID rings
when the system is in night mode. The CO or DID line must be assigned to
ring the night bell.
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

4-35

System
120 Tenant Data Assignment

4-36

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station

This chapter provides Strata CTX station programming information for programmers using the CTX
WinAdmin programming interface.

Assignment
Program Number(s): 200, 204, 214, 205, 213, 215, 208, 210, 216 and 502

The following programs assign station data.

Basic/200 Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1

This command assigns stations to the system.
1. Use the “Basic Station Record Sheets” on page D-11 to record your desired Station settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Basic tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DNs.

• Create – Assign a new DN
with custom settings by
entering a DN value. Press
OK, assign the PDN
Equipment No. and click
Submit.

Station

• Extended List – view a
detailed list of programmed
DNs.

• Selective Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Selective Copy to make a new DN
assignment with settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
• Delete – Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
• Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN
assignment and click OK.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-1

Station
Assignment

5. Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 PDN Equipment No.

Enter the PDN equipment number (xxyyzz). This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit
number of the ADKU, BDKU/BDKS, PDKU, or RSTU interface PCB to which the
the PDN is, or should be assigned.
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3;
enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

02 Station Type

Select Station Type.
Possible values: DKT (default) or SLT

03 Circuit Type

Select Extension or Assign Voice Mail attributes to analog circuits
Possible values: Extension (default) or Voice Mail

•

Extension – Should be assigned to PDNs that are associated with Digital or
Standard telephones.

•

Voice Mail – Should be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail circuits.

•

Announce – Not used in the U.S.A. or Canada. (This feature is available with
CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.)

04 COS Day1

Assign COS to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.

•

Day2

Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

•

Night

05 DRL Day1

DRL for DAY1, Day 2 and Night

•

Day2

Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

•

Night

06 FRL Day1

•

Day2

•

Night

07 LCR Group

Assign FRL to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes. The higher the FRL number, the
more trunk access is available.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
Station LCR Group Number
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

08 QPL Day1

QPL for Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.

•

Day2

Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

•

Night

09 Station Name

Enter Station Name to be displayed on LCD.
Possible values: Up to eight ASCII characters (default = no value)

5-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

10 Call Waiting Tone

Select desired waiting tone for Offhook Campon.
Possible values: None (default), Singular or Continuity

11 Dialing Progress
Tone

Select type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code

12 System Call
Forward.

Select the System Call Forward Group number.

13 Call Pickup

The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.

Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence

Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~10 (CTX670 Basic), 0~32 (CTX670 Exp.),
(default = 0)

Possible values: Permitted (default), Group Only or Not Permitted
14 Bearer Capability

ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN stations.
3.1kHzAudio (data and speech) or Speech.
Notes
• Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be set
for 3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.

•

The IP-QSIG network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech), all standard
telephone equipment must be set to ’Speech’ if making calls over IP-QSIGs.

Possible values: 3.1kHzAudio (default) or Speech
15 Display DN

Enter the number to be displayed on the calling telephone that rings this PDN
number. This number is will be overridden by Program 209, 04 (if assigned) and if
the PDN is in a hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

16 Caller Emergency
Service Identification
(CESID)

Enter the E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID).

17 Emergency Call
Group

Enter the Emergency call group that this station belongs to.

18 Remote CF/DND
Password

Enter password to set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from another CTX
station; or, for Call Forward only, from a external DSIA line.

Possible values: Up to 16 digits (default = no value), however CESID should be
10 digits or less for Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
(CAMA) E911 trunk. PRI E911 allows upto 16 digits.

Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)

Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)

19 VMID Code SMDI

DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.

Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls
voice mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number
is prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16)

Station

Note

Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
Note

22 MW to VM Port

This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN; and on calls to the PDN
that forward to voice mail. See Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.

Enter the Message Waiting center DN. For Remote CTXs, assign message center
including Node IP for TPI integration. This parameter enables Call Record function
too.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-3

Station
Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

23 Travelling COS
Change

Enable this station with the privilege to change the Travelling COS Override Code.

24 TGAC Override1

Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override (for Attendant console) from
this station.

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 Service Tones

Disable Service Tone for Data Privacy.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Note

26 CW and ROB Tone

Service tone such as Call Waiting should be disabled for modems, faxes,
and similar devices.

Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Campon) and Ring Over Busy
Tone.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Notes
• CW tone is always two beeps.

•
27 Name Display

ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.

Enable this station with the privilege to put the user name in the Directory
Assistance display of a large LCD.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

28 Door Ovr DND

Enable DND override by door phone.
Possible values: Override or Do not Override (default)

30 Chg Sys Speed

Enable this parameter to program System Speed Dial.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

31 Network COS

Select Network COS value.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

32 Auto OCA

OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows OCA
calls to be received.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

33 Originate OCA

Enable this station with the privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

34 RSTU Supervision

This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in Program 104, FB06 for these
types of Connections.
Possible values: Received (default) or Not Received
Possible values: Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically
hang up, and connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect
supervision, should be set with “Not Received.”

35 Station SpDial Bins

The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station:
Possible values: 0~100 (default = 0)

36 Set SLT Dial Type

5-4

Choose DP (Old style - dial pulse dialling) or DTMF (Newer type - tone dialling).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

37 Set Call Forward
Dial Tone

When the handset is picked up, the user will hear stutter dial tone if a call forward is
enabled.

38 Dialling Digit
Restriction

After the Extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialling any
subsequent digits.

39 CO Park & Hold

You can enable or disable CO Park and Hold.
Note

This feature is available for CTX Software version R1.03 or higher.

Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line
that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other stations to
press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line
that appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other stations to
press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
40 MW & DND Dial
Tone

Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone
when it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a busy tone
burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.

41 Activate Message
Waiting

This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and with
CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting on
other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8 or 9; or, by pressing the
Msg key. This feature is available with Strata CTX R1.3 software.
Disable: This station cannot activate station-to-station message waiting on other
stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8 or 9.
Notes
• When disabled, digital telephones are still allowed to activate station-to-station
message waiting by pressing the Msg button.

•
42 Tenant Number

This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports to use the special Message
Waiting access codes.

Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned. (This feature is
available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station

Possible values: 1~8.

5-5

Station
Assignment

Station PDN Selective Copy
This screen provides you the option of selecting either all or some of the parameters to be copied to the
destination PDNs.
Using this screen you can do any of the following functions:
• Copy to multiple destination PDNs.
• Check All to highlight all the parameters
to be copied.
...or select individual/multiple
parameter(s) to be copied.
1. Select Station > Assignments. Enter the
Primary DN.
2. Click Submit > Copy. The Selective
Copy screen displays (shown right).
3. Check Highlight All to highlight all the
parameters to be copied.
...or select individual/multiple
parameter(s) to be copied.
Note If you want to copy almost all items
and leave out a few, you can check
Highlight All and then click on the items that you don’t want to copy to deselect them.
4. Click Copy Now to start the copying process.
5. When copy is complete, a dialog box displays that reads “End of Copy!”
Note You can return to the previous page and/or reselect copy to different destination PDNs by clicking
Back.

Station Extended List
The Extended List displays the following parameters that are set in Program 200—Station Equipment
Number, DKT/SLT, Extension/Voice Mail, Primary DN, User Name, PDN VMID, COS, DRL, FRL, LCR
Group, System Call Forward Template, Network COS and the quantity of Station Speed Dial bins.
➤ To access the extended list
➤ Select Station > Assignments > Extended List.

The Extended List spreadsheet displays after it downloads from the CTX (sample shown below). This
takes some time depending on the CTX connection speed and database size.

The screen may be kept up and moved around to use as a reference and can be printed. The Extended
List spreadsheet can be sorted by all 19 columns and sorting can be toggled between Ascending and
Descending order. The entire table can be printed using the Print button on the screen.

5-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

204 DKT Parameters
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1

This command is used to set up DKT digital telephones station parameters.
1. Use the “DKT Parameters Record Sheet” on page D-12 to record your desired DKT settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the DKT tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a DN number in the Primary
DN field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DKTs.
• PDN Table View – view a
detailed list of programmed
PDNs.
• Selective Copy – Enable you to
copy some or all of the
parameters to the destination
PDNs.
5. Setup the DKT by adding values to the remaining fields.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Station Type

Select the Station Type. When set to Attendant, the system can support four
circuits.
Possible values: Extension (default) or Attendant

02 Key Strip Pattern

This option allows you select a pre-defined keystrip pattern and submit it to the
digital telephone. It does not display what pre-defined keystrip (if any) has been
assigned to the telephone.
Use the Key tab screen to view or edit telephone keystrip assignments.

Submitting a keystrip pattern will overwrite existing keys
programmed on a telephone.

Station

CAUTION!

Default key strip patterns for digital telephones. The selected Pattern is applied to
the ’Key Strip Type’ parameter.
None – applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
Pattern 1 – applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons and DND.
Pattern 2 – applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons, One-Touch buttons and
DND.
Pattern 3 – applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons. (DKT3014 uses
only Pattern 1 or None).
Possible values: Pattern 1, 2 or None (default)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-7

Station
Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

03 Key Strip Type

Select the number of feature buttons to assign to this station.
Note

Although the scroll down menu enables you to choose any value from
1~24, valid values are 10, 14 and 20.

Possible values: 1, 3, 10, 14 or 20 (default)

Applies 1, 3, 10, 14, or 20 button keystrip type to digital telephones.
Possible values: 1 and 3 button keystrips apply to DKT2001 and DKT3001|
10 button keystrips apply to DKT2010 and DKT30010
14 button keystrips apply to the Large LCD DKT3014
20 button keystrips apply to DKT2020 and DKT3020.
04 Add on Modules

Select the number of Add On Modules (ADM) assigned to this station. This field is
required if you want to program ADM FBs in Program 213. See “Key” on page 5-15.
Possible values: None (default), 1 unit, or 2 units

05 Tone First /Voice
First

Set PDN to have Tone First or Voice First signaling when called.
For each iES32 PDN, set to “Tone First”, if set to Voice First iES32 will not answer.
Possible values: Tone or Voice (default)

06 OCA Type

Select the OCA type. This field must be programmed with Auto OCA Originate
below.
Possible values: Handset (default) or Speaker

09 Handsfree MIC
Setting

If you call a station configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter
to enable the called parties microphone from your DKT.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

10 Handsfree Tone

If you call a DKT configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter to
send a splash tone to the called party.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

11 Ext. Ring Repeat

Enable repetitive ringing for incoming CO / PBX / Centrex signals. Disabling this
parameter defaults to standard CO ringing pattern (1 sec on / 3 sec Off).
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

5-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

13 Off Hook
Preference

Select Off Hook Preference.
Possible values: Idle, Ringing, Prime, No Preference, Prime and Idle, Prime and
Ringing or Ringing and Idle (default)
When a digital telephone user goes off hook, presses the Spkr Button or dials a
digit while the telephone is idle (Hot Dial Pad), the telephone will select an idle PDN
or Line button, or answer an incoming call, according to the preferences set in this
command.
This command works in conjunction with the “14 PDN/Line preference” and “15 Call
Answer Preference” programs.
The possible values are described as follows:

14 PDN/Line
Preference

•

Ringing – The telephone will answer a ringing call (any PDN, secondary DN,
PhDN, or any Line type button) by call type or longest ringing button depending
on the “15 Call Answer Preference” choice. The telephone will not automatically
select a DN or Line button when going off hook to originate a call.

•

Primary DN – The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN button, if
idle or ringing, no matter what the status is of other buttons on the telephone.

•

No Preference – The telephone will not select any button when the user goes off
hook or presses the Spkr button. This selection will also disable the telephone’s
Hot Dial Pad feature.

•

Primary DN and Idle – The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN
button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select an idle Line
button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or another idle DN button
(14 PDN or Line preference - PDN Preference).

•

Primary DN and Ringing – The telephone will automatically try to select the
PDN button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select a
ringing Line button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or a ringing
DN button (14 PDN or Line preference - PDN Preference).

•

Ringing and Idle – The telephone will always answer any ringing call according
to “15 Call Answer Preference” . If a call is not ringing it will select and idle Line
button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or idle DN button (14 PDN
or Line preference - PDN Preference).

Offhook preference button Type.
Possible values: CO Key or DN Key (default)
CO Line buttons - Line buttons (any type CO, Pooled or Group CO line button)
have priority over DN buttons with “13 Off Hook Preference” choices. The
lowest numbered line button on the telephone has priority over other line
buttons for idle selection.

•

Primary DN button - DN buttons (any type PDN, Secondary DN or PhDN button)
have priority over Line buttons with “13 Off Hook Preference” choices. The PDN
button has first priority for idle selection, the lowest numbered DN button on the
telephone has priority over other DN buttons for idle selection if the PDN button
is busy.

Note

Station

•

Off hook ringing selections are also based on “15 Call Answer Preference”
choices.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-9

Station
Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

15 Ringing Preference

Ringing call answer preference.
Possible values: Longest or Call Type (default)

•

Longest Ringing - any call type - Calls are answered in order of the longest
ringing line no matter what type of call (FIFO).

•

Longest Ringing - by call type priority - Call Type priority is applied to the longest
ringing button.

Call Type Priorities are fixed is software as shown below:

16 Text Message
Display

•

Emergency Calls

•

Hands Free Calls (after it is switched to ringing by the caller).

•

ACD calls

•

Recalls (Hold recall, Automatic call back, ABR, etc.)

•

External Calls (DID, DIT DISA line calls etc.)

•

Internal Calls (station, Attendant, Tie line, door phone, etc.)

Select whether to display an LCD text message. Immediate displays the message.
Not immediate does not display the message.
Possible values: Immediate (default) or Not Immediate

17 Call History
Memory

Enter the number of calls to be stored in memory for this station.

18 DTMF Back Tone

Enables audible DTMF when dialing from a DKT to a trunk or Voice Mail port.
Padded dialing mutes the volume level to the caller not the called trunk or VM
device.

Possible values: 0~100 (default = 0)

Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
19 Continuous DTMF

Enable / Disable Continuous DTMF for DKT2000 and DTK3000 series telephones.
Enabled allows the telephone to send DTMF tones to the far end continuously as
long as the key on the dial pad is held down.
Notes
• For each iES32 PDN, set to ’Not Continuous’, if set to ’Continuous’, outdial
notification to pagers and calls to AMIS nodes will not function properly.

•

DKT1000 series telephones do not support continuous DTMF. DKT1000 series
telephones must be set to ’Not Continuous’ or they will misdial.

Possible values: Continuous (default) or Not Continuous
20 Display Language

Select the LCD Display Language.
Possible values: English (default), British English or French

21 Adapter

Select the Adapter Type (Desktop OAI or Attendant Console).

•

BPCI – for USB interface.

•

BATI – for PC Attendant Console Interface.

Possible values: None (default), BPCI or BATI
22 Blind Transfer

Set Blind Transfer Action (Attendant Type Only).
Possible values: Leave or Separate (default)

5-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

23 Mail Box Selection

Select the method to enter the destination Mailbox for Call Recording. If set to
“Auto” CTX uses the VM ID of the station initiating the record function.
Notes
The DN assigned as the MSG center in PROG 200 is used to call the VM port or
Hunt group (PROG 200 FK 22).

•
•

When set to “Auto” the VM-ID of the station initiating the record function is sent
to Stratagy ES as the destination mailbox.

•

When set to “Manual Input” the user may enter any valid Mailbox followed by
the “#” sign. If the user Presses “#” without additional data the CTX will send the
VMID of the originating station.

Possible values: Auto or Manual (default)
24 MIC Init. Value

Turn on the microphone automatically when making a speaker phone call.
Note

The microphone must be enabled.

Possible values: On (default) or Off
25 Microphone

Enable microphone.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

26 Speaker Mode
Tones

Enable telephone to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy Tone
while on a speaker phone call.
Possible values: Yes (default) or No

27 Ring Over Busy
Cycles

Set ROB to ring two times or continuously.
Possible values: Two Cycles or Continuous (default)
Note

28 Attd Overflow Dest.

See PRG200, 26 to enable ROB to be sent to individual telephones.

Select overflow destination for attendant.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = none)

29 Trunk Test and
Verify

Allow Trunk Tests and Verification.

30 Auto Line Hold

Enable Automatic Line Hold. This parameter allows a station to “line hop” from one
call to another automatically by placing the first call on hold.

Possible values: Yes or No (default)

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Enable: Allows the telephone to enter the Programming Mode. Disable: Restricts
the telephone from entering the Programming Mode. This parameter is available
only with Strata CTX Release 2.0 MF017 and higher.
CAUTION!

Station

32 Programming Mode

Since we added this parameter, you cannot downgrade to
previous versions of CTX because we do not support
downward compatibility of CTX database. If you attempt
downgrading, the entire Program 204 will be lost. Toshiba
recommends keeping the current database for emergency
situations. We guarantee upward compatibility of the database,
so you can upgrade the system without any problems.

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-11

Station
Assignment

Feature Button Patterns

The following tables show the various feature button patterns available for )% above.
Table 5-1

Table 5-2

5-12

20 Button (when FB03 value is 20)
PATTERN1

PATTERN2

PATTERN3

FB01

Primary DN

FB02

CO 1

No Data

FB03

CO 2

No Data

FB04

CO 3

No Data

FB05

CO 4

No Data

FB06

CO 5

No Data

FB07

CO 6

No Data

FB08

CO 7

No Data

FB09

CO 8

No Data

FB10

CO 9

No Data

FB11

CO 10

No Data

FB12

CO 11

No Data

FB13

CO 12

No Data

FB14

CO 13

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB15

CO 14

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB16

CO 15

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB17

CO 16

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB18

CO 17

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB19

CO 18

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB20

Do Not Disturb

No Data

10 Button (when FB03 value is 10)
PATTERN1

PATTERN2

PATTERN3

FB01

Primary DN

FB02

CO 1

No Data

FB03

CO 2

No Data

FB04

CO 3

No Data

FB05

CO 4

No Data

FB06

CO 5

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB07

CO 6

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB08

CO 7

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB09

CO 8

Single Touch Button

No Data

FB10

Do Not Disturb

No Data

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

Table 5-3

14 Button (when FB03 value is 14)
PATTERN1

PATTERN2

PATTERN3

FB01

Primary DN

FB02

CO 1

No Data

FB03

CO 2

No Data

FB04

CO 3

No Data

FB05

CO 4

No Data

FB06

CO 5

No Data

FB07

No Data

FB08

CO 7

No Data

FB09

CO 8

No Data

FB10

CO 9

No Data

FB11

CO 10

No Data

FB12

CO 11

No Data

FB13

Do Not Disturb

No Data

FB14

No Data

Station

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-13

Station
Assignment

214 DSS Console Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1

This assignment allows up to eight Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles to be assigned to a station. The
assignment is referenced to the stations’s Primary DN.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Assignment.
2. Click on the DSS tab (shown
right).
3. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DSSs.
• Extended List – view a
detailed list of programmed DSSs.
4. Enter the Equipment number in which the DSS(s) is installed.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Prime DN

Enter the PDN of the station that is to be associated with the DSS console(s).
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits (default = no value).

01~08 DSS Equipment
No. 1~8

Enter the DSS equipment number as xxyyzz.
Cabinet – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (CTX100). Select 01 for
Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet (CTX670).
Slot – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots (CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots (CTX670).
Example: If the DSS console should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS in
cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
If a PDN is assigned to the DSS equipment number it must be deleted, using
PRG201, before attempting to assign the DSS console.

5-14

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

Key
Program Number(s): 205, 213, and 215
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1 and 204 page 5-7

The Feature Button assignments enable each button on the telephone to be addressed and coded to
represent a function or feature to be performed. Some feature buttons require additional parameters to
completely define the key (e.g., a Phantom DN needs a directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone
pitch when ringing occurs).
1. Use the “Feature Button Record Sheet” on page D-13 to plan your FB assignments.
2. From the Program Menu, click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Key tab (shown below).
Notes

• To Program DSS buttons, Program 214 should be completed.
• To program ADM buttons (ADM 1 or ADM 2 shown below), FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204
must be set to One or Two.

Station

4. Enter one of the following in the Primary DN field:
• Primary DN to program DKT FBs.
• Primary DN plus an ADM number to Program ADM FBs.
• Primary DN plus DSS Key Assignment button to program DSS FBs
...or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of programmed DKTs.
• Extended List – view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-15

Station
Assignment

• Copy – After entering the source DN in the Primary DN field, click Copy and designate which FB
buttons to copy (click the DKT Phone header to select all). Enter the destination DN and click OK.
(Range is permitted.)
• Cross Copy – This button enables you to copy specific keys from a station’s keypad to desired keys
of other station key pads. This function is available only with CTX WinAdmin R2.1 and above.
Refer to “Cross Copy” on page 5-18 for steps to use this function.
Distinctive Ringing – Release 1.3 and higher software enables you to set different incoming ringing tones
for internal and external calls on a Prime DN. Ten different tones are available. This can be set from
Programs 205, 213 and 215.
➤ To set Distinctive Ringing, double click the button

that you want to set distinctive ringing. A dialog
box displays (shown right).
Click the drop-down arrows to set the External and
Internal tone pitches. The possible values are
shown in Table 5-4.
Notes
●

●

You must have the following versions of
processor boards for Distinctive Ringing:
CTX670: BECU1A, V.1C or later.
CTX100: ACTU1A, V.2D or later.
For any older versions of processor boards,
you can assign only “01” to Tone Pitch for
internal calls and you can assign only “11,”
“13,” “15,” or “17” to Tone Pitch for external
calls.
Ringing tone pitch has no effect on telephone
volume.
When programming External Ringing Repeat with a Distinctive Ringing Pitch, we recommend
that you use pitches “11” or “12” and not “17” or “18”.
Incoming recall tone cannot be changed.
Calls to Tie lines adopt the internal call pitch.
Table 5-4
Tone No.

5-16

Internal and External Call Ringing Tones
Frequency and Cadence

500 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat

1300 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat

500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat

500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat

860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat

860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat

1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat

1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat

860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 3 sec. Off, repeat

860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. Off, repeat

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

5. Click on the FB to program (the button turns from yellow to red).
6. Click the desired option from the blue parameter buttons on the right.
• Directory No – Assign a Primary DN key, Secondary/Phantom DN, Phantom DN Message Waiting,
or DSS key to this FB. See “Directory Number Sub-parameters” on page 5-19 for more details.
• CO Line – Assign FB as a CO, GCO or a Pooled Line. See “CO Lines Sub-parameters” on
page 5-20 for more details.
• Features – Assign ABR, ACB, DND, Short Flash, Long Flash, Privacy, Privacy Release, BGM Key,
Program Access, Account Code, Application Starting or Split Key feature to this FB.
• Call Control – Activate Speed Dial, Release Button, Release/Answer, Cancel, Source Party,
Destination Party, CLID or Night Transfer from this FB.
• Call Forward – Set Call Forwarding assignments for this FB. Forward All Calls, Forward Busy,
Forward No Answer, Forward Busy No Answer, Forward Ext/All Call, Forward Ext/Busy, Forward
Ext/No Answer and Forward Ext/Busy No Answer are available selections.
• Park Page – Assign Call Park Orbit, All Paging, Group Paging, All Emergency Paging, Individual
Emergency Paging and Paging Answer Feature access to this FB.
• Call Pickup – Assign FB to a Pickup-Group, Pickup-Directed Terminal, Pickup-Directed Group,
Pickup-Directed DN, Pickup-Any External, Pickup-CO Retrieve, Pickup-Local Retrieve, PickupRemote, Pickup-Directed DN Retrieve and Pickup-On Hold and Incoming.
• Door Lock – Enable FB to unlock Door Lock. See “Door Lock Sub-parameters” on page 5-20 for
more details.
• Voice Mail – Enable FB to Record or Pause/Resume Voice Mail.
• Attendant – Assign Out Dial, Attendant Answer, Overflow, Position Busy, Trunk Test, Attendant
Loop or Supervised Loop Key Attendant features to this FB.
• One Touch – Assign FB as a One Touch button. See “Setting the One Touch Button” on page 5-18.
This feature is available only with CTX software release 1.03 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
software 1.17 and higher.
• Split – Assign FB to Split the connected party and the conference master from the conference (for
private call). (Join button is used to reconnect both parties to the conference.) This feature will be
available only with CTX software release 2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin software 2.2 and
higher. The Split button should not be assigned to a DKT2304-CT cordless telephone.
• Blank – Clear FB assignment.
7. Click on one feature in the sub-parameter dialog box. If no other settings are required, the FB displays
an abbreviation for the selected feature.
Station

...or if you select Directory No, CO Lines or Door Lock parameters, additional fields are required. See
the tables that follow for more details. Follow the directions in each pop-up dialog box.
8. To modify an existing feature button, double-click the feature button and make the change in the
appropriate dialog box that displays.
9. Click Submit.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-17

Station
Assignment

Cross Copy

This function is available only with CTX WinAdmin Release 2.1 software and above. Use the following
steps to cross copy keys from one station to the keys of another stations key pad:
1. From the Key Page, enter
the Prime DN.
2. Click Submit.
3. Click the Cross Copy
button. The Source and
Target Copy screen displays
(shown right). Enter the
“Copy To” PDNs
...or click Select to select the
target PDN.
4. From the Source DKT,
select key to be copied.
5. Click the Copy Now button.
The Detail report screen
displays.
6. Click Done. The Target
DKT with the copied key
displays.
7. Verify the key copied.
Setting the One Touch Button

Follow the step above 1~8 above to assign an FB as a One Touch button. Then complete the following
steps:
1. Double click the key assigned as One Touch.
2. The following dialog box displays
This dialog box is used to define each button with the One
Touch Data.
3. Enter the One Touch data, then click OK.
Example 1: Setting up a One Touch button to transfer to
Voice Mail.
Select the Cnf/Trn from the white box on the right, CNF
displays in the One Touch Data field. Then type #407 after
CNF displays in the One Touch Data box. It adds Cnf/Trn
#407 in the One Touch Data. Click OK. Then click Submit.
Example 2: To originate a call from the PDN, select the FK
as 01 if the PDN is on the first key, then add the telephone
number next to FK01 in the One Touch Data box.
Cancel clears the changes and takes you back to the previous
page.

5-18

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

Directory Number Sub-parameters
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Primary DN

1. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
2. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)

Secondary/Phantom DN

1. Enter DN Number.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)

Phantom DN Message
Warning

Enter Phantom DN No.

DSS Key

Enter DSS Primary DN No.

Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits

Station

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-19

Station
Assignment

CO Lines Sub-parameters
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

1. Select CO Line #.
Possible values: 1~264 (CTX670), 1~64 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
3. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
4. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)

GCO

1. Select GCO No.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Select Index.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
3. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
4. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
5. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)

Pooled Line Key

1. Select Pool Line No.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)

Door Lock Sub-parameters
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Door Unlock

Select Door Lock No.
Possible values: 1~10 (default = 1)

Station Flexible Button Assignments

Use the “Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button Telephones” on page D-14 and “Record Sheets for the
DKT3014” on page D-15 to plan your Station Flexible Button Assignments.

5-20

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Assignment

Timer
Program Number(s): 208
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1

Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNs.
1. Complete the “Station Data
Record Sheets” on
page D-18.
2. From the Program Menu
click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Timer tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field.
...or select an existing record
by clicking one of the
following buttons:
• List – view a summary
list of programmed
DKTs.
• Extended List – view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Primary DN

Enter the Primary DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

01 ABR Retry Count

Enter the number of retry attempts made by ABR when dialing a busy telephone
number.
Possible values: 5~20 (default = 15)
Select the amount of time (in seconds) ABR waits between dialing attempts.

03 ABR Recall Timer

Select the number of seconds ABR will call back the station after receiving ring back
tone from the dialed number.

Possible values: 30~180 (default = 60)

Station

02 ABR Retry Interval
Timer

Possible values: 5~60 (default = 20)
04 Hold Recall Timer

Select the number of seconds before a call is placed on hold recalls.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 60)

05 First Interdigit
Timer

Select the amount of time a Station has to dial after going off hook before a call is
terminated (ROT is heard).
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-21

Station
Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

06 Second Interdigit
Timer

Select the amount of time the system waits between dialed digits before terminating a
call (ROT is heard).
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)

07 Ring Xfer No
Answer Timer

Select the Ring Transfer Idle station or Busy station (Camp-on) Recall Time (in seconds)
Possible values: 1~600 (default = 32)

Emergency Ringdown Assignment
Program Number(s): 216
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1

Assigns Emergency Ring Down parameters to Primary DNs.
1. Complete the “Station Data
Record Sheets” on
page D-18.
2. From the Program Menu
click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the RingDown tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field.
...or select an existing record
by clicking one of the
following buttons:
• List – view a summary
list of programmed
DKTs.
• Extended List – view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Emergency Ringdown

Enable an Emergency Ringdown Number.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

02 Emergency Ringdown
Timer

Enter the length of off-hook time that will cause a DN to originate an Emergency

03 Destination

Enter the destination DN for the Emergency Ringdown.

Possible values: 0~60 (default = 0)

Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

5-22

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
206 Phantom DN

206 Phantom DN
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1

This command assigns Phantom DN parameters.
1. Complete the “Phantom DN
Record Sheet” on page D-16.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Phantom DN. The
Station Phantom DN screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter a Phantom DN number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Phantom DNs.
• Copy – Enter the Phantom DN to copy data from, then click Copy and designate a Phantom DN to
copy the data too. Click OK.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Phantom DN

Enter Phantom DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

01 Owned PDN

Set PhantomDN’s Owner Station
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Tone/Voice First

Select from Tone first, or Voice first signaling.
Possible values: Tone First (default) or Voice First

04 Display DN

Enter the number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this Phantom DN
number.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

This number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the PhDN is in a hunt group.
...or this number in Program 200, FB15 (if assigned).
...or the calling telephone’s PDN.
05 System Call Forward

Station

This number is overridden by the number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the
Phantom DN is in a hunt group. When calling from this Phantom DN, the number
displayed on the called telephone appears in order of priority as follows:

Select the System Call Forward value.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~10 (CTX670 Basic),0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-23

Station
206 Phantom DN

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

06 VM ID Code

Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PhDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PhDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (This number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, )%~)%).
Possible values: Digits 0~9,

and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).

This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on
direct calls to voice mail from the PhDN; and on calls to the PhDN that forward to voice
mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice).
Note

Do not enter a VMID code in this field if this PhDN is associated with a PDN in
a multiple DN hunt group (Program 209, )%).

The associated PDN’s VMID code (Program 200, )%) will be sent to voice mail.
09 Message Center

Enter the Message Waiting Center DN, VM Pilot Number or lowest member of VM hunt
group.
Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

10 User Name

Enter user name.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)

11 Display Name

Select radio button for user name to be included in the list display of Large LCD
(Directory Assistance)
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

5-24

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
209 Hunt Group

209 Hunt Group
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1

This command assigns Station Hunting Group data.
1. Complete the “Hunt Group Record
Sheet” on page D-17.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Hunt Group. The Station
Hunt Group displays.
3. Click on the Group tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a Group Number for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Hunt Groups.
• Create – Assign a new Hunt Group with custom settings.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Group Number

Hunt Group Number
Possible values: 1~90 (CTX100), 1~200 (CTX670 Basic),1~640 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = no value)

01 Hunt Method

Select Hunt Method
Possible values: Distributed (for Voice Mail hunt groups) or Circular (for Multiple DN
hunt groups) (default)

02 Pilot Number

Enter Pilot Directory Number. This is the number that is dialed to call the hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value) any type of hunt group
can have a pilot number.
Note

Enter the number that is displayed when called by, or when calling any member of the
hunt group.

Station

04 Number to Display

Any type of hunt group can have a pilot number. Distributed hunt groups must
have a pilot number. Voice Mail hunt groups should be Distributed with a Pilot
Number. Multiple DN Hunt groups should be Circular with no Pilot Number.

Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note

05 Pilot No. SCFwd

This number should be the DH Group Pilot number for Voice Mail hunt groups.
This number could be the PDN of a Multiple DN Hunt group, in which case the
number would override the number assigned in Program 200, FB15 for PDNs
and Program 206, FB04 for Phantom DNs.

Allows you to assign a System Call Forward pattern to the Pilot Number of a Hunt
Group.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~10 (CTX670 Basic),0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-25

Station
209 Hunt Group

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

06 Muitple DN Hunt

Enable if hunt group is created for multiple DN operation. Multiple DN hunt groups
should be circular with no pilot number.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

07 DHG Auto Camp-on

Whether to execute Automatic Camp On to the Distributed Hunt Group or not.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Should be applied to VM Distributed Hunt Groups so callers automatically camp on to
Voice Mail when all VM ports are busy. Does not apply to Circular or Serial hunt groups.

218 Station Hunt Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 209 page 5-25

This program assigns station DNs to Hunt Groups using Program 209, and assigns the rotation order in
which DNs are hunted.
1. Complete the “Hunt Group Record
Sheet” on page D-17.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Hunt Group Assignment.
The Station Hunt Group Assignment
screen displays.
3. Click on the Member tab (shown
right).
4. Enter a Member Number for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Hunt Groups.
• Add – Assign a new station DN to the Hunt Group number entered above.
• Append – Assign a new DN as the last DN in a Hunt Group’s hunt order.
• Modify – Highlight an existing DN in the Hunt Order and change the station DN assignment.
• Delete – Delete station DN assignment to Hunt Order number.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Hunt Group Number

Enter an existing Hunt Group number or use the List, Add, Append, Modify, or Delete
buttons as described above.
Possible values: 1~640 (default = no value)

01 Hunt Order

This field assigns a station DNs position within a Hunt Group’s Hunt Order. The Hunt
Order is selected automatically by CTX WinAdmin. Programmers should assign the last
station in the Hunt Order first and assign the first station in the Hunt Order last.
Possible values: 1~560 (default = no value)

5-26

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Hunt Group Table View

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

02 DN

By selecting the Insert button you can add a new DN to the Hunt Group’s Hunt Order.
Enter the desired DN in the pop-up dialog box.
To modify an existing entry, use the Modify button as described above.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

03 DN Set Type

Modify (replace) an existing assignment.
Possible values: Modify (default) or Insert

Hunt Group Table View
Hunt Group Table View
enables you to view all hunt
groups and its members.
➤ To access the Hunt Group

Table View
➤ Select Station > Hunt

Group Table View.
See “Table Views” on
page 2-6 for table
functionality.
Note This table has more

functions in addition to
the regular
functionality found in
other table views.
The Navigation Bar has the following additional buttons:
• Delete – Click on a row to delete any directory number from a Hunt Group, then click the Delete
button. When the Delete button is active, the Add button and the Delete Group button will not be active.
To unselect a row that is selected (in yellow), click the row again.
• Add – To add directory numbers to a hunt group select the
Hunt group in the table view from the Navigation drop down
in the Navigation bar, then click the Add button.
Station

If no rows are selected, the Add button is active. Click the
Add button to add members to Hunt groups. When you click
the Add button, the Add dialog box displays (shown right).
Select the DN from the Available Directory Numbers box,
then click the Arrow button in the center. This moves the
DN to Hunt Group box on the left. Click Add now to Save
the entry or Cancel to cancel. Clicking Add Now
automatically refreshes the table view.
In the dialog box shown right, if you want 6200 to appear
before 5200, click 6200 on the right, then click 5200 on the
left and then click the arrow in the center.
• Select All and Unselect All – Clicking these buttons, selects
or unselects all groups in a table.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-27

Station
Paging Group

Paging Group
502 Terminal Paging Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1

Assigns Primary DNs to Paging Group(s).
1. From the Program Menu click
Station > Page Group.
2. Enter a DN number in the
Primary DN field.
...or select an existing record by
clicking one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DKTs.
• Extended List – view a
detailed list of programmed
DKTs.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN(s) to assign existing
Paging Group settings.
3. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Primary DN

Enter the Prime DN of the station to be assigned to Paging Groups. A station may
belong to more than one paging group.
Note

You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX100 and up
to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX 670. Any software release
before R1.01, M19 supports only 32 stations in a paging group for all CTX
system types.

Page Group capacity: CTX100 – 4 Page Groups; CTX670 Basic – 6 Page Groups;
CTX670 Expanded – 16 Page Groups
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
PG01~PG16

Check to assign the DN to this paging group. The number of Page Groups that can be
assigned are: 1~4 (CTX100); 1~8 (CTX670 Basic); 1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
Possible values: On or Off (default)
Note

All Page Group

Up to 120 stations may be assigned to a paging group in the Strata CTX 670

Check to assign the DN to the All Page Group.
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX100 and up to 120
stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX 670.
Possible values: On or Off (default)

All Emergency Page
Group

Check to assign the DN to the All Emergency Page Group.
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX100 and up to 120
stations in a paging group in the Strata CTX 670.
Possible values: On or Off (default)

5-28

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Paging Group Table View

Paging Group Table View
Paging Group Table View
enables you to view all paging
groups and its members.
➤ To access the Paging Group

Table View
➤ Select Station > Paging Group

Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6
for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add,
Select All and Unselect All, refer
to “Hunt Group Table View” on
page 5-27
Note The Add button works a

little different on this table.
When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays, select the entry by clicking on it and then click
the Add Now button.

Station

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-29

Station
210 Pickup Group

210 Pickup Group
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1

The Call Pickup Group assignment specifies which group numbers this station will participate when either
the Group Call Pickup or the Group Directed Call Pickup features are invoked. A user may be assigned to
more than one group.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01~32

Click in the radio button to Indicate which Call Pickup Group(s) this stations is to
participate in. A station can be assigned to more than one group.
Possible values: check = On or unchecked = Off (default)
Note

01~05 are available for CTX100, 01~10 are available for CTX670 Basic,
and 01~32 are available for CTX670 Exp.

Pickup Group Table View
Pickup Group Table View
enables you to view all Pickup
groups and its members.
➤ To access the Paging Group

Table View
➤ Select Station > Pickup

Group Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6
for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add,
Select All and Unselect All, refer
to “Hunt Group Table View” on
page 5-27.
Note The Add button works a

little different on this
table.
When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays, select the entry by clicking on it and then click
the Add Now button.

5-30

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Multiple Call Group

Multiple Call Group
To set up Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing you must have a Multiple Call (MC) Group set in Program 517.
You can register up to 25 calling members for every MC Group in Program 518. You can set each member
to be Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2. The Delayed Ring times are independently
adjustable (1~180 seconds) for each Multiple Call Group Member.
Important!

Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs.
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).

Incoming Call to MC Group
The following can occur when calling members are set as Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2.
• If the members of a Multiple Call Group are assigned Immediate ring, the call is received at all
destinations immediately. In this case, each destination LCD displays the same incoming call
information.
• If the MC Group destination (member) is assigned to Delayed Ring 1 or Delayed Ring 2, each
destination will start to ring when the delay time runs out. During the delay time the member PDN or
PhDN button will flash red but not ring.
Important!

Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).

• If some MC Group destinations are busy, incoming call rings only idle destinations. However, if the
camp-on feature is in effect, incoming calls will camp-on to busy destinations.
• Members can be assigned to multiple MC Groups.

MCPN Owner Privileges
When you assign members to a multiple calling group, the member assigned to Index 1 in Program 518 is
considered an owner of the group. The owner of the group is the only member entitled to the following
privileges:
• The owner is the only member in the group that can receive Automatic Call Back calls and Message
Waiting Indications.
• The ringing option for the owner is always set to Immediate ring.
• The owner can be a PhDN or PDN.
Station

Member Requirements
The table below has details for members that can and cannot be in a group.
Members that can be in a Group

Members that cannot be in a Group

PDNs

Pilot DNs - ACD, MCP

PhDNs

CO Line Access Codes

Station Hunt Group Pilot DNs

Important!

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-31

Station
Multiple Call Group

Call Forward Activation
System and Station Call Forward can be set up for each MC Group. The Call Forward Remote Access
Code is used to activate or de-activate Station Call Forward of MC Group. System Call Forward is
activated/deactivated using CTX WinAdmin. The MC Group can also be set as the destination of System
on Station Call Forward.

517 Multiple Call Group Assignment
Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing which enables you to delay ring to voice mail and auto attendants.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Multiple Calling Group.
2. Click Create. A dialog box displays.
3. Enter a calling group index in the
dialog box.
The calling group index can be 1~16
(CTX100), 1~32 (CTX670 Basic),
and 1~64 (CTX670 Expanded).
4. Click Ok. Parameter 01 MC Group
Pilot Number gets highlighted.
5. Enter the DN of the MC group. This
number should not conflict with an
existing telephone number.
6. Verify and change other parameters.
7. Click Submit. The group index displays on the left of the program name.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Multiple Call Group Number

Select a group number.
Possible values: 1~16 (CTX100), 1~32 (CTX670 Basic) and 1~64 (CTX670
Exp.)

01 MC Group Pilot Number

Enter the Pilot Directory Number that should be assigned to the Multiple Call
Group. This can be any number 1~5 digits that does not conflict with numbers
in the current system Number Plan.
Possible values: 1~5 digits

02 Ring Delay 1 Timer

Set the timer in seconds.
Possible values: 1~180

03 Ring Delay 2 Timer

Set the timer in seconds.
Possible values: 1~180

04 System Call Forward

Assign a System Call Forward template number to the multiple calling group.
Enter 0 or 1~32.
Possible values: 0~32

05 Voice Mail ID

Enter the VM call forward ID digits for the Multiple Calling Group.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits.

5-32

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Multiple Call Group

518 Multiple Calling Members Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 517

Use this program to assign members to a group.
1. From the Program Menu, click Station
> Multiple Calling Group.
2. Click the Member tab.
3. Select the Index Number, then enter
the Member DN.
Important!

Immediate Destinations
can only be PDNs
(Digital and/or Standard
Telephones) and PhDNs.
Delay Destinations can
be PDNs of Standard
telephone circuits only
and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers
(not Multiple DN Hunt
Groups).

Note Each group can have up to 25 members. You can have up to 64 groups.

4. Submit is greyed out because the members are automatically submitted as they get added.
Note The buttons on this screen are dynamic. When you select an empty Index number, the Add button

displays. When you select and existing Index number, the Modify and Remove buttons display.
Modify enables you to edit, while Remove deletes the multiple ringing group index number.
Number Type
Multiple Calling Group Index

Description
Enter a group number.
Possible values: 1~16 (CTX100), 1~32 (CTX670 Basic) and 1~64 (CTX670
Exp.)

01 Member DN

Enter the DN of the extension you wish to add.

05 Ringing Options

Select either: Immediate, Delay 1 or Delay 2.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station

Possible values: Up to 32 digits

5-33

Station
516 Station Speed Dial

516 Station Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1

Up to 100 pre-programmed Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits each) can be assigned to each station.
Speed Dial numbers are stored in “Bins” and each station accesses the Speed Dial numbers by entering the
Speed Dial Bin number from their respective stations. The following advanced Speed Dialing features are
available in Strata CTX.
• Speed Dial Bin Linking – Whenever a Speed Dial number exceeds the 32-digit Speed Dial Bin memory
limitation, the digits exceeding the 32 digit limitation are automatically stored into the adjacent Speed
Dial Bin. The entire string is activated by using the primary Speed Dial Bin number.
Note Bin linking is automatic. Any previously programmed data in the “adjacent Speed Dial Bin” as

described above is overwritten. Furthermore, if a number exceeding the maximum allowable dial
digit length is overwritten with a new number which complies to the 32-digit restriction, the excess
digits recorded in the next Bin (from the previous entry) is treated as a unique Speed Dial record.
• Speed Dial Number Nesting – A Speed
Dial number can be nested into another
Speed Dial number. For example, if an
international dialing prefix is used often,
program the prefix in any Speed Dial
Bin. Then in the another Speed Dial Bin,
program the first Bin number + the
number to dial. When the second Speed
Dial Bin is activated, Strata CTX first
retrieves and dials the international
dialing prefix from the first Bin location,
then adds the numbers to dial.
1. From the Program Menu, click Station >
Speed Dial. The Station Speed Dial
screen displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 516 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Primary DN

Select the PDN assigned the speed dial number.

01 Speed Dial Bin

Enter the station speed dial bin number. A station can have up to 100 speed dial bins.
Possible values: 00~99 (default = no value)
Note

5-34

Adding bin numbers here will automatically increment the number of speed dial
bins available to the station in increments of 10 speed dial bins. The number of
speed dial bins available to the station can also be assigned and displayed in
Prg 200, 35 - Station SpDial Bins. Example: If bin number 50 is entered here,
50 speed dial bins will automatically be assigned to the station and will also be
displayed in Prg 200, 35.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Station Speed Dial Table View

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

02 Number

This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 0~9 (seconds), which is the length of the
pause, 0=10 seconds.
Notes
If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will
automatically be appended to create longer numbers.

•

03 Name

•

Also another speed dial bin can be nested within another bin for dialing common
numbers. If speed dial bin 100 has long distance access digits 1010321, these digits
can be nested in to other speed dial bins by using *100 as the first digits of the other
bins. Example putting *10017145563425 into speed dial bin 150 would cause
SD150 to dial the access digits plus the number 10132117145563425.

•

If you are programming from the Telephone the digits * and # have a special
meaning when programming speed dial numbers. The # digit indicates the end of
entry and * is an escape character. To dial the digits * or # as part of the number;
enter ** or *#. To enter pauses enter *0~*9. The second digit represents the number
of seconds for the pause function.

Enter the LCD Name that displays on LCD dial directories.
Possible values: Up to 8 characters (default = no value)

Station Speed Dial Table View
Station Speed Dial Table View shows
the entire set up for all speed dial
numbers.
➤ To access the System Speed Dial

Table View
➤ Select System > System Speed

Dial Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6 for
table functionality.

Station

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-35

Station
PDN Table View

PDN Table View
This screen shows the entire
list of available PDNs
(shown right).
➤ To access the Station Speed

PDN Table View
Select Station > PDN Table
View.
Note See “Table Views” on

page 2-6 for table
functionality.

ISDN
The following programs assign ISDN data to stations.
Program Number(s): 202 and 217

202 ISDN BRI Station
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1

This command assigns ISDN BRI
stations.
1. Complete the “ISDN BRI Station
Record Sheets” on
page D-19.From the Program
Menu, click Station > ISDN >
Basic. The ISDN Basic Station
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. Enter a Primary DN for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed DN’s.
• Create – Assign a new Primary
DN with custom BRI Station
settings.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
• Delete – Enter a ISDN Primary DN to delete and click OK.

5-36

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
ISDN

• Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN to assign a new DN to the
ISDN BRI Station.
3. Set up ISDN BRI Station using the Program Detail table below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Primary DN

Enter the PDN. When a required DN is not programmed, the DN is regarded as a new
station. The System assigns default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

01 PDN Equipment No.

Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this PDN. This is the cabinet, slot, and
circuit number of the RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/RBSS interface PCB to which the the PDN
is, or should be, assigned. Enter data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter
050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

02 ISDN Channel
Group

Enter the ISDN Channel Group number.

03 ISDN Protocol

Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set in
the hardware level.

Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic)1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 1)

Possible values: Nat’l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat’l ISDN Nortel
Note
04 Type Connection

National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.

Select connection type.
Possible values: Point to point (default) or Point to Multi-point
Select the BRI Station COS assignments.

•
•
•

Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

Day1 COS
Day2 COS
Night COS

06 BRI Station DRL

Select the BRI Station DRL assignments.

•
•
•

Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

Day1 DRL
Day2 DRL
Night DRL

07 BRI Station FRL

Select the BRI Station FRL assignments.

•

Day1 FRL

Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

•

Day2 FRL

•

Night FRL

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station

05 BRI Station COS

5-37

Station
ISDN

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

09 BRI Station QPL

Select the BRI Station QPL assignments.

•

Day1 QPL

Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

•

Day2 QPL

•

Night QPL

08 LCR Group

Select the LCR Group number to which this BRI Station belongs.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

10 Speech Capability

Enable speech capability. See Table 5-5 on page 39.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

11 3.1 KHz Audio

Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 5-5 on page 39.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

12 7 KHz Audio

Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 5-5 on page 39.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

13 64Kbps
Unrestricted

Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 5-5 on page 39.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

14 56Kbps
Unrestricted
15 2 x 64Kbps
Unrestricted
16 B Channel
Selection

17 Idle B Channel
Selection

18 Interdigit Timer 1

Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:

•

Exclusive – (default) Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.

•

Preferred – Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.

•

Any Channel – Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.

Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default)

•

Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest to highest number of B-channel).

•

Select Backward Cyclic (from highest to lowest number of B-channel).

•

Select Forward Terminal for the lowest number B-channel (The Low-Low B-channel
selection).

•

Select Backward Terminal for the highest number B-channel. (The High-High Bchannel selection)

Select the Interdigit timer value, to time-out during dial tone.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)

19 Interdigit Timer 2

Interdigit timer value to time-out after the first digit is dialed.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)

20 CESID

Enter the CESID value for 911 calls.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)

5-38

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
ISDN

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

21 Number Voice Calls
Allowed

Select the Number of Voice Calls Allowed. If a selection is not made, previously written
data in this field is erased.
Possible values: One or Two (default)
Note

If One is selected, the other channel is reserved for Data.

22 Service Tone
Permission

Enable Service Tone Permission. Select Disable for modems and faxes.

23 TGAC Override

Enable TGAC Override.

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
24 Change System
Speed

Enable System Speed Dial changing permission.

25 Network COS

Enter the Network COS value. If a selection is not made, previously written data in this
field is erased.

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
26 DN2~32 DN8

Add a DN to this BRI Station. When a DN is entered into one of the seven available
fields, default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data is applied to the DNs. If a
selection is not made, any previously written data in this field is erased.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

33 Auto OCA

Enable OCA to occur automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows calls
to be received.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

34 Originate OCA

Enable this station to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

38 MW/DND

Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone when
it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a busy tone burst before
dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.

39 Tenant Number

Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned. (This feature is
available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values: 1~8

BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN
Bellcore
Nat’l ISDN

Bearer Services

ETSI

TTC

Speech

3.1kHz Audio

7kHz Audio
Circuit Mode
Unrestricted Digital Information

64 kbps

Rate adaptation
from 56 kbps

2x64

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station

Table 5-5

5-39

Station
ISDN

217 ISDN Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 202 page 5-36

Set ISDN Station parameters to define ISDN capabilities.
1. Complete the “ISDN Station Data
Record Sheet” on page D-20.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Station > ISDN > Station Data.
The ISDN Individual Station Data
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Primary DN for an
existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Hunt Groups.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
4. Set up ISDN Station Data using the Program Detail table below.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Primary DN

Enter Primary DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

01 Station Name

Enter a name for this station.
Possible values: Up to 9 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Dial Method

Select the audible tone when dialing.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or No Tone

03 System Call Forward

Select the System Call Forward assignment for this station.
Possible values: 0~32 (default = 0)

04 CF Password

Protect the System Call Forward settings by creating a password.
Possible values: Up to 4 digits (default = no value)

05 Door Phone Override
DND

Enable the Door Phone ringing indicator to override Do Not Disturb.

06 Emerg Call Group

Select this station’s emergency call group.

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
07 COS Override Code

Enable Class of Service override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

08 Display DN

Enter the DN to be displayed on the LCD.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

5-40

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Setup Wizards

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

09 VMID Code SMDI

Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16).
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #, up to 10 characters
(default = no value).
Note

12 Name Display

This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct and forwarded calls to the PDN. See Program 580 for
SMDI or DTMF choice.

Whether to put the user name in the list display.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Setup Wizards
There are three Station setup wizards—PDN Range, Multiple DN, and VMID Range. Each of them are
described below.

PDN Range Setup Wizard
This wizard is a programming time saver that reduces the time it takes to create or change Primary
Directory Numbers (PDN) and assign them to phones. The wizard guides the user to create a range of
desired PDNs to be assigned to a range of available station ports.
1. Select Station > Setup Wizard > PDN
Range.
Review the instructions that display
on the Wizard screen (shown right).

Station

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-41

Station
Setup Wizards

2. Click Start. The Primary DN Setup
Wizard screen displays (shown right).
3. Select the appropriate radio buttons
and enter the data in the other fields.
• Range of associated PDN
equipment.
• Selection to overwrite the existing
PDNs.
4. (Optional) Click Number Plan button
to access Numbering Plan page.
5. (Optional) Click PDN Table View
button to view existing PDN Table.
6. Press Start to create PDNs.
The screen containing the PDN assignments
(shown right) displays.
Note The first available equipment number

(card slot/circuit) is automatically used to
create the first PDN, etc.

Multiple DN Assignment Wizard
Important!

•

To avoid conflicts on new installations, you should use this wizard immediately after establishing and
assigning Primary DNs on telephones, especially before you program key strips or hunt groups.

•

The wizard can be used to assign Multiple DNs to new stations when adding new station cards.

This wizard substantially reduces CTX installation time when you need multiple DN buttons on
telephones. Multiple DNs are required in most CTX installations.
The wizard automatically programs multiple buttons onto telephones to operate as PDN buttons on the
telephones. This wizard automatically groups the telephone’s PDN button with the Phantom Directory
Number (PhDN) buttons so they all operate like PDNs on the telephone—this simulates Strata DK
multiple PDN operation. You will not have to set Call forward or VMID codes for the PhDNs since they
automatically assume the PDN Call Forward and VMID code assignments.
On these screens you need to specify how many button appearances should appear as PDNs on each
telephone or range of telephones (the number of buttons including the PDNs plus the PhDNs). You should
also specify the starting PhDN and Hunt Group number to be used to set up the multiple DN groups.

5-42

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Setup Wizards

Important!

Make sure you know exactly how many multiple DNs should be on each telephone before
using this wizard. After running the Multiple DN wizard, deletions or additions to Multiple
DN assignments must be made manually, one-by-one, for each telephone PhDN button and
Multiple DN hunt group. The wizard does not support changing existing Multiple DN
assignments in this version of CTX WinAdmin.

1. Click Station > SetUp
Wizard > Multiple DN.
The Multiple DN
Assignment Wizard
screen displays (shown
right).

2. Click Start. CTX
WinAdmin automatically
assigns the:
• Appropriate number of PhDN buttons onto the telephone. These operate as PDN buttons on the
telephone. PhDNs are assigned in sequence starting with the first button above the PDN.
CAUTION!

If other buttons were installed in a PhDN location they will be overwritten.

• Appropriate telephone as the owner of the PhDN buttons, starting with the PhDN you specified.
• PDN of the telephone as the name of the PhDN buttons.
• PDN and appropriate PhDNs of the telephone to the appropriate Multiple DN Hunt group, starting
with Hunt group number you specified.
The screen shown at right displays.
3. Based on your requirements, enter the
necessary fields.
Note The example on this screen shows that

4. Click Start to generate the request.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station

five buttons were entered. This assigns
the PDN plus four PhDNs on the
telephone starting with Key 1~Key 5.

5-43

Station
Setup Wizards

The screen changes to the one shown at
right.
Important!

•

This is a report that provides the Multiple
DN assignments that will be sent to the
CTX.

•

Ensure that this information is correct
before you click Continue. You can change
the assignments by clicking Back.

5. Click Continue to generate results onto
CTX database.
Note To modify these entries later, you will

have to use the appropriate individual program assignments.
6. Review the configuration screen. This is how
the multiple DNs are assigned in the CTX after
the wizard is done.
7. (Optional) To print the configuration results,
click Print.
8. To exit, select a command from the Program
pane.

VMID Range
This wizard reduces CTX programming time when you need to assign Voice Mail ID (VMID) codes. The
wizard will automatically assign specified VMID codes for a range of Primary DNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot
DNs.
Specify the range of PDNs, PhDNs, or Pilot DNs that should have VMID code assignments. Then select
the VMID code assignment method.
The three code assignment methods are to assign the VMID to:
• Be the same number as the appropriate DN (PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN).
• Start at specific number and increment by one for each consecutive DN.
• Be the same number for all DNs.
In addition to the above assignments, specific digits including * and # can be added to the front and/or back
of each VMID. This is not for Stratagy codes 91, 92, etc., they are set in Program 579.
You can program a range of VMID codes for PDNs, PhDNs and/or Pilot DNs.

5-44

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Station
Setup Wizards

1. Select Station > Setup Wizard > VMID Range.
2. The VMID Range Setup
Wizard displays (shown at
right).

3. Click Start. The input screen of the VMID Range
Setup Wizard displays (shown at right).
4. Select the type of VMID that should be assigned
to the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN. Then select the
assignment method and the digits, if any, to be
added to front and/or end of each VMID.
Note DN range is supported. VMID prefix and/or

suffix are supported.
5. Click Start to submit the settings to the CTX
database.

The result requested displays on the
screen shown at right.
6. (Optional) Click Print to save a hard copy
of the VMID assignment.

Station

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

5-45

Station
Setup Wizards

5-46

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks

This chapter provides trunk programming information for Strata CTX.

304 Incoming Line Group
Program Number(s): 304

Incoming Line Groups (ILG) is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private
line groups for incoming service.
1. Complete the “ILG Record Sheet”
on page D-21.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ILG. The Trunk ILG
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter an ILG number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed ILGs.
• Create – Assign a new ILG
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an ILG in the
Group Number field and click
Copy to make a new ILG
assignment with settings copied from the ILG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete an ILG.
4. Enter Program 304 data.
5. Click Submit.

Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-1

Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group

304 Incoming Line Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This assignment is used to configure ILGs only, OLGs are configured in the Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 306. The same line can be placed in an ILG and OLG.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Group Number

Enter the group number of the line group that should be configured.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)

01 Group Type

Select the ILG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN

02 Trunk Type

Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie

03 Service Type

Select CO Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: DID or DIT (default)

04 Private Service Type

Select the Tie Trunk Service Type. This field is required when Trunk Type is set to
Tie.
Possible values: Standard (default) or QSIG

05 GCO Key Number

Select ILG GCO Key Group for DIT mode (see Trunk Type above). The same GCO
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

06 Pooled Key Number

Select ILG Pooled Line Key Group for DIT mode. The same Pooled Line Group
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

07 COS

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

08 DRL

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

09 FRL

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

10 QPL

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

11 DID Digits

Select number of DID digits received from CO.
Possible values: 0~7 (default = 0)

12 Speech/3.1 KHz

Select Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech

13 Ringing Timer Delay 1

Select time to ring the Delay 1 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 12)

6-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

14 Ringing Timer Delay 2

Select time to ring the Delay 2 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 24)

15 Interdigit 1 Timer

Select Interdigit 1 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 15)

16 Interdigit 2 Timer

Select Interdigit 2 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 5)

17 Auto Camp-on

Select in box to toggle Automatic Camp-on.
Possible values: On (default) or Off

18 Calling Number ID

Select Calling Number Identification source.
Possible values: User Provided (default) or Network Provided

19 Intercept

Enable Intercept. A call is transferred to a special destination called intercept
position when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID, DIT or
DISA. Intercept is also activated when the destination is determined, but the call
cannot be terminated due to a defect or an incorrect number. If the system has a
simplified attendant console, the Attendant Console is usually specified to terminate
the call. This function ensures termination of a trunk line call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

20 Send Dial Tone

Enable Send Dial Tone.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

21 TGAC Override

Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

22 Network COS

Enter the Network COS number.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

23 LCR Group

Enter the LCR Group number. Calls from this ILG cannot tandem if this field is not
entered.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

24 Change COS Override
Code

Enable authority to change COS Override Code.

25 Register Speed Dial
Codes

Enable authority to create system speed dial codes.

26 Originator Invoke OCA

Enable authority for the originator of a call to invoke OCA when encountering a
busy station.

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
27 Senderized Tone Mode

Send DTMF tones as a complete number rather than digit-by-digit.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence

Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-3

Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

28 Emergency Call Group

Used to enable E911 calling across a QSIG network. The QSIG ILG is assigned to
an Emergency Call Group in the same way a station is in Program 200 FB17.
Without this assignment, the call will not attempt to complete to one of the trunks in
the Emergency Group and will result in an abandoned call. See Program 550
Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group Assignment.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)

29 Tenant Number

Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned. (This
feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and
higher.)
Possible values: 1~8.

306 Outgoing Line Groups
Prerequisite Program: None

OLG is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private line groups for outgoing
service. Assign and configure up to 128 OLGs (the same line can be placed in an OLG and an ILG).
1. Complete the “OLG Record Sheet”
on page D-22.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > OLG. The Trunk Outgoing
Line Groups (OLG) screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter an OLG number in the Group
Number field for an existing record
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed OLGs.
• Create – Assign a new OLG
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an OLG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new OLG assignment
with settings copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete an OLG.
4. Enter Program 306 data.
5. Enter Program 531. See “Destination Restriction Guide Page” on page 9-10 for details.
6. Enter Program 514. See “514 SMDR for OLG Assignment” on page 9-65 for details.
7. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Group Number

Enter the OLG Group number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)

6-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Group Type

Select the OLG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN

02 Trunk Type

Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie

03 Private Service Type

TIE Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: Standard (default) or QSIG

04 GCO Key1 Number

Select the first GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

06 Pooled Key1 Number

Select first Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

07 Pooled Key2 Number

Select second Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

08 COS

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

09 FRL

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

10 QPL

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

11 Speech/3.1 KHz

Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech

12 MOH Source

Select MOH Source.
Possible values: Silence, External1~15 (default = External1)

13 Account Codes

Enable Trunk forced Account Codes.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

14 Destination
Restriction

Enable Destination Restriction.

15 Credit Cart Calling

Enable Credit Card Calling.

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
16 Send CESID

Enable CESID sending.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Digit sending Mode for QSIG only.
Possible values: Cut Through or Senderized (default = Cut through)

18 Network COS

Select Network COS number.

Trunks

17 QSIG Sending Type

Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-5

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment

300 Trunk Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1

Assigns an analog or T1 trunk (line) and its parameters to the system. Click on each tab to navigate through
the programs. The trunks assigned to the equipment display on the left of the screen. The first column
displays the trunks used and the second column displays the equipment. You can also sort based on trunks
and equipment.
Important!

You must have Internet Explorer (IE) 6.0 on your PC for the sort to work correctly. If you
have IE 5.0, you can upgrade to IE 6.0 using the Strata CTX CD-ROM. IE 6.0 does not autoinstall from the CD-ROM; run ie6setup.exe from the IE 6.0 folder on the CD-ROM.

1. Complete the “Trunk Assignment
Record Sheet” on page D-23.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment. The Trunk
Basic Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Trunk Number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
• Create – Assign a new Trunk
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an Trunk Number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with settings
copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete an Trunk.
4. Enter Trunk Assignment Data.
5. Click Submit.
6. Click the Go Timer/DIT link to view Programs 308 and 310 (see “308 Trunk Timer” on page 6-9 for
details).
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Line Number

Enter the Line Number.
Possible values: 1~64 (CTX100), 1~96 (CTX670 Basic),
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

6-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Line Equipment No.

Enter the line equipment number as xxyyzz. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If the trunk should be connected to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,
circuit 3, enter 050203.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08
...or zz = T1 Circuit 01~24 (CTX670).
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~8; zz = Circuit 01~08 (CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:

•
•

CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•
02 Incoming Line Group

CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

Assign the trunk to Incoming Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

03 Outgoing Line Group

Assign the trunk to Outgoing Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

04 Dial Mode

Enter the Dial Mode.
Possible values: DP 10PPS, DP 20PPS or DTMF (default)

05 Signaling

•

DP 10 PPS = Rotary Dial, 10 PPS

•

DP 20 PPS = Rotary Dial, 20 PPS

Enter the signalling type.
Possible values: DID, Loop (default), Ground, Tie, LP (Japan), SR (Japan) or ACU
(UK)

06 Start Method

Enter the Start Method. This setting defines the start protocol method used between
the PSTN and this trunk. For DID/Tie trunks.
Possible values: Immediate Start (default), Timing Start or Wink Start

07 Release Supervision

Enable Release Supervision from the CO.
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)

08 Answer Supervision

Enable Answer Supervision from the CO.
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)
Enter the trunk name.
Possible values: Up to 14 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks

09 Trunk Name

6-7

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

10 External Ring Repeat

This option determines what ring signal is sent to telephones when a line rings the
telephone. Select CO Ring Repeat (“Supplied” in older versions of software) to use
the ring signal supplied by the CO or Centrex line. Select CTX Ring (“Not Supplied”
in older versions of software) to use the standard ring signal supplied by the CTX.

Important! CTX Ring must be used on all DISA lines for proper ringing operation.
Possible values: CO Ring Repeat (default), CTX Ring
11 DTMF Back Tone

Select DTMF Back Tone type.
Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone

12 Hunt Order

Change the trunk hunting order sequence for this Trunk.
Possible values: 1~264 or Last One (default = 1)

13 Immediate Cut-Through

This option should be enabled on a line only if the talk-path must be established
immediately after seizing a selected outgoing line.
Example, a line connected to a Central Office Ringdown circuit.
Possible values: Enable, Disable (default)

CAUTION!

This option will bypass Destination Restriction and E911
digit analysis. Do not enable this option on a line where
these functions are required.

This option is available only on ground and loop, analog or T1 circuits. It should not
be enabled for Tie, DID, ISDN and QSIG lines.
Available with CTX R1.02, MA217 and above software.

313 Caller ID
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-6

This program assigns Caller ID circuits to the CO Line to which the circuit is connected. The ANI, DNIS,
DID formats for TI and analog DID CO Lines are also defined.
1. Complete the “Caller ID
Assignment Record Sheet” on
page D-24.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment, the click the
Caller ID tab. The Trunk Caller ID
Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Trunk Number in Trunk
Index for an existing record or click
one of the following buttons:
• List – to view a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
• Copy – Enter the Trunk Number
in the Trunk Number field and click Copy to make new Caller ID trunk numbers.
4. Enter Caller ID Assignment data.
5. Click Submit.

6-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Trunk Number

Enter the Trunk Number.
Possible values: 1~64 (CTX100), 1~96 (CTX670 Basic),
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

01 Signaling Method

Specify the format for the interface being used.
Possible values: Nothing (default), ANI/DNIS-MCI, ANI/DNIS-Sprint or CLASS
(Caller ID)

02 Signaling Contents

Specify the contents of the ANI/DNIS format.
Possible values: ANI and DNIS, ANI only, DNIS only or DID only (default = no
value).

03 CLASS Equipment No.

If the CLASS type is chosen, the trunk must be assigned to a Caller ID circuit. Enter
the RCIU/RCIS equipment number as xxyyzz.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01(CTX100); 01~02 (CTX670 Basic); 01~07
(CTX670 Exp.)
yy = Slot 01~08 (CTX100); 01~10 (CTX670)
zz = Circuit 01~08
Notes
CLASS equipment numbers are required when assigning a trunk to a RCIU/
RCIS circuit.

•
•

It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing caller ID circuit
to trunk assignments. Example: If the trunk should be connected to a caller ID
circuit (RCIU/RCIS) in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.

308 Trunk Timer
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-6

These commands assign Trunk timers.
1. Complete the “Trunk Timer/DIT
Record Sheet” on page D-27.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment, then click the
Timer tab. The Trunk Timer and
DIT Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Trunk equipment number
field. Enter Program 308 data.
• List – to view a summary list of
programmed Trunks timers.
• Copy – to copy to trunk timer
ports.
4. Click Submit.
Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-9

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Line No.

Enter the trunk equipment number.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08 or
zz=T1 Circuit 01~24 (CTX670)
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~08; zz = Circuit 01~24 (CTX100)
(default = no value)
Note

01 Auto Release

Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new trunk to the system. It
can also be used to display the equipment location of existing trunks.

Select the Automatic Release timing.
Possible values: Disable, Detect 95ms or Detect 450ms (default)
Note

02 Short Flash

Select Disable if the CO does not send the automatic release signal to the loop
start trunk.

Select Short Flash Time
Possible values: 0~15, where 1 = 100msec. (default = 5, which is .5 seconds)
0 = no flash, 1 = .1 sec., 2 = .2 sec. – 15=1.5 sec. 5 is the most
common duration of a hook flash signal
When a telephone initiates the short flash signal to the CO line it is connected to (using
the short Flash feature button or access code #450) the duration of a short flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to hook flash a centrex line.
The short flash range is 0 to 1.5 seconds in increments of 0.1 seconds.

03 Long Flash

Select Long Flash Time.
Possible values: 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30, where 5 = .5 seconds. (default = 5)
When a telephone initiates the long flash signal to the CO line it is connected to (using
the Long Flash feature button or access code #451) the duration of a long flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to disconnect the line. The
long flash range is 0 to 3 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. Possible values: 0=no
flash, 5=.5 sec., 10=1sec. 15=1.5 sec., 20=2 sec., 25=2.5 sec., 30=3 sec.

04 Pause after Flash

Pause time after flash: After a flash signal is sent to a CO line, this timer determines
when the line will start to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values: 0~5, 0 = immediately sent, and 1sec.delay to 5sec.delay
(default = 1 second delay before sending digits)

05 Response
Information

The response timer is for analog DID/TIE lines that have the “start method” set for
“Timing” in Prg300-06. After a line is seized this timer determines when the line will start
to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values: 0=immediatly sent, and 50msec.delay to 500msec.delay
(default = 500mseconds delay before sending digits)

6-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment

310 DIT Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-6

This program assigns DIT Number Analysis Table for DIT trunks. DIT trunks are ground and loop start
trunks.
1. Complete the “Trunk Timer/DIT
Record Sheet” on page D-27.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Assignment, then click the
DIT tab. The DIT Assignments
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Trunk equipment number
field. Enter Program 310 data.
• List – to view a summary list of
programmed Trunks timers.
• Copy – to copy to trunk timer
ports.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Line No.

Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3,
enter 050203.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01~07; yy =slot 01~10; zz = circuit 01~08 or Channel
01~24 (CTX670).
xx = cabinet 01; yy =slot 01~08; zz = circuit 01~24 or Channel
(CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:

•

CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.

•

CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•

CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.

•

CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-11

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Day1 Destination Type
02 Day2 Destination Type
03 Night Destination Type

Select Destination Type for each.

Day1 Destination Digits
Day2 Destination Digits
Night Destination Digits

Possible values: : No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem, or Night
Bell

•

No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.

•

Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment

•

DSIA – assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.

•

Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX WinAdmin PC and modem.

•

Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3sec.open)

Enter Destination, Directory Number or Access Codes for each, only if Dialing Digits
is selected as Destination Type.

•

If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type, enter the Directory Number that the line
should ring.If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is
the external Page group number.

•

If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new page access
code as the leading digits.

•

Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route
incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.

Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
04 MOH Source

Select the MOH source for Analog DIT Trunk. The Scroll key must be used to select
MOH sources indicated by 10 or higher.
Possible values: External1~15 (default = External1)

6-12

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing

309 Direct Inward Dialing
This command assigns DID number analysis tables to ILGs.
1. Complete the “DID Assignment
Record Sheet” on page D-25.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > DID. The Trunk DID
Assignments screen displays
(shown right).
3. Select an ILG Number.
4. Enter a DID Number in the 01 DID
Number field
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a list of programmed
DIDs.
• Create – Make a new DID assignment using default settings.
• Copy – Enter a DID Number in 01 DID Number and click Copy to make a new DID assignment
with settings copied from the DID Number entered.
• Delete – Delete a DID.
5. Enter DID Assignment data.
6. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

ILG Group Number

Select the ILG number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)

01 DID Number

Enter a DID number.
Possible values: 1~7 digits may include wild card “?” where “?” = 0~9 (default = no
value).

02 MOH Source

Set Music On Hold for Analog ISDN DID Trunk
Possible values: Quiet Tone or External 1~15 (default = External 1)

03 GCO Key Group

GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

04 Pool Key Group

Pooled Line Key Group
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)
Select the Destination Type for Audio/Speech calls
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks

05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
07 Audio Night Dst Type

6-13

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Audio Day1 Destination
Audio Day2 Destination
Audio Night Destination

Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should
ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external
Page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming
calls back out to a public or private network number.

08 Data Day1 Dst Type
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
10 Data Night Dst Type

Select the Destination Type for data calls

Data Day1 Destination
Data Day2 Destination
Data Night Destination

Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.

Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell

Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should
ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external
Page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming
calls back out to a public or private network number.

11 DNIS VMID Code

Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Note

This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01. This
code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF code set in
Program 309, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed; therefore, if
using Program 309, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.

This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to
voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is
answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards
to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN’s mail
box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN’s VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets direct and forwarded DID\DNIS
calls to voice mail as explained above.
12 DNIS Name

Enter DNIS name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX WinAdmin (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)

6-14

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

15 VM Dial

Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9 (seconds),
up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to
voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is
answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards
to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN’s mail
box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN’s VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if the
CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.

16 Tenant Number

Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned.
Possible values: 1~8.

Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-15

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments

318 DID Intercept Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 304 page 6-2

This command assigns the DID Routing table when DID numbers are undefined or not received.
1. Complete the “DID Intercept
Assignment Record Sheet” on
page D-26.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > DID Intercept.The DID
Intercept Assignments screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter an ILG Number
...or click List to view a summary
list of programmed ILGs.
4. Enter DID Type in the 01 Type field.
5. Enter DID Intercept Assignment
data.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

ILG Number

Enter ILG number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = no value

01 Type

Select Routing Type.
Possible values: No DID (default) or Not Determined

02 MOH Source

Select Music On Hold
Possible values: External 1~15 (default = External 1)

03 Group CO Destination

GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)

04 Pooled Line Group

POOL Line Key Group Number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp), (default = 0)

6-16

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
07 Audio Night Dst Type

Select the Audio/Speech call Day1 destination type.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell

•

No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.

•

Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment

•

DSIA – assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.

•

Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX WinAdmin PC and modem.

•

Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3sec.open)

Audio Day1 Dst. DN
Audio Day2 Dst DN
Audio Night Dst DN

Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is “Dialing Digits”

08 Data Day1 Dst Type
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
10 Data Night Dst Type

Select the data call Day1 destination type

Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell

•

No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.

•

Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment

•

DSIA – assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.

•

Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CTX
processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX WinAdmin PC and modem.

•

Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3sec.open)

Data Day1 Dst DN
Data Day2 Dst DN
Data Night Dst DN

Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is “Dialing Digits”

11 DID/DNIS No. VMID

Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.

Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value).
Note

Trunks

If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets of direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-17

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

12 DID/DNIS Name

Enter DNIS Name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX WinAdmin (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)

15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF
VMID

Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9
(seconds), up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, the mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN’s mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN’s VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if
the CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.

6-18

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
Service

Service
Program Number(s): 311 and 319

These commands assign Assigns Direct Inward System Access (DISA) properties.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > Service. The Trunk
Services screen displays (shown
right).
2. Enter Program 311 data.
3. Enter Program 319 data.
4. Click Submit.

311 DISA Security Code
Prerequisite Program: None

Assigns DISA parameters.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 DISA Enabled

Enable DISA security code.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

02 DISA Code

Enter DISA security code.
Possible values: Up to 15 digits (default = no value)

03 Response Timer

Enter the time, in seconds, for Strata CTX to respond to a call.
Possible values: 0~30 (default = 5)

04 Idle Timer

Enter the time in seconds to wait for idle DTMF.
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 10)

05 Tie Line Access

Enable this feature to allow DISA callers to access Tie lines when they call into the
system. (This feature is available with CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
R2.2G.0 and higher.)
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

319 Intercept Treatment
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns Intercept positions for Strata CTX Day/Night schedules. Intercept positions are
used when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID or DIT.
DESCRIPTION

Tenant Number

Select the Tenant number for which the Intercept Destinations should be
assigned.

Trunks

FIELD

Possible values: 1~8.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-19

Trunks
315 T1 Trunk Card

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Day1 Destination Type
02 Day2 Destination Type
03 Night Destination Type

Select Destination Type for each.

Day1 Destination
Day2 Destination
Night Destination

Enter Destination for each.

Possible values: None (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell

Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)

•
•
•

To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16

315 T1 Trunk Card
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1

This command assigns T1 Trunk Card Data to the system.
1. Complete the “Trunk Timer/DIT
Record Sheet” on page D-27.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > T1. The T1 Trunk Card
Data Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter T1 card location in Shelf/Slot
field (xxyy). The selected slot
requires a DTU Card.
• xx = Cabinet 01~07
• yy = Slot 01~10
...or click the following buttons:
• List – to view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
• Copy – to T1 trunk equipment.
4. Enter values for Program 315.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

T1 Equipment
Location

Enter the RDTU PCB equipment location.

01 Coding Format

Select the Coding Format.

Possible values: xx = cabinet 01; yy =slot 03, 05, or 07
...or xx = cabinet 02~07; yy =slot 01, 03, or 05
Cabinet – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (CTX100).
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet (CTX670).
Slot – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots
(CTX670)
(default = no value)

Possible values: None, PZC, B8ZS (default) or ZCS

6-20

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
DID/DNIS Table View

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

02 Frame Format

Select the Frame Format.
Possible values: SF Mode or ESF Mode (default)

04 Receive PAD

Select the Receive PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB

05 Send PAD

Select the Send PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB

DID/DNIS Table View
This screen provides the DID/DNIS Table View on the DID command page.
Important!

To avoid any errors, you must first set the digit length under Trunk > ILG.

➤ To access DID/DNIS table view
➤ Click Trunk > DID/DNIS

Table View
...or use Program 309.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6
for table functionality.
Note You can navigate this

table using the ILG and
the DID/DNIS which are
the first and second dropdowns between the
Previous and Next
buttons.

ISDN
The following program enables set up for ISDN related system settings.

317 ISDN BRI Trunk
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1

Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-21

Trunks
ISDN

1. This command assigns ISDN BRI
Trunks.
1. Complete the “ISDN BRI Station
Record Sheets” on page D-19. From
the Program Menu, click Trunk >
ISDN > BRI.
2. Enter Channel Group number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
• Create – Assign a new Trunk
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter a Channel Group
number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with settings copied from the Channel
Group you entered.
• Delete – Delete an Trunk.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Channel Group

Enter the BRI channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)

01 Equipment Number

Enter the equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN BRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Example: If the RBUU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301 for circuit 1.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08 or 01~24
(CTX670)
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~08; zz = Circuit 01~04 (CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.

•
•

Slot numbers:

•
•
02 Protocol

CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set
in the hardware level.
Possible values: Nat’l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat’l ISDN Nortel
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.

6-22

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
ISDN

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

03 ILG

ILG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being received.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value).

04 OLG

OLG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being
originated.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value).

06 Bearer Svc - Speech

Enable speech capability. See Table 6-1 on page 24.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

07 Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz
Audio

Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1 on page 24.

08 Bearer Svc - 7 KHz
Audio

Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1 on page 24.

09 Bearer Svc Unrestricted 64K

Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 6-1 on page 24.

10 Bearer Svc Unrestricted 56K

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable bearer capabilities for the channel
group.
Possible values:

Enable (default) or Disable

11 Bearer Svc Unrestricted 2x64K
12 Outgoing B Ch Select

Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:

13 B Ch Selection

•

Explicit – Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.

•

Preferred – (default) Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.

•

Any Channel – Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.

Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default = Backward Terminal)

•

Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest number to highest number of B-channel).

•

Select Backward Cyclic (from highest number to lowest number of B-channel).

•

Select Forward Terminal for the lowest numbered B-channel.

Select Backward Terminal for the oldest number B-channel. (The High-High Bchannel selection)
14 Initialize Type

Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) type of initialization.
Possible values: User Entry (Auto SPID On), User Entry (Auto SPID Off), Auto SPID
or None (default)

15 Initialization Display

Enter the text to be displayed for SPID Initialization.

16 SPID #1
17 SPID #2

Enter the SPID value. These fields are required if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol. When no data is entered, any previously entered information is overwritten.

Trunks

Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = User)

Possible values: Up to 20 ASCII characters (default = No Value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-23

Trunks
ISDN

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

18 T-Wait Timer

Enable the T-Wait Timer. This field is needed if you selected National ISDN in Protocol
above. This timer, used along with the SPID, assigns random initializing SPID times to
prevent BRI interfaces from re-initialize at the same time after a reset or power
outage.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

19 Voice Calls

Select the number of simultaneous voice (speech) calls that can exist at the same
time on this interface.
Possible values: One or Two (default)

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

Enter the telephone number for subscriber 1. Telephone number should be consistent
with D channel data. If no data is entered in this field any previously programmed
information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Enter the telephone number for subscriber number 2. If no data is entered in this field
any previously programmed information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)

Table 6-1

Bearer Capability Table
Bellcore
National ISDN

ETSI

TTC

Speech

3.1 KHz

Bearer Services

7 KHz

Circuit Mode
Unrestricted
Digital
Information

64 Kbps

Rate adaptation
from 56 Kbps

2x64 Kbps

6-24

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
ISDN

302 PRI and IP QSIG
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1

The PRI (RPTU, BPTU) and IP QSIG (BIPU-Q) interface cards need to have a number of assignments for
defining its operation. These include assigning which channels are available for use and the location of the
D-channel or signaling channel. The D-channel exists on the circuit assigned in this command. Also, a
number of optional functional capabilities also need to be enabled or disabled.
For BIPU-Q channel groups, parameters 01~04 must be configured, all other parameters should remain at
default. All parameters should be configured for ISDN. Many of these are normally set to default.
Note PRI ILGs and OLGs are assigned using “Call-by-Call” on page 6-29. Therefore, ILG and OLG must

be set to 0.
1. Complete the “PRI Trunks
Record Sheet” on page D-29.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > PRI.
3. Enter Channel Group number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – View a summary list of
programmed Trunks.
• Create – Assign a new Trunk
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an Channel
Group number and click
Copy to make a new Trunk
assignment with settings
copied from the Channel
Group entered.

5722

• Delete – Delete an Trunk
(Trunks 1~128 for CTX670 and 1~32 for CTX100).
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Channel Group

Channel Group Number.
Assign the proper PAD levels to channel groups in Programs 107, 108 and 114.
These levels are critical for ISDN and IP QSIG speech levels, as well as Quality Of
Service. Refer to the CTX Programming Manual guide line to set these levels.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)

Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-25

Trunks
ISDN

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 RPTU Equipment No.

Enter the ISDN RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q equipment number as xxyyzz.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01; yy = 03, 05, or 07; zz = Circuit 01
...or xx = cabinet 02~07; yy = 01, 03, or 05; zz = Circuit 01
(default = no value)
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet. CTX670: Select 01 for Base
and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots. CTX670:
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Note

zz = Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q
parameters

Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301. Enter the
equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN PRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the
system. They can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU
PCBs.
02 Protocol

The Protocol to be followed defines the type of interface expected based upon the
equipment type at the distant end of the connection.
In North America, the choices are 1-Bellcore National ISDN; 4-Bellcore National
ISDN NT; or 5-Q-Sig.
Use IP for BIUP-Q, IP Qsig.
Use QSIG for RPTU/BPTU, PRI Qsig
Possible values: National ISDN, ETSI, TTC, National ISDN Nortel or Q-Sig
(default = None)

03 ILG

ISDN and IP Qsig need to have Trunk Group assignments to process the calls
being received. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then
Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~48 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

04 OLG

ISDN and IP Qsig needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process the calls
being originated. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then
Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~48 (CTX670 Basic), 0~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = 0)

05 Trunk ID Type

Identify whether the communication with the PSTN requires an identifier. Select
Explicit to require an identifier.
Possible values: Implicit (default) or Explicit

06 Trunk ID

An identifier must be used as part of the addressing when an “explicit” identified is
used to communicate with the PSTN which channel on which link is used for the
given call. This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN.
Possible values: 0 ~ 126 (default = 0)

6-26

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
ISDN

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

07 D Ch Position

PRI includes a 64-kbps D-channel (for transfer of signal information). Select the
channel position to be used for D channel signaling.
Note

This field is used only when the span interface speed is 1.5M. If the span
interface speed is 2M the value is fixed at 16.

Possible values: 0 ~ 24 (default = 24)
08~13 Bearer Services:

1. Enable the Bearer Capabilities allowed for this PRI Trunk channel group.

•

Speech

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

•

3.1 KHz Audio

2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.

•

7 KHz Audio

Note

•

Unrestr. 64K

•

Unrestr. 56K

•

Unrestr. 2x64K

In North America, only Channel Number map is used (Channel Number).
See Table 6-2.

Possible values: Channel Number (default) or Slot Number

•

Unrestr. 384K

1. The Bearer Capabilities (384k Unrestricted(H0), 1536k Unrestricted(H11),
1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video, and Unrestricted
Multirate) are not used and should remain disabled.

•

Unrestr. 1536K

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

•

Unrestr. 1920K

•

Restr. Digital

•

Video

14~18 Bearer Services:

2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
Note

In North America, only Channel Number B map is used. See Table 6-2.

Possible values: Channel Number B (default), Channel Number H, Slot Map B or
Slot Map H
19 Bearer Svc Multirate
Unrestricted

The Bearer Capabilities 384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted (H11), 1920k
Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video and Unrestricted Multirate are not
used and should remain disabled. See Table 6-2.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

20 B Ch Selection Method

The method used for selecting an idle ‘B’ channel and the reaction if the PSTN
indicates the channel is not available needs to be chosen to originate a call from
CTX.
Possible values: Explicit (default), Preferred or Any Channel
Preferred option is recommended, unless PSTN needs other choice.

21 B-Ch Selection

The search method for choosing an idle ‘B’ channel shall also be specified.
Backward Terminal is the normal method with the PSTN following a Forward
Terminal method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or
Backward Terminal (default)

22 T1 Time Slot Pattern

1544 Time Slot Pattern.
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Flexible or Floating

23 E1 Time Slot Pattern

2048 Time Slot Pattern
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Fixed2 or Flexible
Specify whether the T-Wait timer is to be enabled or disabled. This field is only
valid for Nat’l ISDN. This should not be enabled for PRI, it is for BRI.

Trunks

24 T-Wait Timer

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-27

Trunks
ISDN

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

25 RBT on Incoming Call

Enable Ringback Tone when terminating a call. This field is only valid for Nat’l
ISDN.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

26 Network Mode

Set this span as Master or Slave for Layer 2 of a QSIG PRI. The opposite value
must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI terminates. This governs call
setup activity and is not related to clock synchronization.
Possible values: Master (default) or Slave

27 Negotiation Priority

Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a QSIG PRI. The opposite value
must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI terminates.
Possible values: Side A (default) or Side B

28 Layer 1 Short Break
Tolerant

If layer 1 is interrupted for less than 90 seconds. CTX will keep the current calls
open. (This feature is available with Strata CTX R2.2 or higher and CTX WinAdmin
R2.2G0 or higher.)
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

29 2-B channel Transfer

Enable this option to allow 2-B channel conference on PRI calls. This allows to PRI
channels to be connected in the same conference or Tandem call.
Note

30 Q931 Protocol Timer
Table 6-2

This option must also be enabled by PRI provider to allow it to work.

Sets the Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is 300s.

Bearer Services Table

Bearer Services

Nat’l ISDN

ETSI

TTC

Speech

3.1 KHz Audio

7 KHz Audio
unrestricted digital
information

Circuit
Mode

64 kbps

Rate adaptation from 56
kbps

2x64
384kbp (H0)

1536kbps (H11)

1920kbps (H12)
multirate (n x 64 kbps)

Packet
Mode

6-28

X
X

Restricted digital Information

Video

Shelf/Slot/Circuit

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
ISDN

Call-by-Call
Program Number(s): 324 and 323

Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share a PRI channel group. Traffic requirements of
different facilities vary at different times, and sharing B channels on a Call-by-Call basis makes it possible
to use fewer B channels to perform an equivalent service to the discrete counterpart.
1. Complete the “324 CBC Time
Zones” on page 6-30.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > Call by Call. The
ISDN Call by Call Service screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter Channel Group number.
4. Enter Program 323 data.
5. Enter Program 324 data.
6. Click Submit.

323 CBC Service
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-25

To accomplish CBC services, each facility needs to be defined, its related Line Group assigned and
minimum and maximum values for the services provided. These service parameters may be set for three
different time zones, thus allowing fewer or more services of different types at different times of the day.
Complete the “Call-by-Call Record Sheet” on page D-30.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Channel Group

Enter the Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

01 Index

Enter the CBC Service Index, or click one of the following buttons:

•

List – view a summary list of programmed Trunks.

•

Create – Assign a new Trunk with default settings.

Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~48 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
02 Type of Service

Select the CBC Service Type.
Note

To delete CBC, set this field to 1: No Data.

03 Facility Code

Enter the supplied Facility code value from the PSTN. If no data is entered in this field,
any previously entered data is deleted.

Trunks

Possible values: No data (default), POTS, FX, Tie Line (Enbloc), Tie Line (Cut through),
Intra LATA Out WATS, Banded Out WATTS, Inter LATA Out WATS or
INWATS

Possible values: 00~31(default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-29

Trunks
ISDN

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

04 Service Parameter

Enter the Service parameters supplied from PSTN. If no data is entered in this field, any
previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

05 Network ID

Enter the Network ID code supplied from PSTN (this field is required if you selected
“Inter LATA Out WATS” Type of Service. If no data is entered in this field, any previously
entered data is deleted.
Possible values: 3 to 4 digits (default = no value)

06 ILG

Specify the ILG for this facility.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = 0)

07 OLG

Specify the OLG for this facility.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = 0)

08 Min Calls Zone 1

Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)

09 Max Calls Zone 1

Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)

10 Min Calls Zone 2

Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)

11 Max Calls Zone 2

Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)

12 Min Calls Zone 3

Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)

13 Max Calls Zone 3

Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)

324 CBC Time Zones

This command assigns Call-by-Call Time Zone.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Channel Group

Channel Group Number
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

01 Start Zone 1

Enter the Time Zone Starting Time (hhmm).

02 Start Zone 2

Possible values: hh = 00~23, 99 (hour)
mm = 00~59, 99 (minutes)
9999 = delete time zone, (default = no value)

03 Start Zone 3

6-30

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
ISDN

320 B Channel
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-25

PRI interfaces are purchased on per interface and channel basis. The B channel assignments allow for a
flexible activation of channels to match the subscribed services from the PSTN.
1. Complete the “B Channel Select
Record Sheet” on page D-31.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > B Channel. The
ISDN B-Channel Assignments
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Equipment Number, or
click List to see a summary of
progammed circuits.
4. Click the B Channel numbers that
you want to activate (see Table 6-3
below for T1 and E1 B Channel
default settings).
5. Click Submit.
Table 6-3

B Channel Defaults

B Channel Position
01~15

17~23

1.5M (T1)

OFF (Dch Pos)

2.0M (E1)

OFF (Dch Pos)

25~31

Span Interface Speed

Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-31

Trunks
ISDN

316 Shared D Channel
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-25

The PRI Interface can be extended to include an additional PRI card to expand the total number of
channels to 47 on a Channel Group. This second PRI may optionally offer a backup D channel.
1. Complete the “Shared D Channel
Record Sheet” on page D-32.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > D Channel. The
Share D Channel Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Channel Group number
(1~128, default = no value), or click
the List button to view a summary
list of programmed Channel
Groups.
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Channel Group

Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)

01 Equipment Number

Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz:
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01, yy = 03, 05, or 07 and zz = Channel 01 is always
used to assign RPTU parameters
...or xx = Cabinet 02~10, yy = 01, 03, or 05 and zz = Channel 01 is
always used to assign RPTU parameters
(default = no value)
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the system.
It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU PCBs.

02 Trunk ID

An identifier must be used as part of the addressing to communicate with the PSTN
which channel on which link is used the given call. This identifier is assigned by the
connected PSTN.
Possible values: 1~ 126 (default = 1)

03 D-Ch Provided

If a backup ‘D’ Channel is to be used, it needs to be enabled.
Possible values: D-channel or No D-channel (default)

04 Backup D-Ch
Position

The channel position within the 24 channels must be identified to be used for the ‘D’
channel signaling.
Possible values: 1~24

6-32

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
ISDN

Calling Number
Program Number(s): 321 and 322

When calls are made using ISDN services, the telephone number for which the call originates must be
identified to the PSTN.
1. Complete the “Calling Number
Record Sheets” on page D-33.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Trunk > ISDN > Calling Number.
The ISDN Calling Number
Identification screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter the OLG Number, or click the
List button to view a summary list
of programmed OLGs.
4. Enter Program 321 data.
5. Enter Program 322 data.
6. Click Submit.

321 Calling Number Identification
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-4

The Calling Number ID is what is defined as the user supplied Calling Number. This number may be
optionally screened by the PSTN to ensure only calls from valid billable telephone numbers are allowed to
originate calls.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

OLG Number

Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)

01 Default Number

Enter the telephone number to use by default when originating a call. This is the
number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Number Prefix

Enter the prefix telephone number for which a DID number will be appended to create a
User Identified telephone number.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number may or may not be a billed number, but is used for Caller ID at the distant
end and could be used for returning your call.

03 Number Verification

Specify whether the number provided should be screened by the PSTN before the call is
to proceed.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Enter the second telephone number to use by default when originating a call.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Trunks

04 Default Number 2

This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes. The second
number is for BRI only

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-33

Trunks
ISDN

322 Called Number Table
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-4

When calls are received from the PSTN, a Called Number is supplied as part of the Setup Message. This
Called Number may be used for directing the call to the appropriate service with Strata CTX.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

OLG Number

OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)

01 Source Type

Specify the type of circuit used for outgoing calls: 1- PDN; 2- GCO; 3- Pooled Line.
Possible values: Primary DN (0~99999), Group CO (1~128) or Pool Line Group
(1~128); (default = no value)

02 Source Number

Specify the number of the source type selected (PDN, GCO or Pooled Line).
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp),
(default = no value)

03 DID Number

Specify the number of digits received for reaching this service.
Possible values: Up to 7 digits (default = no value)
Note

6-34

Destination Type and Destination must be entered before a DID number can be
assigned.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
This wizard enables you to assign Direct Inward Dialing / Dialed Number Identification Service (DID/
DNIS) to ILGs quickly and easily. The wizard automatically takes you through the different programs and
parameters required.
Follow the steps below to start using the DID/DNIS Wizard.

Step 1: Select or Create DID/DNIS ILG
1. Select Trunk > Setup Wizard >
DID/DNIS.
2. After reading the instructions on
the screen (shown right), click
Start.

Step 1: 304 Select or Create DID/
DNIS ILG screen displays (shown
right).
3. In the 00 DID/DNIS Incoming Line
Group (ILG) field, click Create
...or from the drop-down menu,
select a DID/DNIS ILG to edit.
Note Only DID/DNIS ILGs appear in

the drop-down box.
See table below for screen fields
and field descriptions.

DESCRIPTION

01 ILG Type

Select analog for RDDU or RDTU interface, or ISDN for RPTU interface.

11 DID/DNIS Digit Length

Select the number of digits (1~7) that compose each DID number for this DID/DNIS
ILG. This is the number of DID digits sent from the CO on incoming DID/DNIS. If ANI
digits are sent with DID digits, only set this parameter for the quantity of DID digits
sent.

02 Line Type

DID lines should always be set as CO type lines.

03 DID/DIT Service

DID lines should always be set as DID service

04 Std/Q-SIG Service

DID lines should always be set for “Standard” service

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks

FIELD

6-35

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

4. If you clicked Create in Step 3, the Create New
DID/DNIS ILG screen displays (shown at right).
Fill in the three fields on the screen and click Create Now. The
DID/DNIS Number Range Wizard screen displays with the
new information.
5. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/
DNIS assignments. This table displays assignments for all
DID/DNIS ILGs currently programmed in the CTX. For more
details, see “DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-21.
6. After creating or selecting a DID/DNIS ILG, click Next.

Step 2: Create or Delete DID/DNIS Numbers for ILG 2
1. From the Step 2: 309 Create or Delete DID/DNIS
Numbers for ILG 2 screen (shown right), click
Create to create a block of DID/DNIS numbers.
The numbers are created in consecutive order.

The Create DID/DNIS Numbers screen displays (shown
right).
• Specify the first number in the DID/DNIS block.
Note The quantity of digits must match the quantity of digits

assigned to the selected ILG (refer back to “DID/DNIS
Digit Length” on the previous screen).
• Specify the DID/DNIS Number block size that should be
created. This is the quantity of DID/DNIS numbers
ordered from the DID/DNIS provider.
• Specify “overwrite existing” or “add to existing” DID/
DNIS numbers. If no DID/DNIS numbers exist, add or
overwrite is OK.
...or click Delete and the delete DID/DNIS number dialog box
displays (shown right). Specify the first and last DID/DNIS
number to delete using the drop-down boxes; or, check mark
Delete all DID/DNIS numbers. Click Delete Now. The
numbers are deleted.
CAUTION!

6-36

Overwrite erases all existing DID/DNIS numbers currently programmed for the
selected ILG.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
“DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-21.
3. When finished, click Next.

Step 3: Assign DID/DNIS Number Audio Destinations for ILG 2
1. From the Step 3: 309 Assign DID/DNIS Number
Audio Destinations for ILG 2 screen (shown right),
set the DID/DNIS Number range.
Note This step enables you to assign the ringing

destinations for all DID/DNIS numbers in the
selected ILG. This assignment applies only to
Voice (audio) calls—not to data calls.
2. Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which
ringing assignments should be made. Use the First
Number/Last Number drop-down arrows.
3. Fill in the appropriate fields on this screen (see
field descriptions below).
4. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
“DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-21.
5. After selecting DID/DNIS ringing destination assignments, click Submit to register them in the CTX
database.
6. After creating DID/DNIS ringing destinations, click Next to assign DID/DNIS Voice Mail ID codes.
These VM codes are optional and are only used if DID/DNIS numbers have unique VM boxes to “call
forward to” or “ring directly to”.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

GCO Key Group

If a Group CO Key is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on telephones
that have this key.
Note

Pool Key Group

If a Pool Key Group is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on
telephones that have this key.
Note

Set for Period

This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in
the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period assignments do
not apply, GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.

DID/DNIS ringing assignments can be unique for each CTX time period: Day, Day2
and Night. Select the period(s) in which the destinations should ring. Then select the
destination type.

Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-37

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Destination Type

Select the type of destination:
DISA - to call in and receive DISA dial tone.
Built-in modem - to call in directly to the CTX modem with CTX WinAdmin.
Night Bell - to call in and close the BIOU or ACTU night bell control relay.
Dialing Digits - to call in and:

•

Ring PDNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot Numbers

•

Night Ring over External Page - feature access code must be included in the
dialing digits.

•

Access outgoing CO lines, Network Nodes and/or LCR to set up tandem calls line access codes must be included in the dialing digits.

Notes

Set the Dialing Digits
range

•

When Dialing Digits is the selected Destination Type, you must set the Dialing
Digit Range below.

•

This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in this
Program or Program 304, ILG assignments.

Select the method in which dialing digit ringing destinations should be created:
Use DNIS as Destination - the destination digits for each DID/DNIS number will be the
same as the DID/DNIS number. This option is normally used when the DID/DNIS
numbers match the telephone PDNs, PhDNs etc.
Start with - enter the number to which the first selected DID/DNIS number should ring.
Ringing destinations will be assigned consecutively, starting with this number, to each
consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the dialing digits
entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each dialing digit number.
Add to End - these digits will be added to the end of each dialing digit number.

6-38

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS VMID Codes for ILG
1. From the Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS
Number VMID Codes for ILG 2
screen, assign VMID codes for all
DID/DNIS numbers in the selected
ILG. See field descriptions below.
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table
View to view existing DID/DNIS
assignments. For more details,
see “DID/DNIS Table View” on page
6-21.
3. After selecting VMID code
assignments, click Submit to register
them in the CTX database.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Set for DID/DNIS Number
range:

Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which VMID code assignments should
be made. Use the First Number/Last Number drop down arrows.

Set for:

The codes can be set independently for DTMF in band or SMDI Voice Mail
integration.

DTMF VMID

Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF voice mail integration.

SMDI VMID

Select to set VMID code assignments for SMDI voice mail integration.

All

Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF and SMDI voice mail integration.
Note

Set the VMID range

DTMF and SMDI Voice Mail integration will not function simultaneously on
CTX.

Select the method in which VMID codes should be created:
Use DNIS as VMID - the VMID code for each DID/DNIS number will be the same as
the DID/DNIS number.
Start with - enter the VMID that should be assigned to the first selected DID/DNIS
number. VMID codes will be assigned consecutively, starting with this code, to each
consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the VMID code
entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each VMID code.
Add to End - these digits will be added to the end of each VMID code.

Trunks

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

6-39

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

6-40

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Attendant

This chapter provides programming information for Strata CTX Attendants.

404 Attendant Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This program establishes Attendant Groups, distribution methods and alternate destinations.
1. Complete the “Attendant Group
Record Sheet” on page D-34.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Attendant > Group Assignment.
The Attendant Group Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. Select the Attendant Group
Member.
...or click one of the following
buttons.
• List – to view data list window.
• Copy – to Attendant group
numbers.
4. Enter Program 404 data.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Attendant Group
Member

Select the Attendant Group Member Number.

01 Call Distribution Method

Select the Call Distribution Method for attendant console.

Possible values: 1(CTX100 & CTX670 Basic), 1~8 (CTX670 Exp.),
(default = no value)

Possible values: Most Idle First (default), Next Available First or Broadcast
02 Alternate Destination

Enter the Alternate Attendant Destination (DN, Network DN or Group Pilot Number).
If no data is entered in this field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

03 Overflow Time

Select the Attendant Overflow Time in minutes.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

7-1

Attendant
404 Attendant Group Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

04 Group Overflow
Destination

Enter the overflow destination for this attendant group. If no data is entered in this
field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

05 VMID Code SMDI

Enter the Attendant’s Voice Mail ID code. If no data is entered in this field, any
previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)

07 ICI1~16 ICI10

For 07 ICI1~16 ICI10, select ILG Assignments for ICI Groups.

•

ILG1

•

Assign the 1st ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.

•

ILG2

•

Assign the 2nd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.

•

ILG3

•

Assign the 3rd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.

•

ILG4

•

Assign the 4th ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.

Note

Each ILG can only be assigned once in any of the ICI Groups.

Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = 0)

7-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment

400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

1. From the Program Menu, click
Attendant > Emergency Call. The
Emergency Call screen displays
(shown right).

Attendant

This command assigns Emergency Call destinations to Emergency Call groups. There is one group for
each Day mode (Day1, Day2 and Night).

2. Enter Program 400 data.
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• Insert – assigns the destination
for the selected index.
• Modify – assigns a new
destination to the selected
index.
• Remove – removes the
assigned destination from the
table.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Day/Night Mode

This is a display only field. It is controlled by the Strata CTX system.
Possible values: Day1, Day2, Night (default = no value)

02 Called Number Index

This is a display only field. It is controlled by the Strata CTX system.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)

03 Emergency Call
Destination

Enter the destination DN for the emergency call.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

7-3

Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment

7-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

IP Telephone Programming

150 System IP Data Assignment

IP Telephone
Programming

All programs and features found in this chapter require CTX Release 2.0 software or higher and
WinAdmin Release 2.1 software or higher. This covers IP and 2B-channel conference programming. For
CTX IP Telephone Programming guidelines, refer to Appendix A – Applications, Tips and Tricks on
page A-1.

Prerequisite Program:

This command assigns IP data to the system.
1. From the Program Menu,
click IP-Telephone > System
IP Data. The Trunk System
IP data Assignment screen
displays (shown right)
2. Enter Program 150 data.
3. Click Submit.

6548

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Automatic Assignment
of Station ID

Enable Automatic Assignment of Station ID when the IPT has no station ID. In
program 250, FB04 is the same parameter and is per terminal.
When IPT searches to connect a CTX with no station ID, CTX looks for a PDN
which is set this parameter as “automatic”, and sends the PDN to the IPT and
IPT sets it in the setting of IPT.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

8-1

IP Telephone Programming
150 System IP Data Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

02 Terminal
Authentication

Enable this parameter if you want to reserve the PDNs on IP Telephones
system wide.
When “enable” is set, terminal authentication by MAC address of IPT is valid.
So if another IPT with the same PDN is connected to the network, CTX rejects
the registration of this IPT because the MAC address of IPT is different.
When “disable” is set, you can move the PDN from a IPT to another IPT and
another IPT can be connected to the CTX.
In program 250 FB05 is the same parameter exists. Program 250 FB05, the
individual IPT setting will override this system wide setting.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

03 Diffserv

Enable Diffserv (Differentiated Services) priority control if voice packets on an
IP (internal) Network should be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority,
time-critical BIPU\IPT voice traffic can have preferential treatment when other
traffic is running at best effort.
If Diffserv is enabled you must set the '04 TOS Field Type' as DSCP or TOS.
Note: Diffserv is usually not standard feature with most ISPs, contact your ISP
to make arrangements to provide Diffsrv or this feature will not work accurately.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

04 TOS Field Type

If '03 Diffserv' is enabled, select DSCP 'Differentiated Service Format' or TOS
'Type Of Service format'.
Then, if TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in '05 TOS Precedence
Type'.
Then, if DSCP is selected, set the packet priority level in '06 DSCP'.
Possible values: Tos (default) or Dscp

05 TOS Precedence Type

If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select a packet priority level - where
CRITIC/ESP provides the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority.
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' make selections in TOS Delay, TOS
Throughput Delay, and TOS Reliability Type.
Possible values: Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Override, or
CriticEsp (default = 0)

TOS Delay Type

If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases.
Possible values: Normal (default) or Low

TOS Throughput Type

If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases.
Possible values: Normal (default) or High

TOS Reliability Type

If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases.
Possible values: Normal (default) or High

06 DSCP

If DSCP is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select a priority level from 1~ 64.
Level guidelines:
0,Best effort, default for most non-voice IP traffic.
24, Assured Flow 'AF' or Controlled Load, intended to classify streaming traffic.
40, Expedited Flow 'EF' or Guaranteed, intended to classify high priority traffic.
Possible values: 0~63 (default = 0)

8-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

IP Telephone Programming
150 System IP Data Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

07 IEEE802.1p

Enable IEEE802.1p priority control if voice packets on an Ethernet LAN should
be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU\IPT voice
traffic can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best
effort.
If you enable IEEE802.1p, select which priority level to use (Voice or Best
Effort) in ’08 IEEE802.1p Configuration’ on this screen.
Note

All Ethernet devices on the LAN (routers, switches, etc., must support
IEEE802.1p for this feature to work accurately.

08 IEEE802.1p
Configuration

If 07 IEEE802.1p is enabled, select ’Voice’ priority. BIUP\IPT voice packets will
be tagged with the highest priority level.
Note

Best Effort is not recommended for VoIP.

Possible values: BestEffort or Voice (default)
09 IP-CTX Identifier

IP Telephone
Programming

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Enter a CTX Node ID if more than one CTX Node is on the IP Network. This
can be the same as the Qsig Network Node ID used for this system if it is in a
CTX Qsig. Network - but the two IDs are not related in software logic.
This ID must match the Node ’number’ programmed in the IP telephone using
369Hold-2, FB06
Possible values: Up to 5 digits

10 Tail length of Echo
Canceller

Enter the length for echo cancellation. To lessen the echo, select 32MS.

11 BIPU/IPT VQ Mode

Set the Voice Quality Mode to control the Gain of IPT and BIPU to the
appropriate level in the existing system environment. This may require some
trial and error testing to find the optimum level.

Possible values: 16 msec (default) or 32 msec.

Possible values: high (default), middle or low

Table 8-1

Program 250 FB05 and Program 150 FB02 Combination Matrix
Program 250 FB05

Program 150
FB02

Enable

Disable

Don’t Care

Enable

Apply

Not Apply

Apply

Disable

Apply

Not Apply

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

8-3

IP Telephone Programming
151 BIPU Configuration

151 BIPU Configuration
This program is used to set up the IP address of the specific BIPU card to support the IP-Telephone. BIPU
card must be assigned before configuring the specific BIPU card.
1. From the Program Menu, click IPTelephone > BIPU Configuration.
The BIPU Configuration screen
displays (shown right)
2. Enter Program 151 data.
3. Click Submit.

6550

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Cabinet & Slot Number

Enter the cabinet and slot number of the BIPU to be configured.
Note: BIPUs must first be installed using PRG100 - System\Card
Assignment.
BIPUs can be installed in the slots listed:
Possible values: Slots 01-08 (CTX100 and CTX670 Basic), 01-06
(CTX670 Exp).

8-4

IP Address

Enter the BIPU IP Address.

Subnet Address

Enter the Subnet Address of the BIPU.

Default Gateway Address

Enter the Default Gateway Address of the BIPU card.

Version Number of BIPU

This is a read-only field.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

IP Telephone Programming
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment

152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment
This program assigns timing parameters to Prime DNs.

Select Voice Packet Table
Number 1 or 2. The default
values will appear in the fields.

3. Click Submit.

IP Telephone
Programming

1. From the Program Menu,
click IP-Telephone > Voice
Packet Configuration. The
Voice Packet
Configuration Table
Assignment screen
displays (shown right)
2. Enter Program 152 data.

6719

Important!

• When setting Voice Packet Configuration Tables on an IP QSIG network, the packet table settings
for each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
• Whenever Voice Packet Configuration Table changes are made for IP telephones on IP QSIG nodes,
Toshiba recommends pressing the reset button on the BIPU to assure the changes take effect.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Voice Packet Table
Number

Enter the Voice Packet Configuration Table Number (1-256).
Important!

The default values in Voice Packet Table 1 are the recommended
values for G.711 codecs. The default values in Voice Packet Table 2
are the recommended values for G.729A codecs. If the codec selected
for an IP telephone in Program 250-08 is switched from the default
G.711 to G.729A, the table used for the IPT is automatically switched
from Table 1 to Table 2 in Program 250-07. However switching back to
the G.711 requires that you manually switch back to the Table 1 default
parameter settings.

Possible values: 1~128 (CTX100 & CTX670 Basic)
1~256 (CTX670 Exp.)
01 Voice Packet Trans. Int.

Voice Packet Transmission Interval – This is depends on the encoding method G711
or G729A. The default setting are G711: 20msec., G729A: 40msec. 10msec. is only
used to test. So don't use 10ms. Normally the default settings provide the best
quality.
If LAN bandwidth is not enough for these parameters and the problem is resolved to
extend the interval according to the LAN requirement, you can change to
G711:40msec. and G729a: 80msec.
Note

30msec. need not be used.

Possible values: 10 msec (available for testing only up to release 200MF008), 20
msec (default), 30 msec, 40 msec or
80 msec

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

8-5

IP Telephone Programming
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

02 Jitter Buffer Type

The default values for the selected codec is recommended. If the voice quality is not
as expected you can change the jitter buffer type of DSP on BIPU.
Possible values: Fixed, Sequential, or Adaptive
The default values are: G.711 = Adaptive,
G.729A = Sequential (recommended).

03 Jitter Buffer Length

The default values for the selected codec is recommended. If the voice quality is not
as expected you can change the jitter buffer length.
Possible values:

0~250

The default values are: G.711= 100msec., G.729A=40msec.
04 Max. Acceptable Delay

Not available in Release 2.0.

05 Measurement Period

Not available in Release 2.0.

06 Packet Loss Ratio

Not available in Release 2.0.

07 Packet Loss Threshold

If packet loss is more than 10, an error is recorded in the CTX error log and you
cannot talk by IPT. The default value 5 is recommended.
Possible values: 0~10

8-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

IP Telephone Programming
250 IPT Data Assignment

250 IPT Data Assignment
Program 250 is used to set up the IP address of the specific IP phone card to support IP-Telephone feature.
The IP Phone Prime DN must be assigned using Program 200 before you configure the BIPU card.
1. From the Program Menu, click
IP-Telephone > Station IP Data.
The Station IP Data
Assignment screen displays
(shown right)
2. Enter Program 250 data.
IP Telephone
Programming

3. Click Submit.

6719

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Prime DN

Enter the IPT Prime Directory Number (PDN)
Possible values: Up to five digits.

01 Station ID

Station ID is set from the IPT to match its PDN in station Program ’369 Hold-2FB05’. The station ID is the same as the station PDN unless there is more than one
CTX system having BIPU-Ms on the same network. In this case the station ID for
each IP telephone must contain the CTX Node ID+PDN.
Possible values: Up to five digits.

02 Station IP Address
Type

Select the Station IP Address to be static ’fixed’ or dynamic in which case it obtains
an IP address from a DHCP server.
Possible values: Fix or Any (default)

03 Station IP Address

Enter the Station static IP Address if a static address is needed per Station IP
Address Type set in 02 above.

04 Automatic assignment
of Station ID

Use Automatic when the IPT has no Station ID. Use ’Not Automatic’ when IPT has
station ID in the IPT setting. In Program 150, FB01 is the same parameter for
system.
When ’Don’t Care’ is set, Program 150-01 precedes in Program 250-04.
Enabling Program150-01 is equal to using ’automatic’ in Program 250-04.
Disabling in Program150-01 is equal to ’not automatic’ in Program 250-04. When
IPT requests to connect to a Strata CTX with no station ID, CTX searches for a
PDN that is set in this parameter as ’automatic’, and send the PDN to the IPT, and
IPT records it in the IPT setting.
Possible values: Permitted, NotPermitted or DontCare (default)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

8-7

IP Telephone Programming
250 IPT Data Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

05 Station Terminal
Authentication Mode

Apply this parameter if you want to reserve a PDN for the IP Telephone connected
at the present time. When ’apply’ is set, terminal authentication by MAC address of
IPT is valid. So if other IPT which has the same PDN is connected the network,
CTX rejects the registration of this IPT because the MAC address of IPT is
different. When ’not apply’ is set, you can move the PDN from a IPT to another IPT
and another IPT can be connected to the CTX. When ’don’t care’ is set, terminal
authentication for this telephone is determined by Program 150-02.
The Terminal Authentication setting ’Apply or Not Apply’ in this program overrides
the Terminal Authentication any setting in Program 150-02. Refer to Table 8-1.
Possible values: Apply, NotApply or DontCare (default)

06 Station MAC Address

Station Media Access Control (MAC) Address. This address is hard coded uniquely
in each IPT. The MAC will only display if the IPT is connected to the BIPU-M1A and
is operating properly.
Possible values: Up to 12 digits

07 Voice Packet
Configuration Table Index

Select the Voice Packet configuration table that should be assigned to this IPT
(The voice tables are configured in Program 152). When the G711 Audio Codec is
selected in 08 codec below, the default values in Program 152-01, Table 1 should
be used. When the G.729A codec is selected in 08 Audio Codec below, the default
values in Program 152-01 Table 2 should be used.
Important!

When switching the IP telephone from the G.711 to the G.729 codec
(the first time), the CTX will automatically switch the Voice Packet
Table from Table 1 to Table 2.

Possible values: 1~128 (CTX100 and CTX670 Basic)
1~256 (CTX670 Exp.)
08 Audio Codec

Select the audio codec that should be used in this IPT.
Possible values: G711(default) or G729A
IP telephones have two built-in codecs:
The G.711codec – provides the highest voice quality but uses the most network
bandwidth (about 115kbps per IPT when in use).
The G.729A codec – provides less voice quality but uses the least amount of
network bandwidth (about 29kbps per IPT when in use).
High traffic or low speed networks may require the IP Telephones to use G729A.
Example
If installing remote IP telephones connected to Cable or DSL lines, the upstream
rate is usually restricted and may not provide a consistent upstream bandwidth
(advertised as 128kbs but is normally less because of traffic) so the G729a codec
would probably be the best choice for this situation.
The Voice Packet Table 'Program 250-07' and the VP Table's Voice packet
parameters 'Prg152' must be set properly for the codec assigned.

09 Display Software
Version Number of IPT

8-8

This is read-only. If any problem occurs, it is useful to analyze the problem with this
version. The sample of software version is “DIP11NA.” DIP1 represents the IPT
model. 1NA represents software version of IPT. “1N” represents the version of
updatable software and “A” means the version of not-updatable software
(BootROM).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

IP Telephone Programming
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update

BIPU-M and IPT Program Update
To start updating the BIPU-M or IPT firmware, the Update firmware files must be stored on FTP Server
(see Appendix E – Software and Firmware Updates on page E-1). You can update the BIPU-M using
WinAdmin. You cannot update BIPU-Q. If you need to update BIPU-Q, return it to Toshiba.
WinAdmin automatically disables the BIPU before any BIPU/IPT program update and preserves the initial
state of the BIPU (idle or disable) after program update is done.
The BIPU program update has two processing options: sequential and simultaneous. If the FTP server is a
CTX (SmartMedia), sequential processing must be used.

•

The BIPU corresponding to the first group of IPTs is automatically disabled (if its current status is
“idle”)

•

IPTs are updated one by one. Up to maximum 128 IPTs can be selected for one Updating process.

•

BIPU is re-enabled (if its initial state was “idle”)

IP Telephone
Programming

The IPT program update is performed sequentially only. A table sorted by BIPU shows a summary of the
IPT selection. You can select multiple IPTs. You can change the selection at any time before the update
process starts. The process flow is as follows:

These steps are repeated automatically until the entire user selection is processed.
Both the BIPU and IPT update pages have an Abort and Abort All button. The Abort button is available per
item (BIPU, IPT), only when the current processing status allows the abort operation. Aborting the update
process is allowed only in two phases “Getting the update file” and “Resetting.”
The Abort All button is available when an update is in progress. You can click on Abort All to abort all
updates starting with the one is currently processing. If abort operation is not allowed at the time, the
message “Please wait while system has a chance to abort...” appears. All program update processes will be
aborted when this is allowed by CTX.
The synchronization between WinAdmin and CTX is not perfect during this process. WinAdmin sends a
command, then checks for the completion of the command. If you click on Abort at the end of the “Getting
the update file” phase, WinAdmin will abort in the next phase that abort is allowed, which is resetting.

FTP Server Information
CTX SmartMedia

When FTP server is CTX-SmartMedia, the files for BIPU/IPT program update must be stored in
“PROGRAM” folder on SmartMedia. BIPU/IPT screens will automatically fill the Directory field in the
FTP information group using the name “PROGRAM,” and will provide a list box with the files that exist in
this directory on Smart Media.
WinAdmin Machine

When FTP server is a WinAdmin machine, the WinAdmin installation will create a physical directory
under \WinAdmin. named “CTXIPUPDATE.” This is the physical path that you should indicate when
creating “CTXIPUPDATE” virtual directory on the Default FTP Site. The files for BIPU/IPT program
update will be stored in “CTXIPUPDATE” directory on WinAdmin machine. BIPU/IPT pages will
automatically fill the Directory field in the FTP Server information group using the name
“CTXIPUPDATE” and will provide a list box with the files that exist in this directory on WinAdmin
machine.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

8-9

IP Telephone Programming
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update

External FTP

When FTP server is “External FTP,” not CTX - Smart Media, nor WinAdmin machine, users will have to
provide all the information in the FTP information group.
Important!

The External FTP Server must be used if IPT, BIPUs and/or CTX WinAdmin do not have the
same subnet address.

WinAdmin provides an External FTP list page to manage FTP information for “External” FTP servers.
This page can be used to add, modify and remove FTP Server information (user, password, IP address,
directory and file) for External FTP servers or WinAdmin local machine. The information will be stored in
a file on WinAdmin machine and will be provided in selection window when user clicks on “External
FTP” on the BIPU/IPT pages. This eliminates the need to enter the same FTP information for “External
FTP” servers each time the BIPU/IPT program update is run.

BIPU Program Update
Prerequisites

1. Make sure that the networking devices between BIPU and the FTP server meet the requirements for
IP-CTX (min 100Mb/s switching hub(s).
2. Create an account on the machine designated to be the FTP server.
3. Create a FTP virtual directory on the FTP server machine and specify the physical location of the
updated file on the FTP server machine.
4. The FTP server machine IP address should be configured such that is visible by the IPT IP address.
CAUTION!

Do not run other updates simultaneously.

Programming

1. From the Program Menu, click
IP-Telephone > BIPU
Program Update. The BIPU
Update screen displays
(shown right)
2. Select card slot to be updated
3. Enter the FTP information.
4. Select BIPU Update option.
5. Click Start to begin the BIPU
update.

8-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

IP Telephone Programming
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

User Name

Enter the user name of the account created on the FTP server.

Password

Enter the password for the account created on the FTP server.

IP Address

Enter the IP address of the FTP server machine.

Data Directory

Enter the name of the FTP virtual directory on the FTP server.

File Name

Enter the name of the updated file (“vmlinus”).

IP Telephone
Programming

External FTP List – Click the
External FTP List button enables
users to store External FTP Server
Information.

IPT Program Update
The IPT program update function consists of retrieving the updated file from an FTP server, updating and
rebooting the selected IPT.
CAUTION!

Do not run other updates simultaneously.

Prerequisites

1. Make sure that the networking devices between BIPU, IPT and the FTP server meet the requirements
for IP-CTX (min 100Mb/s switching hub(s)).
2. Create an account on the machine designated to be the FTP server.
3. Create a FTP virtual directory on the FTP server machine and specify the physical location of the
updated file on the FTP server machine.
4. The FTP server machine IP address should be configured such that is visible by the BIPU IP address.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

8-11

IP Telephone Programming
BIPU-M and IPT Program Update

Programming

1. From the Program Menu,
click IP-Telephone > IPT
Program Update. The IPT
Program Update screen
displays (shown right)
2. Select BIPU card slot.
3. Select IPTs to be updated.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for
multiple BIPU/IPT updates.
5. Enter the FTP information.
6. Click Start to begin the IPT
Program update.
Notes

8-12

•

All selected IPTs are
updated sequentially.

•

Maximum of 128 IPTs can
be selected in one IPT
update process.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

User Name

Enter the user name of the account created on the FTP server.

Password

Enter the password for the account created on the FTP server.

IP Address

Enter the IP address of the FTP server machine.

Data Directory

Enter the name of the FTP virtual directory on the FTP server.

File Name

Enter the name of the updated file (“apph248.out”).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services

Important!

Advanced Strata CTX programming topics are covered in this chapter. Programmers should
make sure each section is thoroughly understood before proceeding to programming.

Services

This chapter covers a variety of services offered by Strata CTX. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Voice
Mail, Destination Restriction (DR), Least Cost Routing (LCR), Networking, Station Message Detail
Reporting (SMDR), External Devices, System Parameters and other miscellaneous services are discussed.

540 Pilot DN Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance, they are true virtual numbers. They can
be used in CTI and Voice Mail applications. In ACD Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers. In
Voice Mail applications Pilot DNs are used to call directly to, or transfer calls directly to specific voice
mail boxes – this is done by setting VM as the alternate destination and using the VMID to send the call to
a specific VM box.

Maximum Pilot DNs
CTX100: R1.00 & R1.01 = 5 max./R1.02 = 100 max.
CTX670 Basic: R1.00 & R1.01 = 10 max./R1.02 = 200 max.
CTX670 with BBMS/BEXS: R1.00 & R1.01 = 32 max./R1.02 = 256 max.
1. Complete the “Pilot DN Assignment
Record Sheet” on page D-37.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Pilot DN.
3. Enter a Pilot DN Number
...or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Pilot DNs.
• Create – Assign a new Pilot DN
with default settings.
• Copy – Enter a Pilot DN number
and click Copy to make a new Pilot
DN assignment with settings copied
from the Pilot DN entered.
• Delete – Enter a Pilot DN and click OK.
4. Enter Program 540 data.
5. Click Submit.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-1

Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Pilot DN

Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance. They are
true virtual numbers. They can be used in CTI and Voice Mail applications. In
ACD, Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers. In Voice Mail
applications they are used to call directly to or transfer calls directly to specific
voice mail boxes - this is done by setting VM as the alternate destination and
using the VMID to send the call to a specific VM box.
Possible values: Maximum characters for Pilot DNs:
CTX100: R1.00 & R1.01=5 max./R1.02=100 Max..
CTX670 Basic: R1.00 & R1.01=10max./R1.02=200max.
CTX670 with BBMS/BEXS: R1.00 & R1.01=32max./
R1.02=256max

01 Alternate Destination

Calls to the Pilot DN will be routed to the Alternate Destination if the Pilot DN is
not available (example: ACD After Shift). If Dialing Digits is selected, enter the
appropriate DN in the Alternate DN assignment.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell

Alternate DN

If Dialing digits is selected as the Alternate Destination, enter the PDN, PhDN
or Hunt Group pilot number to which the call should be routed.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Voice Mail ID

If the Alternate Destination is Voice Mail, enter the Voice Mail ID that should be
sent.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)

579 System Voice Mail Data
Prerequisite Program: None

Refer to “Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1 for all Voice Mail setup steps. This command assigns DTMF/
SMDI Voice Mail interface parameters for the system.
1. Complete the “System Voice Mail
Record Sheet” on page D-38.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Voice Mail > System
Voice Mail Data.
3. Enter Program 579 data.
4. Click Submit.

9-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 DID/DNIS VMID
Option

DN VMID (default), DID/DNIS VMID.

If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN which
then forwards to voice mail, the VMID of the DID/DNIS number (Program 309,
)% or )%) or the VMID of the forwarding DN (Program 200, )% or 206,
)%) will be sent to voice mail per this option.
Note

The DID/DNIS number’s VMID (Program. 309, )% or )%) is always
sent to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that ring directly to voice mail or ring
a DN which then forwards to voice mail before it is ever answered.

02 Cancellation Method
for VM MW

Select the method used to cancel Voice Mail message waiting indication.

03 Message Desk
Number

Enable to send the SMDI Message Desk Number (001) in the SMDI packet;
otherwise, 000 for a station call or the 3-digit CO line number is sent.

Possible values: Auto and Access Code Cancel or Access Code Cancel
(default)

04 Output of CLASS /
ANI and DNIS

Enable to include Caller ID/ANI numbers in SMDR records.

05 Calling Number
Digits Sent to VM

Select how many calling number digits to send to the VM unit.

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Possible values: 2~10 digits (default = 10)
Note

06 Blank Digits Sent to
VM

Services

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

If 04 Output of CLASS / ANI and DNIS is enabled, this value must be 10.

Send SMDI-Bellcore Standard VM Interface.
Possible values: 1 or 2 (default).

•

1 = 1985 (single space)

•

2 = 1991 (two spaces).

07 Auto Cancel of VM
and MW1

Setting of auto cancel of VM and MW.

08 DTMF Duration

Select VM ID Code and System DTMF Signal Time.

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

Possible values: 80 ms (default) or 160 ms
09 LCD Control of Voice
Mail

Enables Toshiba Proprietary Integration (TPI) for Soft Key Control of VM. TPI and
Soft Key Control of Voice Mail requires Stratagy Enterprise Server Release 3.x or
higher.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

10 Central VM Callback

Enter the pilot DN for the centralized voice mail system. If this field is left blank,
the previously stored number will be deleted.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-3

Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

11 CF - All Call Record

Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via “Call Fwd All
Calls.”
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)

12 CF - Busy Record

Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via “Call Fwd Busy.”
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)

13 CF - No Answer
Record

Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving at the voice mail via “Call Fwd
No Answer.”
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)

14 Direct Call

Enter DTMF VM-ID string for a call arriving at the voice mail as a Direct Call.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)

15 Retrieve Messages

Enter DTMF VM-ID string for calls arriving at the voice mail to retrieve messages.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 92)

16 Voice Main DN

Use a VM Pilot DN as a transfer destination.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

17 Length of VM ID

Select the number of characters in VM-ID string.
Possible values: 1~10 (default = 10)

580 Voice Mail Port Data
Prerequisite Program: None

Assign characteristics of individual voice mail ports.
1. Complete the “Voice Mail Port
Data Record Sheet” on page D-39.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Voice Mail > Voice Mail
Port Data.
3. Enter a VM Port DN
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed VM Port DNs.
• Copy – Enter an VM Port DN
value in the field with the same
name. Click Copy to make a
new VM Port DN assignment with settings copied from the Port entered in VM Port DN.
4. Enter Program 580 data.
5. Click Submit.

9-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 VM Port DN

Enter the DN of an individual VM port. For direct transfer to voice mail, enter
the remote Node ID and Pilot DN.
Note

Do not enter a Pilot DN. This feature is available only with CTX
Release 1.3 or higher software and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3
or higher software.

Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 Control Method

Specify In-band or SMDI integration. Select SMDI for Remote voice mail.
Possible values: Inband or SMDI (default = no value)

02 Send A/D Tone

Select whether Strata CTX sends A or D tone when a station connecting to
voice mail answers or disconnects.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = no value)

03 Send B Tone

Enable Strata CTX to send B tones in the event of a Blind Transfer Recall.
Possible values: B Tone, No Tone or B Tone and Extension Number (default
= no value)

04 End-to-end

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services

Enable Strata CTX to send DTMF tones to voice mail in response to key
presses from a digital telephone.

9-5

Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
The Guide Pages and programs that follow control Strata CTX’s Destination Restriction (DR) and Least
Cost Routing (LCR) capabilities.
Programming DR/LCR features in Strata CTX requires an advanced knowledge of telephone
programming. Make sure you have a thorough understanding of the discussion that follows before
attempting to program these features. For details on LCR, see “LCR Overview” on page 9-15.

DR Overview
Strata CTX offers DR as a major expansion of traditional Toll Restriction. Toll Restriction was used to
prevent the unauthorized use of toll prefixes to the PSTN as follows:
•

– long distance

•

– operator assistance

•

– international

Strata CTX has expanded this to include restriction based on any string of dialed digits. Strata CTX can
restrict any string of up to 11 dialed digits including and .
Eleven-digit screening allows control of access to individual telephone numbers in remote Area Codes.
Restriction of and controls user’s access to vertical service codes from the central office such as Camp
On and Call Forwarding.
DR is always applied to calls originated through LCR and may be applied to calls originated through Trunk
Group Access, Individual Trunk Access, CO Key, Group CO Key, Pooled Line Key, and Strata Net private
networking. Special screening tables allow restriction of calls placed through Centrex or PBXs to which
the Strata CTX may be connected.
Each OLG can be programmed to require or not require DR in “306 Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-4. If
a trunk group requires DR, a table must then be established using “531 DR Screening Table for OLG” on
page 9-31.
DR is controlled by a DR Level (DRL) that is assigned to any station or trunk capable of making an outside
call. Each of the 16 DRLs relate to a DR Table. A DR Table may be an Allow or Deny table and may be
associated with an Exception Table. A Deny Toll Restriction Table contains a list of dial strings that are
prohibited. Its associated Exception Table lists the dial strings within the Deny Table ranges that would be
allowed. For example, a Deny table might deny access to all of Area Code -. Its exception table could
permit access to specific office codes within that area such as --.

9-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

Basic Operation

The flow chart below describes the basic logic by which calls are connected or rejected as a result of DR.

Facility
dials
outside
number

LCR

Access Method

DTA

DR Applies to
OLG?

Yes

Consult DR/LCR
Screening Table

Consult DR/OLG
Screening Table

Services

Digit Manipulation

DR Table
Action

Allow

Deny

Exception
Table Action

Deny

Reject Call

Allow

Deny

Exception
Table Action

Allow

Connect to OLG

5944

LCR

Stop

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-7

Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

Tables

Strata CTX uses two or three tables to apply DR:
•

Screening Tables. There are two types of screening tables as follows:
• LCR Screening Tables.
• OLG-Specific Screening Tables.

•

DR Table or Exception Table to the DR Table.

Screening tables are used in Behind Centrex/PBX operations to detect access codes required by the
Centrex/PBX and processes them appropriately in a way that is transparent to end users.
DR/LCR Screening

DR is applied to all LCR calls using “530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment” on page 9-30. It analyzes
the digits dialed after the LCR access code (typically ).
Example: A station user dials ---. The outgoing line will serve as an incoming line
that this user is attempting to forward to his home. The System Administrator has created an LCR/
Screening entry to prevent the forwarding of this line to the users home. With Skip & Apply under DR
action and a Skip Length of 0, the call will be forced to present to the DR table where the call will be
rejected. Apply under LCR Action ensures that the entire string will be processed by LCR. In this case,
Digit Modification is irrelevant.
DR Screening for OLG Table

An OLG-specific DR Screening Table is used when a call is originated through a Line Key, Pooled Line
Key, Group CO Key, Trunk Group Access Code or Direct Trunk Access Code and a CO line is chosen that
requires DR. The decision to apply DR to an OLG is made in “306 Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-4. If
the OLG does not require DR, the call is connected to the desired line and all dialed digits, minus the Strata
CTX access code, are sent.
The OLG-specific table performs two functions:
•

It manipulates the digits that will be screened by the DR table.

•

It creates a Pause Value that ensures that the Centrex or PBX which is the source of the trunk will
receive and interpret the digits correctly. This is used to compensate for older, slower equipment.

Example: A station user dials 81-9-1-617-234-5678 where 81 is the Trunk Group Access Code for a
Centrex trunk group. 9 is the Centrex’ LCR access code. The Skip Length of 1 tells the system how many
of the first digits constitute an access code or other digits that may be ignored. The DR Action of Skip &
Apply tells the system to ignore the 9 and present 16172345678 to the DR Table use in the next step in the
process. The Pause Value of two seconds tells the system that, if it passes the DR Tables and is connected
to a trunk, it is to pause two seconds after outdialing the 9 and before outdialing 16172345678.

9-8

Dial String

DR Action

Skip Length

Pause Value

Skip & Apply

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

DR Table

Each DRL is associated with a DR Table that defines the destinations to which a holder of that DRL is
entitled to place a call. Permission may be expressed in Allow or Deny tables depending on the field
technician’s choices. The DR Table is activated by defining the table as Allow or Deny through “523 LCR
Route Plan Schedule Assignment” on page 9-27. The table is then populated one string at a time through
“533 DR Level Table Assignment” on page 9-32. The table may have up to 100 entries. Entries may
include any DTMF character including and .
As soon as Strata CTX finds a match in the table, it acts upon it. Therefore, entering in a Deny table will
deny all 1+ calling to users with that DRL whereas entering - denies calls to the 888 Area Code.
Exceptions can be created in the DRL Exception Table.
DRL Exception Table Assignment – Once a DR Table has been established for a DRL, its exception table
can be created using “534 DRL Exception Table Assignment” on page 9-33. Exceptional DR Tables are
optional. Dial Strings in Exception tables my be as long as 11 digits. If a field technician wanted to deny
access to every office code in the 617 area code except Directory Assistance, he would first create a deny
table that included 617 and then create an associated exception table that allowed 617-555-1212. See the
table below for more examples.
Interaction With Other Features

Behind Centrex operation for OLGs is defined in. The CTX will use the values stored here to strip local
and Centrex access codes from the dial string and determine the external number being dialed. This
external number will then be processed according to the DR rules described above.

Services

Behind Centrex Operation

Note The Centrex to which the OLG is attached may impose its own DRs.

Credit Card Calling

If a valid credit card number is detected, the CTX will not apply DR to a call because the charges for such
a call are applied to the credit card rather than the outgoing line used.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-9

Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page

Destination Restriction Guide Page
Use the Destination Restriction (DR) guide pages to program Destination Restriction.
1. From the Program Menu, click Services > DR Guide Page.
The Destination Restriction
Guide Page opening screen
displays (shown right).
2. Click on any Program number to
start using the Guide page.
Note Every Guide Page has Back

and Next buttons to help you
navigate to the previous and
next programs in a group.
The Program at the end of a
group has a Guide Page button
instead of a Next button to
take you to the main
Destination Restriction Guide
Page.

DR Dialing Setup
Program 530 – DR/LCR Screening
table (shown right).
Use this program to define special
dialing codes that are normally
dialed in front of telephone numbers
(example *82, *67). It defines what
DR and LCR action should be
applied after users dial the special
code (“Bypass” or “Skip and
Apply” DR).

9-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page

Programs 531/650 – Centrex/
PBX DR Screening table.
Use this program to define
Centrex/PBX line access codes. It
defines what DR action should be
applied after users dial the
Centrex/PBX line access code
(“Bypass” or “Skip and Apply”
DR). It is also used to assign OLG
to this table and/or enable centres
assume 9 dialing.

Program 117 – Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis (shown right).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services

Use this program to prevent standard
telephone users from avoiding DR
by sending DTMF tones to the PSTN
before DR analysis is complete. In
LCR applications, it allows calls to
cut through to the PSTN
immediately, so users do not have to
wait for a pause timer to cut through
after dialing a number.

9-11

Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page

DR Digit Table Setup
Programs 111/532/533/534 –
DRL Assignments (shown right).
Use this screen to define
Destination Restriction tables for
each DRL. It combines the
following programs into a single
screen for viewing, editing and
copying DR tables.
111 - Used to define if the DRL
allows credit card calling or not.
532 - Used to define each DR
table as an Allow or Deny table.
533 - Used to add or delete digit
strings from DR Exception Tables
and copy selected digit strings
from one DR Exception table to
another DR Exception table.
534 - Used to add or delete digit strings from DR Exception Tables and copy selected digit strings from
one DR Exception table to another DR Exception Table.

DR Class of Service Setup
Program 103 – Class of Service
(COS).
Use this screen to set COS options
that are related to DR and other
outgoing call features.

9-12

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page

Program 200 – Station Data.
Set the COS options that are
related to DR and other outgoing
call features.

Program 105 – System
Parameters.
Services

Set the system parameters related
to DR and other outgoing call
options.

Program 510 – Class of Service.
Setup override codes for DRLs
and other related features.
Override code digit length must
be defined in Program 105-15,
System Parameters. This feature
is described as “Travelling Class
Override” in the telephone user
guide.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-13

Services
Destination Restriction Guide Page

Program 509 – System Speed
Dial DRL level.
Set the DRL, COS, FRL and
OPL level that should be applied
when users dial outgoing calls
using system speed. This must
be enabled in 105-09, system
parameters.

Program 306 – Outgoing Line
Groups.
Set Station options that are
related to DR and other outgoing
call features.

9-14

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR Overview

LCR Overview
LCR Analysis Process
The flowchart below represents the process by which Strata CTX analyzes dialed digits and makes LCR
decisions. The graphic is divided into four areas each described below. DR and call connection are
described elsewhere in this document and are shown here only for their roles in the LCR process.
TIME OF DAY

DESTINATION RESTRICTION (DR)
LCR

Check FRL
(1~16)

Receive
dialed digits

Zone 1
Home
area code
included?

Insert home
area code

Zone 2

Zone 3

Weekday

Yes

Time of
Day

Type of
Day

Weekend

Services

Holiday
Allow
LCR DR?

Stop

Make LCR
Route Choice

Yes
Select Routing
Analysis Plan
(1~64)

CONNECTION

ROUTE ANALYSIS
Use Default
Route Plan

Dial string
match?

Yes
Exception
Table?

Get Route
Plan from
Analysis Table

Hunt available
Route
Definition
(1~6)

Apply Digit
Modification
Get Route Plan
from Exception
Table
Connect
and
send
Route Plan
Schedule
Table

Figure 1

Stop

LCR Analysis Process Flow

DR
LCR begins with the receipt of a dial string from a facility capable of originating an outgoing call: station,
automated attendant, Tie trunk, DISA trunk, DID trunk, etc. The dial string is identified as an LCR call by
the presence of the LCR Feature Access Code—typically . The LCR Access Code is removed and the
remaining external digits are processed.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-15

Services
LCR Guide Page

Route Analysis
Route Analysis chooses a Route Plan based on the dialed digits. The Routing Analysis Plan becomes the
index into the time/date calculations described in the next section. If the Strata CTX is unable to match the
dial string, it uses the default route plan which assures a route out of the system. If a match is found, Strata
CTX determines if a exception table is associated with the dial string. If the dial string appears in the
exception table, the call is assigned to the Route Plan stored in the exception table. Otherwise, the Route
Plan stored in the initial table is used.

Time of Day
The Strata CTX maintains time and day values for LCR separate from those for the general system. One
day can be divided into three zones, and each day can be categorized as a Weekday, Weekend, or Holiday.

Connection
Selection of a Route Choice Table begins the process of actually connecting the call to an outgoing trunk.
Each Route Choice Table consists of six Route Definitions which operate in terminal hunt fashion to select
an OLG and to apply a digit modification treatment.

LCR Guide Page
1. Complete the “LCR Assignment
Record Sheets” on page D-42.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR Guide Page.
The Least Cost Routing Guide Page
screen displays (shown right).
3. Click on any Program Number to
start using the Guide pages.
Note Every Guide Page has Back and

Next buttons to help you navigate
to the previous and next
programs in a group.
The Program at the end of a
group has a Guide Page button
instead of a Next button to take
you to the main Least Cost
Routing Guide Page.

9-16

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR Guide Page

LCR Dialing Setup
Program 102 – Flexible Access Codes
Use this program to change the LCR
access code. The default LCR access
code is 9. You can change the default
access code to any number from 0~9, *,
and/or #. Enter an access code number
that does not conflict with the existing
numbering plan.

Use this program to define special
dialing codes that are normally dialed in
front of telephone numbers (example
*82, *67). It defines what DR and LCR
action should be applied after users dial
the special code (“Bypass” or “Skip and
Apply” DR).

Services

Program 530 – DR/LCR Screening
Table.

Program 117 – Public Dial Plan Digit
Analysis.
Use this program to prevent standard
telephone users from circumventing
DR by sending DTMF tones to the
PSTN before DR analysis is
complete. In LCR applications, it
allows calls to cut through to the
PSTN immediately so users do not
have to wait for a pause timer to cut
through after dialing a number.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-17

Services
LCR Guide Page

LCR Route Plan Setup
Program 520 – LCR Local Route Plan
Assignments.
Use this program to select which LCR
route plan is used for local calls.

Programs 521 and 522– Route Plan
Digit Analysis Table.
Use this program to assign Analysis and
Exception digits (digit strings) to route
plan tables.
This screen enables you to view, add
and delete Analysis Digits and
Exception Digits.

9-18

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR Guide Page

Programs 526 and 525 – Route
Definition and Modified Digits
Assignments.
Use these programs to assign OLG
groups and modified digit tables to
Route Definitions.

Program 524 – Route Choice Table
Assignments.

Note Double click a row to activate

Services

Use this program to assign Route
Definitions to Route Choice Tables.
the Add, Modify and Delete
buttons.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-19

Services
LCR Guide Page

Program 523 – LCR Route Schedule
Assignments.
Use this program to define the Route
Schedule for each Route Plan.
Table Buttons on this screen
Notes

9-20

•

Clicking table buttons display
exclusive and dynamic tables. You
can move these tables anywhere on
the screen by clicking the blue title
bar and dragging it to a desired
location. (See screen below as an
example).

•

The tables are dynamic because
you can click on any route plan on
the 523 LCR Route Schedule
Assignment screen and notice the table information change to pertain to that route plan.

•

Route/Plan Choice – Click this
button to view route plans and
route choice. This table
combines all information found
in the Route Plan Analysis Digits
table and Route Choice
Definition table on a per Route
Plan basis.

•

Route Plan Analysis Digits –
Click this button to view the
Route Plan Analysis table.

•

Route Choice Definition – Click
this button to view the Route
Choice Table view.

•

Station LCR Group – Click this
button to view Station LCR
Group table.

Route Plan/Choice Table

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR Guide Page

LCR Day of Week and Time Zone Setup
Program 528 – LCR Days of the Week
Assignments.
Use this program to assign each day of
the week as a Weekday, Weekend or
Holiday.

Use this program to define Route Plan
day types and time zones.

Services

Program 529 – LCR Route Time Zone
Assignments.

Program 527 – LCR Holiday
Assignments.
Use this program to assign which days
of the year should follow LCR
Holiday routing assignments.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-21

Services
LCR Guide Page

LCR COS and Station Setup
Program 103 – Class of Service.
Use this program to enable or disable
LCR in COS feature sets.

Program 200 – Station Data.
Use this program to assign stations to
COS feature sets and LCR station
groups.

9-22

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR/DR

LCR/DR
LCR Assignment
Program Number(s): 520, 521 and 522

User access to LCR is determined by programming the following:
•

103 COS Assignment – 29 LCR Feature (see page 4-9) enables access to LCR COS.

•

200 Station Assignment – 07 LCR Group (see page 5-2) assigns a station to an LCR Group.

•

304 ILG Assignment – 23 LCR Group(see page 6-3) assigns an LCR Group to an ILG.

Note Appropriate COS, DRL and FRL assignments must be made to all LCR stations and trunks.

1. Complete the “LCR Assignment
Record Sheets” on page D-36.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Assignment.
3. Enter Program 520 data.
4. Enter Program 521 data.
Note For steps 3~5, complete“LCR

Assignment Record Sheets” on
page D-36.

Services

5. Enter Program 522 data.

6. Click Submit.

520 LCR Local Route Plan Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

There are 64 LCR route plans. This assignment is used to select which LCR route plan should be used to
route local calls. The Local Route Plan, which must be defined in the route definition assignment,
determines which CO line group is used for local outgoing calls.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Local Area Code

Enter the area code for the dialing area in which the system is installed. This is
the area code for the Central Office (CO) that provides local CO lines to the
system. If no data is entered in this field, any previously programmed data is
lost.
Possible values: 3 digits (default = no value)

02 Local Route Plan

Enter the LCR Route Plan number that should be used to route local calls.
Local calls are made by dialing 7-digit public telephone numbers that do not
require an Area Code. There are 64 LCR Route Plans from which to choose.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = 1)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-23

Services
LCR/DR

521 LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-23

This program builds the basic LCR Analysis Table.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Analysis Digits

Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service codes, etc.) to
be assigned to a Route Plan Analysis Table.
Strings may be up to 32 digits long. There Route Plan Analysis Table may
have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in one table at a time.
Possible values: Digits may include wild cards “X” and “N” where X = 0~9 and
N = 2~9 (default = no value).

01 Route Plan Number

Enter the Route Plan number to which to assign the Analysis Digits.
Note

Entering 0 deletes the Analysis Digits from the table to which they
had been assigned.

Possible values: 0~64 (default = 0)

522 LCR Exception Number Route Plans
Prerequisite Program: 521 page 9-24

This command assigns up to 1280 dialed external digit strings to the Route Plan Exception Analysis Table
which assigns each string to 1 of 64 Route Choice Tables. The values expressed here are exceptions to the
values established in Program 521.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Exception Digits

Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service codes, etc.) to
be assigned to a Route Plan Exception Analysis Table.
Strings may be up to 32 digits long. The Exception Route Plan Analysis Table
may have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in one table at a time.
Possible values: Digits may include wild cards “X” and “N” where X = 0~9 and
N = 2~9 (default = no value).

01 Exception Table

Enter the Route Plan Table in which to assign the Exception Digits.
Note

Entering 0 deletes the Exception Digits from the table.

Possible values: 1~64 (default = 0)

9-24

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR/DR

Route Define
Program Number(s): 524, 525 and 526

Define the participants in the LCR Route Plan.Complete the “Route Choice Definition Record Sheet” on
page D-42.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Route
Define.
2. Enter Program 524 data.
3. Enter Program 525 data.
4. Enter Program 526 data.
5. Click Submit.

Services

524 Route Table to Route Definition Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 525 below

This command defines up to six possible Route Definitions for a given Route Table.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Route Choice Table

Enter the Route Choice Table to be defined.
Possible values: 1~128

01 Route Definition 1

Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.

02 Route Definition 2

Possible values: 1~128, 0 = Delete (default = 1)

03 Route Definition 3
04 Route Definition 4
05 Route Definition 5
06 Route Definition 6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-25

Services
LCR/DR

525 LCR Route Definition Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-23

This command assigns Route Definitions for LCR. A Route Definition consists of an OLG and a Digit
Modification index.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Route Definition

Select the Route Definition number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)

01 OLG Number

Select the OLG Number associated with this Route Definition.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = 1)

02 Digit Modification Index

Select the Digit Modification number associated with this Route Definition.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = 1)

526 Modified Digits Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 521 page 9-24

This command modifies LCR dialed numbers by deleting digits from and adding digits to the dialed
numbers.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Digit Modification Index

Select the Digit Modification Index used by the LCR Route Choice table to
determine the digit modification treatment to be applied. Leading digits of a
dialed number may be deleted; leading and trailing digits may be added to the
dialed number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)

01 Delete Digits

Select the quantity of digits to be deleted from the beginning of dialed number.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 0)

02 Add Leading Digits

Enter the digit string to be inserted at the beginning of the number.
Possible values: Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)

03 Add Trailing Digits

Enter the digit string to be inserted at the end of the number.
Possible values: Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)

9-26

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR/DR

Route Schedule
Program Number(s): 523 and 528

1. Complete the “Route Schedule
Record Sheets” on page D-35.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Route
Schedule.
3. Enter Program 523 data.
4. Enter Program 528 data.
5. Click Submit.

Services

523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns Route Plan Schedule Tables for LCR. Each table is a 3-dimensional array of 144
values (3 Types of Day x 3 Times of Day x 16 LCR Groups).
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Route Plan

Enter the Route Plan Number to build a schedule indexed by Time of Day,
Type of Day and LCR Group.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)

01 Type of Day

Select the Type of Day.
Possible values: Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday

02 LCR Time of Day

Select the Time Zone.
Possible values: Time Zone 1, Time Zone 2 or Time Zone 3 (default = no
value)

03 Station LCR Group

Select the Station LCR Group.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

04 Route Choice Table

Enter the Route Choice Table Number to be used with this combination of
time, type and LCR group.
Possible values: 1~128, 0 = delete (default = 1)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-27

Services
LCR/DR

528 LCR Public Day of Week Mapping Table
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-23

This command defines the days of the week as weekdays, weekend days or holidays for LCR.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Monday

Select the Day Type to assign to this day.

02 Tuesday

Possible values: Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday

03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday

Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday

07 Sunday

Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday

9-28

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR/DR

Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones
Program Number(s): 527 and 529

1. Complete the “LCR Time Zone Record
Sheets” on page D-37.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services >
LCR/DR > Public Holidays and LCR
Time Zones.
3. Enter Program 527 data.
4. Enter Program 529 data.
5. Click Submit.

527 LCR Holiday Table
Prerequisite Program: None

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Holiday

Enter Date (YYYYMMDD). A maximum of 128 dates is allowed.

Services

This command assigns up to 128 holidays for LCR processing. These assignments are related to the Day
assignments established in Program 523.

Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day (default = no
value)
01 Add/Delete

Choose to add or delete this date from the holiday table. Expired dates remain
in the table unless deleted.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)

529 LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-23

This command creates a three-dimensional array (Day, Time & LCR Group) for each Route Plan.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Route Plan

Select the LCR Route Plan Number to assign to this time zone.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)

01 LCR Day Type

Select a Day Type for which to define a time zone.
Possible values: Weekday, Weekend or Holiday (default = no value)

02 LCR Time Zone

Select a Time Zone.
Possible values: Zone 1, Zone 2 or Zone 3 (default = no value)

03 Start Time

Enter the start time for the selected Time Zone (hhmm).
Note

Enter your Day Type and Time Zone selections before entering data
in to this field.

Possible values: hh = hour (0-23) and mm = minutes (0-59)
(default = 0000)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-29

Services
LCR/DR

LCR/DR Screening
Program Number(s): 530 and 531

These programs enable and set up screening for DR and LCR.
1. Complete the “DR LCR Screening
Record Sheet” on page D-38.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > LCR/DR
Screening.
3. Enter Program 530 and 531 data
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – view a summary list of
programmed Screened Dial
Strings or Behind Centrex
Access Codes.
• Copy – Enter a Screened Dial
String or Behind Centrex
Access Code in the field with
the corresponding name. Click Copy to make a new assignment.
4. Click Submit.
530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This command screens dialed digits for access codes such as Carrier Identification Codes or Behind
Centrex/PBX access codes. Used only in LCR calls.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Screening Dial String

Enter the string of external digits to be screened.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

01 Add String to Table

Add the Screening Dial String to the DR LCR Screening Table.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)

02 Destination Restriction
Action

03 Least Cost Routing
Action

9-30

Select DR Action.
Possible values: Bypass (default) or Skip and Apply

•

Bypass – Do not apply DR.

•

Skip and Apply – Apply DR to the dialed digits excluding the number of
digits specified in Skip Length.

Select LCR Action.
Possible values:

•

Apply – (default) Apply LCR to all of the external dialed digits.

•

Skip and Apply – Apply LCR to the dialed digits excluding the number of
digits specified in Skip Length.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR/DR

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

04 Digit Modification
Action

Select Digit Modification application.

05 Skip Length

Possible values:

•

Apply – (default) Apply Digit Modification from the first digit.

•

Retain – Retain the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification starting from
the next digit specified by Skip Length.

•

Discard – Discard the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification starting
from the next digit specified by Skip Length.

Specify the number of digits at the beginning of the dial string to be ignored
before DR, Digit Modification, or LCR is applied.
Possible values: 0~5, 0 = delete (default = 0)

531 DR Screening Table for OLG
Prerequisite Program: None

Assigns DR Screening Table for an OLG. Up to four codes may be assigned per line group. Used for
outgoing calls other than LCR.
DESCRIPTION

00 Outgoing Line Group

Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

01 Behind Centrex Access
Code

Enter the access code expected by an attached Centrex PBX.

02 Add or Delete Code

Add or Delete the Code entered above. Leaving the field empty removes an
existing code. Activation requires entries in OLG Group number and 01 Behind
Centrex Access Code above.

Services

FIELD

Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
03 DR Action for Centrex

Apply DR to the dialed digits.
Possible values:

04 Skip Length

•

Bypass (default) – does not apply DR.

•

Skip and Apply– applies DR to the dialed digits excluding the number of
digits specified in Skip Length.

Enter the number of leading digits to be ignored by DR.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)

05 Pause Length

Enter the length of the pause to be inserted between dialing digits.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 0)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-31

Services
LCR/DR

Destination Restriction
Program Number(s): 532, 533, 534 and 111

Assign DR features for the Strata CTX.
1. Complete the “DR Record Sheets” on
page D-39.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Destination
Restriction.
3. Enter 00 DR Level (DRL).
4. Enter Program 532 data.
5. Enter Program 533 data. Click List to
view a summary list of programmed
Dial Strings.
6. Enter Program 534 data. Click List to
view a summary list of programmed
Dial Strings.
7. Enter Program 111 data.
8. Click Submit.
532 DR Table Allow/Deny Definition
Prerequisite Program: 533 below.

Specify the DR Table Type using this command.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 DRL Number

Select the DRL Number.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = no value).

01 Type of Table

Specify whether this DR Table is an Allow Table or Deny Table.
Possible values: Allow or Deny (default).

533 DR Level Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in Step 3 above.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Destination Restriction
Level

Choose the DRL.

01 Dial String

Enter the string of dialed digits to be allowed or denied. Wild cards (X and N)
can only be assigned through CTX WinAdmin, not the programming phones.

Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = no value)

Possible values: 1~7 digits (default = no value)
02 Add/Delete

Add or delete the string entered in 01 Dial String above to the DR Table.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)

9-32

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR/DR

534 DRL Exception Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 533 above

This program assigns a DRL Exception Table to an existing DRL table. If the DRL Table is an allow table,
its Exception Table must be a deny table and vice versa.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Destination Restriction
Level

Enter the DRL for which you want to populate an Exception Table.

01 Dial String

Add the dial string you wish to be treated as an exception.

Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)

Possible values:
02 Add/Delete

1~ 7 digits may include wild cards “X” and “N” where X =
0~9 and N = 2~9.(default = no value)

Add or delete the string entered in 01 DR Exception Table above to the DR
Exception Table.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)

111 DR Level
Prerequisite Program: None

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

DRL Number

Enter the DRL number.

Services

This program enables credit card calling for a DRL.

Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)
01 Credit Card Calling

Enable Credit Card Calling for this DRL.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-33

Services
LCR/DR

DRL Table View
The DRL table view enables you to view all programmed DRLs. This table is a read only table.
➤ To access the DRL table view
➤ From the Program Menu, click

Services > LCR/DR > DRL Table
View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6 for table
functionality.

7020

Centrex/PBX Screening Table View
The Centrex/PBX Screening Table View enables you to the Centrex/PBX Screening table.
➤ To access the Centrex/PBX Screening Table View
➤ From the Program Menu, click

Services > LCR/DR >Centrex/PBX
Screening Table View.
See “Table Views” on page 2-6 for
table functionality.

9-34

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR/DR

Account Codes
Program Number(s): 570, 506 and 571

Assign Account Code data to Strata CTX.
1. Complete the “Strata Net Private
Networking” on page 9-39.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > Account
Codes.
3. Enter Program 570 data.
4. Enter Program 506 data. Click List
to view a summary list of
programmed Account Codes.
5. Enter Program 571 data.
6. Click Submit.

Services

570 Account Code Digit Length
Prerequisite Program: None.

Accounting Codes need to be specified for the number of digits that are expected to be used for registering
a number. This allows dialing within Strata CTX to proceed automatically once the correct account code is
dialed. The following numbers are then dialed digits used for making the phone call.
A second length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used for verification of the code to be less
than the total code entered; thus, the code may contain two parts, one required and one part optional to the
user.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Verified Digit Length

The Verified Digit Length sets a number of digits to verify with a pre-set list.
This number may be the same or smaller than the account code digits set to be
entered for creating a complete accounting code.
Note

This field is not changed, when “506 Verified Account Codes” on
page 9-36 are registered.

Possible values: 4~15 (default = 4)
02 Registered Digit Length

The Registered Digit Length sets a number for the digits to be entered to make
a complete accounting code entry.
Note

The Registered Digit Length ()%) must be greater than or equal to
the Verified Digit Length ()%).

Possible values: 4~15 (default = 6)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-35

Services
LCR/DR

506 Verified Account Codes
Prerequisite Program: 570 page 9-35

This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in Step 3 on 9-32.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Account Code

Enter a valid accounting code that the user will be expected to dial. Digits 0~9
can be used.
Note

The Account Code is set to the same digit length as the Verified Digit
Length in Program 570 above.

Possible values: Up to 15 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 Verified Flag

The Account Code Flag determines whether the number entered is to be used
as a verified account code or not. Some applications may allow users to dial an
accounting code which changes the restriction level for the call allowing it to be
placed.
Possible values: Set or No Set (default)
Note

02 DRL

To delete a Verified Account Code set this field to No

Set.

The DRL assigned to an accounting code allows users to override their
stations assigned DRL enabling a call to be placed.
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)

03 FRL

The FRL assigned to an accounting code enables users to override the station
assigned FRL.
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)

04 Network COS

Assign the Network COS to be used by this accounting code.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

571 Exception Numbers for Forced Account Codes
Prerequisite Program: 506 page 9-36

Up to four telephone numbers can be programmed as exceptions to the forced and /or verified account code
entries (including 911). These special codes enable numbers to bypass the verification process and proceed
unhindered.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Exception Number 1

Enter a Forced Account Code Exception.

02 Exception Number 2

Possible values: Up to 4 digits
Exception 1 default = 911
Exception 2~4 default = no value

03 Exception Number 3
04 Exception Number 4

9-36

Note

One of the assigned exception numbers should be 911. Exception
Numbers for Forced Account Code fields cannot be duplicated.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
LCR/DR

509 DR Override by System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns the COS, DRL, FRL and QPL values used by DR Override by Speed Dial.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR > DR Override
by System Speed Dial.
2. Select the COS, DRL, FRL and
QPL override values.
3. Click Submit.

01 Override COS

02 Override DRL

03 Override FRL

04 Override QPL

DESCRIPTION

Services

FIELD

Select the override COS value.
Possible values: 1~32 (default =1)
Select the override DRL value.
Possible values: 1~16 (default =1)
Select the override FRL value.
Possible values: 1~16 (default =1)
Select the override QPL value.
Possible values: 1~16 (default =1)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-37

Services
LCR/DR

510 COS Override Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

Assigns Class of Service Overrides and their parameters (COS, FRL, DRL, QPL).
1. Complete the “COS Override Code
Record Sheet” on page D-40.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services
> System Param > COS Override.
3. Enter Program 510 data or Select a COS
Override Index and click Copy to copy
settings from the selected COS Override
Index.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 COS Override Index

Select the COS Override index.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)

01 COS Override Code

Select the COS Override Code as entered by users. If no data is entered in this
field, any previously entered data is erased.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Set COS

Select COS number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

03 Set DRL

Select DRL number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

04 Set FRL

Select FRL number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

05 Set QPL

Select QPL number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)

06 Set Network COS

Select Network COS index for this override code.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)

9-38

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Networking

Networking
Strata CTX enables networking of resources using Strata Net Private Networking. Read the following
discussion before programming Strata CTX networking features.

Strata Net Private Networking
The Strata CTX introduces robust private networking, Strata Net, to the Toshiba family of
telecommunications products. Based on an international standard, QSIG, Strata Net will allow multiple
Strata CTX systems to share voice mail systems and attendants, share features and a coordinated
numbering plan and route calls simply and easily throughout the enterprise. Strata Net is distinguished
from CTX Basic Networking which provides interconnection of nodes through conventional, E&M Tie
lines.

QSIG

QSIG is an intelligent and powerful signalling system, providing great flexibility in terms of network
architecture. Any network node can establish routes to 128 other nodes and segmented networks can grow
beyond that. New nodes can be added to the network as business needs dictate. The use of QSIG does not
impose the use of a specific network topology and it can be used with any network configuration: meshed,
star, main and satellite, etc.

Services

Toshiba has adopted QSIG as the basis for Strata Net. QSIG is an open, international standard for
networking PBXs. It was begun in 1994 with a memo of understanding between twelve leading PBX
manufacturers. The QSIG Handbook can be found on the web at http://www.qsig.ie/. The standards were
developed and are maintained by the European Computer Manufacturers Association (ECMA), an
international, Europe-based industry association founded in 1961 and dedicated to the standardization of
information and communication systems. ECMA may be found on the web at http://www.ecma.ch.

Toshiba, like most of its competitors, has chosen to implement QSIG over Primary Rate Interface. Strata
Net supports QSIG Basic Call Control that allows it to interoperate with other PBXs that conform to the
QSIG standard.

Node ID
The basic logical element in Strata Net routing is the Node ID. It functions similarly to the address in a
packet data network. As a call is routed through the network, each node examines the leading received
digits for a Node ID defined in its Flexible Numbering Plan. After first discerning a Node ID, the Strata
CTX then determines whether the Node ID is for itself or for a remote node. If it is a remote Node ID, the
call goes through a routing process that selects an OLG, manipulates the digits and sends the call to the
next node in the network. If the call contains the local Node ID, the Strata CTX manipulates the number
according to the Overlap Code and delivers the call to a local station, trunk or feature.
The Node ID is one to six digits long. The Strata CTX knows that a Node ID to which an Overlap Code has
been assigned is for the local node and that all others are for the remote nodes.
Strata Net bases its routing decisions exclusively on the Node ID and makes no attempt to analyze or
restrict the remaining dialed digits. These remaining digits are not processed until delivered to the
destination Strata Net node. This provides a simple, powerful tool because the programmer does not need
to consider local conditions in transit nodes and does not need to fear interference with the call regardless
of the path it takes through the network.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-39

Services
Networking

Network Directory Number
A Network Directory number consists of two elements: the Node ID and the local directory number. A
Node ID is a string of 1 to 6 digits that identifies one node on the network. A Network DN may be a simple
concatenation of the two elements in which the complete Node ID precedes the complete extension or the
two elements may overlap. In the event of an overlap, an Overlap Code identifies the digits to be
substituted for the received Node ID.
The Node ID allows a call to route through multiple Strata Net nodes until its destination node recognizes
it as a local call. Local Node IDs are programmed using Command 656 “Node ID.” Remote Node IDs are
programmed in Command 651 “Network Routing Plan Analysis” to define the appropriate outgoing route
to the desired destination. Digits received after the Node ID are passed on to the distant node without
analysis.
One node may have up to four Node IDs. A unique Overlap Code is programmed for each Node ID. The
Overlap Code allows the programmer to control the number of digits to be dialed for network calls and to
create a coordinated dialing scheme across the network. If the Network DN is to be a simple concatenation
with no overlap, the Overlap Code field is left blank. All Node IDs, local and remote, must be defined as
such in the Flexible Numbering Plan.
The following are examples of linked and overlapped Node IDs.
Linked:
•

Node ID = 789

•

Extension = 2345

•

Overlap Code = BLANK

•

Network DN = 7892345

Overlapped:
•

Node ID = 789

•

Network DN = 789345

•

Overlap Code = 2

•

Local Extension = 2345

This simple, powerful, logical tool will support large, complex networks. It is the means by which a
Coordinated Numbering Plan can be established across all Strata Net nodes including existing systems
with established numbering plans.

Network Feature Access Code
The Network Feature Access Code is similar to the Network DN but is used to access features in a remote
Strata Net node. Features may include routing features, such as Trunk Group Access and Least Cost
Routing, or user features such as Message Waiting and Paging.
The Network FAC format is:
Node ID (1~6 digits) + Local FAC (1~5 digits) + Parameters (unlimited).
For example, access’ Node ID 789 and uses that node’s LCR () to dial directory
assistance in Boston.
Given their variability, Network Faces are usually processed without Overlap Codes. If a Node ID with an
Overlap Code has been established for local extensions, it cannot be used for feature access; a separate
Node ID must be established. If no Overlap Codes are used, one Node ID will serve for all purposes.

9-40

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Networking

Digit Manipulation
Digit Manipulation is the term for the altering of an original string of dialed digits in order to re-route a call
or connect it to a specific service. Digit Manipulation is usually applied to the leading digits in the string
which appear left-most in written form. Strata Net uses two forms of manipulation: Overlap Codes,
described above, for inbound calls and Network Digit Modification Tables for outbound calls. The
Network Digit Modification Tables contain up to 64 treatments in each of which as many as 10 leading
digits may be deleted and as many as 23 leading digits substituted. These 64 treatments may be applied to
any of 64 Route Definitions.

Traveling Class Mark
Calling privileges, restrictions and priorities may be imposed across Strata Net using the Traveling Class
Mark. The Traveling Class Mark accompanies all calls across the network. When the call reaches its
terminating node, that node uses the Traveling Class Mark to determine whether the originator of the call is
entitled to the dialed facility. The mark is a single information element linked from the following:
•

Network Class of Service

•

Network DR Level

•

Network Facility Restriction Level

•

Network Queuing Priority Level
Services

All nodes contain tables to translate between local and network DR Levels, Facility Restriction Levels and
Queuing Priority Levels. DRL, FRL and QPL each require two tables: one to translate from the local level
to the network level for outgoing calls and one to translate from network to local level for incoming calls.
Network Class of Service is an exception for two reasons. First, at the originating node, each station is
assigned a Network Class of Service; there is no translation. The terminating node does contain a table to
translate the received Network Class of Service to a local Class of Service but it adds parameters to the
local Class of Service before determining how to process the call. Those parameters are:
•

Permission for Off-Hook Call Announce

•

Ability to register System Speed Dial numbers in the terminating node

•

Ability to register Class of Service Override in the terminating node and

•

Trunk Group Override Access

Time of day considerations are handled at the originating node. If a call originates in a node that is in Night
Mode and terminates in another node, it will deliver the Night Mode values regardless of the condition of
the terminating node.

Path Replacement
Known also as Route Optimization and Release Link, Path Replacement makes the most efficient use of
talk paths between network nodes. For example, if a series of transfers around the network results in a
conversation between two stations in the same node, all of the tie line circuits are released and a simple
station-to-station call is established in the one node. This efficiency reduces the number of facilities to be
provided and improves transmission quality by minimizing the number of links over which loss could
occur.
Path Replacement applies to:
•
•
•
•

Call Transfer
Ring Transfer
Station Call Forward
System Call Forward

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-41

Services
Networking

Coordinated Numbering Plan
A Coordinated Numbering Plan rationalizes the dialing patterns required of network users and relieves
them of the need to know complicated access codes to navigate the network. The basic mechanism is the
Network Directory Number described above. The combination of Node ID and Directory Number appear
to the user as simple extension dialing. The ability to overlap the two components reduces the number of
dialed digits. If it is necessary to preserve legacy extension ranges at individual nodes, a Network Access
Code can be used to resolve numbering conflicts with other nodes.

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Strata Net generates call records for incoming or outgoing calls from the nodes in which they originated or
terminated. For example, if a station user in Node 3 makes an outside call that is routed through transit
Node 2 to gateway Node 1 for connection to the public network, Nodes 1 and three generates SMDR
records; Node 2 does not.
1RGH

1RGH
3ULYDWH/LQH

1RGH
3ULYDWH/LQH
'1

*DWHZD\1RGH

7UDQVLW1RGH

([WHQVLRQ1RGH

The record in Node #3 will include the Network DN of the calling station, the dialed digits and the OLG
number and Channel Group number used to access Node #2. The record in Node #1 will include the ILG
number and Channel Group number of the Strata Net trunk on which the call was received and the PSTN
trunk to which it was connected. The record format and conditions are the same as for a single node system
using the new format adopted for Strata CTX.
Station-to-station calls across Strata Net are considered internal calls and do not generate SMDR records in
any nodes. Abandoned Call SMDR records are only generated for incoming calls over local trunks.
Unforced account codes are generated from the node in which they originated. Forced account codes are
included in the records of the node that required them. Similarly, the node which provides DISA services is
responsible for checking the DISA Security code and for generating the SMDR record. The remote node
and the transit node will not generate the SMDR record.
Plowable buffers are usually attached to each network node and polled by a central call accounting system.
If the buffer is not available, the Strata CTX will buffer up to 1000 records. Equipment numbers, time
stamps and call type designations assist the call accounting system in associating records for the same call
from different nodes.

9-42

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Networking

Centralized Voice Mail
Users in multiple network nodes may use the services of a single voice mail system attached to one node.
The network transmits the Voice Mail ID (VMID) for remote stations and the calling conditions under
which the call is being directed to voice mail (Call Forward All Calls, Busy, etc.). The centralized voice
mail system can control message waiting indications and provide automated attendant services throughout
the network through its integration with a single node.
Centralized Voice Mail requires a Coordinated Numbering Plan throughout the network for proper
operation. The Coordinated Numbering Plan allows the voice mail to interact with the entire network as if
it were on large PBX. Basic operations include:
Forward to Voice Mail – A forwarded, busy or unanswered extension may forward across the network
to the voice mail unit. Centralized Voice Mail notifies the voice mail of the source and calling
conditions and the voice mail returns the greeting of the original target extension. Notification of
calling conditions requires SMDI integration.

•

Message Retrieval – A user can press the a Message button on his phone and be directed to a voice mail
system connected to his own or a remote node. The call will be correctly identified as a retrieval for the
correct VMID and the user will be prompted for his security code. The same operation may be
programmed for PhDNs in Station Programming.

•

Message Waiting – The voice mail system can control message waiting indications in distant switches
by accessing the remote node via Node ID, registering the Message Waiting Feature Access Code and
specifying the desired station.

•

Automated Attendant – Automated attendant calls to the voice mail may be transferred to stations or
services in distant nodes using the Network Directory Number. If the automated attendant transfers the
call to a busy destination, it can activate Call Transfer with Camp-on across the network simply by
hanging up.

Services

•

Not all Stratagy features available to a single switch are available to remote Strata Net nodes. This is a
result of the local node being directly integrated to the voice mail system. The following table shows the
availability of voice mail features across the Strata Net.
Attached Node

Remote Node

Message Lamp Control

Stratagy Feature

Forward to Voice Mail

Message Retrieval

Automated Attendant

Call Record

Soft Keys

X (R1.3 and higher)

Transfer Direct to Voice Mail

X (R1.3 and higher)

Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems – Refer to “Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems” on
page A-3.

Centralized Attendant
It is possible for one Attendant to serve an entire Strata Net. Station users anywhere in the network can
simply dial to reach the centralized attendant. Calls to the attendant are identified with calling number
and name. Incoming trunk calls to any node in the network can be routed to one attendant and then
extended anywhere in the network.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-43

Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)

Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)
Network BLF is an indication on the CTX Attendant Console and Digital Telephones that an extension is
Busy, Idle or in DND over different nodes. With software release 1.3 and higher, the Primary CTX can
read the BLF information from the remote CTXs.
In order to use Network BLF, the CTX Attendant Console and Digital Telephones must have access to each
CTX by LAN/WAN and requires the IP addresses of each node/CTX. Figure 2 is a BLF/DSS networking
flow diagram. It shows you the types of connections required between the BLF servers, the Strata CTXs
and the CTX Attendant Console.

CTX-1
(Primary)
Att.
Console 1
LAN

CTX-2
(Remote)

CTX-3
(Remote)

QSIG
(RPTU)

WAN

LAN

Att.
Att.
Att.
Console 2 Console 3 Console 4
6876

Figure 2

Telephone BLF or DSS information from the Remote CTXs is shared with
Primary CTX over the WAN/LAN. The CTXs share trunk information over QSIG.

BLF/DSS Networking

Note The Node ID must be independent of the Station DNs for Network BLF to work.

9-44

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)

Network Attendant Console BLF
Follow these steps to program Network BLF and Figure 9-1:

Remote
(CTX670-2)

Primary
(CTX670-1)
Program 656
Node ID: 16

QSIG

Program 656
Node ID: 17

Remote
(CTX100)
QSIG

Program 656
Node ID: 18

Program 916 - Set
IP Address = 192.168.16.44

Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.17.43

Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.18.53

Program 803 - Log. Device
= 400 (BLF), Port 11

Progra 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000

Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000

Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000
6879

IP-Network

LAN / Switch / Hub

Network BLF Example

Important!

See steps for programming Network BLF from CTX WinAdmin and CTX Attendant Console
on the following pages.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services

Figure 9-1

IP-Network

LAN / Switch / Hub

9-45

Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)

Step 1: Program Network BLF from WinAdmin for CTX Attendant Console

Perform the all of the following steps on the local CTX first, then repeat them on each of the remote CTXs.
1. Create the Node ID in “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.
Note If you have already created the Node ID using QSIG, skip Step 1 and go to the next step.

2. Set up the IP address of the primary CTX using Program “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-14.
3. From the Program menu, select Services > Networking > Node ID to set the Primary Node ID. Refer to
“656 Node ID Assignment” on page 9-54.
4. From the Program menu, select System > I/O Device. Refer to Program “803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port
Assignments” on page 4-28.
• 00 Logical Device No. = 400 (BLF)
• 01 Device Connection = LAN
• 02 Device Port No. = 11
5. Define the LAN Device port number (11 in the example above). Select System > I/O Device, select the
LAN Device tab. Refer to “801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment” on page 4-30. Make the
following selections:
• 00 LAN Port No. = 11
• 01 Protocol = TCP
• 02 PC Operation Type = Server
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Server Port No. = 6000
• 05~08 Client IP 1-4 No. = Default
• 09 Client Port No. = Default
• 10 Read Retry No. = 1
• 11 Write Retry No. = 1

9-46

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)

Step 2: From CTX Attendant Console Set up BLF Network
Important!

Complete Step 1:“Program Network BLF from WinAdmin for CTX Attendant Console” on
page 9-46 before you begin the following steps.

1. Click Administration view.
2. Select the BLF Network Control
tab.
3. Enter the IP addresses of primary
and remote CTXs.
4. Enter the Port Number (6000).
5. In the Name field, enter the Node
Identified. For example, names
such as Dallas, Chicago, etc.,
depending on where the remote
CTXs are located.
6. Enter the Refresh rate. This is the
frequency that the software will
poll the remote site.
8. Enter the data for the other nodes,
then click OK.

6599

Services

7. Click Add.

Notes

•

When you make the directory in the CTX Attendant Console and when entering user information, add
the Node ID as prefix to the extension.

•

When you start the CTX Attendant Console for the first time, a dialog box appears that requires the IP
addresses and Port numbers of each CTX.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-47

Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)

Network DSS/BLF for Digital Telephones
Follow these steps to program Network BLF/DSS and Figure 9-2:

Remote
(CTX670-2)

Primary
(CTX670-1)
Program 656
Node ID: 16

QSIG

Program 656
Node ID: 17

Remote
(CTX100)
QSIG

Program 656
Node ID: 18

Program 916 - Set
IP Address = 192.168.16.44

Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.17.43

Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.18.53

Program 803 - Log. Device
= 400 (BLF), Port 11

Progra 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000

Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 6000

Program 670 - Assign
Remote Nodes Data

Program 670 - Assign
Primary & Remote Node
Data CTX100

Program 670 - Assign
Primary & Remote Node
Data CTX670
6877

IP-Network

LAN / Switch / Hub

Figure 9-2

LAN / Switch / Hub

Network BLF Example

Important!

9-48

IP-Network

See steps for programming Network BLF from CTX WinAdmin on the following pages

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)

➤ Programming Network BLF from WinAdmin for Digital Telephones

Services

• 01 Protocol = TCP
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Server Port No. = 6000
• 05~08 Client IP 1-4 No. = Default
• 09 Client Port No. = Default
• 10 Read Retry No. = 1
• 11 Write Retry No. = 1
6. Verify the DSS refresh time in System > System Timer, FB 23 – System Timer Network DSS Refresh
Timer. Refer to “104 System Timer” on page 4-10.
7. From each remote CTX, repeat steps 1~6 to set up Network BLF.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-49

Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)

Network DSS (R1.3 and higher)
When you set up Network DSS, you assign the DSS numbers in the primary CTX first. Then, once you
network the remote CTXs, they will use the DSS numbers set in the primary CTX.
An example of how to set up Network DSS is shown in Figure 9-3. In this example, if CTX670-1 is the
primary/host site, then CTX670-2 and CTX100 become remote sites.

Remote
(CTX670-2)

Primary
(CTX670-1)
Program 656
Node ID: 16

QSIG

Program 656
Node ID: 17

Remote
(CTX100)
QSIG

Program 656
Node ID: 18

Program 916 - Set
IP Address = 192.168.16.44

Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.17.43

Program 916 - Set IP
Address = 192.168.18.53

Program 803 - Log. Device
= 500 (DSS), Port 12

Progra 801 - BLF Server
Port = 3000

Program 801 - BLF Server
Port = 3000

Program 670 - Assign
Remote Nodes Data

Program 670 - Assign
Primary & Remote Node
Data CTX100

Program 670 - Assign
Primary & Remote Node
Data CTX670
6878

IP-Network

LAN / Switch / Hub

Figure 9-3

LAN / Switch / Hub

Network DSS Example

Important!

9-50

IP-Network

See steps for programming Network DSS from CTX WinAdmin on the following page.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (R1.3 and higher)

➤ Program Network DSS from WinAdmin

1. Create the Node ID in “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.
Note If you have already created the Node ID using QSIG, skip Step 1 and go to the next step.

2. Set up the IP address of the primary CTX using Program “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-14.
3. From the Program menu, select Services > Networking > Node ID to set the Primary Node ID. Refer to
“656 Node ID Assignment” on page 9-54.
4. Program the CTI Port for Network DSS. From the Program menu, select System > I/O Device. Refer to
“803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments” on page 4-28.
• 00 Logical Device No. = 500 (DSS)
• 01 Device Connection = LAN
• 02 Device Port No. = 12
5. Define the LAN Device port number (12 in the example above). Select System > I/O Device, select the
LAN Device tab. Refer to “801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment” on page 4-30. Make the
following selections:
• 00 LAN Port No. = 12
• 01 Protocol = UDP
Services

• 02 PC Operation Type = Server
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Server Port No. = 3000
• 05~08 Client IP 1-4 No. = Default
• 09 Client Port No. = Default
• 10 Read Retry No. = 1
• 11 Write Retry No. = 1
•

Select FB01 Protocol to UDP and FB04 Server Port No. to 3000. FB04 is the DSS Server Port. All
other parameter can have defaults.

6. Make sure the Remote Node IP address and Network DSS port Number are consistent. From the
Program Menu, select Services > Networking > Remote Node Data Assignment (Program 670).
7. In Program 670, enter the parameters as follows:
Remote Node ID = 17. (This is a QSIG Node ID. In the example above these Node IDs are 16, 17
and 18.
Remote Node IP Address = IP address of the remote CTX. Using Node 17 in this example, the IP
address is 192.168.1.43.
Remote Node Port No. = 3000. This port number is the Network DSS port number. The Network DSS
port number can be any available port. All Network DSS ports should also be the same, i.e; 3000 in the
above example.
8. Verify the DSS refresh time in System > System Timer, FB 23 – System Timer Network DSS Refresh
Timer. Refer to “104 System Timer” on page 4-10.
9. Assign the DSS Remote Node feature key using Program 205, 213 and 215. Refer to “Key” on
page 5-15. DSS button can have up to seven digits, so Node ID can be included. Before R1.3 five digits
were the maximum allowed in a DSS button.
10. From each remote CTX, repeat steps 1~9 to set up Network DSS.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-51

Services
Network Feature Content

Network Feature Content
The following is a list of Strata CTX features that operate across multi-node Strata Net connections.
Account Codes Forced/Voluntary/Verified*
Automatic Busy Redial*
Automatic Camp-on
Automatic Release of CO
Call Forward
Call Park Orbits Park and Page
Call Transfer
Call Transfer With Camp-on*
Call Waiting
Caller Identification
Class Of Service
Conference On Hold
Conferencing
Consultation Hold Manual
Credit Card Calling*
Day/Night Modes*
Dial For Quick Launch
Dialed Number Identification Service
Digital PAD
Direct Inward Dialing

•

Direct Inward System Access
Direct Inward Termination
Directory Number Presentation
DISA Security Code Revision*

Features that can be limited by Network Class of Service.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

9-52

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

Do Not Disturb *
Do Not Disturb Override*
Door Lock Control
E911
Executive Override*
External Ring Repeat
Flexible Numbering
Intercept
Least Cost Routing *
Message Waiting
Offhook Camp-on*
Outgoing Call
Recall Treatment
Speed Dial System/Station
Station CO Line Access
Station To Station Connection
System Call Forward
Tandem CO Line Connection
DR
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed
Dial
Traveling Class Of Service
Trunk Access*
Trunk Group Access*

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Configuration

Configuration
RPTU2 PCB
The Strata CTX uses a new Primary Rate Interface PCB that can terminate either a Strata Net connection
or a public PRI: the RPTU-2A. The RPTU-2A is backwardly compatible with the RPTU-1A for standard
ISDN operation. The mode of operation (standard or QSIG) is controlled by a programming parameter
named “Private Service Type.” This parameter must be chosen in establishing both incoming and OLGs.

Circuits
Two Strata Net nodes are connected to each other by a full or fractional DS1. The QSIG basic call
convention will select one DS0 to act as the “D” channel and the remainder as “B” channels. This allows
the interconnecting DS1(T-1) to act as a Primary Rate Interface. The appropriate command set is in new
firmware on the card to allow Strata CTX for signal according to CPE-to-CPE rules which differ from
CPE-to-PSTN rules. Fractional DS1s may consist of 8, 12 or 16 channels including the “D” channel.

Services

The most common type of interconnection is a leased DS-1 from a Common Carrier such as the primary
telephone company or long distance provider. DS1s may also be created across fiber optics, Frame Relay
equipment, IP networks or other transport media using dealer-supplied equipment as long as they conform
to the following specifications.
• 1.544 MBPS
• B8ZS
• ESF
Nodes may also be connected directly over two copper pairs to a maximum distance of 738 feet. See the
Strata CTX Installation and Maintenance Manual for pin configurations and other details.

Strata Net Programming Overview
Follow the sequences below to program Strata Net.
Step 1: Basic Incoming Network Calls

1. Establish the Node ID as part of the Flexible Numbering Plan (Program 102).
Note Node ID is located under 01 Feature Name as “Node ID (CTX network number prefix).”

2. Establish up to four Local Node IDs (Program 656) for the primary node. Each Node ID can have a
unique Overlap Code.
3. Process the digit string as manipulated by the Overlap Code from Flexible Numbering Plan. The
resulting number can be an extension call, feature activation, or tandem call.
Step 2: Basic Outgoing Network Calls

1. Establish the Node ID as part of 102 Flexible Numbering Plan.
2. Use Program 651 Routing Plan Analysis Table Assignment to associate each Remote Node ID with a
Private Route Choice table which will provide up to six routing choices to the desired node.
3. Use Program 653 to define a Private Route Choice table. The table should contain up to six Route
Definitions. The system steps through these Route Definitions in terminating hunt fashion to find a
route to the desired private networking node.
4. Use Program 654 to define a Private Route Definition consisting of an OLG and a pointer into the
Private Digit Modification table.
5. Use Program 655 to set up Private Digit Modification tables containing up to 64 entries. Each entry
specifies the number of leading digits to be deleted from the dialed number and the dial string to be
added as leading digits.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-53

Services
656 Node ID Assignment

656 Node ID Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 102 page 4-3

This program assigns up to four Network Node IDs to process incoming network calls. Each Node ID has
an overlap code. Strata CTX will substitute the Overlap Code for the Node ID before processing the call
further. A Network Directory Number consists of a Node ID and the desired node.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking > Node ID.
2. Enter Program 656 data.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Primary Node ID

Enter the Primary Node ID for this node. This Node ID identifies the node
used for administering Strata Net.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Primary Overlap Code

Enter the Overlap Code associated with the Primary Node ID. An Overlap
Code is the string of digits that replaces the Node ID to continue call
processing.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Node ID 2
Overlap Code 2

Enter Node ID 2 for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Enter Overlap Code for Node ID 2.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)

03 Node ID 3

Overlap Code 3

04 Node ID 4

Overlap Code 4

9-54

Enter Node ID 3 for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Enter Overlap Code for Node ID 3.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Enter Node ID 4 for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Enter Overlap Code for Node ID 4.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
670 Remote Node Data Assignment

670 Remote Node Data Assignment
This command assigns the Remote node data (requires R1.3 and higher).
1. From the Program Menu,
click Services >
Networking > Remote
Node Data.
2. Enter Program 670 data.
3. Click Submit.

Remote Node ID

Remote Node IP Address

Remote Node Port Number

DESCRIPTION
Enter the Remote Node ID for this node.

Services

FIELD

Possible values: Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
Enter the remote node IP address.
Possible values: Up to 15 digits (default = no value)
Enter remote node port number.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-55

Services
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis

651 Private Routing Plan Analysis
Prerequisite Program: 656 page 9-54 and 306 page 6-4

Assigns the Node IDs to Route Choice Tables for Private Networking.
1. Complete the “Private Routing Plan
Analysis Table Record Sheet” on
page D-48.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking > Route
Plan Analysis.
3. Enter the Node ID number (six digit
numeral) to add to the Private
Routing Plan Analysis Table.
Click List to see a summary list of
programmed Node IDs or click
Copy to copy data from an existing
Node ID.
4. Select the Private Route Choice
Table in which to add the Node ID entered in Step 3 above. Possible values are 1~64, 0 = Delete and
default = 0.
5. Click Submit.

Private Route Choice Definition
Program Number(s): 653, 654 and 655

Use these command to define Private Network Routing parameters.
1. Complete the “Route Choice
Definition Record Sheet” on
page D-49.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking > Route
Choice Definition.
3. Enter Program 653, 654 and 655
data.
4. Select the Private Network.
5. Click Submit.

9-56

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Private Route Choice Definition

653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

Use this command to define a Private Route Choice Table. A Private Route Choice Table contains up to six
Route Definitions. The system will step through these Route Definitions in terminating hunt fashion to find
a route to the desired private networking node. There may be up to 64 Route Choice Tables.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Pvt Ntwk Route Choice
Table Number

Select the Private Network Route Choice Table Number.

01~06 Route Definition
Tables

Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
Select Route Definition Tables 1~6 to be used for this Private Network Route
Choice.
Possible values: 1~64, 0 = delete (default)

654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Private Network Route
Definition

Select the number of the Private Route Definition to be defined or deleted.

01 Outgoing Line Group

Select the OLG to be used by this route.

Services

Use this command to define a Private Route Definition. A Private Route Definition consists of an OLG and
a pointer into the Private Digit Modification Table that contains the dialed digits to be deleted and/or
inserted before being communicated to the distant node.

Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)

Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), 0 = delete (default = 0)
02 Digit Modification Table

Select the Digit Modification Table to be used by this route.
Possible values: 1~64, 0 = delete (default)

655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns Digit Modification Tables for Private Networking.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Private Network Digit
Modification Table

Select the Private Network Digit Modification Table to be defined.

01 Deleted Digits

Select the number of leading digits to be deleted.

Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)

Possible values: 1~10, 0 = delete (default)
02 Insert Leading Digits

Select the leading digits to be inserted.
Possible values: Up to 23 digits (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-57

Services
Mapping

Mapping
Program Number(s): 657, 658, 659 and 660

The following programs map network and primary COS, DRL, FRL and QPL settings to each other.
1. Complete the “Network Mapping
Record Sheets” on page D-50.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking > Mapping.
3. Enter Program 657 data.
4. Enter Program 658 data.
5. Enter Program 659 data.
6. Enter Program 660 data.
7. Click Submit.

657 Network COS Mapping Table
Prerequisite Program: None

This table maps a Network COS received as part of a Traveling Class Mark to a local Class of Service for
access to local services. There is no translation of Outgoing Network COS.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Ntwk COS

Enter the Network COS to be mapped.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = no value)

01 Local COS

Enter the Local COS to be used in place of the received Network COS.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = no value)

02 Off-hook Call Announce

Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can activate OCA.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

03 System Speed Dial

Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use a System
Speed Dial number to make an outgoing call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

04 COS Override

Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use Class of
Service Override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

05 TGAC Override

Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can override local
Trunk Group Access Control. Typically an attendant function.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

9-58

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
661 Network DN Table Assignment

658/659/660 Network DRL/FRL/QPL Mapping Tables
Prerequisite Program: None

These commands are used to establish two mapping tables to equate local DRLs, FRLs and QPLs with
network DRLs, FRLs and QPLs for both outbound and inbound network calls.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Type

Select the Network DRL/FRL/QPL type.
Possible values: Outbound or Inbound (default = no value)

Network DRL/FRL/QPL

•

Outbound – maps a local DRL/FRL/QPL to a Network DRL/FRL/QPL.

•

Inbound – maps a Network DRL/FRL/QPL to a local DRL/FRL/QPL.

Enter the Network DRL/FRL/QPL (for outbound) you want to map to a Local
DRL/FRL/QPL.
Possible values: DRL/FRL/QPL1~DRL/FRL/QPL16 (default = 1~16)

Local DRL/FRL/QPL

Enter the Local DRL/FRL/QPL (for inbound) you want to map to the Network
DRL/FRL/QPL selected in the Network DRL/FRL/QPL field above.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1~16)

Services

661 Network DN Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This program assigns the PDN, PhDN or
Pilot DNs to a CTX node ID. This include
all DNs in all CTX nodes on the CTX
network, except the DNs in the node you
are currently programming (This feature is
available with CTX R2.2 or higher and
CTX WinAdmin R2.2G.0 and higher.).
This enables someone in one node to call
an extension in another node, without
having to dial the node ID number. The
caller dials the extension and the system
appends the Node ID. This function is
transparent to the caller and the dialed
party. (See Example.)
6958

➤ In Program 661, enter a Network DN,

followed by it’s node MD. Repeat this process for each DN.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Network DN

Enter the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs that should be assigned to a CTX Node ID. This
include all DNs in all CTX Nodes on the CTX network, except the DNs in the node
you are currently programming.
Possible values: Five ASCII characters max. (Default = No Data)

01 Node ID

Enter the CTX Node ID that should be assigned to the DN.
Possible values: Six ASCII characters max. (Default = No Data)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-59

Services
219 Network DSS Notify Data Delete

Example

Refer to the illustration below and this example: When programming the DNs for telephones in Node
10, enter the DNs and their node ID numbers for DNs in nodes 11 and 12 into the Network DN table,
Program 661.
Node 10

Node 11
QSIG/Non-QSIG

200

202
Q

/N
o

301

Node 12

G
SI
-Q
n
o
/N
G
SI
Q

400

400
300

Node 10
Network DN
Table (Prog. 661)

DN
202
300
201
302

Node
11
11
12
12

Node 11
Network DN
Table (Prog. 661)
Node 12
Network DN
Table (Prog. 661)

DN
200
202
300

Node
10
11
11

201

DN
200
301
201
302

302
400

Node
10
10
12
12

6995

Notes

•
•

If the same DN exists in more than one Node (i.e., DN 400), it should not be placed in the Node ID tables
of any node. The user must dial the Node ID where the DN is located, plus the DN to call the DN.
When using Network DN tables for CTX networking, assign the Primary Node ID in Program 656, but
do not assign overlap codes.

The networking tables shows the DN numbers and node ID that have been assigned in this table.

6959

219 Network DSS Notify Data Delete
This program lets you disable the DSS function for the node ID entered in this screen.
Important!

Don’t use this program unless requested by Toshiba Technical Support.

1. From the Program Menu, click Services > Networking > Network DSS Notify Data Delete.
2. Enter the Node ID of the Network DSS key Notify Data to be deleted.

9-60

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP

Strata Net QSIG Over IP
To use programs 671 and 672, refer to “Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines” on page A-13.

671 IP Address Convert Table
1. From the Program Menu, click Services
> Networking > Network Over IP.
2. Enter Program 671 data.
3. Click Submit.

DESCRIPTION

Remote Node ID

Enter the Node ID of the remote CTX that the primary CTX should route to in
the IP Private Network.

Services

FIELD

Possible values: Up to six digits.
01 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 1

Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be routed to first.

02 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 2

Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in the first BIPU-Q route is busy or disabled.

Possible values: 0~255

Possible values: 0~255
03 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 3

Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in BIPU-Q Route 1 and 2 are busy or disabled.
Possible values: 0~255

04 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 4

Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in BIPU-Q Route 1, 2 and 3 are busy or disabled.
Possible values: 0~255

05 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 5

Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in BIPU-Q Route 1, 2, 3 and 4 are busy or disabled.
Possible values: 0~255

06 BIPU-Q IP Address
Route 6

Enter the IP Address of the remote BIPU-Q IP that should be used if all
channels in BIPU-Q Route 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are busy or disabled.
Possible values: 0~255

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-61

Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP

672 Node ID Detail Information
This command assigns the parameters to the is used by BIPU-Q1As at the remote nodes connecting to the
BIPU-Q1A in the local node over IP Private Networking.
Important!

• These parameters must match all nodes on the IP network.
• When setting Node ID assignments on an IP QSIG network, the Node ID assignment settings for
each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
• Whenever Node ID assignment change are made for IP telephones or IP QSIG Node IDs, Toshiba
recommends pressing the reset button on the BIPU to assure the changes take effect.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Networking >
Network Over IP.
2. Click Detailed Info tab.
3. Enter Program 672 data.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD
Remote Node ID

DESCRIPTION
Node ID of remote CTX connected to this CTX with BIUP-Q, IP networking.
Possible values: Up to six digits.

01 IP Protocol Type

Select the desired IP protocol to be used by the BIUP-Q1A at the remote
node. This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection
on the IP network.
Possible values: IPQSIG (default), H.323 (Do not use; H.323 is not available)

02 Voice Packet Table

Select the desired voice packet configuration table number (programmed in
this CTX) to be used by the BIUP-Q1A at the remote node. Voice Packet
tables are configured in Program 152
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX100 and CTX670 Basic)
1~256 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 1)

9-62

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP

FIELD
03 TCP Connection
Release

DESCRIPTION
Select whether to release TCP connection when the Call was released. TCP
release should be enabled for normal IP calling operation.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values: Enable (default) or disable
Notes
• If disabled, the TCP connection is connected continually.

•

04 H.323 Fast Connection e

This parameter is normally used with its default, which means TCP
connection is established and released for each call. If only two nodes on
Strata Net over IP network, this parameter should be set to Disable which
means TCP connection is always established.

Fast connection should be enabled for H.323 protocol only when the remote
end has this this option enabled. This should be disabled for IP Qsig. Protocol
Possible values: Enable (default) or disable

05 Channel Negotiation

Select whether channel negotiation for Call Control is applied or not. This
parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the IP
network. This programming is applied only to H.323 protocol.

06 Audio Codec

Select the desired audio codec type. Important, G.711 must be used for
transmission of end-to-end DTMF signaling. G.711 provides the highest voice
quality but requires the most bandwidth.

Services

Possible values: Enable or disable (default)

This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values: G711(default) or G729A
07 DTMF Translation

Select of whether DTMF translation by the Control Channel is enabled or not.
This parameter should be enabled when using G.729A codecs and disable if
using G.711 codecs for end-to-end DTMF signaling.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values: Enable or disable (default)

08 E911 Priority

If E911 calls originated from this CTX should be sent over the IP network to the
selected remote node, enter the E911 priority assignment that should be used
for the selected remote node. Assign 0 or 1~5.
Assign 1, the highest priority, to the remote node that has the main CAMA or
ISDN E911 connection.; 2~5 reduces the E911prioity with 5 providing the
lowest priority - these priorities should be used for alternate network routing of
E911 calls.
If E911calls should not be sent over the IP network to the selected node,
assign 0 as the E911 priority.
Note If two or more remote nodes have the same priority, E911calls will route
to the CTX with the lowest node number.
Possible values: 0 (default) or 1~5

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-63

Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP

Miscellaneous
The Strata CTX system can monitor SMDR, Call History and Behind Centrex. Use the following programs
to set up these services.
SMDR

The following enable programming for SMDR, Call History and Behind Connection settings.
Program Number(s): 512, 513 and 514

The following programs assigns system-wide SMDR parameters.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Miscellaneous >
SMDR.
2. Enter Program 512 data.
3. Enter Program 513 data.
4. Enter Program 514 data.
5. Click Submit.

512 SMDR for System Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This table translates a Network COS received as part of a Traveling Class Mark to a local Class of Service
for access to local services. There is no translation of Outgoing Network COS.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

01 Caller ID Field

Include Caller ID records in SMDR.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

02 B-Record for
Abandoned Call

Generate B Record for an abandoned call.

03 Automatic Number
Identification (ANI)

Include ANI in SMDR record.

04 Authorization Code

Include authorization codes in SMDR records.

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
05 End-of-Record CR

Include a Carriage Return (CR) at the end of an SMDR record.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

9-64

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP

513 SMDR for ILG Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This program assigns SMDR parameters for ILGs.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Incoming Line Group
(ILG)

Specify the ILG for which to set SMDR parameters.

01 Generate SMDR
Records

Enable to generate records for this ILG

02 DNIS Field Indication

Check to include DNIS information in records for this ILG.

Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
03 B Record for Incoming
Call

Enable B Record generation for incoming calls with or without incoming SMDR
being enabled.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Enable record generation for abandoned calls. Incoming SMDR must be
turned on. Abandoned call records will be generated whether or not incoming
SMDR has been set.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

05 Display Transferred Call
Records

Services

04 Abandoned Call Record
Output

Select whether to charge a transferred call to the source or destination party.
Possible values: Source (default) or Destination

514 SMDR for OLG Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This command assigns SMDR parameters for OLGs.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Outgoing Line Group
(OLG)

Specify the OLG for which to set SMDR parameters.

02 Outgoing Records

Generate records for outgoing calls. SMDR Record Display must be Enabled.

Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
03 Charged Station

Apply the SMDR record of a transferred call to its source or its destination.
Possible values: Source (default) or Destination

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-65

Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP

577 Caller History
Prerequisite Program: None

Accounting Codes need to be specified for the number of digits that are expected to be used for registering
the number. This allows the dialing within the system to proceed automatically once the correct account
code is dialed, the following numbers are then dialed digits used for making the phone call. A second
length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used for verification of the code to be less than the
total code entered, thus the code may contain two parts, one required and one part optional to the user.
1. Complete the “Call History Record
Sheet” on page D-51.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Miscellaneous > Behind
Connection.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Ckt Type/Number

Enter the Circuit Type and number. See the Table 9-1 below.
Possible values: Up to 6 digits (default = no value)

01 Primary DN

Enter Station DN to store call history data.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

Table 9-1

Circuit Type Code Definitions

Circuit Name

Circuit Type

Circuit Number

Example

0~99999 (DN)

if DN is 200, value is 1200

1~264 (Trunk Number)

if CO is 30, value is 230

GCO

1~128 (GCO Key Group Number)

if GCO is 50, value is 350

POOL

1~128 (POOL Key Group Number)

if POOL is 80, value data is 480

650 Behind Centrex Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This feature allows Strata CTX to connect to the station side of a PBX or Centrex using a physical loop
trunk interface. DR and Least Cost Routing may need to account for access codes required by the PBX or
Centrex before connecting to the public network.

9-66

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
Strata Net QSIG Over IP

1. Complete the “Behind Centrex
Assignment Record Sheet” on page D-52
below.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services >
Miscellaneous > Behind Centrex
Assignment.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 OLG Number

Select OLG that is attached to a Centrex (or other PBX).

01 Behind Centrex

Enable Behind Centrex Operation for this OLG.

Services

Possible values: 1~32 (CTX100), 1~50 (CTX670 Basic),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 Assume 9

Enable the Assume 9 feature.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-67

Services
External Devices

External Devices
Door Phones
Program Number(s): 507, 576 and 508

This command assigns Door Phone parameters.
1. Complete the “Door Phone
Assignment Record Sheet” on
page D-53.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > External Device > Door
Phones.
3. Enter Door Phone Number
...or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – View a summary list of
programmed Door Phones.
• Create – Assigns a new Door
Phone with default settings.
• Copy – Copies settings from an
existing Door Phone.
• Delete – Deletes a Door Phone.
4. Enter remaining Program 507 data.
5. Enter Program 576 data.
6. Enter Program 508 data.
7. Click Submit.
507 Door Phone Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None

This assignment configures Door Phone Control Boxes (DDCBs) and Door Phones (MDFBs). DDCBs can
be connected to ADKU, PDKU and/or BDKU interface PCBs. Up to three MDFBs can be connected to
one DDCB. A Door lock control relay may be assigned to the B output of the DDCB in place of a MDFB
door phone (see “508 Door Lock Control Assignment” on page 9-70).
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Door Phone Number

Enter the door phone number.
Possible values: 1~6 (CTX100), 1~9 (CTX670 Basic),
1~24 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
Door phone numbering for both CTX100 and CTX670 is as follows:

9-68

•

DDCB 1 provides door phone numbers 1~3, 2 can be a door phone or door
lock.

•

DDCB 2 provides door phone numbers 4~6, 5 can be a door phone or door
lock.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
External Devices

FIELD

DESCRIPTION
Door phone numbering for CTX670 only is as follows:

•

DDCB 3 provides door phone numbers 7~9, 8 can be a door phone or door
lock.

•

DDCB 4 provides door phones 10~12, 11can be a door phone or door lock.

•

DDCB 5 provides door phones 13~15, 14 can be a door phone or door lock.

•

DDCB 6 provides door phones 16~18, 17 can be a door phone or door lock.

•

DDCB 7 provides door phones 19~21, 20 can be a door phone or door lock.

•

DDCB 8 provides door phones 22~24, 23 can be a door phone or door lock.

DDCBs are numbered by the system automatically by DDCB Equipment (Shelf/
Slot/Circuit). DDCB1 is assigned to the lowest DDCB Equipment and DDCB2 to
the next lowest, etc.
If DDCB Circuit B is set to Door Lock, a Door Phone cannot be set.
01 DDCB Equipment No.

Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door phone should be assigned.

Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS
in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Notes
• This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU
interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.

•

Services

Possible values: xx = cabinet 01 (CTX100), 01~02 (CTX670 Basic), 01~07
(CTX670 Exp.);
yy = slot 01~8 (CTX100) 01~10 (CTX670);
zz = circuit 01~16 (default = no value)

If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must be deleted, using
Program 201, before attempting to assign the DDCB console.

Cabinet numbers:

•

CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.

•

CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.

Slot numbers:

02 Tenant Number

•

CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.

•

CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

Select the Tenant Number for which the door phone should ring over external
page in the system Night mode.
Possible values: 1~2 (CTX100); 1~8 (CTX670); (default = 1)

04 Ring Duration

Select the time that the door phone should ring destination devices when the door
phone button is pressed. The ring time can be 3 to 30 seconds set in 3 second
intervals - each 3 second interval provides one ring to the destination. Destination
devices include selected DNs and Page groups.
Possible values:

05 LCD Name Display

3~30 (default = 9)

Enter the Door Phone name that should display on LCD telephones when the
door phone rings the telephones; or, when the telephone calls the door phone.
Possible values: Up to 16 characters (default = no value)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-69

Services
External Devices

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

06 Day1 Destination

Select the type of destination that should ring when the door phone button is
pressed during the system Day1, Day2 or Night mode.

07 Day2 Destination
08 Night Destination

Possible values: None (default), DN or
Paging Group 1~4 (CTX100); 1~8 (CTX670 Basic); 1~16
(CTX670 Exp.)
Enter the Destination Number. If the ring destination type is a PDN or PhDN, enter
the directory number. If the ring destination type is Page, enter the Page Group
number.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

576 Door Phone Night Ring Over External Page

This assignment sets the Page Group that should ring during the system Night Mode when a door phone
button is pressed. The assignment can be made for Tenant 1 only.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Tenant Number

Select the system Tenant number to be assigned Door Phone to Page Group/
Night Ringing.
Possible values: 1(CTX100 and CTX670) (default = no value)

01 Page Group Number

Select the system Page Group number that should ring for the selected Tenant
when a door phone button is pressed during the system Night Mode.
Possible values: 0~4 (CTX100), 0~8 (CTX670 Basic), 0~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

508 Door Lock Control Assignment

This assignment is used to configure up to 10 door lock control relays. The contacts of these relays are
used to control electrical door locks. One door lock relay can be assigned to each of the eight Door Phone
Control Boxs (DDCB, Port -B) and/or one to each of the two BIOU PCBs (any one of the four control
relays).
Note If a door lock is assigned to a DDCB, the second jack (Port B) will provide the door lock relay

contacts. This jack can not be used to connect an MDFB door phone.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Door Lock Number

Enter the door lock control number to configure.
Possible values: 1~4 (CTX100); 1~5 (CTX670 Basic);
1~10 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no value)

01 Interface Type

Enter the system Page Group number that should ring for the selected tenant
when a door phone button is pressed during the system Night Mode.
Possible values: None (default), BIOU or DDCB

9-70

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
External Devices

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

02 BIOU Relay Number

Assign BIOU control relay as a Door Lock Relay. This relay activates when the
Door Lock button is pressed or a Door Lock access code is dialed.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIOU1 provides control relays 1~4
BIOU2 provides control relays 5~8.
Note

03 DDCB Equipment No.

The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
relay operation BIOU2 is installed as default in a virtual equipment
position Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in Program 100. To install an
actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming
telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2
in Cabinet 01/slot 01~08 in the normal manner. BIOU relay functions are
assigned in “515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments” on page 9-72.
This field is required if you selected BIOU in 01 Interface Type above.

Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door Lock should be assigned.
This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU
interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.

Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS
in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.

Services

Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01 (CTX100), 01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
yy = Slot 01~08 (CTX100), 01~10 (CTX670);
zz = Circuit 01~16 (default = no value)

Notes
• This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU
interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.

•

If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must be deleted,
using PRG201, before attempting to assign the DDCB console.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-71

Services
External Devices

515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1, and 105 page 4-12

This assignment is used to view functions of the four control relays on each BIOU PCB set in Program 105
12 Night Relay and 18 Night Bell Relay; Program 508 Door Lock Control Assignment; and Program 503
19 BGM Mute Relay. The system allows up to two BIOU PCBs to provide a total of eight control relays.
The control relays can be configured as an external BGM mute control, Night Bell control, Night Mode
Control, and Door Lock Control.
Notes

•
•

BIOU-1 relays are identified as Control Relays 1~4.
BIOU-2 relays are identified as Control Relays 5~8.

1. From the Program Menu, click Services >
External Device > BIOU Relay Type.
2. Enter Program 515 data.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 BIOU (1 or 2)

Enter the BOIU PCB number.
Possible values: 1 or 2 (default = no value)
Note

BIOU 1 and BIOU 2 are assigned in Program 100 - Card Assignment.

01 BIOU Relay 1 or 5

View the function of BIOU1, control relay 1 or BIOU2, control relay 5:

02 BIOU Relay 2 or 6

View the function of BIOU1, control relay 2 or BIOU2, control relay 6:

03 BIOU Relay 3 or 7

View the function of BIOU1, control relay 3 or BIOU2, control relay 7:

04 BIOU Relay 4 or 8

View the function of BIOU1, control relay 4 or BIOU2, control relay 8:
Possible values: Not Use, Ext Paging, Night Bell, Night Relay or Door Lock
(default = no value)

9-72

•

NOT USE – if the relay is not used.

•

PAGE MUTE – External BGM mute control activates during an external page
(see “503 Paging Devices Group Assignments” on page 9-73).

•

NIGHT BELL – Night Bell control activates during the system Night Mode only
when incoming CO lines ring (see “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3).

•

NIGHT RELAY – Night Mode Control activates continuously during the system
Night Mode (see “105 System Data” on page 4-12).

•

DOOR LOCK – Door Lock Control activates when a telephone's Door Unlock
button is pressed (see “508 Door Lock Control Assignment” on page 9-70).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Services
External Devices

503 Paging Devices Group Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 502 page 5-28

Assigns BIOU Page Zone Relays to Page Groups.
1. Complete the “Paging Device Group
Assignment Record Sheet” on page D-54.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services >
External Device > Paging Devices.
3. Enter 00 Zone Relay Number.
4. Check the Paging Groups that you wish to
activate.
5. Select the external generic relay number.
6. Click Submit.

DESCRIPTION

00 Zone Relay Number

Select the BIOU Page Zone relay that should be assigned to the Page Groups
below. This relay activates whenever the selected Page Group is paged.

•

BIOU1 = Zone Relays 1~4.

•

BIOU2 = Zone Relays 5~8.

Services

FIELD

Possible values: 1~8 (default = no value)
01 PG 1~16 PG 16
17 All Page Group
18 All Emergency Page
Group

Check the box if the selected BIOU Page Zone Relay should activate with this
Page Group.

19 BGM Mute Relay

Assign BIOU generic relay as the BGM mute relay. This relay activates
whenever the external page is in use

Possible values: On or Off (default)

•

BIOU1 = Generic Relays 1~4.

•

BIOU2 = Generic Relays 5~8.

Possible values: 1~8 (default = 0)
Note

The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
relay operation,BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a virtual equipment
position - Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in Program 100. To install
an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the
programming telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install
the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01 Slot 01~08 in the normal manner.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

9-73

Services
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group

550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group
Prerequisite Program: Program 105

This command assigns OLGs to the Enhanced
911 Emergency Call Group.
1. Complete the “Emergency Call Group
Assignment Record Sheet” on page D-55.
2. From the Program Menu, click Services >
Enhanced 911.
3. Select Program 550 data.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

00 Emergency Call Group
Number

Specify the Emergency Call Group.

01 OLG1~08 OLG8

Specify the first through eighth OLG to be chosen for an E911 call.

Possible values: 1~8 (default = no value)

Possible values: 0~32 (CTX100), 0~50 (CTX670 Basic),
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.), (default = no data)

9-74

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation

This chapter discusses CTX WinAdmin’s operational programming functions.

System Setup
Program Number(s): 900, 901, 902 and 915

These programs enable programmers to simulate system Power Off/On, initialize Strata CTX, check
software versions and set system clock and date.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > System Setup.
2. Click Restart CTX to reset Strata
CTX
...or click Initialize CTX to delete
programmed data and revert to
default settings.
3. 901 CTX Version data is for
viewing only.
5. Click Submit.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation

4. Set Strata CTX date and time.

10-1

Operation
System Setup

900 CTX Restart
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes or restores programmed data.
CAUTION!

Both commands will drop all existing calls.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Restart CTX

Clicking on this button initializes a System Power Off/Power On sequence to reset
hardware. This is also known as an Initialize Level 2.

Initialize CTX

Clicking on this button invokes an Initialize Level 1 sequence which erases
programmed data and enters default data into the Strata CTX System.
If a Toshiba SmartMedia is installed in the available slot, using this option restores
data from backed up data from the SmartMedia (see Restoring Data from
SmartMedia below).

Important!

Choosing Initialize CTX without installing a SmartMedia Card deletes all programmed data
and returns your Strata CTX to factory default settings. All previously programmed data is
lost (See “Restoring Data from SmartMedia” on page 10-2).

Restoring Data from SmartMedia

When initializing with Initialize CTX, you can restore custom data that was previously programmed and
stored on a SmartMedia card. To do so, follow the steps below.
1. Insert a SmartMedia card that contains the Progdata folder with the default.dat file. The default.dat
file contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data Backup. See “910 Data Backup”
on page 10-13.
2. Run System Initialization by clicking Initialize CTX.
Notes

•
•

Restoring data from the SmartMedia card may take an hour or more.

•

To verify completion of the restore process access the Programming Mode from a telephone and enter
your password. If the system enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.

During the restore process, the telephone LCD may display date and time data. This does not
necessarily indicate completion of the restore process.

3. Remove the SmartMedia card and restart the CTX again after restoring system data. This is necessary
to reset BIBU-M, BIPU-Q, QSIG, ISDN and other advanced features.

10-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
System Setup

901 Display Version
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to view the Active and Standby software versions installed on the Strata CTX
system processor.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

System Type

Displays the system that is connected.
Possible values: CTX670, CTX100 (Active only).

Active Software

Displays the software versions.

Standby Software

These fields indicate the following:
A = Indicates software for USA, Canada or Mexico.
Rx.xx = Indicates the CTX release level.
M0011.00 = The software version number.
Note

DTMF, BBMS, BEXS,
BSIS, Ethernet, and
Modem

The Active software does not always have to be the same as the Standby
software, although the Active and Standby software versions may be the
same when you receive it from Toshiba.

The check marks in these boxes indicate the hardware that is installed on the Strata
CTX processor.
Notes
On the CTX100:

•

Ethernet means AETS is installed on ACTU.

•

Modem means AMDS is installed on ACTU.

•

DTMF means ARCS is installed on ACTU.

Indicates the DTMF/ABR software.

IPL Version

Indicates basic boot-up software version.

902 Set Time and Date

Operation

DREC Version

Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CTX.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

CTX Date

Set Strata CTXs current date.

•

Select current date (YYYYMMDD).
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day

•

Current Day of Week will display once the Year, Month and Day parameters
have been entered.
Possible values: Sunday ~ Saturday (Read only) (default = no value).

•

Leap Year will display based on the year entered.
Possible values: Leap, Leap Next x, where x = 1, 2 or 3. X. is the number of
years since the previous leap year (Read only) (default = no
value).

CTX Time

Set Strata CTXs current time (hhmmss).
Possible values: hh = hour, mm = minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

10-3

Operation
908 SmartMedia

915 Regional Selection
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to select the country.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Country

Select Country.
Possible values: USA, Canada and Mexico.

908 SmartMedia
This program enables you to format and perform file management tasks on a SmartMedia card while it is
installed in the CTX processor.

SmartMedia Card
The SmartMedia card is a small memory card that is used in digital cameras, MP3 players etc. It is
available in most retail stores that sell digital cameras, personal computers supplies, etc. The capacities of
standard SmartMedia cards are 32MB, 64MB and 128MB.
Notes

•
•

32MB or 64MB must be used for Strata CTX maintenance functions.
The Strata CTX does not use Compact Flash or other similar types of small storage devices.

Functions

A SmartMedia Card(s) is required for most of the important Strata CTX maintenance functions such as:
• Saving (Backup) and re-loading the programmed database of a particular Strata CTX system.
• Saving Event trace data files for troubleshooting problems.
• Updating or upgrading the Strata CTX operating software version.
Administration and Use

• SmartMedia card read/writer installed in or connected to a PC can be used to perform a basic format
and administer SmartMedia files. (SmartMedia card read/writers are available in most computer supply
retail stores. They come with USB, PCI, floppy disk, and other types of PC interfaces).
• When the SmartMedia card is used to perform one of its functions, it is installed in the SmartMedia slot
of the Strata CTX processor. It must be first formatted for Strata CTX operation by running Forced
Format (program 908).
• The Strata CTX format will create five special folders. These folders and how to use them are explained
below and in, Chapter –Maintenance.

10-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
908 SmartMedia

1. Install the SmartMedia Card into
the SmartMedia slot of the Strata
CTX processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > SmartMedia.
3. Click one of the following:
• Normal Format – creates any
CTX SmartMedia folder that
does not exist already. Existing
folders are not overwritten by
this procedure.
• Forced Format – erases any
existing folders and files. All
existing data is overwritten. It
then creates the five Strata
CTX folders. See “CTX
SmartMedia Folders” on page 10-6 for more information.
• Unmount – copies the CTX event and alarm log files from the CTX processor buffers (RAM) to the
SmartMedia card and then clears the buffers. It then stops CTX from writing to the SmartMedia
Card so it can be removed without damaging it.
CAUTION!

Always run unmount before removing the SmartMedia card. Failure to comply can
cause damage to the card.

• Transfer – copies the CTX event and alarm log files from the CTX processor buffers (RAM) to the
SmartMedia card and then clears the buffers.

DESCRIPTION

Operation

Displays the procedure selected.

Operation

FIELD

Possible values: Normal Format, Forced Format, Unmount and Transfer.
Completion

Displays the progress and status of the procedure selected.
Possible values: Processing or Complete

CTX SmartMedia
Folder

Contains files in the CTX SmartMedia Folder.

Local Folder

You must manually create a new folder on your PC under ctx folder > WinAdmin >
Ctmc > Ctmc_Local > SmartMedia > New Folder

Possible values: Files listed under Admlog, Errlog, Evnttrce, Progdata, and
Program folders.

The created folders will be available in the Local Folder drop-down box. You can
store CTX SmartMedia files on these folders (See details below).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

10-5

Operation
908 SmartMedia

Smart Media Card FTP File Management

1. The Smart card files can be copied from the Smart media card to your CTX WinAdmin PC and vice
versa using the CTX WinAdmin Smart Media FTP function. The Smart Media card must be installed in
the CTX processor and formatted using Program 908 before it can be used. After it is installed and
formatted the CTX will automatically store files under the Admlog, Errolog and Evnttrce folder of the
Smart Media card - see CTX Smart Media folders below for details.
2. New folders must be created (with your own chosen names) on the CTX WinAdmin PC using Windows
Explorer before you can use the Smart Media FTP screen. The folders must be created under the
following path which already exists on the CTX WinAdmin PC:
CTX>WinAdmin>Ctmc_Local>SmartMedia>Your Folder Name.
3. After the SM card has been formatted and your folders have been created on the CTX WinAdmin PC
you can manage files as described below:
• Download: Copy files from the CTX Smart Media Card to your CTX WinAdmin PC.
• From the CTX Smart Media drop down, select the CTX Smart Media folder and file(s) that should
be copied to the CTX WinAdmin PC.
• From the Local Folder drop down, select the CTX WinAdmin PC folder to which the files should be
copied to - then click on Download.
• Upload: Copy files from the CTX WinAdmin PC to the CTX Smart Media card
• From the Local Folder drop down, select the CTX WinAdmin PC Smart Media folder and file(s)
that should be copied to the CTX Smart Media card.
• From the CTX Smart Media Folder drop down, select the CTX Smart Media folder to which the
files should be copied to - then click on Upload.
• Delete SM File: Delete files stored on the CTX Smart Media card.
• From the CTX Smart Media drop down, select the CTX Smart Media folder and file(s) that should
be deleted - them click Delete SM file.

CTX SmartMedia Folders
Running the Normal and Forced options of this program creates five folders on the SmartMedia card as
follows:
• Admlog – The Admlog folder saves a history of CTX Administration (programming) command entries
in xxx.SNP and xxx.DKT files. SNP files provide a log of CTX WinAdmin entries and DKT files
provide a log of programming Telephone entries.
• Errlog – System error logs are saved into this folder. See Maintenance chapter, Event Trace Control
Programs 903, 904 and 905 to set up trace.
• Evnttrce – CTX WinAdmin Event Trace files are saved into this folder.
• Progdata – Your Strata CTX programmed settings are all saved in this folder. When a backup is
performed, Strata CTX saves programmed data to the Progdata folder as a default.dat file.
Note To perform the backup function you must first delete any existing default.datfiles to allow CTX to

create a new default.dat file.
• Program – The operating software of the Strata CTX is saved in this folder as a nhs.prg file.

10-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
911 Remote Program Update

SmartMedia Errors
Any error causes the SmartMedia LED to flash (0.25sec ON – 0.25sec OFF continuous), except if the
SmartMedia Volume Label is UPDATE; in this case the SmartMedia LED will always flash.
SmartMedia LED Specification

SmartMedia LED, located near the SmartMedia slot on the CTX processor, is lit when the following
occurs:
• When the SmartMedia is accessed for read and write.
• When the errors are detected. See above for the detail of errors.
• When SmartMedia is inserted into the slot, SmartMedia LED blinks once. This is because the system
accesses the media to read the house keeping data. When it does not blink, it means that the
SmartMedia is not detected by the system at all. If the blink does not stop, it means that any of above
error is detected or the SmartMedia volume label is UPDATE.

911 Remote Program Update
Prerequisites
The following are the prerequisites to Remote Update:
• The SmartMedia card must be installed in the system with a Backup of the current database
(default.dat) file.
• Activation of the new software requires a Clear-reboot operation that will drop all existing calls and
will take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more, depending on the system size.
• Requires a different system software Update file (provided on the Toshiba FYI site), depending on the
type of CTX system and the type of Update that will be performed.

Each Strata CTX system type has two Software Update files: one for CTX WinAdmin Remote Update and
another file for Local Update (to use with the Programming Telephone procedure).
CAUTION!

Operation

CTX Software Update Files

Using the wrong file in either case will cause the Update to fail.

CTX Software Identification
Refer to the table below to identify CTX software release and builds in software file names or when
verifying CTX software versions. For example, if the software ID is MA228, this means MA2 is equal to
CTX Release 1.02 and nn is the software build 28.
CTX Release

Software ID

R1.00 and R1.01

= M01nn

R1.02

= MA2nn

R1.03

= MA3nn

R1.3

= ME0nn

R2.0

= MF0nn

nn = Software build level/number

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

10-7

Operation
911 Remote Program Update

Step 1: Download and Extract CTX Software
The latest released version of CTX system software Update files are posted on the Toshiba FYI site
http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com. To download the software files, follow the procedure below.

Step 1A: To download CTX System Software Files from FYI
1. From the Toshiba FYI website, click on Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems). The files are
located under the heading “CTX System Software.”
2. Double-click the appropriate link.
CTX100 MXnnn Software (Remote Update)
...or CTX670 MXnnn Software (Remote Update)
3. When the Toshiba Software License Agreement screen displays, click the Agree button. The File
Download dialog box displays.
4. Select the “Save this program to disk” radio button, then click OK. The Save As screen displays.
5. Save the file to an appropriately named folder that identifies the system type and software version, then
click Save.

Step 1B: Extract Downloaded Files
1. After the file download is complete, select the Open or Open Folder button on the Download Complete
screen to extract/open the files now, or select the Close button to extract the files later.
Notes
●

●

The WinZip Self-Extractor screen displays if you selected the Open or Open Folder button.
If you selected Close, double-clicking the .exe file later will bring up the WinZip Self-Extractor
screen.

These files are the Remote Update self extracting .exe files:
• CTX100_R_MXnnn.exe (for CTX100 Remote Update file)
• CTX670_R_MXnnn.exe (for CTX670 Remote Update file)
2. In the “Unzip to folder:” field, make sure the path leads to the correct folder as shown below. If the path
is incorrect, click the Browse button to navigate to the appropriate path, then click the Unzip button.
3. Verify the unzip folder path for Remote Update: C:\Ctx\WinAdmin\Ctmc\Ctmc_local\Upload
4. Verify the unzipped files or folders for Remote Update: “CTX100_R_MXnnn” or
“CTX670_R_MXnnn”
Note The files can also be extracted to a temporary folder and the copied to the appropriate SmartMedia

PROGRAM folder or CTX WinAdmin Upload folder. The extracted (decompressed) files will be
approximately 15MB.

10-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
911 Remote Program Update

Step 2: Perform CTX WinAdmin Remote Program Update
This program enables you to send the new CTX system software to the CTX processor standby memory
(CTX670) or SmartMedia card (CTX100) while the system is in use without interrupting service. After the
new software is loaded into memory it can be activated at any time.
CAUTION!Activation of the new software requires a Clear-reboot operation that will drop all

existing calls and take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more.
CTX WinAdmin will automatically go back to the login screen. After Clear-reboot,
you must wait until the system initializes the new software and reloads the database.
After the CTX database is reloaded, you must reconnect CTX WinAdmin to the
Strata CTX and verify that the new software is loaded.

➤ To get started

1. At the CTX site, install a SmartMedia card in the CTX670 or CTX100 processor. All existing files on
this SmartMedia card should be saved on a PC just in case they are needed later.
Notes
●

●

A SmartMedia card volume label is not necessary for CTX670 or CTX100 remote update. If you
use a volume label, it cannot be PRGUPDATE or PRGRESCUE0, PRGRESCUE01, etc.
The SmartMedia card is used to back up the customer’s latest system data (default.dat) which will
automatically reload after the software update process is complete (see Step 7 on 10-10).
For CTX100 systems only, CTX WinAdmin loads the Program Update files onto the SmartMedia
card before making the Update software active on the ACTU processor.

2. Make sure the Remote Update folder containing the Update files (xx.nhs) is placed properly in CTX
WinAdmin Upload folder, for example
C:\Ctx\WinAdmin\Ctmc\Ctmc_local\Upload\CTX100_R_MXnnn, then you may proceed with the
Remote Update procedure.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation

For CTX670, CTX WinAdmin loads the Program Update files onto the Standby Flash memory of
the BECU/BBCU processor before making the update software active.

10-9

Operation
911 Remote Program Update

➤ To perform the Update

1. Connect the CTX WinAdmin PC to the Strata CTX system that should be updated via LAN or modem.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Program Update. The
Program Update screen displays.
3. Complete Step 1 on the Program
Update screen by clicking on
SmartMedia (blue hyperlink).
This takes you to Program 908 –
Format/Unmount SmartMedia screen.
4. On the “Format/Unmount SmartMedia
screen,” click the Forced Format
button to format the SmartMedia card.
5. Go back to the Program Update screen
(from Program Menu, click Operation
> Program Update).
6. Complete Step 2 on the screen by clicking on Data Backup.
7. Click the green “Back Up” button to start the back up. The CTX will store the programmed data
(default.dat file) on the PROGDATA folder of the SmartMedia card.
8. After completing Data Backup, go back to the Program Update screen (from Program Menu, click
Operation > Program Update) and complete Step 3. For field descriptions refer to the table “Program
Update Screen Field Descriptions” on page 10-12
9. From the “Upload From Folders” drop-down menu on the Program Update screen, select the Remote
Update folder for the CTX100 or CTX670 to be updated.
10. Click on Start Remote Program Update. CTX service will not be interrupted during this process.
CAUTION!Do not change the CTX Admin screen after the Update process has begun. Changing

the screen, touching the keyboard etc., will cause the process to stop and fail. If for
any reason the Update process stops, you must reconnect and start the process over.

Notes
●

●

10-10

CTX WinAdmin will send approximately 200~300 files to the Strata CTX. This will not interrupt
service on the Strata CTX.
CTX WinAdmin indicates the status of the Remote Update process in the “Files Uploaded” box
and status toolbar. Remote Update can take from 15 minutes to more than one hour, depending on
the transmission speed of the connection (i.e; LAN or modem speed).
After all files have been sent to the CTX completing this step of the Update process, a message
displays to indicate the new system software has been sent to the CTX processor memory
successfully (to the CTX670 standby side of flash memory or CTX100 SmartMedia PROGRAM
folder).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
911 Remote Program Update

11. From the message screen that displays after the Remote Program Update files have been sent to the
CTX, click OK or Cancel.
Clicking OK starts the Clear-reboot process and activates the new software immediately.
Clicking Cancel enables you to activate the software later. To activate the new software later, go to the
Program Update screen and click the Clear-reboot button.
Important!

Keep the SmartMedia card installed on the Strata CTX processor to allow the programmed
data to be restored automatically following the Remote Update and Clear-reboot process.

Note After clicking Clear-reboot CTX WinAdmin disconnects from the CTX. Wait 15 minutes to an hour

or more before re-connecting CTX WinAdmin to the CTX. The CTX must first initialize the new
software and reload the customer database.

CAUTION!The Clear-reboot process drops all calls and takes the Strata CTX out of service from

10 minutes to an hour, depending on the size of the Backup data file.
After Clear-reboot is complete, the Strata CTX runs on the new software version
(this is now the active side of flash memory). The Backup data has been restored
from the SmartMedia card to the Strata CTX processor memory. On the CTX670
only, the original software version is on the standby side of flash memory.
Do not turn CTX670 power off/on at this time. You must first switch the Active
software from “Trial” to “Normal”.

12. After the CTX restarts and is functioning, re-established communication between CTX WinAdmin and
the CTX. Then go to Operation > System Setup and check that the new software is loaded on the
Active side of the processor flash RAM.

Operation

If the system power is turned off/on while the Active side of flash memory is in the
Trial mode, the original software will switch back to Active and the new software
will switch back to Standby. This is to provide an automatic method of switching
back to the original software version if the new version is causing problems.

13. CTX670 only: If the CTX670 system is operating correctly, go to the Program Update screen and
switch the Active Software to “Normal” by clicking the green “Set Normal” button.
14. From the Program Menu, click Operation > System Setup screen and click the green “Restart CTX”
button or turn the Strata CTX power off/on. CTX WinAdmin will return to the Login screen.
This is necessary to reset BIPU-M, BIPU-Q, QSIG, ISDN and other advanced features.
CAUTION!Restarting CTX or turning the power off/on will drop all existing calls.

15. Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making
incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail,
etc., are working correctly.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

10-11

Operation
911 Remote Program Update

Important!
●

●

If power is turned off/on or if the Strata CTX is re-started before switching the Active software from
“Trial” to “Normal”, the CTX670 will switch the old software back to Active.
It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after Remote Update is complete.

Notes
●

●

Table 10-1

If the new version of software is not performing properly, on the CTX670 only, you can activate
the old version of software again by initiating a Clear-reboot.
Clear-reboot swaps the active and standby sides of flash memory. You must always install a
SmartMedia card containing a copy of the current back up data before initiating a Clear-reboot or
all programmed data will be erased.
If the CTX100 system is not working properly with the new software, you must reinstall the
original software using this Update procedure.
Program Update Screen Field Descriptions

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Upload from Folder

Select the Strata CTX type.
Possible values: CTX100_R_MXnnn, CTX670_R_MXnnn.

Version Number

Software version number displays. Example: A102MXnnn00. See CTX Software
Identification.

Number of Files

Displays number of files that have to be uploaded. This file is static.

Files Uploaded

Displays number of files uploaded. This is a dynamic field and will change during
the process.

Operation
Completion

View operation status.

Copied blocks

View number of blocks copied.
Possible values: 0~65536 (default = 0)

Total Blocks

View total blocks to be updated.
Possible values: 0~65536 (default = 0)

Active Side ID

Active Side Number.
Possible values: 0 or 1 (default = 0)

Active Side Status

Software status display.
Possible values: Normal (default), Trial, Fault, Don’t care or Error

Standby Side Status

Standby Backup Type. This field will display only when connected to a CTX670. It
will not display when connected to CTX100.
Possible values: Normal (default), Trial, Fault, Don’t Care or Error

10-12

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
910 Data Backup

910 Data Backup
Prerequisite Program: 908 on page 4

This program enables you to backup programmed data from Strata CTX to a SmartMedia Card.
1. Install the SmartMedia Card into the designated slot of the Strata CTX processor.
Note The SmartMedia card must be

formatted by Strata CTX and
the “Progdata” folder must be
empty (no Default.dat file)
2. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Data Backup.
3. Select the Backup button. Click
Cancel to interrupt the selected
function.
4. Click Backup.
5. The Progress field displays the
progress of the selected function.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Backup

Select one of the following buttons. When performing a Backup, you must use a
formatted SmartMedia card.

•

Backup – Backup Strata CTX data to SmartMedia card. This creates a
Default.dat file under the Progdata folder of the SmartMedia card.

•
•
Completion

Operation

Notes
• Default.dat is the name of the file that is created and it contains all Strata
CTX programmed data. It is not default data. It is data that is currently
programmed in the Strata CTX.
The Progdata folder on the SmartMedia card must be empty before trying to
backup data. You can use FTP to copy and delete an existing default.dat file.

Cancel – Cancel the Backup/Restore function.

Current Status of Backup.
Possible values: Completed successfully, Not completed.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

10-13

Operation
916 IP Configuration

916 IP Configuration
Prerequisite Program: None

This program displays Network Communication IP address configuration. This program applies to the
Strata CTX Network (NIC) jack connection only. It does not apply to the CTX maintenance modem. To
change TCP/IP settings see “Step 2B: Set Up IP Address of CTX NIC” on page 3-7.
1. From the Program Menu, click Operation >
IP Configuration.
2. The following Strata CTX default address
displays:
• IP Address – a.b.c.d
where a.b.c.d = 0~255. This IP Address is
for the NIC/Ethernet only. (default =
192.168.254.253).
• 192.168.255.254 is the Strata CTX
modem fixed IP address for Dial-up
connections. Do not enter this IP address
on this screen.
• Subnet Mask – e.f.g.h
where e.f.g.h = 0~255 (default =
255.255.255.0). Octet “h” in SubNet
Mask cannot be the same as octet “d” in
the IP address.
• Default Gateway (default = 0.0.0.0).
3. Select another program from the Program Menu.

10-14

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
FTP User Accounts

FTP User Accounts
Prerequisite Program: None

This program establishes up to four FTP users for the built-in Strata CTX FTP server function located on
the Strata CTX processor. These Strata CTX FTP accounts allow FTP access to the Strata CTX
SmartMedia card. This allows administration of the Strata CTX SmartMedia folders and files.
1. From the Program Menu, click Operation >
FTP User Account.
2. Select the FTP Index. Up to four FTP Users
can be established.
3. Assign the FTP User’s Account Name.
4. Assign the FTP User a Password.
5. Enter the default folder that this FTP account
is to access. This should be /0/ which is the
root folder of the Strata CTX SmartMedia
card.
6. Click Submit.
Note FTP User Accounts are stored in memory

on the Strata CTX processor and are
intentionally deleted for security when the
Strata CTX is powered off/on or initialized.

Operation

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

10-15

Operation
File Information

File Information
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to view lists of Alarm and Administration files stored on the Strata CTX
SmartMedia card. See “908 SmartMedia” on page 10-4 for more information about these files.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > File Information.
2. Select from one of the following
options
...or click List to see a summary list
of Files already programmed into
the system. View the file name
index, number, name, and creation
and modification dates under each
of the categories listed below.
• Error Alarm Files.
• Error Alarm Expansion Files.
• SNMP Administrator Files
(CTX WinAdmin log).
• DKT Administrator Files
(Programming telephone log).
Note For a detailed description on Trace function go to “Trace Function” on page 14-8.

10-16

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
Community Name

Community Name
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to create and set up a Community Name (or passwords) to allow access to
specific Strata CTX systems.
1. From the Program Menu, click Operation >
Community Name.
2. Select the Index Number to assign to the
Community or click one of the following
buttons:
• Remove – highlight an existing community
from the table and click this button to
remove the selected community from the
index.
• Modify – highlight an existing community
from the table and click this button to
modify the IP Address, Privileges and
Administrator Level settings for this
community.
3. Enter the remaining fields.
4. Click Submit.
DESCRIPTION

Community Name

Enter the Community name. The Community Name is a password that is stored in
the Strata CTX. To communicate with a Strata CTX, the CTX WinAdmin PC must
send a legal community name to the CTX when attempting to connect. The default
community name stored in the CTX is communityName (case sensitive). The Strata
CTX can store up to 10 community names.

IP Address

Enter the IP Address of the Community Name. Each community name is associated
with an IP Address. This IP address is stored in the CTX with its associated
community name.

Operation

FIELD

Possible values: a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255
Notes
• To allow any CTX WinAdmin PC to connect to the Strata CTX with a particular
community name, enter as the IP address for that Community Name.

•

Privileges

To allow only a specific CTX WinAdmin PC to connect to the CTX with a
particular community name, enter the static IP address of that PC for that
community name.

Select User Privilege Levels. These privileges are to assign the community name or
IP address to an internal Strata CTX level.
Possible values: Read (default) or Write
Note

Read – The user cannot modify Strata CTX data regardless of the CTX
WinAdmin User level 1~4.
Write – The user can modify Strata CTX data according to the CTX
WinAdmin user level 1~4.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

10-17

Operation
909 MAC Address

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Administrator Level

Select Administrator Level. This level is to assign the community name or IP
address to an internal Strata CTX access level.
Possible values: Super User (default) or Ordinary User
Notes
• Super User – Strata CTX allows the user access to all Strata CTX commands.
Super Users can only view ordinary user community names and their own
community name but not other Super User community names.
• Ordinary User – Strata CTX allows the user access to all Strata CTX programs
except 900 Initialization/Restart and 911 Update. Ordinary users can only view
their own community name.

909 MAC Address
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to view the Media Access Control (MAC) Address assigned to your Strata CTX
System processor PCB. The MAC address is a unique serial number that is electronically coded in the
CTX processor memory at the factory – it cannot be changed. The MAC Address is also printed on the
back of the processor card that is used for the CTX670 (Processor Part Number BBCU1A) and CTX100
(Processor Part Number ACTU1A). A MAC Address must be converted to the applicable serial number
utilized in Internet FYI for License code generation.
1. From the Program Menu, click Operation >
MAC Address.
2. Review your system serial number.
Note The serial number is printed on the

invoice and bar code of the product
shipment.
3. MAC Address displays as shown to the
right. AABBCCDDEEFF = 0~9, A~F
(Hexadecimal values).
4. Click another program from the Program
Menu.

10-18

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
Trap Destinations

Trap Destinations
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to setup Trap IPs.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Trap IP Setup.
2. Select a Trap IP Index number or
click Add to add a Trap IP index.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Community Name

Enter the Name of the Community.
Possible values: Alpha characters (default = no value).

IP Address

Enter the IP Address for remote connection.
Possible values: a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255

Operation

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

10-19

Operation
License Control

License Control
Program Number(s): 913 and 914

The following programs enable you to issue and maintain License Activation settings for CTX WinAdmin
users.
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to issue new licenses.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > License Control.
2. Issue a License by cutting and pasting
or manually entering the 60-character
string in the License Code text box.
Note If you are not adding the License

Code to CTX WinAdmin
immediately, copy and save the code
onto a disk. Save code in Notepad
using Fixedsys font.
3. Click one of the following buttons:
• Issue – to issue the License Code.
• Cancel Issue – to cancel the License
Code issue.
4. Activate the License entered above by selecting the delay timer.
5. Click one of the following buttons:
• Activate – for license activation.
• Cancel Activate – to cancel license activation.
Note Cancel Issue (step 3) and Cancel Activate buttons work only in Standby mode.

License Issue
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables System Administrators to issue Licenses for CTX WinAdmin users.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Status

Status applies to both License issue and License Activate. Displays Licensing
Status.
Possible values: Not yet, Issue Stand by, Issue Finished, Cancel Issue, Activate
Stand by, Activate Finished or Cancel Activate

License Code

Cut and paste the License code text string or manually enter the License Code (six
characters per box).
Possible values: 60 characters.
Note

10-20

The License Code will have to be generated from Toshiba’s FYI website
(http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com). After obtaining the License code from FYI save
it as a Text file. Cut and paste the License code obtained from Toshiba’s
FYI website. The License Code is made up of the MAC Address and the
number of ports. The License Code that is generated for a particular MAC
Address is only good for the processor that contains that MAC Address.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Operation
License Information

License Activate
Prerequisite Program: 913 above

This program enables activation of CTX WinAdmin licenses issued in Program 913.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Delay Timer

Select Activation Delay Timer in hours.
Possible values: 0~24 (default = 0)
Notes
Enter 0 to issue or activate the license immediately or 1~24 to set the automatic
delay activation feature, where 1 = 1 hour delay; 2 = 2 hour delay, etc.

•
•

After the license is activated, use the License Information screen below to check
that all Ports and features have been activated properly.

License Information
The following programs enable you to set up Licensing details for CTX WinAdmin users.
Prerequisite Program: None

1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > License Information.
2. View Licensing details for this
Strata CTX account.
This view is read-only
information.
Operation

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

CTX Release Number

This is the Basic Release Number of CTX software. To view the Active Software
Version, go to Operations/System Setup.

Number of Serial
Ports

This identifies the number of serial ports licensed on the BSIS.
One license is needed for each SMDR and SMDI device connected to BSIS.
(Programs 803 and 804 assigns BSIS ports).

StrataNet QSIG
Networking

This license must be enabled on each CTX in a QSIG Network.

System Type

This identifies the type of CTX system to which CTX WinAdmin is currently
connected.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

10-21

Operation
License Information

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Number Of Attendant
Consoles

This identifies the number of Attendant Consoles licensed. One license
is required for each Attendant Console. A CTI Session License is also
required for each Attendant Console (see Number of CTI Sessions).

Processor\Cabinet
Configuration

This identifies the CTX Processor hardware size
Small: ACTU, supports CTX100 Base + Expansion cabinet and CTX670.
ACTU2A-S, supports the CTX100-S.
BBCU\BECU without BBMS\BEXS, supports CTX670 Base + one Expansion
cabinet.
Large CTX670: BBCU\BECU with BBMS\BEXS, supports CTX670 Base + six
Expansion cabinets

Number Of DTMF
Receivers

This identifies the number of DTMF receivers licensed. The ARCS
Subassembly is required on the CTX100 processor, no additional hardware
is required for CTX670.

Number of Ports

This identifies the number of Line circuits, Station circuits and ISDN B channels
licensed.
Station circuits use a license only when a PDN, DDS, BATI or Door Phone is
assigned to the circuit.
Analog and T1 line circuits use a license only when a line number is assigned to the
circuit or B-channel.
ISDN B-Channels use a license when assigned in PRI and BRI assignments.

Number of CTI
Sessions

10-22

This identifies the number of licensed CTI sessions. Each Attendant Console, the
ACD or OAISYS Sever and each third party CTI application requires one CTI
session license. (Command 803 assigns CTI sessions).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Maintenance

This chapter discusses CTX WinAdmin’s maintenance functions.

Quality Of Service
Note This program is not available at this time.

This program enables you to collect information measurement of the call via IP Telephone by a specific IP
Station.
There are five call records can be collected by each request.
➤ From the Program Menu, click

Maintenance > Quality of
Service. The Quality of Service
screen displays (shown right)

To analyze Strata CTX problems efficiently, Toshiba needs to get the event trace data and ISDN trace data.
These data sets enable analysis of the problems Strata CTX may experience. It is helpful for
troubleshooting problems that are difficult to duplicate.

Maintenance

Trace Function

Please contact Toshiba Technical Support to coordinate the running of the procedures that appear in this
section. Technical Support will walk you through the required steps.

Trace Data
By running traces when tests are conducted on your Strata CTX system, you ensure that data are being kept
in the event your system encounters a problem. This data can be sent to Toshiba Tech Support for analysis
and troubleshooting.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

11-1

Maintenance
Trace Function

Strata CTX can collect the following trace data:

• Error Log (including crash dump)
• Event Trace
• ISDN L3 trace
Event traces can be performed by running Program 903 “Event Trace Control” on page 11-3, through
Program 908 “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103.
Error Log

When Strata CTX detects an error, the information is stored automatically without executing a program.
However, if the system locks up, you must restart the system to save the data to SmartMedia.
Start/Stop/Store Trace Data

Whenever you execute a test, start recording the trace data by enabling the Event Trace Control (Program
903). See page 11-3. If you use ISDN extensions or trunks, please record ISDN trace data by starting “904
ISDN Trace Location” on page 11-4.
➤ To test and retrieve trace data
Note This procedure requires use of optional SmartMedia reading hardware and software or FTP

management with a personal computer. See “908 SmartMedia” on page 10-4.
1. Start your test. If a problem occurs, stop the trace (please refer to the Event Trace Control and 904
ISDN Trace Location program instructions in this manual).
2. Verify the results by running the same test(s) again. If the problem can be duplicated the information
contained in the trace data becomes more useful.
3. Unmount data to SmartMedia using “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103.
4. Remove the SmartMedia card from Strata CTX. Use caution. The SmartMedia device can be damaged
if removed incorrectly.
5. Insert the SmartMedia card into your SmartMedia reader.
6. Locate the Evnttrce folder and save all files ending with .sdt and .mdt to your PCs hard drive.
7. Locate the Crash Dump in the errlog folder. File extensions are .exp and .mnl and append to your hard
drive.
8. E-mail the files to your Toshiba support person.
If you start recording trace data after a problem occurs, the previous data is overwritten. Make sure the
required data files are stored to SmartMedia and saved to disk prior to starting another trace.
The following table shows you how much SmartMedia card memory is allocated to each directory. System
traffic load will determine how much data is stored in the Evnttrace log.
Table 11-1

SmartMedia card file allocation size in Mega Bytes

SmartMedia Type

16MB

32MB

64MB

128MB

2MB

4MB

8MB

24MB

Evnttrce

4MB

12MB

32MB

64MB

Admlog

2MB

8MB

16MB

32MB

Progdata

8MB

Program

0MB

16MB

32MB

64MB

128MB

Errlog

Total

11-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Maintenance
Event Trace Control

Event Trace Control
Program Number(s): 903, 904, 905 and 906
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to trace message events occurring in Strata CTX. Program Numbers 903, 904,
905 and 906 are consolidated in one CTX WinAdmin screen (shown below).
1. Install the SmartMedia Card into the
designated slot of the Strata CTX
processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Maintenance > Event Trace Control.
3. Enter Program 903 data.
4. Enter Program 904 data
5. Enter Program 905 data.
6. Enter Program 906 data.
7. Trace data displays in the dialog
boxes.

903 Start/Stop Trace
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Start/Stop Trace

Click in the appropriate button to Start or Stop Message Trace. Start Trace
indicates that the system’s trace data collection process has begun. Stop indicates
the trace data collection process is terminated
Before removing the SmartMedia card run Program 908. See “908 SmartMedia” on
page 10-4.
Possible values: Start Trace or Stop Trace (default)

Size

Set the trace data size. Toshiba recommends leaving this parameter at the default
setting which provides approximately 15 minutes of trace data.

Category

Select Trace data type to be stored.
Possible values: Call Processing, Maintenance, and Call Processing and
Maintenance (default)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Maintenance

Possible values: 1~256 bytes with 1 unit = 16 bytes (default = 2)

11-3

Maintenance
Event Trace Control

904 ISDN Trace Location
ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions are established using this program.
Note This trace can be performed on BSU and PTU cards only.
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Cabinet/Slot/Port

Enter the Equipment Location to be traced (xxyyzz).
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~04

Trace Kind

Select the trace collection level.
Possible values: LLCI Trace, Layer 2, Layer 2 & Layer 3 Trace, State Transitions
Trace, ERRORS Trace, Layer 2 Trace.

Trace Level

Select the extent to which the trace collects information.
Possible values: No Trace (default), Brief or Extensive

905 All ISDN Trunk Trace Selection
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Trace all ISDN Trunks

Select whether to trace all ISDN PRI and BRI trunks.
Possible values: On (default) or Off

906 Change Trace Side
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Trace side

Select Trace side change.
Possible values: Message Trace (default), ISDN Trace or Both

11-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Maintenance
Error Alarm Log

Error Alarm Log
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to trace errors and alarms in Strata CTX.
1. Install the SmartMedia Card into
the designated slot of the Strata
CTX processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Maintenance > Error/
Alarm Logs.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Start Date

Enter the date (YYMMDD) and time (hhmmss) on which to start the log.
Possible values: YY = Year, MM = Month and DD = day (default = no value)
hh = Hour, mm = Minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value)

End Date

Enter the date and time on which to end the log.
Possible values: YY = Year, MM = Month and DD = day (default = no value)
hh = Hour, mm = Minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value)

Start Rank Code

Prioritize by selecting a Rank Code.
Possible values: 1~99 (default = no value)

End Rank Code

Organize by selecting an End Rank Code.
Possible values: 1~99 (default = no value)
This field logs the number of error codes.
Possible values: 0~9999999999 (default = 0)

Org. Code

This field reflects the Error origination code.

Maintenance

Error Code

Possible values: 1~10 (default = no value)
Search Number

Displays the search sequence.
Possible values: 1~1000 (default = 0)

Search Result Number

This field displays the Search result number.
Possible values: 1 or 2 (default = no value)

Normal Log

This field displays the log information.

Expand Log

This field displays details of the logged data.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

11-5

Maintenance
907 System Admin Log

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Search Result

Search results are displayed in this field.

907 System Admin Log
Prerequisite Program: None

Use this command to Start/Stop the System Admin Log. When running this program, make sure to insert
the SmartMedia card into the appropriate slot.
1. Insert the SmartMedia Card into the
designated slot of the Strata CTX processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click Maintenance
> System Admin Log.
3. Click to Start or Stop the System Admin
Log.
4. Click the Checking System Admin Log
Completion Status button to view progress
of this operation.
Note When CTX670 stops logging data, it

automatically sends data to the
SmartMedia card. Run the Unmount
command (Program 908) before
removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data transfer.

Memory Access Operation
Prerequisite Program: None

This program enables you to manipulate memory settings.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Maintenance > Memory Access.
2. Click the Read Memory or Write
Memory button to access memory.
3. Enter the memory Address to be
accessed.
4. Select size of memory to access (1~256,
default = no value).
5. Click one of the following buttons:
• New – click this button to create a
new Memory Access filename.
• Open – click this button to open an
existing Memory Access file.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click Save to save Memory Access file.
Note The Content box displays the contents of the memory address selected.

11-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Maintenance
Components

Components
Prerequisite Program: None

The following programs enable you to monitor the status of individual Strata CTX slots and ports.
This is the main system slot/port monitor. The Components screen allows each cabinet card slot and each
card slot port to be monitored, enabled or disabled. The card slot and port failure codes are provided in the
Table below.
➤ From the Program Menu, click

Maintenance > Components >
Cabinets 1~7.

Auto Fault Detection/Disable

When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or line, the Strata CTX system will make
them busy. In this case the Strata CTX system will automatically disable the card slot or card port (circuit
or channel). The Component Status/Control screen will indicate the card or port failure status with
“Disabled by Fault xx” where xx is the status code in the table below. When a digital telephone is disabled
the telephone’s LCD will display “Make Busy”. The station or line PCB can be disabled temporarily to
perform maintenance or parts replacements as well.
Note The port or slot to which your programming phone is connected cannot be set to Make Busy.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Maintenance

The table on the next page states the possible error codes that can be displayed in the Status column of the
Main Components screen shown above.

11-7

Maintenance
Components

Table 11-2Status Column Error Codes
Component Type

Status Code

Description

Expansion Cabinet

Cabinet power failure

Line/Station/Option PCB

Card PCB set in Program 100, but not installed

Port (ISDN)

ISDN loss of signal

Port (ISDN)

ISDN frame sync failure

Port (ISDN)

ISDN AIS

Port (ISDN-U)

ISDN-U maintenance mode

Port (ISDN-U)

ISDN-U Eoc maintenance mode

Port (ISDN-U)

ISDN-U Act

Port (ISDN-U)

ISDN-U aib

Port (T1)

T1 Yellow alarm

Port (T1)

T1 Blue alarm

Port (T1)

T1 Frame sync. failure

Port (DKT)

Digital Telephone not connected.

Manual Disable/Enable

The components screen enables you to enable or disable any card slot or port.
• When disabled by Disable or Forced Disable, line or stations are made busy and the status will display
“disable by cmd” on the screen. On the telephone LCD, it will display “Make busy.”
• Disable will disable an idle port or slot and cause ports/slots that are in use to go to Pending Disable
– which go to Make Busy after they go idle. Disable waits till a call clears to disable it.
• Forced Disable will disable an idle port or a port that is in-use (the call will be disconnected).
• Enable – removes the Make Busy condition if the slot or port is manually disabled.
Note You cannot enable a slot or port if the system automatically disabled it. The status on the screen will

display “Disabled by Fault.”

11-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Tools and Profile

This chapter discusses Tools and Profile to customize and manage your Strata CTX System.

Tools
The download tool provided in CTX WinAdmin enables you to download databases stored in system
memory into a CTX WinAdmin folder named “Download”. These downloaded databases can then be
viewed in your PC to check for errors or other anomalies. The downloaded commands are saved as files on
the C: drive or on whichever drive Strata CTX WinAdmin is installed, in this path:
CTX\WinAdmin\ctmc\ctm c_Local\DownLoad. They may be opened and viewed using Excel, Word or
some other application.

Download
Prerequisite Program: None

1. From the Program Menu, click
Tools > Download.
2. A list of all CTX WinAdmin
programs displays as shown to
the right.
3. Click on the program to be
downloaded. Selected
programs are highlighted in
green and the word “Selected”
displays to the right as shown
in the figure to the right. The
following buttons are also
available:
• Clear All – click this button
to clear all previously
selected files.
• Select All – click this button
to select all programs for downloading.
4. Click the Start Downloading button in the top right corner of the display.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

Tools and Profile

5. The system notifies you when the download is complete.

12-1

Tools and Profile
Profile

Profile
The Programs included in the Profile menu enables you to change GUI display settings in CTX WinAdmin
and change the system IP Address.

Customize
Prerequisite Program: None

Customize the look and feel of CTX WinAdmin using this program.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Profile > Customize.
2. Select your customized settings.
3. Click Save Changes.

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

ASP Idle Time

CTX WinAdmin is designed to automatically log off any inactive users after the time
set in this field.
Possible values: Maximum = 999 minutes (Default = 120 minutes)
Note

Back Ground Color

Set the ASP Idle time to 999 when using long CTX WinAdmin sessions in a
secure environment.

Select the background Color from the scroll down menu.
Possible values: Aqua, Yellow, Sky Blue, Light Sky Blue, Light Blue, Medium
Spring Green, Light Green, Powder Blue, Light Goldenrod Yellow
(default), Misty Rose, Lavender.

Group Name Color

Select the color in which to display the Group Name (see figure above).
Possible values: Black, White, Dim Grey (default), Red, Dark Red, Blue, Indigo,
Navy, Purple, Maroon, Teal, Fuchsin, Dark Green.

Label Color

Select the color with which to display the field name text.
Possible values: Black (default), White, Dim Grey, Red, Dark Red, Blue, Indigo,
Navy, Purple, Maroon, Teal, Fuchsin, Dark Green.

User Management
For information on User Management, refer to Chapter 2 “User Management” on page 3-19.

12-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 2: CTX WinAdmin Programming 11/03

726+,%$

Telecommunication Systems Division

Digital Business Telephone Systems

Part 3: Telephone Button Programming

November 2003

Telephone Button
Programming

Telephone Button Programming

This chapter discusses the button programming interface provided with Strata CTX. This chapter also
includes Button Programming examples, procedures, and tables to program 100~800 series programs. This
chapter has tables that list programs sequentially by program number. Tables found below a program table
contain required information for the above program.
Important!

If you do not program button sequences correctly, the DKT LCD will display an error code.
Refer to Appendix B – System Error Codes.

Record Sheet Overview
Fill out the Appendix D – Record Sheets (see Figure 13-1 as an example), then enter this data using a
20-button LCD digital (DKT) telephone.

Station

Record Sheet
Provides a list of
available features. The
sheet is used to record
the assignment of
features or the operation
of each program. Each
sheet provides space to
record data. This data
will be referred to when
programming the
system.

Assignment

DKT Parameters Record Sheet
PDN: _____________________
Station Type

Ext. Ring Repeat

Continuous DTMF

Ring Over Busy Cycles

Key Strip Pattern

Not Used

Display Language

Attd. Overflow Dest.

Key Strip Type

Ringing Line Preference

Adapter

Trunk Test and Verify

Add-on Modules

Off-hook Preference

Blind Transfer

Auto Line Hold

Tone/Voice First

Ringing Preference.

Mail Box Selection

OCA Type

Text Message Display

MIC Init. Value

Handsfree MIC

BETA
Call History Memory

Handsfree Tone

DTMF Back Tone

Speaker Mode Tones

Station Type

Ext. Ring Repeat

Continuous DTMF

Ring Over Busy Cycles

Key Strip Pattern

Not Used

Display Language

Attd. Overflow Dest.

Key Strip Type

Ringing Line Preference

Microphone

PDN: _____________________

Adapter

Trunk Test and Verify

Add-on Modules

Off-hook Preference

Blind Transfer

Auto Line Hold

Tone/Voice First

Ringing Preference.

Mail Box Selection

OCA Type

Text Message Display

MIC Init. Value

Handsfree MIC

Call History Memory

Microphone

Handsfree Tone

DTMF Back Tone

Speaker Mode Tones

Station Type

Ext. Ring Repeat

Continuous DTMF

Ring Over Busy Cycles

Key Strip Pattern

Not Used

Display Language

Attd. Overflow Dest.

PDN: _____________________

Key Strip Type

Ringing Line Preference

Adapter

Trunk Test and Verify

Add-on Modules

Off-hook Preference

Blind Transfer

Auto Line Hold

Tone/Voice First

Ringing Preference.

Mail Box Selection

OCA Type

Text Message Display

MIC Init. Value

Handsfree MIC

Call History Memory

Microphone

Handsfree Tone

DTMF Back Tone

Speaker Mode Tones

Station Type

Ext. Ring Repeat

Continuous DTMF

Ring Over Busy Cycles

Key Strip Pattern

Not Used

Display Language

Attd. Overflow Dest.

PDN: _____________________

6378

Figure 13-1 System Record Sheet Sample

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-1

Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview

Telephone Button Overview
Strata CTX programmers can access programming mode from any DKT LCD telephone, except DKTs
connected to an RDSU. A 20-button telephone (shown below) is required to ensure full access to all
programming parameters. The telephone button programming interface enables limited programming
capabilities over ranges of stations or trunks.
Note Telephones connected to an RDSU cannot be used to program Strata CTX.

Figure 13-2 shows the telephone button pad for the DKT3020-series digital telephone or IPT1020-SD.

FB buttons for 20-button phones
IPT1020-SD, DKT3020-S, DKT3020-SD

Mode

Page

Scroll

Feature

FB buttons for
10-button phones
DKT3010-S, DKT3010-SD

FB10

FB20

FB10

FB09

FB19

FB09

FB08

FB18

FB08

FB07

FB17

FB07

FB06

FB16

FB06

FB05

FB15

FB05

FB04

FB14

FB04

FB03

FB13

FB03

FB02

FB12

FB02

FB01

FB11

FB01

Msg

Spdial

Mic

Redial

Spkr

Cnf/Trn

Vol

Hold
6929

Figure 13-2 DKT3010/3020 and IPT1020-SD Button Telephones

13-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview

Telephone Button Commands
Telephone Button
Programming

1. Use the following buttons to execute the commands:
• +ROG – Enter.
• 3DJH/6FUROO – Scroll up or down.
• 6SNU – This delimiter moves cursors between sub-parameter values.
• 9RO▲ – Escape. 9RO▲ displays as
sequences.

on the LCD. Press 9RO▲ to program or

in dialing

• 9RO▼ – Back space for line editing.
• +ROG – Cancel.
•

– Use this button between values to specify a range of objects to be programmed (e.g., 1001*1005
enables programming of stations 1001 through 1005).

•

– Use this button between values to specify a set of objects to be programmed (e.g.,
1001**1005**1012 enables programming of stations 1001, 1005 and 1012).

• Off-hook – lift and replace the handset to immediately exit programming mode.
2. Keep the following in mind as you maneuver through Strata CTX programs.
• Default and/or current settings are displayed on the telephone LCD with an asterisk.
• Some Strata CTX Programs have more than 20 programmable parameters. To toggle from
parameters )%~)% and )%~)% press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button after entering Program
Mode.
• To view parameter options on your telephone LCD, press the desired )% button and press the 6FUROO
or 3DJH button.
• Each parameter shows a number to the left (e.g., 2:DISABLE). Program the desired parameter by
pressing the number button (in this example ) that corresponds to your desired parameter.
• To enter data, use the number keys.
• To submit your program entry press +ROG. To confirm a submitted entry, press +ROG again.
• To exit a program press +ROG.
• To enter the character in your data string press the 9RO▲ and the button simultaneously. An
sign appears in your LCD. Press the button, then enter the remaining data.
• If you get an error code, press +ROG (twice) to continue programming. See “System Error Codes” on
page B-1 for error code details.
Programming Parameters

Programs can have between one and 40 programmable parameters, each represented by the )%QQbuttons.
The LEDs light up for each )%QQ button that features a programmable parameter. Each parameter is
programmed by entering values into the LCD from the telephone button pad.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press the appropriate )%QQ button.
2. Enter the appropriate value from the telephone button pad using the Parameter Fields tables supplied
with each program.
3. Press +ROG to submit.
4. Press another )%QQ button to program more parameters
...or press +ROG again to program.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-3

Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview

Programming Sub-parameters

Some commands enable programming of Sub-parameters to further refine Strata CTX settings. Internet or
Network IP addresses are entered using sub-parameter data. IP addresses are displayed as four three-digit
values, or Octets, separated by “periods” (e.g., 192.168.255.253). Your programming telephone’s LCD
is only capable of displaying the IP information three digits, or one Octet, at a time.
For example, selecting )% in Program 916 displays the first Octet, 192, on the LCD. To view or change
the next Octet (in this example 168) in the IP Address, press the 6SNU button. Pressing 6SNU again,
displays the following Octet (in this example 255).
The following is an example from Program 200, )%. )% is broken down into three sub-parameters as
follows COS DAY1, COS DAY2 and COS NIGHT.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press )%.
2. At the COS DAY1= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
3. Press 6SNU.
4. At the COS DAY2= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
5. Press 6SNU.
6. At the COS NIGHT= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
7. Press +ROG to submit.
8. Press another )%QQ button to program more parameters
...or press +ROG again to program a new DN.
Note To change one of the sub-parameters, you must proceed through all three sub-parameters before

pressing +ROG. For example, to change the value of COS DAY1, you must change the COS DAY1
value, then press 6SNU twice, and finally, press +ROG.

13-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Examples

Button Programming Examples
Telephone Button
Programming

The following examples show you how to use the Strata CTX button programming interface. Toshiba
highly recommends the use of Strata CTX WinAdmin to meet the demands of your telephone system
programming.
Suppose a customer needed to assign a DKT Station to a PDN. Based on the “Identify Program
Sequences” on page 1-12, you can immediately identify the Program numbers and sequence required to
complete this basic task. Login to the Button Programming Mode using the directions on Page -7 and
follow the steps below.

Program 100
Reference “Program 100” on page 11. For this example, an eight station BDKU PCB is assigned to
Slot 01/Cabinet 01 (xxyy).
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
3. At the EQUIP= prompt enter (xxyy) and press +ROG.
“Program 100” on page 11 tells us that a three digit PCB code (nnn) is required. From the table, “PCB
Codes” on page 13-12, we can derive that the PCB code for a BDKU is “017.” Furthermore, the
“Program 100” table shows us the button sequence required for programming a BDKU in the fourth
row of the table.
4. Press )%. Enter and press +ROG.
“Program 100” on page 11 also informs us that an “n” value is required to complete the PCB
assignment. These “n” values are listed in the column titled “Value(s).” When you look in the fourth
row of the “Value(s)” column there are five “n” value choices. For this example, select “2. 8 DKT no
OCA.”
5. Press )%. Enter and press +ROG twice.
6. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.

Program 200
Reference “200 Series Programs” on page 13-28. A DKT assignment (DN = 1000) is made to Circuit 01,
Slot 01, and Cabinet 01 for the BDKU card installed in Step 1 above.
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
3. At the DN= prompt enter (n) and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. At the EQUIP= prompt enter (xxyyzz) and press +ROG.
5. Press )%. Press to select a DKT and press +ROG.
6. Press )%. Press to select Extension as the Circuit Type and press +ROG.
For this example, only the above )%s need to be assigned. Press +ROG again before proceeding to the
next step.
7. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Note Additional assignments can be made to fine tune this DKT assignment. If specific assignments are

not made, the system automatically assigns the default value.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-5

Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Examples

Program 204
Reference “Program 204” on page 34 and review Summary column field descriptions. This program
enables you to setup the DKT parameters.
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
3. At the DN= prompt enter (n) and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. Press to select a Extension and press +ROG.
5. Press )%. Press to select Pattern 3 for this DKT and press +ROG.
For this example, we are using a 20-button DKT. There are three button patterns to choose from for
each type of digital telephone.
Only the above )%s need to be assigned. Press +ROG again before proceeding to the next step.
6. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Note Additional assignments can be made to fine tune DKT parameters. See Summary column for field

descriptions and default values. If specific assignments are not made, the system automatically
assigns the default value.

Program 205
Reference “Program 205” on page 38 and “Feature/Button Code Parameter Assignments” on page 13-40.
This program assigns features and parameters to the FB buttons on your DKT telephone. In this example,
the )% button on your DKT will be programmed to act as a GCO button.
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
3. At the DN= prompt enter (n) and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. Enter to assign a GCO and press 6SNU.
To select the n1, n2, n3, n4 and n5 values required in “Program 205” on page 38, see “GCO” in the
table titled “Feature/Button Code Parameter Assignments” on page 13-40.
5. Enter to assign a GCO number and press 6SNU.
6. Enter to assign a GCO index and press 6SNU.
7. Enter to enable immediate ringing for this GCO and press 6SNU.
8. Enter to assign a soft ring tone to this GCO and press 6SNU.
9. Enter to assign an Owner DN to this GCO number and press +ROG twice.
10.Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Note Press +ROG again to exit Button Programming Mode.

Program 208
Reference “Program 208” on page 45. This program assigns timing parameters to Primary DNs.
1. Enter programming mode. See “Step 1: Enter Program Mode on page 13-7."
2. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
3. At the DN= prompt enter (n) and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. Press to set the number of ABR attempts and press +ROG.

13-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Procedure

5. Press )%. Press to set ABR to attempt redials in 60 second increments and press +ROG.
Telephone Button
Programming

6. Press )%. Press to set the ABR Recall Timer and press +ROG.
7. Press )%. Press to set the Hold Recall Timer and press +ROG.
8. Press )%. Press to set the First Interdigit Timer and press +ROG.
9. Press )%. Press to set the Second Interdigit Timer and press +ROG.
10.Press )%. Press to set the Ring Transfer No Answer Timer and press +ROG twice.
11. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Now that you are more familiar with the Strata CTX button programming interface, begin programming
your Strata CTX system starting with Step 1 below.

Button Programming Procedure
Step 1: Enter Program Mode
Enter the button sequence displayed below to enter the CTX670 programming interface from a DKT
station.
1. Log in by pressing: +ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
2. At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter your password. Default is .
3. Press+ROG.

Step 2: Enter Program Number
1. At the PROG= prompt enter the three digit program code (e.g., ) and press +ROG.
2. Programmable parameters are identified by the FB LEDs that are illuminated on the DKT. Go to
“Choose a Button Sequence” on page 13-7 Press on the related )%QQ button to program a parameter.
...or if there are no illuminated FB LEDs, continue to Step 3.

Step 3: Enter FB00 Parameters
)%

parameters designate a specific station, trunk, or circuit to be programmed. The )% prompt (e.g.,

EQUIP=, DN=, INDEX=, etc.) appears automatically in the LCD screen.

1. At the )% prompt, enter the desired value using the telephone number pad.
2. Press +ROG.

Step 4: Choose a Button Sequence
➤ Select the button sequences based on the programs required for programming the Strata CTX from the

Telephone. For 100~900 series programs, refer to pages 11~96.
Program Listings

This table is a list of programs found in this chapter.
Program
Number

Program Name

100

Card Slot Assignment

102

Flexible Access Codes

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-7

Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Procedure

Program
Number
103

13-8

Program Name
Class of Service

104

System Timers

105

System Parameters

106

Day/Night Mode Day of Week Mapping

107

PAD Table Assignment

108

PAD Group Assignment

109

Music on Hold

110

Password Assignment

111

Destination Restriction Level

112

Day/Night Mode Calendar

113

Day/Night Mode Daily Schedule

114

PAD Conference Table Assignment

115

Advisory Messages

116

Data Initialize

117

Public Dial Plan Digit

200

Station Data

201

Station Delete

202

ISDN BRI Station

203

Change DN

204

DKT Parameters

205

DKT Feature Keys

206

Phantom DNs

207

One Touch Assignment

208

Station Timer Assignments

209

Hunting Group Assignments

210

Group Call Pickup

213

ADM Feature Keys

214

DSS Console Assignment

215

DSS Feature Keys

216

Emergency Ringdown Assignment

217

ISDN Station Data

218

Station Hunt Group Assignment (Member Assignments)

300

Trunk Assignment

301

Trunk Delete

302

PRI Trunks

303

ISDN Trunk Delete

304

Incoming Line Group Assignment

305

ILG Delete

306

Outgoing Line Group Assignment

307

OLG Delete

308

Trunk Timers

309

Direct Inward Dialing

310

DIT Assignment

311

MOH Source

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Procedure

Program Name

312

DID Delete

313

Caller ID Assignment

315

T1 Trunk Card

316

Shared D Channel

317

ISDN BRI Trunk

318

DID Intercept Assignment

319

Intercept Treatment

320

B Channel Position ISDN Primary Trunk

321

Calling Number Identification

322

ISDN Calling Number Table

323

Call by Call Service

324

CBC Time Zones

400

Emergency Call Destination Assignment

404

Attendant Group Assignment

500

System Call Forward Assignment

501

System Speed Dial Assignment

502

Terminal Paging Group Assignment

503

Paging Devices Group Assignment

504

System Call Forward Operation Status

506

Verified Account Codes

507

Door Phone Assignment

508

Door Lock Control Assignment

509

DR Override by System Speed Dial

510

COS Override Assignment

512

SMDR for System Assignment

513

SMDR for ILG Assignment

514

SMDR for OLG Assignment

515

View BIOU Control Relay Assignment

516

Station Speed Dial

520

LCR Local Route Plan

521

LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment

522

LCR Exception Number Route Plans

523

LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignment

524

Route Table to Route Definition Assignment

525

LCR Route Definition Assignment

526

Modified Digits Table Assignment

527

LCR Holiday Table Assignment

528

LCR Public Day of Week Mapping Table

529

LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment

530

DR LCR Screening Table Assignment

531

DR Screening Table for OLG

532

DR Table Allow/Deny Definition

533

DR Level Table Assignment

534

DRL Exception Table Assignment

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button
Programming

Program
Number

13-9

Telephone Button Programming
Button Programming Procedure

Program
Number
540

Program Name
Pilot DN Assignment

541

Pilot DN Delete

550

Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group Number

570

Account Code Digit Length

571

Exception Numbers for Forced Account Codes

573

Delete Door Phone

576

Door Phone Night Ring Over External Page

577

Caller History

579

System Voice Mail Data

580

Voice Mail Port Data

650

Behind Connection Assignment

651

Private Routing Plan Analysis Table Assignment

653

Private Route Choice Table Assignment

654

Private Route Definition Table Assignment

655

Private Digit Modification Table Assignment

656

Node ID Assignment

657

Network COS Mapping Table Assignment

658/659/660
801

Network DRL Mapping Tables
Network Jack LAN Device Assignment

803

IO Logical Device Assignment

804

RS232C Data Assignment

900

System Initialize

901

Display Version

902

Set Time and Date

903

Event Trace Control

904

ISDN Trace Location

905

All ISDN Trunk Trace

906

Event Trace Side Change

907

System Admin Log

908

Format/Unmount SmartMedia

909

MAC Address (System Serial Number)

910

Data Backup

911

Program Update

912

Make Busy Control

915

Regional Selection

916

IP Configuration

Programming Tables

The programming tables in this chapter appear sequentially, beginning with the 100 series programs and
ending with the 900 series programs. Tables immediately following a program table are provided for
reference. For example, the PCB Code table shown after the Program 100 table gives important PCB codes
needed in Program 100.

13-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-1
Button
100

Program 100
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Card Slot Assignment

, +ROG
100-00

Card Slot Assignment
xxyy, +ROG

100-01

100-02

PCB Type

Equipment Number

Assign one of the following:

)%, nnn, +ROG,
+ROG

PDKU/RDTU/RPTU
Options

nnn = 3 digit PCB Code. Valid
Codes: 017, 018

Assign one of the following:

BDKU/BDKA Options

)%, nnn, +ROG,
)%, n, +ROG,
+ROG

100-04

Cabinet: 01~02 (Basic
CTX670 and CTX100)
01~07 Expanded CTX670
Slot: 01~8 (CTX100)
01-10 (CTX670)

nnn = 3 digit PCB Code (See
table below). Valid Codes:
000, 001, 002, 005, 006,
009, 010, 011, 013.

)%, nnn, +ROG,
)%, n, +ROG,
+ROG
100-03

xx =
yy =

BRI TEI Options

)%, nnn, +ROG,
)%, n, +ROG,
+ROG

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

None
DKT no OCA or 8 Ch
DKT w/ OCA or 16 Ch
24 Ch (n/a for PDKU)
30 Ch (n/a for PDKU)

nnn = 3 digit PCB Code Valid
Codes: 003, 007, 014
n=

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

•
•

BIOU1 or BIOU2 Page/MOH/BGM Relay Control.
RSTU or PSTU w/ 8 standard phones.
All Analog CO Line OCBs.
BVPU with 4 VoIP circuits.
RBSU/RBSS with 4 BRI S/T interface.
Delete PCB
PDKU with OCA toggle
RDTU or RPTU, T1 or PRI Channel

Assign BDKU or BDKS

None
8 DKT no OCA
8 DKT w/ OCA
16 DKT no OCA
16 DKT w/ OCA

nnn = 3 digit PCB Code. Valid
Codes: 012, 013, 015, 016
n=

•
•
•
•
•
•

Telephone Button
Programming

100 Series Programs

Assign RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/RBSS.

None
8 DKT no OCA
8 DKT w/ OCA
16 DKT no OCA
16 DKT w/ OCA

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-11

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-2

PCB Codes

Code
000

None

001

COU

002

STU

003

DKU

Button

Circuit/Type

No Card or
Delete Card

n/a

RCOU

4 Loop Lines

RGLU2

8 Gnd./Loop Lines

RSTU2

8 Stations

PDKU2

8 Stations

RWIU

8 or 32 wireless

Code

PCB Type

Assigned
Name
REMU

Circuit/Type

011

EMU

012

BSU

RBSU

2 S/T interfaces

013

BSU_BSS

RBSU+RBSS

4 S/T interfaces

014

PTU

RPTU

8, 16 and 24 PRI Lines

BVPU

4 Circuits

004

Not used

n/a

015

BUU

RBUU

2 U Interfaces

005

8COU

RCIOU+RCOS

8 Loop CO Lines

016

BUU_BUS

RBUU+RBUS

4 U Interfaces

006

DDU

RDDU

4 DID Lines

017

NEW_DKU_8

BDKU1

8 Stations

007

DTU

RDTU2

8, 16, 24 and 30 channel
T1

018

NEW_DKU_16

BDKU1+BDKS1

16 Stations

008

DSU

RDSU

019

IOU1

BIOU

Page/MOH/BGM Relay

009

CIU

RCIU2

4 or 8 Circuit Caller ID

020

IOU2

BIOU

Page/MOH/BGM Relay

010

MCU

RMCU

2 or 4 E911 CAMA Lines

Table 13-3

102

Assigned
Name

PCB Type

4 Standard Ports
4 Digital Ports

Program 102
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Flexible Access Plan

Assigns feature access codes, individual line access codes and
outgoing line group (OLG) access codes to the Flexible Numbering
Plan.

, +ROG

Does not include PDNs, PhDNs, Pilot numbers, or Hunt Group pilot
numbers.
n=

Access Code
102-00

n, +ROG,

102-01

)%, nnn, +ROG

102-02

Up to 5-digit Flexible
Numbering Plan

Enter the digits to be dialed (0~9,#,*) to access a Feature or an
Outgoing Line Group (OLG).
To delete, select ‘ No Data‘ in ‘ 01 Feature Name‘ . Conflict with an
assigned DN will produce an error.

nnn = 3 digit Feature Code (551
should be selected for a
Flexible Numbering OLG)

)%, n1, +ROG, +ROG n1 =

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670
Expanded)

Select the Feature to which the access code is being assigned.
Note

To assign an access code to an Outgoing Line Group (OLG),
select “Line Group access code - one access code for each
OLG.” To assign the prefix digit(s) for the access code of
individual lines, select “Line access code - leading digit(s) to
access individual lines.” Example: If #7 is selected as the line
access prefix, the users will dial #7xxx to access an individual
line (where xxx is the line number).

Enter the Outgoing Line Group number to which the OLG access
code is being assigned.

Note These three-digit Feature Index Numbers should not be confused with the Program 205 three-digit

Button Codes.
Table 13-4

Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings
Feature
Index

Flexible Numbering Feature

Default
Programmed
Access Code
Value

No Data

13-12

ABR - Activate

150

ABR - Cancel

151

Call Park Orbits - Activate

170

Call Park Orbits - Park Answer (Retrieve Parked Call)

173

System Orbit Number

174

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-4

Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Feature
Index

DND -Local Activation

180

DND -Local Cancellation

181

DND -Remote Activation

182

DND -Remote Cancellation

183

Door Lock Control -Unlock

190

Door Phones -Call

191

Flash -short

200

Flash -long

210

Group Paging -Invoke All Group Paging

220

Group Paging -Invoke Individual Group Paging

230

Answer for External Group Paging

232

Emergency Page -Invoke All Emergency Paging

240

Emergency Page -Invoke Individual Emergency Paging

250

Originate Call by Terminal Speed Dial (Index: 00-99)

260

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 000-099)

261

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 100-199)

262

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 200-299)

263

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 300-399)

264

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 400-499)

265

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 500-599)

266

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 600-699)

267

Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 700-799)

268

269

Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Activation

340

Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Activation

341

Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Activation

342

Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Activation

343

Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Activation

350

Call Forward CF-B; External Call) - Activation

351

Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Activation

352

Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Activation

353

Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Remote Activation

360

Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Remote Activation

361

Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation

362

Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation

363

Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Remote Activation

370

Call Forward (CF-B; External Call) - Remote Activation

371

Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Remote Activation

372

Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Remote Activation

373

Call Forward (Any Call) - Cancellation

380

Call Forward (External Call) - Cancellation

390

Call Forward (Any Call) - Remote Cancellation

400

Call Forward (External Call) - Remote Cancellation

410

Change Password for Remote Activation/Cancellation

420

Input Account Code

530

Change DISA Security Code

540

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Default
Programmed
Access Code
Value

Telephone Button
Programming

Flexible Numbering Feature

13-13

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-4

Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Feature
Index

Flexible Numbering Feature

13-14

Outgoing Call by Directing Individual Trunk

550

Outgoing Call by Directing Outgoing Line Group

551

Three Way Conferencing (Override to Tandem Connection)

560

Enter User Programming Mode

570

LCR -Outgoing Call

580

Set Voice Mail Message Waiting (activate MW without ringing for VM)

591

Release Received Message Waiting

592

Release Sent Message Waiting (Cancel MW without ringing for VM))

593

MW Answer access code (Retrieve Received Message Waiting)

594

Cancel ACB

600

Start BGM

610

Stop BGM

611

Start BGM for External Paging Device

612

Stop BGM for External Paging Device

613

Built-in modem

630

Night Ring Answer

640

Travelling Class Override Code Input Number

650

Change Travelling Class Override Code

651

Activate System Call Forward

670

Cancel System Call Forward

671

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Group Pickup

680

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Terminal

681

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Group

682

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed DN

683

Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Any External Call

684

Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed CO Retrieve

685

Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Local Retrieve

686

Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Remote Retrieve

687

Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed DN Retrieve

688

Transfer to Voice Mail

690

Repeat Last Number Dialed

700

Volume Control for BEEP

710

Change LCD Display Language

720

Advisory Message - Activation

730

Advisory Message - Cancellation

731

Emergency Call

740

Attendant Console Group Access Code

750

Private Network Access Code

760

Node ID (Coordinated Directory Number Prefix)

770

Substitution of Dial *

780

Substitution of Dial #

781

Originate Call with Sub Address -Outgoing Call/Internal Call

782

Application starting access code

800

System Date Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)

910

System Time Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)

911

Default
Programmed
Access Code
Value

1RQH

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-5

Sequence

Value(s)

Class Of Service

Summary
Class of Service assignments are a registration of feature capabilities
the user is entitled to use. Each assignment is defined as Enabled or
Disabled for privileges/permissions granted. Privileges enable users
to perform a feature while permissions allow others to use some
feature when calling your phone.

, +ROG

1~32 (COS Number)

Class of Service assignments are made for user’s of telephones,
attendant consoles, and incoming calls based upon the line the call
arrives or in some cases on a call-by-call basis when using DISA or
Tie Line with QSIG interfaces. For telephone users, the class of
service assignments are made for each of the Day/Night Modes to
allow different services during different parts of the day.

$XWR%XV\5HGLDO
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
&DOO)RUZDUG
2YHUULGH
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to invoke Automatic Busy Redial after dialing a busy
outside destination.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

If enabled, stations with this COS will not forward when calling
stations that have System or Station Call Forward activated. This
includes when dialing from the dial pad or DSS button located on the
telephone or DSS console.

&DOO7UDQVIHUZ
&DPSRQ
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
&KDQJH',6$&RGHV
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
'1'2YHUULGH
&DOOLQJ3DUW\
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Allows a call transferred by this station to camp on to a busy
destination.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The privilege to change the DISA Security Code.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Allows a caller to override the Do Not Disturb status of a called party.

103-06

DND Override Called Party

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Allows calling parties with DND Override privileges to override this
station's DND status.

103-07

Do Not Disturb

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to place this phone in Do Not Disturb.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The privilege of setting/resetting Do Not Disturb on other phones.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The privilege to invoke an Executive Override on a call.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Permission for others to use Executive Override when calling this
station.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to use Off-hook Camp-on when encountering a busy
destination.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to pick up a call ringing on a station in one's own group.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to pick a specified ringing station.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to pick up a ringing station in a specified group.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to pick a specified DN.

103-00

COS Number
n, +ROG,

103-01
103-02

103-03

103-04
103-05

Telephone Button
Programming

Button
103

Programs 103~107

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-08

Remote Set/Reset
DND

103-09

Executive Override

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-10

Executive Override
Allowed

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-11

Offhook Camp-on

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-12

Group Pickup

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-13

Directed Station
Pickup

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-14

Directed Group Call
Pickup

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-15

Directed DN Call
Pickup

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-15

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-5
Button
103-16

Programs 103~107 (continued)
Sequence

Ext Call Pickup

Value(s)
1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to pick up any incoming trunk call.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to pick up a specified incoming trunk call.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to retrieve any call placed on Hold on a designated
terminal (PDN).

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to retrieve a held call on another DN.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Permission for others to change this phone from Ringing to Hands
Free Answerback.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The privilege to override a private call.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to use the Emergency Page feature.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to use the Join feature (Attendant Feature).

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to perform Through Dialing (Attendant Feature).

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The privilege to set up a Trunk-to-Trunk connection.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The privilege to change Day/Night Mode.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The privilege to turn on/off background music over external speakers.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to use Least Cost Routing.

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-17

Directed CO Call
Pickup

Summary

n1 =

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-18

Remote Retrieve Call
Pickup

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-19

DN Retrieve Call
Pickup

103-20

Handsfree Override

103-21

Privacy Override

103-23

Invoke Emergency
Page

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-24

Join Feature

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-25

Through Dialing

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-26

Tandem CO
Connection

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-27

Day/Night Control

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-28

Ext BGM Control

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-29

LCR Feature

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-30

Individual Trunk
Access

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to dial individual trunk access codes to access specific
lines.

103-31

Trunk Access Allowed n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to access trunk groups by trunk access codes.

103-32

Forced Account
Codes

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable

The privilege to use Forced Account Codes for placing external calls.

103-33

Verified Account
Codes

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable

The privilege to have Account Codes verified before an external call
is placed.

n1 =

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to use a Short Flash signal over outside lines.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The privilege to use a Long Flash signal over outside lines.

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
)%, n1, +ROG +ROG

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-34

Allow Short Hook
Flash

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-35

Allow Long Hook
Flash

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG

13-16

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-5

103-36

Sequence
Allow Hook Flash

Value(s)

103-37

Automatic Line Hold

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

The privilege to receive hook flash over CO Lines and to allow
telephones to hook flash.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The privilege to have an active call automatically held when
accessing another line.

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Permission for others to call this station using Off-hook Call
Announce.

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
103-38

Can Originate OCA

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG
104

System Timers

104-01

ACB Callback Timer

System timers set a variety of times to control calls and features for
the system.

, +ROG
n=

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-02

ACB Cancel Recall
Timer
Park Recall Timer

Camp-on Timer

SMDR Valid Call
Timer

Tandem Connection
#1

5~15 sec.
(default = 10)

0~180 sec.
(default = 1)

)%, n, +ROG +ROG

104-06

10~600 sec.
(default = 120)

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-05

5~180 sec.
(default = 30)

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-04

5~180 sec.
(default = 30)

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-03

Summary

n1 =

)%, n1, +ROG +ROG

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 103~107 (continued)

0~3600 sec.
(default = 300)

)%, n, +ROG +ROG

The Automatic Callback timer sets the time (5 ~ 180 seconds) that the
callback will be attempted before being cancelled.
The Automatic Callback overall timer sets the time (5 ~ 180 minutes)
that a callback can be registered. Once the timer expires, the callback
will be cancelled.
The Park timer sets the length of time (10 ~ 600 seconds) a call can
remain in Park prior to a recall to the station that initiated the Park.
The Camp-on timer sets the time (5 ~ 60 seconds) needed to remain
off-hook prior to Camp-on being automatically activated.
The SMDR Answer timer sets a default time (0 ~ 180 seconds) for
when an outgoing call will be considered to be answered for SMDR
reporting when a true answer signal is not returned from the public
network. Setting the time short will include calls that may not be
completed, setting the time too long may exclude short calls that are
answered and terminated in a short time.
For Trunk-to-trunk connections which neither CO Line has release
supervision, a timer (0 ~ 3600 seconds) is needed to release the call
if no user monitoring has taken place.
Also used for CO line to RSTU port connections in which the CO line
has no supervision and the
device connected to the RSTU port does not hang up automatically
(see Prg200, PB34).

104-07

Tandem Connection
#2

(default = 30)

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-08

Call Forward No Ans
Time

(default = 20)
n=

0~60 sec.

Time system will wait for the beginning of DTMF input.

104-10

)%, n, +ROG +ROG

(default = 20)

Delay 1 Ringing Timer n =

1~60 sec.

104-11
104-12

Dial Input Timer

)%, n, +ROG +ROG

(default = 12)

Delay 2 Ringing Timer n =

1~60 sec.

)%, n, +ROG +ROG

(default =240)

Door Unlock Timer

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-13

1~180 sec.

The Trunk-to trunk User Input Timer provides a time (0 ~ 180
seconds) to allow an external user to dial a digit to extend the
disconnect time when the connection is unsupervised. This feature
is used primarily with DISA service.
The System Call Forward No Answer timer (1 ~ 180 seconds)
specifies the time period that a phone will ring prior to invoking the
Call Forward operation.

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-09

0~180 sec.

9+11 Judgement
Timer

)%, n, +ROG +ROG

1~30 sec.
(default = 6)

1~30 sec.
(default = 5)

The Delayed Ringing 1 timer specifies the time (1 ~ 60 seconds) to
wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
The Delayed Ringing 2 timer specifies the time (1 ~ 60 seconds) to
wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
The Door Unlock Timer specifies the length of time (1 ~ 30 seconds)
the electrical signal is sent to the door for releasing the lock.
The 9+11 Inter-digital timer provides a timing value (1 ~ 30 seconds)
for the system to wait for additional digits to be dialed looking for the
911 or 9+911 dialed codes for treatment using the E911 procedures
rather than normal dialing treatment.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-17

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-5
Button
104-14

104-15

Programs 103~107 (continued)
Sequence

Value(s)

Emergency Call Timer n =

10~180 sec.

)%, n, +ROG +ROG

(default = 30)

ABR Busy Detection
Time

Lost Call Timer

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-17

Lost Call Final Timer

DTMF Tone Sending
Time

The Destination Busy Detection timer sets the time (1 ~ 30 seconds)
to wait while looking for a busy condition on an external call. If
detected, it will trigger the initiation of the Automatic Busy Redial
cycle.

1~600 sec.

The Lost Call timer sets the time (1 ~ 600 seconds) that a failed
transfer recall will ring on the originating station prior to attempting to
recall a secondary location.

(default = 180)
n=

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-18

1~30 sec.
(default = 5)

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-16

Summary
The Emergency Call timer sets a time (10 ~ 180 seconds) for
advancing the call to the next station in a list of destinations for the
call.

1~600 sec.

The Lost Call Final timer sets the time (1 ~ 600 seconds) that a failed
transfer recall will ring on the secondary location before being
automatically disconnected.

(default = 180)
n=

1. 80 ms (default)
2. 160 ms

The DTMF tone sending duration (1-80 msecs, 2-160 msecs) for
dialing on CO Lines.

0~60 sec.

Time after which an unsupervised trunk may be automatically
released.

)%, n, +ROG +ROG
104-19

Auto Disconnect

)%, n, +ROG +ROG

(default = 0)

System Timer
Network DSS Refresh
Timer

104-24

Outgoing Number
Display Timer

105

System Parameters

104-23

20~180 sec. (default = 30)

Select Network DSS Refresh Timer (20 -180 seconds). The time
interval when all Network DSS settings are refreshed system wide.
Note

1~120 sec. (default = 10)

DSS button LEDs change state immediately when the status
of the DSS button changes - regardless of this timer value.

This timer sets how long dialed numbers will display on telephone
LCDs for outgoing line calls.
This command assigns the system parameters.

, +ROG
105-01

Executive Override

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Break in warning tone of Executive Override Enable or Disable.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Music On Hold selection of Private Line and Station.

1. RBT (default)
2. MOH

Tones for the transferred party after the ringing transfer takes place.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Transfer Privacy enabled: CO line buttons that have multiple
appearances will only flash and ring on the transferred-to telephone;
the same CO line button on other telephones will be red-busy.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-02

Station MOH

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

105-03

Ringing Transfer

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-04

Transfer Privacy

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Quiet Tone
External 1 (default)
External 2
External 3
External 4
External 5
External 6
External 7
External 8
External 9
External 10
External 11
External 12
External 13
External 14
External 15

Transfer Privacy Disabled: CO line buttons that have multiple
appearances will flash and ring on all telephones that have the CO
line button appearance.
105-05

Privacy Override

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

13-18

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Privacy Override Attendant Monitor warning Enable or Disable.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-5

105-06

Sequence
Credit Card Code

Value(s)
Up to 32 digits

Enter the number dialed to initiate a Credit Card Call. This is normally
“0” in the USA.

1~66 digits

Minimum Dial Digits required for Credit Card Calling. This should be
the quantity of digits in a credit card number. If this quantity of digits is
not dialed when making credit card calls, the caller will be
disconnected. This is to insure that the call is charged to a credit card.
DRL tables in Program 111 and OLGs in Program 306 must be
enabled with credit card calling for this feature to be active. Users
must be assigned to a DRL table enable with credit card calling and
call out on a credit card calling enabled OLG for this featured to be
applied to the call.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Offer of E911 Service.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Destination Restriction Override by System Speed Dial.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Automatic Station Release.

1. Operable
2. Not Operable (default)

Operation when Auto SPID or User Entry Of SPID fails.

0~8

Assign BIOU Relay (1~8) as the Night Relay - this relay activates
when the

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-07

Credit Card Digits

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

105-08

E911 Service

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-09

DR Override by SSD

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-10

Auto Station Release

105-11

ISDN SPID

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-12

Night Mode Relay

Summary

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 103~107 (continued)

system is in the Night Mode.
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4.
BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note

105-13

BGM External Paging

0~4 (CTX100)
0~8 (CTX670 Basic)
0~16 (CTX100 Expanded)

Set the External Page Group Number that includes the external
paging zones to which BGM will be sent. See PRG503.

Up to 5 digits

Set Lost Call Destination.

1~8

Class of Service Override Code Digits.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-14

Lost Call Destination

The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5.
For this relay operation, a virtual BIOU2 is installed, as
default, in a virtual equipment position - Cabinet 2 slot 5.
(Cab. 02 slot 05, PCB code 20, in program 100). To install an
actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the
programming telephone. To remove the virtual BIOU2 and
then install the actual BIOU2 in Cab. 01/slot 01~08 in the
normal manner.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-15

COS Override Code

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-16

Multi-Conference

(default = 1)
n=

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Conference connection of many member for Analog Internal Call and
Outgoing Call.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Caller number display preferentially.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-17

Caller Number
Display

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-19

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-5
Button
105-18

Programs 103~107 (continued)
Sequence

Night Bell Relay

Value(s)
n=

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Summary

0~8

Assign BIOU Relay (1~8) as the Night Relay - this relay activates
when the

(default = 0)

system is in the Night Mode.
BIOU1 provides relays 1 to 4.
BIOU2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note

105-19

Display Preference

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-20

Transit Counter

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-21

Primary Clock

1. DNIS (default)
2. Caller ID

Whether to display DNIS or Caller ID.

0~128

The Networking Transit Counter limits the number of nodes through
which a QSIG call can pass before being terminated as a lost call.

(default = 1)
xx =

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG,
+ROG

Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

yy =

Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)

zz =

Circuit (01~30)

Enter data as xxyyzz.
zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz=channel 01, 02, 03 , or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Primary Clock Source should be a assigned to an
RPTU in cabinet 5, slot 2, enter 050201.
Cabinet numbers:

•
•

CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•
105-22

Secondary Clock

xx =

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG,
+ROG
yy =
zz =

Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
Circuit (01~30)

CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

Enter data as xxyyzz:
zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz=circuit 01, 02, 03 , or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Secondary Clock Source should be a assigned to an
RBUU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 2; enter 050202.
Cabinet numbers:

•
•

CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•
105-23

Call History Prefix 1

1. add (default)
2. not add

Whether prefix 1 is added or not in callback of Call History Feature.

Up to 5 digits

Default = “911” for North America. Enter alternative emergency
dialing strings up to 5 digits as required by local conditions.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-24

Emergency Digits
Sent

(default = 911)

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
105-25

DP Make Ratio

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

13-20

CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

1. DPMakeRatio33
2. DPMakeRatio40
(default)

Dial pulse Make/Break ratio can be set to 33% or 40%. The default
value is 40%.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-5

105-26

Sequence
Call Button Jumping

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

106

Value(s)

Summary

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

If enabled, line calls move from a telephone DN button to a line button
after they are answered. After the call is answered, the DN button is
cleared to receive another call. With this operation the DN acts as an
answer button for the telephone. This operation only applies if the line
that is answered has a CO, GCO, or Pooled line button appearance
on the telephone. If disabled, line calls remain on the DN after they
are answered.

Day/Night Mode Day
of Week Mapping

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 103~107 (continued)

The Day of the Week schedule defines each day as the type of day
the schedule shall follow. These types of days are called Work Day,
Non-work Day, and Holiday. Each day of the week can be classified.

, +ROG
106-00

Tenant Number

Enter 1~8

Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be
configured.

106-01

Monday

1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday

Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.

106-02

Tuesday

1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday

Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.

106-03

Wednesday

1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday

Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.

106-04

Thursday

1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday

Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.

106-05

Friday

1. Work Day (default)
2. Non-Work
3. Holiday

Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.

106-06

Saturday

1. Work Day
2. Non-Work (default)
3. Holiday

Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.

106-07

Sunday

1. Work Day
2. Non-Work (default)
3. Holiday

Enter the type of day to follow for daily schedule. 1- Work Day; 2Non-Work Day; or 3- Holiday.

107

PAD Table
Assignment

Assigns additional Sender and Receiver pad values to pad groups in
the pad table.

, +ROG
107-01

Sender PAD Device
Number

See “PAD Table” on
page 13-22.
Receiver PAD Device
Number

n1 =

PAD Loss

)%, n2, +ROG, +ROG

Up to 3 digits

Enter Receiver Pad Device Number from Pad Table.

101~106 (CTX100)
101~110 (CTX670 Basic)
101~132 (CTX670 Exp.)

)%, n1, +ROG
107-03

Enter Sender Pad Device Number from Pad Table.

101~106 (CTX100)
101~110 (CTX670 Basic)
101~132 (CTX670 Exp.)

)%, n, +ROG

107-02

Up to 3 digits

n2 =

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

6 dB Net Gain
3 dB Net Gain
0 dB
3 dB Net Loss
6 dB Net Loss
9 dB Net Loss
12 dB Net Loss
15 dB Net Loss

Enter Pad Value (See PAD Table below). The value shown shows the
net effect.
Note

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

To pad is to insert loss; therefore, negative loss equals net
gain.

13-21

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

PAD Device Number

102
PAD Group 2

101
PAD Group 1

IPT

Ext. Paging

8
Music Source

7
CONF Bridge

ISDN Trunk

5
ISDN Station

T1 Trunk

3
Analog Trunk

DKT

1
Analog Telephone

PAD Device Number

Receiver (Listener)

PAD Table

Table 13-6

Analog Telephone

DKT

Analog Trunk

T1 Trunk

ISDN Station

ISDN Trunk

Conference Bridge

(0)

Music Source

Sender (Speaker)

Ext. Paging

IPT

-6

101

PAD Group 12

-3

102

PAD Group 23

131

PAD Group 31

132

PAD Group 32

Notes
1. “X” data set for PAD Conference table Assignment
2. For IP QSIG only. The default values for PAD Group 1 is 0dB. dB is the value for attenuation level.
3. For PRI QSIG only.

Table 13-7
Button
108

Program 108
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

PAD Group
Assignment

This program permits the addition of up to 32 devices to the Pad
Table to deal with exceptions to the default table.

, +ROG
108-00

108-01

PAD Group Device
Type.
xyyyyy, +ROG

xyyyy Up to 6 digits
y
x = Device Type
yyyyy = Device number

Enter the Device Type(x) and Device number(y). Refer to the table
below.

PAD Group Number.

n1 =

Enter the PAD Group Number.

)%, n1, +ROG, +ROG

Table 13-8

PAD Group Device Type Examples
Device Name

13-22

0~6 (CTX100)
0~10 (CTX670 Basic)
0~32 (CTX670 Expanded)

Device
Type

Device Number

Example

DKT, SLT, ISDN, Station

0~99999 (PDN)

if DKT device = 200, value = 1200.

ISDN Trunk

1~128 (Channel Group Number)

if Channel Group # = 10, value = 210.

Analog Trunk, T1 Trunk

1~264 (Trunk Number)

if Trunk # = 120, value = 3120.

Conference Bridge

none (Conference Bridge is only one)

value = 4.

Music Source

1~15 (Music Port)

if Music port = 8, value = 58.

External Paging Device

1~8 (Zone Relay Number)

if External Paging Device = 3, value = 63.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Button

Programs 109~114
Sequence

109

Music on Hold.

109-01

MOH/BGM #1
(BECU)

109-02

MOH/BGM #2
(BIOU1-J1)

Value(s)

Summary
This command assigns external Music on Hold (MOH) and
Background Music (BGM) sources.

, +ROG
n=

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable this assignment if MOH source #1 is connected to the system
processor MOH RCA jack.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable this assignment if MOH source #2 is connected to BIOU-1,
MOH RCA jack (J1).

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable this assignment if MOH source #3 is connected to BIOU-1,
MOH RCA jack (J2).

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable this assignment if MOH source #4 is connected to BIOU-1,
MOH RCA jack (J3).

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable this assignment if MOH source #5 is connected to BIOU-2,
MOH RCA jack (J1).

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable this assignment if MOH source #6 is connected to BIOU-2,
MOH RCA jack (J2).

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable this assignment if MOH source #7 is connected to BIOU-2,
MOH RCA jack (J3).

xx =

Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the RSTU equipment number to which MOH/BGM source #8 or
#9~#15 are connected. Enter data as xxyyzz:

yy =

Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670

zz =

Circuit 01~08

Telephone Button
Programming

Table 13-9

)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
109-03

MOH/BGM #3
(BIOU1-J2)

109-04

MOH/BGM #4
(BIOU1-J3)

109-05

MOH/BGM #5
(BIOU2-J1)

109-06

MOH/BGM #6
(BIOU2-J2)

)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
109-07

MOH/BGM #7
(BIOU2-J3)

)%, n, +ROG
109
08~15

MOH/BGM #8
(RSTU)

)%)%, xxyyzz,
6SNU, n, +ROG

Example: If the MOH/BGM source should be a assigned to an RSTU
in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
Note

A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if
it is to be a MOH circuit. If a PDN is assigned to the circuit
that will connect to a MOH/BGM source, you must first delete
it using PRG201

Cabinet numbers:

•
•

CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•
110

Password
Assignment.

The system has two passwords levels. Logging into the system with
the Level 1 password allows you to administer all system programs
while the level 2 password provides restricted program
administration.

, +ROG
110-00

Password Level

CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

n, +ROG

1. Unrestricted Admin
2. Restricted Admin

Enter the digit 1 or 2 for the password level. Enter 1 to set the
unrestricted administration password. Enter 2 to set the restricted
administration password.
Note

110-01

Password

)%, n1, +ROG, +ROG

n1 =

Up to 16 digits

Level 2 users can administer all programs, but are restricted
from initializing the CTX and from updating the CTX software.

Enter a 1~16 digit password for the selected level. Each level can
have only one password.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-23

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-9
Button
111

Programs 109~114 (continued)
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Destination
Restriction Level

This command establishes a Destination Restriction Level (DRL).

, +ROG
111-00

DRL Number

1~16

Enter the DRL number (1~16)

n1 =

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable or Disable Credit Card Calling for this DRL

n, +ROG
111-01

Credit Card Calling

)%, n1, +ROG, +ROG
112

Day/Night Mode
Calendar

The Calendar will override the current Day of the Week setting with
the type of day specified in the calendar. Thus a Working Day or a
Non-working Day can be changed to a Holiday based upon the
calendar.

, +ROG
112-00
112-01

112-02

Tenant

Enter the Tenant to schedule for Day/Night mode calendar.
Enter the calendar day to be treated individually as an exception to
the Day of Week treatment. Maximum table size is 128. Format:
YYYYMMDD

Calendar Day

YYYY

= Year

)%, YYYYMMDD,
+ROG

MM =

Month

DD =

Day

Working Day Type

1.
2.
3.
4.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
113

1~8

Delete (default)
Work Day
Non-Working Day
Holiday

Day/Night Mode Daily
Schedule

Enter the Day Type to override the Weekly Mapping.

The Day/Night Mode daily schedule defines the times for the start of
the Work Day, Non-work Day, and Holiday for each of the modes
(Day, Day2. Night).

, +ROG
113-00

Tenant Number

113-01

Day1 Mode/Work Day hh =
mm =
)%, hhmm, +ROG

113-02

Day2 Mode/Work Day hh =
mm =
)%, hhmm, +ROG

Enter 1~8

Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be
configured.

hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)

Enter the start time for Day1 Mode for the Work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.

9999 to delete
hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)

Enter the start time for Day2 Mode for the Work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.

9999 to delete
113-03

Night Mode/Work Day hh =
mm =

)%, hhmm, +ROG

hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)

Enter the start time for Night Mode for the Work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.

9999 to delete
113-04

Day1 Mode/Non-Work
Day

113-05

Day2 Mode/Non-Work
Day

hh =
mm =

)%, hhmm, +ROG

Night Mode/Non-Work
Day
Day1 Mode/Holiday

)%, hhmm, +ROG

hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)

Enter the start time for Day2 Mode for the Non-work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.

9999 to delete
hh =
mm =

)%, hhmm, +ROG
113-07

Enter the start time for Day1 Mode for the Non-work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.

9999 to delete
hh =
mm =

)%, hhmm, +ROG
113-06

hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)

Enter the start time for Night Mode for the Non-work type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.

9999 to delete
hh =
mm =

hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)

Enter the start time for Day1 Mode for the Holiday type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.

9999 to delete
113-08

Day2 Mode/Holiday

)%, hhmm, +ROG

hh =
mm =

hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)

Enter the start time for Day2 Mode for the Holiday type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.

9999 to delete

13-24

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-9

Programs 109~114 (continued)

113-09

Sequence

Value(s)

Night Mode/Holiday

hh =
mm =

)%, hhmm, +ROG,
+ROG
114

Summary
Enter the start time for Night Mode for the Holiday type of day. Enter
“9999” to omit this mode.

hour (00~23)
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete

PAD Conference
Table Assignment

Assigns PAD values for combinations of analog trunks and
telephones in conference.

, +ROG
114-01

No. of Conference
Trunks

Enter the number of analog trunks in the conference.

0~8

)%, n, +ROG

114-02

0~6

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

No. of Conference
Telephones

6 dB Net Gain
3 dB Net Gain
0 dB
3 dB Net Loss
6 dB Net Loss
9 dB Net Loss
12 dB Net Loss
15 dB Net Loss

n1 =

0~8

Enter the number of analog telephones in the conference.

n2 =

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Enter the desired PAD value for the combination of analog trunks and
telephones specified in 01 and 02 above. See “PAD Conference
Table” on page 13-25.

)%, n1, +ROG
114-03

PAD Conference
Value

)%, n2, +ROG, +ROG

Table 13-10

PAD Conference Table
Number of Analog Telephones

Number of
Trunks

Table 13-11
Button

6 dB Net Gain
3 dB Net Gain
0 dB
3 dB Net Loss
6 dB Net Loss
9 dB Net Loss
12 dB Net Loss
15 dB Net Loss

Program 116
Sequence

116

Data Initialize

116-01

, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
See “Data Initialize
Programs” on
page 13-26.

Value(s)

Summary
This program is used to initialize the tables of selected programs in
the Strata CTX system.

3 digit Program Number
(100~999)

Enter Program Number to be initialized.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-25

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-12

Data Initialize Programs

Program
Number
500

Table 13-13
Button
117

Program Name
System Call Forward Assignment

520

LCR Local Route Plan Assignment

521

LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment

522

LCR Exception Number Route Plans

523

LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignment

524

Route Table to Route Definition Assignment

525

LCR Route Definition Assignment

526

Modified Digits Table Assignment

527

LCR Holiday Table

529

LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment

530

DR LCR Screening Table Assignment

531

DR Screening Table for OLG

533

DR Level Table Assignment

534

DRL Exception Table Assignment

651

Private Routing Plan Analysis

653

Private Route Choice Table Assignment

654

Private Route Definition Table Assignment

655

Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment

Program 117
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Public Dial Plan Digit

This command is used to prevent users from circumventing
Destination Restriction by sending tones directly to the PSTN before
DR analysis is complete. It defines the number of digits expected in
PSTN numbers beginning with identified sequences. For example, a
number starting with the toll prefix “1” would be expected to be 11
digits long. Calls will be cut through to the public network only after
the expected number of digits have been received.

, +ROG

117-00

Prefix Number

Up to 7 digits
(Wild Cards n and x)

The initial, identifying external digits. 1 to 7 digits may include wild
cards “x” and “n” where x = 0~9 and n = 2~9.

n1 =

1~64

The total number of digits in a number beginning with the Prefix
Number above.

n, +ROG,
117-01

Digits to Follow

)%, n1, +ROG, +ROG

13-26

Page #

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
100 Series Programs

Table 13-13

Sequence

Value(s)

Tenant Data
Assignment

, +ROG
120-00

Tenant Number

1~8. No Data (Default)

Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be
configured.

1. No Data (default)
2. Dialing Digits (see
“n=2“ below)
3. Night Bell

Select to call an Attendant or select to ring the Night Bell when dialing
the Tenant Attendant Access Code in the Day1, Day 2, or Day 3
mode for this Tenant.

n, +ROG,
120-01,
120-02,
120-03

Dial 0 Call Day 1, 2, or
3 Dst Type

)%, n=1 or 3, +ROG
or (see next row)

DEST
=

Up to 32 digits for each
Day Mode selected
(default = noData)

Enter the PDN of the Attendant (BATI) to ring when dialing Tenant
Attendant Access Code in Day, Day2, or Day 3 mode.

Night Mode Relay

BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5

Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell.
BIOU relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay continuously
when the system is in the night mode.

BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU = relay 5

Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell.
BIOU relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay when a CO line or
DID rings when the system is in night mode. The CO or DID line must
be assigned to ring the night bell.

)%, n, +ROG
120-05

The Tenant Attendant Access Code must be assigned in Prg 102. If it
should be “0,” the Attendant Console Group Access Code, which is
“0,” must be deleted.

)%, n=(Dialing
Digits), 6SNU.
DEST=enter values.
+ROG

120-04

Summary
This program enables you to select an Attendant or Night Bell to ring
when dialing 0 in Day 1, Day 2 or Day 3 mode for up to eight different
Tenants. You can also assign the general purpose relay to the Night
Bell in this program.

Night Bell Relay

)%, n, +ROG

Telephone Button
Programming

Button
120

Program 117

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-27

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

200 Series Programs
Table 13-14
Button

Programs 200~202
Sequence

200

Station Data

200-00

Primary DN

Value(s)

Summary
This command assigns stations to the system.

, +ROG
n=

Up to 5 digits

Primary DN (enter an existing PDN or enter a PDN you wish to create
for a new station).

xx =

Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the PDN equipment number (xxyyzz). This is the cabinet, slot,
and circuit number of the ADKU, BDKU/BDKS, PDKU, or RSTU
interface PCB to which the the PDN is, or should be assigned.

yy =

Slot (01~10)

zz =

Circuit (01~16)

Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5,
slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.

n, +ROG
200-01

PDN Equipment
Number

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG

Cabinet numbers:

•
•

CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•
200-02

Station Type

1. DKT
2. SLT

Station Type.

1. Extension
2. Voice Mail
3. Announce (Not used in
USA or Canada)

Extension: Should be assigned to PDNs the are associated with
Digital or Standard telephones

)%, n, +ROG
200-03

Circuit Type

)%, n, +ROG

200-04

Station COS

1~32

• Day1 COS
• Day2 COS
• Night COS
)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n, +ROG
200-05

Station DRL

Station FRL

LCR Group

Select SLT to set up voice mail.

Voice Mail: Should be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail
RSTU circuits.
COS for Day1.

COS for Night.

1~16

DRL for Day1 (Used for Credit card calling).
DRL for Day2.
DRL for Night.

1~16

• Day1 FRL
• Day2 FRL
• Night FRL
)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n, +ROG
200-07

Note

COS for Day2.

• Day1 DRL
• Day2 DRL
• Night DRL
)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n, +ROG
200-06

CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

FRL for Day1.
FRL for Day2.
FRL for Night.

1~16

Station LCR Group Number.

)%, n, +ROG

13-28

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-14

200-08

Sequence
Station QPL

Value(s)
n=

1~16

• Day1 QPL
• Day2 QPL
• Night QPL
)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n, +ROG
200-09

Station Name

QPL for Night.

Up to 8 digits

Station Name to be displayed on LCD (Cannot be entered from DKT
in R1).

1. None
2. Singular
3. Continuous

Call Waiting Tone of Offhook Camp-on.

Dialing Progress Tone n =

1. Dial Tone
2. Entry Tone
3. Quiet Tone

Type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code.

0~4 (CTX100)
0~10 (CTX670 Basic)
0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)

System Call Forward group number.

1. Permitted
2. Group Only
3. Not Permitted

The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.

1. Audio
2. Speech

ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN
stations. 3.1kHzAudio or Speech.

Up to 5 digits

The number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this PDN
number. The number displayed on the called telephone when calling
from any DN on this telephone.

Call Waiting Tone for
Offhook Camp-on

)%, n, +ROG
200-11

)%, n, +ROG
200-12

System Call Forward
Group Number

)%, n, +ROG
200-13

Call Pickup

)%, n, +ROG
200-14

Summary
QPL for Day1.
QPL for Day2.

)%, n, +ROG
200-10

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 200~202 (continued)

Bearer Capability –
3.1KHz

)%, n, +ROG
200-15

Display DN

)%, n, +ROG

This number will be overridden by PRG209, 04 (if assigned) and if the
PDN is in a hunt group.
200-16

Caller Emergency
Service Identification
(CESID)

Up to 16 digits

E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID).
Note

)%, n, +ROG
200-17

Emergency Call
Group

CESID should be 10 digits or less for Centralized Automatic
Message Accounting (CAMA) E911 trunk. PRI E911 allows
pot 16 digits.

1~8

The Emergency call group that this station belongs to.

Up to 4 digits

Password to remotely set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from
another CTX station, or for Call Forward only, from a external DISA
line.

Up to 16 digits

Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this
PDN calls voice mail, or when this PDN is called and then forwards to
voice mail ( this number is prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16).
Valid entries: digits 0~9, * and #, maximum 10 characters.

)%, n, +ROG
200-18

Remote CF/DND
Password

)%, n, +ROG

Note
200-19

VMID Code SMDI

)%, n, +ROG

DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.

This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or
DTMF tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN and on calls to
the PDN that forward to voice mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or
DTMF choice).
200-22

Message Waiting to
VM Port

Up to 5 digits

Message Waiting Center DN.

)%, n, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-29

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-14
Button

Programs 200~202 (continued)
Sequence

200-23

Travelling COS
Change

200-24

TGAC Override

200-25

Service Tones

Value(s)

Summary

1. Enable
2. Disable

Privilege to change the Travelling Class of Service Override Code.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Trunk Group Access Code Over Ride (for Attendant console) (Not
available in R1).

1. Enable
2. Disable

Disable Services Tone for Data Privacy. Service tone, such a Call
Waiting Tone, should be disabled for modems, FAXes, and similar
devices.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Campon) and Ring
Over Busy Tone. CW tone is always two beeps. ROB tone can be two
beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Privilege to put the user name in the list display of Large LCD
(Directory Assistance)

1. Override
2. Do not Override

Enable DND override by door phone.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable Emergency ringdown.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Privilege to use System Speed Dial.

1~32

Network COS number.

1. Enable
2. Disable

OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that
allows OCA calls to be received.

1. Enable
2. Disable

The privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.

1. Received
2. Not Received

Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically hang
up, and connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect
supervision, should be set with “Not Received.” This enables the auto
disconnect Tandem timer in PRG 104, PB06 for these types of
Connections.

0~100

The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station
(maximum=100 per station).

1. Enable
2. Disable

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
200-26

Call Waiting and ROB
Tone

)%, n, +ROG
200-27

Name Display

)%, n, +ROG
200-28

Door Ovr DND

200-29

Emergency Ringdown n =

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
200-30

Change System
Speed Dial

)%, n, +ROG
200-31

Network COS

)%, n, +ROG
200-32

Auto OCA

)%, n, +ROG
200-33

Originate OCA

200-34

RSTU Supervision

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG

200-35

Station Speed Dial
Bins

)%, n, +ROG
200-39

CO Park & Hold

)%, n, +ROG

Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of
the parked line that appear on other stations will appear busy. This
will prevent the other stations to press the CO or GCO button to
pickup the parked call.
200-40

Stutter Dial Tone

)%, n, +ROG

1. Enable
2. Disable

This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
Enable: This station will receive stuttered dial tone when it has a
station-to-station or Voice Mail message waiting, or if DND is set. This
feature is available with Strata CTX R1.3 software.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a
station-to-station or Voice Mail message waiting, or if DND is set.

13-30

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-14

200-41

Sequence
Activate Message
Waiting

Value(s)
n=

1. Enable
2. Disable

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Summary
This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.
Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message
waiting on other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8
or 9; or, by pressing the Msg key. This feature is available with Strata
CTX R1.3 software.

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 200~202 (continued)

Disable: This station cannot activate station-to-station message
waiting on other stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8 or 9.
Notes

•
•
201

Station Delete

201-01

Primary DN

When disabled, digital telephones are still allowed to activate
station-to-station message waiting by pressing the Msg button.
This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports to use the
special Message Waiting access codes.

This command deletes stations.

, +ROG
PDN or PhDN to be deleted.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
202

ISDN BRI Station

This command assigns ISDN BRI Stations.

, +ROG
202-00

Primary DN

Up to 5 digits

ISDN BRI circuit Prime Directory Number.

xx =

Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

yy =

Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)

zz =

Circuit (01~04)

n, +ROG.
202-01

Equipment

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG

Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5,
slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:

•
•

CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•
202-02

ISDN Channel Group

1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Channel Group Number.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Protocol

1. Point to Point
2. Point to Multi Point

1~32

)%, n, +ROG
202-03

ISDN Protocol

)%, n, +ROG
202-04

Type Connection

)%, n, +ROG
202-05

BRI Station COS

• Day1 COS
• Day2 COS
• Night COS
)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n, +ROG

CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

National ISDN
ETSI
TTC
National ISDN - Nortel

Connection format
COS for Day1
COS for Day2
COS for Night

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-31

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-14
Button
202-06

Programs 200~202 (continued)
Sequence

BRI Station DRL

Value(s)
n=

Summary

1~16

DRL for Day1

• Day1 DRL
• Day2 DRL
• Night DRL
)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n, +ROG
202-07

BRI Station FRL

DRL for Day2
DRL for Night

1~16

FRL for Day1

• Day1 FRL
• Day2 FRL
• Night FRL
)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n, +ROG
202-08

LCR Group

202-09

BRI Station QPL

FRL for Day2
FRL for Night

1~16

LCR Group Number

1~16

QPL for Day1

)%, n, +ROG
• Day1 QPL
• Day2 QPL
• Night QPL
)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n, +ROG
202-10

Speech Capability

QPL for Day2
QPL for Night

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable Bearer Capability Speech. See “BRI Bearer Capability of
ISDN” on page 13-34.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable Bearer Capability 3.1kHzAudio. See “BRI Bearer Capability of
ISDN” on page 13-34.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable Bearer Capability 7kHzAudio. See “BRI Bearer Capability of
ISDN” on page 13-34.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable Bearer Capability unrestricted digital Information 64kbps. See
“BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN” on page 13-34.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Bearer Capability unrestricted digital Information 56kbps.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Bearer Capability unrestricted digital Information 2x64kbps.

1. Exclusive
2. Preferred
3. Any Channel

B Channel selected originating method.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Idle B Channel selection method.

1~180

Interdigit1 Timer

1~180

Interdigit2 Timer

Up to 16 digits

Enter the Caller Emergency Services Identification (CESID) for E911
calls.

1. One
2. Two

Voice Call Allowed Number for Interface.

)%, n, +ROG
202-11

3.1 KHz Audio

)%, n, +ROG
202-12

7 KHz Audio

202-13

64Kbps Unrestricted

202-14

56Kbps Unrestricted

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
202-15

2 x 64Kbps
Unrestricted

)%, n, +ROG
202-16

B Channel Selection

)%, n, +ROG
202-17

Idle B Channel
Selection

)%, n, +ROG
202-18

Interdigit Timer 1

Forward Cyclic
Backward Cyclic
Forward Terminal
Backward Terminal

)%, n, +ROG
202-19

Interdigit Timer 2

)%, n, +ROG
202-20

CESID

)%, n, +ROG
202-21

Number Voice Calls
Allowed

)%, n, +ROG

13-32

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-14

Sequence

202-22

Service Tone
Permission

202-23

TGAC Override

202-24

Change System
Speed

Value(s)

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 200~202 (continued)
Summary

1. Enable
2. Disable

Service Tone Permission.

1. Enable
2. Disable

TGAC Override.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Permission to register System Speed Dial.

1~32

Network COS index.

Up to 5 digits

Additional DN2.

Up to 5 digits

Additional DN3.

Up to 5 digits

Additional DN4.

Up to 5 digits

Additional DN5.

Up to 5 digits

Additional DN6.

Up to 5 digits

Additional DN7.

Up to 5 digits

Additional DN8.

1. Enable
2. Disable

OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that
allows calls to be received.

1. Enable
2. Disable

The privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.

1~100 (in intervals of 10)

The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station
(maximum=100).

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable: This station will receive stuttered dial tone when it has a
station-to-station or Voice Mail message waiting.

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
202-25

Network COS

)%, n, +ROG
202-26

Additional DN2

)%, n, +ROG
202-27

Additional DN3

)%, n, +ROG
202-28

Additional DN4

)%, n, +ROG
202-29

Additional DN5

)%, n, +ROG
202-30

Additional DN6

)%, n, +ROG
202-31

Additional DN7

)%, n, +ROG
202-32

Additional DN8

)%, n, +ROG
202-33

Auto OCA

)%, n, +ROG
202-34

Originate OCA

)%, n, +ROG
202-35

Station SpDial Bins

)%, n, +ROG
202-38

MW Stutter Dial Tone

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a a
station-to-station or Voice Mail message waiting.
202-39

Tenant Number

1~8 (default = 1)

Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-33

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-15

BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN
Bellcore
Nat’l ISDN

ETSI

TTC

Speech

3.1kHz Audio

Bearer Services

7kHz Audio
Circuit Mode
Unrestricted Digital Information

64 kbps

Rate adaptation
from 56 kbps

2x64

Table 13-16
Button
203

Programs 203~204
Sequence

Value(s)

Change DN

Summary
This command changes DN.

, +ROG
203-00

Primary DN

Up to 5 digits

Enter DN to change.

n1 =

Up to 5 digits

Enter new DN.

n, +ROG
203-01

Enter new DN

)%, n1, +ROG, +ROG
204

DKT Parameters

204-00

Primary DN

This command assigns DKT digital telephone data.

, +ROG
n=

Up to 5 digits

Primary DN

1. Extension
2. Attendant

For CTX R1 this must be set to “Extension.” The “Attendant” option is
not available for this release.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Default key strip patterns for digital telephones. The selected Pattern
is applied to the “Key Strip Type” parameter (DKT3014 uses only
Pattern 1 or None).

n, +ROG
204-01

Station Type

)%, n, +ROG
204-02

Key Strip Pattern

)%, n, +ROG

Pattern1
Pattern2
Pattern3
None

•
•
•
•

204-03

Key Strip Type

1~24

)%, n, +ROG

204-04

Add on Modules

Tone 1st /Voice 1st

OCA Type

)%, n, +ROG

13-34

1 and 3 button keystrips apply to DKT2001 and DKT3001.
10 button keystrips apply to DKT2010 and DKT3010.
14 button keystrips apply to the Large LCD DKT3014
20 button keystrips apply to DKT2020 and DKT3020.

1. None
2. One Unit
3. Two Units

The Number of Add-on Modules assigned to this station.

1. Tone
2. Voice

Set PDN to have Tone First or Voice First signaling when called.

1. Handset
2. Speaker

Select the OCA type. This field must be programmed with Auto OCA
Originate below.

)%, n, +ROG
204-06

Apply 1, 3, 10, 14, or 20 button keystrip type to digital telephones.

•
•
•
•

)%, n, +ROG
204-05

None - applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
Pattern 1 - applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons and DND.
Pattern 2 - applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons, OneTouch buttons and DND.
Pattern 3 - applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other
buttons.

For each iES32 PDN, set to “Tone First”, if set to Voice First iES32 will
not answer.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-16

204-09

Sequence
Handsfree MIC
Setting

Value(s)
1. Enable
2. Disable

If you call a station configured for Voice First signalling, you can use
this parameter to enable the called parties microphone from your
DKT.

1. Enable
2. Disable

If you call a DKT configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this
parameter to send a splash tone to the called party.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable repetitive ringing for incoming CO/PBX/Centrex signals.
Disabling this parameter defaults to standard CO ringing pattern
(1 second on/3 seconds Off).

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Select Off Hook Preference.

)%, n, +ROG
204-10

Handsfree Tone

)%, n, +ROG
204-11

Ext. Ring Repeat

)%, n, +ROG
204-13

Ringing Line
Preference

Summary

)%, n, +ROG

Idle
Ringing
Prime
No Preference
Prime and Idle
Prime and Ringing
Ringing and Idle

When a digital telephone user goes off hook, presses the Spkr Button
or dials a digit while the telephone is idle (Hot Dial Pad), the
telephone will select an idle PDN or Line button, or answer an
incoming call, according to the preferences set in this command.
This command works in conjunction with the “14 PDN/Line
preference” and “15 Call Answer Preference” programs. The possible
values are described as follows:

•

•
•
•

•

204-14

Off-hook Preference

)%, n, +ROG

1. CO Key
2. DN Key

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 203~204 (continued)

Idle – The telephone will select and idle DN or Line button
depending on the “14 PDN or Line preference” choice. In either
case priority is always the lowest numbered button that is idle.
The telephone will not answer ringing calls automatically.
Ringing – The telephone will answer a ringing call (any PDN,
secondary DN, PhDN, or any Line type button) by call type or
longest ringing button depending on the “15 Call Answer
Preference” choice. The telephone will not automatically select a
DN or Line button when going off hook to originate a call.
Primary DN – The telephone will automatically try to select the
PDN button, if idle or ringing, no matter what the status is of other
buttons on the telephone.
No Preference – The telephone will not select any button when
the user goes off hook or presses the Spkr button. This selection
will also disable the telephone’s Hot Dial Pad feature.
Primary DN and Idle – The telephone will automatically try to
select the PDN button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the
telephone will select an idle Line button (14 PDN or Line
preference - Line Preference) or another idle DN button (14 PDN
or Line preference - PDN Preference).
Primary DN and Ringing – The telephone will automatically try to
select the PDN button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the
telephone will select a ringing Line button (14 PDN or Line
preference - Line Preference) or a ringing DN button (14 PDN or
Line preference - PDN Preference).
Ringing and Idle – The telephone will always answer any ringing
call according to “15 Call Answer Preference” . If a call is not
ringing it will select and idle Line button (14 PDN or Line
preference - Line Preference) or idle DN button (14 PDN or Line
preference - PDN Preference).

Offhook preference button Type. Off hook ringing selections are also
based on “15 Call Answer Preference” choices.

•

CO Line buttons - Line buttons (any type CO, Pooled or Group
CO line button) have priority over DN buttons with “13 Off Hook
Preference” choices. The lowest numbered line button on the
telephone has priority over other line buttons for idle selection.
Primary DN button - DN buttons (any type PDN, Secondary DN or
PhDN button) have priority over Line buttons with “13 Off Hook
Preference” choices. The PDN button has first priority for idle
selection, the lowest numbered DN button on the telephone has
priority over other DN buttons for idle selection if the PDN button
is busy.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-35

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-16
Button
204-15

Programs 203~204 (continued)
Sequence

Ringing Preference

Value(s)
n=

)%, n, +ROG

1. Longest
2. Call Type

Summary
Ringing call answer preference.

•
•

Longest Ringing - any call type - Calls are answered in order of
the longest ringing line no matter what type of call (FIFO).
Longest Ringing - by call type priority - Call Type priority is
applied to the longest ringing button.

Call Type Priorities are fixed in software as shown below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
204-16

Text Message Display

)%, n, +ROG
204-17

Call History Memory

Emergency Calls
Hands Free Calls (after it is switched to ringing by the caller).
ACD calls
Recalls (Hold recall, Automatic call back, ABR, etc.)
External Calls (DID, DIT DISA line calls etc.)
Internal Calls (station, Attendant, Tie line, door phone, etc.)

1. Immediate
2. Not Immediate

Select whether to display an LCD text message.

0~100

Enter the number of calls to be stored in memory for this station.

•
•

Immediate - displays the message.
Not immediate - does not display the message.

)%, n, +ROG
204-18

DTMF Back Tone

Not Used, has no effect on system operation

)%, n, +ROG
204-19

Continuous DTMF

)%, n, +ROG

1. Continuous
2. Not Continuous

Enable / Disable Continuous DTMF.
For each iES32 PDN, set to “not Continuous”, if set to “Continuous”,
outdial notification to pagers and calls to AMIS nodes will not function
properly.
Possible values:

204-20

Display Language

1. English
2. British English
3. French

Select the LCD Display Language.

1. None
2. BPCI
3. BATI

Select the Adapter Type (Desktop OAI or Attendant Console).

1. Leave
2. Separate

Set Blind Transfer Action (Attendant Type Only).

1. Auto
2. Manual

Select the method to enter the destination Mailbox for Call Recording.
If set to “Auto” CTX uses the VM ID of the station initiating the record
function.

)%, n, +ROG
204-21

Adapter

)%, n, +ROG

204-22

Blind Transfer

204-23

Mail Box Selection

Enable, Disable

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG

•
•
•

None (default), BPCI or BATI
BPCI – for USB interface.
BATI – for PC Attendant Console Interface.

Notes
• The DN assigned as the MSG center in PROG 200 is used to call
•
•
204-24

MIC Init. Value

1. On
2. Off

Turn on the microphone automatically when making a speaker phone
call. The microphone must be enabled.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable microphone.

1. Yes
2. No

Enable telephone to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over
Busy Tone while on a speaker phone call.

)%, n, +ROG
204-25

Microphone

204-26

Speaker Mode Tones

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG

13-36

the VM port or Hunt group (PROG 200 FK 22).
When set to “Auto” the VM-ID of the station initiating the record
function is sent to Stratagy ES as the destination mailbox.
When set to “Manual Input” the user may enter any valid Mailbox
followed by the “#” sign. If the user Presses “#” without additional
data the CTX will send the VMID of the originating station.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-16

204-27

Sequence
Ring Over Busy
Cycles

Value(s)
n=

Attd Overflow Dest.

204-29

Trunk Test and Verify

Summary

1. Two Cycles
2. Continuous

Set ROB to ring two times or continuously.

Up to 32 digits

Select overflow destination for attendant.

1. Yes
2. No

Allow Trunk Tests and Verification.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable Automatic Line Hold. This parameter allows a station to “line
hop” from one call to another automatically by placing the first call on
hold.

)%, n, +ROG
204-28

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 203~204 (continued)

Note

See PRG200, 26 to enable ROB to be sent to individual
telephones.

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
204-30

Auto Line Hold

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Feature Button Patterns

The following tables show the various feature button patterns available for )% above.
Table 13-17

20 Button (when FB03 value is 20)
PATTERN1

PATTERN2

PATTERN3

FB01

Primary DN

FB02

CO 1

FB03

CO 2

FB04

CO 3

FB05

CO 4

FB06

CO 5

FB07

CO 6

FB08

CO 7

FB09

CO 8

FB10

CO 9

FB11

CO 10

FB12

CO 11

FB13

CO 12

FB14

CO 13

FB15

CO 14

FB16

CO 15

FB17

CO 16

FB18

CO 17

FB19

CO 18

FB20

Do Not Disturb

No Data

PATTERN4

None

Single Touch Button

Do Not Disturb

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-37

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-18

10 Button (when FB03 value is 10)

Table 13-19

205

PATTERN2

PATTERN3

FB01

Primary DN

FB02

CO 1

FB03

CO 2

FB04

CO 3

FB05

CO 4

FB06

CO 5

FB07

CO 6

FB08

CO 7

FB09

CO 8

FB10

Do Not Disturb

PATTERN2

PATTERN3

FB01

Primary DN

FB02

CO 1

FB03

CO 2

FB04

CO 3

FB05

CO 4

FB06

CO 5

FB07

No Data

FB08

CO 7

No Data

FB09

CO 8

FB10

CO 9

FB11

CO 10

FB12

CO 11

FB13

Do Not Disturb

FB14

No Data

PATTERN4

None

Program 205
Sequence

Value(s)

DKT Feature Keys.

Primary DN
n, +ROG

13-38

None

Single Touch Button

PATTERN1

Summary
The Feature Key assignment allows each key on the telephone to be
addressed and assigned a code representing the function to be
performed. Some feature keys require additional parameters to
completely define the key. For example, a Phantom DN needs a
directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone pitch when ringing
occurs.

, +ROG

205-00

No Data

PATTERN4

14 Button (when FB03 value is 14)

Table 13-20
Button

PATTERN1

0~99999

Enter a Primary DN number to program FBs.
Note

FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204 must be set to One or
Two.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-20

205-01

Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Key Number

Press the desired FB to program.

)%~)%

Note
n=

Code

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Program 205

On the 14-button telephones, the left side buttons are
FB01~FB07 and the right side buttons are FB11~FB17.

Select Desired Feature Code. See “Flexible Button Assignment
Feature Code Table” on page 13-41.

n, 6SNU

100 - PDN
110 - PhDN
120 - CO
130 - GCO
140 - Pooled Line Button
540 - Door Lock Cancel
560 - PhDN Message Waiting
610 - DSS Button
900 - Start Application
Parameter 1

n1 =

See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.

This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes.

n2 =

See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.

This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes except Feature
Codes 560, 610 and 900.

n3 =

See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.

This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 110, 120, 130 and 140
only.

n4 =

See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.

This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 120 and 130 only.

n5 =

See “Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40.

This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 130 only.

n1, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 560,
610 and 900,
make your
selection and
push Spkr for
further
options.

Parameter 2
n2, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 100,
make your
selection and
push Spkr for
further
options.

Parameter 3
n3,see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 110 and
140, make
your selection
and push
Spkr for
further
options.

Parameter 4
n4, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 120,
make your
selection and
push Spkr for
further
options.

Parameter 5
n5, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 130,
make your
selection and
push Spkr for
further
options.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-39

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-21

Feature/Button Code Parameter Assignments

Feature
PDN

PhDN

GCO

Pooled Line
Button

13-40

Button
Code

Sub-parameters

Description

Values
1.
2.
3.
4.

LCD Prompt

Parameter 1

Set ring pattern.

No Ring
Immediate
Delay 1
Delay 2

Parameter 2

Set ring tone.

Enter a value of 1~4.

PITCH=

Parameter 1

Set PhDN.

Maximum 5 digit number.

DN=

Parameter 2

Set ring pattern.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Parameter 3

Set ring tone.

Enter a value of 1~4.

PITCH=

Parameter 1

Set CO number.

Enter a value of 0~264.

LINE NO=

Parameter 2

Set ring pattern.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Parameter 3

Set ring tone.

Enter a value of 1~4.

Parameter 4

Owner DN.

Max 5 characters

OWNER DN=

Parameter 1

Set GCO number.

Enter a value of 0~128.

GCO NO=

Parameter 2

GCO Index.

Enter a value of 0~128.

INDEX=

Parameter 3

Set ring pattern.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Parameter 4

Set ring tone.

Enter a value of 1~4.

Parameter 5

Owner DN.

Max 5 characters

OWNER DN=

Parameter 1

Pooled Line
number.

Enter a value from 0~128.

POOL NO=

Parameter 2

Set ring pattern.

1.
2.
3.
4.

No Ring
Immediate
Delay 1
Delay 2

No Ring
Immediate
Delay 1
Delay 2
PITCH=

No Ring
Immediate
Delay 1
Delay 2

Parameter 3

Set ring tone.

Enter a value of 1~4.

PITCH

Door Lock
Cancel

Parameter 1

Door Lock number.

Enter a value from 1~10.

NUMBER=

PhDN
Message
Waiting

Parameter 1

Set PhDN number.

Max 5 characters.

PH DN=

DSS Button

Parameter 1

DSS Button PDN
number. Up to 7
digits with CTX
Release 1.3 or
higher software. Up
to 5 digits for
releases earlier than
1.3.

You cannot set the same
DN in DSS Key for one
station.

PDN=

Start
Application

Parameter 1

Enter Application
number.

Enter a value between
0~99.

APL NO=

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-22

Flexible Button Assignment Feature Code Table
Buttons Code

Account Code (Frequently used codes)

Attendant Console Group Access Code

n/a

Automatic Attendant (The extension terminal having the simplified attendant console attribute
must set at least the ATT-ANSWER button)

•

Answer

•

Overflow

Automatic Busy Redial
Automatic Callback Cancel
BGM

Telephone Button
Programming

Feature
No Data/Delete Code

Call Forward

•

All Call

•

All Call (Remotely)

•

Busy (External Call Activation)

•

Busy CF-A (External Call Activation)

•

No Answer

•

No Answer (External Call Activation)

•

Busy No Answer

•

Busy No Answer (External Call Activation)

Call Handling

•

Cancel

•

Release

•

Destination Party

•

Release/Answer

•

Privacy

•

Privacy Release

•

Source Party

Call Park

•

System Orbit

Call Pickup

•

Incoming - Group Pickup

•

Incoming - Directed Terminal Pickup

•

Incoming - Directed Group Pickup

•

Incoming - Directed DN Pickup

•

On hold - Local Retrieve

•

On hold - Remote Retrieve

•

On hold - Outside line Retrieve

•

On hold - Directed DN Retrieve

•

On hold and Incoming - Any External Call

•

On hold and Incoming -

Calling Number Identification (CLID)

Dialing

•

Dial Out

Do Not Disturb (DND)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-41

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-22

Flexible Button Assignment Feature Code Table (continued)
Feature

Buttons Code

Door Lock Cancel
Flash - Short
Flash - Long

•

Attendant

•

Supervised

Microphone Cut Off (MCO)
Message Waiting

•

Phantom (PhDN) Message Waiting

Night Transfer
Paging

One Touch Button

•

Page All Groups

•

Page Individual Groups

•

Emergency Page - Individual Group

•

Emergency Page - All Groups

•

Answer Feature

Position Busy
Programming Mode (Enter User Programming Mode)
Split (Conference Split)
Speed Dial (register Speed Dial)
Start Application
Trunk Test
Voice Mail

•

Auto Voice Mail Playback

•

Auto Voice Mail Record

Notes
1. T = Telephone type PCB
2. L = CO line type PCB
3.
= Allowed T1/PRI slots
4. The Base cabinet allows Speaker OCA and DIU data with PDKU in all slots; expansion
cabinets provide these features in slots S_01~S_06 only.
5. Last available slot: B1C=S108, B2C=206, B3C=310, and B5C=510.

Table 13-23
Button
206

Programs 206
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Phantom DN

This command assigns PhantomDN parameters.

, +ROG
206-00

Phantom DN

Up to 5 digits

Enter Phantom DN.

Up to 5 digits

Set PhantomDN’s Owner Station

1. Tone First (default)
2. Voice First

Select from Tone first, or Voice first signaling.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Whether to regard an incoming call as a hands free call

n, +ROG
206-01

Owned PDN

)%, n, +ROG
206-02

Tone/Voice First

)%, n, +ROG
206-03

Handsfree
Answerback

)%, n, +ROG

13-42

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-23

206-04

Sequence
Display DN

Value(s)
n=

Up to 5 digits

)%, n, +ROG

Summary
Enter the number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this
Phantom DN number.
This number is overridden by the number in Program 209, FB04 (if
assigned) and if the Phantom DN is in a hunt group. When calling
from this Phantom DN, the number displayed on the called telephone
appears in order of priority as follows:

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 206 (continued)

This number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the PhDN is in
a hunt group.
...or this number in Program 200, FB15 (if assigned).
...or the calling telephone’s PDN.
206-05

System Call Forward

0~4 (CTX100)
0~10 (CTX670 Basic)
0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Select the System Call Forward value.

Up to 16 digits

Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this
PhDN calls voice mail; or, when this PhDN is called and then forwards
to voice mail (This number is prefixed by codes in Program 579,
)%~)%).

)%, n, +ROG
206-06

VM ID Code

)%, n, +ROG

This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or
DTMF tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PhDN; and on calls
to the PhDN that forward to voice mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or
DTMF choice).
Note

Do not enter a VMID code in this field if this PhDN is
associated with a PDN in a multiple DN hunt group (Program
209, )%).

The associated PDN’s VMID code (Program 200, )%) will be sent
to voice mail.
206-09

Message Center

Up to 16 digits

Enter the Message Waiting Center DN, VM Pilot Number or lowest
member of VM hunt group.

Up to 16 digits

Select radio button for user name to be included in the list display of
Large LCD (Directory Assistance).

)%, n, +ROG
206-11

Display Name

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Program 207
Note Use Program 207 only for CTX software versions R1.03 and above.

Assign the Feature button as a One Touch button using the following programs before using Program 207.
• Use Program 205 to assign DKT’s feature button as a One Touch button
• Use Program 213 to assign the Add-on Module feature button as a One Touch button
• Use Program 215 to assign DSS Console feature button as a One Touch button
Button

Sequence

207

Single Touch Button
Data Assignments

207-00

Primary DN

207-01

Feature Key Number

Value(s)

Summary
Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNS.

, +ROG
n=

Up to 5 digits

Enter Primary DN of DKT.

1~2860

Enter the feature number of the one touch button that registers the
operating data.

Up to 64 digits

Registration of the operating data.

n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
207-02

Registration Data
(See details below)

)%, n, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-43

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

1. FB00 – Primary DN.
2. FB01 – The button that you assign as the One Touch Button on the DKT.
You can assign the One Touch Button from the DKT for the DKT FB key, Add-on Module FB key and
also DSS Console FB key. Follow the steps and examples below to assign One Touch Buttons for each
of the following.
➤ To assign the One Touch Button for the DKT
➤ The data is 1~24. Example: FB1 is 1, FB20 is 20.
➤ To assign the One Touch Button for the Add-on Module
➤ Use four digits (1yzz) to assign the single touch button for the Add-on Module.

1 is for Add-on Module.
y is the location of Add-on Module (1 or 2)
zz is the feature button for the Add-on Module (01~20). zz is equal to two digits.
Example 1: FB01 for Add-on Module 1 is 1101
Example 2: FB20 for Add-on Module 2 is 1220
➤ To assign the One Touch Button for the DSS Console
➤ Use four digits (2yzz) to assign the single touch button for the DSS Console.

2 is for the DSS console
y is the location of DSS console (1~8 )
zz is the feature button for DSS console ( 01~60 ). zz is equal to two digits.
Example 1: FB01 for DSS console 1 is 2101
Example 2: FB20 for DSS console 8 is 2860
3. FB02 – The Information data for One Touch Button
From the programming DKT.
Note You will have to use the ESC code when programming the DKT. The table below gives you One

Touch Data Entry sequences.
Table 13-24

One Touch Data Entry Sequences

Data for Single Touch Button
1~9, 0

13-44

Setting code from DKT

Display Data

1~9, 0

[Vol Up] +

[Vol Up] + #

Mode

[Vol Up] + [Mode]

&SK01

Page

[Vol Up] + [Page]

&SK02

Scroll

[Vol Up] + [Scroll]

&SK03

Feature

[Vol Up] + [Feature]

&SK04

Msg

[Vol Up] + [Msg]

&MSG

Mic

[Vol Up] + [Mic]

&MIC

Spkr

[Vol Up] + [Spkr]

&SPK

Spdial

[Vol Up] + [Spdial]

&SPD

Redial

[Vol Up] + [Redial]

&RDL

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-24

One Touch Data Entry Sequences (continued)
Setting code from DKT

Display Data

[Vol Up] + [Cnf/Trn]

&CNF

Vol Up

[Vol Up] + [Vol Up]

&UP

Vol Down

[Vol Up] + [Vol Down]

&DWN

DKT’s FB

[Vol Up] + [FB on DKT]

&FByy (yy=01-24)

ADM’s FB

[Vol Up] + [FB on ADM]

&ADxyy (x=1,2 yy=01-20)

DSS’s FB

[Vol Up] + [FB on DSS]

&DSxyy (x=1-8 yy=01-60)

Note

Telephone Button
Programming

Data for Single Touch Button
Cnf/Trn

& means ESC code

Example for Setting the data of Single Touch Button from Programming DKT
1. Choose Program 207 and press +ROG key.
2. Choose Primary DN number and press +ROG Key.
3. Press )% and input digits for FB and press +ROG key. In this case 12.
4. Press )% and Press [9RO8S][)%].
Table 13-25
Button

Programs 208~218
Sequence

208

Station Timer
Assignments

208-00

Primary DN

Value(s)

Summary
Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNS.

, +ROG
n=

1~640

5~20

n, +ROG
208-01

ABR Retry Count

Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

)%, n, +ROG
208-02

ABR Retry Interval
Timer

(default = 15)
n=

ABR Recall Timer

)%, n, +ROG
208-04

Hold Recall Timer
First Interdigit Timer

Second Interdigit
Timer

Ring Xfer No Answer
Timer

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

0~32
(default = 15)

0~180
(default = 5)

)%, n, +ROG
208-07

Up to 5 digits

Enter the number of retry attempts made by ABR when dialing a busy
telephone number.
Select the amount of time (in seconds) ABR waits between dialing
attempts.
Select the number of seconds ABR will call back the station after
receiving ring back tone from the dialed number.
Select the number of seconds before a call is placed on hold recalls.

(default = 60)

)%, n, +ROG
208-06

Up to 9 digits
(default = 20)

)%, n, +ROG
208-05

Up to 5 digits
(default = 60)

)%, n, +ROG
208-03

Enter the Primary DN.

0~600
(default = 32)

Select the amount of time a Station has to dial after going off hook
before a call is terminated (ROT is heard).
Select the amount of time the system waits between dialed digits
before terminating a call (ROT is heard).
Select the Ring Transfer Idle station or Busy station (Camp-on) Recall
Time (in seconds).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-45

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-25
Button
209

Programs 208~218 (continued)
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Station Hunting Group

This command assigns Station Hunting Group data.

, +ROG
209-00

Group Number

n, +ROG

209-01

Hunt Method

Pilot Number

Hunt Group Number.

1. Serial
2. Circular (for Multiple
DN hunt groups)
(default)
3. Distributed (for Voice
Mail hunt groups)

Select Hunt Method.

Up to 5 digits

Enter Pilot Directory Number. This is the number that is dialed to call
the hunt group.

)%, n, +ROG

209-02

Up to 3 digits
1~90 (CTX100)
1~200 (CTX670 Basic)
1~640 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = no value)

)%, n, +ROG

Note

209-04

Number to Display

Up to 5 digits

Enter the number that displays when called by, or when calling any
member of the hunt group.

)%, n, +ROG

Note

209-05

Pilot No. SCF

Any type of hunt group can have a pilot number. Distributed
hunt groups must have a pilot number. Voice Mail hunt
groups should be Distributed with a Pilot Number. Multiple
DN Hunt groups should be Circular with no Pilot Number.

This number should be the DH Group Pilot number for Voice
Mail hunt groups. This number could be the PDN of a Multiple
DN Hunt group, in which case the number would override the
number assigned in Program 200, FB15 for PDNs and
Program 206, FB04 for Phantom DNs.

0~4 (CTX100)
0~10 (CTX670 Basic)
0~32 (CTX670 Exp.)

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable if hunt group is created for multiple DN operation. Multiple DN
hunt groups should be circular with no pilot number.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Whether to execute Automatic Camp On to the Distributed Hunt
Group or not.

)%, n, +ROG

Allows you to assign a System Call Forward pattern to the Pilot
Number of a Hunt Group.

(default = 0)
209-06

Multiple DN Hunt

)%, n, +ROG
209-07

DHG Auto Camp-on

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Should be applied to VM Distributed Hunt Groups so callers
automatically camp on to Voice Mail when all VM ports are busy.
Does not apply to Circular or Serial hunt groups.

210

Group Call Pickup

The Call Pickup Group assignment specifies which group numbers
this station will participate when either the Group Call Pickup or the
Group Directed Call Pickup features are invoked. A user may be
assigned to more than one group.

, +ROG
210-00

Primary DN

Up to 5 digits

Enter the Primary DN.

1. Yes
2. No (default)

Indicate whether this station is to participate in this Call Pickup group.

n, +ROG
21001~32

213

Group 1~32

)%a)%, n, +ROG,
+ROG

Note

ADM Feature Keys

The Feature Key assignment allows each key on the telephone to be
addressed and assigned a code representing the function to be
performed. Some feature keys require additional parameters to
completely define the key. For example, a Phantom DN needs a
directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone pitch when ringing
occurs.

, +ROG

213-00

PDN+ADM
yyyyyx, +ROG

13-46

01~05 are available for CTX100, 01~10 are available for
CTX670 Basic, and 01~32 are available for CTX670 Exp.

yyyyy Primary DN (0~99999)
=
ADM (1 or 2)
x=

Enter a Primary DN plus an ADM number to Program ADM FBs.
Note

FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204 must be set to One or
Two.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-25

213-01

Sequence

Value(s)

Key Number

Summary
Press the desired FB to program.

)%~)%
Code

1~20

n, 6SNU

Select Desired Feature Code. See the Feature Code Table 13-22 on
page 41.
100 - PDN
110 - PhDN
120 - CO
130 - GCO
140 - Pooled Line Button
540 - Door Lock Cancel
560 - PhDN Message Waiting
610 - DSS Button
900 - Start Application

Parameter 1

n1 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes.

n2 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes except Feature
Codes 560, 610 and 900.

n3 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 110, 120, 130 and 140
only.

n4 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 120 and 130 only.

n5 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 130 only.

n1, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 560,
610 and 900,
make your
selection and
push 6SNUIRU

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 208~218 (continued)

IXUWKHU
RSWLRQV.
Parameter 2
n2, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 100,
make your
selection and
push 6SNUIRU

IXUWKHU
RSWLRQV.
Parameter 3
n3,see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 110 and
140, make
your selection
and push

6SNUIRU
IXUWKHU
RSWLRQV.

Parameter 4
n4, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 120,
make your
selection and
push 6SNUIRU

IXUWKHU
RSWLRQV.
Parameter 5
n5, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 130,
make your
selection and
push 6SNUIRU

IXUWKHU
RSWLRQV.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-47

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-25
Button

Programs 208~218 (continued)
Sequence

214

DSS Console
Assignment

214-00

Primary DN

21401~08

DSS 1~DSS 8

Value(s)

Summary
This assignment allows up to eight Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Consoles to be assigned to a station. The assignment is referenced
to the stations’s Primary DN.

, +ROG
n=

Up to 5 digits

Enter the Prime Directory Number of the station that is to be
associated with the DSS console(s).

xx =
yy =
zz =

Cabinet (01~07)
Slot (01~10)
Circuit (01~08)

Enter the DSS equipment number as xxyyzz.

n, +ROG

)%~)%, xxyyzz,
+ROG, +ROG

•
•

Cabinet – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (CTX100).
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet (CTX670).
Slot – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(CTX100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

Example: If the DSS console should be connected to a PDKU or
BDKU/BDKS in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Note

215

DSS Feature Keys

, +ROG

215-00

PDN+DSS

yyyyy = Primary DN (0~99999)

yyyyyx, +ROG

DSS (1~8)

Enter a Primary DN plus DSS Key Assignment button to program
DSS FBs.
Note

13-48

If a PDN is assigned to the DSS equipment number it must
be deleted, using PRG201, before attempting to assign the
DSS console.

FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204 must be set to One or
Two.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-25

215-01

Sequence

Value(s)

DSS Key Number

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 208~218 (continued)
Summary
Press the desired FB to program on your DSS.

)%~)%
Code

Select Desired Feature Code. See “Flexible Button Assignment
Feature Code Table” on page 13-41.

n, 6SNU

100 - PDN
110 - PhDN
120 - CO
130 - GCO
140 - Pooled Line Button
540 - Door Lock Cancel
560 - PhDN Message Waiting
610 - DSS Button
900 - Start Application
Parameter 1

n1 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes.

n2 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for all Feature Codes except Feature
Codes 560, 610 and 900.

n3 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 110, 120, 130 and 140
only.

n4 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 120 and 130 only.

n5 =

See “Flexible Button
Assignment Feature Code
Table” on page 13-41 and
“Feature/Button Code
Parameter Assignments”
on page 13-40 for more
details.

This Parameter is required for Feature Codes 130 only.

n1, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 560,
610 and 900,
make your
selection and
push 6SNUIRU

IXUWKHU
RSWLRQV.
Parameter 2
n2, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 100,
make your
selection and
push 6SNUIRU

IXUWKHU
RSWLRQV.
Parameter 3
n3,see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 110 and
140, make
your selection
and push
+ROG,+ROG.
Otherwise.
push 6SNU.

Parameter 4
n4, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 120,
make your
selection and
push 6SNUIRU

IXUWKHU
RSWLRQV.
Parameter 5
n5, see Note
Note

For Feature
Code 130,
make your
selection and
push 6SNUIRU

IXUWKHU
RSWLRQV.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-49

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-25
Button

Programs 208~218 (continued)
Sequence

Value(s)

216

Emergency Ringdown
Assignment.

216-00

Primary DN

216-01

Emergency Ringdown n =

Summary
Assigns Emergency Ring Down parameters to Primary DNs.

, +ROG
n=

Up to 5 digits

Enter the Primary DN.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable an Emergency Ringdown Number.

5~60
(default = 0)

Enter the length of off-hook time that will cause a DN to originate an
Emergency

Up to 5 digits

Enter the destination DN for the Emergency Ringdown.

n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
216-02

Emergency Ringdown
Timer

)%, n, +ROG
216-03

Destination

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
217

ISDN Station Data

ISDN stations need a set of parameters to be set to define its
capabilities. These include a Name when calling display phones, Call
of Service settings, etc.

, +ROG
217-00

Primary DN

Up to 5 digits

Enter Primary DN.

Up to 9 digits

Enter a name for this station.

1. Dial Tone (default)
2. Entry Tone
3. No Tone

Select the audible tone when dialing.

0~32

Select the System Call Forward assignment for this station.

n, +ROG
217-01

Station Name

)%, n, +ROG,
217-02

Dial Method

)%, n, +ROG,
217-03

System Call Forward

)%, n, +ROG,
217-04

CF Password

(default = 0)
n=

Up to 4 digits

Protect the System Call Forward settings by creating a password.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable the Door Phone ringing indicator to override Do Not Disturb.

1~8

Select this station’s emergency call group.

)%, n, +ROG,
217-05

Door Phone Override
DND

217-06

Emergency Call
Group

)%, n, +ROG,
(default = 1)

)%, n, +ROG,
217-07

COS Override Code

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable Class of Service override.

Up to 5 digits

Enter the DN to be displayed on the LCD.

Up to 10 digits

Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this
PDN calls voice mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to
voice mail (this number is prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16).

)%, n, +ROG,
217-08

Display DN

)%, n, +ROG,
217-09

VMID Code SMDI

)%, n, +ROG,

Digits 0~9, * and #

Note

217-12

Name Display

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
218

1. Enable
2. Disable

Station Hunt Group
Assignment

This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI
packets or DTMF tones on direct and forwarded calls to the
PDN. See Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.

Whether to put the user name in the list display.
This assignment configures station DNs to hunt groups and assigns
the order of rotation in which the DNs are hunted.

, +ROG
218-00

Hunt Group Number
n, +ROG

13-50

1~640

Enter an existing Hunt Group number or use the List, Add, Append,
Modify, or Delete buttons as described above.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
200 Series Programs

Table 13-25

218-01

Sequence
Hunt Order

Value(s)
1~560

This field assigns a station DNs position within a Hunt Group’s Hunt
Order. Programmers should assign the last station in the Hunt Order
first and assign the first station in the Hunt Order last.

Up to 5 digits

Enter a new DN to the Hunt Group’s Hunt Order.

1. Modify
2. Insert

Modify (replace) an existing assignment.

)%, n, +ROG,
218-02

Summary

)%, n, +ROG,
218-03

DN Set Type

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
219

Network DSS Key
Notify Data Delete

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 208~218 (continued)

This program lets you disable the DSS function for the node ID
entered in this screen.

, +ROG
219-00

Network DSS Node
ID
n, +ROG

Important!

Don’t use this program unless requested by Toshiba
Technical Support.

Enter the Node ID of the Network DSS key Notify Data to be deleted.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-51

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

300 Series Programs
Table 13-26
Button
300

Programs 300~302
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Trunk Assignment

This command assigns an analog or T1 trunk (line) and its
parameters to the system.

, +ROG
300-00

Line Number

1~64 (CTX100)
1~96 (CTX670 Basic)
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the Line Number.

xx =

Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the line equipment number as xxyyzz. Equipment numbers are
required when assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be
used to display the equipment location of existing trunks.

yy =

Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)

Example: If the trunk should be connected to an RCOU in cabinet
shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.

Circuit (01~04)

Cabinet numbers:

...or zz = T1 Circuit 01~24
(CTX670).

•
•

n, +ROG

300-01

Line Equipment No.

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG

zz =

CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•
300-02

Incoming Line Group

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

)%, n, +ROG

CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

Assign the trunk to Incoming Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be
members of one incoming and one outgoing line group.

(default = 0)
300-03

Outgoing Line Group

)%, n, +ROG

Assign the trunk to Outgoing Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be
members of one incoming and one outgoing line group.

(default = 0)
300-04

Dial Mode

1. Rotary Dial 10PPS
2. Rotary Dial 20PPS
3. DTMF (default)

Enter the Dial Mode.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Enter the signalling type.

1. Immediate Start
(default)
2. Timing Start
3. Wink Start

Enter the Start Method. This setting defines the start protocol method
used between the PSTN and this trunk. For DID/Tie trunks.

1. Received
2. Not Received (default)

Enable Release Supervision from the CO.

1. Received
2. Not Received (default)

Enable Answer Supervision from the CO.
Enter the trunk name.

)%, n, +ROG
300-05

Signaling

)%, n, +ROG

300-06

Start Method

)%, n, +ROG
300-07

Release Supervision

)%, n, +ROG

DID
Loop (default)
Ground
Tie
LP (Japan)
SR (Japan)
ACU (UK)

300-08

Answer Supervision

300-09

Trunk Name

Up to 14 digits

300-10

External Ring Repeat

1. Supplied (default)
2. Not Supplied

)%, n, +ROG

•
•

DP 10 PPS = Rotary Dial, 10 PPS
DP 20 PPS = Rotary Dial, 20 PPS

Note

)%, n, +ROG

13-52

This function is accessible only through CTX WinAdmin.

Supply the External Ringing Signal pattern to stations. For behind
PBX/Centrex trunks.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-26

300-11

Sequence
DTMF Back Tone

Value(s)
1. Padded
2. DTMF Tone (default)
3. No Tone

Select DTMF Back Tone type.

1~999

Change the trunk hunting order sequence for this Trunk.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

)%, n, +ROG
300-12

Hunt Order

)%, n, +ROG
300-13

Immediate CutThrough

Summary

(default = 1)

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

This option should be enabled on a line only if the talk-path must be
established immediately after seizing a selected outgoing line.

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 300~302 (continued)

Example, a line connected to a Central Office Ringdown circuit.
CAUTION!

This option will bypass Destination Restriction
and E911 digit analysis. Do not enable this
option on a line where these functions are
required.

This option is available only on ground and loop, analog or T1 circuits.
It should not be enabled for Tie, DID, ISDN and QSIG lines.
Available with CTX R1.01, M22 and above software.

302

PRI Trunks

The PRI and IP QSIG interface cards need to have a number of
assignments for defining its operation. These include which channels
are available for use and the location of the D channel or signaling
channel. A number of optional functional capabilities also need to be
enabled or disabled.

, +ROG

302-00

Channel Group

1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Channel Group Number

xx =

Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz.

n, +ROG
302-01

RPTU Equipment No.

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG

302-02

Protocol

ILG

zz = Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU parameters

Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
050301.Enter the equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN PRI
Trunk is to be assigned.

yy =

Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)

zz =

Circuit 01

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~48 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

1. Implicit
2. Explicit

Identify whether the communication with the PSTN requires an
identifier. Select Explicit to require an identifier.

0~126

An identifier must be used as part of the addressing when an “explicit”
identified is used to communicate with the PSTN which channel on
which link is used for the given call. This identifier is assigned by the
connected PSTN.

)%, n, +ROG

302-03

Note

)%, n, +ROG

Nat’l ISDN
ETSI
TTC
Nat’l ISDN - Nortel
QSIG

Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU
parameters in the system. It can also be used to display the
equipment location of existing RPTU PCBs.
The Protocol to be followed defines the type of interface expected
based upon the equipment type at the distant end of the connection.

Primary ISDN needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process
the calls being received. If multiple trunk groups are used within the
Channel Group, then Call-by-Call Services must be used.

(default = 0)
302-04

OLG

)%, n, +ROG

Primary ISDN needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process
the calls being originated. If multiple trunk groups are used within the
Channel Group, then Call-by-Call Services must be used.

(default = 0)
302-05

Trunk ID Type

302-06

Trunk ID Number

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG

(default = 0)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-53

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-26
Button
302-07

Programs 300~302 (continued)
Sequence

D Ch Position

Value(s)
n=

)%, n, +ROG

Summary

1~24

PRI includes a 64-kbps D-channel (for transfer of signal information).
Select the channel position to be used for D channel signaling.

(default = 24)

Note
30208~13

30214~18

302-19

Bearer Services:

• Speech
• 3.1 KHz Audio
• 7 KHz Audio
• Unrestr. 64K
• Unrestr. 56K
• Unrestr. 2x64K
)%~)%, n, 6SNU,
n1, +ROG
Bearer Services:

• Unrestr. 384K
• Unrestr. 1536K
• Unrestr. 1920K
• Restr. Digital
• Video
)%~)%, n, 6SNU,
n1, +ROG
Bearer Service
Multirate Unrestricted

1. Enable
2. Disable

Enable the Bearer Capabilities allowed for this PRI Trunk channel
group.

n1 =

1. Channel Number
2. Slot Map

Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The Bearer Capabilities (384k Unrestricted(H0), 1536k
Unrestricted(H11), 1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk
Video, and Unrestricted Multirate) are not used and should remain
disabled.

n1 =

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.

Note

Channel Number B
Channel Number H
Slot Map B
Slot Map H

B Ch Selection
Method

Note

In North America, only Channel Number map is used
(Channel Number).

In North America, only Channel Number B map is used.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

The Bearer Capabilities 384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted
(H11), 1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video and
Unrestricted Multirate are not used and should remain disabled.

1. Exclusive
2. Preferred
3. Any

The method used for selecting an idle ‘B’ channel and the reaction if
the PSTN indicates the channel is not available needs to be chosen
to originate a call from CTX.

)%, n, +ROG
302-20

This field is used only when the span interface speed is 1.5M.
If the span interface speed is 2M the value is fixed at 16.

)%, n, +ROG

Preferred option is recommended, unless PSTN needs other choice.
302-21

B Ch Selection

n1 =

1.
2.
3.
4.

1. Fixed1 (default)
2. Fixed2
3. Flexible

1544 Time Slot Pattern.

1. Fixed1 (default)
2. Fixed2
3. Flexible

2048 Time Slot Pattern.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Specify whether the T-Wait timer is to be enabled or disabled. This
field is only valid for Nat’l ISDN.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable Ringback Tone when terminating a call. This field is only valid
for Nat’l ISDN.

1. Master
2. Slave (default)

Set this span as Master or Slave for Layer 2 of a QSIG PRI. The
opposite value must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI
terminates. This governs call setup activity and is not related to clock
synchronization.

1. Side A (default)
2. Side B

Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a QSIG PRI. The
opposite value must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI
terminates.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a QSIG PRI. The
opposite value must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI
terminates. (Not used in U.S.A. Used in the UK.)

)%, n, +ROG
302-22

T1 Time Slot Pattern

)%, n, +ROG
302-23

E1 Time Slot Pattern

)%, n, +ROG
302-24

T-Wait Timer

)%, n, +ROG
302-25

RBT on Incoming Call

)%, n, +ROG
302-26

Network Mode

)%, n, +ROG
302-27

Negotiation Priority

)%, n, +ROG
302-28

Layer 1 Short Break
Tolerant

)%, n, +ROG

13-54

Forward Cyclic
Backward Cyclic
Forward Terminal
Backward Terminal

The search method for choosing an idle ‘B’ channel shall also be
specified. Backward Terminal is the normal method with the PSTN
following a Forward Terminal method.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-26

302-29

Sequence
29 2-B channel
Transfer

Value(s)
n=

1. Enable
2. Disable

)%, n, +ROG

Summary
Enable this option to allow 2-B channel conference on PRI calls. This
allows to PRI channels to be connected in the same conference or
Tandem call.
Note

302-30

30 Q931 Protocol
Timer

1. Normal
2. Long

This option must also be enabled by PRI provider to allow it
to work.

Sets the Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is
300s.

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 300~302 (continued)

)%, n, +ROG

Table 13-27

Bearer Services Table
Bearer Services

Nat’l ISDN

ETSI

TTC

Speech

3.1 KHz Audio

7 KHz Audio
unrestricted digital
information

Circuit
Mode

64 kbps

Rate adaptation from 56
kbps

2x64
384kbp (H0)

1536kbps (H11)

1920kbps (H12)

multirate (n x 64 kbps)
Restricted digital Information

Video

Packet
Mode

Table 13-28
Button

Shelf/Slot/Circuit

Programs 303~315
Sequence

303

ISDN Trunk Delete

303-00

Channel Group
Number

304

Incoming Line Group
Assignment

Value(s)

Summary
This command deletes ISDN Trunks.

, +ROG
n=

n, +ROG, +ROG

1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

This assignment is used to configure ILGs only, OLGs are configured
in the Outgoing Line Group Assignment 306. The same line can be
placed in an ILG and OLG.

, +ROG
304-00

Group Number
n, +ROG

Enter the channel group number to delete.

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the group number of the line group that should be configured.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-55

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-28
Button
304-01

Programs 303~315 (continued)
Sequence

Group Type

Value(s)
1. Analog (default)
2. ISDN

Select the ILG Type.

1. CO (default)
2. Tie

Select the Trunk Type.

1. DID
2. DIT (default)

Select CO Trunk Service Type.

1. Standard (default)
2. QSIG

Select the Tie Trunk Service Type. This field is required when Trunk
Type is set to Tie.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Select ILG GCO Key Group for DIT mode (see Trunk Type above).
The same GCO cannot belong to different ILGs.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Select ILG Pooled Line Key Group for DIT mode. The same Pooled
Line Group cannot belong to different ILGs.

1~32
(default = 1)

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

1~16
(default = 1)

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

1~16
(default = 1)

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

1~16
(default = 1)

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

0~7
(default = 0)

Select number of DID digits received from CO.

1. Audio (default)
2. Speech

Select Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.

0~60 sec.
(default = 12)

Select time to ring the Delay 1 destination.

0~60 sec.
(default = 24)

Select time to ring the Delay 2 destination.

1~180 sec.
(default = 15)

Select Interdigit 1 timer value.

1~180 sec.
(default = 5)

Select Interdigit 2 timer value.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Select in box to toggle Automatic Camp-on.

1. User Provided
(default)
2. Network Provided

Select Calling Number Identification source.

)%, n, +ROG
304-02

Trunk Type

)%, n, +ROG
304-03

Service Type

304-04

Private Service Type

304-05

GCO Key Number

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
304-06

Pooled Key Number

)%, n, +ROG
304-07

COS

)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n,+ROG
304-08

DRL

)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n,+ROG
304-09

FRL

)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n,+ROG
304-10

QPL

)%Q6SNUQ
6SNUQ+ROG
304-11

DID Digits

304-12

Speech/3.1 KHz

304-13

Ringing Timer Delay 1 n =

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
304-14

Ringing Timer Delay 2 n =

)%, n, +ROG
304-15

Interdigit 1 Timer

304-16

Interdigit 2 Timer

304-17

Auto Camp-on

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
304-18

Calling Number ID

)%, n, +ROG

13-56

Summary

0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-28

304-19

Sequence
Intercept

Value(s)

Summary

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable Intercept. A call is transferred to a special destination called
intercept position when the destination of a trunk line call is not
determined with DID, DIT or DISA. Intercept is also activated when
the destination is determined, but the call cannot be terminated due to
a defect or an incorrect number. If the system has a simplified
attendant console, the attendant console is usually specified to
terminate the call. This function ensures termination of a trunk line
call.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable Send Dial Tone.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override.

1~32
(default = 1)

Enter the Network COS number.

1~16
(default = 1)

Enter the LCR Group number. Calls from this ILG cannot tandem if
this field is not entered.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable authority to change COS Override Code.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable authority to create system speed dial codes.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable authority for the originator of a call to invoke OCA when
encountering a busy station.

1. Dial Tone (default)
2. Entry Tone
3. Silence

Send DTMF tones as a complete number rather than digit-by digit.

1~8
(default = 1)

Used to enable E911 calling across a QSIG network. The QSIG ILG is
assigned to an Emergency Call Group in the same way a station is in
Program 200 FB17. Without this assignment, the call will not attempt
to complete to one of the trunks in the Emergency Group and will
result in an abandoned call. See Program 550 “Enhanced 911
Emergency Call Group” on page 13-87.

1~8 (default = 1)

Enter the Tenant number to which this DID should be assigned.

)%, n, +ROG

304-20

Send Dial Tone

)%, n, +ROG
304-21

TGAC Override

304-22

Network COS

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
304-23

LCR Group

)%, n, +ROG
304-24

Change COS
Override Code

304-25

304-26

Originator Invoke
OCA

304-27

Senderized Tone
Mode

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 303~315 (continued)

)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
304-28

Emergency Call
Group

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

304-29

Tenant Number

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
305

ILG Delete

305-00

ILG Number

This command deletes Incoming Line Groups.

, +ROG
n=

n, +ROG, +ROG

306

Outgoing Line Group
Assignment

306-00

Group Number

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

, +ROG
n=

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the OLG Group number.

1. Analog (default)
2. ISDN

Select the OLG Type.

1. CO (default)
2. Tie

Select the Trunk Type.

n, +ROG
306-01

Group Type

)%, n, +ROG
306-02

Trunk Type

)%, n, +ROG

Enter the ILG number to delete.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-57

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-28
Button
306-03

Programs 303~315 (continued)
Sequence

Service Type

Value(s)
1. Standard (default)
2. QSIG

TIE Trunk Service Type.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Select the first GCO Key Group number.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Select first Pooled Line Key Group number.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Select second Pooled Line Key Group number.

1~32
(default = 1)

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

1~16
(default = 1)

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

1~16
(default = 1)

Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

1. Audio (default)
2. Speech

Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Select MOH Source.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable Trunk forced Account Codes.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable Destination Restriction.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable Credit Card Calling.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable CESID sending.

1. Cut through (default)
2. Senderized

Digit sending Mode for QSIG only.

)%, n, +ROG
306-04

GCO Key1 Number

)%, n, +ROG
306-06

Pooled Key1 Number

)%, n, +ROG
306-07

Pooled Key2 Number

)%, n, +ROG
306-08

COS

)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n,+ROG
306-09

FRL

)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n,+ROG
306-10

QPL

)%, n, 6SNU, n,
6SNU, n,+ROG
306-11

Speech/3.1 KHz

)%, n, +ROG
306-12

MOH Source

)%, n, +ROG

306-13

Account Codes

306-14

Destination
Restriction

Summary

)%, n, +ROG

Quiet Tone
External 1 (default)
External 2
External 3
External 4
External 5
External 6
External 7
External 8
External 9
External 10
External 11
External 12
External 13
External 14
External 15

)%, n, +ROG
306-15

Credit Cart Calling

306-16

Send CESID

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
306-17

QSIG Sending Type

)%, n, +ROG

13-58

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-28

306-18

Sequence
Network COS

Value(s)
n=

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
307

1~32
(default = 1)

OLG Delete

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 303~315 (continued)
Summary
Select Network COS number.
This command deletes Outgoing Line Groups.

, +ROG
307-00

OLG Number

n, +ROG, +ROG

308

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Trunk Timers

Enter the OLG number to delete.

Assigns trunk timers for analog and T1 trunks.

, +ROG
308-00

Trunk Equipment No.

xx =

xxyyzz, +ROG

308-01

Auto Release

Short Flash

Circuit 01~24

1. Disable
Select the Automatic Release timing.
2. Detect 95ms
Note Select Disable if the CO does not send the automatic release
3. Detect 450ms (default)
signal to the loop start trunk.

0~15, where 1 = 100msec.
(default = 5, which is .5
seconds)

Pause after Flash

Select Short Flash Time. When a telephone initiates the short flash
signal to the CO line it is connected to (using the short Flash feature
button or access code #450) the duration of a short flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to hook
flash a centrex line. The short flash range is 0 to 1.5 seconds in
increments of 0.1 seconds.

0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30,
where 5 = .5 seconds.
(default = 20)

Select Long Flash Time. When a telephone initiates the long flash
signal to the CO line it is connected to (using the Long Flash feature
button or access code #451) the duration of a long flash is determined
by this command. Normally this signal is used to disconnect the line.
The long flash range is 0 to 3 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds.

0~5, 0 = immediately sent,
and 1sec.delay to
5sec.delay

Pause time after flash: After a flash signal is sent to a CO line, this
timer determines when the line will start to send the dialed digits to
the other end.

)%, n, +ROG

308-04

Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new trunk
to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.

zz =

0 = no flash

Long Flash

Note

Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)

)%, n, +ROG,

308-03

Enter the trunk equipment number.

yy =

)%, n, +ROG,
308-02

Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

)%, n, +ROG

(default = 1 second delay
before sending digits)
308-04

Response Timer

0~3000

)%, n, +ROG

The response timer is for analog DID/TIE lines that have the “start
method” set for “Timing” in Program 300-06. After a line is seized this
timer determines when the line will start to send the dialed digits to
the other end.
Possible Values 0=immediatly sent, and 50msec.delay to
500msec.delay. (default=500mseconds delay before sending digits).

309

Direct Inward Dialing

This command assigns DID Number Analysis Table to ILG.

, +ROG
309-00

ILG Number

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Select the ILG number.

1~7 digits may include wild
card “?” where “?” = 0~9

Enter a DID number.

n, +ROG
309-01

DID Number

)%, n, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-59

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-28
Button
309-02

Programs 303~315 (continued)
Sequence

MOH Source

Value(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

GCO Key Group number.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Pooled Line Key Group

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the Destination Type for Audio/Speech calls.

n1 =

Up to 32 digits

)%, n, +ROG

309-03

GCO Key Group

)%, n, +ROG
309-04

Pool Key Group

)%, n, +ROG
30905~07

Audio Day1/Day2/
Night Destination
Type

)%~)%, n, 6SNU
Audio Day1/Day2/
Night Destination
Digits

Summary

Quiet Tone
External 1 (default)
External 2
External 3
External 4
External 5
External 6
External 7
External 8
External 9
External 10
External 11
External 12
External 13
External 14
External 15

No Data (default)
Dialing Digits
DISA
Built-in modem
Night Bell

n1, +ROG

Set Music On Hold for Analog ISDN DID Trunk

Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code. If Dialing
Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line
should ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx,
where xx is the external Page group number. If the default page
access code #31 was changed, use the new page access code as the
leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered
to route incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.

30908~10

Data Day1/Day2/
Night Destination
Type

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

n1 =

Up to 32 digits

)%~)%, n, 6SNU
Data Day1/Day2/
Night Destination
Digits
n1, +ROG

No Data (default)
Dialing Digits
DISA
Built-in modem
Night Bell

Select the Destination Type for Audio/Speech calls.

13-60

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-28

309-11

Sequence
DNIS VMID Code

Value(s)
n=

Up to 10 digits

)%, n, +ROG

Summary
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/
DNIS number.
Note

This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in
Program 580, 01. This code will be replaced, after voice mail
answers, by the DTMF code set in Program 309, 15 DID/
DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed; therefore, if using
Program 309, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 303~315 (continued)

This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call
that rings directly to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN
that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN that forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS
number or the forwarding DN’s mail box number will be sent to voice
mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM
general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM
will go to the DN’s VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets direct and
forwarded DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
309-12

DNIS Name

Up to 16 digits

Enter DNIS name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX
WinAdmin (not from programming phones).

Digits 0~9, * and #. For a
pause enter Px, where
x=0~9 (seconds), up to 10
characters (default = no
value).

Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/
DNIS number.

)%, n, +ROG
309-15

VM Dial

)%, n, +ROG,+ROG

This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call
that rings directly to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN
that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN that forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS
number or the forwarding DN’s mail box number will be sent to voice
mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM
general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM
will go to the DN’s VMID mail box. This voice mail box number is sent
to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port answers a DID/
DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if
the CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.

309-16

Tenant Number

1~8 (default = 1)

Enter the Tenant number to which this DID should be assigned.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
310

DIT Assignment

This command assigns DIT Number Analysis Table for DIT trunks.
DIT trunks are ground and loop start trunks.

, +ROG
310-00

Line Equipment No.

xx =

Cabinet 1 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required
when assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to
display the equipment location of existing trunks.

yy =

Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)

Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5,
slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.

zz =

Circuit 01~24

Cabinet numbers:

xxyyzz, +ROG

•
•

CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•

CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-61

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-28
Button
31001~03

Programs 303~315 (continued)
Sequence

Day1/Day2/Night
Destination Type

Value(s)
n=

)%~)%, n, 6SNU

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Summary

No Data (default)
Dialing Digits
DISA
Built-in Modem
Night Bell

Select Destination Type for each.

•
•
•
•
•

Day1/Day2/Night
Destination Digits

n1 =

Up to 32 digits

Enter Destination, Directory Number or Access Codes for each, only
if Dialing Digits is selected as Destination Type.

n1, +ROG

•

•
•
310-04

MOH Source

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

311

DISA Security Codes

311-01

DISA Enabled

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the
system.
Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or
access code defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment
DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone
will be returned to the caller.
Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem
on the CTX processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX
WinAdmin PC and modem.
Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse
(one-sec. close/3-sec. open)

Silence
External 1 (default)
External 2
External 3
External 4
External 5
External 6
External 7
External 8
External 9
External 10
External 11
External 12
External 13
External 14
External 15

If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type, enter the Directory
Number that the line should ring.If the line should ring over
external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external Page group
number.
If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be
entered to route incoming calls back out to a public or private
network number.

Select the MOH source for Analog DIT Trunk. The Scroll key must be
used to select MOH sources indicated by 10 or higher.

This command assigns DISA parameters.

, +ROG
n=

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable DISA security code.

Up to 15 digits

Enter DISA security code.

0~30
(default = 5)

Enter the time, in seconds, for Strata CTX to respond to a call.

0~60
(default = 10)

Enter the time in seconds to wait for idle DTMF.

1. Enable

Enable this feature to allow DISA callers to access Tie lines when
they call into the system.

)%, n, +ROG
311-02

DISA Code

)%, n, +ROG
311-03

Response Timer

)%, n, +ROG
311-04

Idle Timer

311-05

Tie Line Access

)%, n, +ROG+ROG

2. Disable (default)

)%, n, +ROG+ROG
313

Caller ID Assignment

This program assigns Caller ID circuits to the CO Line to which the
circuit is connected. The ANI, DNIS, DID formats for TI and analog
DID CO Lines are also defined.

, +ROG
313-00

Trunk Number
n, +ROG,

13-62

1~64 (CTX100)
1~96 (CTX670 Basic)
1~264 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the Trunk Number.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-28

313-01

Sequence
Signalling Method

Value(s)

Signalling Contents

1.
2.
3.
4.

None (default)
ANI/DNIS-MCI
ANI/DNIS-Sprint
CLASS (Caller ID)

Specify the format for the interface being used.

1.
2.
3.
4.

ANI and DNIS (default)
ANI only
DNIS only
DID only

Specify the contents of the ANI/DNIS format.

xx =

Cabinet 01 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

If the CLASS type is chosen, the trunk must be assigned to a Caller
ID circuit. Enter the RCIU/RCIS equipment number as xxyyzz.

yy =

Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)

Notes

zz =

Circuit 01~08

)%, n, +ROG
313-03

CLASS Equipment
Position

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG

315

Summary

)%, n, +ROG
313-02

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 303~315 (continued)

T1 Trunk Card

•
•

CLASS equipment numbers are required when assigning a trunk
to a RCIU/RCIS circuit.
It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing
caller ID circuit to trunk assignments. Example: If the trunk should
be connected to a caller ID circuit (RCIU/RCIS) in cabinet shelf 5,
slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.

This command assigns T1 Trunk Card Data to the system.

, +ROG
315-00

T1 Equipment
Location

xxyy

xxyy, +ROG

xx = Cabinet 01,
yy = slot 01, 03, 05, or 07
...or xx = Cabinet 02~07,
yy = slot 01, 03, or 05

Enter the RDTU PCB equipment location as xxyy:
Example: If the RDTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
0503.
Cabinet numbers:
CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

315-01

Coding Format

1.
2.
3.
4.

None
PZC
B8ZS (default)
ZCS

Select the Coding Format.

1. None
2. SF mode
3. ESF mode (default)

Select the Frame Format.

)%, n, +ROG
315-02

Frame Format

)%, n, +ROG
315-03

Time Slots

1.
2.
3.
4.

None
8 Time Slots (default)
16 Time Slots
24 Time Slots

Set the number of Time Slots to be used.

315-04

Receive PAD

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

None
Plus 6 dB
Plus 3 dB
Zero dB (default)
Minus 3 dB
Minus 6 dB
Minus 9 dB
Minus 12 dB
Minus 15 dB

Select the Receive PAD values.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-63

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-28
Button
315-05

Programs 303~315 (continued)
Sequence

Send Pad

Value(s)
n=

)%, n, +ROG

Table 13-29
Button
316

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Summary

None
Plus 6 dB
Plus 3 dB
Zero dB (default)
Minus 3 dB
Minus 6 dB
Minus 9 dB
Minus 12 dB
Minus 15 dB

Select the Send PAD values.

Programs 316~317
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Shared D Channel

The PRI Interface can be extended to include an additional PRI card
to expand the total number of channels to 47 on a Channel Group.
This second PRI may optionally offer a backup D channel.

, +ROG
316-00

Channel Group

1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Channel Group Number.

xx =
yy =
zz =

xx = Cabinet 01, yy = 03,
05, or 07 and zz = Channel
01 is always used to assign
RPTU parameters

Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz:

n, +ROG
316-01

Equipment Number

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG

Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
050301.
Cabinet numbers:

or
xx = Cabinet 02~10,
yy = 01, 03, or 05 and
zz = Channel 01 is always
used to assign RPTU
parameters

CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots..

316-02

Trunk ID

0~126
(default = 1)

An identifier must be used as part of the addressing to communicate
with the PSTN which channel on which link is used the given call.
This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN.

1. D-Channel
2. No D-Channel (default)

If a backup ‘D’ Channel is to be used, it needs to be enabled.

1~128

Channel Group Number.

)%, n, +ROG
316-03

D Channel Provided

316-04

Backup D Channel
Position

)%, n, +ROG

(default = 24)

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
317

ISDN BRI Trunk

317-00

Channel Group

The following program enables set up for ISDN related system
settings.

, +ROG
n, +ROG

13-64

1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the BRI channel Group Number.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-29

317-01

Sequence
Equipment Number

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG

Value(s)
xx =
yy =
zz =

CTX670
Cabinet (01~07)
Slot (01~10)
Circuit (01~08 or 01~24)

Summary
Enter the equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN BRI Trunk is
to be assigned.
Example: If the RBUU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
050301 for circuit 1.

Cabinet numbers:

CTX100
Cabinet (01)
Slot (01~08)
Circuit (01~04)

•
•

•
Protocol

317-03

ILG

1.
2.
3.
4.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

ILG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls
being received.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

OLG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls
being originated.

1. Point to Point
2. Point to Multi Point

Identify connection format with the PSTN is 1- Point-to-Point or 2Point-to-Multipoint.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable speech capability.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable 7 KHz audio capability.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

1. Explicit
2. Preferred (default)
3. Any Channel

)%, n, +ROG
317-04

OLG

)%, n, +ROG
317-05

Connection Format

)%, n, +ROG
317-06

Bearer Svc - Speech

)%, n, +ROG
317-07

Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz
Audio

CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

)%, n, +ROG

National ISDN
ETSI
TTC
National ISDN Nortel

CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•

317-02

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 316~317 (continued)

Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the
protocol can be entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN
Protocol corresponds to information set in the hardware level.
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.

)%, n, +ROG
317-08

Bearer Svc - 7 KHz
Audio

317-09

Bearer Svc Unrestricted 64K

317-10

Bearer Svc Unrestricted 56K

317-11

Bearer Svc Unrestricted 2x64K

)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
317-12

Outgoing B Ch Select

)%, n, +ROG

Select originating B Channel method.

•
•
•

Explicit – Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
Preferred – (default) Channel is indicated, and any alternative is
acceptable.
Any Channel – Channel is indicated, and any channel is
acceptable.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-65

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-29
Button
317-13

Programs 316~317 (continued)
Sequence

Value(s)

B Ch Selection

)%, n, +ROG

Summary

1. Forward Cyclic
2. Backward Cyclic
(default)
3. Forward Terminal
4. Backward Terminal

Choose Idle B Channel selection method.

•
•
•

Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest number to highest number of
B-channel).
Select Backward Cyclic (from highest number to lowest number
of B-channel).
Select Forward Terminal for the lowest numbered B-channel.

Select Backward Terminal for the oldest number B-channel. (The
High-High B-channel selection)
317-14

Initialize Type

1. User Entry Of SPID
Auto SPID ON
2. User Entry Of SPID
Auto SPID OFF
3. Auto SPID
4. None (default)

Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) type of initialization.

Up to 4 digits
(default = User)

Enter the text to be displayed for SPID Initialization.

Up to 20 digits

Enter the SPID value. These fields are required if you selected
National ISDN in Protocol. When no data is entered, any previously
entered information is overwritten.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable the T-Wait Timer. This field is needed if you selected National
ISDN in Protocol above. This timer, used along with the SPID,
assigns random initializing SPID times to prevent BRI interfaces from
re-initialize at the same time after a reset or power outage.

1. One
2. Two (default)

Select the number of simultaneous voice (speech) calls that can exist
at the same time on this interface.

Up to 10 digits

Enter the telephone number for subscriber 1. Telephone number
should be consistent with D channel data. If no data is entered in this
field any previously programmed information is lost.

Up to 10 digits

Enter the telephone number for subscriber number 2. If no data is
entered in this field any previously programmed information is lost.

)%, n, +ROG

317-15

Initialization Display

317-16

SPID #1

317-17

SPID #2

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
317-18

T-Wait Timer

)%, n, +ROG
317-19

Voice Calls

317-20

Trunk Subscriber 1

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
317-21

Trunk Subscriber 2

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Table 13-30

Bearer Capability Table
Bellcore
National ISDN

ETSI

TTC

Speech

3.1 KHz

Bearer Services

7 KHz

Circuit Mode
Unrestricted
Digital
Information

64 Kbps

Rate adaptation
from 56 Kbps

2x64 Kbps

13-66

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Button
318

Programs 318~320
Sequence

Value(s)

DID Intercept
Assignment

Summary
This command assigns the DID Routing table when DID numbers are
undefined or not received.

, +ROG
318-00

ILG Number

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter ILG number.

1. No DID
2. Not Determined

Select Routing Type.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Select Music On Hold

n, +ROG
318-01

Type

)%, n, +ROG
318-02

MOH Source

)%, n, +ROG

318-03

GCO Destination

)%, n, +ROG
318-04

Pooled Line Group

)%, n, +ROG
31805~07

Audio Day1/Day2/
Night Dst Type

)%~)%, n, 6SNU

Quiet Tone
External 1 (default)
External 2
External 3
External 4
External 5
External 6
External 7
External 8
External 9
External 10
External 11
External 12
External 13
External 14
External 15

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

GCO Key Group number.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

POOL Line Key Group Number.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the Audio/Speech call Day1 destination type.

No Data (default)
Dialing Digits
DISA
Built-in modem
Night Bell

•
•
•
•
•

Audio Day1/Day2/
Night Dst DN

n1 =

Up to 32 digits

Telephone Button
Programming

Table 13-31

Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only
required if the destination type is “Dialing Digits”

n1, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-67

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-31
Button
31808~10

Programs 318~320 (continued)
Sequence

Data Day1/Day2/
Night Dst Type

Value(s)
n=

)%~)%, n, 6SNU

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Summary

No Data (default)
Dialing Digits
DISA
Built-in modem
Night Bell

Select the data call Day1 destination type

•
•
•
•
•
•

Data Day1/Day2/
Night Dst DN

No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the
system.
Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or
access code defined in the “Destination Digits” assignment
DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone
will be returned to the caller.
Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem
on the CTX processor. Used to call into the system with a CTX
WinAdmin PC and modem.
Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse
(one-sec.close/3-sec.open)

n1 =

Up to 32 digits

Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only
required if the destination type is “Dialing Digits”

Up to 10 digits

Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/
DNIS number.

n1, +ROG
318-11

VMID for DNIS No.

%, n, +ROG

This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580,
01. This code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF
code set in Program 318, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if
programmed; therefore, if using Program 318, 15 code, this VMID
code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call
that rings directly to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN
that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN that forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS
number, or the forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice
mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM
general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM
will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets of direct and
forwarded DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
318-12

DNIS Name

Up to 16 digits

Enter DNIS Name. DNIS names can be assigned from the CTX
WinAdmin (not from programming phones).

318-15

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
',''1,61R'70)
90,'
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Digits 0~9, * and #. For a
pause enter Px, where
x=0~9 (seconds), up to 10
characters (default = no
value).

Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/
DNIS number.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call
that rings directly to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN
that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN that forwards to voice mail, the mail box number of the DID/DNIS
number or the forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice
mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM
general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM
will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits,
after the VM port answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above.
These digits are sent to the VM port if the CTX is set for SMDI or
DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.

13-68

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-31

Sequence

Value(s)

Intercept Treatment

Summary
This command assigns Intercept positions for Strata CTX Day/Night
schedules. Intercept positions are used when the destination of a
trunk line call is not determined with DID or DIT

, +ROG
319-00

Tenant Number

Enter 1~8

Select the Tenant number for which the Intercept Destinations will be
configured.

Day1 Destination

Day2 Destination

1. None (default)
2. Dialing Digits
3. Night Bell

Select Destination Type for each.

n1 =

Up to 32 digits

Enter Destination for each.

Night Destination

)%~)%, n, 6SNU,
n1, +ROG, +ROG
320

•
•
•

B Channel

RPTU Equipment No.
xxyyzz, +ROG

To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16

PRI interfaces are purchased on per interface and channel basis. The
‘B’ channel assignments allow for a flexible activation of channels to
match the subscribed services from the Public Service Telephone
Network.This command allows you to enable or disable each B
channel on selected RPTU PCBs.

, +ROG

320-00

Telephone Button
Programming

Button
319

Programs 318~320 (continued)

xx =
yy =
zz =

xx = cabinet 01
yy = 03, 05, or 07
zz = Channel 01 is always
used to assign RPTU
parameters
or

Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU
parameters in the system. It can also be used to display the
equipment location of existing RPTU PCBs.
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter
050301.

xx = cabinet 02~10
yy = 01, 03, or 05
zz = Channel 01 is always
used to assign RPTU
parameters
32001~23

B Channel

)%~)%, n, +ROG,
+ROG

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Assign each ‘B’ channel as enabled or disabled for each channel on
the interface. The assignments must match exactly to the
subscription from the PSTN.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-69

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-32

B Channel Defaults

B Channel Position
01~15

17~23

1.5M (T1)

OFF (Dch Pos)

2.0M (E1)

OFF (Dch Pos)

25~31

Span Interface Speed

Table 13-33
Button
321

Programs 321~324
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Calling Number
Identification

The Calling Number ID is what is defined as the user supplied Calling
Number. This number may be optionally screened by the PSTN to
ensure only calls from valid billable telephone numbers are allowed to
originate calls.

, +ROG
321-00

OLG Number

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the OLG Number.

Up to 10 digits

Enter the telephone number to use by default when originating a call.
This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes.

Up to 10 digits

Enter the prefix telephone number for which a DID number will be
appended to create a User Identified telephone number. This number
may or may not be a billed number, but is used for Caller ID at the
distant end and could be used for returning your call.

1. Enable
2. Disable

Specify whether the number provided should be screened by the
PSTN before the call is to proceed.

Up to 10 digits

Enter the second telephone number to use by default when
originating a call. This is the number that the PSTN has registered for
billing purposes. The second number is for BRI only

n, +ROG
321-01

Default Number

321-02

Number Prefix

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
321-03

Number Verification

)%, n, +ROG
321-04

Default Number 2

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
322

CNIS Presentation
And Special Number
Assignment

When calls are sent to the PSTN with Calling Number Identification
Service (CNIS), the CTX can supply special CNIS information as part
of the Setup Message. This program may be used for sending a
unique number based on the source directing the call to the Strata
CTX PRI.

, +ROG
322-00

OLG Number

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

OLG Number.

1. Primary DN (0~99999)
2. Group CO (1~128)
3. Pooled Line Group
(1~128)

Specify the type of circuit used for outgoing calls: 1- PDN; 2- GCO; 3Pooled Line.

Up to 5 digits
GCO and POOL:
1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Specify the number of the source type selected (PDN, GCO or
Pooled Line).

Up to 7 digits

Specify the number to be sent when calling out from the source (max.
seven digits). This number is appended to Program 321 FB02.

n, +ROG
322-01

Source Type

)%, n, +ROG
322-02

Source Number

)%, n, +ROG

322-03

Special Number
Assignments

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

13-70

Note

•
•
•

Entries for this field depend on the Destination Type chosen.
There are no default values for this field (default = no value).

PDN: 0~99999
GCO: 1~128
POOL: 1~128

Note

Destination Type and Destination must be entered before a
DID number can be assigned.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-33

Sequence

Value(s)

CBC Service

, +ROG

323-00

Channel Group

1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the Channel Group Number.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~48 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the CBC Service Index, or click one of the following buttons:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Select the CBC Service Type.

n, +ROG
323-01

Index

)%, n, +ROG
323-02

Type of Service

)%, n, +ROG

323-03

Facility Code

323-04

Service Parameter

No Data (default)
POTS
FX
Tie line (Enbloc)
Tie line (Cut throuogh)
Intra LATA Out WATS
Banded Out WATS
Inter LATA Out WATS
INWATS

ILG

OLG

Up to 5 digits

Enter the Service parameters supplied from PSTN. If no data is
entered in this field, any previously entered data is deleted.

3~4 digits

Enter the Network ID code supplied from PSTN (this field is required if
you selected “Inter LATA Out WATS” Type of Service. If no data is
entered in this field, any previously entered data is deleted.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Specify the ILG for this facility.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Specify the OLG for this facility.

0~47
(default = 0)

Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.

0~47
(default = 47)

Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.

0~47
(default = 0)

Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.

0~47
(default = 0)

Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.

0~47
(default = 0)

Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.

0~47
(default = 0)

Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.

)%, n, +ROG
323-08

Min Calls Zone 1

323-09

Max Calls Zone 1

323-10

Min Calls Zone 2

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
323-11

Max Calls Zone 2

)%, n, +ROG
323-12

Min Calls Zone 3

323-13

Max Calls Zone 3

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

To delete CBC, set this field to 1: No Data.

)%, n, +ROG
323-07

Note

Enter the supplied Facility code value from the PSTN. If no data is
entered in this field, any previously entered data is deleted.

)%, n, +ROG
323-06

List – view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
Create – Assign a new Trunk with default settings.

00~31

)%, n, +ROG
Network ID

•
•

)%, n, +ROG

323-05

Summary
To accomplish CBC services, each facility needs to be defined, its
related Line Group assigned and minimum and maximum values for
the services provided. These service parameters may be set for three
different time zones, thus allowing fewer or more services of different
types at different times of the day.

Telephone Button
Programming

Button
323

Programs 321~324 (continued)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-71

Telephone Button Programming
300 Series Programs

Table 13-33
Button
324

Programs 321~324 (continued)
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

CBC Time Zones

This command assigns Call-by-Call Time Zone.

, +ROG
324-00

Channel Group
n, +ROG

324-01

Start Zone 1

)%, hhmm, +ROG
324-02

Start Zone 2

324-03

Start Zone 3

1~32 (CTX100)
1~48 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

hh = hour (00~23)
mm = minute (00~59)

Channel Group Number

Enter the Time Zone Starting Time (hhmm).

9999 to delete

)%, hhmm, +ROG
)%, hhmm, +ROG,
+ROG

13-72

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
400 Series Programs

Table 13-34
Button

Programs 400~404
Sequence

400

Emergency Call
Destination
Assignment

400-01

Day/Night Mode

Value(s)

Summary
This command assigns Emergency Call destinations to Emergency
Call groups. There is one group for each Day mode (Day1, Day2 and
Night).

, +ROG
n=

1. Day 1
2. Day 2
3. Night

This is a display only field. It is controlled by the Strata CTX system.

1~4

This is a display only field. It is controlled by the Strata CTX system.

Up to 32 digits

Enter the destination DN for the emergency call.

1. Modify (default)
2. Insert

Choose whether you are replacing an existing Emergency Number
Index or inserting one in the list. If inserting, the new entry will
assume the specified index. The remaining indices will be increased
by one and the last one, 4, will be deleted.

)%, n, +ROG
400-02

Called Number Index

400-03

Emergency Call
Destination

400-04

Action

Telephone Button
Programming

400 Series Programs

)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
404

Attendant Group
Assignment

404-00

Attendant Group
Member

This program establishes Attendant Groups, distribution methods and
alternate destinations.

, +ROG
n=

1 (CTX100 & CTX670
Basic)
1~8 (CTX670 Exp.)

Select the Attendant Group Member Number.

1. Most Idle First
(default)
2. Next Available First
3. Broadcast

Select the Call Distribution Method for attendant console.

Up to 32 digits

Enter the Alternate Attendant Destination (DN, Network DN or Group
Pilot Number). If no data is entered in this field, any previous entries
are overwritten.

0~180
(default = 30)

Select the Attendant Overflow Time in minutes.

Up to 32 digits

Enter the overflow destination for this attendant group. If no data is
entered in this field, any previous entries are overwritten.

Up to 10 digits

Enter the Attendant’s Voice Mail ID code. If no data is entered in this
field, any previous entries are overwritten.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

•

n, +ROG
404-01

Call Distribution
Method

)%, n, +ROG
404-02

Alternate Attendant
Destination

404-03

Overflow Time

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
404-04

Group Overflow
Destination

)%, n, +ROG
404-05

VMID Code SMDI

)%, n, +ROG
40407~16

ICI1~ ICI10

)%~)%, n, 6SNU,
n, 6SNU, n, 6SNU, n,
+ROG, +ROG

•
•
•
•

For 07 ICI1~16 ICI10, select ILG Assignments for ICI
Groups.ILG1
Assign the 1st ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Assign the 2nd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Assign the 3rd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Assign the 4th ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.

Note

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Each ILG can only be assigned once in any of the ICI Groups.

13-73

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

500 Series Programs
Table 13-35
Button
500

Programs 500~577
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

System Call Forward
Assignment

This assignment is used to configure up to 32 system call forward
patterns. Station DNs are assigned to these patterns in the station
COS assignments.

, +ROG

Note

500-00

SCF Number

1~4 (CTX100)
1~10 (CTX670 Basic)
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.)

Select the SCF pattern number to configure.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the type of call that should forward in this pattern.

n, +ROG
500-01

Call Type

)%, n, +ROG

500-02

Period

Telephone Status

Destination 1

Note

Each 500-01 call type must be the same telephone status.
Also, all calls must be the same Call Forward type.

1. Day
2. Day2
3. Night

Select the system time period in which this SCF pattern should
operate.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to
operate.

)%, n, +ROG
500-04

CO Loop Ground
DID
Tie
Ring Transfer
Internal

)%, n, +ROG
500-03

The Administrator programs the condition of transfer by
setting Call Type, Period and Telephone Status. Destinations
1 and 2 should be programmed after transfer conditions are
set.

Busy
Off No Answer
Busy No Answer
DND

Note

Up to 32 digits

Each 500-01 call type must be the same telephone status.
Also, all calls must be the same Call Forward type.

Select the first destination to which the call should forward.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
501

System Speed Dial
Assignment

, +ROG

501-00

Speed Dial Bin

000~799

Enter the speed dial bin location.

Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, #
and Pauses

This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.

Up to 8 digits

This is the Name that appears on Telephone LCD dial directories.

n, +ROG
501-01

Number

)%, n, +ROG
501-02

Name

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
502

Note

Terminal Paging
Group Assignment

To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 1~9 (seconds),
which is the length of the pause.

This feature is available in CTX WinAdmin and Strata
DKT30xxSD only.

Assigns Primary DNs to Paging Group(s).

, +ROG
502-00

Primary DN

Up to 5 digits

n, +ROG

Enter the Primary DN of the station to be assigned to Paging Groups.
A station may belong to more than one paging group.
Note

50201~16

13-74

PG01~PG16

)%~)%, n, +ROG

1. On
2. Off (default)

You can have upto 72 paging groups in the Strata CTX100
and upto 120 paging groups in the Strata CTX670. Any
software release before R1.01, M19 supports only 32 paging
groups for all systems.

Activate the Paging Group(s) this station belongs too. The number of
DNs that can be assigned are 1~4 (CTX100), 1~8 (CTX670 Basic),
1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35

502-17

Sequence
All Page Group

Value(s)

502-18

All Emergency Page
Group

Summary

1. On
2. Off (default)

Enter this station in all Paging Groups.

1. On
2. Off (default)

Enter this station in all Emergency Paging Groups.

)%, n, +ROG

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 500~577 (continued)

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
503

Paging Devices
Group Assignment

503-00

Zone Relay Number

Assigns BIOU Page Zone Relays to Page Groups.

, +ROG
n=

n, +ROG

1~8

•
•

BIOU1 = 1~4
BIOU2 = 5~8

Select the BIOU Page Zone relay that should be assigned to the
Page Groups below. This relay activates whenever the selected Page
Group is paged.

•
•
50301~16

PG01~PG16

1. On
2. Off (default)

0~8 (default = 0)

)%~)%, n, +ROG

503-17

All Page Group

503-18

All Emergency Page
Group

503-19

BGM Mute Relay

)%, n, +ROG

BIOU1 = Zone Relays 1~4.
BIOU2 = Zone Relays 5~8.

Turn on if the selected BIOU Page Zone Relay should activate with
this Page Group.

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

•
•

BIOU1 = 1~4
BIOU2 = 5~8

Assign BIOU generic relay as the BGM mute relay. This relay
activates whenever the external page is in use

•
•

BIOU1 = Generic Relays 1~4.
BIOU2 = Generic Relays 5~8.

Note

504

System Call Forward
Operation Status

The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5.
For this relay operation,BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a
virtual equipment position - Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20,
in Program 100. To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the
ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to
remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in
Cabinet 01 Slot 01~08 in the normal manner.

This command assigns System Call Forward Type for the pattern.

, +ROG
504-00

SCF Number

1~4 (CTX100)
1~10 (CTX670 Basic)
1~32 (CTX670 Exp.)

Select the SCF pattern number to configure.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the status or state in which the telephone should be for this
system call forward pattern to activate.

n, +ROG
504-01

Telephone Status

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

No Data (default)
Busy
No Ans
Busy No Ans
DND

Notes

•
•

506

Verified Account
Codes

506-00

Account Code

Each 500-01 call type must be the same telephone status. Also,
all calls must be the same Call Forward type.
Telephone status must be the same as telephone status selected
in 500-03.

This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with
the DRL.

, +ROG
n, +ROG

Up to 15 digits

Enter a valid accounting code that the user will be expected to dial.
Digits 0~9 can be used.
Note

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

The Account Code is set to the same digit length as the
Verified Digit Length in Program 570 above.

13-75

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35
Button
506-01

Programs 500~577 (continued)
Sequence

Verified Flag

Value(s)

Summary

1. Set
2. No Set (default)

The Account Code Flag determines whether the number entered is to
be used as a verified account code or not. Some applications may
allow users to dial an accounting code which changes the restriction
level for the call allowing it to be placed.

0~16
(default = 0)

The DRL assigned to an accounting code allows users to override
their stations assigned DRL enabling a call to be placed.

0~16
(default = 0)

The FRL assigned to an accounting code enables users to override
the station assigned FRL.

1~32
(default = 1)

Assign the Network COS to be used by this accounting code.

)%, n, +ROG

Note
506-02

DRL

506-03

FRL

506-04

Network COS

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
507

Door Phone
Assignment

This assignment configures Door Phone Control Boxes (DDCBs) and
Door Phones (MDFBs). DDCBs can be connected to ADKU, PDKU
and/or BDKU interface PCBs. Up to three MDFBs can be connected
to one DDCB. A Door lock control relay may be assigned to the B
output of the DDCB in place of a MDFB door phone.

, +ROG
507-00

Door Phone Number
n, +ROG

To delete a Verified Account Code set this field to No Set.

1~6 (CTX100)
1~9 (CTX670 Basic)
1~24 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the door phone number. Door phone numbering for both
CTX100 and CTX670 is as follows:

•
•

DDCB 1 provides door phone numbers 1~3, 2 can be a door
phone or door lock.
DDCB 2 provides door phone numbers 4~6, 5 can be a door
phone or door lock.

Door phone numbering for CTX670 only is as follows:

•
•
•
•
•
•

DDCB 3 provides door phone numbers 7~9, 8 can be a door
phone or door lock.
DDCB 4 provides door phones 10~12, 11can be a door phone or
door lock.
DDCB 5 provides door phones 13~15, 14 can be a door phone or
door lock.
DDCB 6 provides door phones 16~18, 17 can be a door phone or
door lock.
DDCB 7 provides door phones 19~21, 20 can be a door phone or
door lock.
DDCB 8 provides door phones 22~24, 23 can be a door phone or
door lock.

DDCBs are numbered by the system automatically by DDCB
Equipment (Shelf/Slot/Circuit). DDCB1 is assigned to the lowest
DDCB Equipment and DDCB2 to the next lowest, etc.
If DDCB Circuit B is set to Door Lock, a Door Phone cannot be set.

13-76

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35

Programs 500~577 (continued)
Sequence

507-01

DDCB Equipment No.

Value(s)
xx =

Cabinet 01 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)

yy =

Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)

zz =

Circuit 01~16

)%, xxyyzz, +ROG

Summary
Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door phone should
be assigned.
Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a PDKU or
BDKU/BDKS in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Notes

•
•

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or
PDKU interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must be
deleted, using Program 201, before attempting to assign the
DDCB console.

Cabinet numbers:

•
•

CTX100 – Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670 – Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•
507-02

Tenant Number

CTX100 – Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670 – Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

1~2 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670) (default = 1)

Select the Tenant Number for which the door phone should ring over
external page in the system Night mode.

)%, n, +ROG
507-03

Connection Status

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Check the box if the door phone is physically connected to the DDCB.

507-04

Ring Duration

3~30
(default = 9)

Select the time that the door phone should ring destination devices
when the door phone button is pressed. The ring time can be 3 to 30
seconds set in 3 second intervals - each 3 second interval provides
one ring to the destination. Destination devices include selected DNs
and Page groups.

1~16

Enter the Door Phone name that should display on LCD telephones
when the door phone rings the telephones; or, when the telephone
calls the door phone.

1. None (default)
2. DN
3. Paging Group
1~4 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670 Basic)
1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)

1. Select Destination Type – Select the type of destination that
should ring when the door phone button is pressed during the
system Day1, Day2 or Night mode.
2. Enter the Destination Number – If the ring destination type is a
PDN or PhDN, enter the directory number. If the ring destination
type is Page, enter the Page Group number.

)%, n, +ROG

507-05

LCD Name Display

)%, n, +ROG
507-06

Day1 Destination

)%, n, 6SNU, n1,
+ROG

507-07

Day2 Destination

n1 =

Up to 5 digits

1. None (default)
2. DN
3. Paging Group
1~4 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670 Basic)
1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)

)%, n, 6SNU, n1,
+ROG

507-08

Night Destination

n1 =

Up to 5 digits

1. None (default)
2. DN
3. Paging Group
1~4 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670 Basic)
1~16 (CTX670 Exp.)

n1 =

Up to 5 digits

)%, n, 6SNU, n1,
+ROG, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-77

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35
Button
508

Programs 500~577 (continued)
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Door Lock Control
Assignment

This assignment is used to configure up to 10 door lock control relays.
The contacts of these relays are used to control electrical door locks.
One door lock relay can be assigned to each of the eight Door Phone
Control Boxes (DDCB, Port B) and/or one to each of the two BIOU
PCBs (any one of the four control relays).

, +ROG

Note

508-00

Door Lock Number

1~4 (CTX100)
1~5 (CTX670 Basic)
1~10 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the door lock control number to configure.

1. None (default)
2. BIOU
3. DDCB

Enter the system Page Group number that should ring for the
selected tenant when a door phone button is pressed during the
system Night Mode.

0~8 (default = 0)

Assign BIOU control relay as a Door Lock Relay. This relay activates
when the Door Lock button is pressed or a Door Lock access code is
dialed.

n, +ROG
508-01

Interface Type

)%, n, +ROG
508-02

BIOU Relay Number

)%, n, +ROG

•
•

508-03

DDCB Equipment No.

If a door lock is assigned to a DDCB, the second jack (Port B)
will provide the door lock relay contacts. This jack can not be
used to connect an MDFB door phone.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

BIOU1 provides control
relays 1~4
BIOU2 provides control
relays 5~8.

Cabinet 01 (CTX100),
01~02 (CTX670 Basic),
01~07 (CTX670 Exp.)
Slot 01~8 (CTX100),
01~10 (CTX670)
Circuit 01~16

Note

The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5.
For this relay operation BIOU2 is installed as default in a
virtual equipment position Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in
Program 100. To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the
ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to
remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in
Cabinet 01/slot 01~08 in the normal manner. BIOU relay
functions are assigned in “Program 515” on page 80. This
field is required if you selected BIOU in 01 Interface Type
above.

Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door Lock should be
assigned. This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the ADKU,
BDKU/BDKS or PDKU interface PCB to which the the DDCB is to be
connected.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX=cabinet 01~07; YY=slot 01~10; ZZ=circuit 01~16
Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a ADKU,
PDKU or BDKU/BDKS in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter
050203.
Note

If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must
be deleted, using PRG201, before attempting to assign the
DDCB console.

Cabinet numbers:

•
•

CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.

Slot numbers:

•
•
509

DR Override by
System Speed Dial

509-01

Override COS

509-02

Override DRL

509-03

Override FRL

CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.

This command assigns the COS, DRL, FRL and QPL values used by
DR Override by Speed Dial.

, +ROG
n=

1~32
(default =1)

Select the override COS value.

1~16
(default =1)

Select the override DRL value.

1~16
(default =1)

Select the override FRL value.

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG

13-78

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35

509-04

Sequence
Override QPL

Value(s)
n=

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
510

COS Override
Assignment

510-00

COS Override Index

1~16
(default =1)

Summary
Select the override QPL value.
Assigns Class of Service Overrides and their parameters (COS, FRL,
DRL, QPL).

, +ROG
n=

1~16

Select the COS Override index.

Up to 8 digits

Select the COS Override Code as entered by users. If no data is
entered in this field, any previously entered data is erased.

1~32
(default = 1)

Select COS number for this override code.

1~16
(default = 1)

Select DRL number for this override code.

1~16
(default = 1)

Select FRL number for this override code.

1~16
(default = 1)

Select QPL number for this override code.

1~32
(default = 1)

Apply this override code to Network COS index

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 500~577 (continued)

n, +ROG
510-01

COS Override Code

)%, n, +ROG
510-02

Set COS

)%, n, +ROG
510-03

Set DRL

510-04

Set FRL

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
510-05

Set QPL

)%, n, +ROG
510-06

Set Network COS

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
512

SMDR for System
Assignment

512-01

Caller ID Field

512-02

B Record for
Abandoned Call

512-03

ANI

512-04

Authorization Code

512-05

End-of-Record CR

Assigns system-wide SMDR parameters.

, +ROG
n=

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Include Caller ID records in SMDR.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Generate B Record for an abandoned call.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Include ANI in SMDR record.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Include authorization codes in SMDR records.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Include a Carriage Return (CR) at the end of an SMDR record.

)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
513

SMDR for ILG
Assignment

513-00

ILG

This program assigns SMDR parameters for ILGs.

, +ROG
n=

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Specify the ILG for which to set SMDR parameters.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable to generate records for this ILG

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Check to include DNIS information in records for this ILG.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable B Record generation for incoming calls with or without
incoming SMDR being enabled.

n, +ROG
513-01

Generate SMDR
Records

513-02

DNIS Field Indication

513-03

B Record for
Incoming Call

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-79

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35
Button

Programs 500~577 (continued)
Sequence

513-04

Abandoned Call
Record Output

513-05

Display Transferred
Call Records

Value(s)

Summary

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable record generation for abandoned calls. Incoming SMDR must
be turned on. Abandoned call records will be generated whether or
not incoming SMDR has been set.

1. Source (default)
2. Destination

Select whether to charge a transferred call to the source or
destination party.

)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
514

SMDR for OLG
Assignment

This command assigns SMDR parameters for OLGs.

, +ROG
514-00

OLG

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Specify the OLG for which to set SMDR parameters.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable SMDR Record Display.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable to generate records for outgoing calls. SMDR Record Display
must be on.

1. Source (default)
2. Destination

Enable to apply the SMDR record of a transferred call to its source or
its destination.

n, +ROG
514-01

SMDR Record
Display

514-02

Outgoing Records

514-03

Outgoing Records

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
515

View BIOU Control
Relay Assignment

This assignment is used to view functions of the four control relays on
each BIOU PCB set in Program 105 12 Night Relay and 18 Night Bell
Relay; Program 508 Door Lock Control Assignment; and Program
503 19 BGM Mute Relay. The system allows up to two BIOU PCBs to
provide a total of eight control relays. The control relays can be
configured as an external BGM mute control, Night Bell control, Night
Mode Control, and Door Lock Control.

, +ROG

Notes

•
•
515-00

BIOU (1 or 2)

1 or 2

n, +ROG
515-01

BIOU Relay 1 or 5

)%, n, +ROG
515-02

BIOU Relay 2 or 6

)%, n, +ROG
515-03

BIOU Relay 3 or 7

)%, n, +ROG
515-04

BIOU Relay 4 or 8

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Enter the BOIU PCB number.
Note

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Not Use (default)
Ext Paging
Night Bell
Night Relay
Door Lock

BIOU 1 and BIOU 2 are assigned in Program 100 - Card
Assignment.

View the function of BIOU1, control relay 1 or BIOU2, control relay 5:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 2 or BIOU2, control relay 6:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 3 or BIOU2, control relay 7:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 4 or BIOU2, control relay 8:

•
•
•
•
•

13-80

BIOU-1 relays are identified as Control Relays 1~4.
BIOU-2 relays are identified as Control Relays 5~8.

NOT USE – if the relay is not used.
PAGE MUTE – External BGM mute control activates during an
external page (see “Program 503” on page 75).
NIGHT BELL – Night Bell control activates during the system
Night Mode only when incoming CO lines ring (see “Program
102” on page 12).
NIGHT RELAY – Night Mode Control activates continuously
during the system Night Mode (see “Program 105” on page 18).
DOOR LOCK – Door Lock Control activates when a telephone's
Door Unlock button is pressed (see “Program 508” on page 78).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35

Sequence

Value(s)

Station Speed Dial

Summary
Up to 100 pre-programmed Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits
each) can be assigned to each station. Speed Dial numbers are
stored in “Bins” and each station accesses the Speed Dial numbers
by entering the Speed Dial Bin number from their respective stations.
The following advanced Speed Dialing features are available in Strata
CTX.

, +ROG

•

Speed Dial Bin Linking – Whenever a Speed Dial number
exceeds the 32-digit Speed Dial Bin memory limitation, the digits
exceeding the 32 digit limitation are automatically stored into the
adjacent Speed Dial Bin. The entire string is activated by using
the primary Speed Dial Bin number.

Note

•

516-00

PDN

Telephone Button
Programming

Button
516

Programs 500~577 (continued)

Bin linking is automatic. Any previously programmed data in
the “adjacent Speed Dial Bin” as described above is
overwritten. Furthermore, if a number exceeding the
maximum allowable dial digit length is overwritten with a new
number which complies to the 32-digit restriction, the excess
digits recorded in the next Bin (from the previous entry) is
treated as a unique Speed Dial record.

Speed Dial Number Nesting – A Speed Dial number can be
nested into another Speed Dial number. For example, if an
international dialing prefix is used often, program the prefix in any
Speed Dial Bin. Then in the another Speed Dial Bin, program the
first Bin number + the number to dial. When the second Speed
Dial Bin is activated, Strata CTX first retrieves and dials the
international dialing prefix from the first Bin location, then adds
the numbers to dial.

Up to 5 digits

Select the PDN assigned the speed dial number.

00~99

Enter the station speed dial bin number. A station can have up to 100
speed dial bins.

n, +ROG
516-01

Speed Dial Bin

)%, n, +ROG

Note

516-02

Number

)%, n, +ROG

Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, #
and Pauses

Adding bin numbers here will automatically increment the
number of speed dial bins available to the station in
increments of 10 speed dial bins. The number of speed dial
bins available to the station can also be assigned and
displayed in Program 200, 35 - Station SpDial Bins. Example:
If bin number 50 is entered here, 50 speed dial bins will
automatically be assigned to the station and will also be
displayed in Program 200, 35.

This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 0~9 (seconds), which is the
length of the pause, 0=10 seconds.
Notes

•
•

•

516-03

Name

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Up to 8 characters

If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed
dial location will automatically be appended to create longer
numbers.
Also another speed dial bin can be nested within another bin for
dialing common numbers. If speed dial bin 100 has long distance
access digits 1010321, these digits can be nested in to other
speed dial bins by using *100 as the first digits of the other bins.
Example putting *10017145563425 into speed dial bin 150 would
cause SD150 to dial the access digits plus the number
10132117145563425.
If you are programming from the Telephone the digits * and #
have a special meaning when programming speed dial numbers.
The # digit indicates the end of entry and * is an escape
character. To dial the digits * or # as part of the number; enter **
or *#. To enter pauses enter *0~*9. The second digit represents
the number of seconds for the pause function.

Enter the LCD Name that displays on LCD dial directories.
Note

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

This feature is available in CTX WinAdmin and Strata
DKT30xxSD only.

13-81

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35
Button
517

Programs 500~577 (continued)
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Multiple Calling Group
Assignment

This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.

, +ROG
517-00

Multiple Call Group
Number

517-01

MC Group Pilot
Number

1~16 (CTX100),
1~32 (CTX670 Basic)
1~64 (CTX670 Exp.)

Select a group number.

1~5 digits

Enter the Pilot Directory Number that should be assigned to the
Multiple Call Group. This can be any number 1~5 digits that does not
conflict with numbers in the current system Number Plan.

1~180

Set the timer in seconds.

1~180

Set the timer in seconds.

0~32

Assign a System Call Forward template number to the multiple calling
group. Enter 0 or 1~32.

Up to 10 digits

Enter the VM call forward ID digits for the multiple calling group

n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
517-02

Ring Delay 1 Timer

)%, n, +ROG
517-03

Ring Delay 2 Timer

517-04

System Call Forward

517-05

Voice Mail ID

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
518

Multiple Calling
Members Assignment

This feature is available only with CTX Release 1.3 or higher software
and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher software.

, +ROG
518-01

Multiple Calling Group
Index

518-02

Member Index
Number

This program assigns members to a group.
n=

1~16 (CTX100), 1~32
(CTX670 Basic) and 1~64
(CTX670 Exp.)

Enter a group number.

Up to 32 digits

Enter the DN of the extension you wish to add.

No Data
Dialing Digits

Enter Dialing Digits to make the extension ring.

Up to 32 digits

Enter the DN of the extension you wish to add.

Immediate
Delay 1
Delay 2

Select either: Immediate, Delay 1 or Delay 2.

)%, n, +ROG

518-03

)%, n, +ROG
Member Type

518-04

Member DN

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
518-05

Ringing Options

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
520

LCR Local Route Plan
Assignment

There are 64 LCR route plans. This assignment is used to select
which LCR route plan should be used to route local calls. The Local
Route Plan, which must be defined in the route definition assignment,
determines which CO line group is used for local outgoing calls.

, +ROG
520-01

Local Area Code

3 digits

Enter the area code for the dialing area in which the system is
installed. This is the area code for the Central Office (CO) that
provides local CO lines to the system. If no data is entered in this
field, any previously programmed data is lost.

1~64
(default = 1)

Enter the LCR Route Plan number that should be used to route local
calls. Local calls are made by dialing 7-digit public telephone
numbers that do not require an Area Code. There are 64 LCR Route
Plans from which to choose.

)%, n, +ROG
520-02

Local Route Plan

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

13-82

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35

Sequence

521

LCR Route Plan Digit
Analysis Assignment

521-00

Analysis Digits

Value(s)

Summary
This program builds the basic LCR Analysis Table.

, +ROG
n=

n, +ROG

521-01

Route Plan Number

0~64

Enter the Route Plan number to which to assign the Analysis Digits.

(default = 0)

Note

LCR Exception
Number Route Plans

Exception Route Plan
Table

Exception Route Plan

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
523

Up to 11 digits
Wild Card uses Q and ;
where ; = 0~9 and Q =
2~9

n, +ROG

522-01

1~64
(default = 0)

LCR Route Plan
Schedule Assignment
Route Plan
Type of Day

LCR Time of Day

Station LCR Group
Route Choice Table

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

Entering 0 deletes the Exception Digits from the table.

1. Weekday
2. Weekend
3. Holiday

Select the Type of Day.

1. Time Zone1
2. Time Zone2
3. Night

Select the Time Zone.

1~16
(default = 1)

Select the Station LCR Group.

1~128
(default = 1)

Enter the Route Choice Table Number to be used with this
combination of time, type and LCR group.

)%, n, +ROG
523-04

Note

Enter the Route Plan Number to build a schedule indexed by Time of
Day, Type of Day and LCR Group.

)%, n, +ROG
523-03

Enter the Route Plan Table in which to assign the Exception Digits.

1~64

)%, n, +ROG
523-02

Strings may be up to 32 digits long. The Exception Route Plan
Analysis Table may have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in
one table at a time.

n, +ROG
523-01

Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service
codes, etc.) to be assigned to a Route Plan Exception Analysis Table.

This command assigns Route Plan Schedule Tables for LCR. Each
table is a 3-dimensional array of 144 values (3 Types of Day x 3
Times of Day x 16 LCR Groups).

, +ROG
523-00

Entering 0 deletes the Analysis Digits from the table to which
they had been assigned.

This command assigns up to 1280 dialed external digit strings to the
Route Plan Exception Analysis Table which assigns each string to 1
of 64 Route Choice Tables. The values expressed here are
exceptions to the values established in Program 521.

, +ROG
522-00

Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service
codes, etc.) to be assigned to a Route Plan Analysis Table.

Wild Card uses Q and ;
where ; = 0~9 and Q = 2~9 Strings may be up to 32 digits long. There Route Plan Analysis Table
may have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in one table at a
time.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
522

Up to 11 digits

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 500~577 (continued)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-83

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35
Button

Programs 500~577 (continued)
Sequence

524

Route Table to Route
Definition Assignment

524-00

Route Choice Table

Value(s)

Summary
This command defines up to six possible Route Definitions for a given
Route Table.

, +ROG
n=

1~128
0 = Delete

Enter the Route Choice Table to be defined.

1~128
0 = Delete (default = 1)

Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.

1~128
0 = Delete (default = 1)

Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.

1~128
0 = Delete (default = 1)

Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.

1~128

Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.

1~128

Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.

n, +ROG
524-01

Route Definition 1

)%, n, +ROG
524-02

Route Definition 2

)%, n, +ROG
524-03

Route Definition 3

)%, n, +ROG
524-04

Route Definition 4

)%, n, +ROG
524-05

Route Definition 5

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
525

LCR Route Definition
Assignment

This command assigns Route Definitions for LCR. A Route Definition
consists of an OLG and a Digit Modification index.

, +ROG
525-00

Route Definition

1~128

Select the Route Definition number.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 1)

Select the OLG Number associated with this Route Definition.

1~128
(default = 1)

Select the Digit Modification number associated with this Route
Definition.

n, +ROG
525-01

OLG Number

)%, n, +ROG
525-02

Digit Mod Index

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
526

Modified Digits Table
Assignment

526-00

Digit Modification
Index

This command modifies LCR dialed numbers by deleting digits from
and adding digits to the dialed numbers.

, +ROG
n=

1~128

Select the Digit Modification Index used by the LCR Route Choice
table to determine the digit modification treatment to be applied.
Leading digits of a dialed number may be deleted; leading and trailing
digits may be added to the dialed number.

0~10
(default = 0)

Select the quantity of digits to be deleted from the beginning of dialed
number.

Up to 23 digits

Enter the digit string to be inserted at the beginning of the number.

Up to 23 digits

Enter the digit string to be inserted at the end of the number.

n, +ROG
526-01

Delete Digits

)%, n, +ROG
526-02

Add Leading Digits

)%, n, +ROG
526-03

Add Trailing

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
527

LCR Holiday Table
Assignment

This command assigns up to 128 holidays for LCR processing. These
assignments are related to the Day assignments established in
Program 523.

, +ROG
527-00

527-01

YYY Year
Y=
Month
MM = Day
DD =

Enter Date (YYYYMMDD). A maximum of 128 dates is allowed.

YYYYMMDD, +ROG

Add/Delete

Choose to add or delete this date from the holiday table. Expired
dates remain in the table unless deleted.

Holiday

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

13-84

1. Add
2. Delete (default)

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35

Sequence

528

LCR Public Day of
Week Mapping Table

528-01

Monday

Value(s)

Summary
This command defines the days of the week as weekdays, weekend
days or holidays for LCR.

, +ROG
n=

1. Weekday (default)
2. Weekend
3. Holiday

Select the Day Type to assign to this day.

1. Weekday (default)
2. Weekend
3. Holiday

Select the Day Type to assign to this day.

)%, n, +ROG
528-02

Tuesday

)%, n, +ROG
528-03

Wednesday

)%, n, +ROG
528-04

Thursday

)%, n, +ROG
528-05

Friday

)%, n, +ROG
528-06

Saturday

)%, n, +ROG
528-07

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

529

LCR Route Plan Time
Zone Assignment

529-00

Route Plan Time
Zone

529-01

Day Type for Time
Zone

Select the Day Type to assign to this day.

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 500~577 (continued)

This command creates a three-dimensional array (Day, Time & LCR
Group) for each Route Plan.

, +ROG
n=

1~64

Select the LCR Route Plan Number to assign to this time zone.

1. Weekday
2. Weekend
3. Holiday

Select a Day Type for which to define a time zone.

1. Zone1
2. Zone2
3. Zone3

Select a Time Zone.

n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
529-02

Time Zone

)%, n, +ROG
529-03

Time Zone Start Time

)%, hhmm, +ROG,
+ROG
530

DR LCR Screening
Table Assignment

530-00

Screening Dial String

530-01

Add String to Table

530-02

DR Action

hh = hour (00~23)
mm = minute (00~59)
(default = 0000)

Enter the start time for the selected Time Zone (hhmm).
Note

Enter your Day Type and Time Zone selections before
entering data in to this field.

This command screens dialed digits for access codes such as Carrier
Identification Codes or Behind Centrex/PBX access codes. Used only
in LCR calls.

, +ROG
n=

Up to 7 digits

Enter the string of external digits to be screened.

1. Add
2. Delete (default)

Add the Screening Dial String to the DR LCR Screening Table.

1. Bypass (default)
2. Skip and Apply

Select DR Action.

n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG

•
•

Bypass – Do not apply DR.
Skip and Apply – Apply DR to the dialed digits excluding the
number of digits specified in Skip Length.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-85

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35
Button
530-03

Programs 500~577 (continued)
Sequence

LCR Action

Value(s)
n=

)%, n, +ROG
530-04

Digit Modification
Action

)%, n, +ROG

Summary

1. Apply (default)
2. Skip and Apply

Select LCR Action.

1. Apply (default)
2. Retain
3. Discard

Select Digit Modification application.

•
•

•
•
•

530-05

Skip Length

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
531

0~5
0 = delete (default = 0)

DR Screening Table
for OLG

Apply – (default) Apply LCR to all of the external dialed digits.
Skip and Apply – Apply LCR to the dialed digits excluding the
number of digits specified in Skip Length.
Apply – (default) Apply Digit Modification from the first digit.
Retain – Retain the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification
starting from the next digit specified by Skip Length.
Discard – Discard the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification
starting from the next digit specified by Skip Length.

Specify the number of digits at the beginning of the dial string
to be ignored before DR, Digit Modification, or LCR is applied.
Assigns DR Screening Table for an OLG. Up to four codes may be
assigned per line group. Used for outgoing calls other than LCR.

, +ROG
531-00

OLG

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the OLG Number.

Up to 8 digits

Enter the access code expected by an attached Centrex PBX.

1. Add
2. Delete (default)

Add or Delete the Code entered above. Leaving the field empty
removes an existing code. Activation requires entries in OLG Group
number and 01 Behind Centrex Access Code above.

1. Bypass (default)
2. Skip and Apply

Apply DR to the dialed digits.

0~8
(default = 0)

Enter the number of leading digits to be ignored by DR.

0~10
(default = 0)

Enter the length of the pause to be inserted between dialing digits.

n, +ROG
531-01

Behind Centrex
Access Code

)%, n, +ROG
531-02

Add or Delete Code

)%, n, +ROG
531-03

DR Action for Centrex

)%, n, +ROG
531-04

Skip Length

)%, n, +ROG
531-05

Pause Insertion

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
532

•
•

DR Table Allow/Deny
Definition

Bypass (default) – does not apply DR.
Skip and Apply– applies DR to the dialed digits excluding the
number of digits specified in Skip Length.

Specify the DR Table Type using this command.

, +ROG
532-00

DRL Number

Up to 8 digits

Select the DRL Number.

n1 =

1. Allow
2. Deny (default)

Specify whether this DR Table is an Allow Table or Deny Table.

n, +ROG
532-01

Table Type

)%, n1, +ROG, +ROG
533

DR Level Table
Assignment

This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with
the DRL entered in above.

, +ROG
533-00

DRL Number

533-01

Dial String

Up to 16 digits

Enter the DRL for which you want to populate an Exception Table.

n1 =

1~ 7 digits may include
wild cards “X” and “N”
where X = 0~9 and N =
2~9.

Add the dial string you wish to be treated as an exception.

n2 =

1. Add
2. Delete (default)

Add or delete the string entered in 01 DR Exception Table above to
the DR Exception Table.

n, +ROG

)%, n1, +ROG
533-02

Add or Delete

)%, n2, +ROG, +ROG

13-86

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35

Sequence

Value(s)

DRL Exception Table
Assignment

, +ROG
534-00

DRL Number

534-01

Dial String

Summary
This program assigns a DRL Exception Table to an existing DRL
table. If the DRL Table is an allow table, its Exception Table must be a
deny table and vice versa.

Up to 8 digits

Enter the DRL for which you want to populate an Exception Table.

n1 =

1~ 7 digits may include
wild cards “X” and “N”
where X = 0~9 and N =
2~9.

Add the dial string you wish to be treated as an exception.

n2 =

1. Add
2. Delete (default)

Add or delete the string entered in 01 DR Exception Table above to
the DR Exception Table.

n, +ROG

)%, n1, +ROG
534-02

Add/Delete

)%, n2, +ROG, +ROG
540

Pilot DN Assignment

Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance,
they are true virtual numbers. They can be used in CTI and Voice Mail
applications. In ACD Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers.
In Voice Mail applications Pilot DNs are used to call directly to, or
transfer calls directly to specific voice mail boxes – this is done by
setting VM as the alternate destination and using the VMID to send
the call to a specific VM box.

, +ROG

540-00

Pilot DN

Telephone Button
Programming

Button
534

Programs 500~577 (continued)

Up to 8 digits

n, +ROG

Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance.
They are true virtual numbers. They can be used in CTI and Voice
Mail applications. In ACD, Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group
numbers. In Voice Mail applications they are used to call directly to or
transfer calls directly to specific voice mail boxes - this is done by
setting VM as the alternate destination and using the VMID to send
the call to a specific VM box.
Maximum characters for Pilot DNs:

•
•
•
540-01

After Shift Type

1. No Data (default)
2. Dialing Digits
3. Night Bell

Calls to the Pilot DN will be routed to the Alternate Destination if the
Pilot DN is not available (example: ACD After Shift). If Dialing Digits is
selected, enter the appropriate DN in the Alternate DN assignment.

Up to 32 digits

If Dialing digits is selected as the Alternate Destination, enter the
PDN, PhDN or Hunt Group pilot number to which the call should be
routed.

Up to 16 digits

If the Alternate Destination is Voice Mail, enter the Voice Mail ID that
should be sent.

)%, n, +ROG
540-02

After Shift Destination

)%, n, +ROG
540-03

Voice Mail ID

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
541

CTX100: R1.00 & R1.01=5 max./R1.02=100 Max
CTX670 Basic: R1.00 & R1.01=10max./R1.02=200max
CTX670 with BBMS/BEXS: R1.00 & R1.01=32max./
R1.02=256max

Pilot DN Delete

This command enables you to delete Pilot DNs.

, +ROG
541-01

Delete Pilot DN

550

Enhanced 911
Emergency Call
Group

550-00

Emergency Call
Group Number

55001~08

OLG1~OLG8

Up to 5 digits

Enter the Pilot DN Number that you wish to delete.

n, +ROG, +ROG
This command assigns OLGs to the Enhanced 911 Emergency Call
Group.

, +ROG
n=

1~8

Specify the Emergency Call Group.

0~32 (CTX100)
0~50 (CTX670 Basic)
0~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Specify the first through eighth OLG to be chosen for an E911 call.

n, +ROG

)%~)%, n, +ROG,
+ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-87

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-35
Button
570

Programs 500~577 (continued)
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Account Code Digit
Length

, +ROG

A second length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used
for verification of the code to be less than the total code entered; thus,
the code may contain two parts, one required and one part optional to
the user..
570-01

Verified Digit Length

)%, n, +ROG

4~15
(default = 4)

The Verified Digit Length sets a number of digits to verify with a preset list. This number may be the same or smaller than the account
code digits set to be entered for creating a complete accounting code.
Note

570-02

Registered Digit
Length

4~15
(default = 6)

The Registered Digit Length sets a number for the digits to be entered
to make a complete accounting code entry.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
571

Exception Numbers
for Forced Account
Codes

571-01

Exception Number 1

571-02
571-03

Exception Number 3

This field is not changed, when “Program 506” on page 75
are registered.

Note

The Registered Digit Length ()%) must be greater than or
equal to the Verified Digit Length ()%).

Up to four telephone numbers can be programmed as exceptions to
the forced and /or verified account code entries (including 911).
These special codes enable numbers to bypass the verification
process and proceed unhindered.

, +ROG
n=

Up to 4 digits

Enter a Forced Account Code Exception.

)%, n, +ROG

Exception 1 default = 911

Note

Exception Number 2

Exception 2~4 default = no
value

)%, n, +ROG

One of the assigned exception numbers should be 911.
Exception Numbers for Forced Account Code fields cannot
be duplicated.

)%, n, +ROG
571-04

Exception Number 4

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
573

Delete Door Phone

573-00

Door Phone

This command deletes door phone.

, +ROG
n=

n, +ROG, +ROG

576

Door Phone Night
Ring Over External
Page

576-00

Tenant Number

576-01

Page Group Number

1~6 (CTX100)
1~9 (CTX670 Basic)
1~24 (CTX670 Exp.)

Enter the number of the door phone that is to deleted.

This command assigns a Page Group to ring during system Night
Mode when a door phone button is pressed. The assignment can be
made independently for each Tenant.

, +ROG
n=

1~2 (CTX100)
1~8 (CTX670)

Select the system Tenant number to be assigned Door Phone to
Page Group/Night Ringing.

0~4 (CTX100)
0~8 (CTX670 Basic)
0~16 (CTX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)

Select the system Page Group number that should ring for the
selected Tenant when a door phone button is pressed during the
system Night Mode.

n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
577

Caller History

This command assigns which station stores Caller ID information for
PDN,CO,GCO and POOL line buttons

, +ROG
577-00

Circuit Type/Number

577-01

Primary DN

Up to 6 digits

Enter the Circuit Type and number. See the Table 13-36 on page 89
below.

Up to 5 digits

Enter Station DN to store call history data.

n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

13-88

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-37
Button
579

Circuit Type Code Definitions

Circuit Name

Circuit Type

Circuit Number

0~99999 (DN)

if DN is 200, value is 1200

1~264 (Trunk Number)

if CO is 30, value is 230

GCO

1~128 (GCO Key Group Number)

if GCO is 50, value is 350

POOL

1~128 (POOL Key Group Number)

if POOL is 80, value data is 480

Telephone Button
Programming

Table 13-36

Example

Programs 579~580
Sequence

Value(s)

System Voice Mail
Data

Summary
This command assigns DTMF/SMDI Voice Mail interface parameters
for the system.

, +ROG
579-01

VM ID to DID/DNIS
Association

1. DN VMID (default)
2. DID/DNIS VMID

)%, n, +ROG

Select DN VMID to send the DN’s VMID to voice mail on DID/DNIS
calls that are answered and then transferred to a DN which then
forwards to voice mail.
Select DID/DNIS VMID to send the DID/DNIS number’s VMID to
voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that are answered and then transferred
to a DN which then forwards to voice mail.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a
DN which then forwards to voice mail, the VMID of the DID/DNIS
number (Program 309, )% or )%) or the VMID of the
forwarding DN (Program 200, )% or 206, )%) will be sent to
voice mail per this option.
Note

The DID/DNIS number’s VMID (Program. 309, )% or
)%) is always sent to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that

ring directly to voice mail or ring a DN which then forwards to
voice mail before it is ever answered.

579-02

Cancellation Method
for VM MW

1. Auto and Access Code
Cancel
2. Access Code Cancel
(default)

Select the method used to cancel Voice Mail message waiting
indication.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable to send the SMDI Message Desk Number (001) in the SMDI
packet; otherwise, 000 for a station call or the 3-digit CO line number
is sent.

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Enable to include Caller ID/ANI numbers in SMDR records.

2~10
(default = 10)

Select how many calling number digits to send to the VM unit.

1. 1985
2. 1991 (default)

Send SMDI-Bellcore Standard VM Interface.

)%, n, +ROG
579-03

Message Desk
Number

579-04

Output of CLASS, ANI
and DNIS

579-05

Calling Number Digits
Sent to VM

)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
579-06

Blank Digits Sent to
VM

)%, n, +ROG
579-07

Auto Cancel of VM
and MW

579-08

DTMF Duration

579-09

LCD Control of Voice
Mail

Note

•
•

If 04 Output of CLASS / ANI and DNIS is enabled, this value
must be 10.

1 = 1985 (single space)
2 = 1991 (two spaces).

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Setting of auto cancel of VM and MW.

1. 80 ms (default)
2. 160 ms

Select VM ID Code and System DTMF Signal Time.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enables Toshiba SMDI+ and integration for LCD control of VM. To
enable this feature you must have Stratagy Enterprise Server
Release 3.x or higher.

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-89

Telephone Button Programming
500 Series Programs

Table 13-37
Button
579-10

Programs 579~580 (continued)
Sequence

Central VM Callback

Value(s)

Summary

Up to 7 digits

Enter the pilot DN for the centralized voice mail system. If this field is
left blank, the previously stored number will be deleted.

CFWD All Call Record n =

Up to 4 digits

)%, n, +ROG

(default = 91)

Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via
“Call Fwd All Calls.

)%, n, +ROG
579-11
579-12

CFWD Busy Record

579-13

CFWD No Answer
Record

Up to 4 digits

)%, n, +ROG

(default = 91)

Direct Call

579-15

Retrieve Messages

579-16

Voice Main DN

Up to 4 digits

Up to 4 digits
(default = 91)

Enter DTMF VM-ID string for calls arriving at the voice mail to retrieve
messages.

Up to 7 digits

Use a VM Pilot DN as a transfer destination.

)%, n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
Length of VM ID

(default = 91)
n=

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
580

Voice Mail Port Data

580-00

VM Port DN

Enter DTMF VM-ID string for a call arriving at the voice mail as a
Direct Call.

(default = 91)

)%, n, +ROG

579-17

Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving at the voice mail via
“Call Fwd No Answer.”

(default = 91)

)%, n, +ROG
579-14

Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via
“Call Fwd Busy.”

1~10
(default = 91)

Select the number of characters in VM-ID string.
Assign characteristics of individual voice mail ports.

, +ROG
n=

Up to 5 digits

Enter the DN of an individual VM port. For direct transfer to voice
mail, enter the remote Node ID and Pilot DN.

n, +ROG

Note

580-01

Control Method

1. Inband/DTMF
2. SMDI
(default = no value)

Specify In-band or SMDI integration. Select SMDI for Remote voice
mail.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Select whether Strata CTX sends A or D tone when a station
connecting to voice mail answers or disconnects.

1. B Tone
2. No Tone (default)
3. B Tone and Extension
Number

Enable Strata CTX to send B tones in the event of a Blind Transfer
Recall.

1. Enable (default)
2. Disable

Enable Strata CTX to send DTMF tones to voice mail in response to
key presses from a digital telephone.

)%, n, +ROG
580-02

Send A/D Tone

580-03

Send B Tone

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
580-04

End-to-end

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

13-90

Do not enter a Pilot DN. This feature is available only with
CTX Release 1.3 or higher software and with CTX WinAdmin
Release 1.3 or higher software.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
600 Series Programs

Table 13-38
Button
650

Telephone Button
Programming

600 Series Programs
Programs 650~660
Sequence

Value(s)

Behind Centrex
Assignment

Summary
Assigns parameters for operation behind Centrex or another PBX

, +ROG
650-00

OLG Number

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)

Specify OLG Number that is attached to a Centrex or another PBX.
(1~128 Expanded; 1~47 Basic)

1:Enable

Enable or disable Behind Centrex operation for this OLG.

n, +ROG
650-01

Behind Centrex

)%, n, +ROG
650-02

Assume 9

2:Disable (default)
n=

)%, n, +ROG
650-03

Pause Timer
(Seconds)

Check to turn on the Assume 9 feature.

2:Disable (default)
n=

0~5
(default = 0)

)%, n, +ROG
651

1:Enable

Private Routing Plan
Analysis Table
Assignment

Enter the number of seconds (0~5) the CTX will wait for second dial
tone from Centrex/PBX.
Assigns Node IDs to Route Choice Tables for Private Networking

, +ROG
651-00
651-01

Node ID

Up to 6-digits.

Enter the Node ID to be associated with a Private Route Choice Table
Number.

0~64, 0 = Delete

Note

n, +ROG.
Private Network
Route Choice Table
Number

Enter the Private Route Choice Table Number to be
associated with this Node ID. Entering “0” deletes the Node
ID.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
653

Private Route Choice
Table Assignment

Use this command to define a Private Network Route Choice Table. A
Private Network Route Choice Table contains up to six Route
Definitions. The system will step through these Route Definitions in
terminating hunt fashion to find a route to the desired Private Network
networking node. There may be up to 64 Route Choice Tables.

, +ROG
653-00

65301~06

654

Private Network
Route Choice Table
Number.

n, +ROG,
5RXWH'HILQLWLRQ n =
7DEOHa5RXWH
'HILQLWLRQ7DEOH
)%~)%, n, +ROG,
+ROG

1~64, 0 = delete

Enter the Private Network Route Choice Table Number (1~64).

0~64, 0 = delete

Enter the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, last Route Definition Table to
be used for for this Private Network Route Choice. Entering “0” will
delete an existing entry.

Private Route
Definition Table
Assignment

Use this command to define a Private Network Route Definition. A
Private Network Route Definition consists of an Outgoing Line Group
(OLG) and a pointer into the Private Network Digit Modification Table
that contains the dialed digits to be deleted and/or inserted before
being communicated to the distant node.

, +ROG
654-00

Private Network
Route Definition

654-01

OLG

1~64

Enter the number of the Private Network Route Definition (1~64) to be
defined or deleted.

1~32 (CTX100)
1~50 (CTX670 Basic)
1~128 (CTX670 Exp.)
0 = delete

Enter the OLG to be used by this route definition.(1~128 Expanded;
1~47 Basic)

n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-91

Telephone Button Programming
600 Series Programs

Table 13-38
Button
654-02

Programs 650~660 (continued)
Sequence

Digit Modification
Table

Value(s)
n=

0~64, 0 = delete

Summary
Enter the Digit Modification Table Number (1~64) to be used by this
route definition.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
655

Private Digit
Modification Table
Assignment

655-00

Private Digit
Modification Table

655-01

Private Digit
Modification Digit To
Be Deleted

655-02

Insert Leading Digits

The Private Network Digit Modification table may contain up to 64
entries. Each entry specifies the number of leading digits to be
deleted from the dialed number and the dial string to be inserted as
leading digits. The inserted dial string may have up to 23 digits.

, +ROG
n=

1~64

Enter the Private Network Digit Modification Table (1~64) to be
defined.

1~10, 0 = delete

Enter the number of leading digits to be deleted (1~10).

Up to 23 digits

Enter the leading digits to be inserted. A numerical string up to 23
digits.

n, +ROG

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
656

Node ID Assignment

Assigns up to 4 Network Node IDs to this node for processing
incoming network calls. Each Node ID has an overlap code. The CTX
will substitute the Overlap Code for the Node ID before processing
the call further. A Network Directory Number consists of a Node ID
and the desired extension in that node. Node ID must first be
established in CMD102.

, +ROG

656-01

Primary Node ID

Up to 6 digits

Enter the Primary Node ID for this node. This Node ID identifies the
node for administration. Node ID must first be established in Program
102.

Up to 4 digits

Enter the Overlap Code associated with the Primary Node ID. An
Overlap Code is the string of digits that will replace the Node ID for
further call processing.

Up to 6 digits

Enter Node ID 2 for this node. Node ID must first be established in
CMD102.

)%, n, 6SNU, n1,
+ROG

n1 =

Up to 4 digits

Enter the Overlap Code associated with Node ID 2. An Overlap Code
is the string of digits that will replace the Node ID for further call
processing.

Node ID 3

Up to 6 digits

)%, n, 6SNU, n1,
+ROG

Enter the Overlap Code associated with Node ID 3. An Overlap Code
is the string of digits that will replace the Node ID for further call
processing.

n1 =

Up to 4 digits

Enter Node ID 4 for this node. Node ID must first be established in
CMD102.

Node ID 4

Up to 6 digits

Enter the Overlap Code associated with Node ID 4. An Overlap Code
is the string of digits that will replace the Node ID for further call
processing.

n1 =

Up to 4 digits

The privilege to pick a specified DN.

Primary Overlap Code

)%, n, +ROG

656-02

Node ID 2
Overlap Code 2

656-04

Overlap Code 3

656-05

Overlap Code 4

)%, n, 6SNU, n1,
+ROG, +ROG

13-92

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
600 Series Programs

Table 13-38

Sequence

Value(s)

Network COS
Mapping Table
Assignment

Summary
This table translates a Network COS received as part of a Traveling
Class Mark to a local Class of Service for access to local services.
There is no translation of Outgoing Network COS.

, +ROG
Network COS

1~32

Enter the Network COS to be translated (1~32).

1~32

Enter the Local COS to be used in place of the received Network
COS (1~32).

1. Enable
2. Disable (default)

Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can activate
Off-Hook Call Announce.

n, +ROG
657-01

Local COS

)%, n, +ROG
657-02

Off-hook Call
Announce

657-03

System Speed Dial

Telephone Button
Programming

Button
657

Programs 650~660 (continued)

)%, n, +ROG
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use a
System Speed Dial number to make an otherwise restricted outgoing
call.

)%, n, +ROG
657-04

COS Override

Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use
Class of Service Override.

)%, n, +ROG
657-05

TGAC Override

Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can override
local Trunk Group Access Control. Typically an attendant function.

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
658/
659/
660

Network DRL
Mapping Tables

This command is used to establish two mapping tables to equate
local DRLs with network DRLs for both outbound and inbound
network calls.

, +ROG
Type

1. Outbound
2. Inbound

Choose “Outbound” to equate the DRL of the local originator to a
Network DRL. Choose “Inbound” to equate a received Network DRL
with a local DRL for local termination.

1~16

Enter the local DRL/FRL/QPL you want to map to Network DRL/FRL/
QPL 1~DRL/FRL/QPL 16. This value can be different depending on
the type of table chosen above.

n, +ROG
Network DRL/FRL/
QPL

)%, n, +ROG
661

Network DN Table

This program assigns the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs to a CTX node ID.
This include all DNs in all CTX nodes on the CTX network, except the
DNs in the node you are currently programming.

, +ROG
661-00

Network DN

Five ASCII characters max.
(Default = No Data)

Enter the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs that should be assigned to a CTX
Node ID. This include all DNs in all CTX Nodes on the CTX network,
except the DNs in the node you are currently programming.

Six ASCII characters max.
(Default = No Data)

Enter the CTX Node ID that should be assigned to the DN.

n, +ROG
661-01

Node ID

)%, n, +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-93

Telephone Button Programming
800 Series Programs

800 Series Programs
Table 13-39
Button
801

Programs 801~803
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

Network Jack LAN
Device Assignments

This screen assigns the LAN parameters for the PC applications
connected to the BECU Network Jack through a LAN or Hub.

, +ROG
801-00

LAN Port Number

1~12 (default = no value)

n, +ROG

Enter the port number of the LAN device to be assigned. Refer to
Program 803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments.
Notes

•
•
•
•

Program the local port number for LCD Control of Voice Mail
Use the same Device Port No. (11) for Network BLF.
Use 10 for Network TPI
Use 12 for Network DSS

Network BLF and DSS are available only with CTX Release 1.3 or
higher software and with CTX WinAdmin Release 1.3 or higher
software.
801-01

Protocol

1. TCP (default)
2. UDP

Select communication Protocol.

1. Server (default)
2. Client

Enter the application PC type: Server or Client.

1. Synchronization
2. Asynchronization
(default)

Enter the data flow protocol that should take place between the CTX
and PC. If the PC is a CTX, CTI application assign “Asynchronization”
to data flow.

0~65535 (default = 0)

Enter the Server Port Number and proceed to 07 Read Retry
Number. This field is required if Server was selected in 02 PC
Operation Type above. If not, leave this field blank and proceed to 05
Client IP Address.

)%, n, +ROG
801-02

PC Operation Type

)%, n, +ROG
801-03

Data Flow

)%, n, +ROG
801-04

Server Port Number

Note

)%, n, +ROG

Note
801-05

Client IP Address

801-06

)%)%)%
RU)%, n, +ROG

801-07

0~255 (default = 0)

Select UDP for Network DSS.

Use 6000 for Network BLF, 3000 for Network DSS, and 5000
for Network TPI.

Enter the Client LAN IP Address. This field is required if Client was
selected in 02 PC Operation Type above.
0~255 for each octet (default = 0)
Enter IP address of Stratagy iES32 or SES.

801-08
801-09

Write Retry Number

801-10

Write Retry Number

0~65535 (default = 0)

Enter the Client Port number. This field is required if Client was
selected in 02 PC Operation Type above.

0~10 (default = 1)

Set the Read Retry counter to (1~10).

0~10 (default = 1)

Set the Write Retry counter to (1~10).

)%, n, +ROG
)%, n, +ROG
801-11

Write Retry Number

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG
803

IO Logical Device
Assignment

This screen is used to assign:
1. SMDR and SMDI to logical device and BSIS, RS-232 port
numbers.

, +ROG

2. CTX WinAdmin, ACD sever, and Attendant Console to BECU,
Network Jack logical device and LAN port numbers.
803-00

Logical Device
Number
n, +ROG

13-94

100 = SMDR
300 or 301 = SMDI
200~208 = CTI LAN
Devices of PCs (default =
no value)
400 = BLF
500 = DSS

Enter the 3-digit logical device number for SMDR, SMDI, and LAN
device or PC application. See “Device Table” on page 13-95
SMDR: 100
SMDI: 300 or 301
CTI LAN devices or PCs can be assigned to any of the 9 LAN devices
numbers available: 200~208.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
800 Series Programs

Table 13-39

803-01

Sequence

Value(s)

Device Connection

)%, n, +ROG

803-02

Device Port Number

)%, n, +ROG

Summary

1. None (default)
2. LAN
3. RS-232

1. Enter RS-232 for SMDR or SMDI devices or PCs. These devices
are connected to BSIS, RS-232 ports.

1~4 (for RS-232)
1~9 (for LAN)
11 (for BLF Networking)

1. SMDR and SMDI devices can be assigned to any BSIS, RS-232
Port: 1~4 (one port per device)..

(default = 1)

2. Enter LAN for CTX WinAdmin, ACD Server, and Attendant Console
PC. These devices are connected to the BECU Network Jack directly
or via a HUB or LAN.

Telephone Button
Programming

Button

Programs 801~803 (continued)

2. LAN devices and PCs can be assigned to LAN logical Port (1~9)
according to their logical device number assignments as shown:
LAN Port1=device200
LAN Port2=device201
LAN Port3=device202
LAN Port4=device203
LAN Port5=device204
LAN Port6=device205
LAN Port7=device206
LAN Port8=device207

Table 13-40

Device Table

Logical
Device

Logical Device
Serial Number

Physical Device
LAN

PPP

RS-232C

Smart
Media

Define I/O
Logical
Device
Number

SMDR

100

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

300

301

CTI

SMDI

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-95

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Table 13-41
Button
804

Program 804
Sequence

Value(s)

Summary

RS232C Data
Assignment

Use this screen to setup the RS-232 serial Ports on the BSIS
interface PCB.

, +ROG
804-00

BSIS Port

1~4 (default = no value)

Enter the BSIS PCB port number.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

This is the data speed of BSIS port in bits per second (bps).

n, +ROG
804-01

Port Speed

)%, n, +ROG

804-02

Port Parity

Data Bits
Flow Control

This is the parity error checking methods used by the BSIS port.

1. 7 Bits (default)
2. 8 Bits

This is the number of data bits used for each data block.

1. None (default)
2. Flow

This is the type of flow control used between the BSIS port and the
SMDI or SMDR device. Must be set to “FLOW” in order for the CTX to
buffer call records.

0~255

Maximum time to wait for connection.

(default = 30 seconds)

1. 0 means wait permanently

)%, n, +ROG
804-05

Wait Timer

The total combined maximum speed of BSIS ports cannot
exceed 57,600 bps.

1. None
2. Even
3. Odd (default)

)%, n, +ROG
804-04

Note

)%, n, +ROG
804-03

300
1200
2400
4800
9600 (default)
19200
38400
57600

)%, n, +ROG, +ROG

2. Timer value can be 1-255 seconds.

900 Series Programs
These programs are organized based on functions versus program numbers.

System Initialize
This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes, or restores programmed data.
Program Number(s): 900
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name
Initialize Level

FB
01

Summary

Value

Press or to select the initialize level.

1. Initialize Level 1

Level 1 – Erases programmed data and
enters default data or backed up data if a
SmartMedia Card is installed (see Note).

2. Initialize Level 2

LCD Prompt
1:Restart with
Clear Data
2:Restart

Level 2 – Simulates System Power Off/Power
On operation to reset hardware.

13-96

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

➤ To access programming parameters

2. Press +ROG twice to initialize.
Important!

Choosing Initialize Level 1 without installing a SmartMedia Card deletes all programmed
data and returns your Strata CTX to factory default settings. All previously programmed
data is lost.

Telephone Button
Programming

1. Press )% to choose Initialize Level 1 or 2.

Restoring Data from SmartMedia

When initializing with Level 1 you can restore custom data that was previously programmed and stored on
a SmartMedia card. To do so, follow the steps below.
1. Install a SmartMedia card that contains the Prgdata directory with the default.dat file. The
default.dat file contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data Backup. See
“Data Backup” on page 13-105.
Important!

A CTX default.dat database can only be restored to a CTX software version that is the
same or higher than the CTX software version on which the default.dat file was created.
Examples: A default.dat created on CTXR2.0 MF029 can be restored on an R2.0
MF030, MF031 and higher R2.1MG0XX, R2.2 MF0XX (XX = 01~99, but it cannot be
restored on R2.0 MF012, MF011 and lower, or R1.X ME0XX, MD0XX, etc.

2. After installing the SmartMedia card, run System Initialization using Initialize Level 1.
Restoring data from the SmartMedia card may take an hour or more. To verify completion of the restore
process access, the Programming Mode from a telephone and enter your password. If the system
enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.
Note During the restore process, the telephone LCD may display date and time data. This does not

necessarily indicate completion of the restore process.

Display Version
This program enables you to view current software versions for the Strata CTX system and installed
options.
• Active – As the name implies, this is the current active software operating the Strata CTX system.
• Standby – This is a software version released prior to the active version. It acts as a backup in the event
problems are experienced by the Active version.
Program Number(s): 901
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-97

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

FB Name

FB
01

Version
Number

Summary
Display Active side software version and
installed options.

Value

LCD Prompt

6~31 digits

Installed Version

As the name implies, this is the current active
software operating the CTX system.

Active
Version
Number

Standby
(CTX670 only).

Display Standby side software version and
installed options.

Installed Version

This is a software version released prior to
the active version. It acts as a backup in the
event problems are experienced by the
Active version.

1. Press )% to view current Strata CTX software version. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH key to move the
display left or right.
2. Press )% to view backup Strata CTX software version.
3. Press +ROG, then +ROG to return to the PROG=prompt.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Reading the Version Code

The figure below is an example of the Strata CTX software version code.
Country
Code
CTX
Product ID
Release
Level

CTX
Software
Version

DTMF
IPL
Version Version

Installed
Equipment ID

NA101M00XXP1D12BXSEM.00
NA102MA2XXP1D12BXSEM.00
NA103MA3XXP1D12BXSEM.00

- Release 1.01
- Release 1.02
- Release 1.03
6499

Figure 13-3 Version Code

• Product ID – This is the first character in the version code string. “N” designates CTX670 and “S”
CTX100.
• Country Code – “A” identifies the country (USA, Canada, Mexico).
• CTX Release Level – This string of numbers identifies the Strata CTX Release level (NA101=R1.01,
NA102=R1.02, NA103=R1.03, etc).
• CTX Software Version – This string of characters identifies the current software version. For the
example above, the software is called “M00XX, MA2XX, MA3XX, etc,” where XX is the version
number.
• DTMF Version – This three character string identifies the existence of DTMF and ABR circuits and
the version. The “D” designation indicates that DTMF is being applied to the Strata CTX while “09”
indicates the DTMF version number.

13-98

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Telephone Button
Programming

• Installed Equipment ID – There are five characters, each referencing a unique equipment
identification value assigned to hardware installed in your Strata CTX system. If the particular
hardware is not installed a “-” displays. The following are the equipment identifier designations.
• B – BBMS is installed.
• X – BEXS is installed.
• S – BSIS is installed.
• E – The Ethernet is installed.
• M – The Modem is installed.

Set Time and Date
This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CTX.
Program Number(s): 902
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name
Date

Summary

01
Enter current system date in this field.

Time

Value
yymmdd format

yy = current year
mm = current month
dd = current day
hhmmss format

Enter the current time in this field.

LCD Prompt
DATE=

TIME=

hh = current hour
mm = current minute
ss = current second

1. Press )% to enter current Strata CTX Date. See table above for format.
2. Press +ROG to program.
3. Press )% to enter current Strata CTX time. See table above for format.
4. Press +ROG to program.
5. Press +ROG to submit, then +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
6. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Event Trace Control

This program enables you to trace message events occurring in Strata CTX.
Program Number(s): 903
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

Install SmartMedia card

Access Sequence:

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-99

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name

FB
01

Trace State

Summary
Enter or to Start or Stop Message
Trace. Stopping the trace outputs data to
the SmartMedia card. Wait for the 352*
prompt on the LCD before proceeding.

Value

LCD Prompt

1:Start

1:START

2:Stop

2:STOP

1~256 (in bytes)

SIZE=

Before removing the SmartMedia card run
Program 908. See “Format/Unmount
SmartMedia” on page 13-103.
02

Trace Size

Trace Category

Set the trace data size. Toshiba
recommends leaving this parameter at the
default setting which provides
approximately 15 minutes of trace data.

03
Trace data type to be stored.

1 unit = 16 bytes.
default = 2
1:Call Processing
2:Maint and Admin
3:Both of the above

1.CP
2.M&A
3.CP+M&A (default)

1. Press )% to enable Start or Stop trace. Use the number key pad to make your selection.
2. Press +ROG.
Notes
●

Start indicates the trace was previously started and is currently running.

●

Stop indicates the trace is not running and all trace buffer data was transferred to SmartMedia.

3. Press )% to enter trace file size. To change the setting, use the number Dial Pad.
4. Press +ROG.
5. Press )% to set trace category. To view setting options, press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button.
6. Press +ROG twice to execute. Wait for the PROG=prompt to display before proceeding.
7. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Note When CTX 670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card. A new trace

file is stored on SmartMedia under the Evnttrace directory. Run the Unmount command (Program
908) before removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data transfer.

13-100

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

ISDN Trace Location
Telephone Button
Programming

This program enables set up of ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions.
Program Number(s): 904
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
At the EQUIP= prompt enter the Shelf, Slot and Port numbers.

Notes

•

Shelf, Slot and Circuit number is entered in “XXYYZZ” format where Shelf is a two digit value from
01~07 corresponding to the Strata CTX Cabinet number, Slot is a two digit value from 01~10
corresponding to the Strata CTX Cabinet’s PCB slot number and Circuit is a two digit value from
01~04 corresponding to the Strata CTX PCB Slot’s circuit number.

•

Always use circuit 01 for RPTU.
FB Name

LLCI

Summary
Level of collecting LLCI values.

Value

Layer 3

Level of collecting Layer 3 messages.

1:None (no
information)

Layer 2 and 3

Level of collecting Layer 2 and Layer 3
messages.

2:Brief (important
information)

State Transitions

Level of collecting State Transitions.

Errors

Level of collecting errors.

3:Detailled (all
information)

Layer 2 States

Level of collecting Layer 2 States.

LCD Prompt
1:NON
2:BRIEF
3:DETAILED

1. Press )% to run a LLCI Trace. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
2. Press )% and set CCL3 Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
3. Press )% and set L2L3 Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
4. Press )% and set STATE Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
5. Press )% and set ERRORS Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
6. Press )% and set L2 Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
7. Press +ROG to execute.
8. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
9. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-101

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

All ISDN Trunk Trace
Program start/stop of packaged detailed collection of event trace functions. This program is only available
in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 905
Prerequisite Program: “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103, “ISDN Trace Location” on page 13-101,
“ISDN Trace Location” on page 13-101 and “Event Trace Control” on page 13-99

Reference:

Install SmartMedia card

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name
Trace All ISDN
Trunks

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

FB
01

Summary
Output All ISDN Trunk Events to
SmartMedia.

Value

LCD Prompt

1:On (default)

1:ON

2:Off

2:OFF

Press )%.
Select , or to turn on or off.
Press +ROG twice to execute.
Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.

Event Trace Side Change
This program enables you to manage your ISDN protocol trace. This program is only available in the
telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 906
Prerequisite Program: “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103
Reference:

Install SmartMedia card

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name
Side Change

Summary

01
Enter desired parameter number.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

13-102

Value

LCD Prompt

1:Message

1:MESSAGE

2:ISDN

3:Message+ISDN

3:MESSAGE+ISDN

Press )%.
Select , , or to select parameter.
Press +ROG to execute.
Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Note When the CTX 670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card. Run the

System Admin Log
Use this command to Start/Stop the System Admin Log.
Program Number(s): 907

Telephone Button
Programming

Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data
transfer.

Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

Install SmartMedia card

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name
Admin Log On/Off

FB
01

Summary
Enter or to Start or Stop Admin Log.

Value

LCD Prompt

1:Start

1:START

2:Stop

2:STOP

1. Press )%. To run System Admin Log press +ROG (twice). You are sent to the PROG= prompt.
2. To Stop the log, press )% and press on the dial pad.
3. Press +ROG twice and wait for the 352*= prompt to appear before proceeding.
Note When the CTX 670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card. Run the

Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data
transfer.

Format/Unmount SmartMedia
This program enables Administrators to format a SmartMedia card from Strata CTX WinAdmin or the
telephone button pad.
Note Strata CTX WinAdmin cannot view SmartMedia files directly. Additional hardware is required to

view the contents of the SmartMedia card.
Program Number(s): 908
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-103

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

.
FB Name
Control

FB
01

Summary

Value

LCD Prompt

Choose SmartMedia card formatting method:

1:Normal

1:NORMAL

Normal – creates any Strata CTX SmartMedia
directory that does not exist already. Exiting
directories are not overwritten by this procedure.

2:Forced

2:FORCED

3:Unmount

3:UNMOUNT

4:Transfer

4:TRANSFER

Forced – erases any existing directories and files.
All existing data is overwritten. See Strata CTX
SmartMedia Directories for more information.
Unmount – writes data into SmartMedia Card.
Always run unmount before removing the
SmartMedia card to prevent damage to the card.
Transfer – writes data from static RAM to
SmartMedia Card.

1. Press )% to enter parameter. Enter ~ as your command choice. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to
make your selection.
2. Press +ROG to confirm and +ROG again to execute.
3. Wait for the PROG=prompt to appear before proceeding.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Strata CTX SmartMedia Directories

Running the Normal and Forced options of this program creates five directories on the SmartMedia card as
follows:
• Admlog – The Admlog folder saves
• Errlog – System error logs are saved into this folder.
• Evnttrce – Strata CTX WinAdmin Event Trace files are saved into this folder.
• Progdata – Your Strata CTX programmed settings are all saved in this folder.
• Program – The operating software and default data of the Strata CTX is saved in this folder.
When a backup is performed, Strata CTX saves programmed data to the Progdata folder.

13-104

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

MAC Address (System Serial Number)
Telephone Button
Programming

This program enables you to display your CTX 670 System Serial Number.
Program Number(s): 909
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name

Summary

MAC Address

Display System Serial Number.

Value
12 digits

LCD Prompt
MAC Address

1. Press )% to view parameter. The MAC Address is view only and cannot be changed.
2. Press +ROG (twice) to exit to the 352*= prompt.
3. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.

Data Backup
This program enables you to Back up system data to a SmartMedia card.
Program Number(s): 910
Prerequisite Program: “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name
Backup Function

FB
01

Summary

Value

LCD Prompt

Start and Stop system backup.

1:Backup

1:BACKUP

Note

2:Restore (Do not
use. See Note on
left).

2:RESTORE

Restore function is not operational
and should never be executed.
Use System Initialize (Program
900) Level 1 to restore system
backup.

3:CANCEL

3:Cancel

Numbers

The number of data blocks. This number
varies depending on the amount of
programming the system contains.

Variable

ALL NO=

Current Number

This number increments as the backup
progresses. When the backup is complete
this number should match the total number
of data blocks displayed in Numbers
()%).

Variable

CUR NO=

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-105

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

FB Name
Backup State

FB
04

Summary

Value

All_Ok – Backup completed with no errors.

1:normal end all
2:normal end part
3:abnormal end
4:cancel
5:importing
6:exporting

Partial_Ok – Backup has completed with
errors.
NG – Backup has failed.
Cancel – Cancel Backup.

LCD Prompt

Importing – Program data is being
restored.
Exporting – Program data is being sent out.

Note Before running this program, make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted. See “Format/

Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103 for more details.
1. Press )% to enter your Backup choice. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view your selection
options.
2. Press . )% and )% should blink green.
3. Press +ROG to execute. Press +ROG again to Cancel. This program stops running if you exit
programming mode from your telephone.
➤ To view Backup progress

1. While the program is running ()% and )% blink green), press )% to view the total number of
files to be transferred.
2. Press )% to view the current file number that is being transferred.
3. The Backup is complete when )% blinks intermittently.
4. To verify success, push )%. Your telephone LCD should indicate *1.ALL_OK.
5. Press +ROG to exit.
Note Do not press the +ROG button. Pressing the +ROG button restarts the Backup procedure.

To Restore data from the SmartMedia card to Strata CTX, see “System Initialize” on page 13-96.

Program Update
This program enables you to update the Strata CTX programs.
Program Number(s): 911
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name
Update Function

FB
01

Summary

Value

Enter 1 or 2 to identify the type of Update
intended.
Select 3 to cancel a running update.

13-106

LCD Prompt

1:Update

2:Reboot

3:Cancel

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

FB Name

Summary

Value

LCD Prompt

View total blocks to be updated (total blocks
will vary depending on software versions).

0~65536 (CTX670) n/a
0~128 (CTX100)
default = 0

Copied Blocks

View number of blocks copied.

0~65536 (CTX670) n/a
0~128 (CTX100)
default = 0

Active Side Status

Backup Type Display

1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error

Stand by Backup Type

1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error

Stand by Side Status 05

Active Side Number

Active Side Number.

0 or 1
default = 0

ACT SIDE=

Status

View Backup Status.

1:Idle
2:Running
3:Success
4:Error

Telephone Button
Programming

Total Blocks

Note Before running this program, make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted. See “Format/

Make Busy Control
When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or a line fails, this feature makes them busy.
The station or line PCB can be disabled temporarily to perform maintenance or parts replacements as well.
This program is only available in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 912
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
At the CABINET= prompt enter the Shelf number.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-107

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Note The Shelf number is entered in “XX” format where Shelf is a two digit value from 01~07

corresponding to the Strata CTX Cabinet number. See “Program Button LEDs” below for a
description of the LED display.
FB Name

Summary
Enter Cabinet Number

Value

Equipment

01~07 (value=xx)

Slot #1

1: Set make busy

Slot #2

2: Clear make busy

Slot #3

Slot #4

Slot #5

Slot #6

Slot #7

Slot #8

Slot #9

Slot #10

Enter or

1. Press )%~)% to enter your Make Busy selection for the appropriate Slot in the Cabinet entered in
Access Sequence above.
Note The slot to which your programming phone is connected can not be set to Make Busy.

2. Press +ROG to execute.
3. Press +ROG again to return to CABINET= prompt.
4. Press +ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.
Program Button LEDs

The LED blink pattern indicates the following:
• Red continuous blinking – PCB experienced a Make Busy status error.
• Red continuous illumination – PCB Make Busy Status mode is on.
• Green continuous blinking – PCB Make Busy Status mode is stand by.
• Green intermittent blinking – PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle.

13-108

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Regional Selection
Set Operating region for your Strata CTX. This assignment sets built-in core LSI hardware parameters that
are not changeable with jumpers or switches. These parameters must be set unique for each country and
affect system operation.
Program Number(s): 915
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name
Region

FB
01

Summary
Set region number. 0~2 are valid entries for
North American Operations.

Value
0~31 (USA = 0,
Canada = 1, and
Mexico = 2).

LCD Prompt
REGION=

1. Press )%. Enter ~. Press +ROG.
2. Press +ROG (twice).
3. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

13-109

Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

IP Configuration
This program enables you to set up Network Communication Protocols.
Program Number(s): 916
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:

None

Access Sequence:

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG✱✱✱✱✱.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press+ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.

FB Name
IP Address

FB
01

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

Summary

Value

Enter IP Address 1.

0~255

192 = First IP Address Octet
168 = Second IP Address Octet
254 = Third IP Address Octet
253 = Fourth IP Address Octet

default =

Enter Subnet Mask Address 1.
Enter Default Gateway 1.

0~255
default =
0~255
default =

Notes

•

The LCD only displays three of the twelve IP address digits at a time. Press the 6SNU button to view
the remaining digits.

•

The IP Address is the static IP address of the Strata CTX processor NIC/Ethernet connection only. The
PPP IP address for the Strata CTX processor modem is always 192.168.255.254 and cannot be
changed.

1. Press )% to view the current TCP/IP Address 1 (press )% to view the current Subnet Mask
Address 1, or press )% to view Default Gateway Address 1).
Press +ROG.
2. Enter first IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 3.
3. Press 6SNU button and enter second IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 4.
4. Press 6SNU button and enter third IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 5.
5. Press 6SNU button and enter fourth IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 6.
6. Press +ROG.
7. Press )% to configure the remaining parameters.
8. Press +ROG.
9. After all parameters are entered press +ROG to submit the new settings.
10.You are automatically returned to the PROG= prompt.
11. Enter another program number to continue programming or press +ROG again to exit programming
mode.

13-110

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Maintenance

This chapter provides Strata CTX maintenance procedures that can be activated from the programming
telephone. For SmartMedia, refer to “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103.

Data Backup
1. Format the SmartMedia using “Format/Unmount SmartMedia” on page 13-103 (Program 908).
2. Insert the formatted SmartMedia into Strata CTX.
3. Backup data using “Data Backup” on page 13-105 (Program 910). LED indicators should show the
following:
• )%~)% solid red light.
• )% intermittent green.
4. Press )% and choose Backup by pressing on the telephone button pad.
CAUTION!

Never use Restore (2). It is not valid for current versions of CTX software and could
result in corrupt databases and system mis-operation.

5. Press +ROG. Backup for programmed data starts. The LED indicator )% consistently blinks green
during back up. After back up is complete, )% will flash inconsistently slower.
CAUTION!

Do not press +ROG while Backup is being performed.

6. Press +ROG twice to exit programming.

Backup Progress and Completion Indicators
You can monitor Backup progress by pressing the )% or )% buttons as follows. See “Data Backup”
on page 13-105 for more details.
• If the value displayed in the LCD is increasing each time )% is pressed, the Backup is proceeding
successfully.
• When the value displayed in the LCD for )% and )% are the same, the Backup process is
complete.
• When the )% LED returns to an intermittent green, Backup is complete.
• Press )%to verify Backup is completed. If the LCD displays *1:ALL_OK the Backup was successful.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

14-1

Maintenance
Restoring Programmed Data

Restoring Programmed Data
To restore data from a Backup performed onto SmartMedia, follow the directions below:
1. Insert the SmartMedia card that has the system’s default.dat file (under the PROGDATA folder) into the
Strata CTX SmartMedia slot.
2. Run Program 900 “System Initialize” on page 13-96, Level 1 (ALL DATA CLEAR). See programming
steps below.
Restoring data takes anywhere from 10 minutes to one hour for completion, depending on the size of
the database (default.dat file).
3. When the programming telephone LCD becomes active, enter the programming mode and enter your
password.
Restore is complete if the system accepts the password and enables you to enter programming mode.
4. Remove the SmartMedia card and restart the CTX again after restoring system data. This is necessary
to reset BIBU-M, BIPU-Q, QSIG, ISDN and other advanced features.

Local Update
The following procedures are required for both systems Local Update, i.e; Strata CTX100 and CTX670.

Prerequisites for CTX100 and CTX670 Local Update
The following are the prerequisites for Local Update:
• The SmartMedia card must be installed in the system with a Backup of the current database
(default.dat) file.
• Activation of the new software requires a Clear-reboot operation that will drop all existing calls and
will take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more, depending on the system size.
• Requires a different system software Update file (provided on the Toshiba FYI site), depending on the
type of CTX system and the type of Update that will be performed.

CTX Software Update Files
Each Strata CTX system type has two Software Update files: one for CTX WinAdmin Remote Update and
another file for Local Update (to use with the Programming Telephone procedure).
CAUTION!

Using the wrong file in either case will cause the Update to fail.

CTX Software Identification
Refer to the table below to identify CTX software release and builds in software file names or when
verifying CTX software versions.
CTX Release
R1.00 and R1.01
R1.02
R1.03
R1.3
R2.0
R2.1
nn = Software build level/number

14-2

Software ID
= M01nn
= MA2nn
= MA3nn
= ME0nn
= MF0nn
= MG0nn

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Maintenance
Local Update

Step 1A: To Download CTX System Software Files from FYI
1. From the Toshiba FYI website, click on Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems). The files are
located under the heading “CTX System Software.”
2. Double-click the appropriate link.
CTX100 System Software: CTX100 MXnnn Software (Local Update)
Maintenance

CTX670 System Software: CTX670 MXnnn Software (Local Update)
3. When the Toshiba Software License Agreement screen displays, click the Agree button. The File
Download dialog box displays.
4. Select the “Save this program to disk” radio button, then click OK. The Save As screen displays.
5. Save the file to an appropriately named folder that identifies the system type and software version, then
click Save.

●

The WinZip Self-Extractor screen displays if you selected the Open or Open Folder button.
If you selected Close, double-clicking the .exe file later will bring up the WinZip Self-Extractor
screen.

These files are the self extracting .exe files:
• CTX100_L_MXnnn.exe (for CTX100 Local Update file)
• CTX670_L_MXnnn.exe (for CTX670 Local Update file)
2. In the “Unzip to folder:” field, make sure the path leads to the correct folder as shown below. If the path
is incorrect, click the Browse button to navigate to the appropriate path, then click the Unzip button.
3. Verify the unzip folder path for Local Update: SmartMedia Drive:\PROGRAM
4. Verify the unzipped files or folders for Local Update of the Strata CTX100 and CTX670 the file name
is the same “nhs.prg”.
The files can also be extracted to a temporary folder and the copied to the appropriate SmartMedia
PROGRAM folder or CTX WinAdmin Upload folder. The extracted (decompressed) files will be
approximately 15MB.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

14-3

Maintenance
Local Update

Step 2: Choose Strata CTX100 or CTX670 for Local Update
Choose one of the following:
• Strata CTX100 Local Update
• Strata CTX670 Local Update

Strata CTX100 Local Update
The Update process is used to change the Strata CTX software version and restore programmed data. The
new software is first loaded on the SmartMedia card. It is then transferred to the Strata CTX100 processor
flash RAM. The Strata CTX100 programmed data is then restored.
Step 1: Prepare SmartMedia Card with Backup of Customer Database
This SmartMedia card will contain a back up of the Strata CTX programmed data (default.dat).

1. Insert a SmartMedia card into the CTX, format it, and then back up the customer database onto the
SmartMedia card using the Backup Data procedure (see the “Data Backup” on page 14-1).
This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory to the SmartMedia card.
2. Remove the SmartMedia card from the CTX and physically label it “Strata CTX Backup data.”
Step 2: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Copy of New CTX Software
This SmartMedia card will contain the new Strata CTX software file (nhs.prg) used to Update the system
software:

1. Obtain the Strata CTX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba FYI and store it on an
appropriately named folder on your PC – see the Download and Extract CTX Software procedure on
page 1.
2. Insert a SmartMedia card into Strata CTX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the Forced Format
command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program 908.
3. Remove the formatted SmartMedia card from the CTX and Install the SmartMedia card into a PC
SmartMedia reader/writer.
4. Copy the new Strata CTX software file named “nhs.prg” into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
Note It is not necessary to create a SmartMedia Card Volume label for CTX100 Update. However, if you

create a volume label, do not use PRGUPDATE, PRGRESCUE0, or PRGRESCUE01 as volume
labels.
5. Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it “CTX100, MXnnn” or whatever software version
you are updating to.
Note After completing Steps 1 and 2 above you should have two SmartMedia cards:

• One card containing the CTX backed up database file: PROGDATA\default.dat
• One card containing the CTX software update file: PROGRAM\nhs.prg

14-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Maintenance
Local Update

Step 3: Update CTX100 Software
CAUTION!

This operation will take the system out of service for 10 minutes to an hour or more
depending on the CTX database.

1. Insert the SmartMedia card containing PROGRAM\nhs.prg file into the Strata CTX processor
SmartMedia socket.
2. From the programming telephone enter Program 911, and press +ROG. Press )% and dial
(UPDATE) and then press +ROG.
Maintenance

CAUTION!

Pressing +ROGtwice will cause the Update to fail

After a short pause the Strata CTX will begin to upload the software from the SmartMedia card to the
processor flash RAM causing the following:
• If FB07-LED is flashing green, it indicates that the Update process is in progress.
• If FB07-LED is flashing red, it indicates an error. This could be caused by a corrupt or incorrect
nhs.prg file or a defective SmartMedia card. Make sure the file is a CTX100 nhs.prg file and not
CTX670 file.
• You can now check the Update progress using FB02 (Total) and FB03 (Copied) to view data block
status. Periodically switch between FB02 and FB03 to view the data blocks.
• When all the data blocks are copied, the Strata CTX stops normal processing and all telephone
LCDs go blank.

• The processor Heartbeat LED is on steady red.
• The processor SmartMedia LED turns on flashing rapidly at first, then flashes slowly and finally
stops flashing.

• The above will last about five to 10 minutes.
• When the Update is complete the system begins to operate normally with default data.
3. Use Program 901 to check that the new software version of CTX software has been loaded. If you
cannot enter the Program Mode the new software may still be loading.
4. Remove the SmartMedia card (which contains PROGRAM/nhs.prg file) from the CTX processor.
Step 4: Restart and Restore Strata CTX100 Backup Data
1. Insert the SmartMedia labeled “Strata CTX Backup data” which you previously made at the start of this
procedure. This card contains PROGDATA/default.dat file.

2. From the programming telephone enter Program 900. Press )% and dial (ALL DATA CLEAR)
and then press +ROG (twice). The Strata CTX will restart (initialize) on the new software and restore the
backed up program data. The time required for this operation will vary from a few minutes to 30
minutes or more depending on the size of the database.
Step 5: Confirm Software is Updated and Backup Data is Restored
1. When the telephone LCDs display and system dial tone is available, try to log in to the Programming
Mode from digital telephone. (If Update/Restore is finished, you can log in).

2. From the programming telephone check the Strata CTX version number using Program 901.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

14-5

Maintenance
Local Update

3. Turn the CTX100 power off for 5 seconds and then back on to reset QISG, ISDN and other advanced
features.
4. Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making
incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail,
etc., are working correctly.
5. Toshiba recommends that the SmartMedia card containing the customer data remains installed on the
CTX processor. This enables you to make and back up changes using CTX WinAdmin remotely.
Important!

It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after local Update is
complete.

Strata CTX670 Local Update
The Update process is used to change the Strata CTX software version and restore programmed data. The
new software is first copied from the SmartMedia card to the standby side of the Strata CTX670 processor
flash RAM. Then the new software on the Standby flash RAM is switched to the active mode and the
original software is switched to the Standby mode for a trial run.
After swapping the software version making the new software “Active,” the Strata CTX restores the
programmed data. If the system functions properly, the trial operation can be set to normal operation; if
there are problems you can switch the original software back to Active.
A CTX default.dat database can only be restored to a CTX software version that is the same or higher
than the CTX software version on which the default.dat file was created.
Examples:
• A default.dat created on CTXR2.0 MF013 can be restored on an R2.0 MF013, MF014 and higher.
• R2.2 MF0XX, R2.1MG0XX (XX = 01~99), cannot be restored on R2.0 MF012, MF011 and lower, or
R1.X ME0XX, MD0XX, etc.
Step 1: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Backup of the Customer Database
This SmartMedia card will contain a Backup of the Strata CTX programmed data (default.dat).

1. Insert a SmartMedia card into the CTX, format it, and then back up the customer database onto the
SmartMedia card using the Backup Data procedure (see “Data Backup” on page 14-1).
This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory to the SmartMedia card.
2. Remove the SmartMedia card from the CTX and physically label it “Strata CTX Backup data.”
Step 2: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Copy of the New CTX Software
This SmartMedia card will contain the new Strata CTX software file (nhs.prg) used to Update the system
software.

1. Obtain the Strata CTX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba FYI and store it on an
appropriately named folder on your PC – see “Download and Extract CTX Software” on page 14-3.
2. Insert a SmartMedia card into Strata CTX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the Forced Format
command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program 908.
3. Remove the formatted SmartMedia card from the CTX and install the SmartMedia card into a PC
SmartMedia reader/writer.
4. Copy the new Strata CTX software file named “nhs.prg” into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
5. Create a SmartMedia Card Volume label “PRGUPDATE” on CTX670 Update SmartMedia card as
shown:

14-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

Maintenance
Local Update

• Select and right mouse click the appropriate SmartMedia drive, for example, drive E or G in some
computers.
• Click Properties.
• Under General tab, in the Label field enter label name (in this case PRGUPDATE).
6. Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it “CTX670, MXnnn” or whatever software version
you are updating to.
Note After completing Steps 1 and 2 above you should have two SmartMedia cards:

Maintenance

• One card containing the CTX backed up database file: PROGDATA\default.dat
• One card having the volume label “PRGUPDATE” and containing the CTX software Update
file: PROGRAM\nhs.prg
Step 3: Update CTX670 software
1. Insert the SmartMedia card containing PROGRAM\nhs.prg file into the Strata CTX processor
SmartMedia socket.

2. From the programming telephone enter Program 911, and press +ROG. Press )% and dial
(UPDATE) and then press +ROGonce. Pressing +ROGtwice will cause the Update to fail. This will not
interrupt the CTX system operation.
• If FB07-LED is flashing green, it indicates that the Update process is in progress.
• If FB07-LED is flashing red, it indicates an error. This could be caused by a corrupt or incorrect
nhs.prg file or a defective SmartMedia card. Make sure it is a CTX670 nhs.prg file and not a
CTX100 file.
• You can now check the Update progress using FB02 (Total) and FB03 (Copied) to view data block
status. Periodically switch between FB02 and FB03 to view the data blocks.
• When FB07-LED is solid green with periodic short blinks, it indicates the first part of Update
completed successfully (2 to 10 minutes).
3. After FB07 is on solid green with a periodic wink, press +ROG, while in Program 911. Press )% and
dial (TRIAL) and then press +ROG. This will change the status of the Standby Flash Memory to trial.
4. Pull out the SmartMedia card labeled PRGUPDATE (which includes PROGRAM/nhs.prg file).
5. Insert the SmartMedia CARD labeled “Strata CTX Backup data” into processor/ SmartMedia socket.
The SmartMedia LED on the processor begins to blink.
The “Strata CTX Backup data” SmartMedia card is the card you previously made that includes the
Strata CTX programmed data in the default.dat file under the PROGDATA folder. If this is not done
before starting Clear-reboot, all programmed data will be lost.
The next operation will take the system out of service for 10 minute to an hour depending on the size of
the CTX database.
6. From the programming telephone enter Program 911 and press +ROG; Press )% and dial
(CLRREBOOT) and then press +ROG. This will Clear-reboot the system to switch the new software
version from standby to active and restore Backup data.
CAUTION!

This operation will take the system out of service for 10 minutes to an hour or more
depending on the CTX database. Do not skip any steps or Update will fail.

Notes

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

14-7

Maintenance
Trace Function

●

If CLRREBOOT is activated without the Backup data SmartMedia card installed, the active and
standby software is swapped and the system default program data is restored.
The Strata CTX processor heartbeat LED stops flashing and all telephones become inactive. After
a few minutes the Strata CTX initializes and starts up with new version of software as active and
the original software as standby, and then restores the backed up program data from the
SmartMedia card default.dat file (the processor SmartMedia LED flashes while it restores the
program data to the processor RAM).
After CLRREBOOT has completed the new version of CTX System software will be active in
Trial mode.
If system power is turned off/on while the Active side of flash memory is in the Trial mode, the
original software switches back to active and the new software will switch back to Standby. This is
to provide an automatic method of switching back to the original software version if the new
version is causing problems.

7. Confirm that the software is updated and the Backup data is restored by verifying/doing the following:
• Make sure the processor SmartMedia LED is off.
• Log in to Programming Mode from a digital telephone. If you cannot log in, it means the data
restore process is not completed.
• From the programming telephone, in Program 901 make sure that the new Strata CTX system
software version number is on the active side. FB01 shows the new system software version number
on the active side, and FB02 shows the original software version number on standby side.
8. Set the Active side of flash RAM from “Trial” to “Normal” as follows:
• From the programming telephone, enter Program 911 and press +ROG. Press )% and dial
(NORMAL), then press +ROG. The new software is on the active side running in Normal mode.
• If Strata CTX power is turned off/on before the Active side is switched to “Normal”, the Strata CTX
will automatically perform a CLRREBOOT and make the old software active.
Note The active side switches from “Trial” to “Normal” automatically after 24 hours if it is not done

manually using Program 911.
9. Remove the SmartMedia card and turn the CTX670 power off for 5 seconds and then back on to reset
BIPU-M, BIPU-Q, QISG, ISDN and other advanced features.
10.Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making
incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail,
etc., are working correctly.
11. Toshiba recommends that the SmartMedia card containing the customer data remains installed on the
CTX processor. This enables you to make and Backup changes using CTX WinAdmin remotely.
Important!

It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after local Update is
complete.

Trace Function
To analyze Strata CTX problems efficiently, Toshiba needs to get the event trace data and ISDN trace data.
These data sets enable analysis of the problems Strata CTX may experience. It is helpful for
troubleshooting problems that are difficult to duplicate.
Please contact Toshiba Technical Support to coordinate the running of the trace procedures. Technical
Support will walk you through the required steps.

14-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 3: Telephone Button Programming 11/03

726+,%$

Telecommunication Systems Division

Digital Business Telephone Systems

Part 4: Appendices

November 2003

Applications, Tips and Tricks

Voice Mail Set Up
The following steps/program sequences are provided as a guideline to programming System Voice Mail
settings.
Note Enter programming mode before step 1. Refer to “Enter Program Mode” on page 13-7. Press +ROG

each time you want to save your settings and press before you move to the next step.

1. Program 100 “Card Slot Assignment” on page 13-11. Assign the PCB for Voice Mail ports (RSTU).
2. Program 200 “Station Data” on page 13-28. Verify FB1~FB4.
• FB03 Circuit Type – Assigns Voice Mail to be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail RSTU
circuits.
• FB15 Display DN – DN to be displayed and assigned to Hunt Group. Manually assign DNs and
equipment.

Applications, Tips and
Tricks

Analog Ports

3. Program 209 “Station Hunting Group” on page 13-46. Voice Mail Group is determined by the Hunt
Group.
4. Program 218 “Station Hunt Group Assignment” on page 13-50.
5. Program 579 “System Voice Mail Data” on page 13-89. Complete FB01~FB17.
Notes
●

●

FB10 Central Message Callback – Enter the node ID and hunt group for voice mail. Used for
centralized voice mail SMDI only.
DTMF – Message Waiting Call Back DN across QSIG TIE lines. DTMF integration uses the number
that displays in Program 200, field 15.

6. Program 580 “Voice Mail Port Data” on page 13-90. This is the collection of all ports.
7. Program 803 “IO Logical Device Assignment” on page 13-94. You can add members to the hunt group.
Assign BSIS RS-232 port for SMDI.
Note System only provides Code 300 for SMDI. Code 301 is not supported.

8. Program 804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port setup.
9. Program 309 “Direct Inward Dialing” on page 13-59.
• FB11 DNIS VMID Code
• FB15 DID/DNIS Number DTMF VMID
10.Program 318 “DID Intercept Assignment” on page 13-67.
• FB11 VMID for DNIS Number
• FB15 DID/DNIS Number DTMF VMID

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

A-1

Applications, Tips and Tricks
Voice Mail Set Up

Digital Ports
1. Program the following initial settings:

• Program 100 – Set cabinet slot PCB type to “BDKU/BDKS 16 DKTs without Spkr OCA”.
• Program 200 – Assign stations to the slot and assign as voice mail. For example, 200~215 (for 16
ports). Set “Display DN” as the pilot number of the Voice Mail Hunt Group. This value should be
the same as “Number to Display” in Program 209.

• Program 204 – Change station’s parameters to Tone First, Adapter: BPCI. Set “Continuous DTMF”
to “Not Continuous.” Copy the changes to all voice mail stations.
2. Install and program serial card BSIS in the Strata CTX.
Note TPI is required for iES32. A BSIS card must be installed in the Strata CTX.

3. Install a serial cable between the BSIS card and the Stratagy (see CTX wiring diagrams in Strata CTX
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Peripheral Installation chapter).
4. Specify CTX BSIS output port # and set the port type to be “300 SMDI #0” and “RS-232”.
5. Set the port attributes to:

•
•
•
•
•

Baud rate: 9600
Data Bits: 8
Parity: none
Flow control: 1
Wait timer: 0

Note Refer to Programs 803, 804, 579 and 580.

6. Program 579 “System Voice Mail Data” on page 13-89. Complete FB01~FB17.
7. Program 580 – Set all CTX voice mail ports as SMDI integration.
8. Program Station Hunting Programs 209 and 218

Telephone Station Ports
1. Program 200 Station Data.
• FB19 VMID Code SMDI – Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band integration
for forwarded and direct calls.
• FB22 MW to VM Port – Message Waiting center DN.
2. Program 579 System Voice Mail Data.
• Complete 11~15. See “Program 579” on page 13-89.
3. Program 204 DKT Parameters.
• FB23 Mailbox Selection – Used for the Voice Recording Feature. Uses the VM ID from Program
200 if set to Auto or allows the user to enter any valid mailbox on Stratagy followed by .
4. Program 206 Phantom DN.
• FB06 VM ID Code – Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band integration for
forwarded and direct calls.
• FB09 Message Center – Message Waiting center DN.

A-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Applications, Tips and Tricks
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems

Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems
More than one voice mail system can be connected to one network node and one or more voice mail
systems can be connected to multiple nodes. Access, integration and message waiting are controlled on a
call-by-call basis according to parameters assigned to individual extensions. There is nothing to prevent a
single DKT from having access to four voice mail systems, each connected to a remote node.
The Primary DN and three PhDNs are each programmed with independent voice mail destinations, Voice
Mail IDs and Record and Playback codes. Figure A-1 is an example for networking multiple voice mail
systems to enable Soft keys. A similar set up can be used for enabling other voice mail features.

SMDI+

Strata CTX

QSIG (RPTU)
Speech, VM-ID

SoftKey
Operation
LAN

Strata CTX

SMDI

Strata CTX

STU I/F
(speech path)

RS232C

6579

Applications, Tips and
Tricks

QSIG (RPTU)
Speech, VM-ID

SoftKey
Operation

SMDI+

LAN

SMDI+
Figure A-1

Voice Mail Networking

Call Record and Soft Keys
A station can record conversations with another station or external line in a specific mail box in Voice Mail
(VM) using the Record function button. You can replay the recorded conversation using the Message
Waiting button or using the voice mail menu.
Networking for Call Record and Soft Keys is available only with WinAdmin Release 1.3 and higher
software and with CTX software 1.2 MD series or higher. You must have a Stratagy ES/IES R4 or higher.
Step 1: Set up Station Message Desk Interface (SMDI) for Local and Remote CTXs

1. From the Program menu, select System > I/O Device. Program 803 – SMDR SMDI CTI Port
Assignments screen displays.
2. Enter/Select the following:
• FB00 Logical Device No. = select 300 SMDI #0.
• FB01 Device Connection = LAN.
• Device Port No. = 1~9.
3. Click LAN Device tab. Program 801 Network Jack Lan Device Assignments screen displays.
4. Enter the LAN data:
• 00 LAN Port No. = 1~9
• 01 Protocol = TCP

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

A-3

Applications, Tips and Tricks
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems

• 02 PC Operation Type = Client
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Service Port No. = 0 (default)
• 05~08 Client IP 1-4 No. = 192.168.254.250
• 09 Client Port No. = 5000
• Client IP No. = Stratagy IP Address
• 10 Read Retry No. = 1
• 11 Write Retry No. = 1.
5. Click Submit.
Step 2: Set up Remote CTX

1. From the Program menu, select Services > Voice Mail > Voice Mail Port Data. Program 580 – VM Port
Data displays.
2. Enter the appropriate fields. Refer to “580 Voice Mail Port Data” on page 9-4.
3. Select Station > Assignment. Program 200 – Station Data screen displays.
4. Enter the Prime DN. For Call Record, enter the Node ID and Pilot number of the local CTX (where the
voice mail is located).
5. In FB22 – MW to VM Port, enter the local CTX IP address for call recording. For Remote CTXs,
assign message center including Node IP for TPI integration. This parameter enables Call Record
function too.
Note Refer to “Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1 for regular voice mail set up.
Step 3: Set up QSIG Between All Nodes

Use the following programs to set up QSIG:
1. “304 Incoming Line Group Assignment” on page 6-2.
2. “306 Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-4.
3. “302 PRI and IP QSIG” on page 6-25
4. “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3
5. “651 Private Routing Plan Analysis” on page 9-56
6. “653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment” on page 9-57
7. “654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment” on page 9-57
8. “655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment” on page 9-57
9. “656 Node ID Assignment” on page 9-54
For all other voice mail set up steps refer to “Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1.

A-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Applications, Tips and Tricks
Strata CTX BRI Video Conferencing Programming

Strata CTX BRI Video Conferencing Programming
The table below shows the programs required to program a PRI line to ring to a RBSU interface to allow
for Video Conferencing capabilities.
The following may differ in your system: card slot assignments, trunk groups, channel groups and BRI
station numbers.
The following program changes are required once the system has been installed and initialized.

Programs

Description
Card Assignment
105=RPTU and 107=RBSU S/T Interface with each two TIE’s

Program 105

System Data
Primary Clock, FB21=RPTU card slot, 10501

Program 304

Incoming Line Groups
ILG=1, FB1=ISDN, FB2=CO, FB3=DID, FB4=Standard

Program 306

Outgoing Line Groups
OLG=1, FB1=ISDN, FB2=CO/DID, FB3=Standard

Program 309

Direct Inward Dialing
ILG=1, FB1=3000, FB5 through FB10=Dialing Digits with Destination Digits 3000

Program 302

PRI Trunks
Channel Group=1, FB1=010501, FB2=Nat’l ISDN, FB3=1, FB4=1, FB7=24,
FB 8=Enable, FB9=Enable, FB11=Enable, FB12=Enable, FB19=Enable

Program 320

“B” Channels
FB00=010501, FB1 through FB23=Enable

Program 202

ISDN BRI Station

Applications, Tips and
Tricks

Program 100

Prime DN=3000, FB1=010701, FB2=2, FB3=Nat’l ISDN, FB4=Point to Multi-Point,
FB13=Enable, FB14=Enable
Prime DN=3001, FB1=010702, FB2=3, FB3=Nat’l ISDN, FB4=Point to Multi-Point,
FB13=Enable, FB14=Enable
Prime DN=3002, FB1=010703, FB2=4, FB3=Nat’l ISDN, FB4=Point to Multi-Point,
FB13=Enable, FB14=Enable
Prime DN=3003, FB1=010704, FB2=5, FB3=Nat’l ISDN, FB4=Point to Multi-Point,
FB13=Enable, FB14=Enable
Note

FB2 must be a different channel group for each BRI station and cannot
conflict with PRI channel group.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

A-5

Applications, Tips and Tricks
CTX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines

CTX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines
Use the following guidelines to program your CTX IP Telephone.

Basic CTX IP Setup Using WinAdmin
1. Select System > Card Assignments (Program 100) to set the BIPU-M PCBs in the appropriate slots.
BIPU-M card can only be installed in 16 channel card slots:
CTX100 slots 1~8; CTX670 Base slots 1~8; and CTX670 Expansion slots 1~6
Note If the CTX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CTX assigns the BIPU-

M, code 021, to the appropriate card slots automatically.
2. Select IP Telephone > BIPU Configuration (Program151) to set BIPU-M IP address (check with the
Network Administrator for IP Address, subnet mask, etc.). The BIPU version number will be displayed
when the BIPU is operating and is connected on the same network as WinAdmin PC.
Note If the CTX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CTX assigns the BIPU-

M default parameters as shown in Table 1-6 on page 1-5.
3. Select Station > Assignments > Basic to assign PDNs to IP telephones (BIPU equipment numbers) if
this was not done during CTX system initialization. The WinAdmin PDN Range wizard can also be
used to assign PDNs to the BIPU channels.
Note Currently IPT PDNs are listed as DKT, they will be listed as IPT in a future version of WinAdmin.

IP telephones are programmed exactly like DKTs, so any Program command used for DKTs can be
used for IPTs.
4. Select IP Telephone > Station IP Data (Program 250). Set “05 Station Terminal Authentication Mode”
to apply if the PDN assigned to a particular IP Telephone should be linked (reserved for) to that
telephone’s MAC address. Each telephone has a unique hard coded MAC address. This prevents other
IP telephones from using the reserved PDN when an IP telephone is moved.
Note If IPT Authentication is applied/not applied in Program 250-05, it will override the IPT

Authentication setting in Program 150-02.
5. If multiple CTX systems with BIPU-Ms are connected to the IP network, Select IP Telephone > System
IP Data (Program 150), and set “09 IP CTX Identifier.”
Enter a CTX Node identifier if more than one CTX Node is on the IP Network. This can be the same as
the QSIG Network Node ID used for this system if it is in a CTX QSIG. Network - but the two IDs are
not related in software logic.
This ID must match the Node number programmed in the IP telephone using 369Hold-2, FB06 6.
6. Run all other CTX programs necessary to customize the features required for each IP Telephone. All
programs used to program Digital Telephones also apply to IP Telephones (Program 205 keystrips, 213
Add-on-Modules, Program 204 DKT Parameters, etc.).

A-6

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Applications, Tips and Tricks
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings

IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection setup
1. Install the IP telephones using instructions in the IPT chapter of the CTX Installation and Maintenance
manual.
2. From each IP Telephone, set its network connection parameters using the “369Hold” program mode
(refer to the instructions that follow).
Notes
●

●

Some IP telephones parameters must be set from each individual IPT using “369Hold” programming.
These parameters remain stored in the IP telephone even if the telephone is unplugged. This allows the
telephone to be moved to different locations without reprogramming.
Other IPT parameters must be set in IP Telephone > Station IP data (Program 250) in WinAdmin.
Initially, the parameters in WinAdmin are normally kept at defaults.

IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings

Notes

You may want to enter a period or backspace when performing the following steps. While in programming
mode [Press ++++ROG (simultaneously) to enter programming mode], you can use these buttons for
the following functions:
• Press

to enter a period.

Applications, Tips and
Tricks

This section explains how to enter data for your IPT1020-SD telephone. Before you begin, make sure that
you have the following information: IP address, subnet mask number, router address, Station ID, CTX
Strata Net node number, IP address for the BIPU-M, etc.

• Press 9RO ▼ to backspace.
• Press 6SNU to cancel entry and start over.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

A-7

Applications, Tips and Tricks
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings

IPT-to-IP Network Connection Instructions
1. Press ++++ROG (simultaneously).
2. Press , then press +ROGto select the Network Setting Mode.
3. Press )% to see if the DHCP server is in use or not. Press one of the following:
: manual setting, then press +ROG.
: auto setting by DHCP server, then press +ROG.

4. If Step 3 above is set for manual setting, then press )%. Enter the IP address for this IPT and press
+ROG. To enter the period in an IP address, press the button on your dialpad (e.g., if the IP address is
“192.168.1.241,” press ).
5. Press )%. Enter the subnet mask number and press +ROG. (e.g., if the subnet mask address is
“255.255.255.0, press ).
6. If the IPT is connected to a router or other gateway device and if Step 3 above is set for manual setting,
then press )%. Enter the router address, then press +ROG.
7. Press )%. Enter a Station ID for the IPT and press +ROG. This is usually your telephone’s primary
number (PDN), which must be set in CTX Program 200.
8. Press )% to enter the node number of the CTX node that contains the BIPU-M to which this IPT
interfaces, then press +ROG. This FB setting is for CTX networked systems only. This node number
must match the IP CTX Identifier number set in Program 150-09.
9. Press )% for BIPU IP address mode. Press one of the following:
: manual setting, then press +ROG. Press )% and enter the BIPU IP address, then press +ROG.
(e.g., if the BIPU IP address is “192.168.1.241,” enter it in this format ).
: auto setting by broadcast, then press +ROG.
: auto setting by multicast (IPT doesn’t support multicast setting in this first release), then press +ROG.

Press +ROG again to set all the above data.
10. Go off-hook and hang up. The IPT will search for the BIPU-M, initialize and then set the IP address
(from 20 sec. to 60 sec.). Time, Date and PDN displays on LCD when the information is set.
Note See “IP Telephone Start Up Sequence”below for an explanation of the LCDs that you will see

during this procedure.

A-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Applications, Tips and Tricks
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings

IP Telephone Start Up Sequence

After the IP telephone network setting has been programmed, the following displays occur after the IP
telephone is hung-up:
Action
1.

IPT
initializes.

IPT
searches
for IP
address.

LCD Indication

Remarks

INITIALIZING
PLEASE WAIT
IPADDRESS SETTING...

Possible errors:
• IP address is
not set.

IPADDRESS SETTING...
CAN’T SET IPADDRESS

• No DHCP
server, etc.
If error occurs, IP address setting is carried out
continuously.
3.

IPT
searches
for BIPU.

SEARCHING BIPU

Retries every 10 seconds.
Possible errors:

• BIPU is not
found (Station
ID automatic
setting).
• BIPU is not
found
(StationID
manual setting)

SEARCHING BIPU
BIPU NOT FOUND

SEARCHING BIPU
CAN’T GET STATIONID

SEARCHING BIPU
STATION ID UNMATCH

Applications, Tips and
Tricks

• BIPU is not
found “time
out.”

• Multicast
address is
NOT EXIST MULTICAST ADDR
not
registered (BIPU IP address setting mode is
automatic setting by multicast)
• BIPU IP
address is not
NOT EXIST BIPU ADDRESS
registered
(BIPU IP address setting mode is manual
setting.
4.

Registering
to BIPU

REGISTERING IPT...

When registering fails, IPT retries by starting at
Step 2 again.
Error message:
“Exxx” is error
number.

REGISTERING IPT...
CAN’T REGISTER IPT:EXXX

Registering LCD data is indicated from
completion CTX. Example:
- normal
action.
FEB 28

NO. 205
THURSDAY

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

A-9

Applications, Tips and Tricks
IPT1020-SD Telephone Network Settings

Viewing IPT1020-SD Terminal Information
1. Press ++++ROG (simultaneously).
2. Press , then press +ROG.
3. Press )% to view IPT firmware version (application and boot versions, read only).
4. Press )% to view IPT MAC address (read only).
5. Go off-hook and hang up.

Initializing the IPT1020-SD (Optional)
CAUTION!

If you initialize, the IP telephone network settings return to default.

1. Press ++++ROG (simultaneously).
2. Press 9RO ▲++ROG.
3. Press )% to initialize the telephone’s IP network connection settings (LED On = initialize,
LED Off = don’t initialize). See “IPT-to-IP Network Connection Instructions”below for details.
4. Press +ROG again to complete the initialization process.
5. Go off-hook and hang up.

A-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Applications, Tips and Tricks
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming

IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming
Deploying many IP telephones on a data LAN can have some unexpected pitfalls if the network does not
have the bandwidth and speed required to handle VoIP traffic. To prevent delay, jitter, and data loss for
VoIP traffic and to retain the performance of your other business-critical network applications a network
Voice Readiness Assessment should completed before installing VoIP.
Important!

Voice Readiness Assessments are the responsibility of the installing TSD dealer. Toshiba is
not responsible for supporting problems which occur because the network on which the IP
telephones are installed does not meet VoIP packet requirements.

CTX IP provides a number of adjustable tuning parameters dealing with sharing of network resources,
collectively referred to as Quality of Service (QoS). Some CTX IP voice quality and packet priority
parameters that can be adjusted are described below:

General QoS Adjustments

1. In WinAdmin, select IP Telephone > Station IP Data (Program 250) “08 Audio Codec” and select the
codec that should be enabled for individual IP telephones.
The G711 provides the best voice quality but requires the most network bandwidth. Usually G.729A is
used when IP telephones are connected remotely.
2. In WinAdmin, select IP Telephone > System IP data (Program 150) and select the 11 BIPU/IPT VQ
mode setting.

Applications, Tips and
Tricks

The CTX provides parameters that can be adjusted to improve IP voice quality. These are normally kept at
default but may be adjusted as necessary to modify IP voice quality. Set each item individually and then
test for voice quality improvements each time a parameter is changed.

3. You can assign a Voice Packet Table to individual IP telephones in IP Telephone > Station IP Data
(Program 250–07) Voice Packet Table. In WinAdmin, select IP Telephone > Voice Packet
Configuration (Program 152) and configure up to 256 different tables (see below).
Voice Packet Configuration Table (Program 152)

Normally the default table settings are used. If experiencing voice quality problems, set each item
individually and then test for voice quality improvements each time a parameter is changed. The default
settings are shown below. The tables in this program must be assigned to individual IP telephones in IP
Telephone > Station IP Data (Program 250) for them to be used by the CTX.
Important!

Voice Packet Transmission Interval – 20 msec
Jitter buffer type – adaptive
Jitter buffer length – 100 (smooth out packet playback)
Maximum acceptable delay – 200 (not adjustable in CTX R2.0)
Packet loss threshold – 5
Packet loss ratio – 5 (not adjustable in CTX R2.0).
Measurement period – 1000 (not adjustable in CTX R2.0).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

A-11

Applications, Tips and Tricks
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming

Priority Control Adjustments

This VoIP feature provides a framework in which voice traffic flowing on the network is prioritized over
other types of traffic. CTX supports two industry standard types of Priority control: IEEE802.1p and
Diffserv (Differentiated Services). These options should be enabled simultaneously so the voice packets
remain prioritized through the whole network path. IEEE802.1p prioritizes voice packets on the Ethernet
(LAN) level and DiffServ prioritizes voice packets that pass through the internet, intranet, etc.
Important!

Priority Control processing has two requirements for it to work accurately. All network
Ethernet equipment connected to the BIPU LAN (routers, switches, etc.) must be in compliance with IEEE802.1p voice packet prioritization. When going through a network provider
(ISP, etc.), the provider must support the DiffServ feature - contact your ISP for this service.

➤ To setup priority control from WinAdmin

1. Select IP Telephone > System IP Data
2. For Ethernet level (LAN) voice packet priority control.
Enable 07 IEEE802.1p
Set 08 IEEE802.1p. Configuration and set “voice” or “best effort”, voice provides a higher level of
priority.
3. For IP level (Internet) voice packet priority control. Enable 03 DiffServ
Set 04 TOS Field Type (TOS -Type Of Service or DSCP - Differentiated Service code point)
Note The most common type used is TOS

If set to “TOS”
Set 05 “TOS Precedence type” (CRITIC/ECP ~ Routine) where CRITIC has the highest priority.
Set “TOS Delay type” (Normal or Low) – Low is the best service setting
Set “TOS Throughput” (Normal or High) – High is the best service setting
Set “TOS Reliability” (Normal or High) – High is the best service setting
IF set to “DSCP”
Set “06 DSCP” from 1~64, Basic setting should be one of the following:
0 = Best effort, The default setting for most IP traffic.
24 = Assured flow (AF) or Controlled Load, intended to classify streaming traffic.
40 = Expedited Flow (EF) or Guaranteed, intended to classify high priority traffic. Used by VoIP
gateways to mark VoIP traffic.

A-12

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Applications, Tips and Tricks
Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines

Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines
Use the following steps/programs to program Strata Net over IP.
1. Assign the BIPU-Q card using Program 100 (System > Card Assignments).
2. Use Program 151 to set up the BIPU IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (IP Telephone >
BIPU Configuration).
3. Program ILG and OLG using Programs 304 and 306 (Trunk > ILG, OLG).
4. Program the Channel group using Program 302 [Trunk > ISDN > PRI (IP Protocol)].
5. After assigning an IP channel group in Program 302, assign the PAD levels to the PAD Groups 1 or 2 in
Program 107 (System > PAD Table) using the “PAD Table” on page 4-23.
6. After assigning the PAD level to the PAD Table in Program 107, assign the IP channel group to the PAD
group in Program 108 (System > PAD Table). Use ISDN trunk as the device type for IP Channel Group
Assignments.
These PAD values in steps 5 and 6 must be set properly to avoid low volume levels.

Important!

Applications, Tips and
Tricks

7. Assign network IDs for all nodes using Program 102 (System > Flexible Access Codes).
8. Program networking using Programs 651~656 (Services > Networking > Route Plan Analysis).
9. Setup Strata Net over IP routing using Programs 671 and 672 (Services > Networking > Network Over
IP). See example below.
10.If voice quality is low on Strata Net over IP calls, change defaults in Program 152 for parameters
FB01~FB04.
11. Use Program 320 (Trunk > ISDN > B Channel) to control the number of channels to be used. This may
be necessary to limit the number of simultaneous calls allowed over the IP network. The IP network
bandwidth determines how many simultaneous calls can be supported. As a general guideline one
Strata Net over IP call requires a minimum of 36 kbps bandwidth.
The BIPU IP address must be set in Program 151. If the BIPU-Q1A has a private IP address,
IP QSIG communication must be over a Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection. To avoid
needing VPN for this IP connection, assign a Global IP address to the BIPU-Q1A interface.

Important!

Example
Node 11

Node 12

BIPU-Q1A
192.168.11.100
This BIPU IP
address* must be
set in PRG151.

Router

IP-Network

BIPU-Q1A
192.168.12.101

Router

LAN

This BIPU IP
address* must be
set in PRG151.

Router

CTX system

LAN

6833

BIPU-Q1A
192.168.13.102
This BIPU IP
address* must be
set in PRG151.

Node 13

See Important note above.

CTX system
Figure 2

Strata Net over IP Routing

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

A-13

Applications, Tips and Tricks
Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines

➤ To program the configuration in the above figure using programs 671 and 672

The steps below show you how to setup Node 11 to route to remote Nodes 12 and 13.
1. With WinAdmin connected to Node 11, go to Program 672 (Services > Networking > Network Over
IP > Detail Info tab). Parameters for all Remote Nodes connected to Node 11 are pre-set in this
program.
2. Select Node 12 and verify all parameters are set to defaults.
3. Select Node 13 and verify all parameters are set to defaults.
4. With WinAdmin connected to Node 11, go to Program 671 (Services > Networking > Network Over
IP > IP Route tab). The IP addresses of BIPU-Qs connected to Node 11 are set in this program.
5. Select Node 12 and enter its BIPU-Q IP address (192.168.12.101) into IP Address Route 1.
6. Select Node 13 and enter its BIPU-Q IP address (192.168.13.102) into IP Address Route 1.
Notes
●

●

The IP addresses used in this example are only examples, check with the facility network
administrator for the IP addresses that should be used in your installation.
If a remote node has more than one BIPU-Q installed, its IP address would be entered in Route 2.
A maximum of six remote BIPU-Qs can be assigned in each remote node. Route 1 will be used
until all channels are busy, or not working, in which case Routes 2~6 will be used in sequentially.

7. Repeat Steps 1~6 with WinAdmin connected to Node 12 to set up Remote Nodes 11 and 13.
8. Repeat Steps 1~6 with WinAdmin connected to Node 13 to set up Remote Nodes 11 and 12.

A-14

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Applications, Tips and Tricks
Echo Cancellation and Volume Level Adjustments

Echo Cancellation and Volume Level Adjustments
Dealing with Echo Problems in General
The first step in isolating echo problems is to find the source. Usually only one party hears echo. If that’s
the case, the echo source is the far end – if you hear echo, it is coming from the other party’s side.
Example: if your local gateway is causing echo, you will not hear it because there is no delay in signals that
may bounce back to you. However, as the echo causing gateway is moved further away, echo becomes
more noticeable because the delay in the sound that is returned increases. Once you find out which end of
the network is causing the echo, check for devices such as cheap headsets or conference telephones – these
devices allow the earphone or speaker output to be feed back into the microphone to cause echo. Other
devices that cause echo are two-wire to four-wire converters and digital-to-analog gateways.

Echo Caused by Older CTX Analog PCBs
To provide optimum voice quality of IP telephones on Strata CTX systems, there are some compatibility
requirements that need to be followed when using analog CO line cards in the system.

• Do not use RCOU1A, RCOS1A, REMU1A (two-wire), RDDU1A, RGLU1A, or RGLU2A analog CO
line interfaces in IP telephone applications. These PCBs will work but will cause IP telephone users to
experience unacceptable voice quality and echo return loss.

Echo Reduction Adjustments

Applications, Tips and
Tricks

• It is highly recommended to only use RCOU3A, RCOS3A, REMU1A (four-wire, not two-wire),
RDDU2A, and RGLU3A analog CO line interfaces in IP telephone applications. These PCBs provide
optimum speech quality for IPT1020-SD IP telephone connections.

The items listed below can be adjusted to help eliminate echo. The below items will need to be tweaked,
case by case with trial and error, for each situation.
1. In WinAdmin, select IP Telephone > System IP data (Program 150-10); use “Tail length of Echo
Canceller” (set to different options and test).
2. In WinAdmin, select System > PAD table (Program 107) pad table; use IPT selection and reduce the
volume (increase Net Loss) to reduce the echo. This setting is a compromise between the acceptable
echo and volume loss levels (set to different options and test).
3. The IP telephone user taps the telephone Vol key (up or down), while on a call to cancel echo on a callby-call basis.
4. If using a Headset, the user can adjust the IP Telephone headset transmit volume level. In some cases,
lowering the headset transmit level can reduce echo.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

A-15

Applications, Tips and Tricks
Echo Cancellation and Volume Level Adjustments

Setting the IPT1020-SD Headset Transmit Volume
1. Press ++++ROG (simultaneously).
2. Press .
3. Press the Feature Buttons to turn the LEDs On/Off for the desired volume transmission level (see Table
A-14).
Table A-14

Volume Level Transmitted from Headset Microphone
LEDS

Transmit Level

FB3

FB2

FB1

Level 7 (max.)

OFF

Level 6

OFF

Level 5

OFF

Level 4

OFF

Level 3 (initial value)

OFF

Level 2

OFF

Level 1

OFF

Level 0 (min.)

4. Press FB4 for handset voice output in speakerphone mode (LED On = with, LED Off = without).
5. Press +ROG to set the above data.
6. Go off-hook and hang up.

A-16

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes

The following Error Code Tables are needed when programming Strata CTX670 using the button
programming method. Error Codes display on the programming DKT’s LCD.
Note The following error codes only appear when using the telephone button programming method.

These tables are provided for reference only. CTX WinAdmin will feature error codes in a future
release.

Common Error Code Table
Program

Code

Error Descriptions

Invalid Program number.

Invalid value.
Invalid parameter designation

•

Input parameter range error.

•

Required sub-parameter data was not entered.

Invalid FB button pressed.

The time allotted to enter a modification in the desired field has been
exceeded.

Common
Invalid parameter entry
6

•

Incorrect characters entered

•

Input method is wrong

Some settings carried out using the range function may not have been
programmed correctly.

Identification error

Required parameter is not entered.

Required parameter does not exist.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes

B-1

System Error Codes
System Programming Error Codes

System Programming Error Codes
Program

The entered Cabinet/Slot value is out of range.

The entered PCB Type is out of range.

In CTX100, the Card Type Code other than ASTU (STU) was
assigned into S109.

In CTX670, the equipment entered is S109 or S110.
In CTX100, the equipment entered is S110.

Deleting a Card (000) – Programmed station and/or trunk
data must be deleted before a card can be deleted.

Changing Card Type Code – Card Type cannot be changed.
Delete the existing Card Type before entering a new Card
Type.

The designated BIOU is already in use.

IOU card cannot be deleted because the Control Relay is
assigned to that card.

The PCB cannot be assigned to the designated equipment
position.

“004” is not assigned as Card Type Code.

One of the required parameters (PCM Highway, BDKU Type
or TEI Assignment) has not been assigned.

The PCM highway value entered is not applicable for the
desired PCB assignment. PCB parameters are required for
PDKU or BDKU, RDTU, RDSU, RPTU.

The Channel Type value entered is not applicable for the
desired PCB assignment. PCB parameters are required for
PDKU or BDKU, RDTU, RDSU, RPTU.

The TEI Type value entered is not applicable for the desired
PCB assignment. PCB parameters are required for PDKU or
BDKU, RDTU, RDSU, RPTU.

The number of MF2U cards exceeds the system limit.

The entered Feature Code is out of range.

The OLG entered is out of range.

An invalid OLG number was entered in OLG Number field
when assigning a Flexible Numbering Feature code of 551.

“0” is not a valid OLG Number.

Flexible Numbering Plan values cannot be repeated. The
value entered cannot be registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered,
123 cannot be registered).

The value entered conflicts with an existing extension and
cannot be registered.

100

102

103

B-2

Subparameter

Code

Error Descriptions

See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
System Programming Error Codes

Subparameter

Program

Code

104

)%a)%

The Paging Group No. entered is out of the range.

)%
)%

The BIOU general relay number value conflicts with existing
parameter assignments.

)%a)%

The entered Pad device number is invalid.

)%a)%

The number of Pad groups exceed the system capacity.

The entered Device Type is out of range.

The PAD group entered is out of the range.

The Device number entered does not exist in the system.

)%a)%

The entered equipment is out of range.

)%a)%

The equipment which the card type was assigned was not
entered.

)%a)%

The entered equipment is registered as MOH already.

)%a)%

A BIOU circuit with other data such as door phone, etc. is
assigned in MOH/BGM 1~7.

)%a)%

A circuit with a non-STU circuit is designated in MOH/BGM
8~16.

110

Identification error: A super user password cannot be checked
if you are logged in with a general user level password.

111

See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.

113

)%a)%

114

See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.

115

See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.

116

The Program Number entered is invalid.

An invalid character exists in the entered value.

The inputted analysis number is using in a part of the other
analysis number.

118

Incorrect Master ID code.

119

105

106
107

108

109

117

150

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.
The entered Clock value is out of range.

The entered circuit number is not the clock source port.
The Paging Group No. entered does not exist in the system.
See “Common Error Code Table” on page B-1.

The entered date is out of range.

System Error Codes

112

Error Descriptions

Allowable number of Working Day Type has been exceeded.
The entered time value is out of range.

Common error. See Common Error Code table.
Incorrect value. The values should be numerals only.

B-3

System Error Codes
System Programming Error Codes

Program

Unable to change the selected BIPU configurations during
updates of selected BIPUs or IPTs to prevent the flash
memory of BIPU from being broken.

The equipment number entered is out of the range.

Slot card type entered is other than BIPU card.

The IP address entered is a global IP address already
assigned to CTX or another BIPU. This restriction is only
applied to the duplication of global IP addresses.

152

You cannot use 1:10msec in this release.

153

151

B-4

Subparameter

Code

Error Descriptions

Common error. See Common Error Code table.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes

Station Programming Error Codes
Program

202

The entered Shelf/Slot/Circuit value is out of range.

The entered System Call Forward index is out of the range.

The selected PDN(s) conflicts with an existing PDN(s)
assignments for the selected circuit.

Station Type cannot be changed.

)%
)%

The desired DN does not exist.

The entered value conflicts with an existing numbering
scheme.

The entered value conflicts with an existing ISDN assignment
etc.

The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.

The DN does not exist.

A PCB without “DKT/SLT setting allowed” is designated for a
PCB connecting the selected ISDN extensions.

The allowed number of extensions has been exceeded.

The quantity of station speed dial bins entered exceeds the
system's capacity.

The DN entered is the DN that is used as the administration
terminal.
FB which this error occur : FB01

The entered number is not the extension number.

The entered value is not a valid extension.

The equipment number entered is out of the range.

PCB assignment is not set for the ISDN card connecting
selected extensions.

The entered equipment is using as other ISDN extension.

An ISDN trunk channel group conflict has been detected.

Although the P-P connection was selected, an additional DN
is registered.

)%a)%

)%)%
a)%

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Error Descriptions

System Error Codes

200

201

Subparameter

Code

The desired value conflicts with existing ISDN extensions.
The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.
The desired value conflicts with existing number schemes.
A DN used for DKT extensions is designated.

B-5

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes

Program

202

Subparameter

Code

)%a)%

The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.

The DN entered is invalid.

A PCB without ISDN extension settings allowed’ is designated
for the PCB connecting the ISDN extension(s) selected.

The number of channel group exceeds the system capacity
when ISDN station is registered.

The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.

The quantity of station speed dial bins entered exceeds the
system’s capacity.

The new DN is not assigned.

The new DN value conflicts with an existing value DN, PhDN,
etc.

The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.

The new DN value conflicts with an existing numbering
scheme value.

The new DN value conflicts with existing group extensions.

The new DN value does not exist.

The Call History memory size entered is wrong.

The number of attendant consoles exceed the number
specified in the system.

DKT is not assigned to DN (ISDN, etc.).

The DN entered is an extension number that does not exist.

Allowable Feature Button number is exceeded.

Allowable Call History Memory size is exceeded.

The additional ISDN extension number cannot be registered.
The number is already in use by a DKT extensions, etc.

203

204

100
110
120
130
140

Sub-parameters must be assigned.

120

The line number entered is out of range for the system’s
capacity.

130

The GCO key group/index entered is out of the range.

140

The POOL group entered is out of the range.

530

The BGM number entered is out of the range.

205

B-6

Error Descriptions

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes

Program

205

Code

Subparameter

Error Descriptions

540

The door lock number entered is out of the range.

900

The application number entered is out of the range.

110

Two or more PhDNs with the same value are registered to
one extension.

700
790
800
810
820
830

Only Feature Code(s) allowed for Attendant Console is
registered.

610

Two or more DSSs with the same value are registered to one
extension.

120
130
560
610

While assigning sub-parameters to a DN: A DN was selected
that does not exist in the system.

The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.
110

The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.

120
130

When assigning an Owner DN to a CO or GCO, the related
CO or GCO buttons are not assigned to the respective FB(s)
of the owner’s extension.
The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.

52
52

110

The Secondary/PhDN entered is already used in ISDN
extenstion(s), etc.

120
130

The CO or GCO Owner DN entered does not exist.

82
96

)%
)%

System Error Codes

Required parameter for each Feature Code is not entered.

The PrimeDN does not exist in the system.
The sub-parameter values assigned to the FB are invalid.
120

The line number entered does not exist.

110
130
140

The maximum allowable value for GCO, POOL, or PhDN has
been exceeded.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

The quantity of Flexible keys programmed exceeds the
system’s capacity.

B-7

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes

Program

206

207

208

209

The System Call Forward index entered is out of the range.

)%
)%

An invalid DN was selected. The entered PDN is not related
to this Phantom DN.

Phantom DN entered is invalid (the entered value is used as a
part of an existing extension number or numbering plan).

)%
)%
)%

)%
)%

The entered DN conflicts with an existing DKT extension, or
numbering plan, etc.

A Phantom DN that does not exist in the system has been
selected.

The feature key entered is not a “Single Touch Button”.

An invalid DN was selected (the entered value is used as a
part of an existing extension number or numbering plan).

The entered DN conflicts with an existing numbering plan.

The DN entered is an extension number that does not exist in
the system.

The System Call Forward index entered is out of the range.

If Hunt Method field is set to Distribute, the incoming
destination Pilot Number must be assigned.

If Hunt Method is set to Distribute, Pilot Number must be
assigned.

The entered value conflicts with an existing number or
numbering plan.

The entered value conflicts with an existing DKT extension.

The designated Hunt Group number does not exist in the
system.

The assigned Hunt Group number, exceeds the system
capacity.

The entered DN does not exist in the system (The entered
value is used in an extension number or numbering plan).

The entered value is used in the numbering plan.

The entered Prime DN does not exist in the system.

The Pickup group number entered is out of the range for the
system's capacity.

The hunting group number entered (FB00) is a number that
does not exist in the system.

210

211

B-8

Subparameter

Code

Error Descriptions

An invalid DN was selected (the entered value is used as a
part of an existing extension number or numbering plan).
The Phantom DN entered conflicts with an existing DKT
extension.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes

Program

Subparameter

100
110
120
130
140

120

The line number entered is out of range for the system’s
capacity.

130

The GCO key group/index entered is out of the range.

140

The POOL group entered is out of the range.

530

The BGM number entered is out of the range.

540

The door lock number entered is out of the range.

900

The application number entered is out of the range.

110

700
790
800
810
820
830

610

120
130
560
610

110

The secondary/PhDN entered cannot be registered. The
number conflicts with an existing number scheme.

120
130

When setting an owner extension to the additional information
of CO, GCO, the said CO, GCO keys are not assigned to the
Feature Buttons of the owner extension.

110

120
130

Code

213

Error Descriptions
The sub-parameters for Feature Code (Key Number) must be
assigned.

Essential sub-parameter values must be entered.
Two or more PhDNs with the same value are registered to
one extension.
The feature code(s) allowed to attendant console only is
registered.

The entered DN does not exist in the system.

The Prime DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.

System Error Codes

Two or more DSSs with the same value are registered to one
extension.

The Primary DN entered conflicts with an existing DKT
extension.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

The secondary/PhDN entered cannot be registered. The
number conflicts with an existing ISDN extension(s), etc.
The CO or GCO Owner DN entered does not exist.
The specified Prime DN does not exist in the system.

B-9

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes

Program

120

The line number entered does not exist.

110
130
140

The allowable number of GCO, POOL or PhDn has been
exceeded.

)%a)%

The designated circuit is already in use.

Multiple DSSs cannot be assigned to the same Shelf/Slot/
Circuit.

The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).

The entered value conflicts with an existing numbering plan.

The designated Prime DN does not exist in the system.

)%a)%

The designated PCB and extension combination is not
allowed.

)%a)%

The number of DSS consoles entered exceeds the system’s
capacity.

The number of DSS buttons entered exceeds the system’s
capacity. This error can occur with PB1~PB8

The add-on module number is out of the range.

213

214

215

B-10

Subparameter

Code

Error Descriptions
The additional information assigned to the Feature Button is
invalid.

The quantity of Flexible buttons programmed exceeds the
system’s capacity.
The equipment number entered is out of the range.

100
110
120
130
140

The sub-parameters for Key Number field must be assigned.

120

The line number entered is out of range for the system’s
capacity.

130

The GCO key group/index entered is out of the range.

140

The POOL group entered is out of the range.

530

The BGM number entered is out of the range.

540

The door lock number entered is out of the range.

900

The application number entered is out of the range.

Essential sub-parameter values must be entered.
110

Two or more PhDNs with the same value are registered to
one extension.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes

Program

Subparameter

700
790
800
810
820
830

610

120
130
560
610

Code

Error Descriptions
The feature code(s) allowed to attendant console only is
registered.

Two or more DSSs with the same value are registered to one
extension.
The entered DN does not exist in the system.

The Primary DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
numbering scheme.

51
51

110

The secondary/phantom DN entered cannot be registered.
The number conflicts with an existing number scheme.

120
130

When setting an owner extension to the additional information
of CO, GCO, the said CO, GCO keys are not assigned to the
Feature buttons of the owner extension.

110

120
130

The allowable number of GCO, POOL or PhDn has been
exceeded.

The number of Flexible buttons programmed exceeds the
system’s capacity.

The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).

The entered DN conflicts with an existing ISDN extension(s),
etc.

The designated Prime DN does not exist in the system.

120

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

The line number entered does not exist.

System Error Codes

216

The Primary DN entered conflicts with an existing DKT
extension.

B-11

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes

Program

The Node ID entered is over maximum digits, or Node ID was
not entered.

The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).

The entered DN is not designated as an ISDN extension in
Program 202.

The designated DN does not exist in the system.

The DN entered is already assigned to another Hunt Group. A
DN can only be in one Hunt Group.

The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).

The entered DN conflicts with an existing numbering plan.

The entered Hunt Group number does not exist in the system.

The entered DN does not exist in the system.

The number of Hunt Group assignments has exceeded the
system capacity.

The allowable number of Hunt Group member assignments
has been exceeded.

More than 560 DNs are designated for members of one
hunting group.

The Node ID entered is over maximum digits, or Node ID was
not entered.

The MAC address entered includes invalid characters. The
valid characters are numerals and alphabet A(a) to F(f).

Despite that “1:Fix” is selected in FB02, the fixed IP address
for this IPT is not registered in the system.

Despite that “1:Fix” is selected in FB02, the fixed IP address
is not set in FB03.

217

218

219

B-12

Error Descriptions

The DN entered is not an IPT. (This number entered conflicts
with a value of an existing numbering plan.) FB which this
error occur : FB00

IPT is not assigned to this DN (DKT etc.).
FB which this error occur : FB00

The DN entered is an extension number that does not exist in
the system.
FB which this error occur : FB00

250

Note

Subparameter

Code

For FBs in Program 205, 213 and 215, codes shows the entered Feature Code.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes

Trunk Programming Error Codes
Program

Code

Occurred
FB

Subparameter

The equipment number entered is out of the range.

The ILG entered is out of the range.

The OLG entered is out of the range.

The hunting order entered is out of the range.

Error Descriptions

When modifying previously assigned equipment:
49

•

The designated PCB Type does not allow CO trunk
assignments.

•

The designated circuit does not allow CO trunk
assignments.

The ISDN ILG number is designated for analog trunks or the
entered ILG number does not exist in the system.

“0” was entered in ILG when OLG was not registered.

The OLG entered is not registered in the system.

The ISDN OLG number is designated for analog trunks or the
entered OLG number does not exist in the system.

“0” was entered in OLG when ILG was not registered.

)%
)%

A conflict exists between the ILG number and the OLG
number trunk type.

The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.

A trunk number that does not exist in the system has been
selected.

The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.

The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.

Allowable number of trunks has been exceeded.

The line number entered exceeds the system's capacity.

The trunk number entered is out of the range.

300

301
80

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes

A trunk number that does not exist in the system has been
selected.

B-13

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes

Program

302

B-14

Code

Occurred
FB

Subparameter

The equipment number entered is out of the range.

The ILG entered is out of the range.

The entered OLG is out of the range.

Dch position is not set to 16. When setting the time slot
pattern for a 2048 kbps interface, this value must be set to 16.

The type of ILG or OLG entered in not an ISDN.

The ILG or OLG entered does not exist in the system.

When the equipment is moved, the number of the PCM
highway in the moved equipment is different from the current
equipment.

The ILG entered is not registered in the system.
FB which this error occur : FB03

The OLG entered is not registered in the system.
FB which this error occur : FB03

When the card type is “PTU1F”, the protocol type entered
should be “Bellcore” or “Bellcore Northern Telecom”.

When the card type is “PTU”, the protocol type entered is
“ETSI”.

The card type is not “IPU-Q” when IP is selected.

The card type is not “PTU” or “PTU1F” when TTC or QSIG is
selected.

When the card type is “PTU1F”, the inputted D channel
position is not 16.

D channel position must assign “0” when the card type is
“IPU-Q”.

D channel position must not be assigned “0” when the card
type is not “IPU-Q”.

The T-Wait Timer can only be enabled if the Protocol is set to
National ISDN.

The entered Channel Group conflicts with an existing ISDN
extension(s), etc.

The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.

The entered Channel Group number does not exist in the
system.

An ISDN trunk cannot be assigned to the designated Shelf/
Slot/Circuit.

The designated ILG does not exist in the system.

The designated OLG does not exist in the system.

The number of allowable Channel Groups has been
exceeded when a new ISDN trunk assignment is made.

Error Descriptions

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes

Program

303

Code

Occurred
FB

Subparameter

The channel group entered is out of the range.

The entered Channel Group number conflicts with an existing
ISDN extension(s).

The entered Channel Group number does not exist.

)%
)%

The Group Type and Trunk Type are assigned based on the
ILG settings found in ILG field of Program 300 and in ILG field
of Program 302.

The entered Pool Key Number cannot be assigned. It belongs
to another ILG number.

The entered GCO Key Number cannot be assigned. It
belongs to another ILG number.

The digit of DID number cannot change when DID number is
already registered.

The entered ILG does not exist in the system.

)%
)%

The allowable number of GCO or POOL Key Number has
been exceeded.

The number of ILGs exceed the system capacity.

The ILG entered is out of the range.

The entered ILG number cannot be deleted. Trunk
relationships assigned in Programs 300 and 302 must deleted
first.

The entered ILG does not exist in the system.

)%
)%

The Group Type and Trunk Type are assigned based on the
OLG settings found in ILG field of Program 300 and in ILG
field of Program 302.

)%
)%

The entered Pool Key Number cannot be assigned. It belongs
to another OLG number.

The entered GCO Key Number cannot be assigned. It
belongs to another ILG number.

The entered OLG does not exist in the system.

The allowable number of OLG Group Number has been
exceeded.

)%
)%
)%

The allowable number of GCO or POOL Key Number has
been exceeded.

The OLG entered is out of the range.

The entered OLG number cannot be deleted. Trunk
relationships assigned in Programs 300 and 302 must be
deleted first.

The entered OLG does not exist in the system.

304

305

307

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes

306

Error Descriptions

B-15

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes

Program

308

309

310

311

Code

Occurred
FB

Subparameter

The entered equipment value is invalid.

Wrong assignment intervals.

The designated trunk equipment does not exist in the system.

The pause assignment is wrong.

)%a
)%

No incoming destination number is entered for the parameter
required.

The entered DID conflicts with an existing wild card PCB. The
allowable number of DID assignments including a wild card
PCB is exceeded.

The selected GCO conflicts with an existing ILG number.

The selected Pool Line Group conflicts with an existing ILG
number.

The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.

The length of entered DID value exceeds the allowable
contract digit number.

The entered GCO key group does not exist in the system.

The selected ILG number does not exist in the system. The
number of ILGs exceed the system capacity.

)%
)%

The number of allowable GCO or POOL key group
assignments has been exceeded.

The allowable number of DID assignments has been
exceeded.

The entered equipment value is invalid.

)%a
)%

No incoming destination number is assigned for the required
parameter.

The entered circuit is not set to support the designated trunk.

Although DISA security is set to Necessary, no DISA code
has been assigned.

The entered DID number is not assigned to an ILG.

Error Descriptions

The DID Number entered is invalid.

DID Number entered does not exist in the system.

312
82

The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.

The trunk number entered is out of the range.

The entered equipment value is invalid.
When Signalling Method field is set to CLASS:

313
49

B-16

)%
)%

•

The Signalling Contents field value must be assigned

•

The CLID Equipment Number Position circuit for the CIU
must be entered.

The entered trunk number does not exist in the system.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes

Program

Code

Occurred
FB

Subparameter

Error Descriptions
“NONE” entered in any field is invalid.

The entered equipment value is invalid.

The PCB installed in the designated Shelf/Slot must be a
RDTU.

The channel group entered is out of the range.

RPTU Equipment Number entered is invalid.

When the equipment is moved, the number of the PCM
highway in the moved equipment is different from the current
equipment.

If the Span Interface speed is set to a value not equal to 1.5M,
the Dch position is modified.

The entered channel group number conflicts with an existing
ISDN extension(s).

The equipment number entered is out of range.

The entered channel group number does not exist in the
system.

The entered circuit must be an assigned ISDN.

The entered equipment value is invalid.

The ILG entered is out of the range.

The OLG entered is out of the range.

“0” was entered in ILG when OLG was not registered.

)%
)%

The entered ILG/OLG values do not have ISDN assignments.

The OLG entered is not registered in the system.

“0” was entered in OLG when ILG was unregistered.

The T-Wait Timer can only be enabled if the Protocol is set to
National ISDN.

The entered channel group number conflicts with an existing
ISDN extension(s).

The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.

The entered channel group number does not exist in the
system.

The entered circuit must be an assigned ISDN.

The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.

The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.

The allowable channel group assignments exceed the system
capacity.

315

316

317

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes

)%
)%
)%
)%

B-17

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes

Program

Code

Occurred
FB

)%a
)%

The selected GCO conflicts with an existing ILG number.

The selected Pool Line Group conflicts with an existing ILG
number.

The entered GCO key group does not exist in the system.

The selected ILG number does not exist in the system.

The selected ILG number does not exist in the system. The
number of ILGs exceed the system capacity.

)%
)%

The number of allowable GCO or POOL key group
assignments has been exceeded.

)%a)%

The destination number entered is wrong.

)%a)%

The destination number is not assigned.

The entered equipment value is invalid.

)%a)%

The circuit for the designated PCB must be an assigned ISDN
primary trunk.

The OLG entered is out of the range.

The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.

)%
)%

The designated extension number does not exist in the
system.

)%
)%

The entered GCO value does not exist in the system.

)%
)%

The entered POOL value does not exist in the system.

The OLG entered is out of the range.

The allowable system DID assignments has been exceeded.

318

319

320

321

322

B-18

Subparameter

Error Descriptions
The pause assignment is wrong.
No incoming destination number is assigned for the required
parameter.

The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.

The Group CO or Pool Line Group Destination is out of range
(1~128).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes

Program

Code

Occurred
FB

Select the Type of Service for CBC.

The Incoming Line Group entered is invalid.

The Outgoing Line Group entered is invalid.

Error Descriptions

)%a)%

The entered values in Channel Group and Index fields are not
valid CBC assignments. Select NODATA in Type of Service
field to delete CBC setting.

)%
)%

When an INWATS ILG is assigned in ILG field an Out WATS
Type of Service cannot be assigned.

)%
)%

If OUTWATS service is selected for Type of Service, an OLG
value must be assigned.

)%
)%

The selected ILG conflicts with an existing ILG number.

)%
)%

When an Out WATS OLG is assigned in OLG field an
INWATS Type of Service cannot be assigned.

)%
)%

Make a selection in OLG field.

)%
)%

The selected OLG conflicts with an existing ILG number.

)%a)%

The assigned minimum Bch value (Minimum Calls Zones
1~3) exceeds the related (Maximum Calls Zones 1~3)
maximum Bch value.

)%
)%
)%

The assigned minimum Bch value (Minimum Calls Zones
1~3) exceeds the related (Maximum Calls Zones 1~3)
maximum Bch value.

)%a)%

The OLG entered does not exist in system.

)%
)%

The entered ILG/OLG values are not assigned ISDNs.

)%a)%

The entered channel number conflicts with an existing ISDN
extension(s), etc.

The entered channel group number does not exist in the
system.

The Channel Group entered does not exist in the system.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

The B channel entered is invalid.

System Error Codes

The same value is designated to the Type of Service, Facility
Code, Service Parameters, and Network ID fields that
correspond to the same channel group and different line
service index.

323

Subparameter

Make a Service Type selection for field 02.

The allowable number of assigned channel groups has been
exceeded.
The number of allowable CBCs has been exceeded.

B-19

System Error Codes
Attendant Position Programming Error Codes

Program

324

Code

Occurred
FB

Subparameter

)%a)%

The entered channel number conflicts with an existing ISDN
extension(s), etc.

The entered channel group number does not exist in the
system.

Error Descriptions
The channel group entered is out of the range.
The time entered is invalid.

Attendant Position Programming Error Codes
Program

Code

Occurred
FB

400

If the Called Number Index is not assigned, Call Destination
must be set to insert.

The Attendant group number entered is out of the range.

)%a)%

404

B-20

Subparameter

Error Descriptions

The ILG entered is out of the range.
The entered Attendant group number does not exist in the
system.
The designated ILG does not exist in the system.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes

Service Programming Error Codes
Program

Occurred FB

)%
)%

A character that is not permitted is included in the Destination
number.

Although 2nd destination has been assigned, you cannot
remove the 1st destination.
You cannot assign the 2nd destination without the 1st
destination.

A value must be assigned to Destination 1if an assignment
was made in Destination 2.

The entered System Call Forward number does not exist in
the system.

A character that is not permitted is included in the entered
Speed Dial number.

The entered Speed Dial number is out of range.

The pause assignment is wrong.

The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).

The entered number conflicts with an existing numbering
plan.

The entered extension does not exist. The entered Attendant
Console does not exist.

)%a)%

The entered External Generic Relay number conflicts with an
existing device, such as a door lock, etc.

IOU card is not registered in the system.

)%a)%

The System Call Forward index entered is out of the range.

Account Code cannot be verified.

Account code confirmation digit does not coincide. (It is larger
than the value that was registered by Program 570.)

The Account code number exceeds the system’s capacity.

500

501

503

504

506

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Error Descriptions

System Call Forward Index number exceeds the system
capacity.

The Page group number entered exceeds the system’s
capacity.
The number of allowable Device number per paging group
has been exceeded.

System Error Codes

502

Subparameter

Code

The Page group number entered exceeds the system’s
capacity.
Device Number per paging group is exceeded.

B-21

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes

Program

Occurred FB

)%a)%

The destination number value is out of range (when
destination type is Paging Group).

)%a)%

The allowable number of Paging Groups have been
exceeded.

The entered Ring Duration is invalid.

Door Phone number entered conflicts with an existing Door
Phone number.

The equipment assigned in DDCB Equipment Number is
already in use.

The entered value conflicts with an existing DKT extension.

)%a)%

The entered Circuit conflicts with an existing door lock.

The entered Door Phone number does not exist in the
system.

The PCB Type designated for this circuit must be a DKU.

The entered Door Phone number does not exist in the
system.

The allowable number of Door Phones has been exceeded.

The entered equipment value is invalid.

The designated BIOU PCB circuit is used by another device
(Night Bell, etc.), or two or more door locks are designated for
the same BIOU PCB.

The PCB Type designated for this DDCB circuit must be a
PDKU or BDKU.

The DDCB Equipment number entered conflicts with an
existing door lock.

Other devices (DKT extensions, door phones, etc.) are
designated for the specified DDCB circuit.

The allowable number of Door Locks has been exceeded.

509

510

512

The ILG entered is out of the range.

ILG number enter does not exist.

The OLG entered is out of the range.

The entered OLG number does not exist.

507

508

513

514
515

B-22

Subparameter

Code

Error Descriptions
The DDCB Equipment number entered is invalid.

The destination number is not registered.

No error occurs for this command except for common errors.
The specified COS Override Code digit is invalid.
No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes

Program

516

517

Occurred FB

Error Descriptions

A character that is not permitted is used in the Speed Dial
number.

The allowable number of Speed Dial Bins has been
exceeded.

The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).

The entered value conflicts with an existing numbering plan.

The entered PrimeDN does not exist.

The allowable Short-dial number has been exceeded.

Multiple Calling Pilot DN is not assigned.

Cannot delete Multiple Calling Pilot DN.

The Multiple Calling Pilot DN entered is using in a part of the
numbering plan, extension number, etc.

The Multiple Calling DN entered is an already existing DN .

The Multiple Calling Pilot DN entered already exists.

ISDN station cannot be assigned to the destination number.

Cannot delete Multiple Calling Pilot DN.

The Multiple Calling Pilot DN entered is using in a part of the
numbering plan, extension number, etc.

The plural trunk access number can not assign in the same
Multiple Calling Group.
Cannot assign the destination number because the Multiple
Calling Group does not exist.

80
48

The destination type and the destination number must be
assigned at the same time.

The Multiple Calling Group entered is out of the range.

The Multiple Calling Group entered does not exist.

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

The Route Plan Number must be complete to be registered to
the Route Plan Table.

The allowable number of participants in the Route Plan Table
has been exceeded.

523

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

524

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

519
520

System Error Codes

518

Subparameter

Code

521

The Exception Route Plan Number must be complete to be
registered to the Route Plan Table.

522

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

B-23

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes

Program

Occurred FB

The OLG entered is out of the range.

)%
)%

Both the OLG Number and the Digit Modification Index must
be entered.

Digit Modification Index value cannot be 0.

)%
)%

The value entered is not permitted.

The entered date is out of range.

The public holiday number entered exceeds the system’s
capacity.

528

529

The entered time is out of range.

A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.

DR LCR Table codes cannot be repeated. The value entered
cannot be registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered, 123 cannot
be registered).

The code is not registered in the screening table.

A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.

LCR OLG Access codes cannot be repeated. The value
entered cannot be registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered, 123
cannot be registered).

The allowable number of LCR OLG Access codes has been
exceeded.

The OLG entered is out of the range.

The allowable number of DR sharing tables has been
exceeded.

A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.

Dial Strings cannot be repeated. The value entered cannot be
registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered, 123 cannot be
registered).

The allowable number of DRLs has been exceeded.

A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.

To add a DRL to the DR Exception Table, the DRL number
must be complete.

The allowable number of participants in the DR Exception
Table has been exceeded.

)%a)%

525

526

527

530

531

532

533

534

535

B-24

Subparameter

Code

Error Descriptions

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

The value entered is not permitted.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes

Program

Occurred FB

An incoming destination number must be entered when After
Shift Type field is set to Dialing Digits.

The entered value conflicts with an existing number scheme.

The entered DN conflicts with an existing DKT, ISDN
extension, etc.

The entered DN does not exist.

A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
code.

The entered DN conflicts with an existing DKT, ISDN
extension, etc.

The entered DN does not exist.

)%a)%

The OLG entered is out of the range.

)%a)%

Two or more OLG numbers with the same value exist in the
same group.

)%a)%

The entered OLG number does not exist.

)%a)%

The value entered is not permitted.

Registered Digit Length cannot be less than the Verified Digit
Length.

)%a)%

The same account code cannot be repeated.

)%a)%

The same account code cannot be repeated.

)%a)%

The door phone number entered is out of the range.

The entered Door Phone does not exist.

The tenant number entered is not “1”.

The paging group number entered is out of the range.

The entered Paging Group does not exist.

The entered circuit type is out of range.

The Ckt Type number entered, CO, GCO or POOL is invalid.

The entered circuit number is invalid.

The Device installed in the Circuit does not existed in the
system.

The entered station number does not exist.

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

The entered DN is not a VM extension.

No error occurs for this command except for common errors.

540

541

550

551

Subparameter

Code

Error Descriptions

570

573

576

577

579
580

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes

571

B-25

System Error Codes
Networking Programming Error Codes

Networking Programming Error Codes
Code

Occurred
FB

An OLG number has not been assigned in system.

651

The allowable number of Node ID assignments has been
exceeded.

653

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

654

655

656

)%a
)%

657

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

658

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

659

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

660

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.

The Node ID entered is out of the range.

The Node ID entered is using a part of the registered Node ID.

The Node ID entered is out of the range.

The Node ID entered is using a part of the registered Node ID.

The Node ID entered is out of the range.

The Node ID entered is using a part of the registered Node ID.

The Node ID entered is not registered.

Program

650

670

671

672
673

B-26

Subparameter

Error Descriptions
The OLG entered is out of the range.

The OLG entered is out of the range.
No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
The entered Overlap Code already exists.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes
Equipment Programming Error Codes

Equipment Programming Error Codes
Program

Code

Occurred
FB

Server Port Number must be entered when PC Operation
Type is set to Server, or Client Port Number must be entered
when PC Operation Type is set to Client.

If a CTI value (200~208) is assigned to the Logical Device in
Program 803, then Data Flow must be set to
Asynchronization.

When PC Operation Type is set to Client, the Client Port
Number cannot be deleted.

When PC Operation Type is set to Server, the Server Port
Number cannot be deleted.

When “Server” is selected, the Server Port number (FB04) is
not able to assign “0”. When “Client” is selected, the
connecting port number (FB06) is not able to assign “0”.

When “Server” is selected, the Server Port number (FB04) is
not able to assign “0”.

When “Client” is selected, the connecting port number (FB06)
is not able to assign “0”.

The values assigned in Program 803 conflict with related I/O
Logical and Physical Device assignments.

The selected port conflicts with existing devices, such as CTI,
etc.

The Physical Device assignment conflicts with existing serial
number assignments.

The values assigned in Program 803 conflict with related I/O
Logical and Physical Device assignments.

801

Subparameter

Error Descriptions

804

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

System Error Codes

803

B-27

System Error Codes
Equipment Programming Error Codes

B-28

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference

This chapter is helps you cross-reference programs from Strata DK to CTX and vice versa. For example,
Program 03 of the DK is similar to Program 100 of the Strata CTX. Only programs that have similar
functions have been listed in these tables. The first table lists Strata DK program numbers in ascending
order and the next table, “Strata CTX to Strata DK” on page C-15 lists Strata CTX program numbers in
ascending order.

Strata DK to Strata CTX
The following numerical listing gives you the Strata DK program numbers and names. It cross-references
Strata CTX programs that are similar.
Strata DK
Prg
No.

Program Name

Strata CTX

Parameter

Summary

Prg
No.

Program Name

FB
No.

Summary

Software Check

Code 1, 2

Level 1 Security Code,
Level 2 Security Code

110

Password Assignment

Password

Flexible PCB Cabinet
and Slot Assignments

Set PCB Code

100

Card Slot Assignment

Card Type

Flexible Access Code
Numbering

set Access Code

102

Flexible Numbering
Plan Assignment

Feature Code

(1)Destination Type
(Day1,audio/speech)
(2)Destination

(1)Destination Type
(Day2,audio/speech)

7
*09

[PDN],[PhDN],DH,
ACD or Modem DID
Ext. Assignments

N/A

Set DID Extension
Number

309

(1)Destination Type
(Night,audio/speech)
(2)Destination

Direct Inward Dialing
Assignment
8

(1)Destination Type
(Day1,data)
(2)Destination

(1)Destination Type
(Day2,data)

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

(2)Destination

(2)Destination
10

(1)Destination Type
(Night,data)
(2)Destination

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

C-1

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

Program Name

Parameter

System Assignments,
Part 3 of 3

LED 10-13

SMDI Station Number
Digit Length

LED 04

Voice Mail Message
Waiting Cancel Via Dial
#64/Automatic

LED 06

Voice Mail Identification
Code, Dual Multifrequency (DTMF)
Signal Time

LED 07

Ring Transfer of CO
Line Allowed

103

LED 01

Tone First/Voice First

LED 01

C-2

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

Summary

Program Name

FB
No.

Summary

Setting of caller
number digits sent to
VM unit

Setting of auto cancel
of VM and MW

Dial sending time at
Voice Mail port

Class of Service
Assignment

Whether to activate
Call Transfer With
Campon

204

DKT Data Assignment

Tone first / Voice first
signaling

Tone First/Voice First

206

Phantom DN
Parameter Assignment

Tone first / Voice first
signaling

LED 03

Dial Pulse (DP) Make
Ratio

105

System Timer
Assignment

The assignment of
Dial Pulse Make Ratio

LED 04

Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF)
Signal Time

104

System Timer
Assignment

Dial sending time on
external line and
extension station

LED 06

CO Line Repeat
Ringing

Whether to activate
External Ringing
Repeat (Enable/
Disable)

LED 10

System Speed Dial
Override, Toll
Restriction

Destination
Restriction Override
by System Speed
Dial. Enable/Disable

Part 2 of 3

10-1

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

579

Voice Mail Data for
System Assignment

204

DKT Data Assignment

105

System Timer
Assignment

Destination busy
detection time when
recalling the analog
external line

LED 11

ABR Redial Time

104

System Timer
Assignment

LED 11

ABR Redial Time

208

Station Timer
Assignment

Automatic Busy
Redial’s Recall Timer

LED 12

Automatic Busy Redial
(ABR) Cycles

208

Station Timer
Assignment

Automatic Busy
Redial’s Retry Count
when Outgoing Call

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

10-2

10-3

10-4

Program Name

Parameter

Summary

Program Name

FB
No.

Summary

Break in warning tone
of Executive Override
Enable or Disable

Tones for the
transferred party after
the ringing transfer
takes place

Privacy Override/
Attendant Monitor
warning Enable/
Disable

DTMF Back Tone

Setting of output of
Message Desk No

Setting of output of
Class, ANI and DNIS
information

Set Blank Number for
VM unit

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

T-WAIT

317

ISDN Basic Trunk
Assignment

T-WAIT

LED 16

Executive Override
Warning Tone

LED 05

Music-on-hold or Ring
Back Tone

LED 14

Privacy Override
Warning Tone

LED 11,
20

Dual-tone MultiFrequency (DTMF)
Tone, Padded Tone
Return

LED 20

VM SMDI Message
desk Number

LED 08

Call ID / Automatic
Number ID

LED 09

SMDI Bellcore
Standard Version

LED 11

PRI ISDN Timer

302

LED 12

BRI T-WAIT Timer

System Assignments,
Part 2 of 3

System Assignments,
Part 3 of 3

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

105

300

579

ACD/ISDN Parameters

System Data
Assignment

Trunk Assignment

Voice Mail Data for
System Assignment

ACD Timing
Assignments

Call Disconnect Timer

104

System Data
Assignment

Automatic disconnect
timer

*11-0

E911/CAMA Trunk
Assignments

LED 11

CAMA Operation
Enabled/Disabled

105

System Data
Assignment

offer of E911 Service

*11-2

CAMA Trunk Group
Hunting Assignment

Second
parameter

Hunt to CAMA Trunk
Group

550

Enhanced 911
Emergency Call Group
Assignment

1-8

OLG associated with
Emergency Call
Group Number

*11-5

CAMA Digits Send on
911 Calls

N/A

Set sending digits for
E911

105

System Data
Assignment

The sending dialing
digits as E911

*11-6

E911 Interdigital Timer

104

System Timer
Assignment

Dialed 9 and 11
Judgment Timer

*11-8

911 Special [DN]
Notification
Assignments

N/A

Set [PDN],[PhDN] port
number

400

Emergency Call
Destination Assignment

Called Number of
Emergency Call(DN,
Pilot Number,Private
Number)

Code 9

K4RCU3/RRCS DTMF
Inter-digital Release
Time

104

System Timer
Assignment

Timer to permit dial
input for the
telephone and trunk
using DTMF

Short Flash Time

308

Trunk Timer
Assignment

Long Flash Time

Pause time after flash

Emergency Ring
Down Timer setting of
an originating
terminal

12-1

System Assignments,
Basic Timing

Code 4

Flashing Timing

Code 4

Flashing Timing

Code 5

Pause After Flash

N/A

Standard Telephone
Ring Down Timer

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

216

Emergency Ring Down
Assignment

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

C-3

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

Parameter

Summary

CESID

202

ISDN Basic Station
Assignment

CESID

200

Station Assignment

Voice Mail to
Message Waiting

200

Station Assignment

Emergency call group
of extension terminal

217

ISDN Individual Station
Data Assignment

Emergency call group
of extension terminal

Destination

540

ACD Pilot DN
Assignment

Tandem Line
Connection

103

Class of Service
Assignment

Tandem CO Line
Connection

Code 1,
Code 2

CO/DID/Tie Line Signal
CO/DID/Tie Dial Pulse
Rate

300

Trunk Assignment

Dial Mode

Code 7

Forced Account Code

306

Outgoing Line Group
Assignment

Set Trunk forced
Account Code need/
no need

Code 4

Automatic Release
Time

308

Trunk Timer
Assignment

Detect Automatic
Release / Calling
Party Control, and
detection time

Incoming Line Group.
Port became of
member that ILG

Outgoing Line Group.
Port became of
member that OLG

Set CESID

Defining the Message
Center

N/A

Set Message Center

*13

Station To CAMA
Trunk Group
Assignment

N/A

E911 Station CAMA
Trunk Number

After Shift Service
Destination

Second
parameter

*16

Assign CO Line
Groups

ISDN Trunk Group
Type Assignment

DID/Tie Line Options

Summary

N/A

Ground/Loop/Tie/DID
Line Options

FB
No.

Station Assignment

CESID Station
Information

Program Name

200

*12

14-6

C-4

Program Name

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

LED 01-20

N/A

Set CO Line

300

Wink/Immediate

LED 03

DID Camp-on/Busy

LED 04

DID/Tie Second Dial
Tone Option

(2)After Shift Forward
Destination

304

Incoming Line Group
Assignment

Analog/ISDN Type

306

Outgoing Line Group
Assignment

Analog/ISDN Type

300

Trunk Assignment

Start Method

304

Incoming Line Group
Assignment

Automatic Campon
on/off

Called Dial Tone send
on/off

Set Trunk Group Type

LED 02

Trunk Assignment

(1)After Shift Forward
Type

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

Program Name

DSS Console/
Attendant Telephone
Assignments

Parameter

N/A

Strata CTX
Summary

Set DSS Console

Prg
No.

214

Program Name

DSS Console
Assignment

FB
No.

Summary

Input DSS1 card slot
position

Input DSS2 card slot
position

Input DSS3 card slot
position

Input DSS4 card slot
position

Input DSS5 card slot
position

Input DSS6 card slot
position

Input DSS7 card slot
position

Input DSS8 card slot
position
(1) Feature Code
(2)parameter1

DSS Console and
Number Button
Assignments

LED 01-20

Set Feature Code

215

DSS Key Assignment

1-60

(3)parameter2
(4)parameter3
(5)parameter4
(6)parameter5

01,02

The number of Add-on
Modules

204

DKT Data Assignment

Number of Add-on
Modules
(1) Feature Code

*29

Add-on Modules
Button Assignments

(2)parameter1
LED 01-20

Set Feature Code

213

Add on Module Key
Assignment

1-20

(3)parameter2
(4)parameter3
(5)parameter4
(6)parameter5

Automatic Busy
Redial required

LED 10

Change DISA Security
Code

Change DISA Codes

LED 17

Do Not Disturb(DND)
Override

DND Override Calling Party

DND Override Called Party

Privilege as the
originator of
Executive Override

Station Class of
Service

103

Class of Service
Assignment

LED 18

Executive Override

Privacy Override
privilege

LED 08

Forced Account Code

Originator forced
Account Code

LED 14

Verify Account Code

Verified Account
Codes

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

LED 06

Automatic Busy
Redial(ABR) Access

C-5

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

*30

Program Name

Station Class of
Service

Telephone Group Page
Assignments

Station Class of
Service

Parameter

Strata CTX
Summary

LED 16

Change Toll Restriction
Travelling Class Code

LED 05

Speed Dial

LED 07

Off-hook Call Announce
(OCA) Automatic

LED 05

Speed Dial

LED 03

Microphone Button On
at Start of Call

LED 02

Mic Button - Locked/
Momentary

LED 01

Page Group A

LED 02

Page Group B

LED 03

Page Group C

LED 04

Page Group D

LED 05

Page Group E

LED 06

Page Group F

LED 07

Page Group G

LED 08

Page Group H

LED 18

Executive and Privacy
Override Blocking
(Modem)

LED 10

All Call Page AllowedDigital and Electronic
Telephones

LED 05-08

Voice Mail (VM) Groups
1-4

LED 14

Off-hook Call Announce
(OCA) Handset or
Speaker

LED 01

Prg
No.

200

202

204

502

103

209,
218

Station Assignment

ISDN Basic Station
Assignment

FB
No.

Terminal Paging Group
Assignment

Summary

Permission to
Change of Travelling
Class Override Code

Change System
Speed Dial

Automatic OCA

Change System
Speed Dial

Set Microphone initial
value

Set use or no use of
the microphone

1~16

Paging Group
Number

Allowed or not
allowed as the
overridden party of
Executive Override

Whether to invoke
Emergency Paging

DKT Data Assignment

Class of Service
Assignment

Message Center Hunt
for Voice Mail Port

Voice Mail Hunt Group

Handsfree Disabled
204

C-6

Program Name

Type of OCA if OCA
is allowed

Whether to turn the
microphone ON or
OFF when a hands
free call is started

DKT Data Assignment

LED 02

Handsfree No Warning

Whether to ring a
splash tone when a
hands free call is
started. Enable or
Disable

LED 11

Busy Override (BOV)
Tone

Ring Over Busy
repetition timers

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

Program Name

Station Class of
Service

Strata CTX

Parameter

Summary

Prg
No.

LED 10

All Call Page Allowed

502

LED 15

Toshiba Stratagy,
Stratagy DK and/or VP
Integration (A Tone/D
Tone)

LED 19,
20

19:Toshiba Stratagy/
Stratagy DK/VP (B No
Station)
20:Toshiba Stratagy/VP
(B+Station Number)

LED 17

End-to-end Signal RCV
(VM)

LED 03

Off-hook Call
Announce(OCA)
Enabled (Receive)

103

580

Program Name
Terminal Paging Group
Assignment

FB
No.

Summary

All Page Group

whether to send A,D
tone or not send for
Voice Mail

whether to send only
B Tone, Not Send, or
B Tone and Extension
Number for Voice Mail

whether send End to
End Signal or not
send for Voice Mail
Port

Class of Service
Assignment

Can Originate OCA

Voice Mail Data
Assignment

Group Pick up
Assignments

LED
01~20

Pickup Group 1~20

210

Call Pickup Group
Assignment

1~20

Pickup Group 1~32

Automatic Preference

N/A

set Automatic
Preference type

204

DKT Data Assignment

Programmed with one
of the preference type

[PDN]/[PhDN]Station
Hunting

N/A

209

Station Hunting Group
Assignment

Hunt Method

N/A

Set Station Hunting
member

218

Station Hunting Group
Members Assignment

[PDN]/[PhDN] Station
Hunting

Set Hunting Group
Member DN

DN set type(modify/
insert)

*33

[PhDN] Owner
Telephone Assignment

N/A

Set Owner Station
Logical Port No.

206

Phantom DN
Parameter Assignment

Owner PDN

Hold Recall Timing

N/A

Set Recall Timing

208

Station Timer
Assignment

On-hold recall timer

Station Class of
Service

LED 17

Continuous DTMF
Tones Off

204

DKT Data Assignment

Set Continuous
DTMF

Ring Transfer (Campon) Recall Time

N/A

Set Ring Transfer
Recall Time

208

Station Timer
Assignment

No Answer Timer of
Ringing Transfer

*37

Park Recall Timing

PARK TIME=Seconds

104

System Timer
Assignment

Park timer

Digital and Electronic
Telephone Keystrip
Type

N/A

The appropriate code

204

DKT Data Assignment

Feature Key Pattern

*38

Standard Telephone
Ring-Down Destination

N/A

Set Destination Port
No.

216

Emergency Ring Down
Assignment

Emergency Ring
Down Destination

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

*31

(1) Feature Code
(2)parameter1
39

Flexible Button
Assignments

LED 01-20

Set Feature

205

Station Feature Key
Assignment

1-20

(3)parameter2
(4)parameter3
(5)parameter4
(6)parameter5

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

C-7

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.
41

Station Outgoing Call
Restriction

*41-1

T1 Span Frame and
Line Code
Assignments

*41-3

Parameter

Summary
Restrict stations from
making outgoing calls

LED 02
LED 01

T1 Span Line Code
Assignments

T1 Span Transmit
Level Pad
Assignments

N/A

Set Transmit Pad

*41-4

T1 Span Receive
Level Pad
Assignments

N/A

Set Receive Pad

Set Primary Clock

*42

Clock Source

43
*43-1

*43-3

44-18

*44

*45-2
*45-3

C-8

Program Name

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

Program Name

FB
No.

306

FRL

200

FRL Assignments

315

T1 Trunk Card Data
Assignment

105

System Data
Assignment

Summary
Assign FRL.

Coding Format

Set frame format

Set send PAD value

Set receive PAD
value

Primary Clock Source

Secondary Clock
Source

Set Secondary Clock

0 + Credit Card Dialing
Option

LED 01-20

restrict/not restrict

111

Destination Restriction
Level Assignment

Credit Card Calling
Enable/Disable

D-Channel Control and
NFAS Assignments

N/A

D-Channel Circuit No.

302

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

D channel position.

Network PRI Interface
PRI Interface ID Code

302

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

I/f ID Number

Network PRI Interface
Assignment

316

DCH Shared ISDN
Primary Trunk
Assignment

I/f ID Number

Toll Restriction Code

510

Class Of Service
Override Assignment

COS Override Code

SPID Initialize Type

Display for ISDN
SPID Initialize Type

SPID Value1

SPID Value2

Toll Restriction / LCR
table Code(set / no
set)

Toll Restriction Action

Least Cost Routing
Action

Dial String

Add/Delete codes

Exception Dial Strings

Add/Delete codes

LCR feature
availability

D-Channel Control and
NFAS Assignments

N/A

Toll Restriction/
Traveling Class
Override Codes

BRI Service Profile
Identifier (SPID)
Parameters

LCR/Toll Restriction
Bypass for Special
Numbers that Do Not
Begin with */#
LCR/Toll Restriction
Bypass For Special
Numbers that Begin
with */#

N/A

46-2
46-6

Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Area
Codes by Class
Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Local
Office Codes Assigned
by Class

Toll Restriction
Exception Office
Codes Assigned by
Area Codes

50-1

LCR Parameters

LED 01

Third
parameter

SPID Type,
SPID Value

Digit Code
Digit String

317

530

ISDN Basic Trunk
Assignment

Toll Restriction / LCR
Screening Table
Assignment

533

Toll Restriction Table
Assignment

Office Codes

534

Exceptional Toll
Restriction Table
Assignment

Enable System LCR

103

Class Of Service
Assignment

Area Codes

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK

Strata CTX

Prg
No.

Program Name

50-2

LCR Home Area Code

Set Home Area Code

520

LCR Parameters
Assignment

Local Area Code

*50

Caller ID Circuit
Assignments to CO
Line PCBs

N/A

Set Caller ID circuit
number

313

Caller ID Assignment

Class Equipment No.

First
parameter

LCR Plan

523

LCR Route Plan
Schedule Table
Assignment

LCR Time of Day

Second
parameter

Schedule

Station LCR Group
Number

Third
parameter

LCR Station Group
Number

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.1

Fourth
parameter

Route Definition
Numbers (First Pick)

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.2

Fourth
parameter

Route Definition
Numbers (Second Pick)

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.3

Fourth
parameter

Route Definition
Numbers (Third Pick)

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.4

Fifth
parameter

Route Definition
Numbers (Fourth Pick)

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.5

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.6

LCR Time Zone

LCR Schedule
Assignments for LCR
Plans

Parameter

Summary

Prg
No.

524

529

Program Name

LCR Route Table to
Route Definition
Assignment

LCR Route Plan
Schedule Table Time
Zone Assignment

FB
No.

Summary

Fourth
parameter

Start Time

set Start Time for
Time Zone

First
parameter

LCR Plan No.

Outgoing Line Group
- Number

Second
parameter

Route Definition
Numbers

LCR Route Definition
Tables

LCR Modified Digits

55-0

Delete Number of
Digits From the Front
of Dialed

55-1

525

LCR Route Definition
Table Assignment

Modified Digits Table

525

LCR Route Definition
Table Assignment

Digit Modification
Index

Second
parameter

Quantity of Digits

526

LCR Digit Modification
Table Assignment

Digits to be deleted

Add Digits Before and/
or After the Dialed
Number

Third
parameter

Digits added

526

LCR Digit Modification
Table Assignment

Add Leading Digits

55-2

Add Digits Before and/
or After the Dialed
Number

Third
parameter

Digits added

526

LCR Digit Modification
Table Assignment

Add Trailing Digits

Second
parameter

200

Station Assignment

LCR Station Group
Assignments

Set LCR Station Group

Station LCR Group
Number

202

ISDN Basic Station
Assignment

LCR Group Number

DK424 Attendant
Console Series

First
parameter

Attendant Console
Overflow Timer

404

Attendant Group
Assignment

Overflow Timer

58-1

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Digit Modification
Index

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

C-9

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

Program Name

Parameter

Strata CTX
Summary

Prg
No.

Program Name

FB
No.

Summary

58-5

Attendant Console
Overflow Destination
Assignments

Second
parameter

Overflow Destination

204

DKT Data Assignment

Overflow destination
of attendant

58-5

DK424 Attendant
Console Series

Second
parameter

Attendant Console
Overflow Destination
Assignment

404

Attendant Group
Assignment

Overflow destination
of attendant group

60-1

SMDR Data Output
Options

LED 01

Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port

512

SMDR For System
Assignment

Caller ID field
indication

60-1

SMDR Data Output
Options

LED 01

Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port.

512

SMDR For System
Assignment

ANI field indicate

60-1

SMDR Data Output
Options

LED 01

Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port

513

SMDR For ILG
Assignment

DNIS field indication

60-2

SMDR Threshold Time

104

System Timer
Assignment

Valid Call timer on
SMDR

60-3

SMDR Incoming/
Outgoing Calls

SMDR Output when a
call is completed

513

SMDR For ILG
Assignment

Output of SMDR
record for the
incoming call

60-3

SMDR Incoming/
Outgoing Calls

SMDR Output when a
call is completed

514

SMDR For OLG
Assignment

Output of SMDR
record for the
outgoing call

60-4

Forced/Voluntary
Account Code Digit
Length

570

Account Code Digit
Length Assignment

Forced/Voluntary
Account Code
Verified Digit Length

60-7

Credit Card Call Digit
Length

105

System Data
Assignment

Minimum Dial Digits
of Credit Card Calling

*60

BRI Line/Station
Operation Assignment

LED 01-04

Set TE/NT

317

ISDN Basic Trunk
Assignment

BRI Equipment
Number

304

Incoming Line Group
Assignment

Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio or
Speech

306

Outgoing Line Group
Assignment

Number of DID digits
received from CO.

*61

Analog Trunk Service
for ISDN

Bearer Service

*62

Non-ISDN Station
Bearer Service

Bearer Service

200

Station Assignment

Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio /
Speech

*64-2

Number of DID/DNIS
Digits for Trunk Groups

Third
parameter

Number of DID
Incoming Call Digits per
Trunk Group

304

Incoming Line Group
Assignment

DID Contract Beam
Count

Create Channel
Group Number

Set ILG

Set OLG

*66-1

C-10

Channel Group
Number Parameters

Second
parameter

Set Channel Group No.

302

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

*66-2

Program Name

Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID

Parameter

Strata CTX
Summary

Second
parameter

Set Facility Code

Third
parameter

Set Service Parameters

Prg
No.

Program Name

FB
No.

Summary

323

Call By Call Service
Assignment

Incoming Line Group

323

Call By Call Service
Assignment

Outgoing Line Group

Call By Call Service
Assignment

Facility code Value

323

Service Parameters

323

Call By Call Service
Assignment

Kind of Line Service

*66-3

Channel Group/Trunk
Parameters

LED 03-06

Trunk Group Type

302

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

Set ISDN Trunk
Group Number

*66-4

Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID

N/A

Set Network ID Code

323

Call By Call Service
Assignment

Network ID
(1)Bearer Capability
Speech.

LED 01

“Set
“”Speech”Speech””“

302

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

(2)Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type for
Speech
(1)Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio.

LED 02

*67-2

302

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

N/A

“Set “”64 kbps.
Data”Data””“

“Set “”56 kbps.
Data”Data””Data”Data””
”

Set Minimum number of
B-channels reserved

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

302

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

(2)Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type for
unrestricted digital
Information 64kHz.
(1)Bearer Capability
unrestricted digital
Information 56kbps.

302

323

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

Call By Call Service
Assignment

(2)Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type for
unrestricted digital
Information 56kHz

Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone1

Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone2

Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone3

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

LED 04

Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Groups

(2)Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type. for
3.1kHz Audio
(1)Bearer Capability
unrestricted digital
Information 64kbps.

Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Group
Supported
LED 03

*67-3

“Set “”3.1 kHz
Audio”Audio””

C-11

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

*67-4

*67-5

Program Name

ISDN Trunk Groups
Maximum Channel
Reservation

Multiple Time Zone
Settings

Parameter

N/A

Strata CTX
Summary

Set Maximum number
of B-channels reserved

Set Start Time for Time
Zone

Prg
No.

323

324

Program Name

Call By Call Service
Assignment

Call By Call Time Zone
Assignment

Trunk Group
*68-1

Calling Number ID

First
Parameter

1. Outgoing
2. Outgoing Status
Change

321

ISDN Calling Number
Identification
Assignment

321

ISDN Calling Number

322

CNIS Presentation
Special Number

FB
No.

Summary

Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone1

Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone2

Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone3

Start time of Time
Zone1

Start time of Time
Zone2

Start time of Time
Zone3

Default calling
Number

3. Incoming

*69-1

*69-2

CNIS

CNIS Special Number

First
Parameter

Station Port

Second
Parameter

Channel Group

Third
Parameter

Index Number

First
Parameter

Index Number

Second
Parameter

Calling Party Number

OLG Number

Source Type

Source Number

Calling Party Number

Verify Account Codes

506

Verified Account Code
Assignment

Whether set or no set
as Verified Account
Code

71-4

DNIS

N/A

DNIS and ANI Only
Lines Voice Mail ID
Assignments

309

Direct inward dialing
assignment

Voice Mail ID of DNIS

71-5

DNIS

N/A

DNIS Number Name
Display

309

Direct inward dialing
assignment

Destination Name of
DNIS

77-1

Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU

LED 20

Door Lock Time

104

System Timer
Assignment

Electric door lock
unlocking time

C-12

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

77-1

Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU.

Door Phone Busy
Signal/Door Lock
Assignments

79,
*79

Door Phone Ringing,
Door Phone to [DN]
Flashing Assignments

81-83

Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing

Parameter

LED 05

Summary

MOH/NT Relay

LED 07

Door Lock Relay/
External Page Relay

109

Program Name

External Music On Hold
Source Assignment

FB
No.

Summary

Set External Music
On Hold1 on ACTU/
BECU connected or
not connected

Set External Music
On Hold2 on BIOU1
connected or not
connected

Set External Music
On Hold3 on BIOU1
connected or not
connected

Set External Music
On Hold4 on BIOU1
connected or not
connected

Set External Music
On Hold5 on BIOU2
connected or not
connected

Set External Music
On Hold6 on BIOU2
connected or not
connected

set External Music On
Hold7 on BIOU2
connected or not
connected

508

Door Lock Control
Assignment

Set Relay Number of
BIOU

LED 08

Door Phone Ring On
External Page in Night
mode

576

Door Phone Ring On
External Paging In
Night Mode
Assignment

Set External Paging
Group for termination
in Night Mode

LED 16-19

Port Number/Door
Phone/Lock Control
Units

507

Door Phone
Assignment

DDCB Equipment
Number that connects
to Door Phone

LED 16-19

Port Number/Door
Phone/Lock Control
Units

507

Door Phone
Assignment

Deleted Door Phone
Number

LED 20

Door Phone Ring Count

507

Door Phone
Assignment

Ring Duration

LED
04,08,12,1
6

Door Lock Assignments

508

Door Lock Control
Assignment

DDCB Equipment
Number

LED 112(79)

Door Phone Number

507

(1)Destination Type of
DAY1

LED 112(79)

Door Phone Number

Door Phone
Assignment

(2)Destination
Number of DAY1

LED 01-20

Set Ringing Station at
DAY

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

310

Direct Inward
Termination
Assignment

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

77-2

Program Name

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

(1)Destination Type
(Day1)
(2)Destination

C-13

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata DK to Strata CTX

Strata DK
Prg
No.

Program Name

84-86

87-89

Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing

LED 01-20

Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing

LED 01-20

Legend:

C-14

Parameter

Strata CTX
Summary

Prg
No.

Set Ringing Station at
DAY2

310

Set Ringing Station at
NIGHT

310

Program Name

FB
No.

Direct Inward
Termination
Assignment

Summary
(1)Destination Type
(Day2)
(2)Destination
(1)Destination Type
(Night)
(2)Destination

N/A = Not Applicable

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX to Strata DK
The following numerical listing gives you the Strata CTX program numbers and titles and cross-reference
Strata DK programs that are similar.
Note Only programs having a similar Strata DK program have been listed in the table below.
Strata CTX
Prg
No.

Program Name

100

Card Slot Assignment

Card Type

Flexible PCB Cabinet
and Slot Assignments

Set PCB Code

102

Flexible Numbering
Plan Assignment

Feature Code

Flexible Access Code
Numbering

set Access Code

Automatic Busy
Redial

Station Class of
Service

LED 06

Automatic Busy
Redial(ABR) Access

Call Transfer With
Campon

10-1

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

LED 07

Ring Transfer of CO
Line Allowed

Changing DISA
Security Code

LED 10

Change DISA Security
Code

DND Override Calling Party

LED 17

Do Not Disturb(DND)
Override

DND Override - Called
Party

Executive Override

103

System Timer
Assignment

Summary

Prg
No.

Program Name

Station Class of
Service

Parameter

Summary

LED 18

Executive Override

Overridden party of
Executive Override

Station Class of
Service

LED 18

Executive and Privacy
Override Blocking
(Modem)

Privacy Override

Station Class of
Service

LED 18

Executive Override

Emergency Paging

Station Class of
Service

LED 10

All Call Page AllowedDigital and Electronic
Telephones

Tandem CO Line
Connection

Ground/Loop/Tie/DID
Line Options

Tandem Line
Connection

LCR feature

50-1

LCR Parameters

LED 01

Enable System LCR

Station Class of
Service

LED 08

Forced Account Code

LED 14

Verify Account Code

Forced Account Code

Account Code Verify

Can originate OCA

Station Class of
Service

LED 03

Off-hook Call
Announce(OCA)
Enabled (Receive)

Park timer

*37

Park Recall Timing

PARK TIME=Seconds

Valid call timer on
SMDR

60-2

SMDR Threshold Time

Timer to permit dial
input for the telephone
and trunk using DTMF

System Assignments,
Basic Timing

Code 9

K4RCU3/RRCS DTMF
Inter-digital Release
Time

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

104

Class of Service
Assignment

FB
No

Strata DK

C-15

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

104

105

109

C-16

Program Name

System Timer
Assignment

System Data
Assignment

External Music on
Hold Source
Assignment

FB
No

Strata DK
Summary

Door lock unlock timer

9+11 Judgment Timer

Destination busy
detection time when
recalling the analog
external line

Prg
No.

77-1

11-6

10-1

Program Name

Parameter

Summary

Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU

LED 20

Door Lock Time

E911 Interdigital Timer

LED 11

ABR Redial Time

LED 04

Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF)
Signal Time

Call Disconnect Timer

LED 16

Executive Override
Warning Tone

LED 05

Music-on-hold or Ring
Back Tone

LED 14

Privacy Override
Warning Tone

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

Dial sending time on
external line and
extension station

Automatic disconnect
timer

Warning tone of
Executive Override

Tones for the
transferred party after
the ringing transfer
takes place

Privacy Override/
Attendant Monitor
warning

Minimum Dial Digits of
Credit Card Calling

60-7

Credit Card Call Digit
Length

E911 Service

*11-0

E911/CAMA Trunk
Assignments

LED 11

CAMA Operation
Enabled/Disabled

Destination Restriction
Override by System
Speed Dial.

10-1

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

LED 10

System Speed Dial
Override, Toll
Restriction

Primary Clock Source

Set Primary Clock

Clock Source

Set Secondary Clock

10-2

ACD Timing
Assignments

System Assignments,
Part 2 of 3

Secondary Clock
Source

*42

E911 digits

*11-5

CAMA Digits Send on
911 Calls

N/A.

Set sending digits for
E911

Dial Pulse Make Ratio

10-1

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

LED 03

Dial Pulse (DP) Make
Ratio

External Music On
Hold1 on BCTU
External Music On
Hold2 on BIOU1

77-1

LED 05

MOH/NT Relay

Peripheral Options
(Door Phones) RSIU/
RSIS/RMDS, PIOU/
PIOUS/IMDU, PEPU

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

109

Program Name

External Music on
Hold Source
Assignment

FB
No

Strata DK
Prg
No.

Summary

External Music On
Hold3 on BIOU1.

External Music On
Hold4 on BIOU1.

External Music On
Hold5 on BIOU2

External Music On
Hold6 on BIOU2

External Music On
Hold7 on BIOU2

Program Name

Parameter

Summary

77-1

Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU

LED 05

MOH/NT Relay

Password
Assignment

Password

Software Check

Code 1, 2

Level 1 Security Code,
Level 2 Security Code

111

Destination
Restriction Level
Assignment

Credit Card Calling

0 + Credit Card Dialing
Option

LED 01-20

Restrict/Not Restrict

Message Waiting to
Voice Mail

Defining the Message
Center

N/A

Set Message Center

Station LCR Group
Number

LCR Station Group
Assignments

Second
Parameter

Set LCR Station Group

Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio / Speech

*62

Non-ISDN Station
Bearer Service

Bearer Service

Display DN

The same parameter
does not exist in DK424

CESID

*12

CESID Station
Information

N/A

Set CESID

Emergency call group
of extension terminal

*13

Station To CAMA Trunk
Group Assignment

N/A

E911 Station CAMA
Trunk Number

Message Waiting
Center Port for Voice
Mail Port

Defining the Message
Center

LED 05-08

Voice Mail (VM)
Groups 1-4

Permission to Change
of Travelling Class
Override Code

Station Class of
Service

LED 16

Change Toll Restriction
Travelling Class Code

Change System
Speed Dial

Station Class of
Service

LED 05

System Speed Dial
(SSD) (Only Port 000
can change SSD)

Automatic OCA

Station Class of
Service

LED 07

Off-hook Call
Announce (OCA)
Automatic

LCR Group Number

LCR Station Group
Assignments

Second
Parameter

Set LCR Station Group

CESID

*12

CESID Station
Information

N/A

Set CESID

Change System
Speed Dial

Station Class of
Service

LED 05

Speed Dial (Only Port
000 can change SSD)

200

202

Station Assignment

ISDN Basic Station
Assignment

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

110

C-17

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

204

205

206

C-18

Program Name

FB
No

Phantom DN
Parameter
Assignment

Summary

Program Name

Parameter

Summary

Feature Key Pattern

Digital and Electronic
Telephone Keystrip
Type

N/A

The appropriate code

Number of Add-on
Modules

*29

Add-on Modules Button
Assignments

1,2

The number of Add-on
Modules

Tone first / Voice first
signaling

10-1

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

LED 01

Tone First/Voice First

Type of OCA

Station Class of
Service

LED 14

Off-hook Call
Announce (OCA)
Handset or Speaker

Microphone ON or
OFF when a hands
free call is started

Station Class of
Service

LED 01

Handsfree Disabled

Whether to ring a
splash tone when a
hands free call is
started.

Station Class of
Service

LED 02

Handsfree No Warning

Activate External
Ringing Repeat
(Enable/Disable)

10-1

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

LED 06

CO Line Repeat
Ringing

Off hook preference
type

Automatic Preference

N/A

set Automatic
Preference type

Set Continuous DTMF

Station Class of
Service

LED 17

Continuous DTMF
Tones Off

Set Microphone initial
value

Station Class of
Service

LED 03

Microphone Button On
at Start of Call

Enable/Disable the
microphone

Station Class of
Service

LED 02

Mic Button - Locked/
Momentary

Ring Over Busy
repetition timers

Station Class of
Service

LED 11

Busy Override (BOV)
Tone

Overflow destination
of attendant

58-5

Attendant Console
Overflow Destination
Assignments

Second
Parameter

Overflow Destination

1-20

Flexible Button
Assignments

LED 01-20

Set Feature

Owner PDN

*33

[PhDN] Owner
Telephone Assignment

N/A

Set Owner Station
Logical Port No.

Tone first / Voice first
signaling

10-1

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

LED 01

Tone First/Voice First

Message Waiting
Center Port for Voice
Mail Port

Station Class of
Service

LED 05-08

Voice Mail (VM)
Groups 1-4

DKT Data
Assignment

Station Feature Key
Assignment

Strata DK
Prg
No.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

208

Program Name

Station Timer
Assignment

FB
No

Strata DK
Summary

Prg
No.

Program Name

Parameter

Summary

Automatic Busy
Redial’s Retry Count
when Outgoing Call

10-1

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

LED 12

Automatic Busy Redial
(ABR) Cycles

Automatic Busy
Redial’s Recall Timer

10-1

System Assignments,
Part 1 of 3

LED 11

ABR Redial Time

On-hold recall timer

Hold Recall Timing

N/A

Set Recall Timing

No Answer Timer of
Ringing Transfer

Ring Transfer (Campon) Recall Time

N/A

Set Ring Transfer
Recall Time

Station Hunting
Group Assignment

Hunt Method

[PDN]/[PhDN]Station
Hunting

N/A

210

Call Pickup Group
Assignment

1~20

Pickup Group 1~20

*31

Group Pick up
Assignments

LED 01~20

Pickup Group 1~20

1-20

*29

Add-on Modules Button
Assignments

LED 01-20

Set Feature Code

DSS1 card slot
position

DSS2 card slot
position

DSS3 card slot
position

DSS4 card slot
position

DSS Console/
Attendant Telephone
Assignments

N/A

Set DSS Console

DSS Console and
Number Button
Assignments

LED 01-20

Set Feature Code

213

214

215

Add on Module Key
Assignment

DSS Console
Assignment

DSS Key Assignment

DSS5 card slot
position

DSS6 card slot
position

DSS7 card slot
position

DSS8 card slot
position

1-60

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

209

C-19

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

216

Program Name

Emergency Ring
Down Assignment

217

ISDN Individual
Station Data
Assignment

218

Station Hunting
Group Members
Assignment

300

Trunk Assignment

FB
No
2
3

Strata DK
Summary
Emergency Ring
Down Timer setting of
an originating terminal

Prg
No.

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

Summary

System Assignments,
Basic Timing

N/A

Standard Telephone
Ring Down Timer

*38

Standard Telephone
Ring-Down Destination

N/A

Set Destination Port
No.

*13

Station To CAMA Trunk
Group Assignment

N/A

E911 Station CAMA
Trunk Number

[PDN]/[PhDN] Station
Hunting

N/A

Set Station Hunting
member

Assign CO Line Groups

LED 01-20

Set CO Line

Emergency call group
of extension terminal

Hunting Group
Member DN

DN set type

Incoming Line Group
Assignment

Outgoing Line Group
Assignment

Dial Mode

Ground/Loop/Tie/DID
Line Options

Code 1
Code 2

CO/DID/Tie Line Signal
CO/DID/Tie Dial Pulse
Rate

Start Method

DID/Tie Line Options

LED 02

Wink/Immediate

10-2

System Assignments,
Part 2 of 3

LED 11, 20

Dual-tone MultiFrequency (DTMF)
Tone, Padded Tone
Return

*66-1

Channel Group
Number Parameters

Second
Parameter

Set Channel Group No.

*43-3

D-Channel Control and
NFAS Assignments

N/A

Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Group Supported

LED 01

“Set “”Speech”

LED 01

“Set “”Speech”“

LED 02

"Set ""3.1 kHz
Audio”Audio”"

(2) Channel identifier
number slot map/
channel type for
3.1kHz Audio.

LED 02

"Set ""3.1 kHz Audio""

(1) Bearer Capability
unrestricted digital
Information 64kbps.

LED 03

"Set ""64 kbps. Data""

DTMF Back Tone

Create Channel
Group Number

Set ILG

Set OLG

PSTN ID Number

D channel position.

(2) Channel identifier
number slot map/
channel type for
Speech
(1) Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio.

C-20

Parameter

12-1

(1) Bearer Capability
Speech.
302

Program Name

*67-2

Network PRI Interface
PRI Interface ID Code
D-Channel Circuit No.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

302

304

306

ISDN Primary Trunk
Assignment

Incoming Line Group
Assignment

Outgoing Line Group
Assignment

Trunk Timer
Assignment

Strata DK
Summary

Prg
No.

(2) Channel identifier
number slot map/
channel type for
unrestricted digital
Information 64kHz

(1) Bearer Capability
unrestricted digital
Information 56kbps.

(2) Channel identifier
number slot map,
channel type for
unrestricted digital
Information 56kHz

T-WAIT Timer

10-4

Analog/ISDN Type

Program Name

Parameter

Summary

LED 03

"Set ""64 kbps. Data""

LED 04

"Set ""56 kbps. Data""

LED 04

"Set ""56 kbps. Data""

ACD/ISDN Parameters

LED 11

PRI ISDN Timer

*16

ISDN Trunk Group
Type Assignment

N/A

Set Trunk Group Type

Number of DID Digits
received from CO

*64-2

Number of DID/DNIS
Digits for Trunk Groups

Third
Parameter

Number of DID
Incoming Call Digits
per Trunk Group

Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio or
Speech

*61

Analog Trunk Service
for ISDN

Bearer Service

Automatic Campon

LED 03

DID Camp-on/Busy

DID/Tie Line Options

LED 04

DID/Tie Second Dial
Tone Option

*67-2

Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Group Supported

Called Dial Tone send

Analog/ISDN Type

*16

ISDN Trunk Group
Type Assignment

N/A

Set Trunk Group Type

Bearer Capability
3.1kHzAudio / Speech

*61

Analog Trunk Service
for ISDN

Bearer Service

Set Trunk forced
Account Code

Ground/LOOP/Tie/DID
Line Options

Code 7

Forced Account Code

Detect Automatic
Release / Calling
Party Control, and
detection time

Ground/LOOP/Tie/DID
Line Options

Code 4

Automatic Release
Time

Code 4

Flashing Timing

System Assignments,
Basic Timing

Code 4

Flashing Timing

Code 5

Pause After Flash

N/A

Set DID Extension
Number

Short Flash Time

Long Flash Time

Pause time after flash

(1) Destination Type
(Day1,audio/speech)
(2) Destination

309

Direct Inward Dialing
Assignment

(1) Destination Type
(Day2,audio/speech)
(2) Destination

*09

[PDN], [PhDN], DH,
ACD or Modem DID
Ext. Assignments

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

308

Program Name

FB
No

(1) Destination Type
(Night,audio/speech)
(2) Destination

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

C-21

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

Program Name

FB
No
8

Strata DK
Summary

Prg
No.

Program Name

Parameter

Summary

(1) Destination Type
(Day1,data)
(2) Destination

(1) Destination Type
(Day2,data)

*09

[PDN], [PhDN], DH,
ACD or Modem DID
Ext. Assignments

N/A

Set DID Extension
Number

(2) Destination
309

Direct Inward Dialing
Assignment

(1) Destination Type
(Night,data)
(2) Destination

Voice Mail ID of DNIS

71-4

DNIS

N/A

DNIS and ANI Only
Lines Voice Mail ID
Assignments

Destination Name of
DNIS

71-5

DNIS

N/A

DNIS Number Name
Display

81-83

Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing

LED 01-20

Set Ringing Station at
DAY

84-86

Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing

LED 01-20

Set Ringing Station at
DAY2

87-89

Ground/LOOP Start/
CO Line Station
Ringing

LED 01-20

Set Ringing Station at
NIGHT

(1) Destination Type
(Day1)
(2) Destination

310

Direct Inward
Termination
Assignment

(1) Destination Type
(Day2)
(2) Destination

(1) Destination Type
(Night)
(2) Destination

313

315

316

317

C-22

Caller ID Assignment

T1 Trunk Card Data
Assignment

DCH Shared ISDN
Primary Trunk
Assignment

ISDN Basic Trunk
Assignment

Class Equipment
Number

*50

Caller ID Circuit
Assignments to CO
Line PCBs

N/A

Set Caller ID circuit
number

Coding Format

*41-1

T1 Span Frame and
Line Code
Assignments

LED 02

T1 Span Line Code
Assignments

Set frame format

*41-1

T1 Span Frame and
Line Code
Assignments

LED 01

T1 Span Framing
Assignments

Set receive PAD value

*41-4

T1 Span Receive Level
Pad Assignments

N/A

Set Receive Pad

Set send PAD value

*41-3

T1 Span Transmit
Level Pad Assignments

N/A

Set Transmit Pad

I/f ID Number

*43-3

D-Channel Control and
NFAS Assignments

N/A

Network PRI Interface
Assignment

BRI Equipment
Number

*60

BRI Line/Station
Operation Assignment

LED 01-04

Set TE/NT

SPID Initialize Type

Display for ISDN SPID
Initialize Type

*44

N/A

SPID Value1

BRI Service Profile
Identifier (SPID)
Parameters

SPID Type,
SPID Value

SPID Value2

T-WAIT

10-4

ACD/ISDN Parameters

LED 12

BRI T-WAIT Timer

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

Program Name

321

ISDN Calling Number
Identification
Assignment

FB
No
1

Strata DK
Summary
Default calling
Number

Prg
No.
*68-2

Program Name
Outbound CNIS
Parameters

Parameter
N/A

Summary
Set CPN
Trunk Group

*68-1
321

ISDN Calling Number
Identification
Assignment

322

323

Call by Call Service
Assignment

First
Parameter

OLG Number

1. Outgoing
2. Outgoing Status
Change
3. Incoming

*69-1

CNIS Presentation
Special Number

Calling Number ID

CNIS

First
Parameter

Station Port

Second
Parameter

Channel Group

First
Parameter

Index Number

Second
Parameter

Calling Party Number

Source Type

Source Number

Calling Party Number

Kind of Line Service

*66-3

Channel Group/Trunk
Parameters

LED 03-06

Trunk Group Type

Facility code Value

*66-2

Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID

N/A

Set Facility Code

Service Parameters

*66-2

Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID

N/A

Set Service
Parameters

Network ID

*66-4

Call-by-Call Trunk
Group Codes and
Network ID

N/A

Set Network ID Code

Incoming Line Group

*66-1

Channel Group
Number Parameters

N/A

Set Channel Group No.

Outgoing Line Group

*66-1

Channel Group
Number Parameters

N/A

Set Channel Group No.

Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone1

*67-3

Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Groups

N/A

Set Minimum number
of B-channels reserved

Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone1

*67-4

ISDN Trunk Groups
Maximum Channel
Reservation

N/A

Set Maximum number
of B-channels reserved

Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone2

*67-3

Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Groups

N/A

Set Minimum number
of B-channels reserved

Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone2

*67-4

ISDN Trunk Groups
Maximum Channel
Reservation

N/A

Set Maximum number
of B-channels reserved

Minimum number of
Bch in Time Zone3

*67-3

Call Types for ISDN
Trunk Groups

N/A

Set Minimum number
of B-channels reserved

Maximum number of
Bch in Time Zone3

*67-4

ISDN Trunk Groups
Maximum Channel
Reservation

N/A

Set Maximum number
of B-channels reserved

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

*69-2

CNIS Special Number

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

C-23

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

324

400

404

Program Name

Call by Call Time
Zone Assignment

Emergency Call
Destination
Assignment

Attendant Group
Assignment

FB
No

502

Summary

Start time of Time
Zone1

Start time of Time
Zone2

Start time of Time
Zone3

Program Name

507

Verified Account
Code Assignment

Door Phone
Assignment

N/A

Set Start Time for Time
Zone

Called Number of
Emergency Call(DN,
Pilot Number,Private
Number)

*11-8

911 Special [DN]
Notification
Assignments

N/A

Set [PDN],[PhDN] port
number

Overflow Timer

58-1

DK424 Attendant
Console Series

First
Parameter

Attendant Console
Overflow Timer

Overflow destination
of attendant group

58-5

DK424 Attendant
Console Series

Second
Parameter

Attendant Console
Overflow Destination
Assignment

LED 01

Page Group A

LED 02

Page Group B

LED 03

Page Group C

LED 04

Page Group D

LED 05

Page Group E

LED 06

Page Group F

LED 07

Page Group G

Paging Group Number

*30

Telephone Group Page
Assignments

510

C-24

Page Group H

LED 10

All Call Page Allowed

All Page Group

Whether set or no set
as Verified Account
Code

Verify Account Codes

Verify Count Codes

DDCB Equipment
Number which
connects to Door
phone

77-1

Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU

LED 16-19

Port Number/Door
Phone/Lock Control
Units

Ring Duration

77-2

Door Phone Busy
Signal/Door Lock
Assignments

LED 20

Door Phone Ring
Count

"79, *79

Door Phone Ringing,
Door Phone to [DN]
Flashing Assignments

LED 112(79)

-Door Phone Number

LED 07

Door Lock Relay/
External Page Relay

(1) Destination Type of
DAY1
(2) Destination
Number of DAY1

Set Relay Number of
BIOU

77-1

Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU

DDCB Equipment
Number

77-2

Door Phone Busy
Signal/Door Lock
Assignments

LED
04,08,12,16

Door Lock
Assignments

COS Override Code

44-1-8

Toll Restriction/
Traveling Class
Override Codes

Toll Restriction Code

Door Lock Control
Assignment

Class of Service
Override Assignment

LED 08
Station Class of
Service

508

Summary

Multiple Time Zone
Settings

506

Parameter

*67-5

4
Terminal Paging
Group Assignment

Strata DK
Prg
No.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.
512

513

Program Name
SMDR for System
Assignment

FB
No

Strata DK
Summary

Caller ID field
indication

ANI field indicate

Prg
No.

Program Name

60-1

SMDR Data Output
Options

Parameter

Summary

LED 01

Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port

LED 01

Caller ID, ANI and
DNIS data will be sent
from the system SMDR
port

DNIS field indication

60-1

SMDR Data Output
Options

Output of SMDR
record for the
incoming call

60-3

SMDR Incoming/
Outgoing Calls

SMDR Output when a
call is completed

SMDR for ILG
Assignment

514

SMDR for OLG
Assignment

Output of SMDR
record for the outgoing
call

60-3

SMDR Incoming/
Outgoing Calls

SMDR Output when a
call is completed

520

LCR parameters
Assignment

Local Area Code

50-2

LCR Home Area Code

Set Home Area Code

First
parameter

LCR Plan

select Time zone

Second
parameter

Schedule

523

524

526

LCR Route Table to
Route Definition
Assignment

LCR Route Definition
Table Assignment

LCR Digit
Modification Table
Assignment

LCR Schedule
Assignments for LCR
Plans

Station LCR Group
Number

Third
parameter

LCR Station Group
Number

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.1

Fourth
parameter

Route Definition
Numbers (First Pick)

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.2

Fourth
parameter

Route Definition
Numbers (Second
Pick)

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.3

Fourth
parameter

Route Definition
Numbers (Third Pick)

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.4

Fifth
parameter

Route Definition
Numbers (Fourth Pick)

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.5

LCR Route Definition
Index - priority No.6

LCR Plan Number

First
parameter

CO Line Group

Outgoing Line Group Number

Second
parameter

Route Definition
Number

Digit Modification
Index

LCR Modified Digits
Table

Modified Digits Table

Digits to be deleted

55-0

Delete Number of
Digits From the Front of
Dialed

Second
parameter

Quantity of Digits

Add Leading Digits

55-1

Add Digits Before and/
or After the Dialed
Number

Third
parameter

Digits added

Add Trailing Digits

55-2

Add Digits Before and/
or After the Dialed
Number

Third
parameter

Digits added

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

LCR Schedule
Assignments for LCR
Plans

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

525

LCR Route Plan
Schedule Assignment

C-25

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

Program Name

529

LCR Route Plan
Schedule Table Time
Zone Assignment

530

533

Toll Restriction/LCR
screening Table
Assignment

Toll Restriction Table
Assignment

FB
No

Strata DK
Summary

LCR select Time zone

Start time for Time
Zone

Toll Restriction / LCR
table Code(set / no
set)

Toll Restriction Action

Least Cost Routing
Action

Dial String

Add/Delete Codes

Exception Dial String

Add/Delete codes

Prg
No.

Program Name

Parameter

Summary

LCR Schedule
Assignments for LCR
Plans

Fourth
parameter

Start Time

*45-2
*45-3

LCR/Toll Restriction
Bypass for Special
Numbers that Do Not
Begin with */#
LCR/Toll Restriction
Bypass For Special
Numbers that Begin
with */#

Digit Code
Digit String

Third
parameter

Area Codes

Third
parameter

Area Codes

Toll Restriction
Exception Office Codes
Assigned by Area
Codes

Office Codes

14-6

After Shift Service
Destination

Second
parameter

Destination

46-2
46-6

Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Area
Codes by Class
Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Local
Office Codes Assigned
by Class

534

Exceptional Toll
Restriction Table
Assignment

540

ACD Pilot DN
Assignment

550

Enhanced 911
Emergency Call
Group Assignment

1-8

OLG associated with
Emergency Call
Group Number

*11-2

CAMA Trunk Group
Hunting Assignment

Second
parameter

Hunt to CAMA Trunk
Group

570

Account Code Digit
Length Assignment

Forced/Voluntary
Account Code Verified
Digit Length

60-4

Forced/Voluntary
Account Code Digit
Length

77-1

Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU

LED 16-19

Port Number/Door
Phone/Lock Control
Units

77-1

Peripheral
Options(Door Phones)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS,
PIOU/PIOUS/IMDU,
PEPU

LED 08

Door Phone Ring On
External Page in Night
mode.

573

Door Phone Delete

576

Door Phone Ring on
External Paging in
Night Mode
Assignment

C-26

(1) After Shift Forward
Type
(2) After Shift Forward
Destination

Deleted Door Phone
Number

Set External Paging
Group for termination
in Night Mode

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

Strata CTX
Prg
No.

579

Program Name

Voice Mail Data for
System Assignment

FB
No

Strata DK
Summary

Setting of output of
Message Desk No

Setting of output of
Class, ANI and DNIS
information

Setting of caller
number digits sent to
VM unit

Set Blank Number for
VM unit

Setting of auto cancel
of VM and MW

Prg
No.

580

Voice Mail Data for
System Assignment

Legend:

Whether send A,D
tone or not send for
Voice Mail

Whether Send Only B
Tone, Not Send, or B
Tone and Extension
Number for Voice Mail

Whether send End to
End Signal or not
send for Voice Mail
Port

Parameter

Summary

LED 20

VM SMDI Message
desk Number

LED 08

Call ID / Automatic
Number ID

LED 10-13

SMDI Station Number
Digit Length

10-3

LED 09

SMDI Bellcore
Standard Version

LED 04

Voice Mail Message
Waiting Cancel Via Dial
#64/Automatic

LED 06

Voice Mail
Identification Code,
Dual Multi-frequency
(DTMF) Signal Time

LED 15

Toshiba Stratagy,
Stratagy DK and/or VP
Integration (A Tone/D
Tone)

10-3
System Assignments,
Part 3 of 3

10
Dial sending time at
Voice Mail port

Program Name

System Assignments,
Part 2 of 3

Station Class of
Service

LED 19, 20

LED 17

19:Toshiba Stratagy/
Stratagy DK/VP (B No
Station)
20:Toshiba Stratagy/
VP (B+Station
Number)
End-to-end Signal RCV
(VM)

N/A = Not Applicable

Strata CTX/DK Program
Cross-reference

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

C-27

Strata CTX/DK Program Cross-reference
Strata CTX to Strata DK

C-28

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets

System
Card Assignment Record Sheets
The following record sheets are designed for both CTX WinAdmin and button programming users. PCB
Code and Options are provided for Button Programmers only.
CTX670 Base Cabinet 1: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number

B101

B102

BECU

BBCU

n/a

FB02

n/a

FB03

n/a

FB04

PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)

Options

n/a

Line/Channel Number

n/a

Port Station Number

n/a

S101

S102

S103

S104

S105

S106

S107

S108

S_09

S_10

S_09

S_10

Notes
• The designated BECU slot is B101 and the BBCU slot is B102.

•

Slot S101 is designated for PDKU, BDKU or BDKU/BDKS.

CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 2: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number

S_01

S_02

S_03

S_04

S_05

S_06

S_07

S_08

PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options

FB03
FB04

Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number

CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 3: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number

S_01

S_02

S_03

S_04

S_05

S_06

S_07

S_08

PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)

FB03
FB04

Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets

FB02
Options

D-1

Record Sheets
System

CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 5: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number

S_01

S_02

S_03

S_04

S_05

S_06

S_07

S_08

S_09

S_10

S_09

S_10

S_09

S_10

PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options

FB03
FB04

Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number

CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 6: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number

S_01

S_02

S_03

S_04

S_05

S_06

S_07

S_08

PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options

FB03
FB04

Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number

CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 7: Location – Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number

S_01

S_02

S_03

S_04

S_05

S_06

S_07

S_08

PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options

FB03
FB04

Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number

Notes

• RDTU, RPTU and RWIU (up to 16 handsets) allowed slots are: S_01, S_03, S_05 and S_07. The
adjacent slot must be vacant to reach maximum capacity.
• RWIU slots for up to 32 handsets are S105 and S_07. Up to three adjacent slots must be vacant to reach
maximum capacity.
• All Base Cabinet slots support Speaker OCA. Speaker OCA is supported in slots S_01~S_06 for
Expansion Cabinets.

D-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
System

Card Assignment Record Sheet – Strata CTX 100
CTX100: Location – Local/Remote ___________
CTX100 Base Cabinet
Slot Number

S_01

S_02

S_03

CTX 100 Expansion Cabinet
S_04

S_05

S_06

S_07

S_08

PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
Options

FB02
FB03
FB04

Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
AMDS
AETS
BSIS
ASTU

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-3

Record Sheets
System

COS Record Sheet
COS Assignment Code:_________
Service Name

Enable Disable

Service Name

Auto Busy Redial

DN Retrieve Call Pickup

Call Forward Override

Handsfree Override

Call Transfer w/ Camp-on

Privacy Override

Change DISA Codes

Invoke Emerg Page1

DND Override - Calling Party

Join Feature

DND Override - Called Party

Through Dialing

Do Not Disturb

Tandem CO Connection

Remote Set/Reset DND

Day/Night Control

Executive Override

Ext BGM Control

Executive Override Allowed

LCR Feature

Offhook Camp-on

Individual Trunk Access

Group Pickup

Trunk Access Allowed

Directed Station Pickup

Forced Account Codes

Directed Group Call Pickup

Verified Account Codes

Directed DN Call Pickup

Allow Short Hook Flash

Ext Call Pickup

Allow Long Hook Flash

Directed CO Call Pickup

Allow Hook Flash

Remote Retrieve Call Pickup

Can Originate OCA

Enable Disable

1. Not used in Release 1.

D-4

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
System

System Data Record Sheet
Service Name

Values

01 Executive Override

Service Name

02 Station MOH Source

16 Multi-Conference

03 Ring Transfer Tone

17 Call Number Display

04 Transfer Privacy

Values

15 COS Override Code

Not Used

18 Night Bell Relay

05 Privacy Override

19 Display Preference

06 Credit Card Code

20 Transit Counter

07 Credit Card Digits

21 Primary Clock

08 E911 Service

22 Secondary Clock

09 DR Override by SSD

23 Call History Prefix 1

10 Auto Station Release

24 Emergency Digits Sent

11 ISDN SPID

25 DP Make Ratio

12 Night Mode Relay

26 Call Button Jumping

13 BGM External Paging

14 Lost Call Destination

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-5

Record Sheets
System

System Call Forward Record Sheets
00 SCF
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

D-6

Program 500 Values
03
04
01 Call Type 02 Period
TelStatus Destination 1

05
Destination 2

Program 504 Values
01
TelephoneStatus

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
System

System Speed Dial Record Sheet
00 Speed
Dial Bin

01 Number

02 Name

00 Speed
Dial Bin

01 Number

02 Name

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-7

Record Sheets
System

Day/Night Mode Record Sheet
Program 112 Values
Calender Day

01 Working Day Type

Program 106 Values
Work Day, Non-Work Day or
Holiday

Day
01 Monday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday
07 Sunday

Program 113 Values
Type of Day

Day 1
Mode

Day 2
Mode

Night
Mode

Work Day
Non-Work Day
Holiday

D-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
System

SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments

Service Name

Values
SMDR
SMDI

00 Logical Device Number

LAN
BLF
DSS

01 Device Connection

RS232
LAN
RS232

Device Port Number

LAN
BLF
DSS

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-9

Record Sheets
System

BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup

Service Name

Values

00 BSIS Port (1~4)
01 Port Speed
02 Port Parity
03 Data Bits
04 Flow Control
05 Wait Timer

D-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Station

Station
Basic Station Record Sheets
Primary DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
02 Station Type

08 QPL

03 Circuit Type
04 COS

05 DRL

06 FRL

Day 1

17 Emerg Call Group

31 Network COS

Day 2

18 Remote CF/DND PW

32 Auto OCA

Night

19 VMID Code SMDI

33 Originate OCA

Day 1

07 LCR Group

20 MW to VM Port

34 RSTU Supervision

Day 2

09 Station Name

23 Travel COS Change

35 Station Sp Dial Bins

Night

10 Call Waiting Tone

24 TGAC Override

Day 1

11 Dialing Progress Tone

25 Service Tones

Day 2

12 System Call Forward

26 CW and ROB Tone

Night

13 Call Pickup

27 Name Display

Day 1

14 Bearer Capability

28 Door over DND

Day 2

15 Display DN

29 Emerg Ringdown

Night

16 CESID

30 Chg Sys Speed

Primary DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
02 Station Type

08 QPL

03 Circuit Type
04 COS

05 DRL

06 FRL

Day 1

17 Emerg Call Group

31 Network COS

Day 2

18 Remote CF/DND PW

32 Auto OCA

Night

19 VMID Code SMDI

33 Originate OCA

Day 1

07 LCR Group

20 MW to VM Port

34 RSTU Supervision

Day 2

09 Station Name

23 Travel COS Change

35 Station Sp Dial Bins

Night

10 Call Waiting Tone

24 TGAC Override

Day 1

11 Dialing Progress Tone

25 Service Tones

Day 2

12 System Call Forward

26 CW and ROB Tone

Night

13 Call Pickup

27 Name Display

Day 1

14 Bearer Capability

28 Door over DND

Day 2

15 Display DN

29 Emerg Ringdown

Night

16 CESID

30 Chg Sys Speed

Primary DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
02 Station Type

08 QPL

03 Circuit Type
04 COS

05 DRL

06 FRL

Day 1

17 Emerg Call Group

31 Network COS

Day 2

18 Remote CF/DND PW

32 Auto OCA

Night

19 VMID Code SMDI

33 Originate OCA

Day 1

07 LCR Group

20 MW to VM Port

34 RSTU Supervision

Day 2

09 Station Name

23 Travel COS Change

35 Station Sp Dial Bins

Night

10 Call Waiting Tone

24 TGAC Override

Day 1

11 Dialing Progress Tone

25 Service Tones

Day 2

12 System Call Forward

26 CW and ROB Tone

Night

13 Call Pickup

27 Name Display

Day 1

14 Bearer Capability

28 Door over DND

Day 2

15 Display DN

29 Emerg Ringdown

Night

16 CESID

30 Chg Sys Speed

Primary DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
02 Station Type

08 QPL

03 Circuit Type
04 COS

06 FRL

17 Emerg Call Group

31 Network COS

Day 2

18 Remote CF/DND PW

32 Auto OCA

Night

19 VMID Code SMDI

33 Originate OCA

Day 1

07 LCR Group

20 MW to VM Port

34 RSTU Supervision

Day 2

09 Station Name

23 Travel COS Change

35 Station Sp Dial Bins

Night

10 Call Waiting Tone

24 TGAC Override

Day 1

11 Dialing Progress Tone

25 Service Tones

Day 2

12 System Call Forward

26 CW and ROB Tone

Night

13 Call Pickup

27 Name Display

Day 1

14 Bearer Capability

28 Door over DND

Day 2

15 Display DN

29 Emerg Ringdown

Night

16 CESID

30 Chg Sys Speed

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets

05 DRL

Day 1

D-11

Record Sheets
Station

DKT Parameters Record Sheet
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Station Type

11 Ext. Ring Repeat

19 Continuous DTMF

27 Ring Over Busy Cycles

02 Key Strip Pattern

12 Not Used

20 Display Language

28 Attd. Overflow Dest.

03 Key Strip Type

13 Off Hook Line Preference

21 Adapter

29 Trunk Test and Verify

04 Add-on Modules

14 PDN/Line Preference

22 Blind Transfer

30 Auto Line Hold

05 Tone/Voice First

15 Ringing Preference.

23 Mail Box Selection

06 OCA Type

16 Text Message Display

24 MIC Init. Value

09 Handsfree MIC

17 Call History Memory

25 Microphone

10 Handsfree Tone

18 DTMF Back Tone

26 Speaker Mode Tones

01 Station Type

11 Ext. Ring Repeat

19 Continuous DTMF

27 Ring Over Busy Cycles

02 Key Strip Pattern

12 Not Used

20 Display Language

28 Attd. Overflow Dest.

03 Key Strip Type

13 Off Hook Line Preference

21 Adapter

29 Trunk Test and Verify

04 Add-on Modules

14 PDN/Line Preference

22 Blind Transfer

30 Auto Line Hold

05 Tone/Voice First

15 Ringing Preference.

23 Mail Box Selection

06 OCA Type

16 Text Message Display

24 MIC Init. Value

09 Handsfree MIC

17 Call History Memory

25 Microphone

10 Handsfree Tone

18 DTMF Back Tone

26 Speaker Mode Tones

01 Station Type

11 Ext. Ring Repeat

19 Continuous DTMF

27 Ring Over Busy Cycles

02 Key Strip Pattern

12 Not Used

20 Display Language

28 Attd. Overflow Dest.

03 Key Strip Type

13 Off Hook Line Preference

21 Adapter

29 Trunk Test and Verify

04 Add-on Modules

14 PDN/Line Preference

22 Blind Transfer

30 Auto Line Hold

05 Tone/Voice First

15 Ringing Preference.

23 Mail Box Selection

06 OCA Type

16 Text Message Display

24 MIC Init. Value

09 Handsfree MIC

17 Call History Memory

25 Microphone

10 Handsfree Tone

18 DTMF Back Tone

26 Speaker Mode Tones

Primary DN: _____________________

Primary DN: _____________________
01 Station Type

11 Ext. Ring Repeat

19 Continuous DTMF

27 Ring Over Busy Cycles

02 Key Strip Pattern

12 Not Used

20 Display Language

28 Attd. Overflow Dest.

03 Key Strip Type

13 Off Hook Line Preference

21 Adapter

29 Trunk Test and Verify

04 Add-on Modules

14 PDN/Line Preference

22 Blind Transfer

30 Auto Line Hold

05 Tone/Voice First

15 Ringing Preference.

23 Mail Box Selection

06 OCA Type

16 Text Message Display

24 MIC Init. Value

09 Handsfree MIC

17 Call History Memory

25 Microphone

10 Handsfree Tone

18 DTMF Back Tone

26 Speaker Mode Tones

01 Station Type

11 Ext. Ring Repeat

19 Continuous DTMF

27 Ring Over Busy Cycles

02 Key Strip Pattern

12 Not Used

20 Display Language

28 Attd. Overflow Dest.

03 Key Strip Type

13 Off Hook Line Preference

21 Adapter

29 Trunk Test and Verify

04 Add-on Modules

14 PDN/Line Preference

22 Blind Transfer

30 Auto Line Hold

05 Tone/Voice First

15 Ringing Preference.

23 Mail Box Selection

06 OCA Type

16 Text Message Display

24 MIC Init. Value

09 Handsfree MIC

17 Call History Memory

25 Microphone

10 Handsfree Tone

18 DTMF Back Tone

26 Speaker Mode Tones

01 Station Type

11 Ext. Ring Repeat

19 Continuous DTMF

27 Ring Over Busy Cycles

02 Key Strip Pattern

12 Not Used

20 Display Language

28 Attd. Overflow Dest.

03 Key Strip Type

13 Off Hook Line Preference

21 Adapter

29 Trunk Test and Verify

04 Add-on Modules

14 PDN/Line Preference

22 Blind Transfer

30 Auto Line Hold

05 Tone/Voice First

15 Ringing Preference.

23 Mail Box Selection

06 OCA Type

16 Text Message Display

24 MIC Init. Value

09 Handsfree MIC

17 Call History Memory

25 Microphone

10 Handsfree Tone

18 DTMF Back Tone

26 Speaker Mode Tones

Primary DN: _____________________

D-12

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Station

Feature Button Record Sheet
PDN

Button
Number

Button
Name

Button
Code

PDN,
Phantom DN,
CO, GCO, PL

Sub-parameter Settings
1

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-13

Record Sheets
Station

Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button Telephones
PDN No. ______

10
20

❏
❏

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Button

10
20

❏
❏

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. ______

10
20

❏
❏

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. ______

10
20

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

10
20

❏
❏

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Button

PDN No. ______

10
20

❏
❏

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. ______

10
20

❏
❏

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. ______

10
20

Button

Code

Button

Code

❏
❏

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Button

PDN No. ______

10
20

❏
❏

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. ______

10
20

❏
❏

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Code

Button

Code

Button

❏
❏

Button

10
20

DSS ❏
ADM ❏
Code

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Code

PDN No. ______

❏
❏

Location:
Code

PDN No. ______

D-14

PDN No. ______

10
20

❏
❏

Code

DSS ❏
ADM ❏

Location:
Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Station

Record Sheets for the DKT3014
PDN No. _______

PDN No. _______

Location:

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. _______
Location:

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. _______

Location:

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. _______
Location:

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. _______

Location:

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Location:
Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. _______

Location:

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Location:
Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

PDN No. _______

Location:

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

PDN No. _______
Location:

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Button

Code

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Code

PDN No. _______

Button

Code

PDN No. _______

Button

Code

D-15

Record Sheets
Station

Phantom DN Record Sheet
02 Tone/Voice 1st
Phantom DN

D-16

01 Owned PDN

Tone

Voice

04 Display DN

05 System
Call Forward

Voice Mail
06 ID

09 Message
Center

10 User Name

11 Display
Name

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Station

Hunt Group Record Sheet
Program 209 Values
Group
Number

01 Hunt
Method
Dist Circ

02 Pilot
Number

04 Number to
Display

Program 218 Values
05 Pilot
No.
SCFwd

06
07 DHG
Multiple
Auto
DN Hunt Camp-on

01 Hunt
Order

02 DN

03 DN Set
Type
Mod

Ins

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-17

Record Sheets
Station

Station Data Record Sheets
06

1st
Inter
digit

2nd
Inter
digit

Ring
Xfer
Ans

D-18

Dest

Ring
down
Timer

Emerg
Ring
down

03
03

Prime
DN

Program 502 Values (Enter a Check to turn “ON”)

Program 216 Values

03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

ABR
ABR
Hold
Retry
Recall Recall
Interval

Program 210 Values (Enter a Check to turn “ON”)
05

ABR
Retry
Count

Prime
DN

Program 208 Values
01

All
Page
Grp

Program 516 Values
All
Emerg
Page

01 Speed
Dial Bin

02 Number

03 Name

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Station

ISDN BRI Station Record Sheets
Primary DN: _____________________
01 Equipment

Day 1

14 56Kbps Unrestricted

25 Network COS

Day 2

15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted

26 Additional DN2

03 ISDN Protocol

Day 3

16 B Channel Selection

27 Additional DN3

04 Type Connection

Day 1

17 Idle B Ch Selection

28 Additional DN4

Day 2

18 Interdigit Timer 1

29 Additional DN5

Day 3

19 Interdigit Timer 2

30 Additional DN6

02 ISDN Ch Grp

Day 1
05 COS

06 DRL

07 FRL

09 QPL

Day 2
Day 3

08 LCR Group

20 CESID

31 Additional DN7

Day 1

10 Speech Capability

21 Voice Calls Allowed

32 Additional DN8

Day 2

11 3.1 KHz Audio

22 Svc Tone Permission

33 Auto OCA

Day 3

12 7 KHz Audio

23 TGAC Override

13 64Kbps Unrestricted

24 Ch Sys Speed

Primary DN: _____________________
01 Equipment

Day 1

14 56Kbps Unrestricted

25 Network COS

Day 2

15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted

26 Additional DN2

03 ISDN Protocol

Day 3

16 B Channel Selection

27 Additional DN3

04 Type Connection

Day 1

17 Idle B Ch Selection

28 Additional DN4

Day 2

18 Interdigit Timer 1

29 Additional DN5

Day 3

19 Interdigit Timer 2

30 Additional DN6

02 ISDN Ch Grp

Day 1
05 COS

06 DRL

07 FRL

09 QPL

Day 2
Day 3

08 LCR Group

20 CESID

31 Additional DN7

Day 1

10 Speech Capability

21 Voice Calls Allowed

32 Additional DN8

Day 2

11 3.1 KHz Audio

22 Svc Tone Permission

33 Auto OCA

Day 3

12 7 KHz Audio

23 TGAC Override

13 64Kbps Unrestricted

24 Ch Sys Speed

Primary DN: _____________________
01 Equipment

Day 1

14 56Kbps Unrestricted

25 Network COS

Day 2

15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted

26 Additional DN2

03 ISDN Protocol

Day 3

16 B Channel Selection

27 Additional DN3

04 Type Connection

Day 1

17 Idle B Ch Selection

28 Additional DN4

Day 2

18 Interdigit Timer 1

29 Additional DN5

Day 3

19 Interdigit Timer 2

30 Additional DN6

02 ISDN Ch Grp

Day 1
05 COS

06 DRL

07 FRL

09 QPL

Day 2
Day 3

08 LCR Group

20 CESID

31 Additional DN7

Day 1

10 Speech Capability

21 Voice Calls Allowed

32 Additional DN8

Day 2

11 3.1 KHz Audio

22 Svc Tone Permission

33 Auto OCA

Day 3

12 7 KHz Audio

23 TGAC Override

13 64Kbps Unrestricted

24 Ch Sys Speed

Primary DN: _____________________
01 Equipment

Day 1

14 56Kbps Unrestricted

25 Network COS

Day 2

15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted

26 Additional DN2

03 ISDN Protocol

Day 3

16 B Channel Selection

27 Additional DN3

04 Type Connection

Day 1

17 Idle B Ch Selection

28 Additional DN4

Day 2

18 Interdigit Timer 1

29 Additional DN5

Day 3

19 Interdigit Timer 2

30 Additional DN6

02 ISDN Ch Grp

Day 1
05 COS

06 DRL

Day 2

07 FRL

09 QPL

Day 3

08 LCR Group

20 CESID

31 Additional DN7

Day 1

10 Speech Capability

21 Voice Calls Allowed

32 Additional DN8

Day 2

11 3.1 KHz Audio

22 Svc Tone Permission

33 Auto OCA

Day 3

12 7 KHz Audio

23 TGAC Override

13 64Kbps Unrestricted

24 Ch Sys Speed

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-19

D-20
12 Name Display

09 VMID Code SMDI\DTMF

08 Display DN

07 COS Override

06 Emerg Call Croup

05 Door Phone Override

04 CF Password

03 System CF

02 Dial Method

01 Station Name

Primary DN

Record Sheets

Station

ISDN Station Data Record Sheet

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Trunks

Trunks
ILG Record Sheet
Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type

Day 1

11 DID Digits

20 Send Dial Tone

Day 2

12 Speech/3.1KHz

21 TGAC Override

03 Service Type

Night

13 Delay 1

22 Network COS

04 Private Svc Type

Day 1

Ringing
Timer

14 Delay 2

23 LCR Group

15 Timer 1

24 Change COS Ovr Code

Night

Interdigit
Timer

16 Timer 2

25 Reg Speed Dial Codes

Day 1

17 Auto Camp-on

26 Originator Invoke OCA

Day 2

18 Calling Number ID

27 Senderized Tone Mode

Night

19 Intercept

28 Emergency Call Group

02 Trunk Type

05 GCO Key Number

08 DRL

09 FRL

06 Pooled Key Number
Day 1
07 COS

Day 2

10 QPL

Night

Day 2

Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
Records

02 DNIS Field
Indication

03 B Record for
Incoming Call

04 Abandoned Call
Record Output

05 Display Xsferred
Call Records

Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type

Day 1

11 DID Digits

20 Send Dial Tone

Day 2

12 Speech/3.1KHz

21 TGAC Override

03 Service Type

Night

13 Delay 1

22 Network COS

04 Private Svc Type

Day 1

Ringing
Timer

14 Delay 2

23 LCR Group

15 Timer 1

24 Change COS Ovr Code

Night

Interdigit
Timer

16 Timer 2

25 Reg Speed Dial Codes

Day 1

17 Auto Camp-on

26 Originator Invoke OCA

Day 2

18 Calling Number ID

27 Senderized Tone Mode

Night

19 Intercept

28 Emergency Call Group

02 Trunk Type

05 GCO Key Number

08 DRL

09 FRL

06 Pooled Key Number
Day 1
07 COS

Day 2

10 QPL

Night

Day 2

Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
Records

02 DNIS Field
Indication

03 B Record for
Incoming Call

04 Abandoned Call
Record Output

05 Display Xsferred
Call Records

Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type

Day 1

11 DID Digits

20 Send Dial Tone

Day 2

12 Speech/3.1KHz

21 TGAC Override

03 Service Type

Night

13 Delay 1

22 Network COS

04 Private Svc Type

Day 1

Ringing
Timer

14 Delay 2

23 LCR Group

15 Timer 1

24 Change COS Ovr Code

Night

Interdigit
Timer

16 Timer 2

25 Reg Speed Dial Codes

Day 1

17 Auto Camp-on

26 Originator Invoke OCA

Day 2

18 Calling Number ID

27 Senderized Tone Mode

Night

19 Intercept

28 Emergency Call Group

02 Trunk Type

05 GCO Key Number

08 DRL

09 FRL

06 Pooled Key Number
Day 1
07 COS

Day 2

10 QPL

Night

Day 2

Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
Records

02 DNIS Field
Indication

03 B Record for
Incoming Call

04 Abandoned Call
Record Output

05 Display Xsferred
Call Records

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-21

Record Sheets
Trunks

OLG Record Sheet
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
02 Trunk Type

08 COS

03 Pvt Service Type

Day 1

11 Speech 3.1KHz

Day 2

12 MOH Source

Night

13 Account Code

Day 1

14 DR

Day 2

15 Credit Card Calling

GCO
Number

04 Key 1

Pool
Number

06 Key 1

Night

16 Send CESID

07 Key 2

Day 1

17 QSIG Sending Type

Day 2

18 Network COS

05 Key 2

09 FRL

10 QPL

Night

Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
02 Trunk Type

08 COS

03 Pvt Service Type

Day 1

11 Speech 3.1KHz

Day 2

12 MOH Source

Night

13 Account Code

Day 1

14 DR

Day 2

15 Credit Card Calling

GCO
Number

04 Key 1

Pool
Number

06 Key 1

Night

16 Send CESID

07 Key 2

Day 1

17 QSIG Sending Type

Day 2

18 Network COS

05 Key 2

09 FRL

10 QPL

Night

Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
02 Trunk Type

08 COS

03 Pvt Service Type

Day 1

11 Speech 3.1KHz

Day 2

12 MOH Source

Night

13 Account Code

Day 1

14 DR

Day 2

15 Credit Card Calling

GCO
Number

04 Key 1

Pool
Number

06 Key 1

Night

16 Send CESID

07 Key 2

Day 1

17 QSIG Sending Type

Day 2

18 Network COS

05 Key 2

09 FRL

10 QPL

Night

Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
02 Trunk Type

08 COS

03 Pvt Service Type

Day 1

11 Speech 3.1KHz

Day 2

12 MOH Source

Night

13 Account Code

Day 1

14 DR

Day 2

15 Credit Card Calling

GCO
Number

04 Key 1

Pool
Number

06 Key 1

Night

16 Send CESID

07 Key 2

Day 1

17 QSIG Sending Type

Day 2

18 Network COS

05 Key 2

09 FRL

10 QPL

Night

Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
02 Trunk Type

08 COS

03 Pvt Service Type

Day 1

11 Speech 3.1KHz

Day 2

12 MOH Source

Night

13 Account Code

Day 1

14 DR

Day 2

15 Credit Card Calling

GCO
Number

04 Key 1

Pool
Number

06 Key 1

Night

16 Send CESID

07 Key 2

Day 1

17 QSIG Sending Type

Day 2

18 Network COS

05 Key 2

09 FRL

10 QPL

Night

D-22

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Trunk

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03
12 Hunt Order

11 DTMF
Back Tone

10 External
Rng Repeat

09 Trunk
Name

08 Answer
Supervision

07 Release
Supervision

06 Start
Method

05 Signal

04 Dial Mode

03 OLG

02 ILG

01 Trunk
Equipment
Number

Record Sheets
Trunks

Trunk Assignment Record Sheet

D-23

Record Sheets
Trunks

Caller ID Assignment Record Sheet
Trunk Number

D-24

01 Signal Method

02 Signal Content

03 CLID Equip

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Trunks

DID Assignment Record Sheet
ILG ________________

Audio Destination Type

01 DID Num
02 MOH Source

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination Type

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
ILG ________________

Audio Destination Type

01 DID Num
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS NAME

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination Type

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
ILG ________________

Audio Destination Type

01 DID Num
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS NAME

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination Type

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
ILG ________________

Audio Destination Type

01 DID Num
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS NAME

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination Type

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
ILG ________________

Audio Destination Type

01 DID Num
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS NAME

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination Type

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
ILG ________________

Audio Destination Type

01 DID Num
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS NAME

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination Type

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
ILG ________________

Audio Destination Type

01 DID Num
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS NAME

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination Type

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
ILG ________________

Audio Destination Type

01 DID Num
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS NAME

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination Type

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
Audio Destination Type

01 DID Num
02 MOH Source

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination Type

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

12 DNIS NAME

10 Night
Type

Dest

Record Sheets

ILG ________________

12 DNIS NAME

D-25

Record Sheets
Trunks

DID Intercept Assignment Record Sheet
ILG Number ___________

Audio Destination

01 Type
02 MOH Source

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
ILG Number ___________

Audio Destination

01 Type
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS Name

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
ILG Number ___________

Audio Destination

01 Type
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS Name

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
ILG Number ___________

Audio Destination

01 Type
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS Name

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
ILG Number ___________

Audio Destination

01 Type
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS Name

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
ILG Number ___________

Audio Destination

01 Type
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS Name

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
ILG Number ___________

Audio Destination

01 Type
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS Name

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
ILG Number ___________

Audio Destination

01 Type
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS Name

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
ILG Number ___________

Audio Destination

01 Type
02 MOH Source

12 DNIS Name

05 Day 1
Type

Dest

Data Destination

06 Day 2
Type

Dest

07 Night
Type

Dest

08 Day 1
Type

Dest

09 Day 2
Type

Dest

10 Night
Type

Dest

03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS

D-26

12 DNIS Name

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Trunks

Trunk Timer/DIT Record Sheet
Program 308 Values
Trunk Equip No.

01 Auto
Release

02 Short
Flash

03 Long
Flash

Program 310 Values
04
05
Pause Response

01 Day 1 Destination

02 Day 1 Destination

Type

Destination

03 Night Destination
Type

Destination

04 MOH

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-27

Record Sheets
Trunks

ISDN BRI Record Sheet
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number

07 3.1KHz Audio

12 Outgoing B Channel

17 SPID 2

02 Protocol

08 7KHz

13 B CH Selection

18 T-Wait Timer

03 ILG

09 Unrestricted 64K

14 Initialize Type

19 Voice Calls

04 OLG

10 Unrestricted 56K

15 Initialization Display

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

06 Speech

11 Unrestricted 2x64K

16 SPID 1

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number

07 3.1KHz Audio

12 Outgoing B Channel

17 SPID 2

02 Protocol

08 7KHz

13 B CH Selection

18 T-Wait Timer

03 ILG

09 Unrestricted 64K

14 Initialize Type

19 Voice Calls

04 OLG

10 Unrestricted 56K

15 Initialization Display

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

06 Speech

11 Unrestricted 2x64K

16 SPID 1

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number

07 3.1KHz Audio

12 Outgoing B Channel

17 SPID 2

02 Protocol

08 7KHz

13 B CH Selection

18 T-Wait Timer

03 ILG

09 Unrestricted 64K

14 Initialize Type

19 Voice Calls

04 OLG

10 Unrestricted 56K

15 Initialization Display

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

06 Speech

11 Unrestricted 2x64K

16 SPID 1

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number

07 3.1KHz Audio

12 Outgoing B Channel

17 SPID 2

02 Protocol

08 7KHz

13 B CH Selection

18 T-Wait Timer

03 ILG

09 Unrestricted 64K

14 Initialize Type

19 Voice Calls

04 OLG

10 Unrestricted 56K

15 Initialization Display

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

06 Speech

11 Unrestricted 2x64K

16 SPID 1

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number

07 3.1KHz Audio

12 Outgoing B Channel

17 SPID 2

02 Protocol

08 7KHz

13 B CH Selection

18 T-Wait Timer

03 ILG

09 Unrestricted 64K

14 Initialize Type

19 Voice Calls

04 OLG

10 Unrestricted 56K

15 Initialization Display

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

06 Speech

11 Unrestricted 2x64K

16 SPID 1

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number

07 3.1KHz Audio

12 Outgoing B Channel

17 SPID 2

02 Protocol

08 7KHz

13 B CH Selection

18 T-Wait Timer

03 ILG

09 Unrestricted 64K

14 Initialize Type

19 Voice Calls

04 OLG

10 Unrestricted 56K

15 Initialization Display

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

06 Speech

11 Unrestricted 2x64K

16 SPID 1

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number

07 3.1KHz Audio

12 Outgoing B Channel

17 SPID 2

02 Protocol

08 7KHz

13 B CH Selection

18 T-Wait Timer

03 ILG

09 Unrestricted 64K

14 Initialize Type

19 Voice Calls

04 OLG

10 Unrestricted 56K

15 Initialization Display

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

06 Speech

11 Unrestricted 2x64K

16 SPID 1

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number

07 3.1KHz Audio

12 Outgoing B Channel

17 SPID 2

02 Protocol

08 7KHz

13 B CH Selection

18 T-Wait Timer

03 ILG

09 Unrestricted 64K

14 Initialize Type

19 Voice Calls

04 OLG

10 Unrestricted 56K

15 Initialization Display

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

06 Speech

11 Unrestricted 2x64K

16 SPID 1

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Channel Group: _____________________

D-28

01 Equipment Number

07 3.1KHz Audio

12 Outgoing B Channel

17 SPID 2

02 Protocol

08 7KHz

13 B CH Selection

18 T-Wait Timer

03 ILG

09 Unrestricted 64K

14 Initialize Type

19 Voice Calls

04 OLG

10 Unrestricted 56K

15 Initialization Display

20 Trunk Subscriber 1

06 Speech

11 Unrestricted 2x64K

16 SPID 1

21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Trunks

PRI Trunks Record Sheet
Channel Group: __________________________

Enable/
Disable

Ch
Method

Dis

Enable/
Disable

Slt

Dis

Ch Method
CB CH SB SH

01 RPTU Equip

08 Speech

14 Unrestricted 384K

21 B Ch Select

02 Protocol

09 3.1KHz Audio

15 Unrestricted 1536K

22 T1 Time Slot

03 ILG

10 7KHz Audio

16 Unrestricted 1920K

23 E1 Time Slot

04 OLG

11 Unrestricted 64K

17 Restricted Digital

24 T-Wait Timer

05 Trunk ID Type

12 Unrestricted 56K

18 Video

25 RBT on Incoming

06 Trunk ID

13 Unrestricted 2x64K

19 Multirate Unrest.

26 Network Mode

20 B Ch Sel Method

27 Negotiation Priority

07 D Ch Position

Channel Group: __________________________

Enable/
Disable

Ch
Method

Dis

Enable/
Disable

Slt

Dis

Ch Method
CB CH SB SH

01 RPTU Equip

08 Speech

14 Unrestricted 384K

21 B Ch Select

02 Protocol

09 3.1KHz Audio

15 Unrestricted 1536K

22 T1 Time Slot

03 ILG

10 7KHz Audio

16 Unrestricted 1920K

23 E1 Time Slot

04 OLG

11 Unrestricted 64K

17 Restricted Digital

24 T-Wait Timer

05 Trunk ID Type

12 Unrestricted 56K

18 Video

25 RBT on Incoming

06 Trunk ID

13 Unrestricted 2x64K

19 Multirate Unrest.

26 Network Mode

20 B Ch Sel Method

27 Negotiation Priority

07 D Ch Position

Channel Group: __________________________

Enable/
Disable

Ch
Method

Dis

Enable/
Disable

Slt

Dis

Ch Method
CB CH SB SH

01 RPTU Equip

08 Speech

14 Unrestricted 384K

21 B Ch Select

02 Protocol

09 3.1KHz Audio

15 Unrestricted 1536K

22 T1 Time Slot

03 ILG

10 7KHz Audio

16 Unrestricted 1920K

23 E1 Time Slot

04 OLG

11 Unrestricted 64K

17 Restricted Digital

24 T-Wait Timer

05 Trunk ID Type

12 Unrestricted 56K

18 Video

25 RBT on Incoming

06 Trunk ID

13 Unrestricted 2x64K

19 Multirate Unrest.

26 Network Mode

20 B Ch Sel Method

27 Negotiation Priority

07 D Ch Position

Channel Group: __________________________

Enable/
Disable

Ch
Method

Enable/
Disable

Dis

Slt

Dis

Ch Method
CB CH SB SH

01 RPTU Equip

08 Speech

14 Unrestricted 384K

21 B Ch Select

02 Protocol

09 3.1KHz Audio

15 Unrestricted 1536K

22 T1 Time Slot

03 ILG

10 7KHz Audio

16 Unrestricted 1920K

23 E1 Time Slot

04 OLG

11 Unrestricted 64K

17 Restricted Digital

24 T-Wait Timer

05 Trunk ID Type

12 Unrestricted 56K

18 Video

25 RBT on Incoming

06 Trunk ID

13 Unrestricted 2x64K

19 Multirate Unrest.

26 Network Mode

20 B Ch Sel Method

27 Negotiation Priority

07 D Ch Position

Channel Group: __________________________

Enable/
Disable

Ch
Method

Enable/
Disable

Dis

Slt

Dis

Ch Method
CB CH SB SH

01 RPTU Equip

08 Speech

14 Unrestricted 384K

21 B Ch Select

02 Protocol

09 3.1KHz Audio

15 Unrestricted 1536K

22 T1 Time Slot

03 ILG

10 7KHz Audio

16 Unrestricted 1920K

23 E1 Time Slot

04 OLG

11 Unrestricted 64K

17 Restricted Digital

24 T-Wait Timer

05 Trunk ID Type

12 Unrestricted 56K

18 Video

25 RBT on Incoming

06 Trunk ID

13 Unrestricted 2x64K

19 Multirate Unrest.

26 Network Mode

20 B Ch Sel Method

27 Negotiation Priority

07 D Ch Position

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-29

Record Sheets
Trunks

Call-by-Call Record Sheet
Program 323 Values
Ch Group

D-30

01 Index

02 Type
of
Service

03 Fac
Code

04 Service
Param

05 Network
ID

Program 324 Values
Zone 1

06 ILG

07 OLG

08
Min

09
Max

Zone 2
10
Min

11
Max

Zone 3
12
Min

13
Max

Start
Zone
1

Start
Zone
2

Start
Zone
3

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Trunks

B Channel Select Record Sheet
Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch
02 B Ch
03 B Ch
04 B Ch
05 B Ch
06 B Ch
07 B Ch
08 B Ch
09 B Ch
10 B Ch
11 B Ch
12 B Ch
13 B Ch
14 B Ch
15 B Ch
16 B Ch
17 B Ch
18 B Ch
19 B Ch
20 B Ch
21 B Ch
22 B Ch
23 B Ch

Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch
02 B Ch
03 B Ch
04 B Ch
05 B Ch
06 B Ch
07 B Ch
08 B Ch
09 B Ch
10 B Ch
11 B Ch
12 B Ch
13 B Ch
14 B Ch
15 B Ch
16 B Ch
17 B Ch
18 B Ch
19 B Ch
20 B Ch
21 B Ch
22 B Ch
23 B Ch

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets

D-31

Record Sheets
Trunks

Shared D Channel Record Sheet
Ch Group

D-32

01 Equipment
Number

02 Trunk ID

03 D Ch Provided

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Trunks

Calling Number Record Sheets
Program 321 Values
OLG Number

01 Default
Number

02 Number
Prefix

Program 322 Values
03 Number
Verification

04 Default
Number 2

01 Destination
Type

02 Destination

03 DID
Number

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-33

Record Sheets
Attendant

Attendant
Attendant Group Record Sheet

D-34

ILG4

ILG3

ILG1

ICI10
ILG4

ILG3

ILG2

ILG1

ICI9
ILG4

ILG3

ILG2

ILG1

ILG4

ILG3

ILG1

ICI8

05 Voice Mail ID

ILG2

04 Group Overflow Destination

ICI7
ILG4

ILG3

ILG2

ILG1

ICI6
ILG4

ILG3

ILG2

ILG1

ICI5
ILG4

ILG3

ILG1

ILG4

ILG3

ILG2

ILG1

ICI4

03 Overflow Time

ILG2

02 Alternate Destination

ICI3
ILG4

ILG3

ILG2

ILG1

ICI2
ILG4

ILG3

ILG2

ILG1

ICI1

01 Call Dist Method

ILG2

00 Attendant Group
Member

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
IP Telephone Programming

IP Telephone Programming
System IP Data Assignment
Service Name

Values

Service Name

01 Automatic Assignment of Station ID

02 Terminal Authentication

03 Diffserv

04 TOS Field Type

05 TOS Precedence Type

TOS Delay Type

TOS Throughput Type

TOS Reliability Type

06 DSCP

07 IEEE802.1p

08 IEEE802.1p Configuration

09 IP-CTX Identifier

10 Tail Length of Echo Canceller

11 BIPU/IPT VQ Mode

Values

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-35

Record Sheets
IP Telephone Programming

Station IP Data Assignment
Service Name

Values

Prime DN
01 Station ID
02 Station IP Address Type
03 Station IP Address
04 Automatic assignment of Station ID
05 Station Terminal Authentication Mode
06 Station MAC Address
07 Voice Packet Configuration Table Index
08 Audio Codec
09 Display Software Version Number of IPT

D-36

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

Services
Pilot DN Assignment Record Sheet
Pilot DN

After Shift
01 Type

02 Destination

03 Voice Mail ID

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-37

Record Sheets
Services

System Voice Mail Record Sheet

D-38

System Name:________________

System Type:__________________ Date:_______________________

01 VM ID to DID/DNIS
02 Cancellation Method
03 Message Desk No.
04 CLASS Output
05 Calling Number Digits
06 Blank Digits

07 Auto Cancel
08 DTMF Duration
09 LCD Control of VM
10 Central VM Callback
11 CF All Call Record
12 CF Busy Record

13 CF No Answer Record
14 Direct Call
15 Retrieve Messages
16 Voice Mail DN
17 Length of VMID

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

Voice Mail Port Data Record Sheet
00 VM Port DNs

01 Control
Method

02 Send A/D
Tone

03 Send B
Tone

04 End-to-end

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-39

Record Sheets
Services

Routing Definition Record Sheets
Program 524 Values
00 Route Choice Table

01 Rte 1 02 Rte 2 03 Rte 3 04 Rte 4 05 Rte 5 06 Rte 6

Program 525 Values
00 Route
Definition

01 OLG
Number

02 Digit Mod
Index

Program 526 Values
00 Digit Mod
Index

D-40

01 Delete
Digits

02 Add
Leading
Digits

03 Add
Trailing Digits

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

Route Schedule Record Sheets
Program 528 Values
Mon

Tues

Wed

Thur

Fri

Sat

Sun

Program 523 Values
LCR Group 1
Day Type
T1

Day Type
T3

Rte Choice
Day Type
T2

Rte Choice

LCR Group 15
Day Type

LCR Group 8
Day Type

Rte Choice

LCR Group 14
Day Type

LCR Group 7
Day Type

Rte Choice

LCR Group 13
Day Type

LCR Group 6
Day Type

Rte Choice

LCR Group 12
Day Type

LCR Group 5
Day Type

Rte Choice

LCR Group 11
Day Type

LCR Group 4
Day Type

Rte Choice

LCR Group 10
Day Type

LCR Group 3
Day Type

Rte Choice

LCR Group 9
T1

LCR Group 2

LCR Group 16
Day Type

Rte Choice

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-41

Record Sheets
Services

LCR Assignment Record Sheets
Program 520 Values
01 Local Area Code
02 Local Route Plane

Program 521 Values
00 Analysis Digits
01 Route Plan Number
Program 522 Values

00 Exception Digits
01 Exception Table

D-42

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

LCR Time Zone Record Sheets
00 Holiday
Date
Desc

00 Route
Plan

01 Day
Type

Program 527 Values
00 Holiday
00 Holiday
Date
Desc
Date
Desc

02 Time
Zone

Program 529 Values
03 Start 00 Route
Time
Plan

01 Day
Type

00 Holiday
Date
Desc

02 Time
Zone

03 Start
Time

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-43

Record Sheets
Services

DR LCR Screening Record Sheet
Program 530 Values
00 Screening
Dial String

01 Add String
Add

Delete

02 DR
Action

03 LCR
Action

04 Digit Mod
Action

05 Skip
Length

Program 531
00 OLG

D-44

01 Behind Centrex
Access Code

02 Code
Add

Del

03 DR Action
for Centrex

04 Skip Length

05 Pause
Length

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

DR Record Sheets
Program 532 Values
00 DRL

Program 533 Values

01 Type
Allow

Deny

01 Dial
String

02 Action
Add

Delete

Program 534 Values
01 DRE
Table

02 Action
Add

Delete

Program 111 Values
DRL Number

Credit Card Calling
Enable

Disable

DRL Number

Credit Card Calling
Enable

Disable

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-45

Record Sheets
Services

COS Override Code Record Sheet
00 COS
Override

01 COS
Override
Code

02 Set
COS

03 Set
DRL

04 Set
FRL

05 Set
QPL

06 Network COS

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

D-46

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

Node ID Assignment Record Sheet
01 Primary
03 Node ID 2 04 Node ID 3 05 Node ID 4
Node ID
Local
Nodes
Overlap
Codes

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-47

Record Sheets
Services

Private Routing Plan Analysis Table Record Sheet
00 Node ID

D-48

01 Route
Choice
Table

00 Node ID

01 Route
Choice
Table

00 Node ID

01 Route
Choice
Table

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

Route Choice Definition Record Sheet
Program 653 Values
00 Route
Choice Table

Program 654 Values

Route Definition Tables
01

00 Route
Definition

02 Digit
01 OLG
Mod

Program 655 Values
00 Digit
Mod Table

01 Delete
Digits

02 Insert Digits

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-49

Record Sheets
Services

Network Mapping Record Sheets
Program 657 Values
Network Local
COS
COS

D-50

02
03
04 COS 05 TGAC
OCA Sys SD Override Override

Program 658
Values
Table Type:
_______
DRL1
DRL2
DRL3
DRL4
DRL5
DRL6
DRL7
DRL8
DRL9
DRL10
DRL11
DRL12
DRL13
DRL14
DRL15
DRL16

Program 659
Values
Table Type:
_______
FRL1
FRL2
FRL3
FRL4
FRL5
FRL6
FRL7
FRL8
FRL9
FRL10
FRL11
FRL12
FRL13
FRL14
FRL15
FRL16

Program 660
Values
Table Type:
_______
QPL1
QPL2
QPL3
QPL4
QPL5
QPL6
QPL7
QPL8
QPL9
QPL10
QPL11
QPL12
QPL13
QPL14
QPL15
QPL16

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

Call History Record Sheet
Circuit Type

01 PDN

Circuit Type

01 PDN

Circuit Type

01 PDN

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-51

Record Sheets
Services

Behind Centrex Assignment Record Sheet
00 OLG Number

D-52

01 Behind 02 Assume
Centrex
9

03 Pause
Timer

00 OLG Number

01 Behind 02 Assume
Centrex
9

03 Pause
Timer

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

Door Phone Assignment Record Sheet
Program 507 Values
06 Day 1
00 Door Phone 01 DDCB 02 Tenant 04 Ring 05 LCD
Number
Equipment Number Duration Name Dest
Num

Program 576 Values
07 Day 2
Dest

Num

08 Night
Dest

Num

00 Tenant
Number

01 Page
Group

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Program 508 Values
00 Door
Lock

01
02 BIOU 03 DDCB
Interface Relay
Equip

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-53

Record Sheets
Services

Paging Device Group Assignment Record Sheet
00 Zone
Relay

Paging Groups (Enter Check to turn On)
01

17 Include in All
Paging Group

18 All Emerg
Page Group

19 Ext Generic
Relay Number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

D-54

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Record Sheets
Services

Emergency Call Group Assignment Record Sheet
00 E-Call
Group

OLG Number
01

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Record Sheets

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

D-55

Record Sheets
Services

D-56

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Software and Firmware
Updates

Software and Firmware Updates

IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures
These procedures provide the steps for updating IP telephones and BIPU firmware. The procedures apply
to IPT1020-SD telephones and BIPU-M interface PCBs. Use CTX WinAdmin version 2.1D or above to
perform updates. Before you start the update procedure, store the update files on a File Transfer Protocol
(FTP) server. The FTP server can be:
• CTX SmartMedia card
• WinAdmin PC using Windows virtual ftp
• An External Server (required if IP telephones are not in the same network domain (subnet) as the BIPU
interface)
The methods below are written based on CTX WinAdmin 2.1F.03. Screens may vary if you have
WinAdmin 2.1D. To perform an update you can use one of the following methods:
Important!

Download the appropriate DIPXXXX and BIPUXXX IP firmware update files from TSD
FYI, click Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems) > CTX IP Firmware.

Method 1: Update from CTX SmartMedia Card
Prerequisites
1. Requires a WinAdmin PC and CTX SmartMedia card for BIPU and IPT program updates.
2. Do not connect the WinAdmin PC directly to the Strata CTX processor network jack (see Figure E-3).
3. All connections must be through the network (see Figure E-3).
4. The BIPU must have the same subnet address as the Strata CTX and CTX WinAdmin – both must be in
the same domain.
CAUTION!

Do not unplug BIPU, press the BIPU reset button, or turn off the CTX power during
the BIPU program update process. Any of these operations will damage the BIPU
kernel software and require the BIPU software restoration process to enable the BIPU
to function. Restoration can only be done at a Toshiba TSD repair facility.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

E-1

Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

WinAdmin Menu
IP Telephone:

CTX Smart Media Card
Program (directory):

BIPU Program update
IPT Program update

WinAdmin PC

BIPUXXX (file)
DIPXXXX (file)

CTX Processor

BIPU

IPT
1

IPT
16

IP Network-WAN, LAN, VPN, Internet server, VPN Router or Switch Box etc. (not a HUB)
6784

Figure 3

FTP Server (SmartMedia card) Network Connection

BIPU Update
Important!

Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-1 before you do the following.

➤ From the WinAdmin PC or External SmartMedia read\write device

1. “Force format” a SmartMedia card using WinAdmin.
2. Copy the BIPUXXX update file under the SM card PROGRAM folder (XXX is the BIPU firmware
version level).
Note The firmware update files can be obtained from TSD FYI, click Technical Services > Software
(Strata Systems) > CTX IP Firmware.
➤ To perform the BIPU update from the WinAdmin PC

1. Select Operations > SmartMedia to Make sure the BIPUXXX file is stored on the SM card under the
PROGRAM directory.
Important!

The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).

2. Select IP Telephone > BIPU Program Update, then select the BIPU card slot.
Note Only BIPU-M can be updated. Only BIPU-M card slots will be shown with WinAdmin 2.1F or
higher. The BIPU type selection is not required.
3. Select CTX Internal (SmartMedia) radio button.
An ftp Name and Password is inserted automatically. The IP address of the CTX processor
(SmartMedia card) is also inserted automatically.
4. Data Directory box will be “PROGRAM”.
5. From File Name drop down box select “BIPUXXX”.
6. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes

It could take 1 to 5 minutes to update the BIPU
If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
7. After the update is complete, select BIPU Configuration, and check the BIUP version numbers to verify
they have been updated properly.
●

●

E-2

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

8. Press the BIPU reset button for proper initialization.

IP Telephone Update
Important!

Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-1 before you do the following.

➤ From the WinAdmin PC or External SmartMedia read\write device

1. Store the update files on the SM card.
2. “Force format” a SmartMedia card using WinAdmin
3. Copy the DIPXXXX update file under the SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder (XXXX is the IP
Telephone firmware version level).
➤ From the WinAdmin PC perform the update

1. Select Operations > SmartMedia. Check that the DIPXXXX file is stored on the SM card under the
PROGRAM directory.
Important!

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).

Select IP Telephone > IPT Program Update. Select the IPT PDN to be updated.
Select CTX Internal (SmartMedia) radio button.
An ftp Name and Password is inserted automatically.
The IP address of the CTX processor (SM card) is inserted automatically.
Data Directory box will be: PROGRAM
From File Name drop down box select: DIPXXXX
Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.

Notes

It could take 30 seconds to 2 minutes to update the IP telephone.
If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
9. Select IP telephone > Station Data, check the IPT version number to verify that all IPTs have been
updated properly.
●

●

➤ To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IP telephone

1. Simultaneously press +ROG buttons on the IP Telephone.
2. At the SELECT = prompt, press then press +ROG.
3. At the Select function key prompt, press )%, the IP telephone will be displayed.
Notes
●

●

The WinAdmin PC cannot be connected directly to the CTX processor network jack.
All connections must be through the network.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

E-3

Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

Method 2: Update From a FTP Directory on the
WinAdmin PC
Prerequisites
1. Install the “File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service” component under “Internet Information Services” on
the WinAdmin PC. This is not installed by default when installing IIS in Windows XP or 2000. See “To
create a Virtual FTP directory on the WinAdmin PC” below.
2. Create an FTP virtual directory and path to C:\CTX\WinAdmin\CTXIPUPDATE. The drive letter must
be the drive on which WinAdmin is installed. This can be done automatically by running the
“CreateFTPVdir” executable file provided by Toshiba. See “To create a Virtual FTP directory on the
WinAdmin PC” below.
➤ To create a Virtual FTP directory on the WinAdmin PC

Setup the Virtual FTP server function on the WinAdmin PC for IP Updates. These procedures were written
using Microsoft Windows XP, there may be some variance when using Windows 2000.
1. Install the MS Windows component FTP on your PC.
Using the Windows XP or 2000 professional installation CR-ROM, install the FTP Service on the
WinAdmin PC.
To verify FTP Service is installed, it should be located under: Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Internet Information Services (IIS).
2. Go to CTXIpScripts and run "CreateFTPdir". This creates a virtual directory.
To get the “CreateFTPVdir” file go to C:\ctx\WinAdmin\CTXIpScripts.
➤ Download the IP Firmware files and store them on the WinAdmin PC

1. Download the appropriate DIPXXXX and BIPUXXX firmware update files from TSD FYI, click
Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems) > CTX IP Firmware.
2. Copy the DIPXXXX and BIPUXXX to the CTXIPUPDATE folder on the WinAdmin PC
(C:\ctx\WinAdmin\CTXIPUPDATE\. These files will be accessed during the IP update processes.
Notes
●

Make sure the WinAdmin PC is not connected directly to the CTX processor network jack (see the
figure below).
Make all connections through the network (see the figure below).

●

Make sure the IP Telephones have the same subnet address as the CTX and WinAdmin - both must be
in the same domain.

CAUTION!

E-4

Do not unplug BIPU, press the BIPU reset button or turn off the CTX power during the
BIPU program update process. Any of these operations will damage the BIPU kernel
software and require the BIPU software restoration process to allow the BIPU to
function.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

WinAdmin Menu
IP Telephone:
BIPU Program update

WinAdmin PC
C:\CTX\WinAdmin\
CTXIPUPDATE (directory):

BIPUXXX (file)
IPT Program update

DIPXXXX (file)

WinAdmin PC

CTX
Processor

BIPU

IPT
1

IPT
16

IP Network-WAN, LAN, VPN, Internet server, VPN Router or Switch Box etc. (not a HUB)
6785

Figure 4

FTP Server (WinAdmin PC) Network Connection

BIPU Update
Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-4 before you do the following.
➤ Copy the BIPUXXX file into the WinAdmin PC CTXIPUPDATE directory.
Important!
Notes
●

●

The directory location should be C:\Ctx\W inAdmin\CTXIPUPDATE. The drive letter must be
the drive on which WinAdmin is installed.
(XXX in the BIPU file name is the BIPU firmware version level).

➤ From the WinAdmin PC perform the BIPU update

The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).
1. Select IP Telephone > BIPU Program Update.
2. Select the BIPU card slot(s).
Note Only BIPU-M can be updated. Only BIPU-M card slots will be shown with WinAdmin 2.1F or
higher. The BIPU type selection is not required.
3. Select Local WinAdmin (radio button)
4. Enter the Windows User login Name and Password.
Note If in doubt, create a new Window logon User Name and password and use it in Step 5.
5. The IP address of the WinAdmin PC is inserted automatically.
6. Select to update BIPUs one at a time or simultaneously.
7. Data Directory will be: CTXIPUPDATE
8. From File Name drop down box select: BIPUXXX
9. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Important!

Notes

It could take 1 to 5 minutes to update the BIPU
If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
10. After the update is complete, select IP Telephone > BIPU Configuration. Check the BIUP version
numbers to verify they have been updated properly.
●

●

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

E-5

Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

11. Press the BIPU reset button for proper initialization.

IP Telephone Update
Important!

Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-4 before you do the following.

➤ Copy the DIPXXXX file into the WinAdmin PC CTXIPUPDATE directory.
Notes
●

●

The directory location should be C:\Ctx\W inAdmin\CTXIPUPDATE The drive letter must be
the drive on which WinAdmin is installed.
(XXXX in the DIP file name is the firmware version level of the IP telephone).

➤ From the WinAdmin PC perform the update
Important!

The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).

1. Select IP Telephone > IPT Program Update.
2. Select the IPT PDN(s) to be updated.
3. Select Local WinAdmin (radio button).
4. Enter the Windows user login Name and Password.
Note If in doubt, create a new Window logon User Name and password and use it in Step 6.

5.
6.
7.
8.

The IP address of the WinAdmin PC is inserted automatically.
Data Directory will be: CTXIPUPDATE
From File Name drop down box select: DIPUXXX
Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.

Notes

It could take 30 seconds to 2 minutes to update the IP telephone
If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.
9. Select IP telephone > Station Data. Check the IPT version number to verify that all IPTs have been
updated properly.
10. To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IP telephone.
• Simultaneously press the +ROG buttons on the IP Telephone.
• At the SELECT = prompt, press then press +ROG.
• At the Select function key prompt, press )%, the IP telephone will be displayed.
• To exit this mode, go off and on hook.
●

●

Notes
●

●

E-6

The WinAdmin PC cannot be connected directly to the CTX processor network jack.
All connections must be through the network.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

Method 3: Update from an External FTP Server
Prerequisites
1. An FTP server must be connected on the same network domain as the IP telephones. The WinAdmin
PC, CTX processor and BIPU must be in the same domain but it does not have to be the domain that
supports the IP telephones and FTP server.
2. The WinAdmin PC cannot be connected directly to the CTX processor network jack. All connections
must be through the network (see Figure E-5 below).
CAUTION!

WinAdmin Menu
IP Telephone:

External ftp server PC
CTXIPUPDATE (directory):

BIPU Program update
BIPUXXX (file)
IPT Program update

WinAdmin PC

CTX
Processor

DIPXXXX (file)

BIPU

Domain A: CTX Network-WAN, LAN, VPN,
Internet server, VPN Router or Switch Box etc.
(not a HUB).

IPT
1

IPT
16

Domain B: IP Network-WAN, LAN, VPN,
Internet server, VPN Router or Switch Box etc.
(not a HUB).
6786

Figure 5

FTP Server (External Server) Network Connection

Note The WinAdmin PC cannot be connected directly to the CTX processor network jack - all

connections must be through the network.

BIPU Update
Important!

Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-7 before you do the following.

➤ Store the IP update files on the external ftp sever

1. Create an ftp directory and name it CTXIPUPDATE.
2. Copy the BIPUXXX update files to CTXIPUPDATE directory (XXX is the BIPU firmware version
level).

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

E-7

Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

➤ From the WinAdmin PC perform the BIPU update
Important!

The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).

1. Select IP Telephone > BIPU Program Update.
2. Select the BIPU card slot and BIPU-M card type.
Note Only BIPU-M can be updated. Only BIPU-M card slots will be shown with WinAdmin 2.1F or

higher. The BIPU type selection is not required.
3. Select Other (radio button).
4. Enter the ftp user login Name and Password.
5. Enter the IP address external ftp server.
6. From Data Directory box enter: CTXIPUPDATE
7. From File Name box enter: BIPUXXX
8. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
●

It could take 1 to 5 minutes to update the BIPU

●

If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.

9. After the update is complete, select IP Telephone > BIPU Configuration. Check the BIUP version
numbers to verify they have been updated properly.
10. Press the BIPU reset button for proper initialization.

IP Telephone Update
Important!

Complete all “Prerequisites” on page E-7 before you do the following.

➤ Store the IP update files on the external ftp sever

1. Create an ftp directory and name it CTXIPUPDATE
2. Copy the DIPUXXXX update files to CTXIPUPDATE directory (XXX is the BIPU firmware version
level).
➤ From the WinAdmin PC perform the update
Important!

The BIPUs and IPTs will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return to
the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the Update was
started).

1. Select IP Telephone > IPT Program Update.
2. Select the IP PDN to be updated.
3. Select Other (radio button)
4. Enter the external server ftp user login Name and Password.
5. Enter the IP address external ftp server.
6. From Data Directory box enter: CTXIPUPDATE

E-8

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

7. From File Name box enter: DIPXXXX
8. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
●

It could take 1 to 5 minutes to update the BIPU

●

If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations etc. and try again.

9. After the update is complete, select IP Telephone > IP Telephone Data. Select the IP telephone Prime
DN to check that the firmware version level has been updated properly.
➤ To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IP telephone

1. Simultaneously press the +ROG buttons on the IP Telephone.
2. At the SELECT = prompt, press then press +ROG
3. At the Select function key prompt, press )%, the IP telephone will be displayed.
4. To exit this mode, go off and on hook.

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

E-9

Software and Firmware Updates
IP Telephone/BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

E-10

Strata CTX Programming - Part 4: Appendices 11/03

Index

100 series programs,
200 series programs,
300 series programs,
400 series programs,
500 series programs,
600 series programs,
900 series programs,

13-11
13-28
13-52
13-73
13-74
13-91
13-96

A
account code digit length, 13-88
account codes, 9-35
ADM feature keys, 13-46
advisory message default code table, 4-33
attendant, 5-17
attendant group assignment, 13-73

B
B channel, 13-69
backup, 14-1
behind connection assignment, 13-91
BIOU, 2-2
BIPU program update, 8-9
BIPU update, E-2, E-5, E-7
button programming examples, 13-5
program 100, 13-5
program 200, 13-5
program 204, 13-6
program 205, 13-6
program 208, 13-6
button sequence, 13-7

C
call control, 5-17
call forward, 5-17, 13-13
no answer timer, 4-10
override, 4-8, 13-15
call pickup, 5-17, 5-30, 13-14
call transfer with camp-on, 13-15

Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03

called number table, 13-70
caller history, 13-88
caller ID, 6-8
caller ID assignment, 13-62
card slot assignment, 13-11
CBC table, 13-71
CBC time zones, 13-72
Centrex/PBX screening table view, 9-34
class of service, 13-15
CO line, 2-3, 5-17
CO lines sub-parameters, 5-20
communicating with Strata CTX, 3-14
community name, 10-17
component status/control, 11-7
copy, 5-16
COS override assignment, 13-79
country code, 13-98
credit card calling, 9-12
cross copy, 5-16, 5-18
CTX processor NIC interface TCP/IP, 2-8
CTX release level, 13-98
CTX SmartMedia directories, 10-6
CTX WinAdmin
application software, 2-3
auto-programming to start-up, 2-1
command table link, 2-5
communicating with Strata CTX, 3-14
internet access, 2-1
LAN network, 3-5
planning, 2-9
program for first time, 2-9
system requirements, 2-9
toolbar, 2-4

Index

Numerics

D
D channel, 13-64
data backup, 14-1
data initialize, 13-25
data initialize programs, 4-34

IN-1

Index
E~I

date adjust code, 4-6, 13-14
day of week mapping, 13-21
day/night mode, 13-21, 13-24
default feature access codes, 2-9
destination restriction, 9-32, 9-34
destination restriction level, 13-24
destination restriction overview, 9-6
destination restriction/least cost routing, 9-6
device table, 4-29
dial number plan, 4-2
DID, 6-13
intercept assignment, 13-67
DID/DNIS table view, 6-21
digit manipulation, 9-41
direct inward dialing, 13-59
directory number, 5-17
directory number sub-parameters, 5-19
DISA codes, 13-15
DISA security codes, 13-62
distinctive ringing, 5-16
DIT, 6-11
DIT assignment, 13-61
DKT
feature keys., 13-38
DKT parameters, 13-34
DN, 13-34, 13-51
DND
local activation, 13-13
local cancellation, 13-13
remote activation, 13-13
remote cancellation, 13-13
DND override, 13-15
DNIS VMID code, 13-61
door lock, 5-17
door lock control assignment, 13-78
door phone
delete, 13-88
night ring over external page, 13-88
door phone assignment, 13-76
DR
LCR screening table assignment, 13-85
level table assignment, 13-86
screening table for OLG, 13-86
table allow/deny definition, 13-86
DR guide page, 9-10
DR Class of Service Setup, 9-12
DR Dialing Setup, 9-10
DR Digit Table Setup, 9-12
DR override by system speed dial, 13-78
DRL exception table assignment, 13-87

IN-2

DRL table view, 9-34
DSS
console assignment, 13-48
feature keys, 13-48
DTMF version, 13-98

E
emergency call destination assignment, 7-3, 13-73
emergency ringdown, 13-50
enhanced 911 emergency call group, 13-87
error alarm log, 11-5
error codes, B-1
error log, 11-2
event trace control, 11-3
event trace side change, 13-102
exception numbers for forced account codes, 13-88
extended list, 5-6
external devices, 9-68

F
FB00 parameters, 13-7
feature button pattern assignments
10 button table, 5-12, 13-38
14 button table, 5-13, 13-38
20 button table, 5-12, 13-37
feature/button code sub-parameter assignments, 13-40
file information, 10-16
flexible access codes, 4-3
flexible access plan, 13-12
flexible button assignment feature code table, 13-41
flexible numbering default settings, 4-4
flexible numbering plan default settings table, 13-12
FTP external, 8-10
FTP user accounts, 10-15

G
group call pickup, 13-46

H
hardware
requirements, 3-1
hunt group, 5-25
hunt group table view, 5-27

I
I/O device, 4-28
ILG Delete, 13-57
incoming line group assignment, 13-55
initial setup, 2-1, 2-9
installed equipment ID, 13-99

Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03

Index
L~P

L
LCR
exception number route plans, 13-83
holiday table assignment, 13-84
local route plan assignment, 13-82
public day of week mapping table, 13-85
route definition assignment, 13-84
route plan digit analysis assignment, 13-83
route plan schedule assignment, 13-83
route plan time zone assignment, 13-85
LCR assignment, 9-23
LCR guide page, 9-16
LCR Dialing Setup, 9-17
LCR Route Plan Setup, 9-18
LCR time zones, 9-29
LCR/DR screening, 9-30
license control, 10-20
license information, 10-21
local update, 14-2, 14-4

M
MAC address, 13-105
maintenance, 11-1, 14-1
error alarm log, 11-5
error log, 11-2
start/stop/store trace date, 11-2
system admin log, 11-6
make busy control, 13-107
mapping, 9-58
memory access operation, 11-6
modified digits table assignment, 13-84
multiple call group, 5-31~5-32

Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03

multiple call groups, 5-32
music on hold, 4-26, 13-23

N
network COS mapping table assignment, 13-93
network directory number, 9-40
network DN table assignment, 9-59, 13-93
network DRL mapping tables, 13-93
network feature access code, 9-40
network jack LAN device assignments, 13-94
networking, 9-39
call record and soft keys, A-3
centralized attendant, 9-43
centralized voice mail, 9-43
configuration, 9-53
multiple voice mail systems, A-3
node ID, 9-39
node ID assignment, 13-92
numerical program listing, C-15

Index

integration
TPI, A-2
intercept, 6-3
intercept treatment, 13-69
IO logical device assignment, 13-94
IP configuration, 13-110
IP QSIG, 13-53
IP telephone update, E-3, E-6, E-8
IPT program update, 8-11
ISDN
bearer capability, 13-34
BRI station, 13-31
BRI trunk, 13-64
station data, 13-50
trunk delete, 13-55
trunk trace, 13-102
ISDN bearer capability, 5-39

O
off-hook, 13-3
off-hook preference, 13-35
OLG delete, 13-59
one touch, 5-17
one touch button, 5-18
outgoing line group assignment, 13-57
Overview, 2-1

P
PAD
conference table assignment, 13-25
conference value table, 4-24
device number table, 4-23
group device types, 4-24, 13-22
PAD Table, 13-22
paging devices group assignment, 13-75
paging group table view, 5-29
parameter selection record sheet, D-13
park page, 5-17
password assignment, 13-23
PCB codes, 13-12
PDN, 13-40
PDN table view, 5-36
phantom DN, 13-42
PhDN, 13-40
pickup group, 5-30
pickup group table view, 5-30
pilot DN assignment, 13-87
planning, 2-9

IN-3

Index
P~P

private digit modification table assignment, 13-92
private route choice definition, 9-56
private route choice table assignment, 13-91
private route definition table assignment, 13-91
private routing plan analysis table assignment, 13-91
product ID, 13-98
profile, 3-19, 12-2
program listings, 13-7
numerical, C-15
programming parameters, 13-3
programming sub-parameters, 13-4
Programs
100 card slot assignment, 4-1, 13-11
102 flexible access codes, 4-3, 9-17
102 flexible numbering plan, 13-12
103 class of service, 4-8, 9-12, 9-22, 13-15
104 system timers, 4-10, 13-17
105 system data, 4-12, 9-13, 13-18
106 day/night mode of week mapping, 4-20, 13-21
107 PAD table assignment, 4-22, 13-21
108 PAD group assignment, 4-23, 13-22
109 music on hold, 4-26, 13-23
110 password assignment, 4-25, 13-23
111 destination restriction level, 9-12, 9-33, 13-24
112 day/night mode calendar, 4-20, 13-24
113 day/night mode daily schedule, 4-21, 13-24
114 PAD conference table assignment, 4-24,
13-25
115 advisory messages, 4-33
116 data initialize, 4-34, 13-25
117 public dial plan digit analysis, 4-7, 9-11, 9-17,
13-26
120 tenant data assignment, 4-35, 13-27
150 system IP data assignment, 8-1
151 BIPU configuration, 8-4
152 voice packet configuration table
assignment, 8-5
200 station data, 5-1, 9-13, 9-22, 13-28
201 station delete, 13-31
202 ISDN BRI station, 5-36, 13-31
203 change DN, 13-34
204 DKT parameters, 5-7, 13-34
205 DKT feature keys, 5-15, 13-38
206 phantom DN, 5-23, 13-42
207 single touch button data assignments, 13-43
208 station timer assignments, 13-45
209 station hunting groups, 5-25, 13-46
210 group call pickup, 5-30, 13-46
213 ADM feature keys, 5-15, 13-46
214 DSS console assignment, 5-14, 13-48

IN-4

215 DSS feature keys, 5-15, 13-48
216 emergency ringdown assignment, 13-50
217 ISDN station data, 5-40, 13-50
218 station hunt group assignment, 5-26, 13-50
219 network DSS key notify data delete, 13-51
219 network DSS notify data delete
assignment, 9-60
250 station IP data assignment, 8-7
300 trunk assignment, 6-6, 13-52
302 PRI and IP QSIG, 6-25, 13-53
303 ISDN trunk delete, 13-55
304 incoming line group assignment, 6-1~6-2,
13-55
305 ILG number, 13-57
306 outgoing line group, 9-14
306 outgoing line group assignment, 6-4, 8-1,
13-57
307 OLG delete, 13-59
308 trunk timer, 6-9
308 trunk timers, 13-59
309 direct inward dialing, 6-13, 13-59
310 DIT assignment, 6-11, 13-61
311 DISA security codes, 6-19, 13-62
313 caller ID, 6-8
313 caller ID assignment, 13-62
315 T1 trunk card, 6-20, 13-63
316 shared D channel, 6-32, 13-64
317 ISDN BRI trunk, 6-21, 13-64
318 DID intercept assignment, 6-16, 13-67
319 intercept treatment, 6-19, 13-69
320 B channel, 6-31, 13-69
321 calling number identification, 6-33, 13-70
322 called number table, 6-34, 13-70
323 CBC service, 6-29, 13-71
324 CBC time zones, 6-30, 13-72
400 emergency call destination assignment, 7-3,
13-73
404 attendant group assignment, 7-1, 13-73
500 system call forward assignment, 4-15, 13-74
501 system speed dial assignment, 4-18, 13-74
502 terminal paging group assignment, 5-28,
13-74
503 paging devices group assignment, 9-73, 13-75
504 system call forward operation status, 4-16,
13-75
506 verified account codes, 9-36, 13-75
507 door phone assignment, 9-68, 13-76
508 door lock control assignment, 9-70, 13-78
509 DR override by system speed dial, 9-14, 9-37,
13-78

Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03

Index
P~P

Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03

page, 9-70, 13-88
577 caller history, 9-66, 13-88
579 system voice mail data, 9-2, 13-89
580 voice mail port data, 9-4, 13-90
650 behind centrex assignment, 9-11, 9-66, 13-91
651 private routing plan analysis table
assignment, 9-56, 13-91
653 private route choice table assignment, 9-57,
13-91
654 private route definition table
assignment, 9-57, 13-91
655 private digit modification table
assignment, 9-57, 13-92
656 node ID assignment, 9-54, 13-92
657 network COS mapping table
assignment, 9-58, 13-93
658 network DRL mapping table, 9-59
658/659/660 network DRL mapping tables, 9-59,
13-93
661 network DN table assignment, 9-59, 13-93
670 remote node data assignment, 9-55
671 IP address conversion table, 9-61
672 node ID detail information, 9-62
801 network jack LAN device assignments, 4-30,
13-94
803 IO logical device assignment, 13-94
803 SMDR SMDI CTI port assignments, 4-28
804 BSIS RS-232 serial port setup, 4-32, 13-96
900 CTX restart, 10-2
900 system initialize, 13-96
901 display version, 10-3, 13-97
902 set time and date, 10-3, 13-99
903 event trace control, 11-3, 13-99
904 ISDN trace location, 11-4, 13-101
905 all ISDN trunk trace, 13-102
906 event trace side change, 11-4, 13-102
907 system admin log, 11-6, 13-103
908 format/unmount smartmedia, 13-103
908 smart media, 10-4
909 MAC address, 10-18, 13-105
910 data backup, 13-105
911 program update, 10-9, 13-106
911 remote program update, 10-7
912 make busy control, 13-107
913 license issue, 10-20
914 license activate, 10-21
915 regional selection, 10-4, 13-109
916 IP configuration, 10-14, 13-110
BIPU program update, 8-9
IPT program update, 8-11

Index

510 COS override assignment, 9-13, 9-38, 13-79
512 SMDR for system assignment, 9-64, 13-79
513 SMDR for ILG assignment, 9-65, 13-79
514 SMDR for OLG assignment, 9-65, 13-80
515 view BIOU control relay assignment, 9-72,
13-80
516 station speed dial, 5-34, 13-81
517 multiple call group assignment, 5-32
517 multiple calling group index, 13-82
518 multiple calling members assignment, 5-33,
13-82
520 LCR local route plan assignment, 9-23, 13-82
520 LCR local route plan assignments, 9-18
521 LCR route plan digit analysis
assignment, 9-18, 9-24, 13-83
522 LCR exception number route plan, 9-18, 9-24,
13-83
523 LCR route plan schedule assignment, 9-20,
9-27, 13-83
524 route table to route definition
assignment, 9-19, 9-25, 13-84
525 LCR route definition assignment, 9-19, 9-26,
13-84
526 modified digits table assignment, 9-19, 9-26,
13-84
527 LCR holiday table assignment, 9-21, 9-29,
13-84
528 LCR days of the week assignments, 9-21
528 LCR public day of week mapping table, 9-28,
13-85
529 LCR route plan time zone assignment, 9-21,
9-29, 13-85
530 DR LCR screening table assignment, 9-10,
9-17, 9-30, 13-85
531 DR screening table for OLG, 9-11, 9-31, 13-86
532 DR table allow/deny definition, 9-12, 9-32,
13-86
533 DR Level table assignment, 9-12
533 DR level table assignment, 9-32, 13-86
534 DR level exception table assignment, 9-12
534 DRL exception table assignment, 9-33, 13-87
540 pilot DN assignment, 9-1, 13-87
541 pilot DN delete, 13-87
550 enhanced 911 emergency call group, 9-74,
13-87
570 account code digit length, 9-35, 13-88
571 exception numbers for forced account
codes, 9-36, 13-88
573 delete door phone, 13-88
576 door phone night ring over external

IN-5

Index
Q~S

public dial plan digit, 13-26
public holidays, 9-29

Q
QSIG, 6-2, 6-5, 6-28, 9-39, 13-54, 13-58

R
record sheet overview, 13-1
record sheets
attendant group (404), D-34
B channel selection (320), D-31
basic station (200), D-11
behind centrex (550), D-52
BSIS RS-232 serial port setup (804), D-10
call history (577), D-51
call-by-call (323/324), D-30
caller ID assignment (313), D-24
calling number (321/322), D-33
card assignment for Strata CTX100 (100), D-3
card assignment for Strata CTX670 (100), D-1
COS (103), D-4
COS override (510), D-46
day/night mode (112/106/113), D-8
DID assignment (309), D-25
DID intercept assignment (318), D-26
DKT parameters (204), D-12
door phone assignment (507/508/576), D-53
DR (532/533/534/111), D-45
DR/LCR screening (530/531), D-44
E911 emergency call group (550), D-55
feature button (205/213/215), D-13
flexible numbering plan (102), 4-4
hunt group (209/218), D-17
ILG (304/513), D-21
ISDN BRI station (202), D-19
ISDN BRI trunk (317), D-28
ISDN data (217), D-20
LCR assignments (520/521/522), D-42
LCR time zone (527/529), D-43
network mapping (657/658/659/660), D-50
node ID assignment (656), D-47~D-48
paging devices group assignment (503), D-54
phantom DN (206), D-16
pilot DN assignment (540), D-37
PRI trunk (302), D-29
route choice definition (653/654/655), D-49
route definition (524/525/526), D-40
route schedule record sheets (523/528), D-41
shared D channel (316), D-32
SMDR SMDI CTI Port assignments (803), D-9

IN-6

station data (208/210/216/502/516), D-18
system call forward (500/504), D-6
system data (105), D-5
system speed dial (501), D-7
system voice mail (579), D-38
trunk assignment (300), D-23
trunk timer (310), D-27
voice mail port data (580), D-39
regional selection, 13-109
remote program update, 10-7
ring tone, distinct, 5-16
ringing preference, 13-36
route define, 9-25
route schedule, 9-27
route table to route definition assignment, 13-84
RS232C data assignment, 13-96

S
service, 6-19
setup
analog trunk, 2-12
ISDN PRI, 2-13~2-14
station, 2-12
T1 trunk, 2-13
setup wizards
multiple DN assignment, 5-42
PDN range, 5-41
trunk DID/DNIS, 6-35
VMID range, 5-44
single touch button data assignments, 13-43
slot assignment worksheet, D-1
SmartMedia, 8-9
format/unmount, 13-103
restoring data, 13-97
SmartMedia card, 10-4
SMDR, 9-64
for ILG assignment, 13-79
for OLG Assignment, 13-80
SMDR for system assignment, 13-79
software version, 13-98
speed dial, 4-18, 5-34
start/stop/store trace data, 11-2
station
data, 13-28
extended list, 5-6
hunt group assignment, 13-50~13-51
PDN, 2-3
PDN selective copy, 5-6
PDN table view, 5-36
speed dial, 5-34, 13-81

Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03

Index
T~V

T
T1 trunk card, 13-63
table views, 2-6
Centrex/PBX screening table view, 9-34
DID/DNIS, 6-21
DRL table view, 9-34
hunt group table view, 5-27
paging group table view, 5-29
PDN table view, 5-36
pickup group table view, 5-30
station speed dial table view, 5-35
system call forward table view, 4-17
system speed dial table view, 4-19
tables
B channel defaults, 13-70
bearer capability table, 13-66
bearer services table, 13-55
BRI bearer capability of ISDN, 13-34
circuit type code definitions, 13-89
data initialize programs, 13-26
device table, 13-95
feature button patterns
10 button, 13-38
14 button, 13-38
feature/button code sub-parameter
assignments, 13-40
flexible numbering plan default settings, 13-12
numerical program listings

Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03

Strata CTX to Strata DK), C-15
Strata DK to Strata CTX, C-1
PAD conference table, 13-25
PAD group device type examples, 13-22
PAD table, 13-22
telephone button commands
programming sub-parameters, 13-3
telephone button overview, 13-2
telephone button pad record sheets, D-14~D-15
tenant data, 4-35
tenant data assignment, 13-27
terminal paging group, 13-74
time adjust code, 4-6, 13-14
time and date, 13-99
tools and profile, 12-1
download, 12-1
Toshiba proprietary integration, A-2
trace function, 14-8
trace functions, 11-1
transfer with camp, 13-15
trap IP setup, 10-19
traveling class mark, 9-41
trunk
assignment, 13-52
timers, 13-59
trunk timer, 6-9
trunks
PRI, 13-53

Index

speed dial table view, 5-35
timer assignments, 13-45
Strata CTX100 update, 14-2, 14-4
Strata Net
private networking, 9-39
programming overview, 9-53
system
admin log, 13-103
call forward, 4-15
call forward assignment, 13-74
date, 4-4
initialize, 13-96
integration, A-2
parameters, 13-18
speed dial, 4-18, 13-74
speed dial table view, 4-19
time, 4-4
timers, 13-17
voice mail data, 13-89
system call forward
operation status, 13-75

U
unrestricted digital information, 13-34
update
local update, 14-2
program update, 13-105~13-106
remote update, 10-7
Strata CTX100 local update, 14-4
Strata CTX670 local update, 14-6
update methods
CTX SmartMedia card, E-1
external FTP server, E-7
FTP directory, E-4
user management, 3-19, 12-2

V
verified account codes, 13-75
version code, 13-98
view BIOU control relay assignment, 13-80
voice mail, 5-17, A-1
port data, 13-90

IN-7

Index
W~W

W
WinAdmin configuration, 12-2
worksheets
10-button and 20-button telephones, D-14~D-15
parameter selection, D-13
slot assignment, D-1

IN-8

Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/03

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Modify Date                     : 2003:10:30 14:46:50-08:00
Create Date                     : 2003:10:30 09:15:05Z
Page Count                      : 580
Creation Date                   : 2003:10:30 09:15:05Z
Mod Date                        : 2003:10:30 14:46:50-08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author                          : Toshiba DSD
Metadata Date                   : 2003:10:30 14:46:50-08:00
Creator                         : Toshiba DSD
Title                           : Strata CTX Programming Manual
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Strata CTX Programming Manual Ctx100 S 670 Prog

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation